Kaspersky Unified Monitoring and Analysis Platform

Contents

[Topic 251751]

Kaspersky Unified Monitoring and Analysis Platform Help

What's new New features
Software and hardware requirements Hardware and software requirements
Getting started Getting started
PC_08 Managing the KUMA web interface
Additional features Additional features
Licensing Licensing
Technical Support Service Contacting Technical Support
Page top

[Topic 217694]

About Kaspersky Unified Monitoring and Analysis Platform

Kaspersky Unified Monitoring and Analysis Platform (hereinafter KUMA or "program") is an integrated software solution that includes the following set of functions:

  • Receiving, processing, and storing information security events.
  • Analysis and correlation of incoming data.
  • Search within the obtained events.
  • Creation of notifications upon detecting symptoms of information security threats.

The program is built on a microservice architecture. This means that you can create and configure the relevant microservices (hereinafter also "services"), thereby making it possible to use KUMA both as a log management system and as a full-fledged SIEM system. In addition, flexible data streams routing allows you to use third-party services for additional event processing.

In this Help topic

What's new

Distribution kit

Hardware and software requirements

KUMA interface

Compatibility with other applications

Page top

[Topic 220925]

What's new

  • The capability to automatically and manually update the repository is implemented in order to receive packages with new correlation rules and connectors for log sources.
  • The cold storage of events is implemented.
  • To reduce the number of simultaneous insert queries to ClickHouse tables, in version 2.1.3 or later, you can configure buffering of insert queries for the Storage resource.
  • In version 2.1.3 or later, KUMA uses a new driver for connecting to oracle.
  • New connectors are added: SNMP traps, 1C log, 1C xml.
  • Version 2.1.3 introduces numbering of tags for the xml normalizer.
  • Integration with Kaspersky Automated Security Awareness Platform is implemented.
  • A new response type is added: Active Directory response rule.
  • The list of formats for generating reports is expanded. The following formats are now available: HTML, PDF, CSV, split CSV, Excel.
  • RuCERT integration is expanded.
  • The capability is added to create common (universal) dashboard layouts for all tenants and fill them with data on the tenants available to the current user. Thus, the number of layouts used in the system can be significantly reduced, and there is no need to create separate standard layouts for each tenant.
  • The integration with Active Directory Federation Services is added for logging in without a user name and password (Single Sign On (SSO) scenario).
  • The support of the FreeIPA domain is added for logging in the system.
  • Added the capability to receive custom attributes of Active Directory accounts from LDAP and enrich events with the custom attributes of AD accounts.

    Before configuring event enrichment using custom attributes, make sure that custom attributes are configured in AD.

    To enrich events with accounts using custom attributes:

    1. Add Custom AD Account Attributes in the LDAP connection settings.

      Standard imported attributes from AD cannot be added as custom attributes. For example, if you want to add the standard accountExpires

      attribute

      as a custom attribute, KUMA will return an error when saving the connection settings.

      The following account attributes can be requested from Active Directory:

      • accountExpires
      • badPasswordTime
      • cn
      • co
      • company
      • department
      • description
      • displayName
      • distinguishedName
      • division
      • employeeID
      • givenName
      • l
      • lastLogon
      • lastLogonTimestamp
      • Mail
      • mailNickname
      • managedObjects
      • manager
      • memberOf (this attribute can be used for search during correlation)
      • mobile
      • name
      • objectCategory
      • objectGUID (this attribute always requested from Active Directory even if a user doesn't specify it)
      • objectSID
      • physicalDeliveryOfficeName
      • pwdLastSet
      • sAMAccountName
      • sAMAccountType
      • sn
      • streetAddress
      • telephoneNumber
      • title
      • userAccountControl
      • UserPrincipalName
      • whenChanged
      • whenCreated

      After you add custom attributes in the LDAP connection settings, the LDAP attribute to receive drop-down list in the collector automatically includes the new attributes. Custom attributes are identified by a question mark next to the attribute name. If you added the same attribute for multiple domains, the attribute is listed only once in the drop-down list. You can view the domains by moving your cursor over the question mark. Domain names are displayed as links. If you click a link, the domain is automatically added to LDAP accounts mapping if it was not previously added.

      If you deleted a custom attribute in the LDAP connection settings, manually delete the row containing the attribute from the mapping table in the collector. Account attribute information in KUMA is updated each time you import accounts.  

    2. Import accounts.
    3. In the collector, in the LDAP mapping table, define the rules for mapping KUMA fields to LDAP attributes.
    4. Restart the collector.

      After the collector is restarted, KUMA begins enriching events with accounts.

       

  • The capabilities for working with assets are expanded: it is now possible to add custom fields to assets, to search for assets by the field names, and to export search results to a file.
  • In the event search section, event field presets are added allowing you to quickly configure the lookup table columns according to the analyzed logs.
  • System fault tolerance is improved.
  • The information about assets now displays additional information about protecting the hosts running KES for Windows and KES for Linux. The information is available if you've imported the asset from KSC.
  • For KATA/EDR triggering events, a link is added that allows you to go to the corresponding alert card in the KATA/EDR management console.
  • The capability is implemented to use the hex, base64, and base64url conversions to process binary values in logs at the event receiving stage.
  • Correlation capabilities have been expanded:
  • Alert segmentation rules are added.
  • Normalizers for the event sources are added.
  • A new first line analyst role is added. Users with this role are able to create their own content in the system but cannot edit the resources created by other users.
  • System logging and the ability to export application component logs to files are improved.

Page top

[Topic 217846]

Distribution kit

The distribution kit includes the following files:

  • kuma-ansible-installer-<build number>.tar.gz is used to install KUMA components without the capability of deployment in a fault-tolerant configuration.
  • kuma-ansible-installer-ha-<build number>.tar.gz is used to install KUMA components with the capability of deployment in a fault-tolerant configuration.
  • files containing information about the version (release notes) in Russian and English.
Page top

[Topic 217889]

Hardware and software requirements

Recommended hardware requirements

This section lists the hardware requirements for processing a data stream of up to 40,000 events per second (EPS). The KUMA load value depends on the type of events being parsed and the efficiency of the normalizer.

Consider that for event processing efficiency, the CPU core count is more important than the clock rate. For example, eight CPU cores with a medium clock rate can process events more efficiently than four CPU cores with a high clock rate. The following table lists the hardware and software requirements of KUMA components.

Consider also that the amount of RAM utilized by the collector depends on configured enrichment methods (DNS, accounts, assets, enrichment with data from Kaspersky CyberTrace) and whether aggregation is used (RAM consumption is influenced by the data aggregation window setting, the number of fields used for aggregation of data, volume of data in fields being aggregated).

For example, with an event stream of 1,000 EPS and event enrichment disabled (event enrichment is disabled, event aggregation is disabled, 5,000 accounts, 5,000 assets per tenant), one collector requires the following resources:

  • 1 CPU core or 1 virtual CPU
  • 512 MB of RAM
  • 1 GB of disk space (not counting event cache)

For example, to support 5 collectors that do not perform event enrichment, you must allocate the following resources: 5 CPU cores, 2.5 GB of RAM, and 5 GB of free disk space.

 

KUMA Core

Collector

Correlator

Storage

CPU

Intel or AMD with SSE 4.2 support:
at least 4 cores/8 threads or 4 virtual CPUs.

Intel or AMD with SSE 4.2 support:
at least 4 cores/8 threads or 8 virtual CPUs.

Intel or AMD with SSE 4.2 support:
at least 4 cores/8 threads or 8 virtual CPUs.

Intel or AMD with SSE 4.2 support:
at least 12 cores/24 threads or 24 virtual CPUs.

RAM

16 GB

16 GB

16 GB

48 GB

Free disk space

/opt directory size: at least 500 GB.

/opt directory size: at least 500 GB.

/opt directory size: at least 500 GB.

/opt directory size: at least 500 GB.

Operating systems

  • Oracle Linux 8.6, 8.7.
  • Astra Linux Special Edition RUSB.10015-01 (2021-1126SE17 update 1.7.1).
  • Astra Linux Special Edition RUSB.10015-01 (2022-1011SE17MD update 1.7.2.UU.1).
  • Astra Linux Special Edition RUSB.10015-01 (2022-1110SE17 update 1.7.3). Core version 5.15.0.33 or higher is required.

Network bandwidth

100 Mbps

100 Mbps

100 Mbps

The transfer rate between ClickHouse nodes must be at least 10 Gbps if the data stream exceeds 20,000 EPS.

Installation of KUMA is supported in the following virtual environments:

  • VMware 6.5 or later
  • Hyper-V for Windows Server 2012 R2 or later
  • QEMU-KVM 4.2 or later
  • Software package of virtualization tools "Brest" RDTSP.10001-02

Kaspersky recommendations for storage servers

We recommend putting ClickHouse on solid state drives (SSD). SSDs help improve data access speed. Hard drives can be used to store data using the HDFS technology.

To connect a data storage system to storage servers, you must use high-speed protocols, such as Fibre Channel or iSCSI 10G. We do not recommend using application-level protocols such as NFS and SMB to connect data storage systems.

On ClickHouse cluster servers, using the ext4 file system is recommend.

If you are using RAID arrays, it is recommended to use RAID 0 for high performance, or RAID 10 for high performance and fault tolerance.

To ensure fault tolerance and performance of the data storage subsystem, we recommend making sure that ClickHouse nodes are deployed strictly on different disk arrays.

If you are using a virtualized infrastructure to host system components, we recommend deploying ClickHouse cluster nodes on different hypervisors. In this case, it is necessary to prevent two virtual machines with ClickHouse from working on the same hypervisor.

For high-load KUMA installations, we recommend installing ClickHouse on physical servers.

Requirements for devices for installing agents

To have data sent to the KUMA collector, you must install agents on the network infrastructure devices. Device requirements are listed in the following table.

 

Windows devices

Linux devices

CPU

Single-core, 1.4 GHz or higher

Single-core, 1.4 GHz or higher

RAM

512 MB

512 MB

Free disk space

1 GB

1 GB

Operating systems

  • Microsoft Windows 2012
  • Microsoft Windows Server 2012 R2
  • Microsoft Windows Server 2016
  • Microsoft Windows Server 2019
  • Microsoft Windows 10 20H2, 21H1
  • Ubuntu 20.04 LTS, 21.04
  • Oracle Linux version 8.6, 8.7
  • Astra Linux Special Edition RUSB.10015-01 (2021-1126SE17 update 1.7.1).
  • Astra Linux Special Edition RUSB.10015-01 (2022-1011SE17MD update 1.7.2.UU.1).
  • Astra Linux Special Edition RUSB.10015-01 (2022-1110SE17 update 1.7.3).

Requirements for client devices for managing the KUMA web interface

CPU: Intel Core i3 8th generation

RAM: 8 GB

Supported browsers:

  • Google Chrome 102 or later.
  • Mozilla Firefox 103 or later.

Device requirements for installing KUMA on Kubernetes

The minimum configuration of a Kubernetes cluster for deployment of a fault-tolerant KUMA configuration includes the following:

  • 1 load balancer node (not part of the cluster).
  • 3 controller nodes.
  • 2 worker nodes.

The minimum hardware requirements for devices for installing KUMA on Kubernetes are listed in the table below.

 

Balancer

Controller

Worker node

CPU

1 core with 2 threads or 2 vCPUs.

1 core with 2 threads or 2 vCPUs.

12 threads or 12 vCPUs.

RAM

2 GB

2 GB

12 GB

Free disk space

30 GB

30 GB

500 GB

Network bandwidth

10 Gbps

10 Gbps

10 Gbps

Page top

[Topic 230383]

KUMA interface

The program is managed through the web interface.

The window of the program web interface contains the following items:

  • Sections in the left part of the program web interface window
  • Tabs in the upper part of the program web interface window for some sections of the program
  • Workspace in the lower part of the program web interface window

The workspace displays the information that you choose to view in the sections and on the tabs of the program web interface window. It also contains management elements that you can use to configure how the information is displayed.

While working with the program web interface, you can use hot keys to perform the following actions:

  • In all sections: close the window that opens in the right side pane—Esc.
  • In the Events section:
    • Switch between events in the right side pane— and .
    • Start a search (when focused on the query field)—Ctrl/Command + Enter.
    • Save a search query—Ctrl/Command + S.
Page top

[Topic 230384]

Compatibility with other applications

Kaspersky Endpoint Security for Linux

If the components of KUMA and Kaspersky Endpoint Security for Linux are installed on the same server, the report.db directory may grow very large and even take up the entire drive space. To avoid this problem, it is recommended to upgrade Kaspersky Endpoint Security for Linux to version 11.2 or later.

Page top

[Topic 217958]

Program architecture

The standard program installation includes the following components:

  • The Core that includes a graphical interface to monitor and manage the settings of system components.
  • One or more Collectors that receive messages from event sources and parse, normalize, and, if required, filter and/or aggregate them.
  • A Correlator that analyzes normalized events received from Collectors, performs the necessary actions with active lists, and creates alerts in accordance with the correlation rules.
  • The Storage, which contains normalized events and registered incidents.

Events are transmitted between components over optionally encrypted, reliable transport protocols. You can configure load balancing to distribute load between service instances, and it is possible to enable automatic switching to the backup component if the primary one is unavailable. If all components are unavailable, events are saved to the hard disk buffer and sent later. The size of the buffer in the file system for temporary storage of events can be changed.

kuma-arch

KUMA architecture

In this Help topic

Core

Collector

Correlator

Storage

Basic entities

Page top

[Topic 217779]

Core

The Core is the central component of KUMA that serves as the foundation upon which all other services and components are built. It provides a graphical user interface that is intended for everyday use by operators/analysts and for configuring the entire system.

The Core allows you to:

  • create and configure services, or components, of the program, as well as integrate the necessary software into the system;
  • manage program services and user accounts in a centralized way;
  • visualize statistical data on the program;
  • investigate security threats based on the received events.
Page top

[Topic 217762]

Collector

A collector is an application component that receives messages from event sources, processes them, and transmits them to a storage, correlator, and/or third-party services to identify alerts.

For each collector, you need to configure one connector and one normalizer. You can also configure an unlimited number of additional Normalizers, Filters, Enrichment rules, and Aggregation rules. To enable the collector to send normalized events to other services, specific destinations must be added. Normally, two destinations are used: the storage and the correlator.

The collector operation algorithm includes the following steps:

  1. Receiving messages from event sources

    To receive messages, you must configure an active or passive connector. The passive connector can only receive messages from the event source, while the active connector can initiate a connection to the event source, such as a database management system.

    Connectors can also vary by type. The choice of connector type depends on the transport protocol for transmitting messages. For example, for an event source that transmits messages over TCP, you must install a TCP type connector.

    The program has the following connector types available:

    • internal
    • tcp
    • udp
    • netflow
    • sflow
    • nats-jetstream
    • kafka
    • http
    • sql
    • file
    • diode
    • ftp
    • nfs
    • wmi
    • wec
    • snmp
  2. Event parsing and normalization

    Events received by the connector are processed using the normalizer and normalization rules set by the user. The choice of normalizer depends on the format of the messages received from the event source. For example, you must select a CEF-type root normalizer for a source that sends events in CEF format.

    The following normalizers are available in the program:

    • JSON
    • CEF
    • Regexp
    • Syslog (as per RFC3164 and RFC5424)
    • CSV
    • Key-value
    • XML
    • NetFlow v5
    • NetFlow v9
    • IPFIX (v10)
  3. Filtering of normalized events

    You can configure filters that allow you to filter out events that meet specified conditions. Events that do not meet the filtering conditions will be sent for processing.

  4. Enrichment and conversion of normalized events

    Enrichment rules let you to supplement event contents with information from internal and external sources. The program has the following enrichment sources:

    • constants
    • cybertrace
    • dictionaries
    • dns
    • events
    • ldap
    • templates
    • timezone data
    • geographic data

    Mutation rules let you convert event field contents in accordance with the defined criteria. The program has the following conversion methods:

    • lower—converts all characters to lower case.
    • upper—converts all characters to upper case.
    • regexp—extracts a substring using RE2 regular expressions.
    • substring—gets a substring based on the specified numbers of the start and end positions.
    • replace—replaces text with the entered string.
    • trim—deletes the specified characters.
    • append—adds characters to the end of the field value.
    • prepend—adds characters to the beginning of the field value.
  5. Aggregation of normalized events

    You can configure aggregation rules to reduce the number of similar events that are transmitted to the storage and/or the correlator. Configuring aggregation rules lets you combine several events into one event. This helps you reduce the load on the services responsible for further event processing, conserves storage space and the license quota for events per second (EPS). For example, you can aggregate into one event all events involving network connections made using the same protocol (transport and application layers) between two IP addresses and received during a specified time interval.

  6. Transmission of normalized events

    After all the processing stages are completed, the event is sent to configured destinations.

Page top

[Topic 217784]

Correlator

The Correlator is a program component that analyzes normalized events. Information from active lists and/or dictionaries can be used in the correlation process.

The data obtained by analysis is used to carry out the following tasks:

Event correlation is performed in real time. The operating principle of the correlator is based on an event signature analysis. This means that every event is processed according to the correlation rules set by the user. When the program detects a sequence of events that satisfies the conditions of the correlation rule, it creates a correlation event and sends it to the Storage. The correlation event can also be sent to the correlator for repeated analysis, which allows you to customize the correlation rules so that they are triggered by the results of a previous analysis. Products of one correlation rule can be used by other correlation rules.

You can distribute correlation rules and the active lists they use among correlators, thereby sharing the load between services. In this case, the collectors will send normalized events to all available correlators.

The correlator operation algorithm has the following steps:

  1. Obtaining an event

    The correlator receives a normalized event from the collector or from another service.

  2. Applying correlation rules

    You can configure correlation rules so they are triggered based on a single event or a sequence of events. If no alert was detected using the correlation rules, the event processing ends.

  3. Responding to an alert

    You can specify actions that the program must perform when an alert is detected. The following actions are available in the program:

    • Event enrichment
    • Operations with active lists
    • Sending notifications
    • Storing correlation event
  4. Sending a correlation event

    When the program detects a sequence of events that satisfies the conditions of the correlation rule, it creates a correlation event and sends it to the storage. Event processing by the correlator is now finished.

Page top

[Topic 218010]

Storage

A KUMA storage is used to store normalized events so that they can be quickly and continually accessed from KUMA for the purpose of extracting analytical data. Access speed and continuity are ensured through the use of the ClickHouse technology. This means that a storage is a ClickHouse cluster bound to a KUMA storage service. ClickHouse clusters can be supplemented with cold storage disks.

When choosing a ClickHouse cluster configuration, consider the specific event storage requirements of your organization. For more information, please refer to the ClickHouse documentation.

In repositories, you can create spaces. The spaces enable to create a data structure in the cluster and, for example, store the events of a certain type together.

Page top

[Topic 220211]

Basic entities

This section describes the main entities that KUMA works with.

In this section

About tenants

About events

About alerts

About incidents

About assets

About resources

About services

About agents

About Priority

Page top

[Topic 221264]

About tenants

KUMA has a multitenancy mode in which one instance of the KUMA application installed in the infrastructure of the main organization (main tenant) enables isolation of branches (tenants) so that they receive and process their own events.

The system is managed centrally through the main interface while tenants operate independently of each other and have access only to their own resources, services, and settings. Events of tenants are stored separately.

Users can have access to multiple tenants at the same time. You can also select which tenants' data will be displayed in sections of the KUMA web interface.

In KUMA, two tenants are created by default:

  • The main tenant contains resources and services related to the main tenant. These resources are available only to the general administrator.
  • The shared tenant is where the general administrator can place resources, asset categories, and monitoring policies that users of all tenants will be able to utilize. Access to a shared tenant can be restricted to individual users.

    If in user settings, the Hide shared resources check box is selected, the user cannot gain access to the Shared folder belonging to the shared tenant in the KUMA web interface in the Resources<resource type>. This means that the user cannot view, edit, or otherwise use shared resources. The user is also unable to export shared resources and resource sets that incorporate resources from the shared tenant, either through the web interface or through the REST API.

    If any of the services available to the user use shared resources, the user can see the names of these resources in the service settings, but cannot view or modify the resources. The content of active lists is available to the user even if the resource of this active list is shared.

    The limitation does not apply to shared asset categories. Shared resources are also always available to users with the general administrator role.

Page top

[Topic 217693]

About events

Events are information security events registered on the monitored elements of the organization's IT infrastructure. For example, events include login attempts, interactions with a database, and sensor information broadcasts. Each separate event may seem meaningless, but when considered together they form a bigger picture of network activities to help identify security threats. This is the core functionality of KUMA.

KUMA receives events from logs and restructures their information, making the data from different event sources consistent (this process is called normalization). Afterwards, the events are filtered, aggregated, and later sent to the correlator service for analysis and to the Storage for retaining. When KUMA recognizes specific event or a sequences of events, it creates correlation events, that are also analyzed and retained. If an event or sequence of events indicates a potential security threat, KUMA creates an alert. This alert consists of a warning about the threat and all related data that should be investigated by a security officer.

Throughout their life cycle, events undergo conversions and may receive different names. Below is a description of a typical event life cycle:

The first steps are carried out in a collector.

  1. Raw event. The original message received by KUMA from an event source using a Connector is called a raw event. This is an unprocessed message and it cannot be used yet by KUMA. To fit into the KUMA pipeline, raw events must be normalized into the KUMA data model. That's what the next stage is for.
  2. Normalized event. A normalizer transforms 'raw' event data in accordance with the KUMA data model. After this conversion, the original message becomes a normalized event and can be used by KUMA for analysis. From here on, only normalized events are used in KUMA. Raw events are no longer used, but they can be kept as a part of normalized events inside the Raw field.

    The program has the following normalizers:

    • JSON
    • CEF
    • Regexp
    • Syslog (as per RFC3164 and RFC5424)
    • CSV/TSV
    • Key-value
    • XML
    • Netflow v5, v9, IPFIX (v10), sFlow v5
    • SQL

    At this point normalized events can already be used for analysis.

  3. Event destination. After the Collector service have processed an event, it is ready to be used by other KUMA services and sent to the KUMA Correlator and/or Storage.

The next steps of the event life cycle are completed in the correlator.

Event types:

  1. Base event. An event that was normalized.
  2. Aggregated event. When dealing with a large number of similar events, you can "merge" them into a single event to save processing time and resources. They act as base events, but In addition to all the parameters of the parent events (events that are "merged"), aggregated events have a counter that shows the number of parent events it represents. Aggregated events also store the time when the first and last parent events were received.
  3. Correlation event. When a sequence of events is detected that satisfies the conditions of a correlation rule, the program creates a correlation event. These events can be filtered, enriched, and aggregated. They can also be sent for storage or looped into the Correlator pipeline.
  4. Audit event. Audit events are created when certain security-related actions are completed in KUMA. These events are used to ensure system integrity. They are automatically placed in a separate storage space and stored for at least 365 days.
  5. Monitoring event. These events are used to track changes in the amount of data received by KUMA.
Page top

[Topic 217691]

About alerts

In KUMA, an alert is created when a sequence of events is received that triggers a correlation rule. Correlation rules are created by KUMA analysts to check incoming events for possible security threats, so when a correlation rule is triggered, it's a warning there may be some malicious activity happening. Security officers should investigate these alerts and respond if necessary.

KUMA automatically assigns the severity to each alert. This parameter shows how important or numerous the processes are that triggered the correlation rule. Alerts with higher severity should be dealt with first. The severity value is automatically updated when new correlation events are received, but a security officer can also set it manually. In this case, the alert severity is no longer automatically updated.

Alerts have related events linked to them, making alerts enriched with data from these events. KUMA also offers drill down functionality for alert investigations.

You can create incidents based on alerts.

Alert management in KUMA is described in this section.

Page top

[Topic 220212]

About incidents

If the nature of the data received by KUMA or the generated correlation events and alerts indicate a possible attack or vulnerability, the symptoms of such an event can be combined into an incident. This allows security experts to analyze threat manifestations in a comprehensive manner and facilitates response.

You can assign a category, type, and severity to incidents, and assign incidents to data protection officers for processing.

Incidents can be exported to RuCERT.

Page top

[Topic 217692]

About assets

Assets are network devices registered in KUMA. Assets generate network traffic when they send and receive data. The KUMA program can be configured to track this activity and create baseline events with a clear indication of where the traffic is coming from and where it is going. The event can contain source and destination IP addresses, as well as DNS names. If you register an asset with certain parameters (for example, a specific IP address), this asset is linked to all events that contain this IP address in any of its parameters.

Assets can be divided into logical groups. This helps keep your network structure transparent and gives you additional ways to work with correlation rules. When an event linked to an asset is processed, the category of this asset is also taken into consideration. For example, if you assign high severity to a certain category of assets, the base events involving these assets will trigger the creation of correlation events with higher severity. This in turn cascades into higher severity alerts and, therefore, a more rapid response to such an alert.

It is recommended to register network assets in KUMA because their use makes it possible to formulate clear and versatile correlation rules for much more efficient analysis of events.

Asset management in KUMA is described in this section.

Page top

[Topic 221640]

About resources

Resources are KUMA components that contain parameters for implementing various functions: for example, establishing a connection with a given web address or converting data according to certain rules. Like parts of an erector set, these components are assembled into resource sets for services that are then used as the basis for creating KUMA services.

Page top

[Topic 221642]

About services

Services are the main components of KUMA that work with events: receiving, processing, analyzing, and storing them. Each service consists of two parts that work together:

  • One part of the service is created inside the KUMA web interface based on set of resources for services.
  • The second part of the service is installed in the network infrastructure where the KUMA system is deployed as one of its components. The server part of a service can consist of multiple instances: for example, services of the same agent or storage can be installed on multiple devices at once.

Parts of services are connected to each other via the service ID.

Page top

[Topic 217690]

About agents

KUMA agents are services that are used to forward raw events from servers and workstations to KUMA destinations.

Types of agents:

  • wmi agents are used to receive data from remote Windows devices using Windows Management Instrumentation. They are installed to Windows assets.
  • wec agents are used to receive Windows logs from a local device using Windows Event Collector. They are installed to Windows assets.
  • tcp agents are used to receive data over the TCP protocol. They are installed to Linux and Windows assets.
  • udp agents are used to receive data over the UDP protocol. They are installed to Linux and Windows assets.
  • nats-jetstream—used for NATS communications. They are installed to Linux and Windows assets.
  • kafka agents are used for Kafka communications. They are installed to Linux and Windows assets.
  • http agents are used for communication over the HTTP protocol. They are installed to Linux and Windows assets.
  • file agents are used to get data from a file. They are installed to Linux assets.
  • ftp agents are used to receive data over the File Transfer Protocol. They are installed to Linux and Windows assets.
  • nfs agents are used to receive data over the Network File System protocol. They are installed to Linux and Windows assets.
  • snmp agents are used to receive data over the Simple Network Management Protocol. They are installed to Linux and Windows assets.
  • diode agents are used together with data diodes to receive events from isolated network segments. They are installed to Linux and Windows assets.
Page top

[Topic 217695]

About Priority

Priority reflects the relative importance of security-sensitive activity detected by a KUMA correlator. It shows the order in which multiple alerts should be processed, and indicates whether senior security officers should be involved.

The Correlator automatically assigns severity to correlation events and alerts based on correlation rule settings. The severity of an alert also depends on the assets related to the processed events because correlation rules take into account the severity of a related asset's category. If the alert or correlation event does not have linked assets with a defined severity or does not have any related assets at all, the severity of this alert or correlation event is equal to the severity of the correlation rule that triggered them. The alert or the correlation event severity is never lower than the severity of the correlation rule that triggered them.

Alert severity can be changed manually. The severity of alerts changed manually is no longer automatically updated by correlation rules.

Possible severity values:

  • Low
  • Medium
  • High
  • Critical
Page top

[Topic 222243]

About the End User License Agreement

The End User License agreement is a legal agreement between you and AO Kaspersky Lab that specifies the conditions under which you can use the program.

Read the terms of the End User License Agreement carefully before using the program for the first time.

You can familiarize yourself with the terms of the End User License Agreement in the following ways:

  • During the installation of KUMA.
  • By reading the LICENSE document. This document is included in the distribution kit and is located inside the installer in the /kuma-ansible-installer/roles/kuma/files/ folder.

    After the program is deployed, the document is available in the /opt/kaspersky/kuma/LICENSE folder.

You accept the terms of the End User License Agreement by confirming your acceptance of the End User License Agreement during the program installation. If you do not accept the terms of the End User License Agreement, you must cease the installation of the program and must not use the program.

Page top

[Topic 233460]

About the license

A License is a time-limited right to use the program, granted under the terms of the End User License Agreement.

A license entitles you to the following kinds of services:

  • Use of the program in accordance with the terms of the End User License Agreement
  • Getting technical support

The scope of services and the duration of usage depend on the type of license under which the program was activated.

A license is provided when the program is purchased. When the license expires, the program continues to work but with limited functionality (for example, new resources cannot be created). To continue using KUMA with its full functionality, you need to renew your license.

We recommend that you renew your license no later than its expiration date to ensure maximum protection against cyberthreats.

Page top

[Topic 233471]

About the License Certificate

A License Certificate Is a document that is provided to you along with a key file or activation code.

The License Certificate contains the following information about the license being granted:

  • License key or order number
  • Information about the user who is granted the license
  • Information about the program that can be activated under the provided license
  • Restriction on the number of licensing units (for example, the number of events that can be processed per second)
  • Start date of the license term
  • License expiration date or license term
  • License type

Page top

[Topic 233462]

About the license key

A license key is a sequence of bits that you can apply to activate and then use the program in accordance with the terms of the End User License Agreement. License keys are generated by Kaspersky specialists.

You can add a license key to the program by applying a key file. The license key is displayed in the program interface as a unique alphanumeric sequence after you add it to the program.

The license key may be blocked by Kaspersky in case the terms of the License Agreement have been violated. If the license key has been blocked, you need to add another one if you want to use the program.

A license key may be active or reserve.

An active license key is the license key currently used by the program. An active license key can be added for a trial or commercial license. The program cannot have more than one active license key.

A reserve license key is the license key that entitles the user to use the program but is not currently in use. The additional license key automatically becomes active when the license associated with the current active license key expires. An additional license key can be added only if an active license key has already been added.

A license key for a trial license can be added as an active license key. A license key for a trial license cannot be added as an additional license key.

Page top

[Topic 233467]

About the key file

The key file is a file named license.key provided to you by Kaspersky. The key file is used to add a license key that activates the program.

You receive a key file at the email address that you provided after purchasing KUMA.

You do not need to connect to Kaspersky activation servers in order to activate the program with a key file.

If the key file has been accidentally deleted, you can restore it. You may need a key file, for example, to register with Kaspersky CompanyAccount.

To restore the key file, you need to do one of the following:

  • Contact the license seller.
  • Get a key file on the Kaspersky website based on the available activation code.

Page top

[Topic 217709]

Adding a license key to the program web interface

You can add an application license key in the KUMA web interface.

Only users with the Administrator role can add a license key.

To add a license key to the KUMA web interface:

  1. Open the KUMA web interface and select SettingsLicense.

    The window with KUMA license conditions opens.

  2. Select the key you want to add:
    • If you need to add an active key, click the Add active license key button.

      This button is not displayed if a license key has already been added to the program. If you want to add an active license key instead of the key that has already been added, the current license key must be deleted.

    • If you want to add a reserve key, click the Add reserve license key button.

      This button is inactive until an active key is added. If you want to add a reserve license key instead of the key that has already been added, the current reserve license key must be deleted.

    The license key file selection window appears on the screen.

  3. Select a license file by specifying the path to the folder and the name of the license key file with the KEY extension.

The license key from the selected file will be loaded into the program. Information about the license key is displayed under SettingsLicense.

Page top

[Topic 218040]

Viewing information about an added license key in the program web interface

In the KUMA web interface, you can view information about the added license key. Information about the license key is displayed under SettingsLicense.

Only users with the Administrator role can view license information.

The License tab window displays the following information about added license keys:

  • Expires on—date when the license key expires.
  • Days remaining—number of days before the license is expired.
  • EPS available—number of events processed per second supported by the license.
  • EPS current—current average number of events per second processed by KUMA.
  • License key—unique alphanumeric sequence.
  • Company—name of the company that purchased the license.
  • Client name—name of client who purchased the license.
  • Modules—modules available for the license.
Page top

[Topic 217963]

Removing a license key in the program web interface

In KUMA, you can remove an added license key from the program (for example, if you need to replace the current license key with a different key). After the license key is removed, the program stops to receive and process events. This functionality will be re-activated the next time you add a license key.

Only users with the administrator role can delete license keys.

To delete an added license key:

  1. Open the KUMA web interface and select SettingsLicense.

    The window with KUMA license conditions opens.

  2. Click the delete-icon icon on the license that you want to delete.

    A confirmation window opens.

  3. Confirm deletion of the license key.

The license key will be removed from the program.

Page top

[Topic 217904]

Installing and removing KUMA

To complete the installation, you need a distribution kit:

  • kuma-ansible-installer-<build number>.tar.gz contains all necessary files for installing KUMA without the support for fault-tolerant configurations.
  • kuma-ansible-installer-ha-<build number>.tar.gz contains all necessary files for installing KUMA in a fault-tolerant configuration.

To complete the installation, you need the install.sh installer file and an inventory file that describes the infrastructure. You can create an inventory file based on a template. Each distribution contains an install.sh installer file and the following inventory file templates:

  • single.inventory.yml.template
  • distributed.inventory.yml.template
  • expand.inventory.yml.template
  • k0s.inventory.yml.template

KUMA places its files in the /opt directory, so we recommend making /opt a separate partition and allocating 16 GB for the operating system and the remainder of the disk space for the /opt partition.

KUMA is installed in the same way on all hosts using the installer and your prepared inventory file in which you describe your configuration. We recommend taking time to think through the setup before you proceed.

The following installation options are available:

  • Installation on a single server

    Single-server installation diagram

    aio

    Installation on a single server

    You can install all KUMA components on the same server: specify the same server in the single.inventory.yml inventory file for all components. An "all-in-one" installation can handle a small stream of events, up to 10,000 EPS. If you plan to use multiple dashboard layouts and handle a high volume of search queries, a single server might not be sufficient. In that case, we recommend choosing the distributed installation instead.

  • Distributed installation

    Distributed Installation diagram

    distributed

    Distributed Installation diagram

    You can install KUMA services on different servers; you can describe the configuration for a distributed installation in the distributed.inventory.yml inventory file.

  • Distributed installation in a fault-tolerant configuration

    You can install the KUMA Core on a Kubernetes cluster for fault tolerance. Use the k0s.inventory.yml inventory file for the description.

In this section

Program installation requirements

Ports used by KUMA during installation

Synchronizing time on servers

About the inventory file

Installation on a single server

Distributed installation

Distributed installation in a fault-tolerant configuration

KUMA backup

Modifying the configuration of KUMA

Updating previous versions of KUMA

Troubleshooting update errors

Delete KUMA

Page top

[Topic 231034]

Program installation requirements

General application installation requirements

Before deploying the application, make sure the following conditions are met:

  • Servers on which you want to install the components satisfy the hardware and software requirements.
  • Ports used by the installed instance of KUMA are available.
  • KUMA components are addressed using the fully qualified domain name (FQDN) of the host. Before you install the application, make sure that the correct host FQDN is returned in the Static hostname field. For this purpose, execute the following command:

    hostnamectl status

  • The server where the installer is run does not have the name localhost or localhost.<domain>.
  • Time synchronization over Network Time Protocol (NTP) is configured on all servers with KUMA services.

Installation requirements for Oracle Linux and Astra Linux operating systems

 

Oracle Linux

Astra Linux

Python version

3.6 or later

3.6 or later

SELinux module

Disabled

Disabled

Package manager

pip3

pip3

Basic packages

  • netaddr
  • firewalld

The packages can be installed using the following commands:

pip3 install netaddr

yum install firewalld

  • python3-apt
  • curl
  • libcurl4

The packages can be installed using the following command:

apt install python3-apt curl libcurl4

Dependent packages

  • netaddr
  • python3-cffi-backend

The packages can be installed using the following command:

apt install python3-netaddr python3-cffi-backend

If you are planning to query Oracle DB databases from KUMA, you must install the libaio1 Astra Linux package.

Packages that must be installed on a device with the KUMA Core for correct generation and downloading of reports

  • nss
  • gtk2
  • atk
  • libnss3.so
  • libatk-1.0.so.0
  • libxkbcommon
  • libdrm
  • at-spi2-atk
  • mesa-libgbm
  • alsa-lib
  • libgtk2.0.0
  • libnss3
  • libatk-adaptor
  • libatk-1.0.so.0
  • libdrm-common
  • libgbm1
  • libxkbcommon0
  • libasound2

 

User permissions level required to install the application

To assign the required permissions to the user account used for installing the application, run the following command:

sudo pdpl-user -i 63 <user name under which the application is being installed>

Page top

[Topic 217770]

Ports used by KUMA during installation

For the program to run correctly, you need to ensure that the KUMA components are able to interact with other components and programs over the network via the protocols and ports specified during the installation of the KUMA components.

Before installing the Core on the device, make sure that the following ports are free:

  • 9090: used by Victoria Metrics.
  • 8880: used by VMalert.
  • 27017: used by MongoDB.

The table below shows the default network ports values. The installer automatically opens the ports during KUMA installation

Network ports used for the interaction of KUMA components

Protocol

Port

Direction

Destination of the connection

HTTPS

7222

From the KUMA client to the server with the KUMA Core component.

Reverse proxy in the CyberTrace system.

HTTPS

8123

From the storage service to the ClickHouse cluster node.

Writing and receiving normalized events in the ClickHouse cluster.

HTTPS

9009

Between ClickHouse cluster replicas.

Internal communication between ClickHouse cluster replicas for transferring data of the cluster.

TCP

2181

From ClickHouse cluster nodes to the ClickHouse keeper replication coordination service.

Receiving and writing of replication metadata by replicas of ClickHouse servers.

TCP

2182

From one ClickHouse keeper replication coordination service to another.

Internal communication between replication coordination services to reach a quorum.

TCP

7209

From the parent server with the KUMA Core component to the child server with the KUMA Core component.

Internal communication of the parent node with the child node in hierarchy mode.

TCP

7210

From all KUMA components to the KUMA Core server.

Receipt of the configuration by KUMA from the KUMA Core server.

TCP

7220

  • From the KUMA client to the server with the KUMA Core component.
  • From storage hosts to the server with the KUMA Core component during installation or upgrade.
  • User access to the KUMA web interface.
  • Interaction between the storage hosts and the KUMA Core during installation or upgrade. You can close the port after the installation or upgrade.

TCP

7221 and other ports used for service installation as the --api.port <port> parameter value

From KUMA Core to KUMA services.

Administration of services from the KUMA web interface.

TCP

7223

To the KUMA Core server.

Default port used for API requests.

TCP

8001

From Victoria Metrics to the ClickHouse server.

Receiving ClickHouse server operation metrics.

TCP

9000

From the ClickHouse client to the ClickHouse cluster node.

Writing and receiving data in the ClickHouse cluster.

Ports used by the OOTB predefined resources

The installer automatically opens the ports during KUMA installation.

Ports used by the OOTB predefined resources:

  • 7230/tcp
  • 7231/tcp
  • 7232/tcp
  • 7233/tcp
  • 7234/tcp
  • 7235/tcp
  • 5140/tcp
  • 5140/udp
  • 5141/tcp
  • 5144/udp

KUMA Core traffic in a fault-tolerant configuration

The "KUMA Core traffic in a fault-tolerant configuration" table shows the initiator of the connection (the source) and the destination. The port number on the initiator can be dynamic. Return traffic within the established connection must not be blocked.

KUMA Core traffic in a fault-tolerant configuration

Source

Destination

Destination port

Type

External KUMA services

Load balancer

7209

TCP

External KUMA services

Load balancer

7210

TCP

External KUMA services

Load balancer

7220

TCP

External KUMA services

Load balancer

7222

TCP

External KUMA services

Load balancer

7223

TCP

Worker node

Load balancer

6443

TCP

Worker node

Load balancer

8132

TCP

Control node

Load balancer

6443

TCP

Control node

Load balancer

8132

TCP

Control node

Load balancer

9443

TCP

Worker node

External KUMA services

Depending on the settings specified when creating the service.

TCP

Load balancer

Worker node

7209

TCP

Load balancer

Worker node

7210

TCP

Load balancer

Worker node

7220

TCP

Load balancer

Worker node

7222

TCP

Load balancer

Worker node

7223

TCP

External KUMA services

Worker node

7209

TCP

External KUMA services

Worker node

7210

TCP

External KUMA services

Worker node

7220

TCP

External KUMA services

Worker node

7222

TCP

External KUMA services

Worker node

7223

TCP

Worker node

Worker node

179

TCP

Worker node

Worker node

9500

TCP

Worker node

Worker node

10250

TCP

Worker node

Worker node

51820

UDP

Worker node

Worker node

51821

UDP

Control node

Worker node

10250

TCP

Load balancer

Control node

6443

TCP

Load balancer

Control node

8132

TCP

Load balancer

Control node

9443

TCP

Worker node

Control node

6443

TCP

Worker node

Control node

8132

TCP

Worker node

Control node

10250

TCP

Control node

Control node

2380

TCP

Control node

Control node

6443

TCP

Control node

Control node

9443

TCP

Control node

Control node

10250

TCP

Cluster management console (CLI)

Load balancer

6443

TCP

Cluster management console (CLI)

Control node

6443

TCP

Page top

[Topic 255123]

Synchronizing time on servers

To configure time synchronization on servers:

  1. Install chrony:

    sudo apt install chrony

  2. Configure the system time to synchronize with the NTP server:
    1. Make sure the virtual machine has Internet access.

      If access is available, go to step b.

      If internet access is not available, edit the /etc/chrony.conf file to replace 2.pool.ntp.org with the name or IP address of your organization's internal NTP server.

    2. Start the system time synchronization service by executing the following command:

      sudo systemctl enable --now chronyd

    3. Wait a few seconds and run the following command:

      sudo timedatectl | grep 'System clock synchronized'

      If the system time is synchronized correctly, the output will contain the line "System clock synchronized: yes".

Synchronization is configured.

Page top

[Topic 255188]

About the inventory file

KUMA components can be installed, updated, and removed from the directory with the unpacked kuma-ansible-installer using the Ansible tool and the inventory file you created. You can specify values ​​for KUMA configuration settings in the inventory file; the installer uses these values ​​when deploying, updating, and removing the program. The inventory file uses the YAML format.

You can create an inventory file based on the templates included in the distribution kit. The following templates are available:

  • single.inventory.yml.template—Used to install KUMA on a single server. It contains the minimum set of settings optimized for installation on a single device without the use of a Kubernetes cluster.
  • distributed.inventory.yml.template—Used for the initial distributed installation of KUMA without using a Kubernetes cluster, for expanding the all-in-one installation to a distributed installation, and for updating KUMA.
  • expand.inventory.yml.template—Used in some reconfiguration scenarios: for adding collector and correlator servers, for expanding an existing storage cluster, and for adding a new storage cluster. If you use this inventory file to edit the configuration, the installer does not stop services in the entire infrastructure. If you reuse the inventory file, the installer can stop only services on hosts that are listed in the expand.inventory.yml inventory file.
  • k0s.inventory.yml.template—Used to install or migrate KUMA to a Kubernetes cluster.

We recommend backing up the inventory file that you used to install the program. You can use it to add components to the system or remove KUMA.

Page top

[Topic 244406]

KUMA settings in the inventory file

The inventory file may include the following blocks:

  • all
  • kuma
  • kuma_k0s

For each host, you must specify the FQDN in the <host name>.<domain> format or an ipv4 or ipv6 IP address.

Example:

hosts:

hostname.example.com:

ip: 0.0.0.0

or

ip: ::%eth0

all block

In this block the variables that are applied to all hosts indicated in the inventory are specified, including the implicit localhost where the installation is started. Variables can be redefined at the level of host groups or even for individual hosts.

Example of redefining variables in the inventory file

all:

  vars:

    ansible_connection: ssh

    deploy_to_k8s: False

    need_transfer: False

    airgap: True

    deploy_example_services: True

kuma:

  vars:

    ansible_become: true

    ansible_user: i.ivanov

    ansible_become_method: su

    ansible_ssh_private_key_file: ~/.ssh/id_rsa

  children:

    kuma_core:

      vars:

        ansible_user: p.petrov

        ansible_become_method: sudo

The following table lists possible variables in the 'vars' section and their descriptions.

List of possible variables in the vars section

Variable

Description

Possible values

ansible_connection

Method used to connect to target machines.

  • ssh—connection to remote hosts via SSH.
  • local—no connection to remote hosts is established.

ansible_user

User name used to connect to target machines and install components.

If the root user is blocked on the target machines, use a user name that has the right to establish SSH connections and elevate privileges using su or sudo.

ansible_become

Indicates the need to increase the privileges of the user account that is used to install KUMA components.

true if the ansible_user value is not root.

ansible_become_method

A method for increasing the privileges of the user account that is used to install KUMA components.

su or sudo if the ansible_user value is not root.

ansible_ssh_private_key_file

Path to the private key in the format /<path>/.ssh/id_rsa. This variable must be defined if you need to specify a key file that is different from the default key file: ~/.ssh/id_rsa.

 

deploy_to_k8s

Indicates that KUMA components are deployed in a Kubernetes cluster.

  • false

    is the default value for the single.inventory.yml and distributed.inventory.yml templates.
  • true

    is the default value for the k0s.inventory.yml template.

need_transfer

Indicates that KUMA components are moved in a Kubernetes cluster.

  • false

    is the default value for the single.inventory.yml and distributed.inventory.yml templates.
  • true

    is the default value for the k0s.inventory.yml template.

airgap

Indicates that there is no internet connection.

true

is the default value for the k0s.inventory.yml template.

generate_etc_hosts

Indicates that the machines are registered in the DNS zone of your organization.

In this case, the installer will automatically add the IP addresses of the machines from the inventory file to the /etc/hosts files on the machines where KUMA components are installed. The specified IP addresses must be unique.

  • false.
  • true.

deploy_example_services

Indicates the creation of predefined services during installation.

  • false: no services are needed. The default value for the distributed.inventory.yml and k0s.inventory.yml templates.
  • true: services must be created. The default value for the single.inventory.yml template.

low_resources

Indicates that KUMA is installed in environments with limited computing resources. In this case, the Core can be installed on a host that has 4 GB of free disk space. By default, there is no variable.

 

kuma block

This block lists the settings of KUMA components deployed outside of the Kubernetes cluster.

The following sections are available in the block:

  • In the vars section, you can specify the variables that are applied to all hosts indicated in the kuma block.
  • In the children section you can list groups of component settings:
    • kuma_core—KUMA Core settings. This may contain only one host.
    • kuma_collector—settings of KUMA collectors. Can contain multiple hosts.
    • kuma_correlator—settings of KUMA correlators. Can contain multiple hosts.
    • kuma_storage—settings of KUMA storage nodes. Can contain multiple hosts.

kuma_k0s block

This block defines the settings of the Kubernetes cluster that ensures fault tolerance of KUMA. This block is only available in an inventory file that is based on k0s.inventory.yml.template.

The minimum configuration allowed for installation is one controller combined with a worker node. This configuration does not provide fault tolerance for the Core and is only intended for demonstration of its capabilities or for testing the software environment.

To implement fault tolerance, 2 dedicated cluster controllers and a load balancer are required. For industrial operation, it is recommended to use dedicated worker nodes and controllers. If a cluster controller is under workload and the pod with the KUMA Core is hosted on the controller, disabling the controller will result in a complete loss of access to the Core.

The following sections are available in the block:

  • In the vars section, you can specify the variables that are applied to all hosts indicated in the kuma block.
  • The children section defines the settings of the Kubernetes cluster that ensures fault tolerance of KUMA.

The table below shows a list of possible variables in the vars section and their descriptions.

List of possible variables in the vars section

Variable group

Description

kuma_lb

FQDN of the load balancer.

The user installs the balancer on their own.

If the kuma_managed_lb = true parameter is indicated within the group, the load balancer will be automatically configured during KUMA installation, the necessary network TCP ports will be opened on its host (6443, 8132, 9443, 7209, 7210, 7220, 7222, 7223), and a restart will be performed to apply the changes.

kuma_control_plane_master

A host that acts as a dedicated primary controller for the cluster.

Groups for specifying the primary controller. A host must be assigned to only one of them.

kuma_control_plane_master_worker

A host that combines the role of the primary controller and worker node of the cluster.

kuma_control_plane

Hosts that act as a dedicated cluster controller.

Groups for specifying secondary controllers.

kuma_control_plane_worker 

Hosts that combine the role of controller and worker node of the cluster.

kuma_worker 

Worker nodes of the cluster.

Each host in this block must have its unique FQDN or IP address indicated in the ansible_host parameter, except for the host in the kuma_lb section which must have its FQDN indicated. Hosts must not be duplicated in groups.

The parameter extra_args: "--labels=kaspersky.com/kuma-core=true,kaspersky.com/kuma-ingress=true,node.longhorn.io/create-default-disk=true" must be indicated for each cluster node and for a cluster controller that is combined with a worker node.

Page top

[Topic 217908]

Installation on a single server

To install KUMA components on a single server, complete the following steps:

  1. Ensure that hardware, software, and installation requirements for KUMA are met.
  2. Prepare the single.inventory.yml inventory file.

    Use the single.yml.template inventory file template from the distribution kit to create a single.inventory.yml inventory file and describe the network structure of program components in that file. The installer uses the single.inventory.yml file to deploy KUMA.

  3. Install the program.

    Install the program and log in to the web interface using the default credentials.

If necessary, you can move application components to different servers to continue with a distributed configuration.

In this section

Preparing the single.inventory.yml inventory file

Installing the program on a single server

Page top

[Topic 222158]

Preparing the single.inventory.yml inventory file

KUMA components can be installed, updated, and removed in the directory containing the unpacked installer by using the Ansible tool and the user-created YML inventory file containing a list of the hosts of KUMA components and other settings. If you want to install all KUMA components on the same server, you must specify the same host for all components in the inventory file.

To create an inventory file for installation on a single server:

  1. Copy the archive with the kuma-ansible-installer-<version name>.tar.gz installer to the server and unpack it using the following command (about 2 GB of disk space is required):

    sudo tar -xpf kuma-ansible-installer-<version name>.tar.gz

  2. Go to the KUMA installer folder by executing the following command:

    cd kuma-ansible-installer

  3. Copy the single.inventory.yml.template template and create an inventory file named single.inventory.yml:

    cp single.inventory.yml.template single.inventory.yml

  4. Edit the settings in the single.inventory.yml inventory file.

    If you want predefined services to be created during the installation, set deploy_example_services to true.

    deploy_example_services: true

    The predefined services will appear only as a result of the initial installation of KUMA. If you are upgrading the system using the same inventory file, the predefined services are not re-created.

  5. Replace all kuma.example.com strings in the inventory file with the name of the host on which you want to install KUMA components.

The inventory file is created. Now you can use it to install KUMA on a single server.

We recommend backing up the inventory file that you used to install the program. You can use it to add components to the system or remove KUMA.

Sample inventory file for installation on a single server

Single.inventory.yml_example

Page top

[Topic 222159]

Installing the program on a single server

You can install all KUMA components on a single server using the Ansible tool and the single.inventory.yml inventory file.

To install Kuma on a single server:

  1. Download the kuma-ansible-installer-<build number>.tar.gz KUMA distribution kit to the server and extract it. The archive is unpacked into the kuma-ansibleinstaller directory.
  2. Go to the directory with the unpacked installer.
  3. Place the license key file in the <installer directory>/roles/kuma/files/ directory.

    The key file must be named license.key.

    sudo cp <key file>.key <installer directory>/roles/kuma/files/license.key

  4. Run the following command to start the component installation with your prepared single.inventory.yml inventory file:

    sudo ./install.sh single.inventory.yml

  5. Accept the terms of the End User License Agreement.

    If you do not accept the terms of the End User License Agreement, the program will not be installed.

As a result, all KUMA components are installed. After the installation is complete, log in to the KUMA web interface and enter the address of the KUMA web interface in the address bar of your browser, then enter your credentials on the login page.

The address of the KUMA web interface is https://<FQDN of the host where KUMA is installed>:7220.

Default login credentials:
- login – admin
- password – mustB3Ch@ng3d!

After the first login, change the password of the admin account

We recommend backing up the inventory file that you used to install the program. You can use this inventory file to add components to the system or remove KUMA.

You can expand the installation to a distributed installation.

Page top

[Topic 217917]

Distributed installation

Distributed installation of KUMA involves multiple steps:

  1. Verifying that the hardware, software, and installation requirements for KUMA are satisfied.
  2. Preparing the test machine.

    The test machine is used during the program installation process: the installer files are unpacked and run on it.

  3. Preparing the target machines.

    The program components are installed on the target machines.

  4. Preparing the distributed.inventory.yml inventory file.

    Create an inventory file with a description of the network structure of program components. The installer uses this inventory file to deploy KUMA.

  5. Installing the program.

    Install the program and log in to the web interface.

  6. Creating services.

    Create the client part of the services in the KUMA web interface and install the server part of the services on the target machines.

    Make sure the KUMA installation is complete before you install KUMA services. We recommend installing services in the following order: storage, collectors, correlators, and agents.

    When deploying several KUMA services on the same host, you must specify unique ports for each service using the --api.port <port> parameters during installation.

If necessary, you can change the KUMA web console certificate to your company's certificate.

In this section

Preparing the test machine

Preparing the target machine

Preparing the distributed.inventory.yml inventory file

Installing the program in a distributed configuration

Modifying the self-signed web console certificate

Page top

[Topic 222083]

Preparing the test machine

To prepare the test machine for the KUMA installation:

  1. Ensure that hardware, software, and installation requirements of the program are met.
  2. Generate an SSH key for authentication on the SSH servers of the target machines by executing the following command:

    sudo ssh-keygen -f /root/.ssh/id_rsa -N "" -C kuma-ansible-installer

    If SSH root access is blocked on the test machine, generate an SSH key for authentication on the SSH servers of the target machines using a user from the sudo group:

    If the user does not have sudo rights, add the user to the sudo group:

    usermod -aG sudo user

    sudo ssh-keygen -f /home/<name of the user from sudo group>/.ssh/id_rsa -N "" -C kuma-ansible-installer

    As a result, the key is generated and saved in the user's home directory. You should specify the full path to the key in the inventory file in the value of the ansible_ssh_private_key_file parameter so that the key is available during installation.

  3. Make sure that the test machine has network access to all the target machines by host name and copy the SSH key to each target machine by carrying out the following command:

    sudo ssh-copy-id -i /root/.ssh/id_rsa root@<host name of the test machine>

    If SSH root access is blocked on the test machine and you want to use the SSH key from the home directory of the sudo group user, make sure that the test machine has network access to all target machines by host name and copy the SSH key to each target machine using the following command:

    sudo ssh-copy-id -i /home/<name of a user in the sudo group>/.ssh/id_rsa root@<host name of the test machine>

  4. Copy the archive with the kuma-ansible-installer-<version>.tar.gz installer to the test machine and unpack it using the following command (about 2 GB of disk space is required):

    sudo tar -xpf kuma-ansible-installer-<version name>.tar.gz

The test machine is ready for the KUMA installation.

Page top

[Topic 217955]

Preparing the target machine

To prepare the target machine for the installation of KUMA components:

  1. Ensure that hardware, software, and installation requirements are met.
  2. Specify the host name. We recommend specifying the FQDN. For example, kuma1.example.com.

    You should not change the KUMA host name after installation: this will make it impossible to verify the authenticity of certificates and will disrupt the network communication between the program components.

  3. Register the target machine in your organization's DNS zone to allow host names to be translated to IP addresses.

    If your organization does not use a DNS server, you can use the /etc/hosts file for name resolution. The content of the files can be automatically generated for each target machine when installing KUMA.

  4. To get the hostname that you must specify when installing KUMA, run the following command and record the result:

    hostname -f

    The test machine must be able to access the target machine using this name.

The target machine is ready for the installation of KUMA components.

Page top

[Topic 222085]

Preparing the distributed.inventory.yml inventory file

To create the distributed.inventory.yml inventory file:

  1. Go to the KUMA installer folder by executing the following command:

    cd kuma-ansible-installer

  2. Copy the distributed.inventory.yml.template template and create an inventory file named distributed.inventory.yml:

    cp distributed.inventory.yml.template distributed.inventory.yml

  3. Edit the settings in the distributed.inventory.yml inventory file.

We recommend backing up the inventory file that you used to install the program. You can use it to add components to the system or remove KUMA.

Sample inventory file for distributed installation

Single to distributed.inventory.yml_example

Page top

[Topic 217914]

Installing the program in a distributed configuration

KUMA is installed using the Ansible tool and the YML inventory file. The installation is performed using the test machine, where all of the KUMA components are installed on the target machines.

To install KUMA:

  1. On the test machine, open the folder containing the unpacked installer.

    cd kuma-ansible-installer

  2. Place the license key file in the <installer directory>/roles/kuma/files/ directory.

    The key file must be named license.key.

  3. Run the installer from the folder with the unpacked installer:

    sudo ./install.sh distributed.inventory.yml

  4. Accept the terms of the End User License Agreement.

    If you do not accept the terms of the End User License Agreement, the program will not be installed.

KUMA components are installed. The screen will display the URL of the KUMA web interface and the user name and password that must be used to access the web interface.

By default, the KUMA web interface address is https://<FQDN or IP address of the core component>:7220.

Default login credentials (after the first login, you must change the password of the admin account):
- user name — admin
- password— mustB3Ch@ng3d!

We recommend backing up the inventory file that you used to install the program. You can use it to add components to the system or remove KUMA.

Page top

[Topic 217747]

Modifying the self-signed web console certificate

Before changing KUMA certificate, make sure to back up the previous certificate and key with the names external.cert.old and external.key.old respectively.

After installing the KUMA Core, the installer creates the following certificates in the /opt/kaspersky/kuma/core/certificates folder:

  • Self-signed root certificate ca.cert with the ca.key.

    Signs all other certificates that are used for internal communication between KUMA components.

  • The internal.cert certificate signed with the root certificate, and the Core server internal.key.

    Used for internal communication between KUMA components.

  • KUMA web console external.cert certificate and external.key.

    Used in the KUMA web console and for REST API requests.

    You can use your company certificate and key instead of self-signed web console certificate. For example, if you want to replace self-signed CA Core certificate with a certificate issued by an enterprise CA, you must provide an external.cert and an unencrypted external.key in PEM format.

    The following example shows how to replace a self-signed CA Core certificate with an enterprise certificate in PFX format. You can use the instructions as an example and adapt the steps according to your needs.

To replace the KUMA web console certificate with an external certificate:

  1. Switch to root user operation:

    sudo -i

  2. Go to the certificates directory:

    cd /opt/kaspersky/kuma/core/certificates

  3. Make a backup copy of the current certificate and key:

    mv external.cert external.cert.old && mv external.key external.key.old

  4. In OpenSSL, convert the PFX file to a certificate and an encrypted key in PEM format:

    openssl pkcs12 -in kumaWebIssuedByCorporateCA.pfx -nokeys -out external.cert

    openssl pkcs12 -in kumaWebIssuedByCorporateCA.pfx -nocerts -nodes -out external.key

    When carrying out the command, you are required to specify the PFX key password (Enter Import Password).

    As a result, the external.cert certificate and the external.key in PEM format are returned.

  5. Place the returned external.cert certificate and external.key files in the /opt/kaspersky/kuma/core/certificates directory.
  6. Change the owner of the key files:

    chown kuma:kuma external.cert external.key

  7. Restart KUMA:

    systemctl restart kuma-core

  8. Refresh the web page or restart the browser hosting the KUMA web interface.

Your company certificate and key have been replaced.

Page top

[Topic 244396]

Distributed installation in a fault-tolerant configuration

KUMA fault-tolerant configuration is provided by injecting KUMA Core into a Kubernetes cluster deployed by the KUMA installer.

The Kubernetes cluster configuration is defined in the inventory file. It must include one controller (dedicated or combined with a worker node), at least one worker node (dedicated or combined with a controller), and 0 or more dedicated worker nodes.

To install a fault-tolerant configuration of KUMA, you must use the kuma-ansible-installer-ha-<build number>.tar.gz installer.

When installing the fault-tolerant application configuration, the KUMA Core is placed into a Kubernetes cluster using the installer and the inventory file. The KUMA Core can be placed in a Kubernetes cluster in the following ways:

  • Install KUMA in a Kubernetes cluster.
  • Migrate the Core of the existing KUMA installation to the Kubernetes cluster.

In this section

About KUMA fault tolerance

Additional application installation requirements

Managing Kubernetes and accessing KUMA

Time zone in a Kubernetes cluster

Page top

[Topic 244722]

About KUMA fault tolerance

KUMA fault tolerance is ensured by implementing the KUMA Core into the Kubernetes cluster deployed by the KUMA installer, and by using an external TCP traffic balancer.

There are 2 possible roles for nodes in Kubernetes:

  • Controllers (control-plane)—nodes with this role manage the cluster, store metadata, and distribute the workload.
  • Workers—nodes with this role bear the workload by hosting KUMA processes.

Learn more about the requirements for cluster nodes.

For product installations of the KUMA Core in Kubernetes, it is critically important to allocate 3 separate nodes with a single controller role. This will provide fault tolerance for the Kubernetes cluster and will ensure that the workload (KUMA processes and others) cannot affect the tasks associated with managing the Kubernetes cluster. If you are using virtualization tools, you should make sure that these nodes reside on different physical servers and ensure that there are no worker nodes on the same physical servers.

In cases where KUMA is installed for demo purposes, nodes that combine the roles of a controller and worker node are allowed. However, if you are expanding an installation to a distributed installation, you must reinstall the entire Kubernetes cluster while allocating 3 separate nodes with the controller role and at least 2 nodes with the worker node role. KUMA cannot be upgraded to later versions if there are nodes that combine the roles of a controller and worker node.

You can combine different roles on the same cluster node only for demo deployment of the application.

KUMA Core availability under various scenarios:

  • Malfunction or network disconnection of the worker node where the KUMA Core service is deployed.

    Access to the KUMA web interface is lost. After 6 minutes, Kubernetes initiates migration of the Core bucket to an operational node of the cluster. After deployment is complete, which takes less than one minute, the KUMA web interface becomes available again via URLs that use the FQDN of the load balancer. To determine on which of the hosts the Core is running, run the following command in the terminal of one of the controllers:

    k0s kubectl get pod -n kuma -o wide

    When the malfunctioning worker node or access to it is restored, the Core bucket is not migrated from its current worker node. A restored node can participate in replication of a disk volume of the Core service.

  • Malfunction or network disconnection of a worker node containing a replica of the KUMA Core drive on which the Core service is not currently deployed.

    Access to the KUMA web interface is not lost via URLs that use the FQDN of the load balancer. The network storage creates a replica of the running Core disk volume on other running nodes. When accessing KUMA via a URL with the FQDN of running nodes, there is no disruption.

  • Loss of availability of one or more cluster controllers when quorum is maintained.

    Worker nodes operate in normal mode. Access to KUMA is not disrupted. A failure of cluster controllers extensive enough to break quorum leads to the loss of control over the cluster.

    Correspondence of the number of machines in use to ensure fault tolerance

    Number of controllers when installing a cluster

    Minimum number of controllers required for the operation of the cluster (quorum)

    Admissible number of failed controllers

    1

    1

    0

    2

    2

    0

    3

    2

    1

    4

    3

    1

    5

    3

    2

    6

    4

    2

    7

    4

    3

    8

    5

    3

    9

    5

    4

  • Simultaneous failure of all Kubernetes cluster controllers.

    The cluster cannot be managed and therefore will have impaired performance.

  • Simultaneous loss of availability of all worker nodes of a cluster with replicas of the Core volume and the Core pod.

    Access to the KUMA web interface is lost. If all replicas are lost, information will be lost.

Page top

[Topic 244399]

Additional application installation requirements

To protect the KUMA network infrastructure using Kaspersky Endpoint Security for Linux, first install KUMA in a Kubernetes cluster and then deploy Kaspersky Endpoint Security for Linux.

When you install a fault-tolerant configuration of KUMA, the following requirements must be met:

  • General application installation requirements.
  • The hosts that are planned to be used for Kubernetes cluster nodes do not use IP addresses from the following Kubernetes blocks:
    • serviceCIDR: 10.96.0.0/12
    • podCIDR: 10.244.0.0/16

    The traffic to the proxy servers is also excluded for the addresses of these blocks.

  • The nginx load balancer is installed and configured (more details about configuring nginx). For example, you can use the following command for installation:

    sudo yum install nginx

    If you want nginx to be configured automatically during the KUMA installation, install nginx and provide access to it via SSH in the same way as for the Kubernetes cluster hosts.

    Example of an automatically created nginx configuration

    The installer creates the /etc/nginx/kuma_nginx_lb.conf configuration file. An example of the file contents is shown below. The upstream sections are generated dynamically and contain the IP addresses of the Kubernetes cluster controllers (in the example, 10.0.0.2-4 in the upstream kubeAPI_backend, upstream konnectivity_backend, controllerJoinAPI_backend sections) and the IP addresses of the worker nodes (in the example 10.0.1.2-3), for which the inventory file contains the "kaspersky.com/kuma-ingress=true" value for the extra_args variable.

    The "include /etc/nginx/kuma_nginx_lb.conf;" line is added to the end of the /etc/nginx/nginx.conf file to apply the generated configuration file.

    Configuration file example:

    # Ansible managed

    #

    # LB KUMA cluster

    #

     

    stream {

        server {

            listen          6443;

            proxy_pass      kubeAPI_backend;

        }

        server {

            listen          8132;

            proxy_pass      konnectivity_backend;

        }

        server {

            listen          9443;

            proxy_pass      controllerJoinAPI_backend;

        }

        server {

            listen          7209;

            proxy_pass      kuma-core-hierarchy_backend;

            proxy_timeout   86400s;

        }

        server {

            listen          7210;

            proxy_pass      kuma-core-services_backend;

            proxy_timeout   86400s;

        }

        server {

            listen          7220;

            proxy_pass      kuma-core-ui_backend;

            proxy_timeout   86400s;

        }

        server {

            listen          7222;

            proxy_pass      kuma-core-cybertrace_backend;

            proxy_timeout   86400s;

        }

        server {

            listen          7223;

            proxy_pass      kuma-core-rest_backend;

            proxy_timeout   86400s;

        }

        upstream kubeAPI_backend {

            server 10.0.0.2:6443;

            server 10.0.0.3:6443;

            server 10.0.0.4:6443;

        }

        upstream konnectivity_backend {

            server 10.0.0.2:8132;

            server 10.0.0.3:8132;

            server 10.0.0.4:8132;

        }

        upstream controllerJoinAPI_backend {

            server 10.0.0.2:9443;

            server 10.0.0.3:9443;

            server 10.0.0.4:9443;

        }

        upstream kuma-core-hierarchy_backend {

            server 10.0.1.2:7209;

            server 10.0.1.3:7209;

        }

        upstream kuma-core-services_backend {

            server 10.0.1.2:7210;

            server 10.0.1.3:7210;

        }

        upstream kuma-core-ui_backend {

            server 10.0.1.2:7220;

            server 10.0.1.3:7220;

        }

        upstream kuma-core-cybertrace_backend {

            server 10.0.1.2:7222;

            server 10.0.1.3:7222;

        }

        upstream kuma-core-rest_backend {

            server 10.0.1.2:7223;

            server 10.0.1.3:7223;

        }

    }

  • An access key from the device on which KUMA is installed is added to the load balancer server.
  • The SELinux module is NOT enabled on the balancer server in the operating system.
  • The tar, systemctl, setfacl packages are installed on the hosts.

During KUMA installation, the hosts are automatically checked to meet the following hardware requirements. If these conditions are not met, the installation is terminated.

For demonstration purposes, you can disable the check of these conditions during installation by specifying the low_resources: true variable in the inventory file.

  • Number of CPU cores (threads) – 12 or more.
  • RAM – 22,528 MB or more.
  • Available disk space in the /opt/ section – 1,000 GB or more.
  • For initial installation, the /var/lib/ section must have at least 32 GB of available space. If the cluster is already installed on this node, the size of the required available space is reduced by the size of the /var/lib/k0s directory.

Additional requirements for the application installation in the Astra Linux Special Edition operating system

  • Installing a fault-tolerant configuration of KUMA is supported for the Astra Linux Special Edition RUSB.10015-01 operating system (2022-1011SE17MD, update 1.7.2.UU.1). Core version 5.15.0.33 or higher is required.
  • The following packages are installed on the machines intended for deploying a Kubernetes cluster:
    • open-iscsi
    • wireguard
    • wireguard-tools

    The packages can be installed using the following command:

    sudo apt install open-iscsi wireguard wireguard-tools

Additional requirements for the application installation in the Oracle Linux operating system

The following packages are installed on the machines intended for deploying a Kubernetes cluster:

  • iscsi-initiator-utils
  • wireguard-tools

Before installing the packages, add the EPEL repository as a source: sudo yum install oracle-epel-release-el8.

The packages can be installed using the following command:

sudo yum install iscsi-initiator-utils wireguard-tools

Page top

[Topic 244730]

Managing Kubernetes and accessing KUMA

When installing KUMA in a fault-tolerant configuration, the file named artifacts/k0s-kubeconfig.yml is created in the installer directory. This file contains the details required for connecting to the created Kubernetes cluster. The same file is created on the main controller in the home directory of the user set as ansible_user in the inventory file.

To ensure that the Kubernetes cluster can be monitored and managed, the k0s-kubeconfig.yml file must be saved in a location available for the cluster administrators. Access to the file must be restricted.

Managing a Kubernetes cluster

To monitor and manage a cluster, you can use the k0s application that is installed on all cluster nodes during KUMA deployment. For example, you can use the following command to view the load on worker nodes:

k0s kubectl top nodes

Access to the KUMA Core

The KUMA Core can be accessed at the URL https://<worker node FQDN>:<worker node port>. Available ports: 7209, 7210, 7220, 7222, 7223. Port 7220 is used by default to connect to the KUMA Core web interface. Access can be obtained through any worker node whose extra_args parameter contains the value kaspersky.com/kuma-ingress=true.

It is not possible to log in to the KUMA web interface on multiple worker nodes simultaneously using the same account credentials. Only the most recently established connection remains active.

If you are using an external load balancer in a fault-tolerant Kubernetes cluster configuration, the ports of the KUMA Core are accessed via the FQDN of the load balancer.

Page top

[Topic 246518]

Time zone in a Kubernetes cluster

The time zone within a Kubernetes cluster is always UTC+0, so this time difference should be taken into account when handling data created by the KUMA Core deployed in a fault-tolerant configuration:

  • In audit events, the time zone is UTC+0 in the DeviceTimeZone field.
  • In generated reports, the user will see the difference between the time the report was generated and the time in the browser.
  • In the dashboard, the user will see the difference between the time in the widget (the time of the user's browser is displayed) and the time in the exported widget data in the CSV file (the time within the Kubernetes cluster is displayed).
Page top

[Topic 222208]

KUMA backup

KUMA allows you to back up the KUMA Core database and certificates. The backup function is intended for restoring KUMA. To move or copy the resources, use the resource export and import functions.

Backup can be done in the following ways:

Special considerations for KUMA backup

  • Data may only be restored from a backup if it is restored to the KUMA of the same version as the backup one.
  • Backup of collectors is not required unless the collectors have an SQL connection. When restoring such collectors, you should revert to the original initial value of the ID.
  • If KUMA cannot start after the restore, it is recommended to reset the kuma database in MongoDB.

    How to reset a database in MongoDB

    If the KUMA Core fails to start after data recovery, the recovery must be performed again but this time the kuma database in MongoDB must be reset.

    To restore KUMA data and reset the MongoDB database:

    1. Log in to the OS of the server where the KUMA Core is installed.
    2. On the KUMA Core server, run the following command:

      sudo systemctl stop kuma-core

    3. Log in to MongoDB by running the following commands:
      1. cd /opt/kaspersky/kuma/mongodb/bin/
      2. ./mongo
    4. Reset the MongoDB database by running the following commands:
      1. use kuma
      2. db.dropDatabase()
    5. Log out of the MongoDB database by pressing Ctrl+C.
    6. Restore data from a backup copy by running the following command:

      sudo /opt/kaspersky/kuma/kuma tools restore --src <path to folder containing backup copy> --certificates

      The --certificates flag is optional and is used to restore certificates.

    7. Start KUMA by running the following command:

      sudo systemctl start kuma-core

    8. Rebuild the services using the recovered service resource sets.

    Data is restored from the backup.

See also:

REST API

In this section

KUMA backup using the kuma file

Page top

[Topic 244996]

KUMA backup using the kuma file

To perform a backup:

  1. Log in to the OS of the server where the KUMA Core is installed.
  2. Execute the following command of the kuma executable file:

    sudo /opt/kaspersky/kuma/kuma tools backup --dst <path to folder for backup copy> --certificates

The backup copy has been created.

To restore data from a backup:

  1. Log in to the OS of the server where the KUMA Core is installed.
  2. On the KUMA Core server, run the following command:

    sudo systemctl stop kuma-core

  3. Execute the following command:

    sudo /opt/kaspersky/kuma/kuma tools restore --src <path to folder containing backup copy> --certificates

  4. Start KUMA by running the following command:

    sudo systemctl start kuma-core

  5. In the KUMA web interface, in the ResourcesActive services section, select all services and click the Reset certificate button.
  6. Reinstall the services with the same ports and IDs.

Data is restored from the backup.

Page top

[Topic 222160]

Modifying the configuration of KUMA

The following KUMA configuration changes can be performed.

  • Extending an all-in-one installation to a distributed installation.

    To expand an all-in-one installation to a distributed installation:

    1. Create a backup copy of KUMA.
    2. Remove the pre-installed correlator, collector, and storage services from the server.
      1. In the KUMA web interface, under ResourcesActive services, select a service and click Copy ID. On the server where the services were installed, run the service removal command:

        sudo /opt/kaspersky/kuma/kuma <collector/correlator/storage> --id <service ID copied from the KUMA web interface> --uninstall

        Repeat the removal command for each service.

      2. Then remove the services in the KUMA web interface:

      As a result, only the KUMA Core remains on the initial installation server.

    3. Prepare the distributed.inventory.yml inventory file and in that file, specify the initial all-in-one initial installation server in the kuma_core group.

      In this way, the KUMA Core remains on the original server, and you can deploy the other components on other servers. Specify the servers on which you want to install the KUMA components in the inventory file.

      Sample inventory file for expanding an all-in-one installation to a distributed installation

      Single to distributed.inventory.yml_example

    4. Create and install the storage, collector, correlator, and agent services on other machines.
      1. After you specify the settings ​​for all sections in the distributed.inventory.yml inventory file, run the installer on the test machine.

        sudo ./install.sh distributed.inventory.yml

        Running the command causes the files necessary to install the KUMA components (storages, collectors, correlators) to appear on each target machine specified in the distributed.inventory.yml inventory file.

      2. Create storage, collector, and correlator services.

    The expansion of the installation is completed.

  • Adding servers for collectors to a distributed installation.

    The following instructions show how to add one or more servers to an existing infrastructure and then install collectors on these servers to balance the load. You can use these instructions as an example and adapt them to your requirements.

    To add servers to a distributed installation:

    1. Ensure that the target machines meet hardware, software, and installation requirements.
    2. On the test machine, go to the directory with the unpacked KUMA installer by running the following command:

      cd kuma-ansible-installer

    3. Copy the expand.inventory.yml.template template to create an inventory file called expand.inventory.yml:

      cp expand.inventory.yml.template expand.inventory.yml

    4. Edit the settings in the expand.inventory.yml inventory file and specify the servers that you want to add in the kuma_collector section.

      Sample expand.inventory.yml inventory file for adding collector servers

      Expand.inventory.yml_add_collector_example

    5. On the test machine start expand.inventory.playbook by running the following command as root in the directory with the unpacked installer:

      PYTHONPATH="$(pwd)/ansible/site-packages:${PYTHONPATH}" python3 ./ansible/bin/ansible-playbook -i expand.inventory.yml expand.inventory.playbook.yml

      Running this command on each target machine specified in the expand.inventory.yml inventory file creates files for creating and installing the collector.

    6. Create and install the collectors. A KUMA collector consists of a client part and a server part, therefore creating a collector involves two steps.
      1. Creating the client part of the collector, which includes a set of resources and the collector service.

        To create a set of resources for a collector, in the KUMA web interface, under ResourcesCollectors, click Add collector and edit the settings. For more details, see Creating a collector.

        At the last step of the configuration wizard, after you click Create and save, a resource set for the collector is created and the collector service is automatically created. The command for installing the service on the server is also automatically generated and displayed on the screen. Copy the installation command and proceed to the next step.

      2. Creating the server part of the collector.
      1. On the target machine, run the command you copied at the previous step. The command looks as follows, but all parameters are filled in automatically.

        sudo /opt/kaspersky/kuma/kuma <storage> --core https://<KUMA Core server FQDN>:<port used by KUMA Core for internal communication (port 7210 by default)> --id <service ID copied from the KUMA web interface> --install

        The collector service is installed on the target machine. You can check the status of the service in the web interface under ResourcesActive services.

      2. Run the same command on each target machine specified in the expand.inventory.yml inventory file.
    7. Specify the added servers in the distributed.inventory.yml inventory file so that it has up-to-date information in case of a KUMA update.

    Servers are successfully added.

  • Adding servers for correlators to a distributed installation.

    The following instructions show how to add one or more servers to an existing infrastructure and then install correlators on these servers to balance the load. You can use these instructions as an example and adapt them to your requirements.

    To add servers to a distributed installation:

    1. Ensure that the target machines meet hardware, software, and installation requirements.
    2. On the test machine, go to the directory with the unpacked KUMA installer by running the following command:

      cd kuma-ansible-installer

    3. Copy the expand.inventory.yml.template template to create an inventory file called expand.inventory.yml:

      cp expand.inventory.yml.template expand.inventory.yml

    4. Edit the settings in the expand.inventory.yml inventory file and specify the servers that you want to add in the kuma_correlator section.

      Sample expand.inventory.yml inventory file for adding correlator servers

      Expand.inventory.yml_add_correlator_example

    5. On the test machine, start expand.inventory.playbook by running the following command as root in the directory with the unpacked installer:

      PYTHONPATH="$(pwd)/ansible/site-packages:${PYTHONPATH}" python3 ./ansible/bin/ansible-playbook -i expand.inventory.yml expand.inventory.playbook.yml

      Running this command on each target machine specified in the expand.inventory.yml inventory file creates files for creating and installing the correlator.

    6. Create and install the correlators. A KUMA correlator consists of a client part and a server part, therefore creating a correlator involves two steps.
      1. Creating the client part of the correlator, which includes a set of resources and the correlator service.

        To create a resource set for a correlator, in the KUMA web interface, under ResourcesCorrelators, click Add correlator and edit the settings. For more details, see Creating a correlator.

        At the last step of the configuration wizard, after you click Create and save, a resource set for the correlator is created and the correlator service is automatically created. The command for installing the service on the server is also automatically generated and displayed on the screen. Copy the installation command and proceed to the next step.

      2. Creating the server part of the correlator.
      1. On the target machine, run the command you copied at the previous step. The command looks as follows, but all parameter values are assigned automatically.

        sudo /opt/kaspersky/kuma/kuma <storage> --core https://<KUMA Core server FQDN>:<port used by KUMA Core for internal communication (port 7210 by default)> --id <service ID copied from the KUMA web interface> --install

        The correlator service is installed on the target machine. You can check the status of the service in the web interface under ResourcesActive services.

      2. Run the same command on each target machine specified in the expand.inventory.yml inventory file.
    7. Specify the added servers in the distributed.inventory.yml inventory file so that it has up-to-date information in case of a KUMA update.

    Servers are successfully added.

  • Adding servers to an existing storage cluster.

    The following instructions show how to add multiple servers to an existing storage cluster. You can use these instructions as an example and adapt them to your requirements.

    To add servers to an existing storage cluster:

    1. Ensure that the target machines meet hardware, software, and installation requirements.
    2. On the test machine, go to the directory with the unpacked KUMA installer by running the following command:

      cd kuma-ansible-installer

    3. Copy the expand.inventory.yml.template template to create an inventory file called expand.inventory.yml:

      cp expand.inventory.yml.template expand.inventory.yml

    4. Edit the settings in the expand.inventory.yml inventory file and specify the servers that you want to add in the 'storage' section. In the following example, the 'storage' section specifies servers for installing two shards, each of which contains two replicas. In the expand.inventory.yml inventory file, you must only specify the FQDN, the roles of shards and replicas are assigned later in the KUMA web interface by following the steps of the instructions. You can adapt this example to suit your needs.

      Sample expand.inventory.yml inventory file for adding servers to an existing storage cluster

      Expand.inventory.yml_existing_storage_example

    5. On the test machine, start expand.inventory.playbook by running the following command as root in the directory with the unpacked installer:

      PYTHONPATH="$(pwd)/ansible/site-packages:${PYTHONPATH}" python3 ./ansible/bin/ansible-playbook -i expand.inventory.yml expand.inventory.playbook.yml

      Running this command on each target machine specified in the expand.inventory.yml inventory file creates files for creating and installing the storage.

    6. You do not need to create a separate storage because you are adding servers to an existing storage cluster. You must edit the storage settings of the existing cluster:
      1. In the ResourcesStorages section, select an existing storage and open the storage for editing.
      2. In the ClickHouse cluster nodes section, click Add nodes and specify roles in the fields for the new node. The following example shows how to specify identifiers to add two shards, containing two replicas each, to an existing cluster. You can adapt the example to suit your needs.

        Example:

        ClickHouse cluster nodes

        <existing nodes>

        FQDN: kuma-storage-cluster1server8.example.com

        Shard ID: 1

        Replica ID: 1

        Keeper ID: 0

        FQDN: kuma-storage-cluster1server9.example.com

        Shard ID: 1

        Replica ID: 2

        Keeper ID: 0

        FQDN: kuma-storage-cluster1server9.example.com

        Shard ID: 2

        Replica ID: 1

        Keeper ID: 0

        FQDN: kuma-storage-cluster1server10.example.com

        Shard ID: 2

        Replica ID: 2

        Keeper ID: 0

      3. Save the storage settings.

        Now you can create storage services for each ClickHouse cluster node.

    7. To create a storage service, in the KUMA web interface, in the ResourcesActive services section, click Add service.

      This opens the Choose a service window; in that window, select the storage you edited at the previous step and click Create service. Do the same for each ClickHouse storage node you are adding.

      As a result, the number of created services must be the same as the number of nodes added to the ClickHouse cluster, that is, four services for four nodes. The created storage services are displayed in the KUMA web interface in the ResourcesActive services section. Now storage services must be installed on each server by using the service ID.

    8. Now storage services must be installed on each server by using the service ID.
      1. In the KUMA web interface, in the ResourcesActive services section, select the storage service that you need and click Copy ID.

        The service ID is copied to the clipboard; you need it for running the service installation command.

      2. Compose and run the following command on the target machine:

        sudo /opt/kaspersky/kuma/kuma <storage> --core https://<KUMA Core server FQDN>:<port used by KUMA Core for internal communication (port 7210 by default)> --id <service ID copied from the KUMA web interface> --install

        The storage service is installed on the target machine. You can check the status of the service in the web interface under ResourcesActive services.

      3. Run the storage service installation command on each target machine listed in the 'storage' section of the expand.inventory.yml inventory file, one machine at a time. On each machine, the unique service ID within the cluster must be specified in the installation command.
    9. To apply changes to a running cluster, in the KUMA web interface, under ResourcesActive services, select the check box next to all storage services in the cluster that you are expanding and click Update configuration. Changes are applied without stopping services.
    10. Specify the added servers in the distributed.inventory.yml inventory file so that it has up-to-date information in case of a KUMA update.

    Servers are successfully added to a storage cluster.

  • Adding an additional storage cluster.

    The following instructions show how to add an additional storage cluster to existing infrastructure. You can use these instructions as an example and adapt them to your requirements.

    To add an additional storage cluster:

    1. Ensure that the target machines meet hardware, software, and installation requirements.
    2. On the test machine, go to the directory with the unpacked KUMA installer by running the following command:

      cd kuma-ansible-installer

    3. Copy the expand.inventory.yml.template template to create an inventory file called expand.inventory.yml:

      cp expand.inventory.yml.template expand.inventory.yml

    4. Edit the settings in the expand.inventory.yml inventory file and specify the servers that you want to add in the 'storage' section. In the following example, the 'storage' section specifies servers for installing three dedicated keepers and two shards, each of which contains two replicas. In the expand.inventory.yml inventory file, you must only specify the FQDN, the roles of keepers, shards, and replicas are assigned later in the KUMA web interface by following the steps of the instructions. You can adapt this example to suit your needs.

      Sample expand.inventory.yml inventory file for adding an additional storage cluster

      Expand.inventory.yml_example

    5. On the test machine, start expand.inventory.playbook by running the following command as root in the directory with the unpacked installer:

      PYTHONPATH="$(pwd)/ansible/site-packages:${PYTHONPATH}" python3 ./ansible/bin/ansible-playbook -i expand.inventory.yml expand.inventory.playbook.yml

      Running this command on each target machine specified in the expand.inventory.yml inventory file creates files for creating and installing the storage.

    6. Create and install a storage. For each storage cluster, you must create a separate storage, that is, three storages for three storage clusters. A storage consists of a client part and a server part, therefore creating a storage involves two steps.
      1. Creating the client part of the storage, which includes a set of resources and the storage service.
        1. To create a resource set for a storage, in the KUMA web interface, under ResourcesStorages, click Add storage and edit the settings. In the ClickHouse cluster nodes section, specify roles for each server that you are adding: keeper, shard, replica. For more details, see Creating a set of resources for a storage.

          The created set of resources for the storage is displayed in the ResourcesStorages section. Now you can create storage services for each ClickHouse cluster node.

        2. To create a storage service, in the KUMA web interface, in the ResourcesActive services section, click Add service.

          This opens the Choose a service window; in that window, select the set of resources that you created for the storage at the previous step and click Create service. Do the same for each ClickHouse storage.

          As a result, the number of created services must be the same as the number of nodes in the ClickHouse cluster, that is, fifty services for fifty nodes. The created storage services are displayed in the KUMA web interface in the ResourcesActive services section. Now storage services must be installed to each node of the ClickHouse cluster by using the service ID.

      2. Creating the server part of the storage.
      1. On the target machine, create the server part of the storage: in the KUMA web interface, in the ResourcesActive services section, select the relevant storage service and click Copy ID.

        The service ID is copied to the clipboard; you need it for running the service installation command.

      2. Compose and run the following command on the target machine:

        sudo /opt/kaspersky/kuma/kuma <storage> --core https://<KUMA Core server FQDN>:<port used by KUMA Core for internal communication (port 7210 by default)> --id <service ID copied from the KUMA web interface> --install

        The storage service is installed on the target machine. You can check the status of the service in the web interface under ResourcesActive services.

      3. Run the storage service installation command on each target machine listed in the 'storage' section of the expand.inventory.yml inventory file, one machine at a time. On each machine, the unique service ID within the cluster must be specified in the installation command.
      4. Dedicated keepers are automatically started immediately after installation and are displayed in the ResourcesActive services section with a green status. Services on other storage nodes may not start until services are installed for all nodes in that cluster. Up to that point, services can be displayed with a red status. This is normal behavior for creating a new storage cluster or adding nodes to an existing storage cluster. As soon as the command to install services on all nodes of the cluster is executed, all services acquire the green status.
    7. Specify the added servers in the distributed.inventory.yml inventory file so that it has up-to-date information in case of a KUMA update.

    An additional storage cluster is successfully added.

  • Removing servers from a distributed installation.

    To remove a server from a distributed installation:

    1. Remove all services from the server that you want to remove from the distributed installation.
      1. Remove the server part of the service. Copy the service ID in the KUMA web interface and run the following command on the target machine:

        sudo /opt/kaspersky/kuma/kuma <collector/correlator/storage> --core https://<KUMA Core server FQDN>:<port used by KUMA Core for internal communication (port 7210 by default)> --id <service ID copied from the KUMA web interface> --install

      2. Remove the client part of the service in the KUMA web interface in the Active services → Delete section.

        The service is removed.

    2. Repeat step 1 for each server that you want to remove from the infrastructure.
    3. Remove servers from the relevant sections of the distributed.inventory.yml inventory file to make sure the inventory file has up-to-date information in case of a KUMA update.

    The servers are removed from the distributed installation.

  • Removing a storage cluster from a distributed installation.

    To remove one or more storage clusters from a distributed installation:

    1. Remove the storage service on each cluster server that you want to removed from the distributed installation.
      1. Remove the server part of the storage service. Copy the service ID in the KUMA web interface and run the following command on the target machine:

        sudo /opt/kaspersky/kuma/kuma <storage> --id <service ID> --uninstall

        Repeat for each server.

      2. Remove the client part of the service in the KUMA web interface in the ResourcesActive services → Delete section.

        The service is removed.

    2. Remove servers from the 'storage' section of the distributed.inventory.yml inventory file to make sure the inventory file has up-to-date information in case of a KUMA update or a configuration change.

    The cluster is removed from the distributed installation.

  • Migrating the KUMA Core to a new Kubernetes cluster.

    Preparing the inventory file

    When migrating the KUMA Core to a Kubernetes cluster, it is recommended to use the template file named k0s.inventory.yml.template when creating the inventory file.

    The kuma_core, kuma_ collector, kuma_correlator, and kuma_storage sections of your inventory file must contain the same hosts that were used when upgrading KUMA from version 2.0.x to version 2.1 or when performing a new installation of the application. In the inventory file, set the deploy_to_k8s, need_transfer and airgap parameters to true. The deploy_example_services parameter must be set to false.

    Example inventory file with 1 dedicated controller and 2 worker nodes

    all:

    vars:

    ansible_connection: ssh

    ansible_user: root

    deploy_to_k8s: True

    need_transfer: True

    airgap: True

    deploy_example_services: False

    kuma:

    children:

    kuma_core:

    hosts:

    kuma.example.com:

    mongo_log_archives_number: 14

    mongo_log_frequency_rotation: daily

    mongo_log_file_size: 1G

    kuma_collector:

    hosts:

    kuma.example.com:

    kuma_correlator:

    hosts:

    kuma.example.com:

    kuma_storage:

    hosts:

    kuma.example.com:

    shard: 1

    replica: 1

    keeper: 1

    kuma_k0s:

    children:

    kuma_control_plane_master:

    hosts:

    kuma2.example.com:

    ansible_host: 10.0.1.10

    kuma_control_plane_master_worker:

    kuma_control_plane:

    kuma_control_plane_worker:

    kuma_worker:

    hosts:

    kuma.example.com:

    ansible_host: 10.0.1.11

    extra_args: "--labels=kaspersky.com/kuma-core=true,kaspersky.com/kuma-ingress=true,node.longhorn.io/create-default-disk=true"

    kuma3.example.com:

    ansible_host: 10.0.1.12

    extra_args: "--labels=kaspersky.com/kuma-core=true,kaspersky.com/kuma-ingress=true,node.longhorn.io/create-default-disk=true"

    Migrating the KUMA Core to a new Kubernetes cluster

    When the installer is started with this template file, it searches for the installed KUMA Core on all hosts where you intend to deploy worker nodes of the cluster. The found Core will be moved from the host to within the newly created Kubernetes cluster.

    If the component is not detected on the worker nodes, a clean installation of the KUMA Core is performed in the cluster without migrating resources to it. Existing components must be manually rebuilt with the new Core in the KUMA web interface.

    Certificates for collectors, correlators and storages will be re-issued from the inventory file for communication with the Core within the cluster. This does not change the Core URL for components.

    On the Core host, the installer does the following:

    • Removes the following systemd services from the host: kuma-core, kuma-mongodb, kuma-victoria-metrics, kuma-vmalert, and kuma-grafana.
    • Deletes the internal certificate of the Core.
    • Deletes the certificate files of all other components and deletes their records from MongoDB.
    • Deletes the following directories:
      • /opt/kaspersky/kuma/core/bin
      • /opt/kaspersky/kuma/core/certificates
      • /opt/kaspersky/kuma/core/log
      • /opt/kaspersky/kuma/core/logs
      • /opt/kaspersky/kuma/grafana/bin
      • /opt/kaspersky/kuma/mongodb/bin
      • /opt/kaspersky/kuma/mongodb/log
      • /opt/kaspersky/kuma/victoria-metrics/bin
    • Migrates data from the Core and its dependencies to a network drive within the Kubernetes cluster.
    • On the Core host, it migrates the following directories:
      • /opt/kaspersky/kuma/core
      • /opt/kaspersky/kuma/grafana
      • /opt/kaspersky/kuma/mongodb
      • /opt/kaspersky/kuma/victoria-metrics

      to the following directories:

      • /opt/kaspersky/kuma/core.moved
      • /opt/kaspersky/kuma/grafana.moved
      • /opt/kaspersky/kuma/mongodb.moved
      • /opt/kaspersky/kuma/victoria-metrics.moved

      After you have verified that the Core was correctly migrated to the cluster, these directories can be deleted.

    If you encounter problems with the migration, analyze the logs of the core-transfer migration task in the kuma namespace in the cluster (this task is available for 1 hour after the migration).

    If you need to perform migration again, you must convert the names of the /opt/kaspersky/kuma/*.moved directories back to their original format.

    If an /etc/hosts file with lines not related to addresses in the range 127.X.X.X was used on the Core host, the contents of the /etc/hosts file from the Core host is entered into the CoreDNS ConfigMap when the Core is migrated to the Kubernetes cluster. If the Core is not migrated, the contents of /etc/hosts from the host where the primary controller is deployed are entered into the ConfigMap.

Page top

[Topic 222156]

Updating previous versions of KUMA

The update is performed the same way on all hosts using the installer and inventory file. If you are using version 1.5 or 1.6 and want to update to KUMA 2.1.x, please update to 2.0.x first, and then from 2.0.x to 2.1.x.

Upgrading from version 2.0.x to 2.1.x

To install KUMA version 2.1.x over version 2.0.x, complete the preliminary steps and then update.

Preliminary steps

  1. Creating a backup copy of the KUMA Core.
  2. Make sure that all application installation requirements are met.
  3. Make sure that MongoDB versions are compatible by running the following sequence of commands on the device where KUMA Core is located:

    cd /opt/kaspersky/kuma/mongodb/bin/

    ./mongo

    use kuma

    db.adminCommand({getParameter: 1, featureCompatibilityVersion: 1})

    If the component version is different from 4.4, set the value to 4.4 using the following command: 

    db.adminCommand({ setFeatureCompatibilityVersion: "4.4" })

  4. During installation or update, ensure network accessibility of TCP port 7220 on the KUMA Core for the KUMA storage hosts.
  5. If you have a keeper deployed on a separate device in the ClickHouse cluster, install the storage service on the same device before performing the update:
    • Use the existing storage of the cluster to create a storage service for the keeper in the web interface.
    • Install the service on a device with a dedicated ClickHouse keeper.
  6. In the inventory file, specify the same hosts that were used when installing KUMA version 2.0.X. Set the following settings to false:

    deploy_to_k8s false

    need_transfer false

    deploy_example_services false

    When the installer uses this inventory file, all KUMA components are upgraded to version 2.1.0. The available services and storage resources are also reconfigured on hosts from the kuma_storage group:

    • ClickHouse systemd services are deleted.
    • Certificates are deleted from the /opt/kaspersky/kuma/clickhouse/certificates directory.
    • The Shard ID, Replica ID, Keeper ID, and ClickHouse configuration override fields are filled in for each node in the storage resource based on values from the inventory and configuration files of the service on the host. Subsequently, you will manage the roles of each node in the KUMA web interface.
    • All existing configuration files from the /opt/kaspersky/kuma/clickhouse/cfg directory are deleted (they will be subsequently generated by the storage service).
    • The value of the LimitNOFILE parameter (Service section) is changed from 64,000 to 500,000 in the kuma-storage systemd services.
  7. If you use alert segmentation rules, prepare the data for migrating the existing rules and save. In the next step, you can use this data to re-create the rules. During the update, alert segmentation rules are not migrated automatically.
  8. To perform an update, you need a valid password from the admin user. If you forgot the admin user password, contact Technical Support to reset the current password and use the new password to perform the update at the next step.

Updating KUMA

  1. If you have a ready-made inventory file, follow the instructions for distributed installation of the program.

    If an inventory file is not available for the current version, use the provided inventory file template and fill in the corresponding settings. To view a list of hosts and host roles in the current KUMA system, in the web interface, go to ResourcesActive services section.

  2. When upgrading on systems that contain large amounts of data and are operating with limited resources, the system may return the 'Wrong admin password' error message after you enter the administrator password. If you specify the correct password, KUMA may still return an error because KUMA could not start the Core service due to a timeout error and resource limit. If you enter the administrator password three times without waiting for the installation to complete, the update may end with a fatal error. Resolve the timeout error to proceed with the update.

The final stage of preparing KUMA for work

  1. After updating KUMA, you must clear your browser cache.
  2. Re-create the alert segmentation rules.
  3. Manually update the KUMA agents.

KUMA update completed successfully.

Upgrading from version 2.1.x to 2.1.3

To install KUMA version 2.1.3 over version 2.1.x, complete the preliminary steps and then update.

Preliminary steps

  1. Creating a backup copy of the KUMA Core.
  2. Make sure that all application installation requirements are met.
  3. During installation or update, ensure network accessibility of TCP port 7220 on the KUMA Core for the KUMA storage hosts.
  4. To perform an update, you need a valid password from the admin user. If you forgot the admin user password, contact Technical Support to reset the current password and use the new password to perform the update at the next step.

Updating KUMA

  1. If you have a ready-made inventory file, follow the instructions for distributed installation of the program.

    If an inventory file is not available for the current version, use the provided inventory file template and fill in the corresponding settings. To view a list of hosts and host roles in the current KUMA system, in the web interface, go to ResourcesActive services section.

  2. When upgrading on systems that contain large amounts of data and are operating with limited resources, the system may return the 'Wrong admin password' error message after you enter the administrator password. If you specify the correct password, KUMA may still return an error because KUMA could not start the Core service due to a timeout error and resource limit. If you enter the administrator password three times without waiting for the installation to complete, the update may end with a fatal error. Resolve the timeout error to proceed with the update.

The final stage of preparing KUMA for work

  1. After updating KUMA, you must clear your browser cache.
  2. Manually update the KUMA agents.

KUMA update completed successfully.

Page top

[Topic 247287]

Troubleshooting update errors

When updating KUMA, you may encounter the following errors:

  • Timeout error

    When upgrading from version 2.0.x on systems that contain large amounts of data and are operating with limited resources, the system may return the Wrong admin password error message after you enter the administrator password. If you specify the correct password, KUMA may still return an error because KUMA could not start the Core service due to resource limit and a timeout error. If you enter the administrator password three times without waiting for the installation to complete, the update may end with a fatal error.

    Follow these steps to resolve the timeout error and successfully complete the update:

    1. Open a separate second terminal and run the following command to verify that the command output contains the timeout error line:

      journalctl -u kuma-core | grep 'start operation timed out' 

      Timeout error message:

      kuma-core.service: start operation timed out. Terminating.

    2. After you find the timeout error message, in the /usr/lib/systemd/system/kuma-core.service file, change the value of the TimeoutSec parameter from 300 to 0 to remove the timeout limit and temporarily prevent the error from recurring.
    3. After modifying the service file, run the following commands in sequence:

      systemctl daemon-reload

      service kuma-core restart

    4. After executing the commands and successfully starting the service in the second terminal, enter the administrator password again in the original first terminal when the installer prompts you for the password.

      KUMA will continue the installation. In resource-limited environments, installation may take up to an hour.

    5. After installation finishes successfully, in the /usr/lib/systemd/system/kuma-core.service file, set the TimeoutSec parameter back to 300.
    6. After modifying the service file, run the following commands in the second terminal:

      systemctl daemon-reload

      service kuma-core restart

    After the commands are executed, the update will be completed.

  • Invalid administrator password

    The admin user password is required to automatically populate the storage settings during an update. If you entered an incorrect admin user password nine times during the TASK [Prompt for admin password], the installer still performs the update, and the web interface is still available. However, the storage settings are not migrated, and the storages will show a red status.

    To fix the error and make the repositories available for use, update the storage settings:

    1. Go to the storage settings, manually fill in the ClickHouse cluster fields, and click Save.
    2. Restart the storage service.

    The storage service will start with the specified parameters and will show a green status.

  • DB::Exception error

    After updating KUMA, the storage may be in a red status, and its logs may show errors about suspicious strings.

    Example error:

    DB::Exception::Exception(std::__1::basic_string<char, std::__1::char_traits<char>, std::__1::allocator<char>> const&, int, bool) @ 0xda0553a in /opt/kaspersky/kuma/clickhouse/bin/clickhouse

    To restart ClickHouse, carry out the following command on the KUMA storage server:

    touch /opt/kaspersky/kuma/clickhouse/data/flags/force_restore_data && systemctl restart kuma-storage-<ID of the storage where the error was detected>

Fix the errors to successfully complete the update.

Page top

[Topic 217962]

Delete KUMA

To remove KUMA, use the Ansible tool and the user-generated inventory file.

To remove KUMA:

  1. On the test machine, go to the installer folder:

    cd kuma-ansible-installer

  2. Execute the following command:

    sudo ./uninstall.sh <inventory file>

KUMA and all of the program data will be removed from the server.

The databases that were used by KUMA (for example, the ClickHouse storage database) and the information they contain must be deleted separately.

Special considerations for removing a fault-tolerant configuration of KUMA

The composition of the removed components depends on the value of the deploy_to_k8s parameter in the inventory file used to remove KUMA:

  • true – the Kubernetes cluster created during the KUMA installation is deleted.
  • false – all KUMA components except for the Core are deleted from the Kubernetes cluster. The cluster is not deleted.

In addition to the KUMA components installed outside the cluster, the following directories and files are deleted on the cluster nodes:

  • /usr/bin/k0s
  • /etc/k0s/
  • /var/lib/k0s/
  • /usr/libexec/k0s/
  • ~/k0s/ (for the ansible_user)
  • /opt/longhorn/
  • /opt/cni/
  • /opt/containerd

When a cluster is being deleted, error messages may appear, however, it does not interrupt the installer.

  • You can ignore such messages for the Delete KUMA transfer job and Delete KUMA pod tasks.
  • For the Reset k0s task (if an error message contains the following text: "To ensure a full reset, a node reboot is recommended.") and the Delete k0s Directories and files task (if an error message contains the following text: "I/O error: '/var/lib/k0s/kubelet/plugins/kubernetes.io/csi/driver.longhorn.io/"), it is recommended to restart the host the error is related to and try to uninstall KUMA again with the same inventory file.

After removing KUMA, restart the hosts on which the KUMA or Kubernetes components were installed.

Page top

[Topic 221499]

Working with tenants

Access to tenants is regulated in the settings of users. The general administrator has access to the data of all tenants. Only a user with this role can create and disable tenants.

Tenants are displayed in the table under SettingsTenants in the KUMA web interface. You can sort the table by clicking on columns.

Available columns:

  • Name—tenant name. The table can be filtered by this column.
  • EPS limit—quota size for EPS (events processed per second) allocated to the tenant out of the overall EPS quota determined by the license.
  • Description—description of the tenant.
  • Disabled—indicates that the tenant is inactive.

    By default, inactive tenants are not displayed in the table. You can view them by selecting the Show disabled check box.

  • Created—tenant creation date.

To create a tenant:

  1. In the KUMA web interface under SettingsTenants, click Add.

    The Add tenant window opens.

  2. Specify the tenant name in the Name field. The name must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
  3. In the EPS limit field, specify the EPS quota for the tenant. The cumulative EPS of all tenants cannot exceed the EPS of the license.
  4. If necessary, add a Description of the tenant. The description can contain no more than 256 Unicode characters.
  5. Click Save.

The tenant will be added and displayed in the tenants table.

To disable or enable a tenant:

  1. In the KUMA web interface under SettingsTenants, select the relevant tenant.

    If the tenant is disabled and not displayed in the table, select the Show disabled check box.

  2. Click Disable or Enable.

When a tenant is disabled, its services are automatically stopped, it no longer receives or processes events, and the EPS of the tenant is no longer taken into account for the cumulative EPS of the license.

When a tenant is enabled, its services must be manually started.

In this section

Selecting a tenant

Tenant affiliation rules

Page top

[Topic 221455]

Selecting a tenant

If you have access to multiple tenants, KUMA lets you select which tenants' data will be displayed in the KUMA web interface.

To select a tenant for displaying data:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, click Selected tenants.

    The tenant selection area opens.

  2. Select the check boxes next to the tenants whose data you want to see in sections of the KUMA web interface.
  3. You must select at least one tenant. You can use the Search field to search for tenants.
  4. Click the tenant selection area by clicking Selected tenants.

Sections of the KUMA web interface will display only the data and analytics related to the selected tenants.

Your selection of tenants for data display will determine which tenants can be specified when creating resources, services, layouts, report templates, widgets, incidents, assets, and other KUMA settings that let you select a tenant.

Page top

[Topic 221469]

Tenant affiliation rules

Tenant inheritance rules

It is important to track which tenant owns specific objects created in KUMA because this determines who will have access to the objects and whether or not interaction with specific objects can be configured. Tenant identification rules:

  • The tenant of an object (such as a service or resource) is determined by the user when the object is created.

    After the object is created, the tenant selected for that object cannot be changed. However, resources can be exported then imported into another tenant.

  • The tenant of an alert and correlation event is inherited from the correlator that created them.

    The tenant name is indicated in the TenantId event field.

  • If events of different tenants that are processed by the same correlator are not merged, the correlation events created by the correlator inherit the tenant of the event.
  • The incident tenant is inherited from the alert.

Examples of multitenant interactions

Multitenancy in KUMA provides the capability to centrally investigate alerts and incidents that occur in different tenants. Below are some examples that illustrate which tenants own certain objects that are created.

When correlating events from different tenants in a common stream, you should not group events by tenant. In other words, the TenantId event field should not be specified in the Identical fields field in correlation rules. Events must be grouped by tenant only if you must not merge events from different tenants.

Services that must be accommodated by the capacities of the main tenant can be deployed only by a user with the general administrator role.

  • Correlation of events for one tenant, correlator is allocated for this tenant and deployed at the tenant

    Condition:

    The collector and correlator are owned by tenant 2 (tenantID=2)

    Scenario:

    1. The collector of tenant 2 receives and forwards events to the correlator of tenant 2.
    2. When correlation rules are triggered, the correlator creates correlation events with tenantID=2.
    3. The correlator forwards the correlation events to the storage partition for tenant 2.
    4. An alert is created and linked to the tenant with tenantID=2.
    5. The events that triggered the alert are appended to the alert.

    An incident is created manually by the user. The incident tenant is determined by the tenant of the user. An alert is linked to an incident either manually or automatically.

  • Correlation of events for one tenant, correlator is allocated for this tenant and deployed at the main tenant

    Condition:

    • The collector is deployed at tenant 2 and is owned by this tenant (tenantID=2).
    • The correlator is deployed at the main tenant.

      The owner of the correlator is determined by the general administrator depending on who will investigate incidents of tenant 2: employees of the main tenant or employees of tenant 2. The owner of the alert and incident depends on the owner of the correlator.

    Scenario 1. The correlator belongs to tenant 2 (tenantID=2):

    1. The collector of tenant 2 receives and forwards events to the correlator.
    2. When correlation rules are triggered, the correlator creates correlation events with tenantID=2.
    3. The correlator forwards the correlation events to the storage partition of tenant 2.
    4. An alert is created and linked to the tenant with tenantID=2.
    5. The events that triggered the alert are appended to the alert.

    Result 1:

    • The created alert and its linked events can be accessed by employees of tenant 2.

    Scenario 2. The correlator belongs to the main tenant (tenantID=1):

    1. The collector of tenant 2 receives and forwards events to the correlator.
    2. When correlation rules are triggered, the correlator creates correlation events with tenantID=1.
    3. The correlator forwards the correlation events to the storage partition of the main tenant.
    4. An alert is created and linked to the tenant with tenantID=1.
    5. The events that triggered the alert are appended to the alert.

    Result 2:

    • The alert and its linked events cannot be accessed by employees of tenant 2.
    • The alert and its linked events can be accessed by employees of the main tenant.
  • Centralized correlation of events received from different tenants

    Condition:

    • Two collectors are deployed: one at tenant 2 and one at tenant 3. Both collectors forward events to the same correlator.
    • The correlator is owned by the main tenant. A correlation rule waits for events from both tenants.

    Scenario:

    1. The collector of tenant 2 receives and forwards events to the correlator of the main tenant.
    2. The collector of tenant 3 receives and forwards events to the correlator of the main tenant.
    3. When a correlation rule is triggered, the correlator creates correlation events with tenantID=1.
    4. The correlator forwards the correlation events to the storage partition of the main tenant.
    5. An alert is created and linked to the main tenant with tenantID=1.
    6. The events that triggered the alert are appended to the alert.

    Result:

    • The alert and its linked events cannot be accessed by employees of tenant 2.
    • The alert and its linked events cannot be accessed by employees of tenant 3.
    • The alert and its linked events can be accessed by employees of the main tenant.
  • The tenant correlates its own events, but the main tenant additionally provides centralized correlation of events.

    Condition:

    • Two collectors are deployed: one on the main tenant and one on tenant 2.
    • Two correlators are deployed:
      • Correlator 1 is owned by the main tenant and receives events from the collector of the main tenant and correlator 2.
      • Correlator 2 is owned by tenant 2 and receives events from the collector of tenant 2.

    Scenario:

    1. The collector of tenant 2 receives and forwards events to correlator 2.
    2. When a correlation rule is triggered, the correlator of tenant 2 creates correlation events with tenantID=2.
      • Correlator 2 forwards the correlation events to the storage partition of tenant 2.
      • Alert 1 is created and linked to the tenant with tenantID=2.
      • The events that triggered the alert are appended to the alert.
      • Correlation events from the correlator of tenant 2 are forwarded to correlator 1.
    3. The collector of the main tenant receives and forwards events to correlator 1.
    4. Correlator 1 processes events of both tenants. When a correlation rule is triggered, correlation events with tenantID=1 are created.
      • Correlator 1 forwards the correlation events to the storage partition of the main tenant.
      • Alert 2 is created and linked to the tenant with tenantID=1.
      • The events that triggered the alert are appended to the alert.

    Result:

    • Alert 2 and its linked events cannot be accessed by employees of tenant 2.
    • Alert 2 and its linked events can be accessed by employees of the main tenant.
  • One correlator for two tenants

    If you do not want events from different tenants to be merged during correlation, you should specify the TenantId event field in the Identical fields field in correlation rules. In this case, the alert inherits the tenant from the correlator.

    Condition:

    • Two collectors are deployed: one at tenant 2 and one at tenant 3.
    • One correlator owned by the main tenant (tenantID=1) is deployed. It receives events from both tenants but processes them irrespective of each other.

    Scenario:

    1. The collector of tenant 2 receives and forwards events to the correlator.
    2. The collector of tenant 3 receives and forwards events to the correlator.
    3. When a correlation rule is triggered, the correlator creates correlation events with tenantID=1.
      • The correlator forwards the correlation events to the storage partition of the main tenant.
      • An alert is created and linked to the main tenant with tenantID=1.
      • The events that triggered the alert are appended to the alert.

    Result:

    • Alerts that were created based on events from tenants 2 and 3 are not available to employees of these tenants.
    • Alerts and their linked events can be accessed by employees of the main tenant.
Page top

[Topic 217937]

Managing users

It is possible for multiple users to have access to KUMA. Users are assigned user roles, which affect the tasks the users can perform. The same user may have different roles with different tenants.

You can create or edit user accounts under SettingsUsers in the KUMA web interface. Users are also created automatically in the program if KUMA integration with Active Directory is enabled and the user is logging in to the KUMA web interface for the first time using their domain account.

The table of user accounts is displayed in the Users window of the KUMA web interface. You can use the Search field to look for users. You can sort the table based on the User information column by clicking the column header and selecting Ascending or Descending.

User accounts can be created, edited, or disabled. When editing user accounts (your own or the accounts of others), you can generate an API token for them.

By default, disabled user accounts are not displayed in the users table. However, they can be viewed by clicking the User information column and selecting the Disabled users check box.

To disable a user:

In the KUMA web interface, under SettingsUsers, select the check box next to the relevant user and click Disable user.

In this section

User roles

Creating a user

Editing user

Editing your user account

Page top

[Topic 218031]

User roles

KUMA users may have the following roles:

  • General administrator—this role is designed for users who are responsible for the core functionality of KUMA systems. For example, they install system components, perform maintenance, work with services, create backups, and add users to the system. These users have full access to KUMA.
  • Administrator—this role is for users responsible for the core functionality of KUMA systems owned by specific tenants.
  • Analyst—this role is for users responsible for configuring the KUMA system to receive and process events of a specific tenant. They also create and tweak correlation rules.
  • First line analyst—this role is for users responsible for configuring the KUMA system to receive and process events of a specific tenant. They also create and tweak correlation rules. Users with this role have fewer privileges than analysts.
  • Operator—this role is for users dealing with immediate security threats of a specific tenant. A user with the operator role sees resources in a shared tenant through the REST API.

    User roles rights

    Web interface section and actions

    General administrator

    Administrator

    Analyst

    First line analyst

    Operator

    Comment

    Reports

     

     

     

     

     

     

    View and edit templates and reports

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    no

    The first line analysts and analysts can:

    • View and edit templates and reports that they created themselves.
    • View reports sent to them by email.
    • View predefined templates.

    Generate reports

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    no

    The analysts can generate the reports they created or the predefined reports (from a template or a report).

    The analysts cannot generate reports sent to them by email.

    Export generated reports

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    no

    The first line analysts and the analysts can upload:

    • Reports that they created themselves.
    • Predefined reports.
    • Reports received by email.

    Delete templates and generated reports

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    no

    The first line analysts and the analysts can delete the templates and reports they generated.

    The first line analysts and the analysts cannot delete:

    • Predefined templates.
    • Reports received by email.

    Only the general administrator can delete predefined templates and reports.

    Edit the settings for generating reports

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    no

    The analysts can change the settings for generating predefined reports and the reports they created.

    The first line analysts can change the settings for generating the reports they created.

    Duplicate report template

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    no

    The first line analysts and the analysts can duplicate their own reports and predefined reports.

    Receive the generated report by email

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    If a report is sent as a link, it is available to KUMA users only.

    If a report is sent as an attachment, it is available to all recipients in the list of email addresses.

    Dashboard

     

     

     

     

     

     

    View data on the dashboard and change layouts

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

     

    View the Universal layout

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

     

    Add layouts

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    no

    This includes adding widgets to a layout.

    Only the general administrator can add a universal layout.

    Edit and rename layouts

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    only own

    no

    This includes adding, editing, and deleting widgets.

    Analysts may change/rename predefined layouts and layouts that were created using their account.

    Delete layouts

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    only own

    no

    Tenant administrators may delete layouts in the tenants available to them.

    Analysts may delete layouts that were created using their account.

    Only the general administrator can delete predefined layouts.

    Enable and disable the TV mode

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

     

    Resources → Services and Resources → Services → Active services

     

     

     

     

     

     

    View the list of active services

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    no

    Only the general administrator can view and delete storage spaces.

    Access rights do not depend on the tenants selected in the menu.

    View the contents of the active list

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    no

     

    Import/export/clear the contents of the active list

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    no

    First line analysts can:

    Export the contents of all the active lists they have access to.

    Import and clear the active lists they created.

    Create a set of resources for services

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    no

    no

    Analysts cannot create storages.

    Create a service under Resources → Services → Active services

    filled in

    filled in

    no

    no

    no

    Only the general administrator can create a service.

    Delete services

    filled in

    filled in

    no

    no

    no

     

    Restart services

    filled in

    filled in

    no

    no

    no

     

    Update the settings of services

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    no

    no

     

    Reset certificates

    filled in

    filled in

    no

    no

    no

    A user with the administrator role can reset the certificates of services only in the tenants that are accessible to the user.

    Resources → Resources

     

     

     

     

     

     

    View the list of resources

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    no

    Analysts cannot view the list of secret resources, but these resources are available to them when they create services.

    Add resources

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    no

    Analysts cannot add secret resources.

    Duplicate resources

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    no

    The first line analysts can duplicate a resource created by other users, including a set of service resources. However, the first line analysts cannot change the dependent resources in the copy of the set of service resources.

    Edit resources

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    no

     

    Create/edit/delete resources in a shared tenant

    filled in

    no

    no

    no

    no

     

    Delete resources

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    no

    Analysts cannot delete secret resources.

    The first line analysts can delete only their own resources.

    Import resources

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    no

    no

    Only the general administrator can import resources to a shared tenant.

    View the repository, import the resources from the repository

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    no

    no

    Only the general administrator can import resources to a shared tenant.

    Export resources

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    no

    no

    This includes resources from a shared tenant.

    View/edit collector or correlator drafts

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    no

    The user may only access their own drafts, regardless of the selected tenant. The list of drafts is generated based on those that belong to the user.

    Source status → List of event sources

     

     

     

     

     

     

    View sources of events

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

     

    Change sources of events

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    no

    no

     

    Delete sources of events

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    no

    no

     

    Source status → Monitoring policies

     

     

     

     

     

     

    View monitoring policies

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

     

    Create monitoring policies

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    no

    no

     

    Edit monitoring policies

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    no

    no

    Only the general administrator can edit the predefined monitoring policies.

    Delete monitoring policies

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    no

    no

    Predefined policies cannot be removed.

    Assets

     

     

     

     

     

     

    View assets and asset categories

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    This includes shared tenant categories.

    Add/edit/delete asset categories

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    no

    Within the tenant available to the user.

    Add asset categories in a shared tenant

    filled in

    no

    no

    no

    no

    This includes editing and deleting shared tenant categories.

    Link assets to an asset category of the shared tenant

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    no

     

    Add assets

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    no

     

    Edit assets

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    no

     

    Delete assets

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    no

     

    Import assets from Kaspersky Security Center

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    no

     

    Start tasks on assets in Kaspersky Security Center

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    no

     

    Run tasks on Kaspersky Endpoint Detection and Response assets

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    no

     

    Confirm updates to fix the asset vulnerabilities and accept the licensing agreements

    filled in

    filled in

    no

    no

    no

     

    Run the tasks on the assets in KEDR

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    no

     

    Editing custom fields of the assets (Settings → Assets)

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    no

     

    Alerts

     

     

     

     

     

     

    View the list of alerts

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

     

    Change the severity of alerts

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

     

    Open the details of alerts

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

     

    Assign responsible users

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

     

    Close alerts

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

     

    Add comments to alerts

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

     

    Attach an event to alerts

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

     

    Detach an event from alerts

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

     

    Edit and delete someone else's filters

    filled in

    filled in

    no

    no

    no

    Analysts and operators can edit or delete only their own filter resources.

    Incidents

     

     

     

     

     

     

    View the list of incidents

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

     

    Create blank incidents

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

     

    Manually create incidents from alerts

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

     

    Change the severity of incidents

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

     

    Open the incident details

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    Incident details display data from only those tenants to which the user has access.

    Assign executors

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

     

    Close incidents

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

     

    Add comments to incidents

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

     

    Attach alerts to incidents

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

     

    Detach alerts from incidents

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

     

    Edit and delete someone else's filters

    filled in

    filled in

    no

    no

    no

    Analysts and operators can edit or delete only their own filter resources.

    Export incidents to RuCERT

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    The export function is always available to the general administrator. Other users can perform export if the "Can interact with RuCERT" check box is selected in their profile.

    In the case of hierarchical KUMA deployment, interaction with RuCERT is performed from the main KUMA node.

    Send files to RuCERT

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

     

    Download files sent to RuCERT

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

     

    Export additional incident data to RuCERT upon request

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

     

    Send messages to RuCERT

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

     

    View messages from RuCERT

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

     

    View incident data exported to RuCERT

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

     

    Events

     

     

     

     

     

     

    View the list of events

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

     

    Search events

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

     

    Open the details of events

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

     

    Open statistics

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

     

    Conduct a retroscan

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    no

    no

     

    Export events to a TSV file

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

     

    Edit and delete someone else's filters

    filled in

    filled in

    no

    no

    no

    Analysts and operators can edit or delete only their own filter resources.

    Start ktl enrichment

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    no

     

    Run tasks on Kaspersky Endpoint Detection and Response assets in event details

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    no

     

    Create presets

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

     

    Delete presets

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    The first line analysts and the operators can delete only their own presets.

    View and use presets

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

     

    Settings → Users

     

     

     

     

     

     

    View the list of users

    filled in

    no

    no

    no

    no

     

    Add a user

    filled in

    no

    no

    no

    no

     

    Edit a user

    filled in

    no

    no

    no

    no

     

    Generate token

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    All users can generate their own tokens.

    The general administrator can generate a token for any user.

    Change access rights for a token

    filled in

    filled in

    no

    no

    no

    The general administrator can change access rights for any user, tenant administrators can change only their own access rights.

    View the data of their own profile

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

     

    Edit the data of their own profile

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    The user role is not available for change.

    Settings → LDAP server

     

     

     

     

     

     

    View the LDAP connection settings

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    no

     

    Edit the LDAP connection settings

    filled in

    filled in

    no

    no

    no

     

    Delete the configuration of an entire tenant from the settings

    filled in

    filled in

    no

    no

    no

     

    Import assets

    filled in

    filled in

    no

    no

    no

     

    Settings → Tenants

     

     

     

     

     

    This section is available only to the general administrator.

    View the list of tenants

    filled in

    no

    no

    no

    no

     

    Add tenants

    filled in

    no

    no

    no

    no

     

    Change tenants

    filled in

    no

    no

    no

    no

     

    Disable tenants

    filled in

    no

    no

    no

    no

     

    Settings → Domain authorization

     

     

     

     

     

    This section is available only to the general administrator.

    View the Active Directory connection settings

    filled in

    no

    no

    no

    no

     

    Edit the Active Directory connection settings

    filled in

    no

    no

    no

    no

     

    Add filters based on roles for tenants

    filled in

    no

    no

    no

    no

     

    Run tasks in Active Directory

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    no

    no

     

    Settings → General

     

     

     

     

     

    This section is available only to the general administrator.

    View the SMTP connection settings

    filled in

    no

    no

    no

    no

     

    Edit the SMTP connection settings

    filled in

    no

    no

    no

    no

     

    Settings → License

     

     

     

     

     

    This section is available only to the general administrator.

    View the list of added license keys

    filled in

    no

    no

    no

    no

     

    Add license keys

    filled in

    no

    no

    no

    no

     

    Delete license keys

    filled in

    no

    no

    no

    no

     

    Settings → Kaspersky Security Center

     

     

     

     

     

     

    View the list of successfully integrated Kaspersky Security Center servers

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    no

     

    Add Kaspersky Security Center connections

    filled in

    filled in

    no

    no

    no

     

    Delete Kaspersky Security Center connections

    filled in

    filled in

    no

    no

    no

     

    Delete the configuration of an entire tenant from the settings

    filled in

    filled in

    no

    no

    no

     

    Start the tasks for importing Kaspersky Security Center assets

    filled in

    filled in

    no

    no

    no

     

    Settings → Kaspersky Industrial CyberSecurity for Networks

     

     

     

     

     

     

    View a list of KICS for Networks servers with which integration has been configured

    filled in

    filled in

    no

    no

    no

     

    Add and modify the settings of KICS for Networks integration

    filled in

    filled in

    no

    no

    no

     

    Delete the settings of KICS for Networks integration

    filled in

    filled in

    no

    no

    no

     

    Run the tasks to import assets from the KICS for Networks settings

    filled in

    filled in

    no

    no

    no

     

    Settings → Kaspersky Automated Security Awareness Platform

     

     

     

     

     

     

    View the ASAP integration settings

    filled in

    no

    no

    no

    no

     

    Edit the ASAP integration settings

    filled in

    no

    no

    no

    no

     

    View information from ASAP in the user details window

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

     

    Assign users to an ASAP learning group

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    no

     

    Settings → Kaspersky Endpoint Detection and Response

     

     

     

     

     

     

    View the connection settings

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    no

     

    Add, edit and disconnect the connections when the distributed solution mode is enabled

    filled in

    no

    no

    no

    no

     

    Enable the distributed solution mode

    filled in

    no

    no

    no

    no

     

    Add connections when the distributed solution mode is disabled

    filled in

    filled in

    no

    no

    no

     

    Delete the connections when the distributed solution mode is disabled

    filled in

    filled in

    no

    no

    no

     

    Delete the configuration of an entire tenant from the settings

    filled in

    filled in

    no

    no

    no

     

    Settings → Kaspersky CyberTrace

     

     

     

     

     

    This section is available only to the general administrator.

    View the CyberTrace integration settings

    filled in

    no

    no

    no

    no

     

    Edit the CyberTrace integration settings

    filled in

    no

    no

    no

    no

     

    Settings → IRP / SOAR

     

     

     

     

     

    This section is available only to the general administrator.

    View the settings for integration with IRP / SOAR

    filled in

    no

    no

    no

    no

     

    Edit the IRP/SOAR integration settings

    filled in

    no

    no

    no

    no

     

    Settings → Kaspersky Threat Lookup

     

     

     

     

     

    This section is available only to the general administrator.

    View the Threat Lookup integration settings

    filled in

    no

    no

    no

    no

     

    Edit the Threat Lookup integration settings

    filled in

    no

    no

    no

    no

     

    Settings → Alerts

     

     

     

     

     

     

    View the parameters

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    no

     

    Edit the parameters

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    no

    no

     

    Delete the configuration of an entire tenant from the settings

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    no

    no

     

    Settings → Incidents → Automatic linking of alerts to incidents

     

     

     

     

     

     

    View the parameters

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    no

     

    Edit the parameters

    filled in

    no

    no

    no

    no

     

    Settings → Incidents → Incident types

     

     

     

     

     

     

    View the categories reference

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    no

     

    View the categories charts

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    no

     

    Add categories

    filled in

    filled in

    no

    no

    no

     

    Edit categories

    filled in

    filled in

    no

    no

    no

     

    Delete categories

    filled in

    filled in

    no

    no

    no

     

    Settings → RuCERT

     

     

     

     

     

     

    View the parameters

    filled in

    no

    no

    no

    no

     

    Edit the parameters

    filled in

    no

    no

    no

    no

     

    Settings → Hierarchy

     

     

     

     

     

     

    View the parameters

    filled in

    no

    no

    no

    no

     

    Edit the parameters

    filled in

    no

    no

    no

    no

     

    View incidents from child nodes

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    no

    filled in

    All users of the parent node have access to the incidents in the child nodes.

    Settings → Asset audit

     

     

     

     

     

     

    Create, clone and edit the settings

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    no

    no

     

    View the parameters

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    no

     

    Delete settings

    filled in

    filled in

    no

    no

    no

     

    Settings → Repository update

     

     

     

     

     

     

    View the parameters

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    no

    no

     

    Edit the parameters

    filled in

    no

    no

    no

    no

     

    Start the repository update task manually

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    no

    no

     

    Settings → Assets

     

     

     

     

     

     

    Add, edit, and delete the asset fields

    filled in

    no

    no

    no

    no

     

    Metrics

     

     

     

     

     

     

    Open metrics

    filled in

    no

    no

    no

    no

     

    Task manager

     

     

     

     

     

     

    View a list of your own tasks

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    The section and tasks are not tied to a tenant. The tasks are available only to the user who created them.

    Finish your own tasks

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

     

    Restart your own tasks

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

     

    View a list of all tasks

    filled in

    no

    no

    no

    no

     

    Finish any task

    filled in

    no

    no

    no

    no

     

    Restart any task

    filled in

    no

    no

    no

    no

     

    CyberTrace

     

     

     

     

     

    This section is not displayed in the web interface unless CyberTrace integration is configured under Settings → CyberTrace.

    Open the section

    filled in

    no

    no

    no

    no

     

    Access to the data of tenants

     

     

     

     

     

     

    Access to tenants

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    A user has access to the tenant if its name is indicated in the settings blocks of the roles assigned to the user account. The access level depends on which role is indicated for the tenant.

    Shared tenant

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    A shared tenant is used to store shared resources that must be available to all tenants.

    Although services cannot be owned by the shared tenant, these services may utilize resources that are owned by the shared tenant. These services are still owned by their respective tenants.

    Events, alerts and incidents cannot be shared.

    Permissions to access the shared tenant:

    • Read/write—only the general administrator.
    • Read—all other users, including users that have permissions to access the main tenant.

    Main tenant

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    filled in

    A user has access to the main tenant if its name is indicated in the settings blocks of the roles assigned to the user account. The access level depends on which role is indicated for the tenant.

    Permissions to access the main tenant do not grant access to other tenants.

Page top

[Topic 217796]

Creating a user

To create a user account:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, open SettingsUsers.

    In the right part of the Settings section the Users table will be displayed.

  2. Click the Add user button and set the parameters as described below.
    • Name (required)—enter the user name. The length of the string must be 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
    • Login(required) – enter a unique user name for the user account. Must contain from 3 to 64 characters (only a–z, A–Z, 0–9, . \ - _).
    • Email (required)—enter the unique email address of the user. Must be a valid email address.
    • New password (required)—enter the password to the user account. Password requirements:
      • 8 to 128 characters long.
      • At least one lowercase character.
      • At least one uppercase character.
      • At lease one numeral.
      • At least one of the following special characters: !, @, #, %, ^, &, *.
    • Confirm password (required)—enter the password again for confirmation.
    • Disabled—select this check box if you want to disable a user account. By default, this check box is cleared.
    • In the Tenants for roles settings block, use the Add field buttons to specify which roles the user will perform on which tenants. Although a user can have different roles on different tenants, the user can have only one role on the same tenant.
  3. Select or clear the check boxes that control access rights and user capabilities:
    • Receive email notifications—select this check box if you want the user to receive SMTP notifications from KUMA.
    • Hide shared resources—select this check box if you do not want to show resources located in the shared tenant to the user. Learn more about restricting access to shared resources.

      If in user settings, the Hide shared resources check box is selected, the user cannot gain access to the Shared folder belonging to the shared tenant in the KUMA web interface in the Resources<resource type>. This means that the user cannot view, edit, or otherwise use shared resources. The user is also unable to export shared resources and resource sets that incorporate resources from the shared tenant, either through the web interface or through the REST API.

      If any of the services available to the user use shared resources, the user can see the names of these resources in the service settings, but cannot view or modify the resources. The content of active lists is available to the user even if the resource of this active list is shared.

      The limitation does not apply to shared asset categories. Shared resources are also always available to users with the general administrator role.

    • Can interact with RuCERT—select this check box if you want the user to be able to export incidents to RuCERT.

      Only a user with the General Administrator role can select this check box.

    • Disable notifications about RuCERT messages—select this check box if you do not want the user to receive notifications about the messages in the incidents exported to RuCERT.
    • General administrators group—select this check box if you want to assign the main administrator role to the user. Users with the general administrator role can change the settings of other user accounts. By default, this check box is cleared.
    • Access to CII facilities—select this check box if you want the user to be able to assign CII categories to the assets and to interact with alerts and incidents related to the assets that are CII objects.

      Learn more about access to CII objects

      If a user has access to CII objects:

      • The user can assign a CII category to assets if the asset settings can be edited.
      • The user can view all alerts and incidents.
      • The user can access the CII column in the KUMA web interface sections that indicate whether CII objects are related to the displayed alerts and incidents.

      If a user does not have access to CII objects:

      • The user cannot assign a CII category to assets. The user can still view and search CII category values and assets that have a CII category.
      • The user cannot access alerts and incidents that are related to assets with CII categories. The CII column is not displayed in the list of alerts and assets.
      • For assets with a CII category, the user cannot view statistics on alerts and incidents related to these assets.

      If an asset did not yet have the status of a CII object when an alert or incident was generated but the CII status is added to it later, a user without access to CII objects will see that an asset is related to an alert or incident in the asset details area but will not be able to interact with the alert or incident in any way.

  4. Click Save.

The user account will be created and displayed in the Users table.

Page top

[Topic 217858]

Editing user

To edit a user:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, open SettingsUsers.

    In the right part of the Settings section the Users table will be displayed.

  2. Select the relevant user and change the necessary settings in the user details area that opens on the right.
    • Name (required)—edit the user name. The length of the string must be 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
    • Login(required) – enter a unique user name for the user account. Must contain from 3 to 64 characters (only a–z, A–Z, 0–9, . \ - _).
    • Email (required)—enter the unique email address of the user. Must be a valid email address.
    • Disabled—select this check box if you want to disable a user account. By default, this check box is cleared.
    • In the Tenants for roles settings block, use the Add field buttons to specify which roles the user will perform on which tenants. Although a user can have different roles on different tenants, the user can have only one role on the same tenant.
  3. Select or clear the check boxes that control access rights and user capabilities:
    • Receive email notifications—select this check box if you want the user to receive SMTP notifications from KUMA.
    • Hide shared resources—select this check box if you do not want to show resources located in the shared tenant to the user.
    • Can interact with RuCERT—select this check box if you want the user to be able to export incidents to RuCERT.

      Only a user with the General Administrator role can select this check box.

    • Disable notifications about RuCERT messages—select this check box if you do not want the user to receive notifications about the messages in the incidents exported to RuCERT.
    • General administrators group—select this check box if you want to assign the main administrator role to the user. Users with the general administrator role can change the settings of other user accounts. By default, this check box is cleared.
    • Access to CII facilities—select this check box if you want the user to be able to assign CII categories to the assets and to interact with alerts and incidents related to the assets that are CII objects.
  4. If you need to change the password, click the Change password button and fill in the fields described below in the opened window. When finished, click OK.
    • Current password (required)—enter the current password of your user account. The field is available if you change your account password.
    • New password (required)—enter a new password to the user account. Password requirements:
      • 8 to 128 characters long.
      • At least one lowercase character.
      • At least one uppercase character.
      • At lease one numeral.
      • At least one of the following special characters: !, @, #, %, ^, &, *.
    • Confirm password (required)—enter the password again for confirmation.
  5. If necessary, use the Generate token button to generate an API token. Clicking this button displays the token creation window.
  6. If necessary, configure the operations available to the user via the REST API by using the API access rights button.
  7. Click Save.

The user account will be changed.

Page top

[Topic 217861]

Editing your user account

To edit your user account:

  1. Open the KUMA web interface, click the name of your user account in the bottom-left corner of the window and click the Profile button in the opened menu.

    The User window with your user account parameters opens.

  2. Make the necessary changes to the parameters:
    • Name (required)—enter the user name. The length of the string must be 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
    • Login(required) – enter a unique user name for the user account. Must contain from 3 to 64 characters (only a–z, A–Z, 0–9, . \ - _).

      Email (required)—enter the unique email address of the user. Must be a valid email address.

  3. Select or clear the check boxes that control access rights and user capabilities:
    • Receive email notifications—select this check box if you want the user to receive SMTP notifications from KUMA.
    • Hide shared resources—select this check box if you do not want to show resources located in the shared tenant to the user.
    • Disable notifications about RuCERT messages—select this check box if you do not want the user to receive notifications about the messages in the incidents exported to RuCERT.
    • Display non-printable characters—select this check box if you want the KUMA web interface to display non-printing characters such as spaces, tab characters, and line breaks.

      Spaces and tab characters are displayed in all input fields (except Description), in normalizers, correlation rules, filters and connectors, and in SQL queries for searching events in the Events section.

      Spaces are displayed as dots.

      A tab character is displayed as a dash in normalizers, correlation rules, filters and connectors. In other fields, a tab character is displayed as one or two dots.

      Line break characters are displayed in all input fields that support multi-line input, such as the event search field.

      If the Display non-printable characters check box is selected, you can press Ctrl/Command+* to enable and disable the display of non-printing characters.

  4. If you need to change the password, click the Change password button and fill in the fields described below in the opened window. When finished, click OK.
    • Current password (required)—enter the current password of your user account.
    • New password (required)—enter a new password to your account. Password requirements:
      • 8 to 128 characters long.
      • At least one lowercase character.
      • At least one uppercase character.
      • At lease one numeral.
      • At least one of the following special characters: !, @, #, %, ^, &, *.
    • Confirm password (required)—enter the password again for confirmation.
  5. If necessary, use the Generate token button to generate an API token. Clicking this button displays the token creation window.
  6. If necessary, configure the operations that are available via the REST API by using the API access rights button.
  7. Click Save.

Your user account is changed.

Page top

[Topic 217688]

KUMA services

Services are the main components of KUMA that help the system to manage events: services allow you to receive events from event sources and subsequently bring them to a common form that is convenient for finding correlation, as well as for storage and manual analysis. Each service consists of two parts that work together:

  • One part of the service is created inside the KUMA web interface based on set of resources for services.
  • The second part of the service is installed in the network infrastructure where the KUMA system is deployed as one of its components. The server part of a service can consist of multiple instances: for example, services of the same agent or storage can be installed on multiple devices at once.

    On the server side, KUMA services are located in the /opt/kaspersky/kuma directory.

    When you install KUMA in fault-tolerant mode, only the KUMA Core is installed in the cluster. Collectors, correlators, and storages are hosted on hosts outside of the Kubernetes cluster.

Parts of services are connected to each other via the service ID.

Service types:

  • Storages are used to save events.
  • Correlators are used to analyze events and search for defined patterns.
  • Collectors are used to receive events and convert them to KUMA format.
  • Agents are used to receive events on remote devices and forward them to KUMA collectors.

In the KUMA web interface, services are displayed in the Resources Active services section in table format. The table of services can be updated using the Refresh button and sorted by columns by clicking on the active headers.

Table columns:

  • Status—service status:
    • Green means that the service is running.
    • Red means that the service is not running.
    • Yellow means that there is no connection with ClickHouse nodes (this status is applied only to storage services). The reason for this is indicated in the service log if logging was enabled.

      The table can be filtered by this setting.

  • Type—type of service: agent, collector, correlator, or storage.
  • Name—name of the service. Clicking on the name of the service opens its settings.
  • Version—service version.
  • Tenant—the name of the tenant that owns the service.
  • FQDN—fully qualified domain name of the service server.
  • IP address—IP address of the server where the service is installed.
  • API port—Remote Procedure Call port number.
  • Uptime—the time showing how long the service has been running.
  • Created—the date and time when the service was created.

You can use the Add service button to create new services based on existing resource sets for services.

We do not recommend creating services outside the main tenant without first carefully planning the inter-tenant interactions of various services and users.

You can use the buttons in the upper part of the window to do the following:

To change a service, select a service under ResourcesActive services. This opens a window with a set of resources based on which the service was created. You can edit the settings of the set of resources and save your changes. To apply the saved changes, restart the service.

If, when changing the settings of a collector resource set, you change or delete conversions in a normalizer connected to it, the edits will not be saved, and the normalizer itself may be corrupted. If you need to modify conversions in a normalizer that is already part of a service, the changes must be made directly to the normalizer under ResourcesNormalizers in the web interface.

In this section

Services tools

Service resource sets

Creating a storage

Creating a correlator

Creating a collector

Predefined collectors

Creating an agent

Page top

[Topic 217948]

Services tools

This section describes the tools for working with services available in the ResourcesActive services section of the KUMA web interface.

In this section

Getting service identifier

Restarting the service

Deleting the service

Partitions window

Searching for related events

Page top

[Topic 217885]

Getting service identifier

The service identifier is used to bind parts of the service residing within KUMA and installed in the network infrastructure into a single complex. An identifier is assigned to a service when it is created in KUMA, and is then used when installing the service to the server.

To get the identifier of a service:

  1. Log in to the KUMA web interface and open ResourcesActive services.
  2. Select the check box next to the service whose ID you want to obtain, and click Copy ID.

The identifier of the service will be copied to the clipboard. For instance, this ID can be used to install the service on a server.

Page top

[Topic 217977]

Restarting the service

To restart the service:

  1. Log in to the KUMA web interface and open ResourcesActive services.
  2. Select the check box next to the service and select the necessary option:
    • Reload—perform a hot update of a running service configuration. For example, you can change the field mapping settings or the destination point settings this way.
    • Restart—stop a service and start it again. This option is used to modify the port number or connector type.

      Restarting KUMA agents:

      • KUMA Windows Agent can be restarted as described above only if it is running on a remote computer. If the service on the remote computer is inactive, you will receive an error when trying to restart from KUMA. In that case you must restart KUMA Windows Agent service on the remote Windows machine. For information on restarting Windows services, refer to the documentation specific to the operating system version of your remote Windows computer.
      • KUMA Agent for Linux stops when this option is used. To start the agent again, you must execute the command that was used to start it.
    • Reset certificate—remove certificates that the service uses for internal communication. For example, this option can be used to renew the Core certificate.

      Special considerations for deleting Windows agent certificates:

      • If the agent has the green status and you select Reset certificate, KUMA deletes the current certificate and creates a new one, the agent continues working with the new certificate.
      • If the agent has the red status and you select Reset certificate, KUMA generates an error that the agent is not running. In the agent installation folder %APPDATA%\kaspersky\kuma\<Agent ID>\certificates, manually delete the internal.cert and internal.key files and start the agent manually. When the agent starts, a new certificate is created automatically.

      Special considerations for deleting Linux agent certificates:

      1. Regardless of the agent status, apply the Reset certificate option in the web interface to delete the certificate in the databases.
      2. In the agent installation folder /opt/kaspersky/agent/<Agent ID>/certificates, manually delete the internal.cert and internal.key files.
      3. Since the Reset certificate option stops the agent, to continue its operation, start the agent manually. When the agent starts, a new certificate is created automatically.
Page top

[Topic 217840]

Deleting the service

Before deleting the service get its ID. The ID will be required to remove the service for the server.

To remove a service in the KUMA web interface:

  1. Log in to the KUMA web interface and open ResourcesActive services.
  2. Select the check box next to the service you want to delete, and click Delete.

    A confirmation window opens.

  3. Click OK.

The service has been deleted from KUMA.

To remove a service from the server, run the following command:

sudo /opt/kaspersky/kuma/kuma <collector/correlator/storage> --id <service ID> --uninstall

The service has been deleted from the server.

Page top

[Topic 217949]

Partitions window

If the storage service was created and installed, you can view its partitions in the Partitions table.

To open Partitions table:

  1. Log in to the KUMA web interface and open ResourcesActive services.
  2. Select the check box next to the relevant storage and click Go to partitions.

The Partitions table opens.

The table has the following columns:

  • Tenant—the name of the tenant that owns the stored data.
  • Created—partition creation date.
  • Space—the name of the space.
  • Size—the size of the space.
  • Events—the number of stored events.
  • Transfer to cold storage—the date when data will be migrated from the ClickHouse clusters to cold storage disks.
  • Expires—the date when the partition expires. After this date, the partition and the events it contains are no longer available.

You can delete partitions.

To delete a partition:

  1. Open the Partitions table (see above).
  2. Open the More-DropDown drop-down list to the left from the required partition.
  3. Select Delete.

    A confirmation window opens.

  4. Click OK.

The partition has been deleted. Audit event partitions cannot be deleted.

Page top

[Topic 217989]

Searching for related events

You can search for events processed by the Correlator or the Collector services.

To search for events related to the Correlator or the Collector service:

  1. Log in to the KUMA web interface and open ResourcesActive services.
  2. Select the check box next to the required correlator or collector and click Go to Events.

    A new browser tab opens with the KUMA Events section open.

  3. To find events, click the magn-glass icon.

    A table with events selected by the search expression ServiceID = <ID of the selected service> will be displayed.

loc_events

Event search results

Page top

[Topic 220557]

Service resource sets

Service resource sets are a resource type, a KUMA component, a set of settings based on which the KUMA services are created and operate. Resource sets for services are collections of resources.

Any resources added to a set of resources must be owned by the same tenant that owns the created set of resources. An exception is the shared tenant, whose owned resources can be used in the sets of resources of other tenants.

Resource sets for services are displayed in the Resources<Resource set type for the service> section of the KUMA web interface. Available types:

  • Collectors
  • Correlators
  • Storages
  • Agents

When you select the required type, a table opens with the available sets of resources for services of this type. The resource table contains the following columns:

  • Name—the name of a resource set. Can be used for searching and sorting.
  • Updated—the date and time of the last update of the resource set. Can be used for sorting.
  • Created by—the name of the user who created the resource set.
  • Description—the description of the resource set.

Page top

[Topic 218011]

Creating a storage

A storage consists of two parts: one part is created inside the KUMA web interface, and the other part is installed on network infrastructure servers intended for storing events. The server part of a KUMA storage consists of ClickHouse nodes collected into a cluster. ClickHouse clusters can be supplemented with cold storage disks.

For each ClickHouse cluster, a separate storage must be installed.

Prior to storage creation, carefully plan the cluster structure and deploy the necessary network infrastructure. When choosing a ClickHouse cluster configuration, consider the specific event storage requirements of your organization.

It is recommended to use ext4 as the file system.

A storage is created in several steps:

  1. Creating a set of resources for a storage in the KUMA web interface
  2. Creating a storage service in the KUMA web interface
  3. Installing storage nodes in the network infrastructure

When creating storage cluster nodes, verify the network connectivity of the system and open the ports used by the components.

If the storage settings are changed, the service must be restarted.

In this section

ClickHouse cluster structure

ClickHouse cluster node settings

Cold storage of events

Creating a set of resources for a storage

Creating a storage service in the KUMA web interface

Installing a storage in the KUMA network infrastructure

Page top

[Topic 221938]

ClickHouse cluster structure

A ClickHouse cluster is a logical group of devices that possess all accumulated normalized KUMA events. It consists of one or more logical shards.

A shard is a logical group of devices that possess a specific portion of all normalized events accumulated in the cluster. It consists of one or more replicas. Increasing the number of shards lets you do the following:

  • Accumulate more events by increasing the total number of servers and disk space.
  • Absorb a larger stream of events by distributing the load associated with an influx of new events.
  • Reduce the time taken to search for events by distributing search zones among multiple devices.

A replica is a device that is a member of a logical shard and possesses a single copy of that shard's data. If multiple replicas exist, it means multiple copies exist (the data is replicated). Increasing the number of replicas lets you do the following:

  • Improve fault tolerance.
  • Distribute the total load related to data searches among multiple machines (although it's best to increase the number of shards for this purpose).

A keeper is a device that participates in coordination of data replication at the whole cluster level. At least one device per cluster must have this role. The recommended number of the devices with this role is 3. The number of devices involved in coordinating replication must be an odd number. The keeper and replica roles can be combined in one machine.

Page top

[Topic 243505]

ClickHouse cluster node settings

Prior to storage creation, carefully plan the cluster structure and deploy the necessary network infrastructure. When choosing a ClickHouse cluster configuration, consider the specific event storage requirements of your organization.

When creating ClickHouse cluster nodes, verify the network connectivity of the system and open the ports used by the components.

For each node of the ClickHouse cluster, you need to specify the following settings:

  • Fully qualified domain name (FQDN)—a unique address to access the node. Specify the entire FQDN, for example, kuma-storage.example.com.
  • Shard, replica, and keeper IDs—the combination of these settings determines the position of the node in the ClickHouse cluster structure and the node role.

Node roles

The roles of the nodes depend on the specified settings:

  • shard, replica, keeper—the node participates in the accumulation and search of normalized KUMA events and helps coordinate data replication at the cluster-wide level.
  • shard, replica—the node participates in the accumulation and search of normalized KUMA events.
  • keeper—the node does not accumulate normalized events, but helps coordinate data replication at the cluster-wide level. Dedicated keepers must be specified at the beginning of the list in the ResourcesStorages → <Storage> → Basic settingsClickHouse cluster nodes section.

ID requirements:

  • If multiple shards are created in the same cluster, the shard IDs must be unique within this cluster.
  • If multiple replicas are created in the same shard, the replica IDs must be unique within this shard.
  • The keeper IDs must be unique within the cluster.

Example of ClickHouse cluster node IDs:

  • shard 1, replica 1, keeper 1;
  • shard 1, replica 2;
  • shard 2, replica 1;
  • shard 2, replica 2, keeper 3;
  • shard 2, replica 3;
  • keeper 2.
Page top

[Topic 243503]

Cold storage of events

In KUMA, you can configure the migration of legacy data from a ClickHouse cluster to the cold storage. Cold storage can be implemented using the local disks mounted in the operating system or the Hadoop Distributed File System (HDFS). Cold storage is enabled when at least one cold storage disk is specified. If a cold storage disk is not configured and the server runs out of disk space, the storage service is stopped. If both hot storage and cold storage are configured, and space runs out on the cold storage disk, the KUMA storage service is stopped. We recommend avoiding such situations.

Cold storage disks can be added or removed.

After changing the cold storage settings, the storage service must be restarted. If the service does not start, the reason is specified in the storage log.

If the cold storage disk specified in the storage settings has become unavailable (for example, out of order), this may lead to errors in the operation of the storage service. In this case, recreate a disk with the same path (for local disks) or the same address (for HDFS disks) and then delete it from the storage settings.

Rules for moving the data to the cold storage disks

When cold storage is enabled, KUMA checks the storage terms of the spaces once an hour:

  • If the storage term for a space on a ClickHouse cluster expires, the data is moved to the cold storage disks. If a cold storage disk is misconfigured, the data is deleted.
  • If the storage term for a space on a cold storage disk expires, the data is deleted.
  • If the ClickHouse cluster disks are 95% full, the biggest partitions are automatically moved to the cold storage disks. This can happen more often than once per hour.
  • Audit events are generated when data transfer starts and ends.

During data transfer, the storage service remains operational, and its status stays green in the ResourcesActive services section of the KUMA web interface. When you hover the mouse pointer over the status icon, a message indicating the data transfer appears. When a cold storage disk is removed, the storage service has the yellow status.

Special considerations for storing and accessing events

  • When using HDFS disks for cold storage, protect your data in one of the following ways:
    • Configure a separate physical interface in the VLAN, where only HDFS disks and the ClickHouse cluster are located.
    • Configure network segmentation and traffic filtering rules that exclude direct access to the HDFS disk or interception of traffic to the disk from ClickHouse.
  • Events located in the ClickHouse cluster and on the cold storage disks are equally available in the KUMA web interface. For example, when you search for events or view events related to alerts.
  • Storing events or audit events on cold storage disks is not mandatory; to disable this functionality, specify 0 (days) in the Cold retention period or Audit cold retention period field in the storage settings.

Special considerations for using HDFS disks

  • Before connecting HDFS disks, create directories for each node of the ClickHouse cluster on them in the following format: <HDFS disk host>/<shard ID>/<replica ID>. For example, if a cluster consists of two nodes containing two replicas of the same shard, the following directories must be created:
    • hdfs://hdfs-example-1:9000/clickhouse/1/1/
    • hdfs://hdfs-example-1:9000/clickhouse/1/2/

    Events from the ClickHouse cluster nodes are migrated to the directories with names containing the IDs of their shard and replica. If you change these node settings without creating a corresponding directory on the HDFS disk, events may be lost during migration.

  • HDFS disks added to storage operate in the JBOD mode. This means that if one of the disks fails, access to the storage will be lost. When using HDFS, take fault tolerance into account and configure RAID, as well as storage of data from different replicas on different devices.
  • The speed of event recording to HDFS is usually lower than the speed of event recording to local disks. The speed of accessing events in HDFS, as a rule, is significantly lower than the speed of accessing events on local disks. When using local disks and HDFS disks at the same time, the data is written to them in turn.

In this section

Removing cold storage disks

Page top

[Topic 243504]

Removing cold storage disks

Before physically disconnecting cold storage disks, remove these disks from the storage settings.

To remove a disk from the storage settings:

  • In the KUMA web interface, under ResourcesStorages, select the relevant storage.

    This opens the storage.

  • In the window, in the Disks for cold storage section, in the required disk's group of settings, click Delete disk.

    Data from removed disk is automatically migrated to other cold storage disks or, if there are no such disks, to the ClickHouse cluster. During data migration, the storage status icon is highlighted in yellow. Audit events are generated when data transfer starts and ends.

  • After event migration is complete, the disk is automatically removed from the storage settings. It can now be safely disconnected.

Removed disks can still contain events. If you want to delete them, you can manually delete the data partitions using the DROP PARTITION command.

If the cold storage disk specified in the storage settings has become unavailable (for example, out of order), this may lead to errors in the operation of the storage service. In this case, create a disk with the same path (for local disks) or the same address (for HDFS disks) and then delete it from the storage settings.

Page top

[Topic 221257]

Creating a set of resources for a storage

In the KUMA web interface, a storage service is created based on the set of resources for the storage.

To create a set of resources for a storage in the KUMA web interface:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, under ResourcesStorages, click Add storage.

    This opens the Create storage window.

  2. On the Basic settings tab, in the Storage name field, enter a unique name for the service you are creating. The name must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
  3. In the Tenant drop-down list, select the tenant that will own the storage.
  4. You can optionally add up to 256 Unicode characters describing the service in the Description field.
  5. In the Retention period field, specify the period, in days from the moment of arrival, during which you want to store events in the ClickHouse cluster. When the specified period expires, events are automatically deleted from the ClickHouse cluster. If cold storage of events is configured, when the event storage period in the ClickHouse cluster expires, the data is moved to cold storage disks. If a cold storage disk is misconfigured, the data is deleted.
  6. In the Audit retention period field, specify the period, in days, to store audit events. The minimum value and default value is 365.
  7. If cold storage is required, specify the event storage term:
    • Cold retention period—the number of days to store events. The minimum value is 1.
    • Audit cold retention period—the number of days to store audit events. The minimum value is 0.
  8. In the Debug drop-down list, specify whether resource logging must be enabled. The default value (Disabled) means that only errors are logged for all KUMA components. If you want to obtain detailed data in the logs, select Enabled.
  9. If you want to change ClickHouse settings, in the ClickHouse configuration override field, paste the lines with settings from the ClickHouse configuration XML file /opt/kaspersky/kuma/clickhouse/cfg/config.xml. Specifying the root elements <yandex>, </yandex> is not required. Settings passed in this field are used instead of the default settings.

    Example:

    <merge_tree>

    <parts_to_delay_insert>600</parts_to_delay_insert>

    <parts_to_throw_insert>1100</parts_to_throw_insert>

    </merge_tree>

  10. If necessary, in the Spaces section, add spaces to the storage to distribute the stored events.

    There can be multiple spaces. You can add spaces by clicking the Add space button and remove them by clicking the Delete space button.

    Available settings:

    • In the Name field, specify a name for the space containing 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
    • In the Retention period field, specify the number of days to store events in the ClickHouse cluster.
    • If necessary, in the Cold retention period field, specify the number of days to store the events in the cold storage. The minimum value is 1.
    • In the Filter section, you can specify conditions to identify events that will be put into this space. You can select an existing filter from the drop-down list or create a new filter.

      Creating a filter in resources

      1. In the Filter drop-down list, select Create new.
      2. If you want to keep the filter as a separate resource, select the Save filter check box.

        In this case, you will be able to use the created filter in various services.

        This check box is cleared by default.

      3. If you selected the Save filter check box, enter a name for the created filter resource in the Name field. The name must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
      4. In the Conditions settings block, specify the conditions that the events must meet:
        1. Click the Add condition button.
        2. In the Left operand and Right operand drop-down lists, specify the search parameters.

          Depending on the data source selected in the Right operand field, you may see fields of additional parameters that you need to use to define the value that will be passed to the filter. For example, when choosing active list you will need to specify the name of the active list, the entry key, and the entry key field.

        3. In the operator drop-down list, select the relevant operator.

          Filter operators

          • =—the left operand equals the right operand.
          • <—the left operand is less than the right operand.
          • <=—the left operand is less than or equal to the right operand.
          • >—the left operand is greater than the right operand.
          • >=—the left operand is greater than or equal to the right operand.
          • inSubnet—the left operand (IP address) is in the subnet of the right operand (subnet).
          • contains—the left operand contains values of the right operand.
          • startsWith—the left operand starts with one of the values of the right operand.
          • endsWith—the left operand ends with one of the values of the right operand.
          • match—the left operand matches the regular expression of the right operand. The RE2 regular expressions are used.
          • hasBit—checks whether the left operand (string or number) contains bits whose positions are listed in the right operand (in a constant or in a list).

            The value to be checked is converted to binary and processed right to left. Chars are checked whose index is specified as a constant or a list.

            If the value being checked is a string, then an attempt is made to convert it to integer and process it in the way described above. If the string cannot be converted to a number, the filter returns False.

          • hasVulnerability—checks whether the left operand contains an asset with the vulnerability and vulnerability severity specified in the right operand.

            If you do not specify the ID and severity of the vulnerability, the filter is triggered if the asset in the event being checked has any vulnerability.

          • inActiveList—this operator has only one operand. Its values are selected in the Key fields field and are compared with the entries in the active list selected from the Active List drop-down list.
          • inContextTable checks whether or not an entry exists in the context table. This operator has only one operand. Its values are selected in the Key fields field and are compared with the values of entries in the context table selected from the drop-down list of context tables.
          • inDictionary—checks whether the specified dictionary contains an entry defined by the key composed with the concatenated values of the selected event fields.
          • inCategory—the asset in the left operand is assigned at least one of the asset categories of the right operand.
          • inActiveDirectoryGroup—the Active Directory account in the left operand belongs to one of the Active Directory groups in the right operand.
          • TIDetect—this operator is used to find events using CyberTrace Threat Intelligence (TI) data. This operator can be used only on events that have completed enrichment with data from CyberTrace Threat Intelligence. In other words, it can only be used in collectors at the destination selection stage and in correlators.
        4. If necessary, select the do not match case check box. When this check box is selected, the operator ignores the case of the values.

          The selection of this check box does not apply to the InSubnet, InActiveList, InCategory or InActiveDirectoryGroup operators.

          This check box is cleared by default.

        5. If you want to add a negative condition, select If not from the If drop-down list.
        6. You can add multiple conditions or a group of conditions.
      5. If you have added multiple conditions or groups of conditions, choose a search condition (and, or, not) by clicking the AND button.
      6. If you want to add existing filters that are selected from the Select filter drop-down list, click the Add filter button.

        You can view the nested filter settings by clicking the edit-grey button.

    After the service is created, you can view and delete spaces in the storage resource settings.

    There is no need to create a separate space for audit events. Events of this type (Type=4) are automatically placed in a separate Audit space with a storage term of at least 365 days. This space cannot be edited or deleted from the KUMA web interface.

  11. If necessary, in the Disks for cold storage section, add to the storage the disks where you want to transfer events from the ClickHouse cluster for long-term storage.

    There can be multiple disks. You can add disks by clicking the Add disk button and remove them by clicking the Delete disk button.

    Available settings:

    • In the Type drop-down list, select the type of the disk being connected:
      • Local—for the disks mounted in the operating system as directories.
      • HDFS—for the disks of the Hadoop Distributed File System.
    • In the Name field, specify the disk name. The name must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
    • If you select Local disk type, specify the absolute directory path of the mounted local disk in the Path field. The path must begin and end with a "/" character.
    • If you select HDFS disk type, specify the path to HDFS in the Host field. For example, hdfs://hdfs1:9000/clickhouse/.
  12. If necessary, in the ClickHouse cluster nodes section, add ClickHouse cluster nodes to the storage.

    There can be multiple nodes. You can add nodes by clicking the Add node button and remove them by clicking the Remove node button.

    Available settings:

    • In the FQDN field, specify the fully qualified domain name of the node being added. For example, kuma-storage-cluster1-server1.example.com.
    • In the shard, replica, and keeper ID fields, specify the role of the node in the ClickHouse cluster. The shard and keeper IDs must be unique within the cluster, the replica ID must be unique within the shard. The following example shows how to populate the ClickHouse cluster nodes section for a storage with dedicated keepers in a distributed installation. You can adapt the example to suit your needs.

      distributed

      Distributed Installation diagram

      Example:

      ClickHouse cluster nodes

      FQDN: kuma-storage-cluster1-server1.example.com

      Shard ID: 0

      Replica ID: 0

      Keeper ID: 1

      FQDN: kuma-storage-cluster1server2.example.com

      Shard ID: 0

      Replica ID: 0

      Keeper ID: 2

      FQDN: kuma-storage-cluster1server3.example.com

      Shard ID: 0

      Replica ID: 0

      Keeper ID: 3

      FQDN: kuma-storage-cluster1server4.example.com

      Shard ID: 1

      Replica ID: 1

      Keeper ID: 0

      FQDN: kuma-storage-cluster1server5.example.com

      Shard ID: 1

      Replica ID: 2

      Keeper ID: 0

      FQDN: kuma-storage-cluster1server6.example.com

      Shard ID: 2

      Replica ID: 1

      Keeper ID: 0

      FQDN: kuma-storage-cluster1server7.example.com

      Shard ID: 2

      Replica ID: 2

      Keeper ID: 0

  13. In version 2.1.3 or later, the Advanced Settings tab is available. On the Advanced settings tab, in the Buffer size field, enter the buffer size in bytes, that causes events to be sent to the database when reached. The default value is 64 MB. No maximum value is configured. If the virtual machine has less free RAM than the specified Buffer size, KUMA sets the limit to 128 MB.
  14. On the Advanced Settings tab, In the Buffer flush interval field, enter the time in seconds for which KUMA waits for the buffer to fill up. If the buffer is not full, but the specified time has passed, KUMA sends events to the database. The default value is 1 second.
  15. On the Advanced settings tab, in the Disk buffer size limit field, enter the value in bytes. The disk buffer is used to temporarily store events that could not be sent for further processing or storage. If the disk space allocated for the disk buffer is exhausted, events are rotated as follows: new events replace the oldest events written to the buffer. The default value is 10 GB.
  16. On the Advanced Settings tab, from the Disk buffer disabled drop-down list, select a value to Enable or Disable the use of the disk buffer. By default, the disk buffer is enabled.
  17. On the Advanced Settings tab, In the Write to local database table drop-down list, select Enable or Disable. Writing is disabled by default.

    In Enable mode, data is written only on the host where the storage is located. We recommend using this functionality only if you have configured balancing on the collector and/or correlator — at step 6. Routing, in the Advanced settings section, the URL selection policy field is set to Round robin.

    In Disable mode, data is distributed among the shards of the cluster.

The set of resources for the storage is created and is displayed under ResourcesStorages. Now you can create a storage service.

Page top

[Topic 221258]

Creating a storage service in the KUMA web interface

When a set of resources is created for a storage, you can proceed to create a storage service in KUMA.

To create a storage service in the KUMA web interface:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, under ResourcesActive services, click Add service.
  2. In the opened Choose a service window, select the set of resources that you just created for the storage and click Create service.

The storage service is created in the KUMA web interface and is displayed under ResourcesActive services. Now storage services must be installed to each node of the ClickHouse cluster by using the service ID.

Page top

[Topic 217905]

Installing a storage in the KUMA network infrastructure

To create a storage:

  1. Log in to the server where you want to install the service.
  2. Create the /opt/kaspersky/kuma/ folder.
  3. Copy the "kuma" file to the /opt/kaspersky/kuma/ folder. The file is located in the installer in the /kuma-ansible-installer/roles/kuma/files/ folder.

    Make sure the kuma file has sufficient rights to run.

  4. Execute the following command:

    sudo /opt/kaspersky/kuma/kuma storage --core https://<KUMA Core server FQDN>:<port used by KUMA Core for internal communication (port 7210 by default)> --id <service ID copied from the KUMA web interface> --install

    Example: sudo /opt/kaspersky/kuma/kuma storage --core https://kuma.example.com:7210 --id XXXXX --install

    When deploying several KUMA services on the same host, during the installation process you must specify unique ports for each component using the --api.port <port> parameter. The following setting values are used by default: --api.port 7221.

  5. Repeat steps 1–2 for each storage node.

The storage is installed.

Page top

[Topic 217787]

Creating a correlator

A correlator consists of two parts: one part is created inside the KUMA web interface, and the other part is installed on the network infrastructure server intended for processing events.

Actions in the KUMA web interface

A correlator is created in the KUMA web interface by using the Installation Wizard, which combines the necessary resources into a set of resources for the correlator. Upon completion of the Wizard, the service is automatically created based on this set of resources.

To create a correlator in the KUMA web interface:

Start the Correlator Installation Wizard:

  • In the KUMA web interface, under Resources, click Create correlator.
  • In the KUMA web interface, under ResourcesCorrelators, click Add correlator.

As a result of completing the steps of the Wizard, a correlator service is created in the KUMA web interface.

A resource set for a correlator includes the following resources:

These resources can be prepared in advance, or you can create them while the Installation Wizard is running.

Actions on the KUMA correlator server

If you are installing the correlator on a server that you intend to use for event processing, you need to run the command displayed at the last step of the Installation Wizard on the server. When installing, you must specify the identifier automatically assigned to the service in the KUMA web interface, as well as the port used for communication.

Testing the installation

After creating a correlator, it is recommended to make sure that it is working correctly.

In this section

Starting the Correlator Installation Wizard

Installing a correlator in a KUMA network infrastructure

Validating correlator installation

Page top

[Topic 221166]

Starting the Correlator Installation Wizard

To start the Correlator Installation Wizard:

  • In the KUMA web interface, under Resources, click Add correlator.
  • In the KUMA web interface, under ResourcesCorrelators, click Add correlator.

Follow the instructions of the Wizard.

Aside from the first and last steps of the Wizard, the steps of the Wizard can be performed in any order. You can switch between steps by using the Next and Previous buttons, as well as by clicking the names of the steps in the left side of the window.

After the Wizard completes, a resource set for the correlator is created in the KUMA web interface under ResourcesCorrelators, and a correlator service is added under ResourcesActive services.

In this section

Step 1. General correlator settings

Step 2. Global variables

Step 3. Correlation

Step 4. Enrichment

Step 5. Response rules

Step 6. Routing

Step 7. Setup validation

Page top

[Topic 221167]

Step 1. General correlator settings

This is a required step of the Installation Wizard. At this step, you specify the main settings of the correlator: the correlator name and the tenant that will own it.

To define the main settings of the correlator:

  • In the Name field, enter a unique name for the service you are creating. The name must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
  • In the Tenant drop-down list, select the tenant that will own the correlator. The tenant selection determines what resources will be available when the collector is created.

    If you return to this window from another subsequent step of the Installation Wizard and select another tenant, you will have to manually edit all the resources that you have added to the service. Only resources from the selected tenant and shared tenant can be added to the service.

  • If required, specify the number of processes that the service can run concurrently in the Workers field. By default, the number of worker processes is the same as the number of vCPUs on the server where the service is installed.
  • If necessary, use the Debug drop-down list to enable logging of service operations.
  • You can optionally add up to 256 Unicode characters describing the service in the Description field.

The main settings of the correlator are defined. Proceed to the next step of the Installation Wizard.

Page top

[Topic 233900]

Step 2. Global variables

If tracking values in event fields, active lists, or dictionaries is not enough to cover some specific security scenarios, you can use global and local variables. You can use them to take various actions on the values received by the correlators by implementing complex logic for threat detection. Variables can be assigned a specific function and then queried from correlation rules as if they were ordinary event fields, with the triggered function result received in response.

To add a global variable in the correlator,

click the Add variable button and specify the following parameters:

  • In the Variable window, enter the name of the variable.

    Variable naming requirements

    • Must be unique within the correlator.
    • Must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
    • Must not begin with the character $.
    • Must be written in camelCase or CamelCase.
  • In the Value window, enter the variable function.

    Description of variable functions.

The global variable is added. It can be queried from correlation rules by adding the $ character in front of the variable name. There can be multiple variables. Added variables can be edited or deleted by using the cross icon.

Proceed to the next step of the Installation Wizard.

Page top

[Topic 221168]

Step 3. Correlation

This is an optional but recommended step of the Installation Wizard. On the Correlation tab of the Installation Wizard, select or create correlation rules. These resources define the sequences of events that indicate security-related incidents. When these sequences are detected, the correlator creates a correlation event and an alert.

If you have added global variables to the correlator, all added correlation rules can query them.

Correlation rules that are added to the set of resources for the correlator are displayed in the table with the following columns:

  • Correlation rules—name of the correlation rule resource.
  • Type—type of correlation rule: standard, simple, operational. The table can be filtered based on the values of this column by clicking the column header and selecting the relevant values.
  • Actions—list of actions that will be performed by the correlator when the correlation rule is triggered. These actions are indicated in the correlation rule settings. The table can be filtered based on the values of this column by clicking the column header and selecting the relevant values.

    Available values:

    • Output—correlation events created by this correlation rule are transmitted to other correlator resources: enrichment, response rule, and then to other KUMA services.
    • Edit active list—the correlation rule changes the active lists.
    • Loop to correlator—the correlation event is sent to the same correlation rule for reprocessing.
    • Categorization—the correlation rule changes asset categories.
    • Event enrichment—the correlation rule is configured to enrich correlation events.
    • Do not create alert—when a correlation event is created as a result of a correlation rule triggering, no alert is created for that.
    • Shared resource—the correlation rule or the resources used in the correlation rule are located in a shared tenant.

You can use the Search field to search for a correlation rule. Added correlation rules can be removed from the set of resources by selecting the relevant rules and clicking Delete.

Selecting a correlation rule opens a window with its settings, which can be edited and then saved by clicking Save. If you click Delete in this window, the correlation rule is unlinked from the set of resources.

Use the Move up and Move down buttons to change the position of the selected correlation rules in the table. It affects their execution sequence when events are processed. Using the Move operational to top button, you can move correlation rules of the operational type to the beginning of the correlation rules list.

To link the existing correlation rules to the set of resources for the correlator:

  1. Click Link.

    The resource selection window opens.

  2. Select the relevant correlation rules and click OK.

The correlation rules will be linked to the set of resources for the correlator and will be displayed in the rules table.

To create a new correlation rule in a set of resources for a correlator:

  1. Click Add.

    The correlation rule creation window opens.

  2. Specify the correlation rule settings and click Save.

The correlation rule will be created and linked to the set of resources for the correlator. It is displayed in the correlation rules table and in the list of resources under ResourcesCorrelation rules.

Proceed to the next step of the Installation Wizard.

Page top

[Topic 221169]

Step 4. Enrichment

This is an optional step of the Installation Wizard. On the Enrichment tab of the Installation Wizard, you can select or create a enrichment rules and indicate which data from which sources you want to add to correlation events that the correlator creates. There can be more than one enrichment rule. You can add them by clicking the Add button and can remove them by clicking the cross button.

To add an existing enrichment rule to a set of resources:

  1. Click Add.

    This opens the enrichment rule settings block.

  2. In the Enrichment rule drop-down list, select the relevant resource.

The enrichment rule is added to the set of resources for the correlator.

To create a new enrichment rule in a set of resources:

  1. Click Add.

    This opens the enrichment rule settings block.

  2. In the Enrichment rule drop-down list, select Create new.
  3. In the Source kind drop-down list, select the source of data for enrichment and define its corresponding settings:
    • constant

      This type of enrichment is used when a constant needs to be added to an event field. Settings of this type of enrichment:

      • In the Constant field, specify the value that should be added to the event field. The value may not be longer than 255 Unicode characters. If you leave this field blank, the existing event field value will be cleared.
      • In the Target field drop-down list, select the KUMA event field to which you want to write the data.

    • dictionary

      This type of enrichment is used if you need to add a value from the dictionary of the Dictionary type.

      When this type is selected in the Dictionary name drop-down list, you must select the dictionary that will provide the values. In the Key fields settings block, you must use the Add field button to select the event fields whose values will be used for dictionary entry selection.

    • event

      This type of enrichment is used when you need to write a value from another event field to the current event field. Settings of this type of enrichment:

      • In the Target field drop-down list, select the KUMA event field to which you want to write the data.
      • In the Source field drop-down list, select the event field whose value will be written to the target field.
      • In the Conversion settings block, you can create rules for modifying the original data before it is written to the KUMA event fields. The conversion type can be selected from the drop-down list. You can use the Add conversion and Delete buttons to add or delete a conversion, respectively. The order of conversions is important.

        Available conversions

        Conversions are changes that can be applied to a value before it gets written to the event field. The conversion type is selected from a drop-down list.

        Available conversions:

        • lower—is used to make all characters of the value lowercase
        • upper—is used to make all characters of the value uppercase
        • regexp – used to convert a value using the regular expression RE2. When this conversion type is selected, the field appears where regular expression should be added.
        • substring—is used to extract characters in the position range specified in the Start and End fields. These fields appear when this conversion type is selected.
        • replace—is used to replace specified character sequence with the other character sequence. When this type of conversion is selected, new fields appear:
          • Replace chars—in this field you can specify the character sequence that should be replaced.
          • With chars—in this field you can specify the characters sequence should be used instead of replaced characters.
        • trim—used to simultaneously remove the characters specified in the Chars field from the leading and end positions of the value. The field appears when this type of conversion is selected. For example, a trim conversion with the Micromon value applied to Microsoft-Windows-Sysmon results in soft-Windows-Sys.
        • append is used to add the characters specified in the Constant field to the end of the event field value. The field appears when this type of conversion is selected.
        • prepend—used to prepend the characters specified in the Constant field to the start of the event field value. The field appears when this type of conversion is selected.
        • replace with regexp—is used to replace RE2 regular expression results with the character sequence.
          • Expression—in this field you can specify the regular expression which results that should be replaced.
          • With chars—in this field you can specify the characters sequence should be used instead of replaced characters.
        • Converting encoded strings to text:
          • decodeHexString—used to convert a HEX string to text.
          • decodeBase64String—used to convert a Base64 string to text.
          • decodeBase64URLString—used to convert a Base64url string to text.

          When converting a corrupted string or if conversion error occur, corrupted data may be written to the event field.

          During event enrichment, if the length of the encoded string exceeds the size of the field of the normalized event, the string is truncated and is not decoded.

          If the length of the decoded string exceeds the size of the event field into which the decoded value is to be written, such a string is truncated to fit the size of the event field.

    • template

      This type of enrichment is used when you need to write a value obtained by processing Go templates into the event field. Settings of this type of enrichment:

      • Put the Go template into the Template field.

        Event field names are passed in the {{.EventField}} format, where EventField is the name of the event field from which the value must be passed to the script.

        Example: Attack on {{.DestinationAddress}} from {{.SourceAddress}}.

      • In the Target field drop-down list, select the KUMA event field to which you want to write the data.
    • dns

      This type of enrichment is used to send requests to a private network DNS server to convert IP addresses into domain names or vice versa. IP addresses are converted to DNS names only for private addresses: 10.0.0.0/8, 172.16.0.0/12, 192.168.0.0/16, 100.64.0.0/10.

      Available settings:

      • URL—in this field, you can specify the URL of a DNS server to which you want to send requests. You can use the Add URL button to specify multiple URLs.
      • RPS—maximum number of requests sent to the server per second. The default value is 1,000.
      • Workers—maximum number of requests per one point in time. The default value is 1.
      • Max tasks—maximum number of simultaneously fulfilled requests. By default, this value is equal to the number of vCPUs of the KUMA Core server.
      • Cache TTL—the lifetime of the values stored in the cache. The default value is 60.
      • Cache disabled—you can use this drop-down list to enable or disable caching. Caching is enabled by default.
    • cybertrace

      This type of enrichment is used to add information from CyberTrace data streams to event fields.

      Available settings:

      • URL (required)—in this field, you can specify the URL of a CyberTrace server to which you want to send requests.
      • Number of connections—maximum number of connections to the CyberTrace server that can be simultaneously established by KUMA. By default, this value is equal to the number of vCPUs of the KUMA Core server.
      • RPS—maximum number of requests sent to the server per second. The default value is 1,000.
      • Timeout—amount of time to wait for a response from the CyberTrace server, in seconds. The default value is 30.
      • Mapping (required)—this settings block contains the mapping table for mapping KUMA event fields to CyberTrace indicator types. The KUMA field column shows the names of KUMA event fields, and the CyberTrace indicator column shows the types of CyberTrace indicators.

        Available types of CyberTrace indicators:

        • ip
        • url
        • hash

        In the mapping table, you must provide at least one string. You can use the Add row button to add a string, and can use the cross button to remove a string.

    • timezone

      This type of enrichment is used in collectors and correlators to assign a specific timezone to an event. Timezone information may be useful when searching for events that occurred at unusual times, such as nighttime.

      When this type of enrichment is selected, the required timezone must be selected from the Timezone drop-down list.

      Make sure that the required time zone is set on the server hosting the enrichment-utilizing service. For example, you can do this by using the timedatectl list-timezones command, which shows all time zones that are set on the server. For more details on setting time zones, please refer to your operating system documentation.

      When an event is enriched, the time offset of the selected timezone relative to Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) is written to the DeviceTimeZone event field in the +-hh:mm format. For example, if you select the Asia/Yekaterinburg timezone, the value +05:00 will be written to the DeviceTimeZone field. If the enriched event already has a value in the DeviceTimeZone field, it will be overwritten.

      By default, if the timezone is not specified in the event being processed and enrichment rules by timezone are not configured, the event is assigned the timezone of the server hosting the service (collector or correlator) that processes the event. If the server time is changed, the service must be restarted.

      Permissible time formats when enriching the DeviceTimeZone field

      When processing incoming raw events in the collector, the following time formats can be automatically converted to the +-hh:mm format:

      Time format in a processed event

      Example

      +-hh:mm

      -07:00

      +-hhmm

      -0700

      +-hh

      -07

      If the date format in the DeviceTimeZone field differs from the formats listed above, the collector server timezone is written to the field when an event is enriched with timezone information. You can create custom normalization rules for non-standard time formats.

  4. Use the Debug drop-down list to indicate whether or not to enable logging of service operations. Logging is disabled by default.
  5. In the Filter section, you can specify conditions to identify events that will be processed using the enrichment rule. You can select an existing filter from the drop-down list or create a new filter.

    Creating a filter in resources

    1. In the Filter drop-down list, select Create new.
    2. If you want to keep the filter as a separate resource, select the Save filter check box.

      In this case, you will be able to use the created filter in various services.

      This check box is cleared by default.

    3. If you selected the Save filter check box, enter a name for the created filter resource in the Name field. The name must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
    4. In the Conditions settings block, specify the conditions that the events must meet:
      1. Click the Add condition button.
      2. In the Left operand and Right operand drop-down lists, specify the search parameters.

        Depending on the data source selected in the Right operand field, you may see fields of additional parameters that you need to use to define the value that will be passed to the filter. For example, when choosing active list you will need to specify the name of the active list, the entry key, and the entry key field.

      3. In the operator drop-down list, select the relevant operator.

        Filter operators

        • =—the left operand equals the right operand.
        • <—the left operand is less than the right operand.
        • <=—the left operand is less than or equal to the right operand.
        • >—the left operand is greater than the right operand.
        • >=—the left operand is greater than or equal to the right operand.
        • inSubnet—the left operand (IP address) is in the subnet of the right operand (subnet).
        • contains—the left operand contains values of the right operand.
        • startsWith—the left operand starts with one of the values of the right operand.
        • endsWith—the left operand ends with one of the values of the right operand.
        • match—the left operand matches the regular expression of the right operand. The RE2 regular expressions are used.
        • hasBit—checks whether the left operand (string or number) contains bits whose positions are listed in the right operand (in a constant or in a list).

          The value to be checked is converted to binary and processed right to left. Chars are checked whose index is specified as a constant or a list.

          If the value being checked is a string, then an attempt is made to convert it to integer and process it in the way described above. If the string cannot be converted to a number, the filter returns False.

        • hasVulnerability—checks whether the left operand contains an asset with the vulnerability and vulnerability severity specified in the right operand.

          If you do not specify the ID and severity of the vulnerability, the filter is triggered if the asset in the event being checked has any vulnerability.

        • inActiveList—this operator has only one operand. Its values are selected in the Key fields field and are compared with the entries in the active list selected from the Active List drop-down list.
        • inContextTable checks whether or not an entry exists in the context table. This operator has only one operand. Its values are selected in the Key fields field and are compared with the values of entries in the context table selected from the drop-down list of context tables.
        • inDictionary—checks whether the specified dictionary contains an entry defined by the key composed with the concatenated values of the selected event fields.
        • inCategory—the asset in the left operand is assigned at least one of the asset categories of the right operand.
        • inActiveDirectoryGroup—the Active Directory account in the left operand belongs to one of the Active Directory groups in the right operand.
        • TIDetect—this operator is used to find events using CyberTrace Threat Intelligence (TI) data. This operator can be used only on events that have completed enrichment with data from CyberTrace Threat Intelligence. In other words, it can only be used in collectors at the destination selection stage and in correlators.
      4. If necessary, select the do not match case check box. When this check box is selected, the operator ignores the case of the values.

        The selection of this check box does not apply to the InSubnet, InActiveList, InCategory or InActiveDirectoryGroup operators.

        This check box is cleared by default.

      5. If you want to add a negative condition, select If not from the If drop-down list.
      6. You can add multiple conditions or a group of conditions.
    5. If you have added multiple conditions or groups of conditions, choose a search condition (and, or, not) by clicking the AND button.
    6. If you want to add existing filters that are selected from the Select filter drop-down list, click the Add filter button.

      You can view the nested filter settings by clicking the edit-grey button.

The new enrichment rule was added to the set of resources for the correlator.

Proceed to the next step of the Installation Wizard.

Page top

[Topic 221170]

Step 5. Response rules

This is an optional step of the Installation Wizard. On the Response rules tab of the Installation Wizard, you can select or create response rules and indicate which actions must be performed when the correlation rules are triggered. There can be multiple response rules. You can add them by clicking the Add button and can remove them by clicking the cross button.

To add an existing response rule to a set of resources:

  1. Click Add.

    The response rule settings window opens.

  2. In the Response rule drop-down list, select the relevant resource.

The response rule is added to the set of resources for the correlator.

To create a new response rule in a set of resources:

  1. Click Add.

    The response rule settings window opens.

  2. In the Response rule drop-down list, select Create new.
  3. In the Type drop-down list, select the type of response rule and define its corresponding settings:
    • KSC response—response rules for automatically launching the tasks on Kaspersky Security Center assets. For example, you can configure automatic startup of a virus scan or database update.

      Tasks are automatically started when KUMA is integrated with Kaspersky Security Center. Tasks are run only on assets that were imported from Kaspersky Security Center.

      Response settings

      • Kaspersky Security Center task (required)—name of the Kaspersky Security Center task that you need to start. Tasks must be created beforehand, and their names must begin with "KUMA ". For example, "KUMA antivirus check".

        Types of Kaspersky Security Center tasks that can be started using KUMA:

        • Update
        • Virus scan
      • Event field (required)—defines the event field of the asset for which the Kaspersky Security Center task should be started. Possible values:
        • SourceAssetID
        • DestinationAssetID
        • DeviceAssetID

      To send requests to Kaspersky Security Center, you must ensure that Kaspersky Security Center is available over the UDP protocol.

    • Run script—response rules for automatically running a script. For example, you can create a script containing commands to be executed on the KUMA server when selected events are detected.

      The script file is stored on the server where the correlator service using the response resource is installed: /opt/kaspersky/kuma/correlator/<Correlator ID>/scripts.

      The kuma user of this server requires the permissions to run the script.

      Response settings

      • Timeout—the number of seconds the system will wait before running the script.
      • Script name (required)—the name of the script file.

        If the script Response resource is linked to the Correlator service, but the is no script file in the /opt/kaspersky/kuma/correlator/<Correlator ID>/scripts folder, the service will not start.

      • Script arguments—parameters or event field values that must be passed to the script.

        If the script includes actions taken on files, you should specify the absolute path to these files.

        Parameters can be written with quotation marks (").

        Event field names are passed in the {{.EventField}} format, where EventField is the name of the event field which value must be passed to the script.

        Example: -n "\"usr\": {{.SourceUserName}}"

    • KEDR response—response rules for automatically creating prevention rules, starting network isolation, or starting the application on Kaspersky Endpoint Detection and Response and Kaspersky Security Center assets.

      Automatic response actions are carried out when KUMA is integrated with Kaspersky Endpoint Detection and Response.

      Response settings

      • Event field (required)—event field containing the asset for which the response actions are needed. Possible values:
        • SourceAssetID
        • DestinationAssetID
        • DeviceAssetID
      • Task type—response action to be performed when data matching the filter is received. The following types of response actions are available:
        • Enable network isolation.

          When selecting this type of response, you need to define values for the following settings:

          • Isolation timeout—the number of hours during which the network isolation of an asset will be active. You can indicate from 1 to 9,999 hours.

            If necessary, you can add an exclusion for network isolation.

            To add an exclusion for network isolation:

            1. Click the Add exclusion button.
            2. Select the direction of network traffic that must not be blocked:
              • Inbound.
              • Outbound.
              • Inbound/Outbound.
            3. In the Asset IP field, enter the IP address of the asset whose network traffic must not be blocked.
            4. If you selected Inbound or Outbound, specify the connection ports in the Remote ports and Local ports fields. Starting from version KATA 5.1, in the "Enable isolation" response, you cannot enter ports in the exclusion when the traffic direction is "Inbound/Outbound". Starting the response results in an error.
            5. If you want to add more than one exclusion, click Add exclusion and repeat the steps to fill in the Traffic direction, Asset IP, Remote ports and Local ports fields.
            6. If you want to delete an exclusion, click the Delete button under the relevant exclusion.

            When adding exclusions to a network isolation rule, Kaspersky Endpoint Detection and Response may incorrectly display the port values in the rule details. This does not affect application performance. For more details on viewing a network isolation rule, please refer to the Kaspersky Anti Targeted Attack Platform Help Guide.

        • Disable network isolation.
        • Add prevention rule.

          When selecting this type of response, you need to define values for the following settings:

          • Event fields to extract hash from—event fields from which KUMA extracts SHA256 or MD5 hashes of the files that must be prevented from starting.

            The selected event fields and the values selected in the Event field must be added to the inherited fields of the correlation rule.

          • File hash #1—SHA256 or MD5 hash of the file to be blocked.

          At least one of the above fields must be completed.

        • Delete prevention rule.
        • Run program.

          When selecting this type of response, you need to define values for the following settings:

          • File path—path to the file of the process that you want to start.
          • Command line parameters—parameters with which you want to start the file.
          • Working directory—directory in which the file is located at the time of startup.

          When a response rule is triggered for users with the General Administrator role, the Run program task will be displayed in the Task manager section of the program web interface. Scheduled task is displayed for this task in the Created column of the task table. You can view task completion results.

          All of the listed operations can be performed on assets that have Kaspersky Endpoint Agent for Windows. On assets that have Kaspersky Endpoint Agent for Linux, the program can only be started.

          At the software level, the capability to create prevention rules and network isolation rules for assets with Kaspersky Endpoint Agent for Linux is unlimited. KUMA and Kaspersky Endpoint Detection and Response do not provide any notifications about unsuccessful application of these rules.

    • Response via KICS for Networks—response rules for automatically starting tasks on KICS for Networks assets. For example, you can change the asset status in KICS for Networks.

      Tasks are automatically started when KUMA is integrated with KICS for Networks.

      Response settings

      • Event field (required)—event field containing the asset for which the response actions are needed. Possible values:
        • SourceAssetID
        • DestinationAssetID
        • DeviceAssetID
      • KICS for Networks task—response action to be performed when data matching the filter is received. The following types of response actions are available:
        • Change asset status to Authorized.
        • Change asset status to Unauthorized.

        When a response rule is triggered, KUMA will send KICS for Networks an API request to change the status of the specified device to Authorized or Unauthorized.

    • Response via Active Directory—response rules for changing the permissions of Active Directory users. For example, block a user.

      Tasks are started if integration with Active Directory is configured.

      Response settings

      • Account ID source—event field, source of the Active Directory account ID value. Possible values:
        • SourceAccountID
        • DestinationAccountID
      • AD command—command that is applied to the account when the response rule is triggered. Available values:
        • Add account to group
        • Remove account from group
        • Reset account password
        • Block account
  • In the Workers field, specify the number of processes that the service can run simultaneously.

    By default, the number of workers is the same as the number of virtual processors on the server where the service is installed.

    This field is optional.

  1. In the Filter section, you can specify conditions to identify events that will be processed using the response rule. You can select an existing filter from the drop-down list or create a new filter.

    Creating a filter in resources

    1. In the Filter drop-down list, select Create new.
    2. If you want to keep the filter as a separate resource, select the Save filter check box.

      In this case, you will be able to use the created filter in various services.

      This check box is cleared by default.

    3. If you selected the Save filter check box, enter a name for the created filter resource in the Name field. The name must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
    4. In the Conditions settings block, specify the conditions that the events must meet:
      1. Click the Add condition button.
      2. In the Left operand and Right operand drop-down lists, specify the search parameters.

        Depending on the data source selected in the Right operand field, you may see fields of additional parameters that you need to use to define the value that will be passed to the filter. For example, when choosing active list you will need to specify the name of the active list, the entry key, and the entry key field.

      3. In the operator drop-down list, select the relevant operator.

        Filter operators

        • =—the left operand equals the right operand.
        • <—the left operand is less than the right operand.
        • <=—the left operand is less than or equal to the right operand.
        • >—the left operand is greater than the right operand.
        • >=—the left operand is greater than or equal to the right operand.
        • inSubnet—the left operand (IP address) is in the subnet of the right operand (subnet).
        • contains—the left operand contains values of the right operand.
        • startsWith—the left operand starts with one of the values of the right operand.
        • endsWith—the left operand ends with one of the values of the right operand.
        • match—the left operand matches the regular expression of the right operand. The RE2 regular expressions are used.
        • hasBit—checks whether the left operand (string or number) contains bits whose positions are listed in the right operand (in a constant or in a list).

          The value to be checked is converted to binary and processed right to left. Chars are checked whose index is specified as a constant or a list.

          If the value being checked is a string, then an attempt is made to convert it to integer and process it in the way described above. If the string cannot be converted to a number, the filter returns False.

        • hasVulnerability—checks whether the left operand contains an asset with the vulnerability and vulnerability severity specified in the right operand.

          If you do not specify the ID and severity of the vulnerability, the filter is triggered if the asset in the event being checked has any vulnerability.

        • inActiveList—this operator has only one operand. Its values are selected in the Key fields field and are compared with the entries in the active list selected from the Active List drop-down list.
        • inContextTable checks whether or not an entry exists in the context table. This operator has only one operand. Its values are selected in the Key fields field and are compared with the values of entries in the context table selected from the drop-down list of context tables.
        • inDictionary—checks whether the specified dictionary contains an entry defined by the key composed with the concatenated values of the selected event fields.
        • inCategory—the asset in the left operand is assigned at least one of the asset categories of the right operand.
        • inActiveDirectoryGroup—the Active Directory account in the left operand belongs to one of the Active Directory groups in the right operand.
        • TIDetect—this operator is used to find events using CyberTrace Threat Intelligence (TI) data. This operator can be used only on events that have completed enrichment with data from CyberTrace Threat Intelligence. In other words, it can only be used in collectors at the destination selection stage and in correlators.
      4. If necessary, select the do not match case check box. When this check box is selected, the operator ignores the case of the values.

        The selection of this check box does not apply to the InSubnet, InActiveList, InCategory or InActiveDirectoryGroup operators.

        This check box is cleared by default.

      5. If you want to add a negative condition, select If not from the If drop-down list.
      6. You can add multiple conditions or a group of conditions.
    5. If you have added multiple conditions or groups of conditions, choose a search condition (and, or, not) by clicking the AND button.
    6. If you want to add existing filters that are selected from the Select filter drop-down list, click the Add filter button.

      You can view the nested filter settings by clicking the edit-grey button.

The new response rule was added to the set of resources for the correlator.

Proceed to the next step of the Installation Wizard.

Page top

[Topic 221171]

Step 6. Routing

This is an optional step of the Installation Wizard. On the Routing tab of the Installation Wizard, you can select or create destinations with settings indicating the forwarding destination of events created by the correlator. Events from a correlator are usually redirected to storage so that they can be saved and later viewed if necessary. Events can be sent to other locations as needed. There can be more than one destination point.

To add an existing destination to a set of resources for a correlator:

  1. In the Add destination drop-down list, select the type of destination resource you want to add:
    • Select Storage if you want to configure forwarding of processed events to the storage.
    • Select Correlator if you want to configure forwarding of processed events to a correlator.
    • Select Other if you want to send events to other locations.

      This type of resource includes correlator and storage services that were created in previous versions of the program.

    The Add destination window opens where you can specify parameters for events forwarding.

  2. In the Destination drop-down list, select the necessary destination.

    The window name changes to Edit destination, and it displays the settings of the selected resource. The resource can be opened for editing in a new browser tab using the edit-grey button.

  3. Click Save.

The selected destination is displayed on the Installation Wizard tab. A destination resource can be removed from the resource set by selecting it and clicking Delete in the opened window.

To add a new destination to a set of resources for a correlator:

  1. In the Add destination drop-down list, select the type of destination resource you want to add:
    • Select Storage if you want to configure forwarding of processed events to the storage.
    • Select Correlator if you want to configure forwarding of processed events to a correlator.
    • Select Other if you want to send events to other locations.

      This type of resource includes correlator and storage services that were created in previous versions of the program.

    The Add destination window opens where you can specify parameters for events forwarding.

  2. Specify the settings on the Basic settings tab:
    • In the Destination drop-down list, select Create new.
    • In the Name field, enter a unique name for the destination resource. The name must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
    • Use the Disabled toggle button to specify whether events will be sent to this destination. By default, sending events is enabled.
    • Select the Type for the destination resource:
      • Select storage if you want to configure forwarding of processed events to the storage.
      • Select correlator if you want to configure forwarding of processed events to a correlator.
      • Select nats-jetstream, tcp, http, kafka, or file if you want to configure sending events to other locations.
    • Specify the URL to which events should be sent in the hostname:<API port> format.

      You can specify multiple destination addresses using the URL button for all types except nats-jetstream and file.

    • For the nats-jetstream and kafka types, use the Topic field to specify which topic the data should be written to. The topic must contain Unicode characters. The Kafka topic is limited to 255 characters.
  3. If required, define the settings on the Advanced settings tab. The available settings vary based on the selected destination resource type:
    • Compression is a drop-down list where you can enable Snappy compression. By default, compression is disabled.
    • Proxy is a drop-down list for proxy server selection.
    • The Buffer size field is used to set buffer size (in bytes) for the destination. The default value is 1 MB, and the maximum value is 64 MB.
    • Timeout field is used to set the timeout (in seconds) for another service or component response. The default value is 30.
    • Disk buffer size limit field is used to specify the size of the disk buffer in bytes. The default size is 10 GB.
    • Cluster ID is the ID of the NATS cluster.
    • TLS mode is a drop-down list where you can specify the conditions for using TLS encryption:
      • Disabled (default)—do not use TLS encryption.
      • Enabled—encryption is enabled, but without verification.
      • With verification—use encryption with verification that the certificate was signed with the KUMA root certificate. The root certificate and key of KUMA are created automatically during program installation and are stored on the KUMA Core server in the folder /opt/kaspersky/kuma/core/certificates/.

      When using TLS, it is impossible to specify an IP address as a URL.

    • URL selection policy is a drop-down list in which you can select a method for determining which URL to send events to if several URLs have been specified:
      • Any. Events are sent to one of the available URLs as long as this URL receives events. If the connection is broken (for example, the receiving node is disconnected) a different URL will be selected as the events destination.
      • Prefer first. Events are sent to the first URL in the list of added addresses. If it becomes unavailable, events are sent to the next available node in sequence. When the first URL becomes available again, events start to be sent to it again.
      • Round robin. Packets with events will be evenly distributed among available URLs from the list. Because packets are sent either on a destination buffer overflow or on the flush timer, this URL selection policy does not guarantee an equal distribution of events to destinations.
    • Delimiter is used to specify the character delimiting the events. By default, \n is used.
    • Path—the file path if the file destination type is selected.
    • Buffer flush interval—this field is used to set the time interval (in seconds) at which the data is sent to the destination. The default value is 100.
    • Workers—this field is used to set the number of services processing the queue. By default, this value is equal to the number of vCPUs of the KUMA Core server.
    • You can set health checks using the Health check path and Health check timeout fields. You can also disable health checks by selecting the Health Check Disabled check box.
    • Debug—a drop-down list where you can specify whether resource logging should be enabled. By default it is Disabled.
    • The Disk buffer disabled drop-down list is used to enable or disable the use of a disk buffer. By default, the disk buffer is disabled.
    • In the Filter section, you can specify the conditions to define events that will be processed by this resource. You can select an existing filter from the drop-down list or create a new filter.

      Creating a filter in resources

      1. In the Filter drop-down list, select Create new.
      2. If you want to keep the filter as a separate resource, select the Save filter check box.

        In this case, you will be able to use the created filter in various services.

        This check box is cleared by default.

      3. If you selected the Save filter check box, enter a name for the created filter resource in the Name field. The name must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
      4. In the Conditions settings block, specify the conditions that the events must meet:
        1. Click the Add condition button.
        2. In the Left operand and Right operand drop-down lists, specify the search parameters.

          Depending on the data source selected in the Right operand field, you may see fields of additional parameters that you need to use to define the value that will be passed to the filter. For example, when choosing active list you will need to specify the name of the active list, the entry key, and the entry key field.

        3. In the operator drop-down list, select the relevant operator.

          Filter operators

          • =—the left operand equals the right operand.
          • <—the left operand is less than the right operand.
          • <=—the left operand is less than or equal to the right operand.
          • >—the left operand is greater than the right operand.
          • >=—the left operand is greater than or equal to the right operand.
          • inSubnet—the left operand (IP address) is in the subnet of the right operand (subnet).
          • contains—the left operand contains values of the right operand.
          • startsWith—the left operand starts with one of the values of the right operand.
          • endsWith—the left operand ends with one of the values of the right operand.
          • match—the left operand matches the regular expression of the right operand. The RE2 regular expressions are used.
          • hasBit—checks whether the left operand (string or number) contains bits whose positions are listed in the right operand (in a constant or in a list).

            The value to be checked is converted to binary and processed right to left. Chars are checked whose index is specified as a constant or a list.

            If the value being checked is a string, then an attempt is made to convert it to integer and process it in the way described above. If the string cannot be converted to a number, the filter returns False.

          • hasVulnerability—checks whether the left operand contains an asset with the vulnerability and vulnerability severity specified in the right operand.

            If you do not specify the ID and severity of the vulnerability, the filter is triggered if the asset in the event being checked has any vulnerability.

          • inActiveList—this operator has only one operand. Its values are selected in the Key fields field and are compared with the entries in the active list selected from the Active List drop-down list.
          • inContextTable checks whether or not an entry exists in the context table. This operator has only one operand. Its values are selected in the Key fields field and are compared with the values of entries in the context table selected from the drop-down list of context tables.
          • inDictionary—checks whether the specified dictionary contains an entry defined by the key composed with the concatenated values of the selected event fields.
          • inCategory—the asset in the left operand is assigned at least one of the asset categories of the right operand.
          • inActiveDirectoryGroup—the Active Directory account in the left operand belongs to one of the Active Directory groups in the right operand.
          • TIDetect—this operator is used to find events using CyberTrace Threat Intelligence (TI) data. This operator can be used only on events that have completed enrichment with data from CyberTrace Threat Intelligence. In other words, it can only be used in collectors at the destination selection stage and in correlators.
        4. If necessary, select the do not match case check box. When this check box is selected, the operator ignores the case of the values.

          The selection of this check box does not apply to the InSubnet, InActiveList, InCategory or InActiveDirectoryGroup operators.

          This check box is cleared by default.

        5. If you want to add a negative condition, select If not from the If drop-down list.
        6. You can add multiple conditions or a group of conditions.
      5. If you have added multiple conditions or groups of conditions, choose a search condition (and, or, not) by clicking the AND button.
      6. If you want to add existing filters that are selected from the Select filter drop-down list, click the Add filter button.

        You can view the nested filter settings by clicking the edit-grey button.

  4. Click Save.

The created destination resource is displayed on the Installation Wizard tab. A destination resource can be removed from the resource set by selecting it and clicking Delete in the opened window.

Proceed to the next step of the Installation Wizard.

Page top

[Topic 221172]

Step 7. Setup validation

This is the required, final step of the Installation Wizard. At this step, KUMA creates a service resource set, and the Services are created automatically based on this set:

  • The set of resources for the correlator is displayed under ResourcesCorrelators. It can be used to create new correlator services. When this set of resources changes, all services that operate based on this set of resources will start using the new parameters after the services restart. To do so, you can use the Save and restart services and Save and update service configurations buttons.

    A set of resources can be modified, copied, moved from one folder to another, deleted, imported, and exported, like other resources.

  • Services are displayed in ResourcesActive services. The services created using the Installation Wizard perform functions inside the KUMA program. To communicate with external parts of the network infrastructure, you need to install similar external services on the servers and assets intended for them. For example, an external correlator service should be installed on a server intended to process events, external storage services should be installed on servers with a deployed ClickHouse service, and external agent services should be installed on Windows assets that must both receive and forward Windows events.

To finish the Installation Wizard:

  1. Click Create and save service.

    The Setup validation tab of the Installation Wizard displays a table of services created based on the set of resources selected in the Installation Wizard. The lower part of the window shows examples of commands that you must use to install external equivalents of these services on their intended servers and assets.

    For example:

    /opt/kaspersky/kuma/kuma correlator --core https://kuma-example:<port used for communication with the KUMA Core> --id <service ID> --api.port <port used for communication with the service> --install

    The "kuma" file can be found inside the installer in the /kuma-ansible-installer/roles/kuma/files/ directory.

    The port for communication with the KUMA Core, the service ID, and the port for communication with the service are added to the command automatically. You should also ensure the network connectivity of the KUMA system and open the ports used by its components if necessary.

  2. Close the Wizard by clicking Save.

The correlator service is created in KUMA. Now the equivalent service must be installed on the server intended for processing events.

Page top

[Topic 221173]

Installing a correlator in a KUMA network infrastructure

A correlator consists of two parts: one part is created inside the KUMA web interface, and the other part is installed on the network infrastructure server intended for processing events. The second part of the correlator is installed in the network infrastructure.

To install a correlator:

  1. Log in to the server where you want to install the service.
  2. Create the /opt/kaspersky/kuma/ folder.
  3. Copy the "kuma" file to the /opt/kaspersky/kuma/ folder. The file is located in the installer in the /kuma-ansible-installer/roles/kuma/files/ folder.

    Make sure the kuma file has sufficient rights to run.

  4. Execute the following command:

    sudo /opt/kaspersky/kuma/kuma correlator --core https://<KUMA Core server FQDN>:<port used by KUMA Core server for internal communication (port 7210 by default)> --id <service ID copied from the KUMA web interface> --api.port <port used for communication with the installed component> --install

    Example: sudo /opt/kaspersky/kuma/kuma correlator --core https://kuma.example.com:7210 --id XXXX --api.port YYYY --install

    You can copy the correlator installation command at the last step of the Installation Wizard. It automatically specifies the address and port of the KUMA Core server, the identifier of the correlator to be installed, and the port that the correlator uses for communication. Before installation, ensure the network connectivity of KUMA components.

    When deploying several KUMA services on the same host, during the installation process you must specify unique ports for each component using the --api.port <port> parameter. The following setting values are used by default: --api.port 7221.

The correlator is installed. You can use it to analyze events for threats.

Page top

[Topic 221404]

Validating correlator installation

To verify that the correlator is ready to receive events:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, open ResourcesActive services.
  2. Make sure that the correlator you installed has the green status.

If the events that are fed into the correlator contain events that meet the correlation rule filter conditions, the events tab will show events with the DeviceVendor=Kaspersky and DeviceProduct=KUMA parameters. The name of the triggered correlation rule will be displayed as the name of these correlation events.

If no correlation events are found

You can create a simpler version of your correlation rule to find possible errors. Use a simple correlation rule and a single Output action. It is recommended to create a filter to find events that are regularly received by KUMA.

When updating, adding, or removing a correlation rule, you must reload the correlator to update its configuration.

When you finish testing your correlation rules, you must remove all testing and temporary correlation rules from KUMA and reload the correlator.

Page top

[Topic 217765]

Creating a collector

A collector consists of two parts: one part is created inside the KUMA web interface, and the other part is installed on a server in the network infrastructure intended for receiving events.

Actions in the KUMA web interface

The creation of a collector in the KUMA web interface is carried out by using the Installation Wizard. This Wizard combines the required resources into a set of resources for a collector. Upon completion of the Wizard, the service itself is automatically created based on this set of resources.

To create a collector in the KUMA web interface,

Start the Collector Installation Wizard:

  • In the KUMA web interface, in the Resources section, click Add event source button.
  • In the KUMA web interface in the ResourcesCollectors section click Add collector button.

As a result of completing the steps of the Wizard, a collector service is created in the KUMA web interface.

A resource set for a collector includes the following resources:

These resources can be prepared in advance, or you can create them while the Installation Wizard is running.

Actions on the KUMA Collector Server

When installing the collector on the server that you intend to use for receiving events, run the command displayed at the last step of the Installation Wizard. When installing, you must specify the identifier automatically assigned to the service in the KUMA web interface, as well as the port used for communication.

Testing the installation

After creating a collector, you are advised to make sure that it is working correctly.

In this section

Starting the Collector Installation Wizard

Installing a collector in a KUMA network infrastructure

Validating collector installation

Ensuring uninterrupted collector operation

Page top

[Topic 220707]

Starting the Collector Installation Wizard

A collector consists of two parts: one part is created inside the KUMA web interface, and the other part is installed on the network infrastructure server intended for receiving events. The Installation Wizard creates the first part of the collector.

To start the Collector Installation Wizard:

  • In the KUMA web interface, in the Resources section, click Add event source.
  • In the KUMA web interface in the ResourcesCollectors section click Add collector.

Follow the instructions of the Wizard.

loc_creating_collector

Event Source Connection Wizard

Aside from the first and last steps of the Wizard, the steps of the Wizard can be performed in any order. You can switch between steps by using the Next and Previous buttons, as well as by clicking the names of the steps in the left side of the window.

After the Wizard completes, a resource set for a collector is created in the KUMA web interface under ResourcesCollectors, and a collector service is added under ResourcesActive services.

In this section

Step 1. Connect event sources

Step 2. Transportation

Step 3. Event parsing

Step 4. Filtering events

Step 5. Event aggregation

Step 6. Event enrichment

Step 7. Routing

Step 8. Setup validation

Page top

[Topic 220710]

Step 1. Connect event sources

This is a required step of the Installation Wizard. At this step, you specify the main settings of the collector: its name and the tenant that will own it.

To specify the basic settings of the collector:

  1. In the Collector name field, enter a unique name for the service you are creating. The name must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.

    When certain types of collectors are created, agents named "agent: <Collector name>, auto created" are also automatically created together with the collectors. If this type of agent was previously created and has not been deleted, it will be impossible to create a collector named <Collector name>. If this is the case, you will have to either specify a different name for the collector or delete the previously created agent.

  2. In the Tenant drop-down list, select the tenant that will own the collector. The tenant selection determines what resources will be available when the collector is created.

    If you return to this window from another subsequent step of the Installation Wizard and select another tenant, you will have to manually edit all the resources that you have added to the service. Only resources from the selected tenant and shared tenant can be added to the service.

  3. If required, specify the number of processes that the service can run concurrently in the Workers field. By default, the number of worker processes is the same as the number of vCPUs on the server where the service is installed.
  4. If necessary, use the Debug drop-down list to enable logging of service operations.

    Error messages of the collector service are logged even when debug mode is disabled. The log can be viewed on the machine where the collector is installed, in the /opt/kaspersky/kuma/collector/<collector ID>/log/collector directory.

  5. You can optionally add up to 256 Unicode characters describing the service in the Description field.

The main settings of the collector are specified. Proceed to the next step of the Installation Wizard.

Page top

[Topic 220711]

Step 2. Transportation

This is a required step of the Installation Wizard. On the Transport tab of the Installation Wizard, select or create a connector with settings indicating from where the collector service must receive events.

To add an existing connector to a resource set,

select the name of the required connector from the Connector drop-down list.

The Transport tab of the Installation Wizard will display the settings of the selected connector. You can open the selected connector for editing in a new browser tab using the edit-grey button.

To create a new connector:

  1. Select Create new from the Connector drop-down list.
  2. In the Type drop-down list, select the connector type and define its settings on the Basic settings and Advanced settings tabs. The available settings depend on the selected type of connector:

    When using the tcp or udp connector type at the normalization stage, IP addresses of the assets from which the events were received will be written in the DeviceAddress event field if it is empty.

    When using a wmi or wec connector, agents will be automatically created for receiving Windows events.

    It is recommended to use the default encoding (UTF-8), and to apply other settings only if bit characters are received in the fields of events.

    Making KUMA collectors to listen on ports up to 1,000 requires running the service of the relevant collector with root privileges. To do this, after installing the collector, add the line AmbientCapabilities = CAP_NET_BIND_SERVICE to its systemd configuration file in the [Service] section.
    The systemd file is located in the /usr/lib/systemd/system/kuma-collector-<collector ID>.service directory.

The connector is added to the resource set of the collector. The created connector is only available in this resource set and is not displayed in the web interface ResourcesConnectors section.

Proceed to the next step of the Installation Wizard.

Page top

[Topic 220712]

Step 3. Event parsing

This is a required step of the Installation Wizard. On the Event parsing tab of the Installation Wizard, select or create a normalizer whose settings will define the rules for converting raw events into normalized events. You can add multiple event parsing rules to the normalizer to implement complex event processing logic.

When creating a new normalizer in the Installation Wizard, by default it is saved in the set of resources for the collector and cannot be used in other collectors. You can use the Save normalizer check box to create a normalizer as a separate resource.

If, when changing the settings of a collector resource set, you change or delete conversions in a normalizer connected to it, the edits will not be saved, and the normalizer itself may be corrupted. If you need to modify conversions in a normalizer that is already part of a service, the changes must be made directly to the normalizer under ResourcesNormalizers in the web interface.

Adding a normalizer

To add an existing normalizer to a resource set:

  1. Click the Add event parsing button.

    The Event parsing window will open with the normalizer settings and an active Normalization scheme tab.

  2. In the Normalizer drop-down list, select the required normalizer.

    The Event parsing window will display the parameters of the selected normalizer. You can open the selected normalizer for editing in a new browser tab using the edit-grey button.

  3. Click OK.

The normalizer is displayed as a dark circle on the Event parsing tab of the Installation Wizard. Clicking on the circle will open the normalizer options for editing. When you hover over the circle, a plus sign is displayed: click on it to add more normalizers (see below).

To create a new normalizer:

  1. Select Create new from the Normalizer drop-down list.

    The Event parsing window will open with the normalizer settings and an active Normalization scheme tab.

  2. If you want to keep the normalizer as a separate resource, select the Save normalizer check box. This check box is cleared by default.
  3. In the Name field, enter a unique name for the normalizer. The name must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
  4. In the Parsing method drop-down list, select the type of events to receive. Depending on your choice, you can use the preconfigured rules for matching event fields or set your own rules. When you select some parsing methods, additional parameter fields required for filling in may become available.

    Available parsing methods:

    • json

      This parsing method is used to process JSON data where each object, including its nested objects, occupies a single line in a file.

      When processing files with hierarchically arranged data, you can access the fields of nested objects by specifying the names of the parameters dividing them by a period. For example, the username parameter from the string "user": {"username": "system: node: example-01"} can be accessed by using the user.username query.

      Files are processed line by line. Multi-line objects with nested structures may be normalized incorrectly.

      In complex normalization schemes where additional normalizers are used, all nested objects are processed at the first normalization level, except for cases when the extra normalization conditions are not specified and, therefore, the event being processed is passed to the additional normalizer in its entirety.

      Newline characters can be \n and \r\n. Strings must be UTF-8 encoded.

    • cef

      This parsing method is used to process CEF data.

      When choosing this method, you can use the preconfigured rules for converting events to the KUMA format by clicking the Apply default mapping button.

    • regexp

      This parsing method is used to create custom rules for processing data in a format using regular expressions.

      In the Normalization parameter block field, add a regular expression (RE2 syntax) with named capture groups. The name of a group and its value will be interpreted as the field and the value of the raw event, which can be converted into an event field in KUMA format.

      To add event handling rules:

      1. Copy an example of the data you want to process to the Event examples field. This is an optional but recommended step.
      2. In the Normalization parameter block field add a regular expression with named capture groups in RE2 syntax, for example "(?P<name>regexp)". The regular expression added to the Normalization parameter must exactly match the event. Also, when developing the regular expression, it is recommended to use special characters that match the starting and ending positions of the text: ^, $.

        You can add multiple regular expressions by using the Add regular expression button. If you need to remove the regular expression, use the cross button.

      3. Click the Copy field names to the mapping table button.

        Capture group names are displayed in the KUMA field column of the Mapping table. Now you can select the corresponding KUMA field in the column next to each capture group. Otherwise, if you named the capture groups in accordance with the CEF format, you can use the automatic CEF mapping by selecting the Use CEF syntax for normalization check box.

      Event handling rules were added.

    • syslog

      This parsing method is used to process data in syslog format.

      When choosing this method, you can use the preconfigured rules for converting events to the KUMA format by clicking the Apply default mapping button.

    • csv

      This parsing method is used to create custom rules for processing CSV data.

      When choosing this method, you must specify the separator of values in the string in the Delimiter field. Any single-byte ASCII character can be used as a delimiter.

    • kv

      This parsing method is used to process data in key-value pair format.

      If you select this method, you must provide values in the following required fields:

      • Pair delimiter—specify a character that will serve as a delimiter for key-value pairs. You can specify any one-character (1 byte) value, provided that the character does not match the value delimiter.
      • Value delimiter—specify a character that will serve as a delimiter between the key and the value. You can specify any one-character (1 byte) value, provided that the character does not match the delimiter of key-value pairs.
    • xml

      This parsing method is used to process XML data in which each object, including its nested objects, occupies a single line in a file. Files are processed line by line.

      When this method is selected in the parameter block XML attributes you can specify the key attributes to be extracted from tags. If an XML structure has several attributes with different values in the same tag, you can indicate the necessary value by specifying its key in the Source column of the Mapping table.

      To add key XML attributes,

      Click the Add field button, and in the window that appears, specify the path to the required attribute.

      You can add more than one attribute. Attributes can be removed one at a time using the cross icon or all at once using the Reset button.

      If XML key attributes are not specified, then in the course of field mapping the unique path to the XML value will be represented by a sequence of tags.

      Tag numbering

      Tag numbering is available as of KUMA 2.1.3. This functionality allows automatically numbering tags in XML events, which lets you parse an event with identical tags or unnamed tags, such as <Data>.

      As an example, we will use the Tag numbering functionality to number the tags of the EventData attribute of Microsoft Windows PowerShell event ID 800.

      PowerShell Event ID 800

      To parse such events, you must:

      • Configure tag numbering.
      • Configure data mapping for numbered tags with KUMA event fields.

      Simultaneous use of XML attributes and Tag numbering leads to incorrect operation of the normalizer. If an attribute contains unnamed tags or the identical tags, we recommend using the Tag numbering functionality. If the attribute contains only named tags, use XML attributes.

      To configure parsing of events with identically named or unnamed tags:

      1. Create a new normalizer or open an existing normalizer for editing.
      2. In the Basic event parsing window of the normalizer, in the Parsing method drop-down list, select 'xml' and in the Tag numbering field, click Add field.

        In the displayed field, enter the full path to the tag to whose elements you want to assign a number. For example, Event.EventData.Data. The first number to be assigned to a tag is 0. If the tag is empty, for example, <Data />, it is also assigned a number.

      3. To configure data mapping, under Mapping, click Add row and do the following:
        1. In the new row, in the Source field, enter the full path to the tag and its index. For the Microsoft Windows event from the example above, the full path with indices look like this:
          • Event.EventData.Data.0
          • Event.EventData.Data.1
          • Event.EventData.Data.2 and so on
        2. In the KUMA field drop-down list, select the field in the KUMA event that will receive the value from the numbered tag after parsing.
      4. To save changes:
        • If you created a new normalizer, click Save.
        • If you edited an existing normalizer, click Update configuration in the collector to which the normalizer is linked.

      Parsing is configured.

    • netflow5

      This parsing method is used to process data in the NetFlow v5 format.

      When choosing this method, you can use the preconfigured rules for converting events to the KUMA format by clicking the Apply default mapping button.

      In mapping rules, the protocol type for netflow5 is not indicated in the fields of KUMA events by default. When parsing data in NetFlow format on the Enrichment normalizer tab, you should create a constant data enrichment rule that adds the netflow value to the DeviceProduct target field.

    • netflow9

      This parsing method is used to process data in the NetFlow v9 format.

      When choosing this method, you can use the preconfigured rules for converting events to the KUMA format by clicking the Apply default mapping button.

      In mapping rules, the protocol type for netflow9 is not indicated in the fields of KUMA events by default. When parsing data in NetFlow format on the Enrichment normalizer tab, you should create a constant data enrichment rule that adds the netflow value to the DeviceProduct target field.

    • sflow5

      This parsing method is used to process data in sFlow5 format.

      When choosing this method, you can use the preconfigured rules for converting events to the KUMA format by clicking the Apply default mapping button.

    • ipfix

      This parsing method is used to process IPFIX data.

      When choosing this method, you can use the preconfigured rules for converting events to the KUMA format by clicking the Apply default mapping button.

      In mapping rules, the protocol type for ipfix is not indicated in the fields of KUMA events by default. When parsing data in NetFlow format on the Enrichment normalizer tab, you should create a constant data enrichment rule that adds the netflow value to the DeviceProduct target field.

    • sql—this method becomes available only when using a sql type connector.

      The normalizer uses this method to process data obtained by making a selection from the database.

  5. In the Keep raw event drop-down list, specify whether to store the original raw event in the newly created normalized event. Available values:
    • Don't save—do not save the raw event. This is the default setting.
    • Only errors—save the raw event in the Raw field of the normalized event if errors occurred when parsing it. This value is convenient to use when debugging a service. In this case, every time an event has a non-empty Raw field, you know there was a problem.
    • Always—always save the raw event in the Raw field of the normalized event.
  6. In the Keep extra fields drop-down list, choose whether you want to store the raw event fields in the normalized event if no mapping rules have been configured for them (see below). The data is stored in the Extra event field. By default, fields are not saved.
  7. Copy an example of the data you want to process to the Event examples field. This is an optional but recommended step.
  8. Configure the mapping of the raw event fields to event fields in KUMA format In the Mapping table:
    1. In the Source column, provide the name of the raw event field that you want to convert into the KUMA event field.

      Clicking the wrench-new button next to the field names in the Source column opens the Conversion window, in which you can use the Add conversion button to create rules for modifying the original data before they are written to the KUMA event fields.

      Available conversions

      Conversions are changes that can be applied to a value before it gets written to the event field. The conversion type is selected from a drop-down list.

      Available conversions:

      • lower—is used to make all characters of the value lowercase
      • upper—is used to make all characters of the value uppercase
      • regexp – used to convert a value using the regular expression RE2. When this conversion type is selected, the field appears where regular expression should be added.
      • substring—is used to extract characters in the position range specified in the Start and End fields. These fields appear when this conversion type is selected.
      • replace—is used to replace specified character sequence with the other character sequence. When this type of conversion is selected, new fields appear:
        • Replace chars—in this field you can specify the character sequence that should be replaced.
        • With chars—in this field you can specify the characters sequence should be used instead of replaced characters.
      • trim—used to simultaneously remove the characters specified in the Chars field from the leading and end positions of the value. The field appears when this type of conversion is selected. For example, a trim conversion with the Micromon value applied to Microsoft-Windows-Sysmon results in soft-Windows-Sys.
      • append is used to add the characters specified in the Constant field to the end of the event field value. The field appears when this type of conversion is selected.
      • prepend—used to prepend the characters specified in the Constant field to the start of the event field value. The field appears when this type of conversion is selected.
      • replace with regexp—is used to replace RE2 regular expression results with the character sequence.
        • Expression—in this field you can specify the regular expression which results that should be replaced.
        • With chars—in this field you can specify the characters sequence should be used instead of replaced characters.
      • Converting encoded strings to text:
        • decodeHexString—used to convert a HEX string to text.
        • decodeBase64String—used to convert a Base64 string to text.
        • decodeBase64URLString—used to convert a Base64url string to text.

        When converting a corrupted string or if conversion error occur, corrupted data may be written to the event field.

        During event enrichment, if the length of the encoded string exceeds the size of the field of the normalized event, the string is truncated and is not decoded.

        If the length of the decoded string exceeds the size of the event field into which the decoded value is to be written, such a string is truncated to fit the size of the event field.

      In the Conversion window, you can swap the added rules by dragging them by the DragIcon icon; you can also delete them using the cross-black icon.

    2. In the KUMA field column, select the required KUMA event field from the drop-down list. You can search for fields by entering their names in the field.
    3. If the name of the KUMA event field selected at the previous step begins with DeviceCustom* or Flex*, you can add a unique custom label in the Label field.

    New table rows can be added by using the Add row button. Rows can be deleted individually using the cross button or all at once using the Clear all button.

    If you have loaded data into the Event examples field, the table will have an Examples column containing examples of values carried over from the raw event field to the KUMA event field.

  9. Click OK.

The normalizer is displayed as a dark circle on the Event parsing tab of the Installation Wizard. Clicking the circle opens its settings for editing. When you hover the mouse over the circle, a plus sign is displayed. Click it to add event parsing rules (see below).

Enriching normalized events with additional data

You can add additional data to newly created normalized events by creating enrichment rules in the normalizer. These enrichment rules are stored in the normalizer where they were created. There can be more than one enrichment rule.

To add enrichment rules to the normalizer:

  1. Select the main or additional normalization rule, and in the window that opens click the Enrichment tab.
  2. Click the Add enrichment button.

    The enrichment rule parameter block appears. You can delete the group of settings using the cross-black button.

  3. Select the enrichment type from the Source kind drop-down list. Depending on the selected type, you may see advanced settings that will also need to be completed.

    Available Enrichment rule source types:

    • constant

      This type of enrichment is used when a constant needs to be added to an event field. Settings of this type of enrichment:

      • In the Constant field, specify the value that should be added to the event field. The value may not be longer than 255 Unicode characters. If you leave this field blank, the existing event field value will be cleared.
      • In the Target field drop-down list, select the KUMA event field to which you want to write the data.

    • dictionary

      This type of enrichment is used if you need to add a value from the dictionary of the Dictionary type.

      When this type is selected in the Dictionary name drop-down list, you must select the dictionary that will provide the values. In the Key fields settings block, you must use the Add field button to select the event fields whose values will be used for dictionary entry selection.

    • table

      This type of enrichment is used if you need to add a value from the dictionary of the Table type.

      When this enrichment type is selected in the Dictionary name drop-down list, select the dictionary for providing the values. In the Key fields group of settings, use the Add field button to select the event fields whose values are used for dictionary entry selection.

      In the Mapping table, configure the dictionary fields to provide data and the event fields to receive data:

      • In the Dictionary field column, select the dictionary field. The available fields depend on the selected dictionary resource.
      • In the KUMA field column, select the event field to which the value is written. For some of the selected fields (*custom* and *flex*), in the Label column, you can specify a name for the data written to them.

      New table rows can be added by using the Add new element button. Columns can be deleted using the cross button.

    • event

      This type of enrichment is used when you need to write a value from another event field to the current event field. Settings of this type of enrichment:

      • In the Target field drop-down list, select the KUMA event field to which you want to write the data.
      • In the Source field drop-down list, select the event field whose value will be written to the target field.
      • Clicking the wrench-new button opens the Conversion window in which you can, using the Add conversion button, create rules for modifying the original data before writing them to the KUMA event fields.

        Available conversions

        Conversions are changes that can be applied to a value before it gets written to the event field. The conversion type is selected from a drop-down list.

        Available conversions:

        • lower—is used to make all characters of the value lowercase
        • upper—is used to make all characters of the value uppercase
        • regexp – used to convert a value using the regular expression RE2. When this conversion type is selected, the field appears where regular expression should be added.
        • substring—is used to extract characters in the position range specified in the Start and End fields. These fields appear when this conversion type is selected.
        • replace—is used to replace specified character sequence with the other character sequence. When this type of conversion is selected, new fields appear:
          • Replace chars—in this field you can specify the character sequence that should be replaced.
          • With chars—in this field you can specify the characters sequence should be used instead of replaced characters.
        • trim—used to simultaneously remove the characters specified in the Chars field from the leading and end positions of the value. The field appears when this type of conversion is selected. For example, a trim conversion with the Micromon value applied to Microsoft-Windows-Sysmon results in soft-Windows-Sys.
        • append is used to add the characters specified in the Constant field to the end of the event field value. The field appears when this type of conversion is selected.
        • prepend—used to prepend the characters specified in the Constant field to the start of the event field value. The field appears when this type of conversion is selected.
        • replace with regexp—is used to replace RE2 regular expression results with the character sequence.
          • Expression—in this field you can specify the regular expression which results that should be replaced.
          • With chars—in this field you can specify the characters sequence should be used instead of replaced characters.
        • Converting encoded strings to text:
          • decodeHexString—used to convert a HEX string to text.
          • decodeBase64String—used to convert a Base64 string to text.
          • decodeBase64URLString—used to convert a Base64url string to text.

          When converting a corrupted string or if conversion error occur, corrupted data may be written to the event field.

          During event enrichment, if the length of the encoded string exceeds the size of the field of the normalized event, the string is truncated and is not decoded.

          If the length of the decoded string exceeds the size of the event field into which the decoded value is to be written, such a string is truncated to fit the size of the event field.

    • template

      This type of enrichment is used when you need to write a value obtained by processing Go templates into the event field. Settings of this type of enrichment:

      • Put the Go template into the Template field.

        Event field names are passed in the {{.EventField}} format, where EventField is the name of the event field from which the value must be passed to the script.

        Example: Attack on {{.DestinationAddress}} from {{.SourceAddress}}.

      • In the Target field drop-down list, select the KUMA event field to which you want to write the data.
  4. In the Target field drop-down list, select the KUMA event field to which you want to write the data.

    This setting is not available for the enrichment source of the Table type.

  5. Click OK.

Event enrichment rules with the additional data are added to the normalizer, to the selected parsing rule.

Creating a structure of event normalization rules

To implement a complex event processing logic, you can add multiple event parsing rules to the normalizer. Events are transmitted between the parsing rules depending on the specified conditions. The sequence of creating parsing rules is important. The event is processed sequentially, and its path is shown using arrows.

To create an additional parsing rule:

  1. Create a normalizer (see above).

    The created normalizer will be displayed in the window as a dark circle.

  2. Hover the mouse over the circle and click the plus sign button that appears.
  3. In the Additional event parsing window that opens, specify the parameters of the additional event parsing rule:
    • Extra normalization conditions tab:

      To send only the events with a specific field to the additional normalizer, specify this field in the Field to pass into normalizer field.

      On this tab, you can also define other conditions. When these conditions are met, the event is sent for additional parsing.

    • Normalization scheme tab:

      On this tab, you can configure event processing rules, similar to the main normalizer settings (see above). The Keep raw event setting is not available. The Event examples field displays the values specified when the initial normalizer was created.

    • Enrichment tab:

      On this tab, you can configure event enrichment rules (see above).

  4. Click OK.

The additional parsing rule is added to the normalizer. It is displayed as a dark block with the conditions under which this rule is triggered. You can change the settings of the additional parsing rule by clicking it. If you hover the mouse over the additional parsing rule, a plus button appears. You can use this button to create a new additional parsing rule. To delete a normalizer, use the button with the trash icon.

The upper right corner of the window contains a search window where you can search parsing rules by name.

Proceed to the next step of the Installation Wizard.

Page top

[Topic 220713]

Step 4. Filtering events

This is an optional step of the Installation Wizard. The Event filtering tab of the Installation Wizard allows you to select or create a filter whose settings specify the conditions for selecting events. You can add multiple filters to the collector. You can swap the filters by dragging them by the DragIcon icon as well as delete them. Filters are combined by the AND operator.

To add an existing filter to a collector resource set,

Click the Add filter button and select the required filter from the Filter drop-down menu.

To add a new filter to the collector resource set:

  1. Click the Add filter button and select Create new from the Filter drop-down menu.
  2. If you want to keep the filter as a separate resource, select the Save filter check box. This can be useful if you decide to reuse the same filter across different services. This check box is cleared by default.
  3. If you selected the Save filter check box, enter a name for the created filter in the Name field. The name must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
  4. In the Conditions section, specify the conditions that must be met by the filtered events:
    • The Add condition button is used to add filtering conditions. You can select two values (two operands, left and right) and assign the operation you want to perform with the selected values. The result of the operation is either True or False.
      • In the operator drop-down list, select the function to be performed by the filter.

        In this drop-down list, you can select the do not match case check box if the operator should ignore the case of values. This check box is ignored if the InSubnet, InActiveList, InCategory, and InActiveDirectoryGroup operators are selected. This check box is cleared by default.

        Filter operators

        • =—the left operand equals the right operand.
        • <—the left operand is less than the right operand.
        • <=—the left operand is less than or equal to the right operand.
        • >—the left operand is greater than the right operand.
        • >=—the left operand is greater than or equal to the right operand.
        • inSubnet—the left operand (IP address) is in the subnet of the right operand (subnet).
        • contains—the left operand contains values of the right operand.
        • startsWith—the left operand starts with one of the values of the right operand.
        • endsWith—the left operand ends with one of the values of the right operand.
        • match—the left operand matches the regular expression of the right operand. The RE2 regular expressions are used.
        • hasBit—checks whether the left operand (string or number) contains bits whose positions are listed in the right operand (in a constant or in a list).

          The value to be checked is converted to binary and processed right to left. Chars are checked whose index is specified as a constant or a list.

          If the value being checked is a string, then an attempt is made to convert it to integer and process it in the way described above. If the string cannot be converted to a number, the filter returns False.

        • hasVulnerability—checks whether the left operand contains an asset with the vulnerability and vulnerability severity specified in the right operand.

          If you do not specify the ID and severity of the vulnerability, the filter is triggered if the asset in the event being checked has any vulnerability.

        • inActiveList—this operator has only one operand. Its values are selected in the Key fields field and are compared with the entries in the active list selected from the Active List drop-down list.
        • inContextTable checks whether or not an entry exists in the context table. This operator has only one operand. Its values are selected in the Key fields field and are compared with the values of entries in the context table selected from the drop-down list of context tables.
        • inDictionary—checks whether the specified dictionary contains an entry defined by the key composed with the concatenated values of the selected event fields.
        • inCategory—the asset in the left operand is assigned at least one of the asset categories of the right operand.
        • inActiveDirectoryGroup—the Active Directory account in the left operand belongs to one of the Active Directory groups in the right operand.
        • TIDetect—this operator is used to find events using CyberTrace Threat Intelligence (TI) data. This operator can be used only on events that have completed enrichment with data from CyberTrace Threat Intelligence. In other words, it can only be used in collectors at the destination selection stage and in correlators.
      • In the Left operand and Right operand drop-down lists, select where the data to be filtered will come from. As a result of the selection, Advanced settings will appear. Use them to determine the exact value that will be passed to the filter. For example, when choosing active list you will need to specify the name of the active list, the entry key, and the entry key field.
      • You can use the If drop-down list to choose whether you need to create a negative filter condition.

      Conditions can be deleted using the cross button.

    • The Add group button is used to add groups of conditions. Operator AND can be switched between AND, OR, and NOT values.

      A condition group can be deleted using the cross button.

    • By clicking Add filter, you can add existing filters selected in the Select filter drop-down list to the conditions. You can click edit-grey to navigate to a nested filter.

      A nested filter can be deleted using the cross button.

The filter has been added.

Proceed to the next step of the Installation Wizard.

Page top

[Topic 220714]

Step 5. Event aggregation

This is an optional step of the Installation Wizard. The Event aggregation tab of the Installation Wizard allows you to select or create an aggregation rule whose settings specify the conditions for aggregating events of the same type. You can add multiple aggregation rules to the collector.

To add an existing aggregation rule to a set of collector resources,

click Add aggregation rule and select Aggregation rule in the drop-down list.

To add a new aggregation rule to a set of collector resources:

  1. Click the Add aggregation rule button and select Create new from the Aggregation rule drop-down menu.
  2. Enter the name of the newly created aggregation rule in the Name field. The name must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
  3. In the Threshold field, specify how many events must be accumulated before the aggregation rule triggers and the events are aggregated. The default value is 100.
  4. In the Triggered rule lifetime field, specify how long (in seconds) the collector must accumulate events to be aggregated. When this time expires, the aggregation rule is triggered and a new aggregation event is created. The default value is 60.
  5. In the Identical fields section, use the Add field button to select the fields that will be used to identify the same types of events. Selected events can be deleted using the buttons with a cross icon.
  6. In the Unique fields section, you can click Add field to select the fields that will disqualify events from aggregation even if the events contain fields listed in the Identical fields section. Selected events can be deleted using the buttons with a cross icon.
  7. In the Sum fields section, you can use the Add field button to select the fields whose values will be summed during the aggregation process. Selected events can be deleted using the buttons with a cross icon.
  8. In the Filter section, you can specify the conditions to define events that will be processed by this resource. You can select an existing filter from the drop-down list or create a new filter.

    Creating a filter in resources

    1. In the Filter drop-down list, select Create new.
    2. If you want to keep the filter as a separate resource, select the Save filter check box.

      In this case, you will be able to use the created filter in various services.

      This check box is cleared by default.

    3. If you selected the Save filter check box, enter a name for the created filter resource in the Name field. The name must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
    4. In the Conditions settings block, specify the conditions that the events must meet:
      1. Click the Add condition button.
      2. In the Left operand and Right operand drop-down lists, specify the search parameters.

        Depending on the data source selected in the Right operand field, you may see fields of additional parameters that you need to use to define the value that will be passed to the filter. For example, when choosing active list you will need to specify the name of the active list, the entry key, and the entry key field.

      3. In the operator drop-down list, select the relevant operator.

        Filter operators

        • =—the left operand equals the right operand.
        • <—the left operand is less than the right operand.
        • <=—the left operand is less than or equal to the right operand.
        • >—the left operand is greater than the right operand.
        • >=—the left operand is greater than or equal to the right operand.
        • inSubnet—the left operand (IP address) is in the subnet of the right operand (subnet).
        • contains—the left operand contains values of the right operand.
        • startsWith—the left operand starts with one of the values of the right operand.
        • endsWith—the left operand ends with one of the values of the right operand.
        • match—the left operand matches the regular expression of the right operand. The RE2 regular expressions are used.
        • hasBit—checks whether the left operand (string or number) contains bits whose positions are listed in the right operand (in a constant or in a list).

          The value to be checked is converted to binary and processed right to left. Chars are checked whose index is specified as a constant or a list.

          If the value being checked is a string, then an attempt is made to convert it to integer and process it in the way described above. If the string cannot be converted to a number, the filter returns False.

        • hasVulnerability—checks whether the left operand contains an asset with the vulnerability and vulnerability severity specified in the right operand.

          If you do not specify the ID and severity of the vulnerability, the filter is triggered if the asset in the event being checked has any vulnerability.

        • inActiveList—this operator has only one operand. Its values are selected in the Key fields field and are compared with the entries in the active list selected from the Active List drop-down list.
        • inContextTable checks whether or not an entry exists in the context table. This operator has only one operand. Its values are selected in the Key fields field and are compared with the values of entries in the context table selected from the drop-down list of context tables.
        • inDictionary—checks whether the specified dictionary contains an entry defined by the key composed with the concatenated values of the selected event fields.
        • inCategory—the asset in the left operand is assigned at least one of the asset categories of the right operand.
        • inActiveDirectoryGroup—the Active Directory account in the left operand belongs to one of the Active Directory groups in the right operand.
        • TIDetect—this operator is used to find events using CyberTrace Threat Intelligence (TI) data. This operator can be used only on events that have completed enrichment with data from CyberTrace Threat Intelligence. In other words, it can only be used in collectors at the destination selection stage and in correlators.
      4. If necessary, select the do not match case check box. When this check box is selected, the operator ignores the case of the values.

        The selection of this check box does not apply to the InSubnet, InActiveList, InCategory or InActiveDirectoryGroup operators.

        This check box is cleared by default.

      5. If you want to add a negative condition, select If not from the If drop-down list.
      6. You can add multiple conditions or a group of conditions.
    5. If you have added multiple conditions or groups of conditions, choose a search condition (and, or, not) by clicking the AND button.
    6. If you want to add existing filters that are selected from the Select filter drop-down list, click the Add filter button.

      You can view the nested filter settings by clicking the edit-grey button.

Aggregation rule added. You can delete it using the cross button.

Proceed to the next step of the Installation Wizard.

Page top

[Topic 220715]

Step 6. Event enrichment

This is an optional step of the Installation Wizard. On the Event enrichment tab of the Installation Wizard, you can specify which data from which sources should be added to events processed by the collector. Events can be enriched with data obtained using enrichment rules or LDAP.

Rule-based enrichment

There can be more than one enrichment rule. You can add them by clicking the Add enrichment button and can remove them by clicking the cross button. You can use existing enrichment rules or create rules directly in the Installation Wizard.

To add an existing enrichment rule to a set of resources:

  1. Click Add enrichment.

    This opens the enrichment rules settings block.

  2. In the Enrichment rule drop-down list, select the relevant resource.

The enrichment rule is added to the set of resources for the collector.

To create a new enrichment rule in a set of resources:

  1. Click Add enrichment.

    This opens the enrichment rules settings block.

  2. In the Enrichment rule drop-down list, select Create new.
  3. In the Source kind drop-down list, select the source of data for enrichment and define its corresponding settings:
    • constant

      This type of enrichment is used when a constant needs to be added to an event field. Settings of this type of enrichment:

      • In the Constant field, specify the value that should be added to the event field. The value may not be longer than 255 Unicode characters. If you leave this field blank, the existing event field value will be cleared.
      • In the Target field drop-down list, select the KUMA event field to which you want to write the data.

    • dictionary

      This type of enrichment is used if you need to add a value from the dictionary of the Dictionary type.

      When this type is selected in the Dictionary name drop-down list, you must select the dictionary that will provide the values. In the Key fields settings block, you must use the Add field button to select the event fields whose values will be used for dictionary entry selection.

    • event

      This type of enrichment is used when you need to write a value from another event field to the current event field. Settings of this type of enrichment:

      • In the Target field drop-down list, select the KUMA event field to which you want to write the data.
      • In the Source field drop-down list, select the event field whose value will be written to the target field.
      • In the Conversion settings block, you can create rules for modifying the original data before it is written to the KUMA event fields. The conversion type can be selected from the drop-down list. You can use the Add conversion and Delete buttons to add or delete a conversion, respectively. The order of conversions is important.

        Available conversions

        Conversions are changes that can be applied to a value before it gets written to the event field. The conversion type is selected from a drop-down list.

        Available conversions:

        • lower—is used to make all characters of the value lowercase
        • upper—is used to make all characters of the value uppercase
        • regexp – used to convert a value using the regular expression RE2. When this conversion type is selected, the field appears where regular expression should be added.
        • substring—is used to extract characters in the position range specified in the Start and End fields. These fields appear when this conversion type is selected.
        • replace—is used to replace specified character sequence with the other character sequence. When this type of conversion is selected, new fields appear:
          • Replace chars—in this field you can specify the character sequence that should be replaced.
          • With chars—in this field you can specify the characters sequence should be used instead of replaced characters.
        • trim—used to simultaneously remove the characters specified in the Chars field from the leading and end positions of the value. The field appears when this type of conversion is selected. For example, a trim conversion with the Micromon value applied to Microsoft-Windows-Sysmon results in soft-Windows-Sys.
        • append is used to add the characters specified in the Constant field to the end of the event field value. The field appears when this type of conversion is selected.
        • prepend—used to prepend the characters specified in the Constant field to the start of the event field value. The field appears when this type of conversion is selected.
        • replace with regexp—is used to replace RE2 regular expression results with the character sequence.
          • Expression—in this field you can specify the regular expression which results that should be replaced.
          • With chars—in this field you can specify the characters sequence should be used instead of replaced characters.
        • Converting encoded strings to text:
          • decodeHexString—used to convert a HEX string to text.
          • decodeBase64String—used to convert a Base64 string to text.
          • decodeBase64URLString—used to convert a Base64url string to text.

          When converting a corrupted string or if conversion error occur, corrupted data may be written to the event field.

          During event enrichment, if the length of the encoded string exceeds the size of the field of the normalized event, the string is truncated and is not decoded.

          If the length of the decoded string exceeds the size of the event field into which the decoded value is to be written, such a string is truncated to fit the size of the event field.

    • template

      This type of enrichment is used when you need to write a value obtained by processing Go templates into the event field. Settings of this type of enrichment:

      • Put the Go template into the Template field.

        Event field names are passed in the {{.EventField}} format, where EventField is the name of the event field from which the value must be passed to the script.

        Example: Attack on {{.DestinationAddress}} from {{.SourceAddress}}.

      • In the Target field drop-down list, select the KUMA event field to which you want to write the data.
    • dns

      This type of enrichment is used to send requests to a private network DNS server to convert IP addresses into domain names or vice versa. IP addresses are converted to DNS names only for private addresses: 10.0.0.0/8, 172.16.0.0/12, 192.168.0.0/16, 100.64.0.0/10.

      Available settings:

      • URL—in this field, you can specify the URL of a DNS server to which you want to send requests. You can use the Add URL button to specify multiple URLs.
      • RPS—maximum number of requests sent to the server per second. The default value is 1,000.
      • Workers—maximum number of requests per one point in time. The default value is 1.
      • Max tasks—maximum number of simultaneously fulfilled requests. By default, this value is equal to the number of vCPUs of the KUMA Core server.
      • Cache TTL—the lifetime of the values stored in the cache. The default value is 60.
      • Cache disabled—you can use this drop-down list to enable or disable caching. Caching is enabled by default.
    • cybertrace

      This type of enrichment is used to add information from CyberTrace data streams to event fields.

      Available settings:

      • URL (required)—in this field, you can specify the URL of a CyberTrace server to which you want to send requests.
      • Number of connections—maximum number of connections to the CyberTrace server that can be simultaneously established by KUMA. By default, this value is equal to the number of vCPUs of the KUMA Core server.
      • RPS—maximum number of requests sent to the server per second. The default value is 1,000.
      • Timeout—amount of time to wait for a response from the CyberTrace server, in seconds. The default value is 30.
      • Mapping (required)—this settings block contains the mapping table for mapping KUMA event fields to CyberTrace indicator types. The KUMA field column shows the names of KUMA event fields, and the CyberTrace indicator column shows the types of CyberTrace indicators.

        Available types of CyberTrace indicators:

        • ip
        • url
        • hash

        In the mapping table, you must provide at least one string. You can use the Add row button to add a string, and can use the cross button to remove a string.

    • timezone

      This type of enrichment is used in collectors and correlators to assign a specific timezone to an event. Timezone information may be useful when searching for events that occurred at unusual times, such as nighttime.

      When this type of enrichment is selected, the required timezone must be selected from the Timezone drop-down list.

      Make sure that the required time zone is set on the server hosting the enrichment-utilizing service. For example, you can do this by using the timedatectl list-timezones command, which shows all time zones that are set on the server. For more details on setting time zones, please refer to your operating system documentation.

      When an event is enriched, the time offset of the selected timezone relative to Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) is written to the DeviceTimeZone event field in the +-hh:mm format. For example, if you select the Asia/Yekaterinburg timezone, the value +05:00 will be written to the DeviceTimeZone field. If the enriched event already has a value in the DeviceTimeZone field, it will be overwritten.

      By default, if the timezone is not specified in the event being processed and enrichment rules by timezone are not configured, the event is assigned the timezone of the server hosting the service (collector or correlator) that processes the event. If the server time is changed, the service must be restarted.

      Permissible time formats when enriching the DeviceTimeZone field

      When processing incoming raw events in the collector, the following time formats can be automatically converted to the +-hh:mm format:

      Time format in a processed event

      Example

      +-hh:mm

      -07:00

      +-hhmm

      -0700

      +-hh

      -07

      If the date format in the DeviceTimeZone field differs from the formats listed above, the collector server timezone is written to the field when an event is enriched with timezone information. You can create custom normalization rules for non-standard time formats.

    • geographic data

      This type of enrichment is used to add IP address geographic data to event fields. Learn more about linking IP addresses to geographic data.

      When this type is selected, in the Mapping geographic data to event fields settings block, you must specify from which event field the IP address will be read, select the required attributes of geographic data, and define the event fields in which geographic data will be written:

      1. In the Event field with IP address drop-down list, select the event field from which the IP address is read. Geographic data uploaded to KUMA is matched against this IP address.

        You can use the Add event field with IP address button to specify multiple event fields with IP addresses that require geographic data enrichment. You can delete event fields added in this way by clicking the Delete event field with IP address button.

        When the SourceAddress, DestinationAddress, and DeviceAddress event fields are selected, the Apply default mapping button becomes available. You can use this button to add preconfigured mapping pairs of geographic data attributes and event fields.

      2. For each event field you need to read the IP address from, select the type of geographic data and the event field to which the geographic data should be written.

        You can use the Add geodata attribute button to add field pairs for Geodata attributeEvent field to write to. You can also configure different types of geographic data for one IP address to be written to different event fields. To delete a field pair, click cross-red.

        • In the Geodata attribute field, select which geographic data corresponding to the read IP address should be written to the event. Available geographic data attributes: Country, Region, City, Longitude, Latitude.
        • In the Event field to write to, select the event field which the selected geographic data attribute must be written to.

        You can write identical geographic data attributes to different event fields. If you configure multiple geographic data attributes to be written to the same event field, the event will be enriched with the last mapping in the sequence.

  4. Use the Debug drop-down list to indicate whether or not to enable logging of service operations. Logging is disabled by default.
  5. In the Filter section, you can specify conditions to identify events that will be processed by the enrichment rule resource. You can select an existing filter from the drop-down list or create a new filter.

    Creating a filter in resources

    1. In the Filter drop-down list, select Create new.
    2. If you want to keep the filter as a separate resource, select the Save filter check box.

      In this case, you will be able to use the created filter in various services.

      This check box is cleared by default.

    3. If you selected the Save filter check box, enter a name for the created filter resource in the Name field. The name must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
    4. In the Conditions settings block, specify the conditions that the events must meet:
      1. Click the Add condition button.
      2. In the Left operand and Right operand drop-down lists, specify the search parameters.

        Depending on the data source selected in the Right operand field, you may see fields of additional parameters that you need to use to define the value that will be passed to the filter. For example, when choosing active list you will need to specify the name of the active list, the entry key, and the entry key field.

      3. In the operator drop-down list, select the relevant operator.

        Filter operators

        • =—the left operand equals the right operand.
        • <—the left operand is less than the right operand.
        • <=—the left operand is less than or equal to the right operand.
        • >—the left operand is greater than the right operand.
        • >=—the left operand is greater than or equal to the right operand.
        • inSubnet—the left operand (IP address) is in the subnet of the right operand (subnet).
        • contains—the left operand contains values of the right operand.
        • startsWith—the left operand starts with one of the values of the right operand.
        • endsWith—the left operand ends with one of the values of the right operand.
        • match—the left operand matches the regular expression of the right operand. The RE2 regular expressions are used.
        • hasBit—checks whether the left operand (string or number) contains bits whose positions are listed in the right operand (in a constant or in a list).

          The value to be checked is converted to binary and processed right to left. Chars are checked whose index is specified as a constant or a list.

          If the value being checked is a string, then an attempt is made to convert it to integer and process it in the way described above. If the string cannot be converted to a number, the filter returns False.

        • hasVulnerability—checks whether the left operand contains an asset with the vulnerability and vulnerability severity specified in the right operand.

          If you do not specify the ID and severity of the vulnerability, the filter is triggered if the asset in the event being checked has any vulnerability.

        • inActiveList—this operator has only one operand. Its values are selected in the Key fields field and are compared with the entries in the active list selected from the Active List drop-down list.
        • inContextTable checks whether or not an entry exists in the context table. This operator has only one operand. Its values are selected in the Key fields field and are compared with the values of entries in the context table selected from the drop-down list of context tables.
        • inDictionary—checks whether the specified dictionary contains an entry defined by the key composed with the concatenated values of the selected event fields.
        • inCategory—the asset in the left operand is assigned at least one of the asset categories of the right operand.
        • inActiveDirectoryGroup—the Active Directory account in the left operand belongs to one of the Active Directory groups in the right operand.
        • TIDetect—this operator is used to find events using CyberTrace Threat Intelligence (TI) data. This operator can be used only on events that have completed enrichment with data from CyberTrace Threat Intelligence. In other words, it can only be used in collectors at the destination selection stage and in correlators.
      4. If necessary, select the do not match case check box. When this check box is selected, the operator ignores the case of the values.

        The selection of this check box does not apply to the InSubnet, InActiveList, InCategory or InActiveDirectoryGroup operators.

        This check box is cleared by default.

      5. If you want to add a negative condition, select If not from the If drop-down list.
      6. You can add multiple conditions or a group of conditions.
    5. If you have added multiple conditions or groups of conditions, choose a search condition (and, or, not) by clicking the AND button.
    6. If you want to add existing filters that are selected from the Select filter drop-down list, click the Add filter button.

      You can view the nested filter settings by clicking the edit-grey button.

The new enrichment rule was added to the set of resources for the collector.

LDAP enrichment

To enable enrichment using LDAP:

  1. Click Add enrichment with LDAP data.

    This opens the settings block for LDAP enrichment.

  2. In the LDAP accounts mapping settings block, use the New domain button to specify the domain of the user accounts. You can specify multiple domains.
  3. In the LDAP mapping table, define the rules for mapping KUMA fields to LDAP attributes:
    • In the KUMA field column, indicate the KUMA event field which data should be compared to LDAP attribute.
    • In the LDAP attribute column, specify the attribute that must be compared with the KUMA event field. The drop-down list contains standard attributes and can be augmented with custom attributes.

      Before configuring event enrichment using custom attributes, make sure that custom attributes are configured in AD.

      To enrich events with accounts using custom attributes:

      1. Add Custom AD Account Attributes in the LDAP connection settings.

        Standard imported attributes from AD cannot be added as custom attributes. For example, if you add the standard accountExpires attribute as a custom attribute, KUMA returns an error when saving the connection settings.

        The following account attributes can be requested from Active Directory:

        • accountExpires
        • badPasswordTime
        • cn
        • co
        • company
        • department
        • description
        • displayName
        • distinguishedName
        • division
        • employeeID
        • givenName
        • l
        • lastLogon
        • lastLogonTimestamp
        • Mail
        • mailNickname
        • managedObjects
        • manager
        • memberOf (this attribute can be used for search during correlation)
        • mobile
        • name
        • objectCategory
        • objectGUID (this attribute always requested from Active Directory even if a user doesn't specify it)
        • objectSID
        • physicalDeliveryOfficeName
        • pwdLastSet
        • sAMAccountName
        • sAMAccountType
        • sn
        • streetAddress
        • telephoneNumber
        • title
        • userAccountControl
        • UserPrincipalName
        • whenChanged
        • whenCreated

        After you add custom attributes in the LDAP connection settings, the LDAP attribute to receive drop-down list in the collector automatically includes the new attributes. Custom attributes are identified by a question mark next to the attribute name. If you added the same attribute for multiple domains, the attribute is listed only once in the drop-down list. You can view the domains by moving your cursor over the question mark. Domain names are displayed as links. If you click a link, the domain is automatically added to LDAP accounts mapping if it was not previously added.

        If you deleted a custom attribute in the LDAP connection settings, manually delete the row containing the attribute from the mapping table in the collector. Account attribute information in KUMA is updated each time you import accounts.  

      2. Import accounts.
      3. In the collector, in the LDAP mapping table, define the rules for mapping KUMA fields to LDAP attributes.
      4. Restart the collector.

        After the collector is restarted, KUMA begins enriching events with accounts.

         

    • In the KUMA event field to write to column, specify in which field of the KUMA event the ID of the user account imported from LDAP should be placed if the mapping was successful.

    You can use the Add row button to add a string to the table, and can use the cross button to remove a string. You can use the Apply default mapping button to fill the mapping table with standard values.

Event enrichment rules for data received from LDAP were added to the group of resources for the collector.

If you add an enrichment to an existing collector using LDAP or change the enrichment settings, you must stop and restart the service.

Proceed to the next step of the Installation Wizard.

Page top

[Topic 220716]

Step 7. Routing

This is an optional step of the Installation Wizard. On the Routing tab of the Installation Wizard, you can select or create destinations with settings indicating the forwarding destination of events processed by the collector. Typically, events from the collector are routed to two points: to the correlator to analyze and search for threats; and to the storage, both for storage and so that processed events can be viewed later. Events can be sent to other locations as needed. There can be more than one destination point.

To add an existing destination to a collector resource set:

  1. In the Add destination drop-down list, select the type of destination resource you want to add:
    • Select Storage if you want to configure forwarding of processed events to the storage.
    • Select Correlator if you want to configure forwarding of processed events to a correlator.
    • Select Other if you want to send events to other locations.

      This type of resource includes correlator and storage services that were created in previous versions of the program.

    The Add destination window opens where you can specify parameters for events forwarding.

  2. In the Destination drop-down list, select the necessary destination.

    The window name changes to Edit destination, and it displays the settings of the selected resource. To open the settings of a destination for editing in a new browser tab, click edit-grey.

  3. Click Save.

The selected destination is displayed on the Installation Wizard tab. A destination resource can be removed from the resource set by selecting it and clicking Delete in the opened window.

To add a new destination resource to a collector resource set:

  1. In the Add destination drop-down list, select the type of destination resource you want to add:
    • Select Storage if you want to configure forwarding of processed events to the storage.
    • Select Correlator if you want to configure forwarding of processed events to a correlator.
    • Select Other if you want to send events to other locations.

      This type of resource includes correlator and storage services that were created in previous versions of the program.

    The Add destination window opens where you can specify parameters for events forwarding.

  2. Specify the settings on the Basic settings tab:
    • In the Destination drop-down list, select Create new.
    • In the Name field, enter a unique name for the destination resource. The name must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
    • Use the Disabled toggle button to specify whether events will be sent to this destination. By default, sending events is enabled.
    • Select the Type for the destination resource:
      • Select storage if you want to configure forwarding of processed events to the storage.
      • Select correlator if you want to configure forwarding of processed events to a correlator.
      • Select nats-jetstream, tcp, http, kafka, or file if you want to configure sending events to other locations.
    • Specify the URL to which events should be sent in the hostname:<API port> format.

      You can specify multiple destination addresses using the URL button for all types except nats-jetstream, file, and diode.

    • For the nats-jetstream and kafka types, use the Topic field to specify which topic the data should be written to. The topic must contain Unicode characters. The Kafka topic is limited to 255 characters.
  3. If required, define the settings on the Advanced settings tab. The available settings vary based on the selected destination resource type:
    • Compression is a drop-down list where you can enable Snappy compression. By default, compression is disabled.
    • Proxy is a drop-down list for proxy server selection.
    • The Buffer size field is used to set buffer size (in bytes) for the destination. The default value is 1 MB, and the maximum value is 64 MB.
    • Timeout field is used to set the timeout (in seconds) for another service or component response. The default value is 30.
    • Disk buffer size limit field is used to specify the size of the disk buffer in bytes. The default size is 10 GB.
    • Cluster ID is the ID of the NATS cluster.
    • TLS mode is a drop-down list where you can specify the conditions for using TLS encryption:
      • Disabled (default)—do not use TLS encryption.
      • Enabled—encryption is enabled, but without verification.
      • With verification—use encryption with verification that the certificate was signed with the KUMA root certificate. The root certificate and key of KUMA are created automatically during program installation and are stored on the KUMA Core server in the folder /opt/kaspersky/kuma/core/certificates/.

      When using TLS, it is impossible to specify an IP address as a URL.

    • URL selection policy is a drop-down list in which you can select a method for determining which URL to send events to if several URLs have been specified:
      • Any. Events are sent to one of the available URLs as long as this URL receives events. If the connection is broken (for example, the receiving node is disconnected) a different URL will be selected as the events destination.
      • Prefer first. Events are sent to the first URL in the list of added addresses. If it becomes unavailable, events are sent to the next available node in sequence. When the first URL becomes available again, events start to be sent to it again.
      • Round robin. Packets with events will be evenly distributed among available URLs from the list. Because packets are sent either on a destination buffer overflow or on the flush timer, this URL selection policy does not guarantee an equal distribution of events to destinations.
    • Delimiter is used to specify the character delimiting the events. By default, \n is used.
    • Path—the file path if the file destination type is selected.
    • Buffer flush interval—this field is used to set the time interval (in seconds) at which the data is sent to the destination. The default value is 100.
    • Workers—this field is used to set the number of services processing the queue. By default, this value is equal to the number of vCPUs of the KUMA Core server.
    • You can set health checks using the Health check path and Health check timeout fields. You can also disable health checks by selecting the Health Check Disabled check box.
    • Debug—a drop-down list where you can specify whether resource logging should be enabled. By default it is Disabled.
    • The Disk buffer disabled drop-down list is used to enable or disable the use of a disk buffer. By default, the disk buffer is disabled.

      The disk buffer is used if the collector cannot send normalized events to the destination. The amount of allocated disk space is limited by the value of the Disk buffer size limit setting.

      If the disk space allocated for the disk buffer is exhausted, events are rotated as follows: new events replace the oldest events written to the buffer.

    • In the Filter section, you can specify the conditions to define events that will be processed by this resource. You can select an existing filter from the drop-down list or create a new filter.

      Creating a filter in resources

      1. In the Filter drop-down list, select Create new.
      2. If you want to keep the filter as a separate resource, select the Save filter check box.

        In this case, you will be able to use the created filter in various services.

        This check box is cleared by default.

      3. If you selected the Save filter check box, enter a name for the created filter resource in the Name field. The name must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
      4. In the Conditions settings block, specify the conditions that the events must meet:
        1. Click the Add condition button.
        2. In the Left operand and Right operand drop-down lists, specify the search parameters.

          Depending on the data source selected in the Right operand field, you may see fields of additional parameters that you need to use to define the value that will be passed to the filter. For example, when choosing active list you will need to specify the name of the active list, the entry key, and the entry key field.

        3. In the operator drop-down list, select the relevant operator.

          Filter operators

          • =—the left operand equals the right operand.
          • <—the left operand is less than the right operand.
          • <=—the left operand is less than or equal to the right operand.
          • >—the left operand is greater than the right operand.
          • >=—the left operand is greater than or equal to the right operand.
          • inSubnet—the left operand (IP address) is in the subnet of the right operand (subnet).
          • contains—the left operand contains values of the right operand.
          • startsWith—the left operand starts with one of the values of the right operand.
          • endsWith—the left operand ends with one of the values of the right operand.
          • match—the left operand matches the regular expression of the right operand. The RE2 regular expressions are used.
          • hasBit—checks whether the left operand (string or number) contains bits whose positions are listed in the right operand (in a constant or in a list).

            The value to be checked is converted to binary and processed right to left. Chars are checked whose index is specified as a constant or a list.

            If the value being checked is a string, then an attempt is made to convert it to integer and process it in the way described above. If the string cannot be converted to a number, the filter returns False.

          • hasVulnerability—checks whether the left operand contains an asset with the vulnerability and vulnerability severity specified in the right operand.

            If you do not specify the ID and severity of the vulnerability, the filter is triggered if the asset in the event being checked has any vulnerability.

          • inActiveList—this operator has only one operand. Its values are selected in the Key fields field and are compared with the entries in the active list selected from the Active List drop-down list.
          • inContextTable checks whether or not an entry exists in the context table. This operator has only one operand. Its values are selected in the Key fields field and are compared with the values of entries in the context table selected from the drop-down list of context tables.
          • inDictionary—checks whether the specified dictionary contains an entry defined by the key composed with the concatenated values of the selected event fields.
          • inCategory—the asset in the left operand is assigned at least one of the asset categories of the right operand.
          • inActiveDirectoryGroup—the Active Directory account in the left operand belongs to one of the Active Directory groups in the right operand.
          • TIDetect—this operator is used to find events using CyberTrace Threat Intelligence (TI) data. This operator can be used only on events that have completed enrichment with data from CyberTrace Threat Intelligence. In other words, it can only be used in collectors at the destination selection stage and in correlators.
        4. If necessary, select the do not match case check box. When this check box is selected, the operator ignores the case of the values.

          The selection of this check box does not apply to the InSubnet, InActiveList, InCategory or InActiveDirectoryGroup operators.

          This check box is cleared by default.

        5. If you want to add a negative condition, select If not from the If drop-down list.
        6. You can add multiple conditions or a group of conditions.
      5. If you have added multiple conditions or groups of conditions, choose a search condition (and, or, not) by clicking the AND button.
      6. If you want to add existing filters that are selected from the Select filter drop-down list, click the Add filter button.

        You can view the nested filter settings by clicking the edit-grey button.

  4. Click Save.

The created destination resource is displayed on the Installation Wizard tab. A destination resource can be removed from the resource set by selecting it and clicking Delete in the opened window.

Proceed to the next step of the Installation Wizard.

Page top

[Topic 220717]

Step 8. Setup validation

This is the required, final step of the Installation Wizard. At this step, KUMA creates a service resource set, and the Services are created automatically based on this set:

  • The set of resources for the collector is displayed under ResourcesCollectors. It can be used to create new collector services. When this set of resources changes, all services that operate based on this set of resources will start using the new parameters after the services restart. To do so, you can use the Save and restart services and Save and update service configurations buttons.

    A set of resources can be modified, copied, moved from one folder to another, deleted, imported, and exported, like other resources.

  • Services are displayed in ResourcesActive services. The services created using the Installation Wizard perform functions inside the KUMA program. To communicate with external parts of the network infrastructure, you need to install similar external services on the servers and assets intended for them. For example, an external collector service should be installed on a server intended as an events recipient, external storage services should be installed on servers that have a deployed ClickHouse service, and external agent services should be installed on the Windows assets that must both receive and forward Windows events.

To finish the Installation Wizard:

  1. Click Create and save service.

    The Setup validation tab of the Installation Wizard displays a table of services created based on the set of resources selected in the Installation Wizard. The lower part of the window shows examples of commands that you must use to install external equivalents of these services on their intended servers and assets.

    For example:

    /opt/kaspersky/kuma/kuma collector --core https://kuma-example:<port used for communication with the KUMA Core> --id <service ID> --api.port <port used for communication with the service> --install

    The "kuma" file can be found inside the installer in the /kuma-ansible-installer/roles/kuma/files/ directory.

    The port for communication with the KUMA Core, the service ID, and the port for communication with the service are added to the command automatically. You should also ensure the network connectivity of the KUMA system and open the ports used by its components if necessary.

  2. Close the Wizard by clicking Save collector.

The collector service is created in KUMA. Now you will install a similar service on the server intended for receiving events.

If a wmi or wec connector was selected for collectors, you must also install the automatically created KUMA agents.

Page top

[Topic 220708]

Installing a collector in a KUMA network infrastructure

A collector consists of two parts: one part is created inside the KUMA web interface, and the other part is installed on the network infrastructure server intended for receiving events. The second part of the collector is installed in the network infrastructure.

To install a collector:

  1. Log in to the server where you want to install the service.
  2. Create the /opt/kaspersky/kuma/ folder.
  3. Copy the "kuma" file to the /opt/kaspersky/kuma/ folder. The file is located in the installer in the /kuma-ansible-installer/roles/kuma/files/ folder.

    Make sure the kuma file has sufficient rights to run. If the file is not executable, make it executable:

    sudo chmod +x /opt/kaspersky/kuma/kuma

  4. Place the LICENSE file from the /kuma-ansible-installer/roles/kuma/files/ directory in the /opt/kaspersky/kuma/ directory and accept the license by running the following command:

    sudo /opt/kaspersky/kuma/kuma license

  5. Create the 'kuma' user:

    sudo useradd --system kuma && usermod -s /usr/bin/false kuma

  6. Make the 'kuma' user the owner of the /opt/kaspersky/kuma directory and all files inside the directory:

    sudo chown -R kuma:kuma /opt/kaspersky/kuma/

  7. Execute the following command:

    sudo /opt/kaspersky/kuma/kuma collector --core https://<FQDN of the KUMA Core server>:<port used by KUMA Core for internal communication (port 7210 is used by default)> --id <service ID copied from the KUMA web interface> --api.port <port used for communication with the installed component>

    Example: sudo /opt/kaspersky/kuma/kuma collector --core https://test.kuma.com:7210 --id XXXX --api.port YYYY

    If errors are detected as a result of the command execution, make sure that the settings are correct. For example, the availability of the required access level, network availability between the collector service and the Core, and the uniqueness of the selected API port. After fixing errors, continue installing the collector.

    If no errors were found, and the collector status in the KUMA web interface is changed to green, stop the command execution and proceed to the next step.

    The command can be copied at the last step of the installer wizard. It automatically specifies the address and port of the KUMA Core server, the identifier of the collector to be installed, and the port that the collector uses for communication.

    When deploying several KUMA services on the same host, during the installation process you must specify unique ports for each component using the --api.port <port> parameter. The following setting values are used by default: --api.port 7221.

    Before installation, ensure the network connectivity of KUMA components.

  8. Run the command again by adding the --install key:

    sudo /opt/kaspersky/kuma/kuma collector --core https://<FQDN of the KUMA Core server>:<port used by KUMA Core server for internal communication (port 7210 by default)> --id <service ID copied from the KUMA web interface> --api.port <port used for communication with the installed component> --install

    Example: sudo /opt/kaspersky/kuma/kuma collector --core https://kuma.example.com:7210 --id XXXX --api.port YYYY --install

  9. Add KUMA collector port to firewall exclusions.

    For the program to run correctly, ensure that the KUMA components are able to interact with other components and programs over the network via the protocols and ports specified during the installation of the KUMA components.

The collector is installed. You can use it to receive data from an event source and forward it for processing.

Page top

[Topic 221402]

Validating collector installation

To verify that the collector is ready to receive events:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, open ResourcesActive services.
  2. Make sure that the collector you installed has the green status.

If the status of the collector is not green, view the log of this service on the machine where it is installed, in the /opt/kaspersky/kuma/collector/<collector ID>/log/collector directory. Errors are logged regardless of whether debug mode is enabled or disabled.

If the collector is installed correctly and you are sure that data is coming from the event source, the table should display events when you search for events associated with the collector.

To check for normalization errors using the Events section of the KUMA web interface:

  1. Make sure that the Collector service is running.
  2. Make sure that the event source is providing events to the KUMA.
  3. Make sure that you selected Only errors in the Keep raw event drop-down list of the Normalizer resource in the Resources section of the KUMA web interface.
  4. In the Events section of KUMA, search for events with the following parameters:

If any events are found with this search, it means that there are normalization errors and they should be investigated.

To check for normalization errors using the Grafana Dashboard:

  1. Make sure that the Collector service is running.
  2. Make sure that the event source is providing events to the KUMA.
  3. Open the Metrics section and follow the KUMA Collectors link.
  4. See if the Errors section of the Normalization widget displays any errors.

If there are any errors, it means that there are normalization errors and they should be investigated.

For WEC and WMI collectors, you must ensure that unique ports are used to connect to their agents. This port is specified in the Transport section of Collector Installation Wizard.

Page top

[Topic 238522]

Ensuring uninterrupted collector operation

An uninterrupted event stream from the event source to KUMA is important for protecting the network infrastructure. Continuity can be ensured though automatic forwarding of the event stream to a larger number of collectors:

  • On the KUMA side, two or more identical collectors must be installed.
  • On the event source side, you must configure control of event streams between collectors using third-party server load management tools, such as rsyslog or nginx.

With this configuration of the collectors in place, no incoming events will be lost if the collector server is unavailable for any reason.

Please keep in mind that when the event stream switches between collectors, each collector will aggregate events separately.

If the KUMA collector fails to start, and its log includes the "panic: runtime error: slice bounds out of range [8:0]" error:

  1. Stop the collector.

    sudo systemctl stop kuma-collector-<collector ID>

  2. Delete the DNS enrichment cache files.

    sudo rm -rf /opt/kaspersky/kuma/collector/<collector ID>/cache/enrichment/DNS-*

  3. Delete the event cache files (disk buffer). Run the command only if you can afford to jettison the events in the disk buffers of the collector.

    sudo rm -rf /opt/kaspersky/kuma/collector/<collector ID>/buffers/*

  4. Start the collector service.

    sudo systemctl start kuma-collector-<collector ID>

In this section

Event stream control using rsyslog

Event stream control using nginx

Page top

[Topic 238527]

Event stream control using rsyslog

To enable rsyslog event stream control on the event source server:

  1. Create two or more identical collectors that you want to use to ensure uninterrupted reception of events.
  2. Install rsyslog on the event source server (see the rsyslog documentation).
  3. Add rules for forwarding the event stream between collectors to the configuration file /etc/rsyslog.conf:

    *. * @@ <main collector server FQDN>: <port for incoming events>

    $ActionExecOnlyWhenPreviousIsSuspended on

    *. * @@ <backup collector server FQDN>: <port for incoming events>

    $ActionExecOnlyWhenPreviousIsSuspended off

    Example configuration file

    Example configuration file specifying one primary and two backup collectors. The collectors are configured to receive events on TCP port 5140.

    *.* @@kuma-collector-01.example.com:5140

    $ActionExecOnlyWhenPreviousIsSuspended on

    & @@kuma-collector-02.example.com:5140

    & @@kuma-collector-03.example.com:5140

    $ActionExecOnlyWhenPreviousIsSuspended off

  4. Restart rsyslog by running the following command:

    systemctl restart rsyslog.

Event stream control is now enabled on the event source server.

Page top

[Topic 238530]

Event stream control using nginx

To control event stream using nginx, you need to create and configure an ngnix server to receive events from the event source and then forward these to collectors.

To enable nginx event stream control on the event source server:

  1. Create two or more identical collectors that you want to use to ensure uninterrupted reception of events.
  2. Install nginx on the server intended for event stream control.
    • Installation command in Oracle Linux 8.6:

      $sudo dnf install nginx

    • Installation command in Ubuntu 20.4:

      $sudo apt-get install nginx

      When installing from sources, you must compile with the parameter -with-stream option:
      $ sudo ./configure -with-stream -without-http_rewrite_module -without-http_gzip_module

  3. On the nginx server, add the stream module to the nginx.conf configuration file that contains the rules for forwarding the stream of events between collectors.

    Example stream module

    Example module in which event stream is distributed between the collectors kuma-collector-01.example.com and kuma-collector-02.example.com, which receive events via TCP on port 5140 and via UDP on port 5141. Balancing uses the nginx.example.com ngnix server.

    stream {

     upstream syslog_tcp {

    server kuma-collector-1.example.com:5140;

    server kuma-collector-2.example.com:5140;

    }

    upstream syslog_udp {

    server kuma-collector-1.example.com:5141;

    server kuma-collector-2.example.com:5141;

    }

     server {

    listen nginx.example.com:5140;

    proxy_pass syslog_tcp;

    }

    server {

    listen nginx.example.com:5141 udp;

    proxy_pass syslog_udp;

    proxy_responses 0;

    }

    }

     worker_rlimit_nofile 1000000;

    events {

    worker_connections 20000;

    }

    # worker_rlimit_nofile is the limit on the number of open files (RLIMIT_NOFILE) for workers. This is used to raise the limit without restarting the main process.

    # worker_connections is the maximum number of connections that a worker can open simultaneously.

  4. Restart nginx by running the following command:

    systemctl restart nginx

  5. On the event source server, forward events to the ngnix server.

Event stream control is now enabled on the event source server.

Nginx Plus may be required to fine-tune balancing, but certain balancing methods, such as Round Robin and Least Connections, are available in the base version of ngnix.

For more details on configuring nginx, please refer to the nginx documentation.

Page top

[Topic 267155]

Predefined collectors

The predefined collectors listed in the table below are included in the KUMA distribution kit.

Predefined collectors

Name

Description

[OOTB] CEF

Collects CEF events received over the TCP protocol.

[OOTB] KSC

Collects events from Kaspersky Security Center over the Syslog TCP protocol.

[OOTB] KSC SQL

Collects events from Kaspersky Security Center using an MS SQL database query.

[OOTB] Syslog

Collects events via the Syslog protocol.

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Collects CEF events that arrive over the UDP protocol and have a Syslog header.

Page top

[Topic 217720]

Creating an agent

A KUMA agent consists of two parts: one part is created inside the KUMA web interface, and the second part is installed on a server or on an asset in the network infrastructure.

An agent is created in several steps:

  1. Creating a set of resources for the agent in the KUMA web interface
  2. Creating an agent service in the KUMA web interface
  3. Installing the server portion of the agent to the asset that will forward messages

A KUMA agent for Windows assets can be created automatically when you create a collector with the wmi or wec transport type. Although the set of resources and service of these agents are created in the Collector Installation Wizard, they must still be installed to the asset that will be used to forward a message.

In this section

Creating a set of resources for an agent

Creating an agent service in the KUMA web interface

Installing an agent in a KUMA network infrastructure

Automatically created agents

Update agents

Transferring events from isolated network segments to KUMA

Transferring events from Windows machines to KUMA

Page top

[Topic 217718]

Creating a set of resources for an agent

In the KUMA web interface, an agent service is created based on the set of resources for an agent that unites connectors and destinations.

To create a set of resources for an agent in the KUMA web interface:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, under ResourcesAgents, click Add agent.

    This opens a window for creating an agent with the Base settings tab active.

  2. Fill in the settings on the Base settings tab:
    • In the Agent name field, enter a unique name for the created service. The name must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
    • In the Tenant drop-down list, select the tenant that will own the storage.
    • If you want, select the Debug check box to log service operations.
    • You can optionally add up to 256 Unicode characters describing the service in the Description field.
  3. Create a connection for the agent by using the AddResource button and switch to the added Connection <number> tab.

    You can delete tabs by using the cross button.

  4. In the Connector group of settings, add a connector:
    • If you want to select an existing connector, select it from the drop-down list.
    • If you want to create a new connector, select Create new in the drop-down list and specify the following settings:
      • Specify the connector name in the Name field. The name must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
      • In the Type drop-down list, select the connector type and define its settings on the Basic settings and Advanced settings tabs. The available settings depend on the selected type of connector:

        The agent type is determined by the connector that is used in the agent. The only exception is for agents with a destination of the diode type. These agents are considered to be diode agents.

        When using the tcp or udp connector type at the normalization stage, IP addresses of the assets from which the events were received will be written in the DeviceAddress event field if it is empty.

        The ability to edit previously created wec or wmi connections in agents, collectors, and connectors is limited. You can change the connection type from wec to wmi and vice versa, but you cannot change the wec or wmi connection to any other connection type. At the same time, when editing other connection types, you cannot select the wec or wmi types. You can create connections without any restrictions on the types of connectors.

    • You can optionally add up to 4,000 Unicode characters describing the resource in the Description field.

    The connector is added to the selected connection of the agent's set of resources. The created connector is only available in this resource set and is not displayed in the web interface ResourcesConnectors section.

  5. In the Destinations group of settings, add a destination.
    • If you want to select an existing destination, select it from the drop-down list.
    • If you want to create a new destination, select Create new in the drop-down list and specify the following settings:
      • Specify the destination name in the Name field. The name must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
      • In the Type drop-down list, select the destination type and define its settings on the Basic settings and Advanced settings tabs. The available settings depend on the selected type of destination:
    • You can optionally add up to 4,000 Unicode characters describing the resource in the Description field.

      The advanced settings for an agent destination (such as TLS mode and compression) must match the advanced destination settings for the collector that you want to link to the agent.

    There can be more than one destination point. You can add them by clicking the Add destination button and can remove them by clicking the cross button.

  6. Repeat steps 3–5 for each agent connection that you want to create.
  7. Click Save.

The set of resources for the agent is created and displayed under ResourcesAgents. Now you can create an agent service in KUMA.

Page top

[Topic 221392]

Creating an agent service in the KUMA web interface

When a set of resources is created for an agent, you can proceed to create an agent service in KUMA.

To create an agent service in the KUMA web interface:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, under ResourcesActive services, click Add service.
  2. In the opened Choose a service window, select the set of resources that was just created for the agent and click Create service.

The agent service is created in the KUMA web interface and is displayed under ResourcesActive services. Now agent services must be installed to each asset from which you want to forward data to the collector. A service ID is used during installation.

Page top

[Topic 217719]

Installing an agent in a KUMA network infrastructure

When an agent service is created in KUMA, you can proceed to installation of the agent to the network infrastructure assets that will be used to forward data to a collector.

Prior to installation, verify the network connectivity of the system and open the ports used by its components.

In this section

Installing a KUMA agent on Linux assets

Installing a KUMA agent on Windows assets

Page top

[Topic 221396]

Installing a KUMA agent on Linux assets

KUMA agent installed on Linux devices stops when you close the terminal or restart the server. To avoid starting the agents manually, we recommend installing the agent by using a system that automatically starts applications when the server is restarted, such as Supervisor. To start the agents automatically, define the automatic startup and automatic restart settings in the configuration file. For more details on configuring settings, please refer to the official documentation of automatic application startup systems. An example of configuring settings in Supervisor, which you can adapt to your needs:

[program:agent_<agent name>] command=sudo /opt/kaspersky/kuma/kuma agent --core https://<KUMA Core server FQDN>:<port used by KUMA Core

autostart=true

autorestart=true

To install a KUMA agent to a Linux asset:

  1. Log in to the server where you want to install the service.
  2. Create the following directories:
    • /opt/kaspersky/kuma/
    • /opt/kaspersky/agent/
  3. Copy the "kuma" file to the /opt/kaspersky/kuma/ folder. The file is located in the installer in the /kuma-ansible-installer/roles/kuma/files/ folder.

    Make sure the kuma file has sufficient rights to run.

  4. Execute the following command:

    sudo /opt/kaspersky/kuma/kuma agent --core https://<KUMA Core server FQDN>:<port used by KUMA Core server for internal communication (port 7210 by default)> --id <service ID copied from the KUMA web interface> --wd <path to the directory that will contain the files of the installed agent. If this flag is not specified, the files will be stored in the directory where the kuma file is located>

    Example: sudo /opt/kaspersky/kuma/kuma agent --core https://kuma.example.com:7210 --id XXXX --wd /opt/kaspersky/kuma/agent/XXXX

The KUMA agent is installed on the Linux asset. The agent forwards data to KUMA, and you can set up a collector to receive this data.

Page top

[Topic 221395]

Installing a KUMA agent on Windows assets

Prior to installing a KUMA agent to a Windows asset, the server administrator must create a user account with the EventLogReaders and Log on as a service permissions on the Windows asset. This user account must be used to start the agent.
If you want to run the agent under a local account, you will need administrator rights and Log on as a service. If you want to perform the collection remotely and only read logs under a domain account, EventLogReaders rights are sufficient.

To install a KUMA agent to a Windows asset:

  1. Copy the kuma.exe file to a folder on the Windows asset. C:\Users\<User name>\Desktop\KUMA folder is recommended for installation.

    The kuma.exe file is located inside the installer in the /kuma-ansible-installer/roles/kuma/files/ folder.

  2. Start the Command Prompt on the Windows asset with Administrator privileges and locate the folder containing the kuma.exe file.
  3. Execute the following command:

    kuma agent --core https://<fullly qualified domain name of the KUMA Core server>:<port used by the KUMA Core server for internal communications (port 7210 by default)> --id <ID of the agent service that was created in KUMA> --user <name of the user account used to run the agent, including the domain> --install

    Example:

    kuma agent --core https://kuma.example.com:7210 --id XXXXX --user domain\username --install

    You can get help information by executing the kuma help agent command.

  4. Enter the password of the user account used to run the agent.

The C:\Program Files\Kaspersky Lab\KUMA\agent\<agent ID> folder is created and the KUMA agent service is installed in it. The agent forwards Windows events to KUMA, and you can set up a collector to receive them.

When the agent service is installed, it starts automatically. The service is also configured to restart in case of any failures. The agent can be restarted from the KUMA web interface, but only when the service is active. Otherwise, the service needs to be manually restarted on the Windows asset.

Removing a KUMA agent from Windows assets

To remove a KUMA agent from a Windows asset:

  1. Start the Command Prompt on the Windows machine with Administrator privileges and locate the folder with kuma.exe file.
  2. Run any of the commands below:

The specified KUMA agent is removed from the Windows asset. Windows events are no longer sent to KUMA.

When configuring services, you can check the configuration for errors before installation by running the agent with the following command:

kuma agent --core https://<fullly qualified domain name of the KUMA Core server>:<port used by the KUMA Core server for internal communications (port 7210 by default)> --id <ID of the agent service that was created in KUMA> --user <name of the user account used to run the agent, including the domain>

Page top

[Topic 221407]

Automatically created agents

When creating a collector with wec or wmi connectors, agents are automatically created for receiving Windows events.

Automatically created agents have the following special conditions:

  • Automatically created agents can have only one connection.
  • Automatically created agents are displayed under ResourcesAgents, and auto created is indicated at the end of their name. Agents can be reviewed or deleted.
  • The settings of automatically created agents are defined automatically based on the collector settings from the Connect event sources and Transport sections. You can change the settings only for a collector that has a created agent.
  • The description of an automatically created agent is taken from the collector description in the Connect event sources section.
  • Debugging of an automatically created agent is enabled and disabled in the Connect event sources section of the collector.
  • When deleting a collector with an automatically created agent, you will be prompted to choose whether to delete the collector together with the agent or to just delete the collector. When deleting only the collector, the agent will become available for editing.
  • When deleting automatically created agents, the type of collector changes to http, and the connection address is deleted from the URL field of the collector.
  • If at least one Windows log name in wec or wmi connector is specified incorrectly, the agent will not receive events from any Windows log listed in the connector. At the same time the agent status will be green. Attempts to receive events will be repeated every 60 seconds, and error messages will be added to the service log.

In the KUMA interface, automatically created agents appear at the same time when the collector is created. However, they must still be installed on the asset that will be used to forward a message.

Page top

[Topic 222245]

Update agents

When updating KUMA versions, the WMI and WEC agents installed on remote machines must also be updated.

To update the agent, use an administrator account and follow these steps:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, in the ResourcesActive services - Agents section, select the agent that you want to update and copy its ID.

    You need the ID to install the new agent with the same ID after removing the old agent.

  2. In Windows, in the Services section, open the agent and click Stop.
  3. On the command line, go to the folder where the agent is installed and run the command to remove the agent from the server.

    kuma.exe agent --id <ID of agent service that was created in KUMA> --uninstall

  4. Place the new agent in the same folder.
  5. On the command line, go to the folder with the new agent and from that folder, run the installation command using the agent ID from step 1.

    kuma agent --core https://<fullly qualified domain name of the KUMA Core server>:<port used by the KUMA Core server for internal communications (port 7210 by default)> --id <ID of the agent service that was created in KUMA> --user <name of the user account used to run the agent, including the domain> --install

The agent is updated.

Page top

[Topic 232930]

Transferring events from isolated network segments to KUMA

Data transfer scenario

Data diodes can be used to transfer events from isolated network segments to KUMA. Data transfer is organized as follows:

  1. KUMA agent that is Installed on a standalone server, with a diode destination receives events and moves them to a directory from which the data diode will pick up the events.

    The agent accumulates events in a buffer until it overflows or for a user-defined period after the last write to disk. The events are then written to a file in the temporary directory of the agent. The file is moved to the directory processed by the data diode; its name is a combination of the file contents hash (SHA-256) and the file creation time.

  2. The data diode moves files from the isolated server directory to the external server directory.
  3. A KUMA collector with a diode connector installed on an external server reads and processes events from the files of the directory where the data diode places files.

    After all events are read from a file, it is automatically deleted. Before reading events, the contents of files are verified based on the hash in the file name. If the contents fail verification, the file is deleted.

In the described scenario, the KUMA components are responsible for moving events to a specific directory within the isolated segment and for receiving events from a specific directory in the external network segment. The data diode transfers files containing events from the directory of the isolated network segment to the directory of the external network segment.

For each data source within an isolated network segment, you must create its own KUMA collector and agent, and configure the data diode to work with separate directories.

Configuring KUMA components

Configuring KUMA components for transferring data from isolated network segments consists of the following steps:

  1. Creating a collector service in the external network segment.

    At this step, you must create and install a collector to receive and process the files that the data diode will transfer from the isolated network segment. You can use the Collector Installation Wizard to create the collector and all the resources it requires.

    At the Transport step, you must select or create a connector of the diode type. In the connector, you must specify the directory to which the data diode will move files from the isolated network segment.

    The user "kuma" that runs the collector must have read/write/delete permissions in the directory to which the data diode moves data from the isolated network segment.

  2. Creating a set of resources for a KUMA agent.

    At this step, you must create a set of resources for the KUMA agent that will receive events in an isolated network segment and prepare them for transferring to the data diode. The diode agent resource set has the following requirements:

    • The destination in the agent must have the diode type. In this resource, you must specify the directory from which the data diode will move files to the external network segment.
    • You cannot select connectors of the sql or netflow types for the diode agent.
    • TLS mode must be disabled in the connector of the diode agent.
  3. Downloading the agent configuration file as JSON file.
    1. The set of agent resources from a diode-type destination must be downloaded as a JSON file.
    2. If secret resources were used in the agent resource set, you must manually add the secret data to the configuration file.
  4. Installing the KUMA agent service in the isolated network segment.

    At this step, you must install the agent in an isolated network segment based on the agent configuration file that was created at the previous step. It can be installed to Linux and Windows devices.

Configuring a data diode

The data diode must be configured as follows:

  • Data must be transferred atomically from the directory of the isolated server (where the KUMA agent places the data) to the directory of the external server (where the KUMA collector reads the data).
  • The transferred files must be deleted from the isolated server.

For information on configuring the data diode, please refer to the documentation for the data diode used in your organization.

Special considerations

When working with isolated network segments, operations with SQL and NetFlow are not supported.

When using the scenario described above, the agent cannot be administered through the KUMA web interface because it resides in an isolated network segment. Such agents are not displayed in the list of active KUMA services.

In this section

Diode agent configuration file

Description of secret fields

Installing Linux Agent in an isolated network segment

Installing Windows Agent in an isolated network segment

See also:

About agents

Collector

Service resource sets

Page top

[Topic 233138]

Diode agent configuration file

A created set of agent resources with a diode-type destination can be downloaded as a configuration file. This file is used when installing the agent in an isolated network segment.

To download the configuration file:

In the KUMA web interface, under ResourcesAgents, select the required set of agent resources with a diode destination and click Download config.

The agent settings configuration is downloaded as a JSON file based on the settings of your browser. Secrets used in the agent resource set are downloaded empty. Their IDs are specified in the file in the "secrets" section. To use a configuration file to install an agent in an isolated network segment, you must manually add secrets to the configuration file (for example, specify the URL and passwords used in the agent connector to receive events).

You must use an access control list (ACL) to configure permissions to access the file on the server where the agent will be installed. File read access must be available to the user account that will run the diode agent.

Below is an example of a diode agent configuration file with a kafka connector.

{

"config": {

"id": "<ID of the set of agent resources>",

"name": "<name of the set of agent resources>",

"proxyConfigs": [

{

"connector": {

"id": "<ID of the connector. This example shows a kafka-type connector, but other types of connectors can also be used in a diode agent. If a connector is created directly in the set of agent resources, the ID is not defined.>",

"name": "<name of the connector>",

"kind": "kafka",

"connections": [

{

"kind": "kafka",

"urls": [

"localhost:9093"

],

"host": "",

"port": "",

"secretID": "<ID of the secret>",

"clusterID": "",

"tlsMode": "",

"proxy": null,

"rps": 0,

"maxConns": 0,

"urlPolicy": "",

"version": "",

"identityColumn": "",

"identitySeed": "",

"pollInterval": 0,

"query": "",

"stateID": "",

"certificateSecretID": "",

"authMode": "pfx",

"secretTemplateKind": "",

"certSecretTemplateKind": ""

}

],

"topic": "<kafka topic name>",

"groupID": "<kafka group ID>",

"delimiter": "",

"bufferSize": 0,

"characterEncoding": "",

"query": "",

"pollInterval": 0,

"workers": 0,

"compression": "",

"debug": false,

"logs": [],

"defaultSecretID": "",

"snmpParameters": [

{

"name": "",

"oid": "",

"key": ""

}

],

"remoteLogs": null,

"defaultSecretTemplateKind": ""

},

"destinations": [

{

"id": "<ID of the destination. If the destination is created directly in the set of agent resources, the ID is not defined.>",

"name": "<destination name>",

"kind": "diode",

"connection": {

"kind": "file",

"urls": [

"<path to the directory where the destination should place events that the data diode will transmit from the isolated network segment>",

"<path to the temporary directory in which events are placed to prepare for data transmission by the diode>"

],

"host": "",

"port": "",

"secretID": "",

"clusterID": "",

"tlsMode": "",

"proxy": null,

"rps": 0,

"maxConns": 0,

"urlPolicy": "",

"version": "",

"identityColumn": "",

"identitySeed": "",

"pollInterval": 0,

"query": "",

"stateID": "",

"certificateSecretID": "",

"authMode": "",

"secretTemplateKind": "",

"certSecretTemplateKind": ""

},

"topic": "",

"bufferSize": 0,

"flushInterval": 0,

"diskBufferDisabled": false,

"diskBufferSizeLimit": 0,

"healthCheckPath": "",

"healthCheckTimeout": 0,

"healthCheckDisabled": false,

"timeout": 0,

"workers": 0,

"delimiter": "",

"debug": false,

"disabled": false,

"compression": "",

"filter": null,

"path": ""

}

]

}

],

"workers": 0,

"debug": false

},

"secrets": {

"<secret ID>": {

"pfx": "<encrypted pfx key>",

"pfxPassword": "<password to the encrypted pfx key. The changeit value is exported from KUMA instead of the actual password. In the configuration file, you must manually specify the contents of secrets>"

}

},

"tenantID": "<ID of the tenant>"

}

Page top

[Topic 233147]

Description of secret fields

Secret fields

Field name

Type

Description

user

string

User name

password

string

Password

token

string

Token

urls

array of strings

URL list

publicKey

string

Public key (used in PKI)

privateKey

string

Private key (used in PKI)

pfx

string containing the base64-encoded pfx file

Base64-encoded contents of the PFX file. In Linux, you can get the base64 encoding of a file by running the following command:

base64 -w0 src > dst

pfxPassword

string

Password of the PFX

securityLevel

string

Used in snmp3. Possible values: NoAuthNoPriv, AuthNoPriv, AuthPriv

community

string

Used in snmp1

authProtocol

string

Used in snmp3. Possible values: MD5, SHA, SHA224, SHA256, SHA384, SHA512

privacyProtocol

string

Used in snmp3. Possible values: DES, AES

privacyPassword

string

Used in snmp3

certificate

string containing the base64-encoded pem file

Base64-encoded contents of the PEM file. In Linux, you can get the base64 encoding of a file by running the following command:

base64 -w0 src > dst

Page top

[Topic 233143]

Installing Linux Agent in an isolated network segment

To install a KUMA agent to a Linux device in an isolated network segment:

  1. Place the following files on the Linux server in an isolated network segment that will be used by the agent to receive events and from which the data diode will move files to the external network segment:
    • Agent configuration file.

      You must use an access control list (ACL) to configure access permissions for the configuration file so that only the KUMA user will have file read access.

    • Executive file /opt/kaspersky/kuma/kuma (the "kuma" file can located in the installer in the /kuma-ansible-installer/roles/kuma/files/ folder).
  2. Execute the following command:

    sudo ./kuma agent --cfg <path to the agent configuration file> --wd <path to the directory where the files of the agent being installed will reside. If this flag is not specified, the files will be stored in the directory where the kuma file is located>

The agent service is installed and running on the server in an isolated network segment. It receives events and relays them to the data diode so that they can be sent to an external network segment.

Page top

[Topic 233215]

Installing Windows Agent in an isolated network segment

Prior to installing a KUMA agent to a Windows asset, the server administrator must create a user account with the EventLogReaders and Log on as a service permissions on the Windows asset. This user account must be used to start the agent.

To install a KUMA agent to a Windows device in an isolated network segment:

  1. Place the following files on the Window server in an isolated network segment that will be used by the agent to receive events and from which the data diode will move files to the external network segment:
    • Agent configuration file.

      You must use an access control list (ACL) to configure access permissions for the configuration file so that the file can only be read by the user account that will run the agent.

    • Kuma.exe executable file. This file can be found inside the installer in the /kuma-ansible-installer/roles/kuma/files/ directory.

    It is recommended to use the C:\Users\<user name>\Desktop\KUMA folder.

  2. Start the Command Prompt on the Windows asset with Administrator privileges and locate the folder containing the kuma.exe file.
  3. Execute the following command:

    kuma.exe agent --cfg <path to the agent configuration file> --user <user name that will run the agent, including the domain> --install

    You can get installer Help information by running the following command:

    kuma.exe help agent

  4. Enter the password of the user account used to run the agent.

The C:\Program Files\Kaspersky Lab\KUMA\agent\<Agent ID> folder is created in which the KUMA agent service is installed. The agent moves events to the folder so that they can be processed by the data diode.

When installing the agent, the agent configuration file is moved to the directory C:\Program Files\Kaspersky Lab\KUMA\agent\<agent ID specified in the configuration file>. The kuma.exe file is moved to the C:\Program Files\Kaspersky Lab\KUMA directory.

When installing an agent, its configuration file must not be located in the directory where the agent is installed.

When the agent service is installed, it starts automatically. The service is also configured to restart in case of any failures.

Removing a KUMA agent from Windows assets

To remove a KUMA agent from a Windows asset:

  1. Start the Command Prompt on the Windows machine with Administrator privileges and locate the folder with kuma.exe file.
  2. Run any of the commands below:

The specified KUMA agent is removed from the Windows asset. Windows events are no longer sent to KUMA.

When configuring services, you can check the configuration for errors before installation by running the agent with the following command:

kuma.exe agent --cfg <path to agent configuration file>

Page top

[Topic 245497]

Transferring events from Windows machines to KUMA

To transfer events from Windows machines to KUMA, a combination of a KUMA agent and a KUMA collector is used. Data transfer is organized as follows:

  1. The KUMA agent installed on the machine receives Windows events:
    • Using the WEC connector: the agent receives events arriving at the host under a subscription, as well as the server logs.
    • Using the WMI connector: the agent connects to remote servers specified in the configuration and receives events.
  2. The agent sends events (without preprocessing) to the KUMA collector specified in the destination.

    You can configure the agent so that different logs are sent to different collectors.

  3. The collector receives events from the agent, performs a full event processing cycle, and sends the processed events to the destination.

Receiving events from the WEC agent is recommended when using centralized gathering of events from Windows hosts using Windows Event Forwarding (WEF). The agent must be installed on the server that collects events; it acts as the Windows Event Collector (WEC). We do not recommend installing KUMA agents on every endpoint host from which you want to receive events.

The process of configuring the receipt of events using the WEC Agent is described in detail in the appendix: Configuring receipt of events from Windows devices using KUMA Agent (WEC).

For details about the Windows Event Forwarding technology, please refer to the official Microsoft documentation.

We recommend receiving events using the WMI agent in the following cases:

  • If it is not possible to use the WEF technology to implement centralized gathering of events, and at the same time, installation of third-party software (for example, the KUMA agent) on the event source server is prohibited.
  • If you need to collect events from a small number of hosts — no more than 500 hosts per one KUMA agent.

For connecting Windows logs as an event source, we recommended using the "Add event source" wizard . When using a master to create a collector with WEC or WMI connectors, agents are automatically created for receiving Windows events. You can also manually create the resources necessary for collecting Windows events.

An agent and a collector for receiving Windows events are created and installed in several stages:

  1. Creating a set of resources for an agent.

    Agent connector:

    When creating an agent, on the Connection tab, you must create or select a connector of the WEC or WMI type.

    If at least one Windows log name in a WEC or WMI connector is specified incorrectly, the agent will receive events from all Windows logs listed in the connector, except the problematic log. At the same time the agent status will be green. Attempts to receive events will be repeated every 60 seconds, and error messages will be added to the service log.

    Agent destination:

    The type of agent destination depends on the data transfer method you use: nats-jetstream, tcp, http, diode, kafka, file.

    You must use the \0 value as the destination separator.

    The advanced settings for the agent destination (such as separator, compression and TLS mode) must match the advanced destination settings for the collector connector that you want to link to the agent.

  2. Create an agent service in the KUMA web interface.
  3. Installing the KUMA agent on the Windows machine from which you want to receive Windows events.

    Before installation, make sure that the system components have access to the network and open the necessary network ports:

    • Port 7210, TCP: from server with collectors to the Core.
    • Port 7210, TCP: from agent server to the Core.
    • The port configured in the URL field when the connector was created: from the agent server to the server with the collector.
  4. Creating and installing KUMA collector.

    When creating a set of collectors, at the Transport step, you must create or select a connector that the collector will use to receive events from the agent. Connector type must match the type of the agent destination.

    The advanced settings of the connector (such as delimiter, compression, and TLS mode) must match the advanced settings of the agent destination that you want to link to the agent.

Page top

[Topic 239760]

Configuring receipt of Auditd events

KUMA lets you monitor and audit the Auditd events on Linux devices.

Before configuring event receiving, make sure to create a new KUMA collector for the Auditd events.

Configuring the receipt of Auditd events involves the following steps:

  1. Installation of KUMA collector in the network infrastructure.
  2. Configuring the event source server.
  3. Verifying receipt of Auditd events by the KUMA collector.

    You can verify that the Auditd event source server is configured correctly by searching for related events in the KUMA web interface.

In this section

Installing KUMA collector for receiving Auditd events

Configuring the event source server

Page top

[Topic 239795]

Installing KUMA collector for receiving Auditd events

After creating a collector, in order to configure event receiving using rsyslog, you must install a collector on the network infrastructure server intended for receiving events.

For details on installing the KUMA collector, refer to the Installing collector in the network infrastructure section.

Page top

[Topic 239849]

Configuring the event source server

The rsyslog service is used to transmit events from the server to the KUMA collector.

To configure transmission of events from the server to the collector:

  1. Make sure that the rsyslog service is installed on the event source server. For this purpose, execute the following command:

    systemctl status rsyslog.service

    If the rsyslog service is not installed on the server, install it by executing the following command:

    yum install rsyslog

    systemctl enable rsyslog.service

    systemctl start rsyslog.service

  2. In the /etc/rsyslog.d folder, create the audit.conf file with the following content:

    $ModLoad imfile

    $InputFileName /var/log/audit/audit.log

    $InputFileTag tag_audit_log:

    $InputFileStateFile audit_log

    $InputFileSeverity info

    $InputFileFacility local6

    $InputRunFileMonitor

    *.* @<KUMA collector IP address>:<KUMA collector port>

    If you want to send events over TCP, instead of the last line in the file insert the following line:
    *.* @@<KUMA collector IP address>:<KUMA collector port>.

  3. Save the changes to the audit.conf file.
  4. Restart the rsyslog service by executing the following command:

    systemctl restart rsyslog.service

The event source server is configured. Data about events is transmitted from the server to the KUMA collector.

Page top

[Topic 240690]

Configuring receipt of KATA/EDR events

You can configure the receipt of Kaspersky Anti Targeted Attack Platform events in the KUMA

.

Before configuring event receipt, make sure to create a KUMA collector for the KATA/EDR events.

When creating a collector in the KUMA web interface, make sure that the port number matches the port specified in step 4c of Configuring export of Kaspersky Anti Targeted Attack Platform events to KUMA, and that the connector type corresponds to the type specified in step 4d.

To receive Kaspersky Anti Targeted Attack Platform events using Syslog, in the collector Installation wizard, at the Event parsing step, select the [OOTB] KATA normalizer.

Configuring the receipt of KATA/EDR events involves the following steps:

  1. Configuring the forwarding of KATA/EDR events
  2. Installing the KUMA collector in the network infrastructure
  3. Verifying receipt of KATA/EDR events in the KUMA collector

    You can verify that the KATA/EDR event source server is configured correctly by searching for related events in the KUMA web interface. Kaspersky Anti Targeted Attack Platform events are displayed as KATA in the table with search results.

In this section

Configuring export of KATA/EDR events to KUMA

Creating KUMA collector for receiving KATA/EDR events

Installing KUMA collector for receiving KATA/EDR events

Page top

[Topic 240698]

Configuring export of KATA/EDR events to KUMA

To configure export of events from Kaspersky Anti Targeted Attack Platform to KUMA:

  1. In a browser on any computer with access to the Central Node server, enter the IP address of the server hosting the Central Node component.

    A window for entering Kaspersky Anti Targeted Attack Platform user credentials opens.

  2. In the user credentials entry window, select the Local administrator check box and enter the Administrator credentials.
  3. Go to the SettingsSIEM system section.
  4. Specify the following settings:
    1. Select the Activity log and Detections check boxes.
    2. In the Host/IP field, enter the IP address or host name of the KUMA collector.
    3. In the Port field, specify the port number to connect to the KUMA collector.
    4. In the Protocol field, select TCP or UDP from the list.
    5. In the Host ID field, specify the server host ID to be indicated in the SIEM systems log as a detection source.
    6. In the Alert frequency field, enter the interval for sending messages: from 1 to 59 minutes.
    7. Enable TLS encryption, if necessary.
    8. Click Apply.

Export of Kaspersky Anti Targeted Attack Platform events to KUMA is configured.

Configuring Kaspersky Anti Targeted Attack Platform integration with KUMA

Page top

[Topic 240715]

Creating KUMA collector for receiving KATA/EDR events

After configuring the event export settings, you must create a collector for Kaspersky Anti Targeted Attack Platform events in the KUMA web interface.

For details on creating a KUMA collector, refer to Creating a collector.

When creating a collector in the KUMA web interface, make sure that the port number matches the port specified in step 4c of Configuring export of Kaspersky Anti Targeted Attack Platform events to KUMA, and that the connector type corresponds to the type specified in step 4d.

To receive Kaspersky Anti Targeted Attack Platform events using Syslog, in the collector Installation wizard, at the Event parsing step, select the [OOTB] KATA normalizer.

Page top

[Topic 240697]

Installing KUMA collector for receiving KATA/EDR events

After creating a collector, to configure receiving Kaspersky Anti Targeted Attack Platform events, install a new collector on the network infrastructure server intended for receiving events.

For details on installing the KUMA collector, refer to the Installing collector in the network infrastructure section.

Page top

[Topic 241235]

Configuring Kaspersky Security Center event receiving in CEF format

KUMA allows you to receive and export events in the CEF format from Kaspersky Security Center Administration Server to the KUMA SIEM system.

Configuring the receipt of Kaspersky Security Center events in the CEF format involves the following steps:

  1. Configuring the forwarding of Kaspersky Security Center events.
  2. Configuring the KUMA Collector.
  3. Installing the KUMA collector in the network infrastructure.
  4. Verifying receipt of Kaspersky Security Center events in the CEF format in the KUMA collector

    You can verify if the events from Kaspersky Security Center Administration Server in the CEF format were correctly exported to the KUMA SIEM system by using the KUMA web interface to search for related events.

    To display Kaspersky Security Center events in CEF format in the table, enter the following search expression:

    SELECT * FROM `events` WHERE DeviceProduct = 'KSC' ORDER BY Timestamp DESC LIMIT 250

In this section

Configuring export of Kaspersky Security Center events in CEF format

Configuring KUMA collector for collecting Kaspersky Security Center events

Installing KUMA collector for collecting Kaspersky Security Center events

Page top

[Topic 241236]

Configuring export of Kaspersky Security Center events in CEF format

Kaspersky Security Center allows you to configure the settings for exporting events in the CEF format to a SIEM system.

The function of exporting Kaspersky Security Center events in the CEF format to SIEM systems is available with Kaspersky Endpoint Security for Business Advanced license or above.

To configure export of events from Kaspersky Security Center Administration Server to the KUMA SIEM system:

  1. In Kaspersky Security Center console tree, select the Administration server node.
  2. In the workspace of the node, select the Events tab.
  3. Click the Configure notifications and event export link and select Configure export to SIEM system from the drop-down list.

    The Properties: Events window opens. By default the Events export section is displayed.

  4. In the Events export section, select the Automatically export events to SIEM system database check box.
  5. In the SIEM system drop-down list select ArcSight (CEF format).
  6. In the corresponding fields, specify the address of the KUMA SIEM system server and the port for connecting to the server. Select TCP/IP as the protocol.

    You can click Export archive and specify the starting date from which pre-existing KUMA events are to be exported to the SIEM system database. By default, Kaspersky Security Center exports events starting from the current date.

  7. Click OK.

As a result, the Kaspersky Security Center Administration Server automatically exports all events to the KUMA SIEM system.

Property: Events window

Configuring export of Kaspersky Security Center events to the KUMA SIEM system

Page top

[Topic 241239]

Configuring KUMA collector for collecting Kaspersky Security Center events

After configuring the export of events in the CEF format from Kaspersky Security Center Administration Server, configure the collector in the KUMA web interface.

To configure the KUMA Collector for Kaspersky Security Center events:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, select ResourcesCollectors.
  2. In the list of collectors, find the collector with the [OOTB] KSC normalizer and open it for editing.
  3. At the Transport step, in the URL field, specify the port to be used by the collector to receive Kaspersky Security Center events.

    The port must match the port of the KUMA SIEM system server.

  4. At the Event parsing step, make sure that the [OOTB] KSC normalizer is selected.
  5. At the Routing step, make sure that the following destinations are added to the collector resource set:
    • Storage. To send processed events to the storage.
    • Correlator. To send processed events to the correlator.

    If the Storage and Correlator destinations were not added, create them.

  6. At the Setup validation tab, click Create and save service.
  7. Copy the command for installing the KUMA collector that appears.
Page top

[Topic 241240]

Installing KUMA collector for collecting Kaspersky Security Center events

After configuring the collector for collecting Kaspersky Security Center events in the CEF format, install the KUMA collector on the network infrastructure server intended for receiving events.

For details on installing the KUMA collector, refer to the Installing collector in the network infrastructure section.

Page top

[Topic 245386]

Configuring receiving Kaspersky Security Center event from MS SQL

KUMA allows you to receive information about Kaspersky Security Center events from an MS SQL database.

Before configuring, make sure that you have created the KUMA collector for Kaspersky Security Center events from MS SQL.

When creating the collector in the KUMA web interface, at the Transport step, select the [OOTB] KSC SQL connector.

To receive Kaspersky Security Center events from the MS SQL database, at the Event parsing step, select the [OOTB] KSC from SQL normalizer.

Configuring event receiving consists of the following steps:

  1. Creating an account in the MS SQL.
  2. Configuring the SQL Server Browser service.
  3. Creating a secret.
  4. Configuring a connector.
  5. Installation of collector in the network infrastructure.
  6. Verifying receipt of events from MS SQL in the KUMA collector.

    You can verify that the receipt of events from MS SQL is configured correctly by searching for related events in the KUMA web interface.

In this section

Creating an account in the MS SQL database

Configuring the SQL Server Browser service

Creating a secret in KUMA

Configuring a connector

Configuring the KUMA Collector for receiving Kaspersky Security Center events from an MS SQL database

Installing the KUMA Collector for receiving Kaspersky Security Center events from the MS SQL database

Page top

[Topic 245390]

Creating an account in the MS SQL database

To receive Kaspersky Security Center events from MS SQL, a user account is required that has the rights necessary to connect and work with the database.

To create an account for working with MS SQL:

  1. Log in to the server with MS SQL for Kaspersky Security Center installed.
  2. Using SQL Server Management Studio, connect to MS SQL using an account with administrator rights.
  3. In the Object Explorer pane, expand the Security section.
  4. Right-click the Logins folder and select New Login from the context menu.

    The Login - New window opens.

  5. On the General tab, click the Search button next to the Login name field.

    The Select User or Group window opens.

  6. In the Enter the object name to select (examples) field, specify the object name and click OK.

    The Select User or Group window closes.

  7. In the Login - New window, on the General tab, select the Windows authentication option.
  8. In the Default database field, select the Kaspersky Security Center database.

    The default Kaspersky Security Center database name is KAV.

  9. On the User Mapping tab, configure the account permissions:
    1. In the Users mapped to this login section, select the Kaspersky Security Center database.
    2. In the Database role membership for section, select the check boxes next to the db_datareader and public permissions.
  10. On the Status tab, configure the permissions for connecting the account to the database:
    • In the Permission to connect to database engine section, select Grant.
    • In the Login section, select Enabled.
  11. Click OK.

    The Login - New window closes.

To check the account permissions:

  1. Run SQL Server Management Studio using the created account.
  2. Go to any MS SQL database table and make a selection based on the table.
Page top

[Topic 245392]

Configuring the SQL Server Browser service

After creating an account in MS SQL, you must configure the SQL Server Browser service.

To configure the SQL Server Browser service:

  1. Open SQL Server Configuration Manager.
  2. In the left pane, select SQL Server Services.

    A list of services opens.

  3. Open the SQL Server Browser service properties in one of the following ways:
    • Double-click the name of the SQL Server Browser service.
    • Right-click the name of the SQL Server Browser service and select Properties from the context menu.
  4. In the SQL Server Browser Properties window that opens, select the Service tab.
  5. In the Start Mode field, select Automatic.
  6. Select the Log On tab and click the Start button.

    Automatic startup of the SQL Server Browser service is enabled.

  7. Enable and configure the TCP/IP protocol by doing the following:
    1. In the left pane, expand the SQL Server Network Configuration section and select the Protocols for <SQL Server name> subsection.
    2. Right-click the TCP/IP protocol and select Enable from the context menu.
    3. In the Warning window that opens, click OK.
    4. Open the TCP/IP protocol properties in one of the following ways:
      • Double-click the TCP/IP protocol.
      • Right-click the TCP/IP protocol and select Properties from the context menu.
    5. Select the IP Addresses tab, and then in the IPALL section, specify port 1433 in the TCP Port field.
    6. Click Apply to save the changes.
    7. Click OK to close the window.
  8. Restart the SQL Server (<SQL Server name>) service by doing the following:
    1. In the left pane, select SQL Server Services.
    2. In the service list on the right, right-click the SQL Server (<SQL Server name>) service and select Restart from the context menu.
  9. In Windows Defender Firewall with Advanced Security, allow inbound connections on the server on the TCP port 1433.

Page top

[Topic 245456]

Creating a secret in KUMA

After creating and configuring an account in MS SQL, you must add a secret in the KUMA web interface. This resource is used to store credentials for connecting to MS SQL.

To create a KUMA secret:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, open ResourcesSecrets.

    The list of available secrets will be displayed.

  2. Click the Add secret button to create a new secret.

    The secret window is displayed.

  3. Enter information about the secret:
    1. In the Name field, choose a name for the added secret.
    2. In the Tenant drop-down list, select the tenant that will own the created resource.
    3. In the Type drop-down list, select urls.
    4. In the URL field, specify a string of the form:

      sqlserver://[<domain>%5C]<username>:<password>@<server>:1433/<database_name>

      where:

      • domain is a domain name.
      • %5C is the domain/user separator. Represents the "\" character in URL format.
      • username is the name of the created MS SQL account.
      • password is the password of the created MS SQL account.
      • server is the name or IP address of the server where the MS SQL database for Kaspersky Security Center is installed.
      • database_name is the name of the Kaspersky Security Center database. The default name is KAV.

      Example:

      sqlserver://test.local%5Cuser:password123@10.0.0.1:1433/KAV

      If the MS SQL database account password contains special characters (@ # $ % & * ! + = [ ] : ' , ? / \ ` ( ) ;), convert them to URL format.

  4. Click Save.

    For security reasons, the string specified in the URL field is hidden after the secret is saved.

Page top

[Topic 245457]

Configuring a connector

To connect KUMA to an MS SQL database, you must configure the connector.

To configure a connector:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, select ResourcesConnectors.
  2. In the list of connectors, find the [OOTB] KSC SQL connector and open it for editing.

    If a connector is not available for editing, copy it and open the connector copy for editing.

    If the [OOTB] KSC SQL connector is not available, contact your system administrator.

  3. On the Basic settings tab, in the URL drop-down lists, select the secret created for connecting to the MS SQL database.
  4. Click Save.

Page top

[Topic 245567]

Configuring the KUMA Collector for receiving Kaspersky Security Center events from an MS SQL database

After configuring the event export settings, you must create a collector in the KUMA web interface for Kaspersky Security Center events received from MS SQL.

For details on creating a KUMA collector, refer to Creating a collector.

When creating the collector in the KUMA web interface, at the Transport step, select the [OOTB] KSC SQL connector.

To receive Kaspersky Security Center events from MS SQL, at the Event parsing step, select the [OOTB] KSC from SQL normalizer.

Page top

[Topic 245571]

Installing the KUMA Collector for receiving Kaspersky Security Center events from the MS SQL database

After configuring the collector for receiving Kaspersky Security Center events from MS SQL, install the KUMA collector on the network infrastructure server where you intend to receive events.

For details on installing the KUMA collector, refer to the Installing collector in the network infrastructure section.

Page top

[Topic 248932]

Configuring audit of events from Windows devices

You can configure event audit on Windows devices for an individual device or for all devices in a domain.

This section describes how to configure an audit on an individual device and how to use a domain group policy to configure an audit.

In this section

Configuring an audit policy on a Windows device

Configuring an audit using a group policy

Page top

[Topic 248421]

Configuring an audit policy on a Windows device

To configure audit policies on a device:

  1. Open the Run window by pressing the key combination Win+R.
  2. In the opened window, type secpol.msc and click OK.

    The Local security policy window opens.

  3. Select Security SettingsLocal policiesAudit policy.
  4. In the pane on the right, double-click to open the properties of the policy for which you want to enable an audit of successful and unsuccessful attempts.
  5. In the <Policy name> properties window, on the Local security setting tab, select the Success and Failure check boxes to track successful and interrupted attempts.

    It is recommended to enable an audit of successful and unsuccessful attempts for the following policies:

    • Audit Logon
    • Audit Policy Change
    • Audit System Events
    • Audit Logon Events
    • Audit Account Management

Configuration of an audit policy on the device is complete.

Page top

[Topic 248537]

Configuring an audit using a group policy

In addition to configuring an audit policy on an individual device, you can also configure an audit by using a domain group policy.

To configure an audit using a group policy:

  1. Open the Run window by pressing the key combination Win+R.
  2. In the opened window, type gpedit.msc and click OK.

    The Local Group Policy Editor window opens.

  3. Select Computer configurationWindows configurationSecurity settingsLocal policiesAudit policy.
  4. In the pane on the right, double-click to open the properties of the policy for which you want to enable an audit of successful and unsuccessful attempts.
  5. In the <Policy name> properties window, on the Local security setting tab, select the Success and Failure check boxes to track successful and interrupted attempts.

    It is recommended to enable an audit of successful and unsuccessful attempts for the following policies:

    • Audit Logon
    • Audit Policy Change
    • Audit System Events
    • Audit Logon Events
    • Audit Account Management

If you want to receive Windows logs from a large number of servers or if installation of KUMA agents on domain controllers is not allowed, it is recommended to configure Windows log redirection to individual servers that have the Windows Event Collector service configured.

The audit policy is now configured on the server or workstation.

Page top

[Topic 248538]

Configuring centralized receipt of events from Windows devices using the Windows Event Collector service

The Windows Event Collector service allows you to centrally receive data about events on servers and workstations running Windows. You can use the Windows Event Collector service to subscribe to events that are registered on remote devices.

You can configure the following types of event subscriptions:

  • Source-initiated subscriptions. Remote devices send event data to the Windows Event Collector server whose address is specified in the group policy. For details on the subscription configuration procedure, please refer to the Configuring data transfer from the event source server section.
  • Collector-initiated subscriptions. The Windows Event Collector server connects to remote devices and independently gathers events from local logs. For details on the subscription configuration procedure, please refer to the Configuring the Windows Event Collector service section.

In this section

Configuring data transfer from the event source server

Configuring the Windows Event Collector service

Page top

[Topic 248539]

Configuring data transfer from the event source server

You can receive information about events on servers and workstations by configuring data transfer from remote devices to the Windows Event Collector server.

Preliminary steps

  1. Verify that the Windows Remote Management service is configured on the event source server by running the following command in the PowerShell console:

    winrm get winrm/config

    If the Windows Remote Management service is not configured, initialize it by running the following command:

    winrm quickconfig

  2. If the event source server is a domain controller, make the Windows logs available over the network by running the following command in PowerShell as an administrator:

    wevtutil set-log security /ca:’O:BAG:SYD:(A;;0xf0005;;;SY)(A;;0x5;;;BA)(A;;0x1;;;S-1-5-32-573)(A;;0x1;;;S-1-5-20)

    Verify access by running the following command:

    wevtutil get-log security

Configuring the firewall on the event source server

To enable the Windows Event Collector server to receive Windows log entries, inbound connection ports must be opened on the event source server.

To open ports for inbound connections:

  1. On the event source server, open the Run window by pressing the key combination Win+R.
  2. In the opened window, type wf.msc and click OK.

    The Windows Defender Firewall with Advanced Security window opens.

  3. Go to the Inbound Rules section and click New Rule in the Actions pane.

    The New Inbound Rule Wizard opens.

  4. At the Rule type step, select Port.
  5. At the Protocols and ports step, select TCP as the protocol. In the Specific local ports field, indicate the relevant port numbers:
    • 5985 (for HTTP access)
    • 5986 (for HTTPS access)

    You can indicate one of the ports, or both.

  6. At the Action step, select Allow connection (selected by default).
  7. At the Profile step, clear the Private and Public check boxes.
  8. At the Name step, specify a name for the new inbound connection rule and click Done.

Configuration of data transfer from the event source server is complete.

The Windows Event Collector server must have the permissions to read Windows logs on the event source server. These permissions can be assigned to both the Windows Event Collector server account and to a special user account. For details on granting permissions, please refer to the Granting user permissions to view the Windows Event Log.

Page top

[Topic 248540]

Configuring the Windows Event Collector service

The Windows Event Collector server can independently connect to devices and gather data on events of any severity.

To configure the receipt of event data by the Windows Event Collector server:

  1. On the event source server, open the Run window by pressing Win+R.
  2. In the opened window, type services.msc and click OK.

    The Services window opens.

  3. In the list of services, find and start the Windows Event Collector service.
  4. Open the Event Viewer snap-in by doing the following:
    1. Open the Run window by pressing the key combination Win+R.
    2. In the opened window, type eventvwr and click OK.
  5. Go to the Subscriptions section and click Create Subscription in the Actions pane.
  6. In the opened Subscription Properties window, specify the name and description of the subscription, and define the following settings:
    1. In the Destination log field, select Forwarded events from the list.
    2. In the Subscription type and source computers section, click the Select computers button.
    3. In the opened Computers window, click the Add domain computer button.

      The Select computer window opens.

    4. In the Enter the object names to select (examples) field, list the names of the devices from which you want to receive event information. Click OK.
    5. In the Computers window, check the list of devices from which the Windows Event Collector server will gather event data and click OK.
    6. In the Subscription properties window, in the Collected events field, click the Select events button.
    7. In the opened Request filter window, specify how often and which data about events on devices you want to receive.
    8. If necessary, in the <All event codes> field, list the codes of the events whose information you want to receive or do not want to receive. Click OK.
  7. If you want to use a special account to view event data, do the following:
    1. In the Subscription properties window, click the Advanced button.
    2. In the opened Advanced subscription settings window, in the user account settings, select Specific user.
    3. Click the User and password button and enter the account credentials of the selected user.

Configuration of the Event Collector Service is complete.

To verify that the configuration is correct and event data is being received by the Windows Event Collector server:

In the Event Viewer snap-in, go to Event Viewer (Local)Windows logsForwarded events.

Page top

[Topic 248978]

Granting permissions to view Windows events

You can grant permissions to view Windows events for a specific device or for all devices in a domain.

To grant permissions to view events on a specific device:

  1. Open the Run window by pressing the key combination Win+R.
  2. In the opened window, type compmgmt.msc and click OK.

    The Computer Management window opens.

  3. Go to Computer Management (local)Local users and groupsGroups.
  4. In the pane on the right, select the Event Log Readers group and double-click to open the policy properties.
  5. Click the Add button at the bottom of the Properties: Event Log Readers window.

    The Select Users, Computers or Groups window opens.

  6. In the Enter the object names to select (examples) field, list the names of the users or devices to which you want to grant permissions to view event data. Click OK.

To grant permissions to view events for all devices in a domain:

  1. Log in to the domain controller with administrator privileges.
  2. Open the Run window by pressing the key combination Win+R.
  3. In the opened window, type dsa.msc and click OK.

    The Active Directory Users and Computers window opens.

  4. Go to Active Directory Users and Computers<Domain name>Builtin.
  5. In the pane on the right, select the Event Log Readers group and double-click to open the policy properties.

    In the Properties: Event Log Readers window, open the Members tab and click the Add button.

    The Select Users, Computers or Groups window opens.

  6. In the Enter the object names to select (examples) field, list the names of the users or devices to which you want to grant permissions to view event data. Click OK.
Page top

[Topic 248982]

Granting permissions to log on as a service

You can grant permission to log on as a service to a specific device or to all devices in a domain. The "Log on as a service" permission allows you to start a process using an account that has been granted this permission.

To grant the "Log on as a service" permission to a device:

  1. Open the Run window by pressing the key combination Win+R.
  2. In the opened window, type secpol.msc and click OK.

    The Local security policy window opens.

  3. Go to Security settingsLocal policiesUser rights assignment.
  4. In the pane on the right, double-click to open the properties of the Log on as a service policy.
  5. In the opened Properties: Log on as a Service window, click the Add User or Group button.

    The Select Users or Groups window opens.

  6. In the Enter the object names to select (examples) field, list the names of the accounts or devices to which you want to grant the permission to log on as a service. Click OK.

Before granting the permission, make sure that the accounts or devices to which you want to grant the Log on as a service permission are not listed in the properties of the Deny log on as a service policy.

To grant the "Log on as a service" permission to devices in a domain:

  1. Open the Run window by pressing the key combination Win+R.
  2. In the opened window, type gpedit.msc and click OK.

    The Local Group Policy Editor window opens.

  3. Select Computer configurationWindows configurationSecurity settingsLocal policiesUser rights assignment.
  4. In the pane on the right, double-click to open the properties of the Log on as a service policy.
  5. In the opened Properties: Log on as a Service window, click the Add User or Group button.

    The Select Users or Groups window opens.

  6. In the Enter the object names to select (examples) field, list the names of the users or devices to which you want to grant the permission to log on as a service. Click OK.

Before granting the permission, make sure that the accounts or devices to which you want to grant the Log on as a service permission are not listed in the properties of the Deny log on as a service policy.

Page top

[Topic 248930]

Configuring the KUMA Collector for receiving events from Windows devices

After you finish configuring the audit policy on devices, creating subscriptions to events and granting all the necessary permissions, you need to create a collector in the KUMA web interface for events from Windows devices.

For details on creating a KUMA collector, refer to Creating a collector.

To receive events from Windows devices, define the following collector settings in the KUMA Collector Installation Wizard:

  1. At the Transport step, define the following settings:
    1. In the Connector window, select Create.
    2. In the Type field, select http.
    3. In the Delimiter field, select \0.
  2. On the Advanced settings tab, in the TLS mode field, select With verification.
  3. At the Event parsing step, click the Add event parsing button.
  4. In the opened Basic event parsing window, in the Normalizer field, select [OOTB] Windows Extended v.1.0 and click OK.
  5. At the Routing step, add the following destinations:
    • Storage. To send processed events to the storage.
    • Correlator. To send processed events to the correlator.

    If the Storage and Correlator destinations were not added, create them.

  6. At the Setup validation tab, click Create and save service.
  7. Copy the command for installing the KUMA collector that appears.
Page top

[Topic 248953]

Installing the KUMA Collector for receiving events from Windows devices

After configuring the collector for receiving Windows events, install the KUMA Collector on the server of the network infrastructure intended for receiving events.

For details on installing the KUMA collector, refer to the Installing collector in the network infrastructure section.

Page top

[Topic 248960]

Configuring forwarding of events from Windows devices to KUMA using KUMA Agent (WEC)

To complete the data forwarding configuration, you must create a WEC KUMA agent and then install it on the device from which you want to receive event information.

For more details on creating and installing a WEC KUMA Agent on Windows devices, please refer to the Forwarding events from Windows devices to KUMA section.

Page top

[Topic 257568]

Configuring receipt of events from Windows devices using KUMA Agent (WMI)

KUMA allows you to receive information about events from Windows devices using the WMI KUMA Agent.

Configuring event receiving consists of the following steps:

  1. Configuring audit settings for managing KUMA.
  2. Configuring data transfer from the event source server.
  3. Granting permissions to view events.
  4. Granting permissions to log on as a service.
  5. Creating a KUMA collector.

    To receive events from Windows devices, in the KUMA Collector Installation Wizard, at the Event parsing step, in the Normalizer field, select [OOTB] Windows Extended v.1.0.

  6. Installing KUMA collector.
  7. Forwarding events from Windows devices to KUMA.

    To complete the data forwarding configuration, you must create a WMI KUMA agent and then install it on the device from which you want to receive event information.

In this section

Configuring audit settings for managing KUMA

Configuring data transfer from the event source server

Granting permissions to view Windows events

Granting permissions to log on as a service

Page top

[Topic 257682]

Configuring audit settings for managing KUMA

You can configure event audit on Windows devices both on a specific device using a local policy or on all devices in a domain using a group policy.

This section describes how to configure an audit on an individual device and how to use a domain group policy to configure an audit.

In this section

Configuring an audit using a local policy

Configuring an audit using a group policy

Page top

[Topic 257704]

Configuring an audit using a local policy

To configure an audit using a local policy:

  1. Open the Run window by pressing the key combination Win+R.
  2. In the opened window, type secpol.msc and click OK.

    The Local security policy window opens.

  3. Select Security SettingsLocal policiesAudit policy.
  4. In the pane on the right, double-click to open the properties of the policy for which you want to enable an audit of successful and unsuccessful attempts.
  5. In the <Policy name> properties window, on the Local security setting tab, select the Success and Failure check boxes to track successful and interrupted attempts.

    It is recommended to enable an audit of successful and unsuccessful attempts for the following policies:

    • Audit Logon
    • Audit Policy Change
    • Audit System Events
    • Audit Logon Events
    • Audit Account Management

Configuration of an audit policy on the device is complete.

Page top

[Topic 257694]

Configuring an audit using a group policy

In addition to configuring an audit on an individual device, you can also configure an audit by using a domain group policy.

To configure an audit using a group policy:

  1. Open the Run window by pressing the key combination Win+R.
  2. In the opened window, type gpedit.msc and click OK.

    The Local Group Policy Editor window opens.

  3. Select Computer configurationWindows configurationSecurity settingsLocal policiesAudit policy.
  4. In the pane on the right, double-click to open the properties of the policy for which you want to enable an audit of successful and unsuccessful attempts.
  5. In the <Policy name> properties window, on the Local security setting tab, select the Success and Failure check boxes to track successful and interrupted attempts.

    It is recommended to enable an audit of successful and unsuccessful attempts for the following policies:

    • Audit Logon
    • Audit Policy Change
    • Audit System Events
    • Audit Logon Events
    • Audit Account Management

The audit policy is now configured on the server or workstation.

Page top

[Topic 257719]

Configuring data transfer from the event source server

Preliminary steps

  1. On the event source server, open the Run window by pressing the key combination Win+R.
  2. In the opened window, type services.msc and click OK.

    The Services window opens.

  3. In the list of services, find the following services:
    • Remote Procedure Call
    • RPC Endpoint Mapper
  4. Check the Status column to confirm that these services have the Running status.

Configuring the firewall on the event source server

The Windows Management Instrumentation server can receive Windows log entries if ports are open for inbound connections on the event source server.

To open ports for inbound connections:

  1. On the event source server, open the Run window by pressing the key combination Win+R.
  2. In the opened window, type wf.msc and click OK.

    The Windows Defender Firewall with Advanced Security window opens.

  3. In the Windows Defender Firewall with Advanced Security window, go to the Inbound Rules section and in the Actions pane, click New Rule.

    This opens the New Inbound Rule Wizard.

  4. In the New Inbound Rule Wizard, at the Rule Type step, select Port.
  5. At the Protocols and ports step, select TCP as the protocol. In the Specific local ports field, indicate the relevant port numbers:
    • 135
    • 445
    • 49152–65535
  6. At the Action step, select Allow connection (selected by default).
  7. At the Profile step, clear the Private and Public check boxes.
  8. At the Name step, specify a name for the new inbound connection rule and click Done.

Configuration of data transfer from the event source server is complete.

Page top

[Topic 257733]

Granting permissions to view Windows events

You can grant permissions to view Windows events for a specific device or for all devices in a domain.

To grant permissions to view events on a specific device:

  1. Open the Run window by pressing the key combination Win+R.
  2. In the opened window, type compmgmt.msc and click OK.

    The Computer Management window opens.

  3. Go to Computer Management (local)Local users and groupsGroups.
  4. In the pane on the right, select the Event Log Readers group and double-click to open the policy properties.
  5. Click the Add button at the bottom of the Properties: Event Log Readers window.

    The Select Users, Computers or Groups window opens.

  6. In the Enter the object names to select (examples) field, list the names of the users or devices to which you want to grant permissions to view event data. Click OK.

To grant permissions to view events for all devices in a domain:

  1. Log in to the domain controller with administrator privileges.
  2. Open the Run window by pressing the key combination Win+R.
  3. In the opened window, type dsa.msc and click OK.

    The Active Directory Users and Computers window opens.

  4. In the Active Directory Users and Computers window, go to the Active Directory Users and Computers section → <Domain name>Builtin.
  5. In the pane on the right, select the Event Log Readers group and double-click to open the policy properties.

    In the Properties: Event Log Readers window, open the Members tab and click the Add button.

    The Select Users, Computers or Groups window opens.

  6. In the Select User, Computer, or Group window, In the Enter the object name to select (examples) field, list the names of the users or devices to which you want to grant permissions to view event data. Click OK.
Page top

[Topic 257742]

Granting permissions to log on as a service

You can grant permission to log on as a service to a specific device or to all devices in a domain. The "Log on as a service" permission allows you to start a process using an account that has been granted this permission.

Before granting the permission, make sure that the accounts or devices to which you want to grant the Log on as a service permission are not listed in the properties of the Deny log on as a service policy.

To grant the "Log on as a service" permission to a device:

  1. Open the Run window by pressing the key combination Win+R.
  2. In the opened window, type secpol.msc and click OK.

    The Local security policy window opens.

  3. In the Local Security Policy window, go to the Security SettingsLocal PoliciesUser Rights Assignment section.
  4. In the pane on the right, double-click to open the properties of the Log on as a service policy.
  5. This opens the Properties: Log on as a Service window; in that window, click Add User or Group.

    This opens the Select Users or Groups window.

  6. In the Enter the object names to select (examples) field, list the names of the accounts or devices to which you want to grant the permission to log on as a service. Click OK.

To grant the "Log on as a service" permission to devices in a domain:

  1. Open the Run window by pressing the key combination Win+R.
  2. In the opened window, type gpedit.msc and click OK.

    The Local Group Policy Editor window opens.

  3. Select Computer configurationWindows configurationSecurity settingsLocal policiesUser rights assignment.
  4. In the pane on the right, double-click to open the properties of the Log on as a service policy.
  5. This opens the Properties: Log on as a Service window; in that window, click Add User or Group.

    This opens the Select Users or Groups window.

  6. In the Enter the object names to select (examples) field, list the names of the users or devices to which you want to grant the permission to log on as a service. Click OK.
Page top

[Topic 251880]

Configuring receipt of PostgreSQL events

KUMA lets you monitor and audit PostgreSQL events on Linux devices using rsyslog.

Events are audited using the pgAudit plugin. The plugin supports PostgreSQL 9.5 and later. For details about the pgAudit plugin, see https://github.com/pgaudit/pgaudit.

Configuring event receiving consists of the following steps:

  1. Installing the pdAudit plugin.
  2. Creating a KUMA collector for PostgreSQL events.

    To receive PostgreSQL events using rsyslog, in the collector installation wizard, at the Event parsing step, select the [OOTB] PostgreSQL pgAudit syslog normalizer.

  3. Installing a collector in the KUMA network infrastructure.
  4. Configuring the event source server.
  5. Verifying receipt of PostgreSQL events in the KUMA collector

    You can verify that the PostgreSQL event source server is correctly configured in the Searching for related events section of the KUMA web interface.

Page top

[Topic 252059]

Installing the pgAudit plugin

To install the pgAudit plugin:

  1. On the OS command line, run the following commands as a user with administrator rights:

    sudo apt update

    sudo apt -y install postgresql-<PostgreSQL version>-pgaudit

    You must select the plugin version to match the PostgresSQL version. For information about PostgreSQL versions and the matching plugin versions, see https://github.com/pgaudit/pgaudit#postgresql-version-compatibility.

    Example:

    sudo apt -y install postgresql-12-pgaudit

  2. Find the postgres.conf configuration file. To do so, run the following command on the PostgreSQL command line:

    show data_directory

    The response will indicate the location of the configuration file.

  3. Create a backup copy of the postgres.conf configuration file.
  4. Open the postgres.conf file and copy or replace the values in it with the values listed below.

    ```

    ## pgAudit settings

    shared_preload_libraries = 'pgaudit'

    ## database logging settings

    log_destination = 'syslog'

    ## syslog facility

    syslog_facility = 'LOCAL0'

    ## event ident

    syslog_ident = 'Postgres'

    ## sequence numbers in syslog

    syslog_sequence_numbers = on

    ## split messages in syslog

    syslog_split_messages = off

    ## message encoding

    lc_messages = 'en_US.UTF-8'

    ## min message level for logging

    client_min_messages = log

    ## min error message level for logging

    log_min_error_statement = info

    ## log checkpoints (buffers, restarts)

    log_checkpoints = off

    ## log query duration

    log_duration = off

    ## error description level

    log_error_verbosity = default

    ## user connections logging

    log_connections = on

    ## user disconnections logging

    log_disconnections = on

    ## log prefix format

    log_line_prefix = '%m|%a|%d|%p|%r|%i|%u| %e '

    ## log_statement

    log_statement = 'none'

    ## hostname logging status. dns bane resolving affect

    #performance!

    log_hostname = off

    ## logging collector buffer status

    #logging_collector = off

    ## pg audit settings

    pgaudit.log_parameter = on

    pgaudit.log='ROLE, DDL, MISC, FUNCTION'

    ```

  5. Restart the PostgreSQL service using the command:

    sudo systemctl restart postgresql

  6. To load the pgAudit plugin to PostgreSQL, run the following command on the PostgreSQL command line:

    CREATE EXTENSION pgaudit

The pgAudit plugin is installed.

Page top

[Topic 252060]

Configuring a Syslog server to send events

The rsyslog service is used to transmit events from the server to KUMA.

To configure the sending of events from the server where PostgreSQL is installed to the collector:

  1. To verify that the rsyslog service is installed on the event source server, run the following command as administrator:

    sudo systemctl status rsyslog.service

    If the rsyslog service is not installed on the server, install it by executing the following commands:

    yum install rsyslog

    sudo systemctl enable rsyslog.service

    sudo systemctl start rsyslog.service

  2. In the /etc/rsyslog.d/ directory, create a pgsql-to-siem.conf file with the following content:

    If $programname contains 'Postgres' then @<IP address of the collector>:<port of the collector>

    For example:

    If $programname contains 'Postgres' then @192.168.1.5:1514

    If you want to send events via TCP, the contents of the file must be as follows:
    If $programname contains 'Postgres' then @@<IP address of the collector>:<port of the collector>

    Save changes to the pgsql-to-siem.conf configuration file.

  3. Add the following lines to the /etc/rsyslog.conf configuration file:

    $IncludeConfig /etc/pgsql-to-siem.conf

    $RepeatedMsgReduction off

    Save changes to the /etc/rsyslog.conf configuration file.

  4. Restart the rsyslog service by executing the following command:

    sudo systemctl restart rsyslog.service

Page top

[Topic 254156]

Configuring receipt of IVK Kolchuga-K events

You can configure the receipt of events from the IVK Kolchuga-K system to the KUMA SIEM system.

Configuring event receiving consists of the following steps:

  1. Configuring the sending of IVK Kolchuga-K events to KUMA.
  2. Creating a KUMA collector for receiving events from the IVK Kolchuga-K system.

    To receive IVK Kolchuga-K events using Syslog, in the Collector Installation Wizard, at the Event parsing step, select the [OOTB] Kolchuga-K syslog normalizer.

  3. Installing a KUMA collector for receiving IVK Kolchuga-K events.
  4. Verifying receipt of IVK Kolchuga-K events in KUMA.

    You can verify that the IVK Kolchuga-K event source is configured correctly in the Searching for related events section of the KUMA web interface.

Page top

[Topic 254184]

Configuring export of IVK Kolchuga-K events to KUMA

To configure the export of events of the IVK Kolchuga-K firewall via syslog to the KUMA collector:

  1. Connect to the firewall over SSH with administrator rights.
  2. Create a backup copy of the /etc/services and /etc/syslog.conf files.
  3. In the /etc/syslog.conf configuration file, specify the FQDN or IP address of the KUMA collector. For example:

    *.* @kuma.example.com

    or

    *.* @192.168.0.100

    Save changes to the configuration file /etc/syslog.conf.

  4. In the /etc/services configuration file, specify the port and protocol used by the KUMA collector. For example:

    syslog 10514/udp

    Save changes to the /etc/services configuration file.

  5. Restart the syslog server of the firewall:

    service syslogd restart

Page top

[Topic 252218]

Configuring receipt of CryptoPro NGate events

You can configure the receipt of CryptoPro NGate events in the KUMA SIEM system.

Configuring event receiving consists of the following steps:

  1. Configuring export of CryptoPro NGate events to KUMA.
  2. Creating a KUMA collector for receiving CryptoPro NGate events.

    To receive CryptoPro NGate events using Syslog, in the collector installation wizard, at the Event parsing step, select the [OOTB] NGate syslog normalizer.

  3. Creating a KUMA collector for receiving CryptoPro NGate events.
  4. Verifying receipt of CryptoPro NGate events in the KUMA collector.

    You can verify that the CryptoPro NGate event source server is correctly configured in the Searching for related events section of the KUMA web interface.

Page top

[Topic 252338]

Configuring export of CryptoPro NGate events to KUMA

To configure the sending of events from CryptoPro NGate to KUMA:

  1. Connect to the web interface of the NGate management system.
  2. Connect remote syslog servers to the management system. To do so:
    1. Open the page with the list of syslog servers: External ServicesSyslog ServerAdd Syslog Server.
    2. Enter the settings of the syslog server and click plus.
  3. Assign syslog servers to the configuration for recording logs of the cluster. To do so:
    1. In the ClustersSummary section, select the cluster that you want to configure.
    2. On the Configurations tab, click the Configuration control for the relevant cluster to go to the configuration settings page.
    3. In the Syslog Servers field of the configured configuration, click the Assign button.

    4. Select the check boxes for syslog servers that you want to assign and click

      the plus icon.

      You can assign an unlimited number of servers.

      To add new syslog servers, click plus.

    5. Publish the configuration to activate the new settings.

  4. Assign syslog servers to the management system for recording Administrator activity logs. To do so:

    1. Select the Management Center Settings menu item and on the page that is displayed, under Syslog servers, click Assign.

    2. In the Assign Syslog Servers to Management Center window, select the check box for those syslog servers that you want to assign, then click Apply and assign.

      You can assign an unlimited number of servers.

As a result, events of CryptoPro NGate are sent to KUMA.

Page top

[Topic 255211]

Configuring receipt of Ideco UTM events

You can configure the receipt of Ideco UTM application events in KUMA via the Syslog protocol.

Configuring event receiving consists of the following steps:

  1. Configuring export of Ideco UTM events to KUMA.
  2. Creating a KUMA collector for receiving Ideco UTM.

    To receive Ideco UTM events, in the Collector Installation Wizard, at the Event parsing step, select the "[OOTB] Ideco UTM syslog" normalizer.

  3. Creating a KUMA collector for receiving Ideco UTM events.
  4. Verifying receipt of Ideco UTM events in KUMA.

    You can verify that the Ideco UTM event source server is correctly configured in the Searching for related events section of the KUMA web interface.

Page top

[Topic 255213]

Configuring export of Ideco UTM events to KUMA

To configure the sending of events from Ideco UTM to KUMA:

  1. Connect to the Ideco UTM web interface under a user account that has administrative privileges.
  2. In the System message forwarding menu, move the Syslog toggle switch to the enabled position.
  3. For the IP address setting, specify the IP address of the KUMA collector.
  4. For the Port setting, enter the port that the KUMA collector is listening on.
  5. Click Save to apply the changes.

The forwarding of Ideco UTM events to KUMA is configured.

Page top

[Topic 254373]

Configuring receipt of KWTS events

You can configure the receipt of events from the Kaspersky Web Traffic Security (KWTS) web traffic analysis and filtering system in KUMA.

Configuring event receiving consists of the following steps:

  1. Configuring export of KWTS events to KUMA.
  2. Creating a KUMA collector for receiving KWTS events.

    To receive KWTS events, in the Collector Installation Wizard, at the Event parsing step, select the [OOTB] KWTS normalizer.

  3. Installing a KUMA collector for receiving KWTS events.
  4. Verifying receipt of KWTS events in the KUMA collector.

    You can verify that KWTS event export is correctly configured in the Searching for related events section of the KUMA web interface.

Page top

[Topic 254394]

Configuring export of KWTS events to KUMA

To configure the export of KWTS events to KUMA:

  1. Connect to the KWTS server over SSH as root.
  2. Before making changes, create backup copies of the following files:
    • /opt/kaspersky/kwts/share/templates/core_settings/event_logger.json.template
    • /etc/rsyslog.conf
  3. Make sure that the settings in the /opt/kaspersky/kwts/share/templates/core_settings/event_logger.json.template configuration file have the following values, and make changes if necessary:

    "siemSettings":

    {

    "enabled": true,

    "facility": "Local5",

    "logLevel": "Info",

    "formatting":

    {

  4. Save your changes.
  5. To send events via UDP, make the following changes to the /etc/rsyslog.conf configuration file:

    $WorkDirectory /var/lib/rsyslog

    $ActionQueueFileName ForwardToSIEM

    $ActionQueueMaxDiskSpace 1g

    $ActionQueueSaveOnShutdown on

    $ActionQueueType LinkedList

    $ActionResumeRetryCount -1

    local5.* @<<IP address of the KUMA collector>:<port of the collector>>

    If you want to send events over TCP, the last line should be as follows:

    local5.* @@<<IP address of the KUMA collector>:<port of the collector>>

  6. Save your changes.
  7. Restart the rsyslog service with the following command:

    sudo systemctl restart rsyslog.service

  8. Go to the KWTS web interface, to the SettingsSyslog tab and enable the Log information about traffic profile option.
  9. Click Save.

Page top

[Topic 254784]

Configuring receipt of KLMS events

You can configure the receipt of events from the Kaspersky Linux Mail Server (KLMS) mail traffic analysis and filtering system to the KUMA SIEM system.

Configuring event receiving consists of the following steps:

  1. Configuring export of KLMS events to KUMA
  2. Creating a KUMA collector for receiving KLMS events

    To receive KLMS events, in the Collector Installation Wizard, at the Event parsing step, select the [OOTB] KLMS syslog CEF normalizer.

  3. Installing a KUMA collector for receiving KLMS events
  4. Verifying receipt of KLMS events in the KUMA collector

    You can verify that the KLMS event source server is correctly configured in the Searching for related events section of the KUMA web interface.

Page top

[Topic 254786]

Configuring export of KLMS events to KUMA

To configure the export of KLMS events to KUMA:

  1. Connect to the KLMS server over SSH and go to the Technical Support Mode menu.
  2. Use the klms-control utility to download the settings to the settings.xml file:

    sudo /opt/kaspersky/klms/bin/klms-control --get-settings EventLogger -n -f /tmp/settings.xml

  3. Make sure that the settings in the /tmp/settings.xml file have the following values; make changes if necessary:

    <siemSettings>

    <enabled>1</enabled>

    <facility>Local1</facility>

    ...

    </siemSettings>

  4. Apply settings with the following command:

    sudo /opt/kaspersky/klms/bin/klms-control --set-settings EventLogger -n -f /tmp/settings.xml

  5. To send events via UDP, make the following changes to the /etc/rsyslog.conf configuration file:

    $WorkDirectory /var/lib/rsyslog

    $ActionQueueFileName ForwardToSIEM

    $ActionQueueMaxDiskSpace 1g

    $ActionQueueSaveOnShutdown on

    $ActionQueueType LinkedList

    $ActionResumeRetryCount -1

    local1.* @<<IP address of the KUMA collector>:<port of the collector>>

    If you want to send events over TCP, the last line should be as follows:

    local1.* @@<<IP address of the KUMA collector>:<port of the collector>>

  6. Save your changes.
  7. Restart the rsyslog service with the following command:

    sudo systemctl restart rsyslog.service

Page top

[Topic 254785]

Configuring receipt of KSMG events

You can configure the receipt of events from the Kaspersky Secure Mail Gateway (KSMG) 1.1 mail traffic analysis and filtering system in the KUMA SIEM system.

Configuring event receiving consists of the following steps:

  1. Configuring export of KSMG events to KUMA
  2. Creating a KUMA collector for receiving KSMG events

    To receive KSMG events, in the Collector Installation Wizard, at the Event parsing step, select the [OOTB] KSMG normalizer.

  3. Installing a KUMA collector for receiving KSMG events
  4. Verifying receipt of KSMG events in the KUMA collector

    You can verify that the KSMG event source server is correctly configured in the Searching for related events section of the KUMA web interface.

Page top

[Topic 254787]

Configuring export of KSMG events to KUMA

To configure the export of KSMG events to KUMA:

  1. Connect to the KSMG server via SSH using an account with administrator rights.
  2. Use the ksmg-control utility to download the settings to the settings.xml file:

    sudo /opt/kaspersky/ksmg/bin/ksmg-control --get-settings EventLogger -n -f /tmp/settings.xml

  3. Make sure that the settings in the /tmp/settings.xml file have the following values; make changes if necessary:

    <siemSettings>

    <enabled>1</enabled>

    <facility>Local1</facility>

  4. Apply settings with the following command:

    sudo /opt/kaspersky/ksmg/bin/ksmg-control --set-settings EventLogger -n -f /tmp/settings.xml

  5. To send events via UDP, make the following changes to the /etc/rsyslog.conf configuration file:

    $WorkDirectory /var/lib/rsyslog

    $ActionQueueFileName ForwardToSIEM

    $ActionQueueMaxDiskSpace 1g

    $ActionQueueSaveOnShutdown on

    $ActionQueueType LinkedList

    $ActionResumeRetryCount -1

    local1.* @<<IP address of the KUMA collector>:<port of the collector>>

    If you want to send events over TCP, the last line should be as follows:

    local1.* @@<<IP address of the KUMA collector>:<port of the collector>>

  6. Save your changes.
  7. Restart the rsyslog service with the following command:

    sudo systemctl restart rsyslog.service

Page top

[Topic 256166]

Configuring receipt of PT NAD events

You can configure the receipt of PT NAD events in the KUMA SIEM system.

Configuring event receiving consists of the following steps:

  1. Configuring export of PT NAD events to KUMA.
  2. Creating a KUMA collector for receiving PT NAD events.

    To receive PT NAD events using Syslog, in the Collector Installation Wizard, at the Event parsing step, select the [OOTB] PT NAD json normalizer.

  3. Installing a KUMA collector for receiving PT NAD events.
  4. Verifying receipt of PT NAD events in the KUMA collector.

    You can verify that the PT NAD event source server is correctly configured in the Searching for related events section of the KUMA web interface.

Page top

[Topic 256173]

Configuring export of PT NAD events to KUMA

Configuring the export of events from PT NAD 11 to KUMA over Syslog involves the following steps:

  1. Configuring the ptdpi-worker@notifier module.
  2. Configuring the sending of syslog messages with information about activities, attacks and indicators of compromise.

Configuring the ptdpi-worker@notifier module.

To enable the sending of information about detected information security threats, you must configure the ptdpi-worker@notifier module.

In a multi-server configuration, these instructions must be followed on the primary server.

To configure the ptdpi-worker@notifier module:

  1. Open the /opt/ptsecurity/etc/ptdpi.settings.yaml file:

    sudo nano /opt/ptsecurity/etc/ptdpi.settings.yaml

  2. In the General settings group of settings, uncomment the 'workers' setting and add 'notifier' to its list of values.

    For example:

    workers: ad alert dns es hosts notifier

  3. To the end of the file, append a line of the form: notifier.yaml.nad_web_url: <URL of the PT NAD web interface>

    For example:

    notifier.yaml.nad_web_url: https://ptnad.example.com

    The ptdpi-worker@notifier module uses the specified URL to generate links to session and activity cards when sending messages.

  4. Restart the sensor:

    sudo ptdpictl restart-all

The ptdpi-worker@notifier module is configured.

Configuring the sending of syslog messages with information about activities, attacks and indicators of compromise

The settings listed in the following instructions may not be present in the configuration file. If a setting is missing, you must add it to the file.

In a multi-server PT NAD configuration, edit the settings on the primary server.

To configure the sending of syslog messages with information about activities, attacks and indicators of compromise:

  1. Open the /opt/ptsecurity/etc/ptdpi.settings.yaml file:

    sudo nano /opt/ptsecurity/etc/ptdpi.settings.yaml

  2. By default, PT NAD sends activity information in Russian. To receive information in English, change the value of the notifier.yaml.syslog_notifier.locale setting to "en".

    For example:

    notifier.yaml.syslog_notifier.locale: en

  3. In the notifier.yaml.syslog_notifier.addresses setting, add a section with settings for sending events to KUMA.

    The <Connection name> setting can only contain Latin letters, numerals, and the underscore character.

    For the 'address' setting, specify the IP address of the KUMA collector.

    Other settings can be omitted, in which case the default values are used.

    notifier.yaml.syslog_notifier.addresses:

    <Connection name>:

    address: <For sending to a remote server, specify protocol: UDP (default) or TCP, address and port; for local connection, specify Unix domain socket>

    doc_types: [<Comma-separated message types ('alert' for information about attacks, 'detection' for activities, and 'reputation' for information about indicators of compromise). By default, all types of messages are sent>]

    facility: <Numeric value of the subject category>

    ident: <software tag>

    <Connection name>:

    ...

    The following is a sample configuration of sending syslog messages with information about activities, attacks, and indicators of compromise to two remote servers via TCP and UDP without writing to the local log:

    notifier.yaml.syslog_notifier.addresses:

    remote1:

    address: tcp://198.51.100.1:1514

    remote2:

    address: udp://198.51.100.2:2514

  4. Save your changes in the /opt/ptsecurity/etc/ptdpi.settings.yaml.
  5. Restart the ptdpi-worker@notifier module:

    sudo ptdpictl restart-worker notifier

The sending of events to KUMA via Syslog is configured.

Page top

[Topic 256167]

Configuring receipt of events using the MariaDB Audit Plugin

KUMA allows auditing events using the MariaDB Audit Plugin. The plugin supports MySQL 5.7 and MariaDB. The audit plugin does not support MySQL 8. Detailed information about the plugin is available on the official MariaDB website.

We recommend using MariaDB Audit Plugin version 1.2 or later.

Configuring event receiving consists of the following steps:

  1. Configuring the MariaDB Audit Plugin to send MySQL events and configuring the Syslog server to send events.
  2. Configuring the MariaDB Audit Plugin to send MariaDB events and configuring the Syslog server to send events.
  3. Creating a KUMA Collector for MySQL 5.7 and MariaDB Events.

    To receive MySQL 5.7 and MariaDB events using the MariaDB Audit Plugin, in the KUMA Collector Installation Wizard, at the Event parsing step, in the Normalizer field, select [OOTB] MariaDB Audit Plugin syslog.

  4. Installing a collector in the KUMA network infrastructure.
  5. Verifying receipt of MySQL and MariaDB events by the KUMA collector.

    To verify that the MySQL and MariaDB event source server is configured correctly, you can search for related events.

In this section

Configuring the MariaDB Audit Plugin to send MySQL events

Configuring the MariaDB Audit Plugin to send MariaDB Events

Configuring a Syslog server to send events

Page top

[Topic 258753]

Configuring the MariaDB Audit Plugin to send MySQL events

The MariaDB Audit Plugin is supported for MySQL 5.7 versions up to 5.7.30 and is bundled with MariaDB.

To configure MySQL 5.7 event reporting using the MariaDB Audit Plugin:

  1. Download the MariaDB distribution kit and extract it.

    You can download the MariaDB distribution kit from the official MariaDB website. The operating system of the MariaDB distribution must be the same as the operating system on which MySQL 5.7 is running.

  2. Connect to MySQL 5.7 using an account with administrator rights by running the following command:

    mysql -u <username> -p

  3. To get the directory where the MySQL 5.7 plugins are located, on the MySQL 5.7 command line, run the following command:

    SHOW GLOBAL VARIABLES LIKE 'plugin_dir'

  4. In the directory obtained at step 3, copy the MariaDB Audit Plugin from <directory to which the distribution kit was extracted>/mariadb-server-<version>/lib/plugins/server_audit.so.
  5. On the operating system command line, run the following command:

    chmod 755 <directory to which the distribution kit was extracted>server_audit.so

    For example:

    chmod 755 /usr/lib64/mysql/plugin/server_audit.so

  6. On the MySQL 5.7 command line, run the following command:

    install plugin server_audit soname 'server_audit.so'

  7. Create a backup copy of the /etc/mysql/mysql.conf.d/mysqld.cnf configuration file.
  8. In the configuration file /etc/mysql/mysql.conf.d/mysqld.cnf, in the [mysqld] section, add the following lines:

    server_audit_logging=1

    server_audit_events=connect,table,query_ddl,query_dml,query_dcl

    server_audit_output_type=SYSLOG

    server_audit_syslog_facility=LOG_SYSLOG

    If you want to disable event export for certain audit event groups, remove some of the values from the server_audit_events setting. Descriptions of settings are available on the MariaDB Audit Plugin vendor's website.

  9. Save changes to the configuration file.
  10. Restart the MariaDB service by running one of the following commands:
    • systemctl restart mysqld for a system with systemd initialization.
    • service mysqld restart for a system with init initialization.

MariaDB Audit Plugin for MySQL 5.7 is configured. If necessary, you can run the following commands on the MySQL 5.7 command line:

  • show plugins to check the list of current plugins.
  • SHOW GLOBAL VARIABLES LIKE 'server_audit%' to check the current audit settings.
Page top

[Topic 258754]

Configuring the MariaDB Audit Plugin to send MariaDB Events

The MariaDB Audit Plugin is included in the MariaDB distribution kit starting with versions 5.5.37 and 10.0.10.

To configure MariaDB event export using the MariaDB Audit Plugin:

  1. Connect to MariaDB using an account with administrator rights by running the following command:

    mysql -u <username> -p

  2. To check if the plugin is present in the directory where operating system plugins are located, run the following command on the MariaDB command line:

    SHOW GLOBAL VARIABLES LIKE 'plugin_dir'

  3. On the operating system command line, run the following command:

    ll <directory obtained by the previous command> | grep server_audit.so

    If the command output is empty and the plugin is not present in the directory, you can either copy the MariaDB Audit Plugin to that directory or use a newer version of MariaDB.

  4. On the MariaDB command line, run the following command:

    install plugin server_audit soname 'server_audit.so'

  5. Create a backup copy of the /etc/mysql/my.cnf configuration file.
  6. In the /etc/mysql/my.cnf configuration file, in the [mysqld] section, add the following lines:

    server_audit_logging=1

    server_audit_events=connect,table,query_ddl,query_dml,query_dcl

    server_audit_output_type=SYSLOG

    server_audit_syslog_facility=LOG_SYSLOG

    If you want to disable event export for certain audit event groups, remove some of the values from the server_audit_events setting. Descriptions of settings are available on the MariaDB Audit Plugin vendor's website.

  7. Save changes to the configuration file.
  8. Restart the MariaDB service by running one of the following commands:
    • systemctl restart mariadb for a system with systemd initialization.
    • service mariadb restart for a system with init initialization.

MariaDB Audit Plugin for MariaDB is configured. If necessary, you can run the following commands on the MariaDB command line:

  • show plugins to check the list of current plugins.
  • SHOW GLOBAL VARIABLES LIKE 'server_audit%' to check the current audit settings.
Page top

[Topic 259464]

Configuring a Syslog server to send events

The rsyslog service is used to transmit events from the server to the collector.

To configure the sending of events from the server where MySQL or MariaDB is installed to the collector:

  1. Before making any changes, create a backup copy of the /etc/rsyslog.conf configuration file.
  2. To send events via UDP, add the following line to the /etc/rsyslog.conf configuration file:

    *.* @<IP address of the KUMA collector>:<port of the KUMA collector>

    For example:

    *.* @192.168.1.5:1514

    If you want to send events over TCP, the line should be as follows:

    *.* @@192.168.1.5:2514

    Save changes to the /etc/rsyslog.conf configuration file.

  3. Restart the rsyslog service by executing the following command:

    sudo systemctl restart rsyslog.service

Page top

[Topic 258317]

Configuring receipt of Apache Cassandra events

KUMA allows receiving information about Apache Cassandra events.

Configuring event receiving consists of the following steps:

  1. Configuring Apache Cassandra event logging in KUMA.
  2. Creating a KUMA collector for Apache Cassandra events.

    To receive Apache Cassandra events, in the KUMA Collector Installation Wizard, at the Transport step, select a file type connector; at the Event parsing step, in the Normalizer field, select [OOTB] Apache Cassandra file.

  3. Installing a collector in the KUMA network infrastructure.
  4. Verifying receipt of Apache Cassandra events in the KUMA collector.

    To verify that the Apache Cassandra event source server is configured correctly, you can search for related events.

Page top

[Topic 258324]

Configuring Apache Cassandra event logging in KUMA

To configuring Apache Cassandra event logging in KUMA:

  1. Make sure that the server where Apache Cassandra is installed has 5 GB of free disk space.
  2. Connect to the Apache Cassandra server using an account with administrator rights.
  3. Before making changes, create backup copies of the following configuration files:
    • /etc/cassandra/cassandra.yaml
    • /etc/cassandra/logback.xml
  4. Make sure that the settings in the /etc/cassandra/cassandra.yaml configuration file have the following values; make changes if necessary:
    1. in the audit_logging_options section, set the enabled setting to true.
    2. in the logger section, set the class_name setting to FileAuditLogger.
  5. Add the following lines to the /etc/cassandra/logback.xml configuration file:

    <!-- Audit Logging (FileAuditLogger) rolling file appender to audit.log -->

    <appender name="AUDIT" class="ch.qos.logback.core.rolling.RollingFileAppender">

    <file>${cassandra.logdir}/audit/audit.log</file>

    <rollingPolicy class="ch.qos.logback.core.rolling.SizeAndTimeBasedRollingPolicy">

    <!-- rollover daily -->

    <fileNamePattern>${cassandra.logdir}/audit/audit.log.%d{yyyy-MM-dd}.%i.zip</fileNamePattern>

    <!-- each file should be at most 50MB, keep 30 days worth of history, but at most 5GB -->

    <maxFileSize>50MB</maxFileSize>

    <maxHistory>30</maxHistory>

    <totalSizeCap>5GB</totalSizeCap>

    </rollingPolicy>

    <encoder>

    <pattern>%-5level [%thread] %date{ISO8601} %F:%L - %replace(%msg){'\n', ' '}%n</pattern>

    </encoder>

    </appender>

    <!-- Audit Logging additivity to redirect audt logging events to audit/audit.log -->

    <logger name="org.apache.cassandra.audit" additivity="false" level="INFO">

    <appender-ref ref="AUDIT"/>

    </logger>

  6. Save changes to the configuration file.
  7. Restart the Apache Cassandra service using the following commands:
    1. sudo systemctl stop cassandra.service
    2. sudo systemctl start cassandra.service
  8. After restarting, check the status of Apache Cassandra using the following command:

    sudo systemctl status cassandra.service

    Make sure that the command output contains the following sequence of characters:

    Active: active (running)

Apache Cassandra event export is configured. Events are located in the /var/log/cassandra/audit/ directory, in the audit.log file (${cassandra.logdir}/audit/audit.log).

Page top

[Topic 258336]

Configuring receipt of FreeIPA events

You can configure the receipt of FreeIPA events in KUMA via the Syslog protocol.

Configuring event receiving consists of the following steps:

  1. Configuring export of FreeIPA events to KUMA.
  2. Creating a KUMA collector for receiving FreeIPA events.

    To receive FreeIPA events, in the KUMA Collector Setup Wizard, at the Event parsing step, in the Normalizer field, select [OOTB] FreeIPA.

  3. Installing the KUMA collector in the network infrastructure.
  4. Verifying receipt of FreeIPA events by KUMA.

    To verify that the FreeIPA event source server is configured correctly, you can search for related events.

Page top

[Topic 258520]

Configuring export of FreeIPA events to KUMA

To configure the export of FreeIPA events to KUMA via the Syslog protocol in JSON format:

  1. Connect to the FreeIPA server via SSH using an account with administrator rights.
  2. In the /etc/rsyslog.d/ directory, create a file named freeipa-to-siem.conf.
  3. Add the following lines to the /etc/rsyslog.d/freeipa-to-siem.conf configuration file:

    template(name="ls_json" type="list" option.json="on")

    { constant(value="{")

    constant(value="\"@timestamp\":\"") property(name="timegenerated" dateFormat="rfc3339")

    constant(value="\",\"@version\":\"1")

    constant(value="\",\"message\":\"") property(name="msg")

    constant(value="\",\"host\":\"") property(name="fromhost")

    constant(value="\",\"host_ip\":\"") property(name="fromhost-ip")

    constant(value="\",\"logsource\":\"") property(name="fromhost")

    constant(value="\",\"severity_label\":\"") property(name="syslogseverity-text")

    constant(value="\",\"severity\":\"") property(name="syslogseverity")

    constant(value="\",\"facility_label\":\"") property(name="syslogfacility-text")

    constant(value="\",\"facility\":\"") property(name="syslogfacility")

    constant(value="\",\"program\":\"") property(name="programname")

    constant(value="\",\"pid\":\"") property(name="procid")

    constant(value="\",\"syslogtag\":\"") property(name="syslogtag")

    constant(value="\"}\n")

    }

    *.* @<IP address of the KUMA collector>:<port of the KUMA collector KUMA>;ls_json

    You can fill in the last line in accordance with the selected protocol:

    *.* @<192.168.1.10>:<1514>;ls_json for sending events over UDP

    *.* @@<192.168.2.11>:<2514>;ls_json for sending events over TCP

  4. Add the following lines to the /etc/rsyslog.conf configuration file:

    $IncludeConfig /etc/freeipa-to-siem.conf

    $RepeatedMsgReduction off

  5. Save changes to the configuration file.
  6. Restart the rsyslog service by executing the following command:

    sudo systemctl restart rsyslog.service

Page top

[Topic 255310]

Configuring receipt of VipNet TIAS events

You can configure the receipt of ViPNet TIAS events in KUMA via the Syslog protocol.

Configuring event receiving consists of the following steps:

  1. Configuring export of ViPNet TIAS events to KUMA.
  2. Creating a KUMA collector for receiving ViPNet TIAS events.

    To receive ViPNet TIAS events using Syslog, in the Collector Installation Wizard, at the Event parsing step, select the [OOTB] Syslog-CEF normalizer.

  3. Installing a KUMA collector for receiving ViPNet TIAS events.
  4. Verifying receipt of ViPNet TIAS events in KUMA.

    You can verify that ViPNet TIAS event source server is correctly configured in the Searching for related events section of the KUMA web interface.

Page top

[Topic 255311]

Configuring export of ViPNet TIAS events to KUMA

To configure the export of ViPNet TIAS events to KUMA via the syslog protocol:

  1. Connect to the ViPNet TIAS web interface under a user account with administrator rights.
  2. Go to the ManagementIntegrations section.
  3. On the Integration page, go to the Syslog tab.
  4. In the toolbar of the list of receiving servers, click New server.
  5. This opens the new server card; in that card:
    1. In the Server address field, enter the IP address or domain name of the KUMA collector.

      For example, 10.1.2.3 or syslog.siem.ru

    2. In the Port field, specify the inbound port of the KUMA collector. The default port number is 514.
    3. In the Protocol list, select the transport layer protocol that the KUMA collector is listening on. UDP is selected by default.
    4. In the Organization list, use the check boxes to select the organizations of the ViPNet TIAS infrastructure.

      Messages are sent only for incidents detected based on events received from sensors of selected organizations of the infrastructure.

    5. In the Status list, use check boxes to select incident statuses.

      Messages are sent only when selected statuses are assigned to incidents.

    6. In the Severity level list, use check boxes to select the severity levels of the incidents.

      Messages are sent only about incidents with the selected severity levels. By default, only the high severity level is selected in the list.

    7. In the UI language list, select the language in which you want to receive information about incidents in messages. Russian is selected by default.
  6. Click Add.
  7. In the toolbar of the list, set the Do not send incident information in CEF format toggle switch to enabled.

    As a result, when new incidents are detected or the statuses of previously detected incidents change, depending on the statuses selected during configuration, the corresponding information is sent to the specified addresses of receiving servers via the syslog protocol in CEF format.

  8. Click Save changes.

Export of events to the KUMA collector is configured.

Page top

[Topic 262006]

Configuring receipt of Sendmail events

You can configure the receipt of Sendmail mail agent events in the KUMA SIEM system.

Configuring event receiving consists of the following steps:

  1. Configuring Sendmail logging.
  2. Configuring the event source server.
  3. Creating a KUMA collector.

    To receive Sendmail events, use the following values in the Collector Installation Wizard:

    • At the Event parsing step, select the [OOTB] Sendmail syslog normalizer.
    • At the Transport step, select the tcp or udp connector type.
  4. Installing KUMA collector.
  5. Verifying receipt of Sendmail events in the KUMA collector

    You can verify that the Sendmail event source server is correctly configured in the Searching for related events section of the KUMA web interface.

Page top

[Topic 262017]

Configuring Sendmail logging

By default, events of the Sendmail system are logged to syslog.

To make sure that logging is configured correctly:

  1. Connect via SSH to the server on which the Sendmail system is installed.
  2. Run the following command:

    cat /etc/rsyslog.d/50-default.conf

    The command should return the following string:

    mail.* -/var/log/mail.log

If logging is configured correctly, you can proceed to configuring the export of Sendmail events.

Page top

[Topic 262018]

Configuring export of Sendmail events

Events are sent from the Sendmail mail agent server to the KUMA collector using the rsyslog service.

To configure transmission of Sendmail events to the collector:

  1. Connect to the server where Sendmail is installed using an account with administrative privileges.
  2. In the /etc/rsyslog.d/ directory, create the Sendmail-to-siem.conf file and add the following line to it:

    If $programname contains 'sendmail' then @<<IP address of the collector>:<port of the collector>>

    Example:

    If $programname contains 'sendmail' then @192.168.1.5:1514

    If you want to send events via TCP, the contents of the file must be as follows:

    If $programname contains 'sendmail' then @@<<IP address of the collector>:<port of the collector>>

  3. Create a backup copy of the /etc/rsyslog.conf file.
  4. Add the following lines to the /etc/rsyslog.conf configuration file:

    $IncludeConfig /etc/Sendmail-to-siem.conf

    $RepeatedMsgReduction off

  5. Save your changes.
  6. Restart the rsyslog service by executing the following command:

    sudo systemctl restart rsyslog.service

Page top

[Topic 265465]

Configuring receipt of Nextcloud events

You can configure the receipt of Nextcloud 26.0.4 events in the KUMA SIEM system.

Configuring event receiving consists of the following steps:

  1. Configuring audit of Nextcloud events.
  2. Configuring a Syslog server to send events.

    The rsyslog service is used to transmit events from the server to the collector.

  3. Creating a KUMA collector for receiving Nextcloud events.

    To receive Nextcloud events, in the Collector Installation Wizard, at the Event parsing step, select the [OOTB] Nextcloud syslog normalizer, and at the Transport step select the tcp or udp connector type.

  4. Installing KUMA collector for receiving Nextcloud events
  5. Verifying receipt of Nextcloud events in the KUMA collector

    You can verify that the Nextcloud event source server is correctly configured in the Searching for related events section of the KUMA web interface.

Page top

[Topic 265467]

Configuring audit of Nextcloud events

To configure the export of Nextcloud events to KUMA:

  1. On the server where Nextcloud is installed, create a backup copy of the /home/localuser/www/nextcloud/config/config.php configuration file.
  2. Edit the /home/localuser/www/nextcloud/config/config.php Nextcloud configuration file.
  3. Edit the settings as follows:

    'log_type' => 'syslog',

    'syslog_tag' => 'Nextcloud',

    'logfile' => '',

    'loglevel' => 0,

    'log.condition' => [

    'apps' => ['admin_audit'],

    ],

  4. Restart the Nextcloud service:

    sudo service restart nextcloud

Export of events to the KUMA collector is configured.

Page top

[Topic 265468]

Configuring a Syslog server to send Nextcloud events

To configure the sending of events from the server where Nextcloud is installed to the collector:

  1. In the /etc/rsyslog.d/ directory, create a Nextcloud-to-siem.conf file with the following content:

    If $programname contains 'Nextcloud' then @<IP address of the collector>:<port of the collector>

    Example:

    If $programname contains 'Nextcloud' then @192.168.1.5:1514

    If you want to send events via TCP, the contents of the file must be as follows:

    If $programname contains 'Nextcloud' then @<IP address of the collector>:<port of the collector>

  2. Save changes to the Nextcloud-to-siem.conf configuration file.
  3. Create a backup copy of the /etc/rsyslog.conf file.
  4. Add the following lines to the /etc/rsyslog.conf configuration file:

    $IncludeConfig /etc/Nextcloud-to-siem.conf

    $RepeatedMsgReduction off

  5. Save your changes.
  6. Restart the rsyslog service by executing the following command:

    sudo systemctl restart rsyslog.service

The export of Nextcloud events to the collector is configured.

Page top

[Topic 265480]

Configuring receipt of Snort events

You can configure the receipt of Snort 3 events in the KUMA SIEM system.

Configuring event receiving consists of the following steps:

  1. Configuring logging of Snort events.
  2. Creating a KUMA collector for receiving Snort events.

    To receive Snort events, in the Collector Installation Wizard, at the Event parsing step, select the [OOTB] Snort 3 json file normalizer, and at the Transport step, select the file connector type.

  3. Installing a KUMA collector for receiving Snort events
  4. Verifying receipt of Snort events in the KUMA collector

    You can verify that the Snort event source server is correctly configured in the Searching for related events section of the KUMA web interface.

Page top

[Topic 265482]

Configuring logging of Snort events

Make sure that the server running Snort has at least 500 MB of free disk space for storing a single Snort event log.
When the log reaches 500 MB, Snort automatically creates a new file with a name that includes the current time in unixtime format.
We recommend monitoring disk space usage.

To configure Snort event logging:

  1. Connect to the server where Snort is installed using an account with administrative privileges.
  2. Edit the Snort configuration file. To do so, run the following command on the command line:

    sudo vi /usr/local/etc/snort/snort.lua

  3. In the configuration file, edit the alert_json block:

    alert_json =

    {

    file = true,

    limit = 500,

    fields = 'seconds action class b64_data dir dst_addr dst_ap dst_port eth_dst eth_len \

    eth_src eth_type gid icmp_code icmp_id icmp_seq icmp_type iface ip_id ip_len msg mpls \

    pkt_gen pkt_len pkt_num priority proto rev rule service sid src_addr src_ap src_port \

    target tcp_ack tcp_flags tcp_len tcp_seq tcp_win tos ttl udp_len vlan timestamp',

    }

  4. To complete the configuration, run the following command:

    sudo /usr/local/bin/snort -c /usr/local/etc/snort/snort.lua -s 65535 -k none -l /var/log/snort -i <name of the interface that Snort is listening on> -m 0x1b

As a result, Snort events are logged to /var/log/snort/alert_json.txt.

Page top

[Topic 265484]

Configuring receipt of Suricata events

You can configure the receipt of Suricata 7.0.1 events in the KUMA SIEM system.

Configuring event receiving consists of the following steps:

  1. Configuring export of Suricata events to KUMA
  2. Creating a KUMA collector for receiving Suricata events.

    To receive Suricata events, in the Collector Installation Wizard, at the Event parsing step, select the [OOTB] Suricata json file normalizer, and at the Transport step, select the file connector type.

  3. Installing KUMA collector for receiving Suricata events
  4. Verifying receipt of Suricata events in the KUMA collector

    You can verify that the Suricata event source server is correctly configured in the Searching for related events section of the KUMA web interface.

Page top

[Topic 265486]

Configuring audit of Suricata events

To configure Suricata event logging:

  1. Connect via SSH to the server that has administrative accounts.
  2. Create a backup copy of the /etc/suricata/suricata.yaml file.
  3. Set the following values in the eve-log section of the /etc/suricata/suricata.yaml configuration file:

    - eve-log:

    enabled: yes

    filetype: regular #regular|syslog|unix_dgram|unix_stream|redis

    filename: eve.json

  4. Save your changes to the /etc/suricata/suricata.yaml configuration file.

As a result, Suricata events are logged to the /usr/local/var/log/suricata/eve.json file.

Suricata does not support limiting the size of the eve.json event file. If necessary, you can manage the log size by using rotation. For example, to configure hourly log rotation, add the following lines to the configuration file:

outputs:

- eve-log:

filename: eve-%Y-%m-%d-%H:%M.json

rotate-interval: hour

Page top

[Topic 265491]

Configuring receipt of FreeRADIUS events

You can configure the receipt of FreeRADIUS 3.0.26 events in the KUMA SIEM system.

Configuring event receiving consists of the following steps:

  1. Configuring audit of FreeRADIUS events
  2. Configuring a Syslog server to send FreeRADIUS events.
  3. Creating a KUMA collector for receiving FreeRADIUS events.

    To receive FreeRADIUS events, in the Collector Installation Wizard, at the Event parsing step, select the [OOTB] FreeRADIUS syslog normalizer, and at the Transport step, select the tcp or udp connector type.

  4. Installing KUMA collector for receiving FreeRADIUS events.
  5. Verifying receipt of FreeRADIUS events in the KUMA collector.

    You can verify that the FreeRADIUS event source server is correctly configured in the Searching for related events section of the KUMA web interface.

Page top

[Topic 265492]

Configuring audit of FreeRADIUS events

To configure event audit in the FreeRADIUS system:

  1. Connect to the server where the FreeRADIUS system is installed using an account with administrative privileges.
  2. Create a backup copy of the FreeRADIUS configuration file:

    sudo cp /etc/freeradius/3.0/radiusd.conf /etc/freeradius /3.0/radiusd.conf.bak

  3. Open the FreeRADIUS configuration file for editing:

    sudo nano /etc/freeradius/3.0/radiusd.conf

  4. In the 'log' section, edit the settings as follows:

    destination = syslog

    syslog_facility = daemon

    stripped_names = no

    auth = yes

    auth_badpass = yes

    auth_goodpass = yes

  5. Save the configuration file.

FreeRADIUS event audit is configured.

Page top

[Topic 265493]

Configuring a Syslog server to send FreeRADIUS events

The rsyslog service is used to transmit events from the FreeRADIUS server to the KUMA collector.

To configure the sending of events from the server where FreeRADIUS is installed to the collector:

  1. In the /etc/rsyslog.d/ directory, create the FreeRADIUS-to-siem.conf file and add the following line to it:

    If $programname contains 'radiusd' then @<IP address of the collector>:<port of the collector>

    If you want to send events via TCP, the contents of the file must be as follows:

    If $programname contains 'radiusd' then @<IP address of the collector>:<port of the collector>

  2. Create a backup copy of the /etc/rsyslog.conf file.
  3. Add the following lines to the /etc/rsyslog.conf configuration file:

    $IncludeConfig /etc/FreeRADIUS-to-siem.conf

    $RepeatedMsgReduction off

  4. Save your changes.
  5. Restart the rsyslog service:

    sudo systemctl restart rsyslog.service

The export of events from the FreeRADIUS server to the KUMA collector is configured.

Page top

[Topic 265514]

Configuring receipt of zVirt events

You can configure the receipt of zVirt 3.1 events in the KUMA SIEM system.

Configuring event receiving consists of the following steps:

  1. Configuring export of zVirt events to KUMA.
  2. Creating a KUMA collector for receiving zVirt events.

    To receive zVirt events, in the Collector Installation Wizard, at the Event parsing step, select the [OOTB] OrionSoft zVirt syslog normalizer, and at the Transport step, select the tcp or udp connector type.

  3. Installing KUMA collector for receiving zVirt events
  4. Verifying receipt of zVirt events in the KUMA collector

    You can verify that the zVirt event source server is correctly configured in the Searching for related events section of the KUMA web interface.

Page top

[Topic 265517]

Configuring export of zVirt events

ZVirt can send events to external systems in Hosted Engine installation mode.

To configure the export of zVirt events to KUMA:

  1. In the zVirt web interface, under Resources, select Virtual machines.
  2. Select the machine that is running the HostedEngine virtual machine and click Edit.
  3. In the Edit virtual machine window, go to the Logging section.
  4. Select the Determine Syslog server address check box.
  5. In the text box, enter the collector information in the following format: <IP address or FQDN of the KUMA collector>: <port of the KUMA collector>.
  6. If you want to use TCP instead of UDP for sending logs, select the Use TCP connection check box.

Event export is configured.

Page top

[Topic 265545]

Configuring receipt of Zeek IDS events

You can configure the receipt of Zeek IDS 1.8 events in the KUMA SIEM system.

Configuring event receiving consists of the following steps:

  1. Conversion of the Zeek IDS event log format.

    The KUMA normalizer supports Zeek IDS logs in the JSON format. To send events to the KUMA normalizer, log files must be converted to the JSON format.

  2. Creating a KUMA collector for receiving Zeek IDS events.

    To receive Zeek IDS events, in the Collector Installation Wizard, at the Event parsing step, select the [OOTB] ZEEK IDS json file normalizer, and at the Transport step, select the file connector type.

  3. Installing KUMA collector for receiving Zeek IDS events
  4. Verifying receipt of Zeek IDS events in the KUMA collector

    You can verify that the Zeek IDS event source server is correctly configured in the Searching for related events section of the KUMA web interface.

Page top

[Topic 265550]

New Topic (202)

By default, Zeek IDS events are logged in files in the /opt/zeek/logs/current directory.

The "[OOTB] ZEEK IDS json file" normalizer supports Zeek IDS logs in the JSON format. To send events to the KUMA normalizer, log files must be converted to the JSON format.

This procedure must be repeated every time before receiving Zeek IDS events.

To convert the Zeek IDS event log format:

  1. Connect to the server where Zeek IDS is installed using an account with administrative privileges.
  2. Create the directory where JSON event logs must be stored:

    sudo mkdir /opt/zeek/logs/zeek-json

  3. Change to this directory:

    sudo cd /opt/zeek/logs/zeek-json

  4. Run the command that uses the jq utility to convert the original event log format to the target format:

    jq . -c <path to the log file to be converted to a different format> >> <new file name>.log

    Example:

    jq . -c /opt/zeek/logs/current/conn.log >> conn.log

As a result of running the command, a new file is created in the /opt/zeek/logs/zeek-json directory if this file did not exist before. If the file was already present in the current directory, new information is appended to the end of the file.

Page top

[Topic 249532]

Monitoring event sources

This section provides information about monitoring event sources.

Page top

[Topic 221645]

Source status

In KUMA, you can monitor the state of the sources of data received by collectors. There can be multiple sources of events on one server, and data from multiple sources can be received by one collector. KUMA creates event sources based on the following fields of events (the data in these fields is case sensitive):

  • DeviceProduct is a required field.
  • One of the DeviceHostname or DeviceAddress fields must be present.
  • DeviceProcessName is an optional field.
  • Tenant is a required field, which is determined automatically from the tenant of the event that was used to identify the source.

Limitations

  1. KUMA registers an event source, provided that the DeviceAddress and DeviceProduct fields are contained in a raw event.

    If the raw event does not contain the DeviceAddress and DeviceProduct fields, you can configure enrichment in the normalizer: select the Event data type on the Enrichment tab of the normalizer, specify the values for the Source field parameter, select DeviceAddress and DeviceProduct for the Target field parameter, and click OK. KUMA will perform enrichment and register the event source.

  2. If KUMA receives events with identical values of the DeviceProduct + DeviceHostname + DeviceAddress required fields, KUMA registers different sources if the following conditions are satisfied:
    • The values of the required fields are identical, but different tenants are determined for the events.
    • The values of the required fields are identical, but one of the events has an optional DeviceProcessName field specified.
    • The values of the required fields are identical, but the data in these fields have different character case.

    If you want KUMA to log such events under the same source, you can further configure the fields in the normalizer.

Lists of sources are generated in collectors, merged in the KUMA Core, and displayed in the program web interface under Source status on the List of event sources tab. Data is updated every minute.

The rate and number of incoming events serve as an important indicator of the state of the observed system. You can configure monitoring policies such that changes are tracked automatically and notifications are automatically created when indicators reach specific boundary values. Monitoring policies are displayed in the KUMA web interface under Source status on the Monitoring policies tab.

When monitoring policies are triggered, monitoring events are created and include data about the source of events.

In this section

List of event sources

Page top

[Topic 221773]

List of event sources

Sources of events are displayed in the table under Source statusList of event sources. One page can display up to 250 sources. You can sort the table by clicking the column header of the relevant setting. Clicking on a source of events opens an incoming data graph.

You can use the Search field to search for event sources. The search is performed using regular expressions (RE2).

If necessary, you can configure the interval for updating data in the table. Available update periods: 1 minute, 5 minutes, 15 minutes, 1 hour. The default value is No refresh. You may need to configure the update period to track changes made to the list of sources.

The following columns are available:

  • Status—status of the event source:
    • Green—events are being received within the limits of the assigned monitoring policy.
    • Red—the frequency or number of incoming events go beyond the boundaries defined in the monitoring policy.
    • Gray—a monitoring policy has not been assigned to the source of events.

    The table can be filtered by this setting.

  • Name—name of the event source. The name is generated automatically from the following fields of events:
    • DeviceProduct
    • DeviceAddress and/or DeviceHostName
    • DeviceProcessName
    • Tenant

    You can change the name of an event source. The name can contain no more than 128 Unicode characters.

  • Host name or IP address—host name or IP address from which the events were forwarded.
  • Monitoring policy—name of the monitoring policy assigned to the event source.
  • Stream—frequency at which events are received from the event source.
  • Lower limit—lower boundary of the permissible number of incoming events as indicated in the monitoring policy.
  • Upper limit—upper boundary of the permissible number of incoming events as indicated in the monitoring policy.
  • Tenant—the tenant that owns the events received from the event source.

If you select sources of events, the following buttons become available:

  • Save to CSV—you can use this button to export data of the selected event sources to a file named event-source-list.csv in UTF-8 encoding.
  • Apply policy and Disable policy—you can use these buttons to enable or disable a monitoring policy for a source of events. When enabling a policy, you must select the policy from the drop-down list. When disabling a policy, you must select how long you want to disable the policy: temporarily or forever.

    If there is no policy for the selected event source, the Apply policy button is inactive. This button will also be inactive if sources from different tenants are selected, but the user has no available policies in the shared tenant.

    In some rare cases, the status of a disabled policy may change from gray to green a few seconds after it is disabled due to overlapping internal processes of KUMA. If this happens, you need to disable the monitoring policy again.

  • Remove event source from the list—you can use this button to remove an event source from the table. The statistics on this source will also be removed. If a collector continues to receive data from the source, the event source will re-appear in the table but its old statistics will not be taken into account.

By default, no more than 250 event sources are displayed and, therefore, available for selection. If there are more event sources, to select them you must load additional event sources by clicking the Show next 250 button in the lower part of the window.

Page top

[Topic 221775]

Monitoring policies

The rate and number of incoming events serve as an important indicator of the state of the system. For example, you can detect when there are too many events, too few, or none at all. Monitoring policies are designed to detect such situations. In a policy, you can specify a lower threshold, an optional upper threshold, and the way the events are counted: by frequency or by total number.

The policy must be applied to the event source. After applying the policy, you can monitor the status of the source: green means everything is OK, red means the stream is outside the configured threshold. If the status is red, an event of the Monitoring type generated. You can also configure notifications to be sent to an arbitrary email address. Policies for monitoring the sources of events are displayed in the table under Source statusMonitoring policies. You can sort the table by clicking the column header of the relevant setting. Clicking a policy opens the data area with policy settings. The settings can be edited.

To add a monitoring policy:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, under Source statusMonitoring policies, click Add policy and define the settings in the opened window:
    1. In the Policy name field, enter a unique name for the policy you are creating. The name must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
    2. In the Tenant drop-down list, select the tenant that will own the policy. Your tenant selection determines the specific sources of events that can covered by the monitoring policy.
    3. In the Policy type drop-down list, select one of the following options:
      • byCount—by the number of events over a certain period of time.
      • byEPS—by the number of events per second over a certain period of time. The average value over the entire period is calculated. You can additionally track spikes during specific periods.
    4. In the Lower limit and Upper limit fields, define the boundaries representing normal behavior. Deviations outside of these boundaries will trigger the monitoring policy, create an alert, and forward notifications.
    5. In the Count interval field, specify the period during which the monitoring policy must take into account the data from the monitoring source. The maximum value is 14 days.
    6. If necessary, specify the email addresses to which notifications about the activation of the KUMA monitoring policy should be sent. To add each address, click the Email button.

      To forward notifications, you must configure a connection to the SMTP server.

  2. Click Add.

The monitoring policy will be added.

To remove a monitoring policy,

select one or more policies, then click Delete policy and confirm the action.

You cannot remove preinstalled monitoring policies or policies that have been assigned to data sources.

Page top

[Topic 217935]

Managing assets

Assets represent the computers of the organization. You can add assets to KUMA; in that case, KUMA automatically adds asset IDs when enriching events, and when you analyze events, you can get additional information about computers in the organization.

You can add assets to KUMA in the following ways:

  • Import assets:
    • From the MaxPatrol report.
    • On a schedule from Kaspersky Security Center and KICS for Networks.

      By default, assets are imported every 12 hours, this frequency can be configured. On-demand import of assets is also possible; such on-demand import does not affect the scheduled import time. From the Kaspersky Security Center database, KUMA imports information about devices with installed Kaspersky Security Center Network Agent that has connected to Kaspersky Security Center, that is, has a non-empty 'Connection time' field in the SQL database. KUMA imports the following information about hte computer: name, address, time of connection to Kaspersky Security Center, information about hardware and software, including the operating system, and information about vulnerabilities. That is, the information that is collected by means of the Kaspersky Security Center Network Agent.

  • Create assets manually through the web interface or via the API.

    You can add assets manually. In this case, you must manually specify the following information: address, FQDN, name and version of the operating system, hardware information. Information about the vulnerabilities of assets cannot be added through the web interface. You can provide information about vulnerabilities if you add assets using the API.

You can manage KUMA assets: view information about assets, search for assets, add, edit or delete assets, and export asset data to a CSV file.

Asset categories

You can categorize the assets and then use the categories in filter conditions or correlation rules. For example, you can create alerts of a higher severity level for assets from a higher-severity category. By default, all assets fall into the Uncategorized assets category. A device can be added to multiple categories.

By default, KUMA assigns the following severity levels to asset categories: Low, Medium, High, Critical. You can create custom categories, categories can be nested.

Categories can be populated in the following ways:

  • Manually
  • Active: dynamic if the asset meets the specified conditions. For example, the moment the asset is upgraded to a specified OS version or placed in a specified subnet, the asset is moved to the specified category.
    1. In the Repeat categorization every drop-down list, specify how often assets will be linked to a category. You can select values ranging from once per hour to once per 24 hours.

      You can forcibly start categorization by selecting Start categorization in the category context menu.

    2. In the Conditions settings block, specify the filter for matching assets to attach to an asset category.

      You can add conditions by clicking the Add condition buttons. Groups of conditions can be added by using the Add group buttons. Group operators can be switched between AND, OR, and NOT values.

      Categorization filter operands and operators

      Operand

      Operators

      Comment

      Build number

      >, >=, =, <=, <

       

      OS

      =, like

      The "like" operator ensures that the search is not case sensitive.

      IP address

      inSubnet, inRange

      The IP address is indicated in CIDR notation (for example: 192.168.0.0/24).

      When the inRange operator is selected, you can indicate only addresses from private ranges of IP addresses (for example: 10.0.0.0–10.255.255.255). Both addresses must be in the same range.

      FQDN

      =, like

      The "like" operator ensures that the search is not case sensitive.

      CVE

      =, in

      The "in" operator lets you specify an array of values.

      Software

      =, like

       

      CII

      in

      More than one value can be selected.

      Anti-virus databases last updated

      >=,<=

       

      Last update of the information

      >=,<=

       

      Protection last updated

      >=,<=

       

      System last started

      >=,<=

       

      KSC extended status

      in

      Extended status of the device.

      More than one value can be selected.

      Real-time protection status

      =

      Status of Kaspersky applications installed on the managed device.

      Encryption status

      =

       

      Spam protection status

      =

       

      Anti-virus protection status of mail servers

      =

       

      Data Leakage Prevention status

      =

       

      KSC extended status ID

      =

       

      Endpoint Sensor status

      =

       

      Last visible

      >=,<=

       

    3. Use the Test conditions button to make sure that the specified filter is correct. When you click the button, you should see the Assets for given conditions window containing a list of assets that satisfy the search conditions.
  • Reactive—When a correlation rule is triggered, the asset is moved to the specified group.

In KUMA, assets are categorized by tenant and by category. Assets are arranged in a tree structure, where the tenants are located at the root, and the asset categories branch from them. You can view the tree of tenants and categories in the AssetsAll assets section of the KUMA web interface. When a tree node is selected, the assets assigned to it are displayed in the right part of the window. Assets from the subcategories of the selected category are displayed if you specify that you want to display assets recursively. You can select the check boxes next to the tenants whose assets you want to view.

To open the context menu of a category, hover the mouse cursor over the category and click the ellipsis icon that is displayed to the right of the category name. The following actions are available in the context menu:

Category context menu items

Action

Description

Show assets

Display assets of the selected category in the right part of the window.

Show assets recursively

View assets from subcategories of the selected category. If you want to exit recursive viewing mode, select another category to view.

Show info

View information about the selected category in the Category information details area displayed in the right part of the web interface window.

Start categorization

Start automatic binding of assets to the selected category. This option is available for categories that have active categorization.

Add subcategory

Add a subcategory to the selected category.

Edit category

Edit the selected category.

Delete category

Delete the selected category. You can only delete categories that have no assets or subcategories. Otherwise the Delete category option is inactive.

Pin as tab

Display the selected category on a separate tab. You can undo this action by selecting Unpin as tab in the context menu of the relevant category.

In this section

Adding an asset category

Configuring the table of assets

Searching assets

Exporting asset data

Viewing asset details

Adding assets

Assigning a category to an asset

Editing the parameters of assets

Deleting assets

Updating third-party applications and fixing vulnerabilities on Kaspersky Security Center assets

Moving assets to a selected administration group

Asset audit

Custom asset fields

Critical information infrastructure assets

See also:

About assets

Asset data model

Page top

[Topic 217710]

Adding an asset category

To add an asset category:

  1. Open the Assets section in the KUMA web interface.
  2. Open the category creation window:
    • Click the Add category button.
    • If you want to create a subcategory, select Add subcategory in the context menu of the parent category.

    The Add category details area appears in the right part of the web interface window.

  3. Add information about the category:
    • In the Name field, enter the name of the category. The name must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
    • In the Parent field, indicate the position of the category within the categories tree hierarchy:
      1. Click the parent-category button.

        This opens the Select categories window showing the categories tree. If you are creating a new category and not a subcategory, the window may show multiple asset category trees, one for each tenant that you can access. Your tenant selection in this window cannot be undone.

      2. Select the parent category for the category you are creating.
      3. Click Save.

      Selected category appears in Parent fields.

    • The Tenant field displays the tenant whose structure contains your selected parent category. The tenant category cannot be changed.
    • Assign a severity to the category in the Priority drop-down list.
    • If necessary, in the Description field, you can add a note consisting of up to 256 Unicode characters.
  4. In the Categorization kind drop-down list, select how the category will be populated with assets. Depending on your selection, you may need to specify additional settings:
    • Manually—assets can only be manually linked to a category.
    • Active—assets will be assigned to a category at regular intervals if they satisfy the defined filter.

      Active category of assets

      1. In the Repeat categorization every drop-down list, specify how often assets will be linked to a category. You can select values ranging from once per hour to once per 24 hours.

        You can forcibly start categorization by selecting Start categorization in the category context menu.

      2. In the Conditions settings block, specify the filter for matching assets to attach to an asset category.

        You can add conditions by clicking the Add condition buttons. Groups of conditions can be added by using the Add group buttons. Group operators can be switched between AND, OR, and NOT values.

        Categorization filter operands and operators

        Operand

        Operators

        Comment

        Build number

        >, >=, =, <=, <

         

        OS

        =, like

        The "like" operator ensures that the search is not case sensitive.

        IP address

        inSubnet, inRange

        The IP address is indicated in CIDR notation (for example: 192.168.0.0/24).

        When the inRange operator is selected, you can indicate only addresses from private ranges of IP addresses (for example: 10.0.0.0–10.255.255.255). Both addresses must be in the same range.

        FQDN

        =, like

        The "like" operator ensures that the search is not case sensitive.

        CVE

        =, in

        The "in" operator lets you specify an array of values.

        Software

        =, like

         

        CII

        in

        More than one value can be selected.

        Anti-virus databases last updated

        >=,<=

         

        Last update of the information

        >=,<=

         

        Protection last updated

        >=,<=

         

        System last started

        >=,<=

         

        KSC extended status

        in

        Extended status of the device.

        More than one value can be selected.

        Real-time protection status

        =

        Status of Kaspersky applications installed on the managed device.

        Encryption status

        =

         

        Spam protection status

        =

         

        Anti-virus protection status of mail servers

        =

         

        Data Leakage Prevention status

        =

         

        KSC extended status ID

        =

         

        Endpoint Sensor status

        =

         

        Last visible

        >=,<=

         

      3. Use the Test conditions button to make sure that the specified filter is correct. When you click the button, you should see the Assets for given conditions window containing a list of assets that satisfy the search conditions.
    • Reactive—the category will be filled with assets by using correlation rules.
  5. Click Save.

The new category will be added to the asset categories tree.

Page top

[Topic 217772]

Configuring the table of assets

In KUMA, you can configure the contents and order of columns displayed in the assets table. These settings are stored locally on your machine.

To configure the settings for displaying the assets table:

  1. Open the Assets section in the KUMA web interface.
  2. Click the gear icon in the upper-right corner of the assets table.
  3. In the drop-down list, select the check boxes next to the parameters that you want to view in the table:
    • FQDN
    • IP address
    • Asset source
    • Owner
    • MAC address
    • Created by
    • Updated
    • Tenant
    • CII category

    When you select a check box, the assets table is updated and a new column is added. When a check box is cleared, the column disappears. The table can be sorted based on multiple columns.

  4. If you need to change the order of columns, click the left mouse button on the column name and drag it to the desired location in the table.

The assets table display settings are configured.

Page top

[Topic 217987]

Searching assets

KUMA has two asset search modes. You can switch between the search modes using the buttons in the upper left part of the window:

  • assetSearch-simple – simple search by the following asset settings: Name, FQDN, IP address, MAC address, and Owner.
  • assetSearch-complex – advanced search for assets using filters by conditions and condition groups.

You can select the check boxes next to the found assets to export their data to a CSV file.

Simple search

To find an asset:

  1. Make sure that the assetSearch-simple button is enabled in the upper left part of the Assets section of the KUMA web interface.

    The Search field is displayed at the top of the window.

  2. Enter your search query in the Search field and press ENTER or click the magn-glass icon.

The table displays the assets with the Name, FQDN, IP address, MAC address, and Owner settings matching the search criteria.

Advanced search

An advanced asset search is performed using the filtering conditions that can be specified in the upper part of the window:

  • You can use the Add condition button to add a string containing fields for identifying the condition.
  • You can use the Add group button to add a group of filters. Group operators can be switched between AND, OR, and NOT.
  • Conditions and condition groups can be dragged with the mouse.
  • Conditions, groups, and filters can be deleted by using the cross button.
  • You can collapse the filtering options by clicking the Collapse button. In this case, the resulting search expression is displayed. Clicking it displays the search criteria in full again.
  • The filtering options can be reset by clicking the Clear button.
  • The condition operators and available values of the right operand depend on the selected left operand:

    Left operand

    Available operators

    Right operand

    Build number

    =, >, >=, <, <=

    An arbitrary value.

    OS

    =, ilike

    An arbitrary value.

    IP address

    inSubnet, inRange

    An arbitrary value or a range of values.

    The filtering condition for the inSubnet operator is met if the IP address in the left operand is included in the subnet that is specified in the right operand. For example, the subnet for the IP address 10.80.16.206 should be specified in the right operand using slash notation as follows: 10.80.16.206/25.

    FQDN

    =, ilike

    An arbitrary value.

    CVE

    =, in

    An arbitrary value.

    Asset source

    in

    • Kaspersky Security Center
    • KICS for Networks
    • Imported via API
    • Created manually

    RAM

    =, >, >=, <, <=

    Number.

    Number of disks

    =, >, >=, <, <=

    Number.

    Number of network cards

    =, >, >=, <, <=

    Number.

    Disk free bytes

    =, >, >=, <, <=

    Number.

    Anti-virus databases last updated

    >=, <=

    Date.

    Last update of the information

    >=, <=

    Date.

    Protection last updated

    >=, <=

    Date.

    System last started

    >=, <=

    Date.

    KSC extended status

    in

    • The host with the Network Agent installed is connected to the network, but the Network Agent is not active
    • The anti-virus application is installed, but real-time protection is not enabled
    • Anti-virus application is installed but not running
    • The number of detected viruses is too large
    • The anti-virus application is installed, but the real-time protection status differs from the one set by the security administrator
    • The anti-virus application is not installed
    • A full virus scan was performed too long ago
    • The anti-virus databases were updated too long ago
    • The Network Agent is inactive for too long
    • License expired
    • The number of untreated objects is too large
    • Restart required
    • Incompatible applications are installed on the host
    • Vulnerabilities are detected on the host
    • The last scan for operating system updates on the host was too long ago
    • Invalid encryption status of the host
    • Mobile device settings do not comply with security policy requirements
    • Unprocessed incidents detected
    • Host status is suggested by a managed product
    • Insufficient disk space on the host. Synchronization errors occur, or not enough disk space

    Real-time protection status

    =

    • Suspended
    • Starting
    • Running (if the anti-virus application does not support the Running status categories)
    • Performed with maximum protection
    • Performed with maximum performance
    • Performed with recommended settings
    • Performed with custom settings
    • Error

    Encryption status

    =

    • Encryption rules are not configured on the host.
    • Encryption is in progress.
    • Encryption was canceled by the user.
    • Encryption error occurred.
    • All host encryption rules are met.
    • Encryption is in progress, the host must be restarted.
    • Encrypted files without specified encryption rules are detected on the host.

    Spam protection status

    =

    • Unknown
    • Stopped
    • Suspended
    • Starting
    • In progress
    • Error
    • Not installed
    • License is missing

    Anti-virus protection status of mail servers

    =

    • Unknown
    • Stopped
    • Suspended
    • Starting
    • In progress
    • Error
    • Not installed
    • License is missing

    Data Leakage Prevention status

    =

    • Unknown
    • Stopped
    • Suspended
    • Starting
    • In progress
    • Error
    • Not installed
    • License is missing

    KSC extended status ID

    =

    • OK
    • Critical
    • Attention required

    Endpoint Sensor status

    =

    • Unknown
    • Stopped
    • Suspended
    • Starting
    • In progress
    • Error
    • Not installed
    • License is missing

    Last visible

    >=, <=

    Date

To find an asset:

  1. Make sure that the assetSearch-complex button is enabled in the upper left part of the Assets section of the KUMA web interface.

    The asset filtering settings are displayed in the upper part of the window.

  2. Specify the asset filtering settings and click the Search button.

The table displays the assets that meet the search criteria.

Page top

[Topic 241719]

Exporting asset data

You can export data about the assets displayed in the assets table as a CSV file.

To export asset data:

  1. Configure the assets table.

    Only the data specified in the table is written to the file. The display order of the asset table columns is preserved in the exported file.

  2. Find the desired assets and select the check boxes next to them.

    You can select all the assets in the table at a time by selecting the check box in the left part of the assets table header.

  3. Click the Export CSV button.

The asset data is written to the assets_<export date>_<export time>.csv file. The file is downloaded according to your browser settings.

Page top

[Topic 235166]

Viewing asset details

To view information about an asset, open the asset information window in one of the following ways:

  • In the KUMA web interface, select Assets → select a category with the relevant assets → select an asset.
  • In the KUMA web interface, select Alerts → click the link with the relevant alert → select the asset in the Related endpoints section.
  • In the KUMA web interface, select Eventssearch and filter events → select the relevant event → click the link in one of the following fields: SourceAssetID, DestinationAssetID, or DeviceAssetID.

The following information may be displayed in the asset details window:

  • Name—asset name.

    Assets imported into KUMA retain the names that were assigned to them at the source. You can change these names in the KUMA web interface.

  • Tenant—the name of the tenant that owns the asset.
  • Asset source—source of information about the asset. There may be several sources. For instance, information can be added in the KUMA web interface or by using the API, or it can be imported from Kaspersky Security Center, KICS for Networks, and MaxPatrol reports.

    When using multiple sources to add information about the same asset to KUMA, you should take into account the rules for merging asset data.

  • Created—date and time when the asset was added to KUMA.
  • Updated—date and time when the asset information was most recently modified.
  • Owner—owner of the asset, if provided.
  • IP address—IP address of the asset (if any).

    If there are several assets with identical IP addresses in KUMA, the asset that was added the latest is returned in all cases when assets are searched by IP address. If assets with identical IP addresses can coexist in your organization's network, plan accordingly and use additional attributes to identify the assets. For example, this may become important during correlation.

  • FQDN—Fully Qualified Domain Name of the asset, if provided.
  • MAC address—MAC address of the asset (if any).
  • Operating system—operating system of the asset.
  • Related alertsalerts associated with the asset (if any).

    To view the list of alerts related to an asset, click the Find in Alerts link. The Alerts tab opens with the search expression set to filter all assets with the corresponding asset ID.

  • Software info and Hardware info—if the asset software and hardware parameters are provided, they are displayed in this section.
  • Asset vulnerability information:
    • Kaspersky Security Center vulnerabilities—vulnerabilities of the asset, if provided. This information is available for the assets imported from Kaspersky Security Center.

      You can learn more about the vulnerability by clicking the learnmore icon, which opens the Kaspersky Threats portal. You can also update the vulnerabilities list by clicking the Update link and requesting updated information from Kaspersky Security Center.

    • KICS for Networks vulnerabilities—vulnerabilities of the asset, if provided. This information is available for the assets imported from KICS for Networks.
  • Asset source information:
    • Last visible—time when information about the asset was last received from Kaspersky Security Center. This information is available for the assets imported from Kaspersky Security Center.
    • Host ID—ID of the Kaspersky Security Center Network Agent from which the asset information was received. This information is available for the assets imported from Kaspersky Security Center. This ID is used to determine the uniqueness of the asset in Kaspersky Security Center.
    • KICS for Networks server IP address and KICS for Networks connector ID—data on the KICS for Networks instance from which the asset was imported.
  • Custom fields—data written to the asset custom fields.
  • Additional information about the protection settings of an asset with Kaspersky Endpoint Security for Windows or Kaspersky Endpoint Security for Linux installed:
    • KSC extended status ID – asset status. It can have the following values:
      • OK
      • Critical
      • Warning
    • KSC extended status – information about the asset status. For example, "The anti-virus databases were updated too long ago".
    • Real-time protection status – status of Kaspersky applications installed on the asset. For example: "Running (if the anti-virus application does not support the Running status categories)".
    • Encryption status – information about asset encryption. For example: "Encryption rules are not configured on the host".
    • Spam protection status – status of anti-spam protection. For example, "Started".
    • Anti-virus protection status of mail servers – status of the virus protection of mail servers. For example, "Started".
    • Data Leakage Prevention status – status of data leak protection. For example, "Started".
    • Endpoint Sensor status – status of data leak protection. For example, "Started".
    • Anti-virus databases last updated – the version of the downloaded anti-virus databases.
    • Protection last updated – the time when the anti-virus databases were last updated.
    • System last started – the time when the system was last started.

    This information is displayed if the asset was imported from Kaspersky Security Center.

  • Categories—categories associated with the asset (if any).
  • CII category—information about whether an asset is a critical information infrastructure (CII) object.

Clicking the KSC response button starts Kaspersky Security Center task on the asset and clicking the Move to KSC group button moves the asset being viewed between Kaspersky Security Center administration groups.

This is available if KUMA is integrated with Kaspersky Security Center.

Page top

[Topic 233855]

Adding assets

You can add asset information in the following ways:

When assets are added, assets that already exist in KUMA can be merged with the assets being added.

Asset merging algorithm:

  1. Checking uniqueness of Kaspersky Security Center or KICS for Networks assets.
    • The uniqueness of an asset imported from Kaspersky Security Center is determined by the Host ID parameter, which contains the Kaspersky Security Center Network Agent Network Agent identifier. If two assets' IDs differ, they are considered to be separate assets and are not merged.
    • The uniqueness of an asset imported from KICS for Networks is determined by the combination of the IP address, KICS for Networks server IP address, and KICS for Networks connector ID parameters. If any of the parameters of two assets differ they are considered to be separate assets and are not merged.

    If the compared assets match, the algorithm is performed further.

  2. Make sure that the values in the IP, MAC, and FQDN fields match.

    If at least two of the specified fields match, the assets are combined, provided that the other fields are blank.

    Possible matches:

    • The FQDN and IP address of the assets match. The MAC field is blank.

      The check is performed against the entire array of IP address values. If the IP address of an asset is included in the FQDN, the values are considered to match.

    • The FQDN and MAC address of the assets match. The IP field is blank.

      The check is performed against the entire array of MAC address values. If at least one value of the array fully matches the FQDN, the values are considered to match.

    • The IP address and MAC address of the assets match. The FQDN field is blank.

      The check is performed against the entire array of IP- and MAC address values. If at least one value in the arrays is fully matched, the values are considered to match.

  3. Make sure that the values of at least one of the IP, MAC, or FQDN fields match, provided that the other two fields are not filled in for one or both assets.

    Assets are merged if the values in the field match. For example, if the FQDN and IP address are specified for a KUMA asset, but only the IP address with the same value is specified for an imported asset, the fields match. In this case, the assets are merged.

    For each field, verification is performed separately and ends on the first match.

You can see examples of asset field comparison here.

Information about assets can be generated from various sources. If the added asset and the KUMA asset contain data received from the same source, this data is overwritten. For example, a Kaspersky Security Center asset receives a fully qualified domain name, software information, and host ID when imported into KUMA. When importing an asset from Kaspersky Security Center with an equivalent fully qualified domain name, all this data will be overwritten (if it has been defined for the added asset). All fields in which the data can be refreshed are listed in the Updatable data table.

Updatable data

Field name

Update procedure

Name

Selected according to the following priority:

  • Manually defined.
  • Received from Kaspersky Security Center.
  • Received by KICS for Networks.

Owner

The first value from the sources is selected according to the following priority:

  • Received from Kaspersky Security Center.
  • Manually defined.

IP address

The data is merged. If the array of addresses contains identical addresses, the copy of the duplicate address is deleted.

FQDN

The first value from the sources is selected according to the following priority:

  • Received from Kaspersky Security Center.
  • Received by KICS for Networks.
  • Manually defined.

MAC address

The data is merged. If the array of addresses contains identical addresses, one of the duplicate addresses is deleted.

Operating system

The first value from the sources is selected according to the following priority:

  • Received from Kaspersky Security Center.
  • Received by KICS for Networks.
  • Manually defined.

Vulnerabilities

KUMA asset data is supplemented with information from the added assets. In the asset details, data is grouped by the name of the source.

Vulnerabilities are eliminated for each source separately.

Software info

Data from KICS for Networks is always recorded (if available).

For other sources, the first value is selected according to the following priority:

  • Received from Kaspersky Security Center.
  • Manually defined.

Hardware info

The first value from the sources is selected according to the following priority:

  • Received from Kaspersky Security Center.
  • Defined via the API.

The updated data is displayed in the asset details. You can view asset details in the KUMA web interface.

This data may be overwritten when new assets are added. If the data used to generate asset information is not updated from sources for more than 30 days, the asset is deleted. The next time you add an asset from the same sources, a new asset is created.

If the KUMA web interface is used to edit asset information that was received from Kaspersky Security Center or KICS for Networks, you can edit the following asset data:

  • Name.
  • Category.

If asset information was added manually, you can edit the following asset data when editing these assets in the KUMA web interface:

  • Name.
  • Name of the tenant that owns the asset.
  • IP address.
  • Fully qualified domain name.
  • MAC address.
  • Owner.
  • Category.
  • Operating system.
  • Hardware info.

Asset data cannot be edited via the REST API. When importing from the REST API, the data is updated according to the rules for merging asset details provided above.

In this Help topic

Adding asset information in the KUMA web interface

Importing asset information from Kaspersky Security Center

Importing asset information from MaxPatrol

Importing asset information from KICS for Networks

Examples of asset field comparison during import

Page top

[Topic 217798]

Adding asset information in the KUMA web interface

To add an asset in the KUMA web interface:

  1. In the Assets section of the KUMA web interface, click the Add asset button.

    The Add asset details area opens in the right part of the window.

  2. Enter the asset parameters:
    • Asset name (required)
    • Tenant (required)
    • IP address and/or FQDN (required)
    • MAC address
    • Owner
  3. If required, assign one or multiple categories to the asset:
    1. Click the parent-category button.

      Select categories window opens.

    2. Select the check boxes next to the categories that should be assigned to the asset. You can use the plus and minus icons to expand or collapse the lists of categories.
    3. Click Save.

    The selected categories appear in the Categories fields.

  4. If required, add information about the operating system installed on the asset in the Software section.
  5. If required, add information about asset hardware in the Hardware info section.
  6. Click Add.

The asset is created and displayed in the assets table in the category assigned to it or in the Uncategorized assets category.

Page top

[Topic 217893]

Importing asset information from Kaspersky Security Center

All assets that are protected by this program are registered in Kaspersky Security Center. Information about assets protected by Kaspersky Security Center can be imported into KUMA. To do so, you need to configure integration between the applications in advance.

KUMA supports the following types of asset imports from KSC:

  • Import of information about all assets of all KSC servers.
  • Import of information about assets of the selected KSC server.

To import information about all assets of all KSC servers:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, select the Assets section.
  2. Click the Import assets button.

    The Import Kaspersky Security Center assets window opens.

  3. In the drop-down list, select the tenant for which you want to perform the import.

    In this case, the program downloads information about all assets of all KSC servers that have been configured to connect to the selected tenant.

    If you want to import information about all assets of all KSC servers for all tenants, select All tenants.

  4. Click OK.

The asset information will be imported.

To import information about the assets of one KSC server:

  1. Open the KUMA web interface and select SettingsKaspersky Security Center.

    The Kaspersky Security Center integration by tenant window opens.

  2. Select the tenant for which you want to import assets.

    The Kaspersky Security Center integration window opens.

  3. Click the connection for the relevant Kaspersky Security Center server.

    This opens a window containing the settings of this connection to Kaspersky Security Center.

  4. Do one of the following:
    • If you want to import all assets connected to the selected KSC server, click the Import assets button.
    • If you want to import only assets that are connected to a secondary server or included in one of the groups (for example, the Unassigned devices group), do the following:
      1. Click the Load hierarchy button.
      2. Select the check boxes next to the names of the secondary servers or groups from which you want to import asset information.
      3. Select the Import assets from new groups check box if you want to import assets from new groups.

        If no check boxes are selected, information about all assets of the selected KSC server is uploaded during the import.

      4. Click Save.
      5. Click the Import assets button.

The asset information will be imported.

Page top

[Topic 228184]

Importing asset information from MaxPatrol

You can import asset information from MaxPatrol network device scan reports into KUMA. The import is performed through the API using the maxpatrol-tool on the server where the KUMA Core is installed. Imported assets are displayed in the KUMA web interface in the Assets section. If necessary, you can edit the settings of assets.

The tool is included in the KUMA distribution kit and is located in the installer archive in the /kuma-ansible-installer/roles/kuma/files directory.

Imports from MaxPatrol 8 are supported.

To import asset information from a MaxPatrol report:

  1. In MaxPatrol, generate a network asset scan report in XML file format and copy the report file to the KUMA Core server. For more details about scan tasks and output file formats, refer to the MaxPatrol documentation.

    Data cannot be imported from reports in SIEM integration file format. The XML file format must be selected.

  2. Create a file with the token for accessing the KUMA REST API. For convenience, it is recommended to place it into the MaxPatrol report folder. The file must not contain anything except the token.

    Requirements imposed on accounts for which the API token is generated:

  3. Copy the maxpatrol-tool to the server hosting the KUMA Core and make the tool's file executable by running the following command:

    chmod +x <path to the maxpatrol-tool file on the server hosting the KUMA Core>

  4. Run the maxpatrol-tool:

    ./maxpatrol-tool --kuma-rest <KUMA REST API server address and port> --token <path and name of API token file> --tenant <name of tenant where assets will reside> <path and name of MaxPatrol report file> --cert <path to the KUMA Core certificate file>

    Example: ./maxpatrol-tool --kuma-rest example.kuma.com:7223 --token token.txt --tenant Main example.xml --cert /opt/kaspersky/kuma/core/certificates/ca.cert

You can use additional flags and commands for import operations. For example, the command --verbose, -v will display a full report on the received assets. A detailed description of the available flags and commands is provided in the table titled Flags and commands of maxpatrol-tool. You can also use the --help command to view information on the available flags and commands.

The asset information will be imported from the MaxPatrol report to KUMA. The console displays information on the number of new and updated assets.

Example:

inserted 2 assets;

updated 1 asset;

errors occurred: []

The tool works as follows when importing assets:

  • KUMA overwrites the data of assets imported through the API, and deletes information about their resolved vulnerabilities.
  • KUMA skips assets with invalid data. Error information is displayed when using the --verbose flag.
  • If there are assets with identical IP addresses and fully qualified domain names (FQDN) in the same MaxPatrol report, these assets are merged. The information about their vulnerabilities and software is also merged into one asset.

    When uploading assets from MaxPatrol, assets that have equivalent IP addresses and fully qualified domain names (FQDN) that were previously imported from Kaspersky Security Center are overwritten.

    To avoid this problem, you must configure range-based asset filtering by running the following command:

    --ignore <IP address ranges> or -i <IP address ranges>

    Assets that satisfy the filtering criteria are not uploaded. For a description of this command, please refer to the table titled Flags and commands of maxpatrol-tool.

Flags and commands of maxpatrol-tool

Flags and commands

Description

--kuma-rest <KUMA REST API server port and address>, -a <KUMA REST API server port and address>

Address (with the port) of KUMA Core server where assets will be imported. For example, example.kuma.com:7223.

Port 7223 is used for API requests by default. You can change the port if necessary.

--token <path and name of API token file>, -t <path and name of API token file>

Path and name of the file containing the token used to access the REST API. This file must contain only the token.

The Administrator or Analyst role must be assigned to the user account for which the API token is being generated.

--tenant <tenant name>, -T <tenant name>

Name of the KUMA tenant in which the assets from the MaxPatrol report will be imported.

--dns <IP address ranges> or -d <IP address ranges>

This command uses DNS to enrich IP addresses with FQDNs from the specified ranges if the FQDNs for these addresses were not already specified.

Example: --dns 0.0.0.0-9.255.255.255,11.0.0.0-255.255.255,10.0.0.2

--dns-server <DNS server IP address>, -s <DNS server IP address>

Address of the DNS server that the tool must contact to receive FQDN information.

Example: --dns-server 8.8.8.8

--ignore <IP address ranges> or -i <IP address ranges>

Address ranges of assets that should be skipped during import.

Example: --ignore 8.8.0.0-8.8.255.255, 10.10.0.1

--verbose, -v

Output of the complete report on received assets and any errors that occurred during the import process.

--help, -h

help

Get reference information on the tool or a command.

Examples:

./maxpatrol-tool help

./maxpatrol-tool <command> --help

version

Get information about the version of the maxpatrol-tool.

completion

Creation of an autocompletion script for the specified shell.

--cert <path to file with the KUMA Core certificate>

Path to the KUMA Core certificate. By default, the certificate is located in the folder with the application installed: /opt/kaspersky/kuma/core/certificates/ca.cert.

Examples:

  • ./maxpatrol-tool --kuma-rest example.kuma.com:7223 --token token.txt --tenant Main example.xml --cert /example-directory/ca.cert – import assets to KUMA from MaxPatrol report example.xml.
  • ./maxpatrol-tool help—get reference information on the tool.

Possible errors

Error message

Description

must provide path to xml file to import assets

The path to the MaxPatrol report file was not specified.

incorrect IP address format

Invalid IP address format. This error may arise when incorrect IP ranges are indicated.

no tenants match specified name

No suitable tenants were found for the specified tenant name using the REST API.

unexpected number of tenants (%v) match specified name. Tenants are: %v

KUMA returned more than one tenant for the specified tenant name.

could not parse file due to error: %w

Error reading the XML file containing the MaxPatrol report.

error decoding token: %w

Error reading the API token file.

error when importing files to KUMA: %w

Error transferring asset information to KUMA.

skipped asset with no FQDN and IP address

One of the assets in the report did not have an FQDN or IP address. Information about this asset was not sent to KUMA.

skipped asset with invalid FQDN: %v

One of the assets in the report had an incorrect FQDN. Information about this asset was not sent to KUMA.

skipped asset with invalid IP address: %v

One of the assets in the report had an incorrect IP address. Information about this asset was not sent to KUMA.

KUMA response: %v

An error occurred with the specified report when importing asset information.

unexpected status code %v

An unexpected HTTP code was received when importing asset information from KUMA.

Page top

[Topic 233671]

Importing asset information from KICS for Networks

After configuring KICS for Networks integration, tasks to obtain data about KICS for Networks assets are created automatically. This occurs:

  • Immediately after creating a new integration.
  • Immediately after changing the settings of an existing integration.
  • According to a regular schedule every several hours. Every 12 hours by default. The schedule can be changed.

Account data update tasks can be created manually.

To start a task to update KICS for Networks asset data for a tenant:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, open SettingsKaspersky Industrial CyberSecurity for Networks.
  2. Select the relevant tenant.

    The Kaspersky Industrial CyberSecurity for Networks integration window opens.

  3. Click the Import assets button.

A task to receive account data from the selected tenant is added to the Task manager section of the KUMA web interface.

Page top

[Topic 243031]

Examples of asset field comparison during import

Each imported asset is compared to the matching KUMA asset.

Checking for two-field value match in the IP, MAC, and FQDN fields

Compared assets

Compared fields

FQDN

IP

MAC

KUMA asset

Filled in

Filled in

Empty

Imported asset 1

Filled in, matching

Filled in, matching

Filled in

Imported asset 2

Filled in, matching

Filled in, matching

Empty

Imported asset 3

Filled in, matching

Empty

Filled in

Imported asset 4

Empty

Filled in, matching

Filled in

Imported asset 5

Filled in, matching

Empty

Empty

Imported asset 6

Empty

Empty

Filled in

Comparison results:

  • Imported asset 1 and KUMA asset: the FQDN and IP fields are filled in and match, no conflict in the MAC fields between the two assets. The assets are merged.
  • Imported asset 2 and KUMA asset: the FQDN and IP fields are filled in and match. The assets are merged.
  • Imported asset 3 and KUMA asset: the FQDN and MAC fields are filled in and match, no conflict in the IP fields between the two assets. The assets are merged.
  • Imported asset 4 and KUMA asset: the IP fields are filled in and match, no conflict in the FQDN and MAC fields between the two assets. The assets are merged.
  • Imported asset 5 and KUMA asset: the FQDN fields are filled in and match, no conflict in the IP and MAC fields between the two assets. The assets are merged.
  • Imported asset 6 and KUMA asset: no matching fields. The assets are not merged.

Checking for single-field value match in the IP, MAC, and FQDN fields

Compared assets

Compared fields

FQDN

IP

MAC

KUMA asset

Empty

Filled in

Empty

Imported asset 1

Filled in

Filled in, matching

Filled in

Imported asset 2

Filled in

Filled in, matching

Empty

Imported asset 3

Filled in

Empty

Filled in

Imported asset 4

Empty

Empty

Filled in

Comparison results:

  • Imported asset 1 and KUMA asset: the IP fields are filled in and match, no conflict in the FQDN and MAC fields between the two assets. The assets are merged.
  • Imported asset 2 and KUMA asset: the IP fields are filled in and match, no conflict in the FQDN and MAC fields between the two assets. The assets are merged.
  • Imported asset 3 and KUMA asset: no matching fields. The assets are not merged.
  • Imported asset 4 and KUMA asset: no matching fields. The assets are not merged.
Page top

[Topic 235241]

Assigning a category to an asset

To assign a category to one asset:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, go to the Assets section.
  2. Select the category with the relevant assets.

    The assets table is displayed.

  3. Select an asset.
  4. In the opened window, click the Edit button.
  5. In the Categories field, click the parent-category button.
  6. Select a category.

    If you want to move an asset to the Uncategorized assets section, you must delete the existing categories for the asset by clicking the cross button.

  7. Click the Save button.

The category will be assigned.

To assign a category to multiple assets:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, go to the Assets section.
  2. Select the category with the relevant assets.

    The assets table is displayed.

  3. Select the check boxes next to the assets for which you want to change the category.
  4. Click the Link to category button.
  5. In the opened window, select a category.
  6. Click the Save button.

The category will be assigned.

Do not assign the Categorized assets category to assets.

Page top

[Topic 217852]

Editing the parameters of assets

In KUMA, you can edit asset parameters. All the parameters of manually added assets can be edited. For assets imported from Kaspersky Security Center, you can only change the name of the asset and its category.

To change the parameters of an asset:

  1. In the Assets section of the KUMA web interface, click the asset that you want to edit.

    The Asset details area opens in the right part of the window.

  2. Click the Edit button.

    The Edit asset window opens.

  3. Make the changes you need in the available fields:
    • Asset name (required. This is the only field available for editing if the asset was imported from Kaspersky Security Center or KICS for Networks.)
    • IP address and/or FQDN (required)
    • MAC address
    • Owner
    • Software info:
      • OS name
      • OS build
    • Hardware info:

      Hardware parameters

      You can add information about asset hardware to the Hardware info section:

      Available fields for describing the asset CPU:

      • CPU name
      • CPU frequency
      • CPU core count

      You can add CPUs to the asset by using the Add CPU link.

      Available fields for describing the asset disk:

      • Disk free bytes
      • Disk volume

      You can add disks to the asset by using the Add disk link.

      Available fields for describing the asset RAM:

      • RAM frequency
      • RAM total bytes

      Available fields for describing the asset network card:

      • Network card name
      • Network card manufacture
      • Network card driver version

      You can add network cards to the asset by using the Add network card link.

    • Custom fields.
    • CII category.
  4. Assign or change the category of the asset:
    1. Click the parent-category button.

      Select categories window opens.

    2. Select the check boxes next to the categories that should be assigned to the asset.
    3. Click Save.

    The selected categories appear in the Categories fields.

    You can also select the asset and then drag and drop it into the relevant category. This category will be added to the list of asset categories.

    Do not assign the Categorized assets category to assets.

  5. Click the Save button.

Asset parameters have been changed.

Page top

[Topic 217832]

Deleting assets

In KUMA, you can delete assets in the following ways:

  • Automatically.

    Only imported assets are automatically deleted. Manually added assets are not automatically deleted except the case when a manually added asset is merged with an asset imported from KSC or KICS for Networks. In that case, the asset is considered imported and can be deleted automatically.

    Imported assets are automatically deleted if information about assets from Kaspersky Security Center has not been updated in KUMA for 30 days (90 days for KICS for Networks assets). An asset may not be updated if Kaspersky Security Center or KICS for Networks do not have information about the asset, or if connection with the Kaspersky Security Center server could not be established for over 30 days (90 days for KICS for Networks). If an asset was deleted, but KUMA resumes receiving information about that asset from Kaspersky Security Center or KICS for Networks, KUMA recreates the asset with a new ID.

  • Manually.

To delete an asset manually:

  1. In the Assets section of the KUMA web interface, click the asset that you want to delete.

    The Asset details area opens in the right part of the window.

  2. Click the Delete button.

    A confirmation window opens.

  3. Click OK.

The asset is deleted.

Page top

[Topic 235047]

Updating third-party applications and fixing vulnerabilities on Kaspersky Security Center assets

You can update third-party applications (including Microsoft applications) that are installed on Kaspersky Security Center assets, and fix vulnerabilities in these applications.

First you need to create the Install required updates and fix vulnerabilities task on the selected Kaspersky Security Center Administration Server with the following settings:

  • Application—Kaspersky Security Center.
  • Task type—Install required updates and fix vulnerabilities.
  • Devices to which the task will be assigned—you need to assign the task to the root administration group.
  • Rules for installing updates:
    • Install approved updates only.
    • Fix vulnerabilities with a severity level equal to or higher than (optional setting).

      If this setting is enabled, updates fix only those vulnerabilities for which the severity level set by Kaspersky is equal to or higher than the value selected in the list (Medium, High, or Critical). Vulnerabilities with a severity level lower than the selected value are not fixed.

  • Scheduled start—the task run schedule.

For details on how to create a task, please refer to the Kaspersky Security Center Help Guide.

The Install required updates and fix vulnerabilities task is available with a Vulnerability and Patch Management license.

Next, you need to install updates for third-party applications and fix vulnerabilities on assets in KUMA.

To install updates and fix vulnerabilities in third-party applications on an asset in KUMA:

  1. Open the asset details window in one of the following ways:
    • In the KUMA web interface, select Assets → select a category with the relevant assets → select an asset.
    • In the KUMA web interface, select Alerts → click the link with the relevant alert → select the asset in the Related endpoints section.
    • In the KUMA web interface, select Eventssearch and filter events → select the relevant event → click the link in one of the following fields: SourceAssetID, DestinationAssetID, or DeviceAssetID.
  2. In the asset details window, expand the list of Kaspersky Security Center vulnerabilities.
  3. Select the check boxes next to the applications that you want to update.
  4. Click the Upload updates link.
  5. In the opened window, select the check box next to the ID of the vulnerability that you want to fix.
  6. If No is displayed in the EULA accepted column for the selected ID, click the Approve updates button.
  7. Click the link in the EULA URL column and carefully read the text of the End User License Agreement.
  8. If you agree to it, click the Accept selected EULAs button in the KUMA web interface.

    The ID of the vulnerability for which the EULA was accepted shows Yes in the EULA accepted successfully column.

  9. Repeat steps 7–10 for each required vulnerability ID.
  10. Click OK.

Updates will be uploaded and installed on the assets managed by the Administration Server where the task was started, and on the assets of all secondary Administration Servers.

The terms of the End User License Agreement for updates and vulnerability patches must be accepted on each secondary Administration Server separately.

Updates are installed on assets where the vulnerability was detected.

You can update the list of vulnerabilities for an asset in the asset details window by clicking the Update link.

Page top

[Topic 235060]

Moving assets to a selected administration group

You can move assets to a selected administration group of Kaspersky Security Center. In this case, the group policies and tasks will be applied to the assets. For more details on Kaspersky Security Center tasks and policies, please refer to the Kaspersky Security Center Help Guide.

Administration groups are added to KUMA when the hierarchy is loaded during import of assets from Kaspersky Security Center. First, you need to configure KUMA integration with Kaspersky Security Center.

To move an asset to a selected administration group:

  1. Open the asset details window in one of the following ways:
    • In the KUMA web interface, select Assets → select a category with the relevant assets → select an asset.
    • In the KUMA web interface, select Alerts → click the link with the relevant alert → select the asset in the Related endpoints section.
    • In the KUMA web interface, select Events, find the event you need using search and filter functions, and click the link in the DeviceExternalID field of the event.
  2. In the asset details window, click the Move to KSC group button.
  3. Click the Move to KSC group button.
  4. Select the group in the opened window.

    The selected group must be owned by the same tenant as the asset.

  5. Click the Save button.

The selected asset will be moved.

To move multiple assets to a selected administration group:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, select the Assets section.
  2. Select the category with the relevant assets.
  3. Select the check boxes next to the assets that you want to move to the group.
  4. Click the Move to KSC group button.

    The button is active if all selected assets belong to the same Administration Server.

  5. Select the group in the opened window.
  6. Click the Save button.

The selected assets will be moved.

You can see the specific group of an asset in the asset details.

Kaspersky Security Center assets information is updated in KUMA when information about assets is imported from Kaspersky Security Center. This means that a situation may arise when assets have been moved between administration groups in Kaspersky Security Center, but this information is not yet displayed in KUMA. When an attempt is made to move such an asset to an administration group in which it is already located, KUMA returns the Failed to move assets to another KSC group error.

Page top

[Topic 233934]

Asset audit

KUMA can be configured to generate asset audit events under the following conditions:

  • Asset was added to KUMA. The application monitors manual asset creation, as well as creation during import via the REST API and during import from Kaspersky Security Center or KICS for Networks.
  • Asset parameters have been changed. A change in the value of the following asset fields is monitored:
    • Name
    • IP address
    • MAC address
    • FQDN
    • Operating system

    Fields may be changed when an asset is updated during import.

  • Asset was deleted from KUMA. The program monitors manual deletion of assets, as well as automatic deletion of assets imported from Kaspersky Security Center and KICS for Networks, whose data is no longer being received.
  • Vulnerability info was added to the asset. The program monitors the appearance of new vulnerability data for assets. Information about vulnerabilities can be added to an asset, for example, when importing assets from Kaspersky Security Center or KICS for Networks.
  • Asset vulnerability was resolved. The program monitors the removal of vulnerability information from an asset. A vulnerability is considered to be resolved if data about this vulnerability is no longer received from any sources from which information about its occurrence was previously obtained.
  • Asset was added to a category. The program monitors the assignment of an asset category to an asset.
  • Asset was removed from a category. The program monitors the deletion of an asset from an asset category.

By default, if asset audit is enabled, under the conditions described above, KUMA creates not only audit events (Type = 4), but also base events (Type = 1).

Asset audit events can be sent to storage or to correlators, for example.

In this section

Configuring an asset audit

Storing and searching asset audit events

Enabling and disabling an asset audit

Page top

[Topic 233948]

Configuring an asset audit

To configure an asset audit:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, open SettingsAsset audit.
  2. Perform one of the following actions with the tenant for which you want to configure asset audit:
    • Add the tenant by using the Add tenant button if this is the first time you are configuring asset audit for the relevant tenant.

      In the opened Asset audit window, select a name for the new tenant.

    • Select an existing tenant in the table if asset audit has already been configured for the relevant tenant.

      In the opened Asset audit window, the tenant name is already defined and cannot be edited.

    • Clone the settings of an existing tenant to create a copy of the conditions configuration for the tenant for which you are configuring asset audit for the first time. To do so, select the check box next to the tenant whose configuration you need to copy and click Clone. In the opened Asset audit window, select the name of the tenant to use the copied configuration.
  3. For each condition for generating asset audit events, select the destination to where the created events will be sent:
    1. In the settings block of the relevant type of asset audit events, use the Add destination drop-down list to select the type of destination to which the created events should be sent:
      • Select Storage if you want events to be sent to storage.
      • Select Correlator if you want events to be sent to the correlator.
      • Select Other if you want to select a different destination.

        This type of resource includes correlator and storage services that were created in previous versions of the program.

      In the Add destination window that opens you must define the settings for event forwarding.

    2. Use the Destination drop-down list to select an existing destination or select Create if you want to create a new destination.

      If you are creating a new destination, fill in the settings as indicated in the destination description.

    3. Click Save.

    A destination has been added to the condition for generating asset audit events. Multiple destinations can be added for each condition.

  4. Click Save.

The asset audit has been configured. Asset audit events will be generated for those conditions for which destinations have been added. Click Save.

Page top

[Topic 233950]

Storing and searching asset audit events

Asset audit events are considered to be base events and do not replace audit events. Asset audit events can be searched based on the following parameters:

Event field

Value

DeviceVendor

Kaspersky

DeviceProduct

KUMA

DeviceEventCategory

Audit assets

Page top

[Topic 233949]

Enabling and disabling an asset audit

You can enable or disable asset audit for a tenant:

To enable or disable an asset audit for a tenant:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, open SettingsAsset audit and select the tenant for which you want to enable or disable an asset audit.

    The Asset audit window opens.

  2. Select or clear the Disabled check box in the upper part of the window.
  3. Click Save.

By default, when asset audit is enabled in KUMA, when an audit condition occurs, two types of events are simultaneously created: a base event and an audit event.

You can disable the generation of base events with audit events.

To enable or disable the creation of base events for an individual condition:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, open SettingsAsset audit and select the tenant for which you want to enable or disable a condition for generating asset audit events.

    The Asset audit window opens.

  2. Select or clear the Disabled check box next to the relevant conditions.
  3. Click Save.

For conditions with the Disabled check box selected, only audit events are created, and base events are not created.

Page top

[Topic 242222]

Custom asset fields

In addition to the existing fields of the asset data model, you can create custom asset fields. Data from the custom asset fields is displayed when you view information about the asset. Custom fields can be filled in with data either manually or using the API.

You can create or edit the custom fields in the KUMA web interface in the SettingsAssets section, in the Custom fields table. The table has the following columns:

  • Name – the name of the custom field that is displayed when you view information about the asset.
  • Default value – the value that is written to the custom field when an asset is added to KUMA.
  • Mask – a regular expression to which the value in the custom field must match.

To create a custom asset field:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, in the SettingsAssets section, click the Add field button.

    An empty row is added to the Custom fields table. You can add multiple rows with the custom field settings at once.

  2. Fill in the columns with the settings of the custom field:
    • Name (required)–from 1 to 128 characters in Unicode encoding.
    • Default value–from 1 to 1,024 Unicode characters.
    • Mask–from 1 to 1,024 Unicode characters.
  3. Click Save.

A custom field is added to the asset data model.

To delete or edit a custom asset field:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, open SettingsAssets.
  2. Make the necessary changes in the Custom fields table:
    • To delete a custom field, click the cross icon next to the row with the settings of the required field. Deleting a field also deletes the data written in this field for all assets.
    • You can change the values of the field settings. Changing the default value does not affect the data written in the asset fields before.
    • To change the display order of the fields, drag the lines with the mouse by the DragIcon
  3. Click Save.

The changes are made.

Page top

[Topic 242693]

Critical information infrastructure assets

In KUMA, you can tag assets related to the critical information infrastructure (CII) of the Russian Federation. This allows you to restrict the KUMA users capabilities to handle alerts and incidents, which are associated with the assets related to the CII objects.

You can assign the CII category to the assets if the license with the GosSOPKA module is active in KUMA.

General administrators and users with the Access to CII facilities check box selected in their profiles can assign the CII category to an asset. If none of these conditions are met, the following restrictions apply to the user:

  • The CII category group of settings is not displayed in the Asset details and Edit asset windows. You cannot view or change the CII category of an asset.
  • Alerts and incidents associated with the assets of the CII category are not available for viewing. You cannot perform any actions on such alerts and incidents; they are not displayed in the table of alerts and incidents.
  • The CII column is not displayed in the Alerts and Incidents tables.
  • Search and closing of the alerts using the REST API is not available.

The CII category of an asset is displayed in the Asset details window in the CII category group of settings.

To change the CII category of an asset:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, in the Assets section, select the required asset.

    The Asset details window opens.

  2. Click the Edit button and select one of the available values in the drop-down list:
    • Information resource is not a CII object – default value, indicating that the asset does not have a CII category. The users with the Access to CII facilities check box cleared in their profiles can work with such assets and the alerts and incidents related to these assets.
    • CII object without importance category.
    • CII object of the third importance category.
    • CII object of the second importance category.
    • CII object of the first importance category.
  3. Click Save.
Page top

[Topic 217923]

Integration with Kaspersky Security Center

You can configure integration with selected Kaspersky Security Center servers for one, several, or all KUMA tenants. If Kaspersky Security Center integration is enabled, you can import information about the assets protected by this application, manage assets using tasks, and import events from the Kaspersky Security Center event database.

First, you need to make sure that the relevant Kaspersky Security Center server allows an incoming connection for the server hosting KUMA.

Configuring KUMA integration with Kaspersky Security Center includes the following steps:

  1. Creating a user account in the Kaspersky Security Center Administration Console

    The credentials of this account are used when creating a secret to establish a connection with Kaspersky Security Center. Different tasks may require different access rights.

    For more details about creating a user account and assigning permissions to a user, please refer to the Kaspersky Security Center Help Guide.

  2. Creating a secret of the credentials type for connecting to Kaspersky Security Center
  3. Configuring Kaspersky Security Center integration settings
  4. Creating a connection to the Kaspersky Security Center server for importing information about assets

    If you want to import information about assets registered on Kaspersky Security Center servers into KUMA, you need to create a separate connection to each Kaspersky Security Center server for each selected tenant.

    If integration is disabled for the tenant or there is no connection to Kaspersky Security Center, an error is displayed in the KUMA web interface when attempting to import information about assets. In this case, the import process does not start.

In this section

Configuring Kaspersky Security Center integration settings

Adding a tenant to the list for Kaspersky Security Center integration

Creating Kaspersky Security Center connection

Editing Kaspersky Security Center connection

Deleting Kaspersky Security Center connection

Importing events from the Kaspersky Security Center database

Page top

[Topic 217933]

Configuring Kaspersky Security Center integration settings

To configure the settings for integration with Kaspersky Security Center:

  1. Open the KUMA web interface and select SettingsKaspersky Security Center.

    The Kaspersky Security Center integration by tenant window opens.

  2. Select the tenant for which you want to configure integration with Kaspersky Security Center.

    The Kaspersky Security Center integration window opens.

  3. For the Disabled check box, do one of the following:
    • Clear the check box if you want to enable integration with Kaspersky Security Center for this tenant.
    • Select the check box if you want to disable integration with Kaspersky Security Center for this tenant.

    This check box is cleared by default.

  4. In the Data refresh interval field, specify the time interval at which KUMA updates data on Kaspersky Security Center devices.

    The interval is specified in hours and must be an integer.

    The default time interval is 12 hours.

  5. Click the Save button.

The Kaspersky Security Center integration settings for the selected tenant will be configured.

If the required tenant is not in the list of tenants, you need to add it to the list.

Page top

[Topic 232734]

Adding a tenant to the list for Kaspersky Security Center integration

To add a tenant to the list of tenants for integration with Kaspersky Security Center:

  1. Open the KUMA web interface and select SettingsKaspersky Security Center.

    The Kaspersky Security Center integration by tenant window opens.

  2. Click the Add tenant button.

    The Kaspersky Security Center integration window opens.

  3. In the Tenant drop-down list, select the tenant that you need to add.
  4. Click the Save button.

The selected tenant will be added to the list of tenants for integration with Kaspersky Security Center.

Page top

[Topic 217788]

Creating Kaspersky Security Center connection

To create a new Kaspersky Security Center connection:

  1. Open the KUMA web interface and select SettingsKaspersky Security Center.

    The Kaspersky Security Center integration by tenant window opens.

  2. Select the tenant for which you want to create a connection to Kaspersky Security Center.
  3. Click the Add connection button and define the values for the following settings:
    • Name (required)—the name of the connection. The name can contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
    • URL (required)—the URL of the Kaspersky Security Center server in hostname:port or IPv4:port format.
    • In the Secret drop-down list, select the secret with the Kaspersky Security Center account credentials or create a new secret.
      1. Click the AddResource button.

        The secret window is displayed.

      2. Enter information about the secret:
        1. In the Name field, choose a name for the added secret.
        2. In the Tenant drop-down list, select the tenant that will own the Kaspersky Security Center account credentials.
        3. In the Type drop-down list, select credentials.
        4. In the User and Password fields, enter the account credentials for your Kaspersky Security Center server.
        5. If you want, enter a Description of the secret.
      3. Click Save.

      The selected secret can be changed by clicking on the EditResource button.

    • Disabled—the state of the connection to the selected Kaspersky Security Center server. If the check box is selected, the connection to the selected server is inactive. If this is the case, you cannot use this connection to connect to the Kaspersky Security Center server.

      This check box is cleared by default.

  4. If you want KUMA to import only assets that are connected to secondary servers or included in groups:
    1. Click the Load hierarchy button.
    2. Select the check boxes next to the names of the secondary servers and groups from which you want to import asset information.
    3. If you want to import assets only from new groups, select the Import assets from new groups check box.

    If no check boxes are selected, information about all assets of the selected Kaspersky Security Center server is uploaded during the import.

  5. Click the Save button.

The connection to the Kaspersky Security Center server is now created. It can be used to import information about assets from Kaspersky Security Center to KUMA and to create asset-related tasks in Kaspersky Security Center from KUMA.

Page top

[Topic 217849]

Editing Kaspersky Security Center connection

To edit a Kaspersky Security Center connection:

  1. Open the KUMA web interface and select SettingsKaspersky Security Center.

    The Kaspersky Security Center integration by tenant window opens.

  2. Select the tenant for which you want to configure integration with Kaspersky Security Center.

    The Kaspersky Security Center integration window opens.

  3. Click the Kaspersky Security Center connection you want to change.

    The window with the selected Kaspersky Security Center connection parameters opens.

  4. Make the necessary changes to the settings.
  5. Click the Save button.

The Kaspersky Security Center connection will be changed.

Page top

[Topic 217829]

Deleting Kaspersky Security Center connection

To delete a Kaspersky Security Center connection:

  1. Open the KUMA web interface and select SettingsKaspersky Security Center.

    The Kaspersky Security Center integration by tenant window opens.

  2. Select the tenant for which you want to configure integration with Kaspersky Security Center.

    The Kaspersky Security Center integration window opens.

  3. Select the Kaspersky Security Center connection that you want to delete.
  4. Click the Delete button.

The Kaspersky Security Center connection will be deleted.

Page top

[Topic 222247]

Importing events from the Kaspersky Security Center database

In KUMA, you can receive events from the Kaspersky Security Center SQL database. Events are received using the collector, which uses the following resources:

  • Predefined [OOTB] KSC MSSQL, [OOTB] KSC MySQL, or [OOTB] KSC PostgreSQL connector.
  • Predefined [OOTB] KSC from SQL normalizer.

Configuring the import of events from Kaspersky Security Center involves the following steps:

  1. Create a copy of the predefined connector.

    The settings of the predefined connector are not editable, therefore, to configure the connection to the database server, you must create a copy of the predefined connector.

  2. Creating a collector:
    • In the web interface.
    • On the server.

To configure the import of events from Kaspersky Security Center:

  1. Create a copy of the predefined connector corresponding to the type of database used by Kaspersky Security Center:
    1. In the KUMA web interface, in the ResourcesConnectors section, find the relevant predefined connector in the folder hierarchy, select the check box next to that connector, and click Duplicate.
    2. This opens the Create connector window; in that window, on the Basic settings tab, in the Default query field, if necessary, replace the KAV database name with the name of the Kaspersky Security Center database you are using.

      An example of a query to the Kaspersky Security Center SQL database

      SELECT ev.event_id AS externalId, ev.severity AS severity, ev.task_display_name AS taskDisplayName,

              ev.product_name AS product_name, ev.product_version AS product_version,

               ev.event_type As deviceEventClassId, ev.event_type_display_name As event_subcode, ev.descr As msg,

      CASE

              WHEN ev.rise_time is not NULL THEN DATEADD(hour,DATEDIFF(hour,GETUTCDATE(),GETDATE()),ev.rise_time )

                  ELSE ev.rise_time

              END

          AS endTime,

          CASE

              WHEN ev.registration_time is not NULL

                  THEN DATEADD(hour,DATEDIFF(hour,GETUTCDATE(),GETDATE()),ev.registration_time )

                  ELSE ev.registration_time

              END

          AS kscRegistrationTime,

          cast(ev.par7 as varchar(4000)) as sourceUserName,

          hs.wstrWinName as dHost,

          hs.wstrWinDomain as strNtDom, serv.wstrWinName As kscName,

              CAST(hs.nIp / 256 / 256 / 256 % 256 AS VARCHAR) + '.' +

          CAST(hs.nIp / 256 / 256 % 256 AS VARCHAR) + '.' +

          CAST(hs.nIp / 256 % 256 AS VARCHAR) + '.' +

          CAST(hs.nIp % 256 AS VARCHAR) AS sourceAddress,

          serv.wstrWinDomain as kscNtDomain,

              CAST(serv.nIp / 256 / 256 / 256 % 256 AS VARCHAR) + '.' +

          CAST(serv.nIp / 256 / 256 % 256 AS VARCHAR) + '.' +

          CAST(serv.nIp / 256 % 256 AS VARCHAR) + '.' +

          CAST(serv.nIp % 256 AS VARCHAR) AS kscIP,

          CASE

          WHEN virus.tmVirusFoundTime is not NULL

                  THEN DATEADD(hour,DATEDIFF(hour,GETUTCDATE(),GETDATE()),virus.tmVirusFoundTime )

                  ELSE ev.registration_time

              END

          AS virusTime,

          virus.wstrObject As filePath,

          virus.wstrVirusName as virusName,

          virus.result_ev as result

      FROM KAV.dbo.ev_event as ev

      LEFT JOIN KAV.dbo.v_akpub_host as hs ON ev.nHostId = hs.nId

      INNER JOIN KAV.dbo.v_akpub_host As serv ON serv.nId = 1

      Left Join KAV.dbo.rpt_viract_index as Virus on ev.event_id = virus.nEventVirus

      where registration_time >= DATEADD(minute, -191, GetDate())

    3. Place the cursor in the URL field and in the displayed list, click edit-pencil in the line of the secret that you are using.
    4. This opens the Secret window; in that window, in the URL field, specify the server connection address in the following format:

      sqlserver://user:password@kscdb.example.com:1433/database

      where:

      • user—user account with public and db_datareader rights to the required database.
      • password—user account password.
      • kscdb.example.com:1433—address and port of the database server.
      • database—name of the Kaspersky Security Center database. 'KAV' by default.

      Click Save.

    5. In the Create connector window, in the Connection section, in the Query field, replace the 'KAV' database name with the name of the Kaspersky Security Center database you are using.

      You must do this if you want to use the ID column to which the query refers.

      Click Save.

  2. Install the collector in the web interface:
    1. Start the Collector Installation Wizard in one of the following ways:
      • In the KUMA web interface, in the Resources section, click Add event source.
      • In the KUMA web interface in the ResourcesCollectors section click Add collector.
    2. At step 1 of the installation wizard, Connect event sources, specify the collector name and select the tenant.
    3. At step 2 of the installation wizard, Transport, select the copy of the connector that you created at step 1.
    4. At step 3 of the installation wizard, Event parsing, on the Parsing schemes tab, click Add event parsing.
    5. This opens the Basic event parsing window; in that window, on the Normalization scheme tab, select [OOTB] KSC from SQL in the Normalizer drop-down list and click OK.
    6. If necessary, specify the other settings in accordance with your requirements for the collector. For the purpose of importing events, editing settings at the remaining steps of the Installation Wizard is optional.
    7. At step 8 of the installation wizard, Setup validation, click Create and save service.

      The lower part of the window displays the command that you must use to install the collector on the server. Copy this command to the clipboard.

    8. Close the Collector Installation Wizard by clicking Save collector.
  3. Install the collector on the server.

    To do so, on the server on which you want to receive Kaspersky Security Center events, run the command that you copied to the clipboard after creating the collector in the web interface.

As a result, the collector is installed and can receive events from the SQL database of Kaspersky Security Center.

You can view Kaspersky Security Center events in the Events section of the web interface.

Page top

[Topic 235592]

Kaspersky Endpoint Detection and Response integration

Kaspersky Endpoint Detection and Response (hereinafter also referred to as "KEDR") is a functional unit of Kaspersky Anti Targeted Attack Platform that protects assets in an enterprise LAN.

You can configure KUMA integration with Kaspersky Endpoint Detection and Response 4.1 and 5.0 to manage threat response actions on assets connected to Kaspersky Endpoint Detection and Response servers, and on Kaspersky Security Center assets. Commands to perform operations are received by the Kaspersky Endpoint Detection and Response server, which then relays those commands to the Kaspersky Endpoint Agent installed on assets.

You can also import events to KUMA and receive information about Kaspersky Endpoint Detection and Response alerts (for more details, see the Configuring integration with an SIEM system section of the Kaspersky Anti Targeted Attack Platform online help).

When KUMA is integrated with Kaspersky Endpoint Detection and Response, you can perform the following operations on Kaspersky Endpoint Detection and Response assets that have Kaspersky Endpoint Agent:

  • Manage network isolation of assets.
  • Manage prevention rules.
  • Start applications.

To get instructions on configuring integration for response action management, contact your account manager or Technical Support.

In this section

Importing events from Kaspersky Endpoint Detection and Response

Configuring the display of a link to a Kaspersky Endpoint Detection and Response detection in KUMA event details

Page top

[Topic 234627]

Importing events from Kaspersky Endpoint Detection and Response

When importing events from Kaspersky Endpoint Detection and Response, telemetry is transmitted in clear text and may be intercepted by an intruder.

Kaspersky Endpoint Detection and Response 4.0, 4.1, and 5.0 events can be imported to KUMA using a Kafka connector.

Several limitations are applicable to the import of events from Kaspersky Endpoint Detection and Response 4.0 and 4.1:

  • Import of events is available if the KATA and KEDR license keys are used in Kaspersky Endpoint Detection and Response.
  • Import of events is not available if the Sensor component installed on a separate server is used as part of Kaspersky Endpoint Detection and Response.

To import events, perform the actions in Kaspersky Endpoint Detection and Response and in KUMA.

Importing events from Kaspersky Endpoint Detection and Response 4.0 or 4.1

To import Kaspersky Endpoint Detection and Response 4.0 or 4.1 events to KUMA:

In Kaspersky Endpoint Detection and Response:

  1. Use SSH or a terminal to log in to the management console of the Central Node server from which you want to export events.
  2. When prompted by the system, enter the administrator account name and the password that was set during installation of Kaspersky Endpoint Detection and Response.

    The program component administrator menu is displayed.

  3. In the program component administrator menu, select Technical Support Mode.
  4. Press Enter.

    The Technical Support Mode confirmation window opens.

  5. Confirm that you want to operate the application in Technical Support Mode. To do so, select Yes and press Enter.
  6. Run the following command:

    sudo -i

  7. In the /etc/sysconfig/apt-services configuration file, in the KAFKA_PORTS field, delete the value 10000.

    If Secondary Central Node servers or the Sensor component installed on a separate server are connected to the Central Node server, you need to allow the connection with the server where you modified the configuration file via port 10000.

    It is strongly not recommended to use this port for any external connections other than KUMA. To restrict connections over port 10000 only for KUMA, run the following command:

    iptables -I INPUT -p tcp ! -s KUMA_IP_address --dport 10000 -j DROP

  8. In the configuration file /usr/bin/apt-start-sedr-iptables add the value 10000 in the WEB_PORTS field, separated by a comma without a space.
  9. Run the following command:

    sudo sh /usr/bin/apt-start-sedr-iptables

Preparations for exporting events on the Kaspersky Endpoint Detection and Response side are now complete.

In KUMA:

  1. On the KUMA server, add the IP address of the Central Node server in the format <IP address> centralnode to one of the following files:
    • %WINDIR%\System32\drivers\etc\hosts—for Windows.
    • /etc/hosts file—for Linux.
  2. In the KUMA web interface, create a connector of the Kafka type.

    When creating a connector, specify the following parameters:

    • In the URL field, specify <Central Node server IP address>:10000.
    • In the Topic field, specify EndpointEnrichedEventsTopic.
    • In the Consumer group field, specify any unique name.
  3. In the KUMA web interface, create a collector.

    Use the connector created at the previous step as the transport for the collector. Use "[OOTB] KEDR telemetry" as the normalizer for the collector.

If the collector is successfully created and installed, Kaspersky Endpoint Detection and Response events will be imported into KUMA. You can find and view these events in the events table.

Importing events from Kaspersky Endpoint Detection and Response 5.0

Several limitations are applicable to the import of events from Kaspersky Endpoint Detection and Response 5.0:

  • Import of events is available only for the non-fault-tolerant version of Kaspersky Endpoint Detection and Response.
  • Import of events is available if the KATA and KEDR license keys are used in Kaspersky Endpoint Detection and Response.
  • Import of events is not available if the Sensor component installed on a separate server is used as part of Kaspersky Endpoint Detection and Response.

To import Kaspersky Endpoint Detection and Response 5.0 events to KUMA:

In Kaspersky Endpoint Detection and Response:

  1. Use SSH or a terminal to log in to the management console of the Central Node server from which you want to export events.
  2. When prompted by the system, enter the administrator account name and the password that was set during installation of Kaspersky Endpoint Detection and Response.

    The program component administrator menu is displayed.

  3. In the program component administrator menu, select Technical Support Mode.
  4. Press Enter.

    The Technical Support Mode confirmation window opens.

  5. Confirm that you want to operate the application in Technical Support Mode. To do so, select Yes and press Enter.
  6. In the /usr/local/lib/python3.8/dist-packages/firewall/create_iptables_rules.py configuration file, specify the additional port 10000 for the WEB_PORTS constant:

    WEB_PORTS = f'10000,80,{AppPort.APT_AGENT_PORT},{AppPort.APT_GUI_PORT}'

  7. Run the following commands:

    kata-firewall stop

    kata-firewall start --cluster-subnet <network mask for addressing cluster servers>

Preparations for exporting events on the Kaspersky Endpoint Detection and Response side are now complete.

In KUMA:

  1. On the KUMA server, add the IP address of the Central Node server in the format <IP address> kafka.services.external.dyn.kata to one of the following files:
    • %WINDIR%\System32\drivers\etc\hosts—for Windows.
    • /etc/hosts file—for Linux.
  2. In the KUMA web interface, create a connector of the Kafka type.

    When creating a connector, specify the following parameters:

    • In the URL field, specify <Central Node server IP address>:10000.
    • In the Topic field, specify EndpointEnrichedEventsTopic.
    • In the Consumer group field, specify any unique name.
  3. In the KUMA web interface, create a collector.

    Use the connector created at the previous step as the transport for the collector. It is recommended to use the [OOTB] KEDR telemetry normalizer as the normalizer for the collector.

If the collector is successfully created and installed, Kaspersky Endpoint Detection and Response events will be imported into KUMA. You can find and view these events in the events table.

Page top

[Topic 239080]

Configuring the display of a link to a Kaspersky Endpoint Detection and Response detection in KUMA event details

When Kaspersky Endpoint Detection and Response detections are received, KUMA creates an alert for each detection. You can configure the display of a link to a Kaspersky Endpoint Detection and Response detection in KUMA alert information.

You can configure the display of a detection link if you use only one Central Node server in Kaspersky Endpoint Detection and Response. If Kaspersky Endpoint Detection and Response is used in a distributed solution mode, it is impossible to configure the display of the links to Kaspersky Endpoint Detection and Response detections in KUMA.

To configure the display of a link to a detection in KUMA alert details, you need to complete steps in the Kaspersky Endpoint Detection and Response web interface and KUMA.

In the Kaspersky Endpoint Detection and Response web interface, you need to configure the integration of the application with KUMA as a SIEM system. For details on configuring integration, refer to the Kaspersky Anti Targeted Attack Platform documentation, Configuring integration with a SIEM system section.

Configuring the display of a link in the KUMA web interface includes the following steps:

  1. Adding an asset that contains information about the Kaspersky Endpoint Detection and Response Central Node server from which you want to receive detections, and assigning a category to that asset.
  2. Creating a correlation rule.
  3. Creating a correlator.

You can use a pre-configured correlation rule. In this case configuring the display of a link in the KUMA web interface includes the following steps:

  1. Creating a correlator.

    Select the [OOTB] KATA Alert correlation rule.

  2. Adding an asset that contains information about the Kaspersky Endpoint Detection and Response Central Node server from which you want to receive detections and assigning a category KATA standAlone to that asset.

Step 1. Adding an asset and assigning a category to it

First, you need to create a category that will be assigned to the asset being added.

To add a category:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, select the Assets section.
  2. On the All assets tab, expand the list of tenant categories by clicking the button filter-plus next to its name.
  3. Select the required category or subcategory and click the Add category button.

    The Add category details area appears in the right part of the web interface window.

  4. Define the category settings:
    1. In the Name field, enter the name of the category.
    2. In the Parent field, indicate the position of the category within the categories tree hierarchy. To do so, click the button parent-category and select a parent category for the category you are creating.

      Selected category appears in Parent fields.

    3. If required, define the values for the following settings:
      • Assign a severity to the category in the Priority drop-down list.

        The specified severity is assigned to correlation events and alerts associated with the asset.

      • If required, add a description for the category in the Description field.
      • In the Categorization kind drop-down list, select how the category will be populated with assets. Depending on your selection, you may need to specify additional settings:
        • Manually—assets can only be manually linked to a category.
        • Active—assets will be assigned to a category at regular intervals if they satisfy the defined filter.
          1. In the Repeat categorization every drop-down list, specify how often assets will be linked to a category. You can select values ranging from once per hour to once per 24 hours.

            You can forcibly start categorization by selecting Start categorization in the category context menu.

          2. In the Conditions settings block, specify the filter for matching assets to attach to an asset category.

            You can add conditions by clicking the Add condition buttons. Groups of conditions can be added by using the Add group buttons. Group operators can be switched between AND, OR, and NOT values.

            Categorization filter operands and operators

            Operand

            Operators

            Comment

            Build number

            >, >=, =, <=, <

             

            OS

            =, like

            The "like" operator ensures that the search is not case sensitive.

            IP address

            inSubnet, inRange

            The IP address is indicated in CIDR notation (for example: 192.168.0.0/24).

            When the inRange operator is selected, you can indicate only addresses from private ranges of IP addresses (for example: 10.0.0.0–10.255.255.255). Both addresses must be in the same range.

            FQDN

            =, like

            The "like" operator ensures that the search is not case sensitive.

            CVE

            =, in

            The "in" operator lets you specify an array of values.

            Software

            =, like

             

            CII

            in

            More than one value can be selected.

            Anti-virus databases last updated

            >=,<=

             

            Last update of the information

            >=,<=

             

            Protection last updated

            >=,<=

             

            System last started

            >=,<=

             

            KSC extended status

            in

            Extended status of the device.

            More than one value can be selected.

            Real-time protection status

            =

            Status of Kaspersky applications installed on the managed device.

            Encryption status

            =

             

            Spam protection status

            =

             

            Anti-virus protection status of mail servers

            =

             

            Data Leakage Prevention status

            =

             

            KSC extended status ID

            =

             

            Endpoint Sensor status

            =

             

            Last visible

            >=,<=

             

          3. Use the Test conditions button to make sure that the specified filter is correct. When you click the button, you should see the Assets for given conditions window containing a list of assets that satisfy the search conditions.
        • Reactive—the category will be filled with assets by using correlation rules.
  5. Click the Save button.

To add an asset:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, select the Assets section.
  2. Click the Add asset button.

    The Add asset details area opens in the right part of the window.

  3. Define the following asset parameters:
    1. In the Asset name field, enter an asset name.
    2. In the Tenant drop-down list, select the tenant that will own the asset.
    3. In the IP address field, specify the IP address of the Kaspersky Endpoint Detection and Response Central Node server from which you want to receive detections.
    4. In the Categories field, select the category that you added in the previous step.

      If you are using a predefined correlation rule, you need to select the KATA standAlone category.

    5. If required, define the values for the following fields:
      • In the FQDN field, specify the Fully Qualified Domain Name of the Kaspersky Endpoint Detection and Response server.
      • In the MAC address field, specify the MAC address of the Central Node Kaspersky Endpoint Detection and Response Central Node server.
      • In the Owner field, define the name of the asset owner.
  4. Click the Save button.

Step 2. Adding a correlation rule

To add a correlation rule:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, select the Resources section.
  2. Select Correlation rules and click the Create correlation rule button.
  3. On the General tab, define the following settings:
    1. In the Name field, define the rule name.
    2. In the Type drop-down list, select simple.
    3. In the Propagated fields field, add the following fields: DeviceProduct, DeviceAddress, EventOutcome, SourceAssetID, DeviceAssetID.
    4. If required, define the values for the following fields:
      • In the Rate limit field, define the maximum number of times per second that the rule will be triggered.
      • In the Severity field, define the severity of alerts and correlation events that will be created as a result of the rule being triggered.
      • In the Description field, provide any additional information.
  4. On the SelectorsSettings tab, define the following settings:
    1. In the Filter drop-down list, select Create new.
    2. In the Conditions field, click the Add group button.
    3. In the operator field for the group you added, select AND.
    4. Add a condition for filtering by KATA value:
      1. In the Conditions field, click the Add condition button.
      2. In the condition field, select If.
      3. In the Left operand field, select Event field.
      4. In the Event field field, select DeviceProduct.
      5. In the operator field, select =.
      6. In the Right operand field, select constant.
      7. In the value field, enter KATA.
    5. Add a category filter condition:
      1. In the Conditions field, click the Add condition button.
      2. In the condition field, select If.
      3. In the Left operand field, select Event field.
      4. In the Event field field, select DeviceAssetID.
      5. In the operator field, select inCategory.
      6. In the Right operand field, select constant.
      7. Click the parent-category button.
      8. Select the category in which you placed the Kaspersky Endpoint Detection and Response Central Node server asset.
      9. Click the Save button.
    6. In the Conditions field, click the Add group button.
    7. In the operator field for the group you added, select OR.
    8. Add a condition for filtering by event class identifier:
      1. In the Conditions field, click the Add condition button.
      2. In the condition field, select If.
      3. In the Left operand field, select Event field.
      4. In the Event field field, select DeviceEventClassID.
      5. In the operator field, select =.
      6. In the Right operand field, select constant.
      7. In the value field, enter taaScanning.
    9. Repeat steps 1–7 in F for each of the following event class IDs:
      • file_web.
      • file_mail.
      • file_endpoint.
      • file_external.
      • ids.
      • url_web.
      • url_mail.
      • dns.
      • iocScanningEP.
      • yaraScanningEP.
  5. On the Actions tab, define the following settings:
    1. In the Actions section, open the On every event drop-down list.
    2. Select the Output check box.
    3. In the Enrichment section, click the Add enrichment button.
    4. In the Source kind drop-down list, select template.
    5. In the Template field, enter https://{{.DeviceAddress}}:8443/katap/#/alerts?id={{.EventOutcome}}.
    6. In the Target field drop-down list, select DeviceExternalID.
    7. If required, select one of the following values from the Debug drop-down list:
      • Enabled.

        If this is selected, the application will log information relating to the operation of the resource to the log.

      • Disabled.

        If this is selected, information relating to the operation of the resource will not be logged.

  6. Click the Save button.

Step 3. Creating a correlator

You need to launch the correlator installation wizard. At step 3 of the wizard, you are required to select the correlation rule that you added by following this guide.

After the correlator is created, a link to these detections will be displayed in the details of alerts created when receiving detections from Kaspersky Endpoint Detection and Response. The link is displayed in the correlation event details (Related events section), in the DeviceExternalID field.

If you want the FQDN of the Kaspersky Endpoint Detection and Response Central Node server to be displayed in the DeviceHostName field, in the detection details, you need to create a DNS record for the server and create a DNS enrichment rule at step 4 of the wizard.

Page top

[Topic 217924]

Integration with Kaspersky CyberTrace

Kaspersky CyberTrace (hereinafter CyberTrace) is a tool that integrates threat data streams with SIEM solutions. It provides users with instant access to analytics data, increasing their awareness of security decisions.

You can integrate CyberTrace with KUMA in one of the following ways:

In this section

Integrating CyberTrace indicator search

Integrating CyberTrace interface

Page top

[Topic 217921]

Integrating CyberTrace indicator search

To integrate CyberTrace indicator search:

  1. Configure CyberTrace to receive and process KUMA requests.

    You can configure the integration with KUMA immediately after installing CyberTrace in the Quick Start Wizard or later in the CyberTrace web interface.

  2. Create an event enrichment rule in KUMA.

    In the enrichment rule, you can specify which data from CyberTrace you want to enrich the event with.

  3. Create a collector to receive events that you want to enrich with CyberTrace data.
  4. Link the enrichment rule to the collector.
  5. Save and create the service:
    • If you linked the rule to a new collector, click Save and create, copy the collector ID in the opened window and use the copied ID to install the collector on the server using the command line interface.
    • If you linked the rule to an existing collector, click Save and restart services to apply the settings.

    The configuration of the integration of CyberTrace indicator search is complete and KUMA events will be enriched with CyberTrace data.

Example of testing CyberTrace data enrichment.

By default, KUMA does not test the connection with CyberTrace.

If you want to test the integration with CyberTrace and make sure that event enrichment is working, you can follow the steps of the following example or adapt the example to your situation. The example shows an integration test, which performs enrichment and shows that the event contains the specified test URL.

To run the test:

  1. Create a test enrichment rule with parameters listed in the table below.

    Setting

    Value

    Name

    Test CT enrichment

    Tenant

    Shared

    Source kind

    CyberTrace

    URL

    <URL of the cybertrace server to which you want to send requests>:9999

    Mapping

    KUMA field: RequestURL

    CyberTrace indicator: url

    Debug

    Enabled

  1. Create a test collector with the following parameters:

    At step 2 Transport, specify the http connector.

    At step 3 Parsing, specify the normalizer and select the json parsing method, set the mapping of the RequestUrl – RequestUrl fields.

    At step 6 Enrichment, specify the 'Test CT enrichment' rule.

    At step 7 Routing, specify the storage where events must be sent.

  2. Click Create and save service.

    A complete command for installing the collector is displayed in the window.

  3. Click Copy to copy the command to the clipboard and run the command on the command line. Wait for the command to complete, return to the KUMA web interface, and click Save collector.

    A test collector is created and the test enrichment rule is linked to the collector.

  4. Use the command line interface to send a request to the collector, which will trigger an event, which will then be enriched with the test URL http://fakess123bn.nu. For example:

    curl --request POST \
      --url http://<ID of the host where the collector is installed>:<port of the collector>/input \
      --header 'Content-Type: application/json' \
      --data '{"RequestUrl":"http://fakess123bn.nu"}'

  5. Go to the KUMA Events section and run the following query to filter event output and find the enriched event:

    SELECT * FROM `events` WHERE RequestUrl = 'http://fakess123bn.nu' ORDER BY Timestamp DESC LIMIT 250

    Result:

    Enrichment is successful, the event now has a RequestURL field with the http://fakess123bn.nu value, as well as a TI indicator and indicator category with CyberTrace data.

If the test did not result in enrichment, for example, if the TI indicator is missing, we recommend to do the following:

  1. Check the settings of the collector and enrichment rules.
  2. Download the collector logs using the following command and look for errors in the logs:

    tail -f /opt/kaspersky/kuma/collector/<collector ID>/log/collector

In this section

Configuring CyberTrace to receive and process requests

Creating event Enrichment rules

Page top

[Topic 217768]

Configuring CyberTrace to receive and process requests

You can configure CyberTrace to receive and process requests from KUMA immediately after its installation in the Quick Start Wizard or later in the program web interface.

To configure CyberTrace to receive and process requests in the Quick Start Wizard:

  1. Wait for the CyberTrace Quick Start Wizard to start after the program is installed.

    The Welcome to Kaspersky CyberTrace window opens.

  2. In the <select SIEM> drop-down list, select the type of SIEM system from which you want to receive data and click the Next button.

    The Connection Settings window opens.

  3. Do the following:
    1. In the Service listens on settings block, select the IP and port option.
    2. In the IP address field, enter 0.0.0.0.
    3. In the Port field, enter the port for receiving events, the default port is 9999.
    4. Under Service sends events to, specify 127.0.0.1 in the IP address or hostname field and in the Port field, specify 9998.

      Leave the default values for everything else.

    5. Click Next.

    The Proxy Settings window opens.

  4. If a proxy server is being used in your organization, define the settings for connecting to it. If not, leave all the fields blank and click Next.

    The Licensing Settings window opens.

  5. In the Kaspersky CyberTrace license key field, add a license key for CyberTrace.
  6. In the Kaspersky Threat Data Feeds certificate field, add a certificate that allows you to download updated data feeds from servers, and click Next.

CyberTrace will be configured.

To configure CyberTrace to receive and process requests in the program web interface:

  1. In the CyberTrace web interface window, select SettingsService.
  2. In the Connection Settings block:
    1. Select the IP and port option.
    2. In the IP address field, enter 0.0.0.0.
    3. In the Port field, specify the port for receiving events, the default port is 9999.
  3. In the Web interface settings block, in the IP address or hostname field, enter 127.0.0.1.
  4. In the upper toolbar, click Restart the CyberTrace Service.
  5. Select SettingsEvents format.
  6. In the Alert events format field, enter %Date% alert=%Alert%%RecordContext%.
  7. In the Detection events format field, enter Category=%Category%|MatchedIndicator=%MatchedIndicator%%RecordContext%.
  8. In the Records context format field, enter |%ParamName%=%ParamValue%.
  9. In the Actionable fields context format field, enter %ParamName%:%ParamValue%.

CyberTrace will be configured.

After updating CyberTrace configuration you have to restart the CyberTrace server.

Page top

[Topic 217808]

Creating event Enrichment rules

To create event enrichment rules:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, open the ResourcesEnrichment rules section and in the left part of the window, select or create a folder for the new rule.

    The list of available enrichment rules will be displayed.

  2. Click Add enrichment rule to create a new rule.

    The enrichment rule window will be displayed.

  3. Enter the rule configuration parameters:
    1. In the Name field, enter a unique name for the rule. The name must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
    2. In the Tenant drop-down list, select the tenant that will own this resource.
    3. In the Source kind drop-down list, select cybertrace.
    4. Specify the URL of the CyberTrace server to which you want to connect. For example, example.domain.com:9999.
    5. If necessary, use the Number of connections field to specify the maximum number of connections to the CyberTrace server that can be simultaneously established by KUMA. By default, this value is equal to the number of vCPUs of the KUMA Core server.
    6. In the RPS field, enter the number of requests to the CyberTrace server per second that KUMA can make. The default value is 1,000.
    7. In the Timeout field, specify the maximum number of seconds KUMA should wait for a response from the CyberTrace server. Until a response is received or the time expires, the event is not sent to the Correlator. If a response is received before the timeout, it is added to the TI field of the event and the event processing continues. The default value is 30.
    8. In the Mapping settings block, you must specify the fields of events to be checked via CyberTrace, and define the rules for mapping fields of KUMA events to CyberTrace indicator types:
      • In the KUMA field column, select the field whose value must be sent to CyberTrace.
      • In the CyberTrace indicator column, select the CyberTrace indicator type for every field you selected:
        • ip
        • url
        • hash

      You must provide at least one string to the table. You can use the Add row button to add a string, and can use the cross button to remove a string.

    9. Use the Debug drop-down list to indicate whether or not to enable logging of service operations. Logging is disabled by default.
    10. If necessary, in the Description field, add up to 4,000 Unicode characters describing the resource.
    11. In the Filter section, you can specify conditions to identify events that will be processed using the enrichment rule. You can select an existing filter from the drop-down list or create a new filter.

      Creating a filter in resources

      1. In the Filter drop-down list, select Create new.
      2. If you want to keep the filter as a separate resource, select the Save filter check box.

        In this case, you will be able to use the created filter in various services.

        This check box is cleared by default.

      3. If you selected the Save filter check box, enter a name for the created filter resource in the Name field. The name must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
      4. In the Conditions settings block, specify the conditions that the events must meet:
        1. Click the Add condition button.
        2. In the Left operand and Right operand drop-down lists, specify the search parameters.

          Depending on the data source selected in the Right operand field, you may see fields of additional parameters that you need to use to define the value that will be passed to the filter. For example, when choosing active list you will need to specify the name of the active list, the entry key, and the entry key field.

        3. In the operator drop-down list, select the relevant operator.

          Filter operators

          • =—the left operand equals the right operand.
          • <—the left operand is less than the right operand.
          • <=—the left operand is less than or equal to the right operand.
          • >—the left operand is greater than the right operand.
          • >=—the left operand is greater than or equal to the right operand.
          • inSubnet—the left operand (IP address) is in the subnet of the right operand (subnet).
          • contains—the left operand contains values of the right operand.
          • startsWith—the left operand starts with one of the values of the right operand.
          • endsWith—the left operand ends with one of the values of the right operand.
          • match—the left operand matches the regular expression of the right operand. The RE2 regular expressions are used.
          • hasBit—checks whether the left operand (string or number) contains bits whose positions are listed in the right operand (in a constant or in a list).

            The value to be checked is converted to binary and processed right to left. Chars are checked whose index is specified as a constant or a list.

            If the value being checked is a string, then an attempt is made to convert it to integer and process it in the way described above. If the string cannot be converted to a number, the filter returns False.

          • hasVulnerability—checks whether the left operand contains an asset with the vulnerability and vulnerability severity specified in the right operand.

            If you do not specify the ID and severity of the vulnerability, the filter is triggered if the asset in the event being checked has any vulnerability.

          • inActiveList—this operator has only one operand. Its values are selected in the Key fields field and are compared with the entries in the active list selected from the Active List drop-down list.
          • inContextTable checks whether or not an entry exists in the context table. This operator has only one operand. Its values are selected in the Key fields field and are compared with the values of entries in the context table selected from the drop-down list of context tables.
          • inDictionary—checks whether the specified dictionary contains an entry defined by the key composed with the concatenated values of the selected event fields.
          • inCategory—the asset in the left operand is assigned at least one of the asset categories of the right operand.
          • inActiveDirectoryGroup—the Active Directory account in the left operand belongs to one of the Active Directory groups in the right operand.
          • TIDetect—this operator is used to find events using CyberTrace Threat Intelligence (TI) data. This operator can be used only on events that have completed enrichment with data from CyberTrace Threat Intelligence. In other words, it can only be used in collectors at the destination selection stage and in correlators.
        4. If necessary, select the do not match case check box. When this check box is selected, the operator ignores the case of the values.

          The selection of this check box does not apply to the InSubnet, InActiveList, InCategory or InActiveDirectoryGroup operators.

          This check box is cleared by default.

        5. If you want to add a negative condition, select If not from the If drop-down list.
        6. You can add multiple conditions or a group of conditions.
      5. If you have added multiple conditions or groups of conditions, choose a search condition (and, or, not) by clicking the AND button.
      6. If you want to add existing filters that are selected from the Select filter drop-down list, click the Add filter button.

        You can view the nested filter settings by clicking the edit-grey button.

  4. Click Save.

A new enrichment rule will be created.

CyberTrace indicator search integration is now configured. You can now add the created enrichment rule to a collector. You must restart KUMA collectors to apply the new settings.

If any of the CyberTrace fields in the events details area contains "[{" or "}]" values, it means that information from CyberTrace data feed was processed incorrectly and it's possible that some of the data is not displayed. You can get all data feed information by copying the events TI indicator field value from KUMA and searching for it in the CyberTrace in the indicators section. All relevant information will be displayed in the Indicator context section of CyberTrace.

Page top

[Topic 217922]

Integrating CyberTrace interface

You can integrate the CyberTrace web interface into the KUMA web interface. When this integration is enabled, the KUMA web interface includes a CyberTrace section that provides access to the CyberTrace web interface. You can configure the integration in the SettingsKaspersky CyberTrace section of the KUMA web interface.

To integrate the CyberTrace web interface in KUMA:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, open ResourcesSecrets.

    The list of available secrets will be displayed.

  2. Click the Add secret button to create a new secret. This resource is used to store credentials of the CyberTrace server.

    The secret window is displayed.

  3. Enter information about the secret:
    1. In the Name field, choose a name for the added secret. The name must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
    2. In the Tenant drop-down list, select the tenant that will own this resource.
    3. In the Type drop-down list, select credentials.
    4. In the User and Password fields, enter credentials for your CyberTrace server.
    5. If necessary, in the Description field, add up to 4,000 Unicode characters describing the resource.
  4. Click Save.

    The CyberTrace server credentials are now saved and can be used in other KUMA resources.

  5. In the KUMA web interface, open SettingsKaspersky CyberTrace.

    The window with CyberTrace integration parameters opens.

  6. Make the necessary changes to the following parameters:
    • Disabled—clear this check box if you want to integrate the CyberTrace web interface into the KUMA web interface.
    • Host (required)—enter the address of the CyberTrace server.
    • Port (required)—enter the port of the CyberTrace server; the default port for managing the web interface is 443.
  7. In the Secret drop-down list, select the secret you created before.
  8. You can configure access to the CyberTrace web interface in the following ways:
    • Use hostname or IP when logging into the KUMA web interface.

      To do this, in the Allow hosts section, click Add host and in the field that is displayed,

      on which the KUMA web interface is deployed.

      enter the IP or hostname of the device

    • Use the FQDN when logging into the KUMA web interface.

      If you are using the Mozilla Firefox browser to work with the program web interface, the CyberTrace section may fail to display data. In this case, configure the data display (see below).

  9. Click Save.

CyberTrace is now integrated with KUMA, and the CyberTrace section is displayed in the KUMA web interface.

To configure the data display in the CyberTrace section when using the FQDN to log in to KUMA in Mozilla Firefox:

  1. Clear your browser cache.
  2. In the browser's address bar, enter the FQDN of the KUMA web interface with port number 7222 as follows: https://kuma.example.com:7222.

    A window will open to warn you of a potential security threat.

  3. Click the Details button.
  4. In the lower part of the window, click the Accept risk and continue button.

    An exclusion will be created for the URL of the KUMA web interface.

  5. In the browser's address bar, enter the URL of the KUMA web interface with port number 7220.
  6. Go to the CyberTrace section.

Data will be displayed in this section.

Updating CyberTrace deny list (Internal TI)

When the CyberTrace web interface is integrated into the KUMA web interface, you can update the CyberTrace denylist or Internal TI with information from KUMA events.

To update CyberTrace Internal TI:

  1. Open the event details area from the events table, Alert window, or correlation event window and click the link on a domain, web address, IP address, or file hash.

    The context menu opens.

  2. Select Add to Internal TI of CyberTrace.

The selected object is now added to the CyberTrace denylist.

Page top

[Topic 217925]

Integration with Kaspersky Threat Intelligence Portal

The Kaspersky Threat Intelligence Portal combines all of Kaspersky's knowledge about cyberthreats and how they're related into a single web service. When integrated with KUMA, it helps KUMA users to make faster and better-informed decisions, providing them with data about URLs, domains, IP addresses, WHOIS / DNS data.

Access to the Kaspersky Threat Intelligence Portal is provided based on a fee. License certificates are created by Kaspersky experts. To obtain a certificate for Kaspersky Threat Intelligence Portal, contact your Technical Account Manager.

In this Help topic

Initializing integration

Requesting information from Kaspersky Threat Intelligence Portal

Viewing information from Kaspersky Threat Intelligence Portal

Updating information from Kaspersky Threat Intelligence Portal

Page top

[Topic 217900]

Initializing integration

To integrate Kaspersky Threat Intelligence Portal into KUMA:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, open ResourcesSecrets.

    The list of available secrets will be displayed.

  2. Click the Add secret button to create a new secret. This resource is used to store credentials of your Kaspersky Threat Intelligence Portal account.

    The secret window is displayed.

  3. Enter information about the secret:
    1. In the Name field, choose a name for the added secret.
    2. In the Tenant drop-down list, select the tenant that will own the created resource.
    3. In the Type drop-down list, select ktl.
    4. In the User and Password fields, enter credentials for your Kaspersky Threat Intelligence Portal account.
    5. If you want, enter a Description of the secret.
  4. Upload your Kaspersky Threat Intelligence Portal certificate key:
    1. Click the Upload PFX button and select the PFX file with your certificate.

      The name of the selected file appears to the right of the Upload PFX button.

    2. Enter the password to the PFX file in the PFX password field.
  5. Click Save.

    The Kaspersky Threat Intelligence Portal account credentials are now saved and can be used in other KUMA resources.

  6. In the Settings section of the KUMA web interface, open the Kaspersky Threat Lookup tab.

    The list of available connections will be displayed.

  7. Make sure the Disabled check box is cleared.
  8. In the Secret drop-down list, select the secret you created before.

    You can create a new secret by clicking the button with the plus sign. The created secret will be saved in the ResourcesSecrets section.

  9. If necessary, select a proxy server in the Proxy drop-down list.
  10. Click Save.
  11. After you save the settings, log in to the web interface and accept the Terms of Use. Otherwise, an error will be returned in the API.

The integration process of Kaspersky Threat Intelligence Portal with KUMA is completed.

Once Kaspersky Threat Intelligence Portal and KUMA are integrated, you can request additional information from the event details area about hosts, domains, URLs, IP addresses, and file hashes (MD5, SHA1, SHA256).

Page top

[Topic 217967]

Requesting information from Kaspersky Threat Intelligence Portal

To request information from Kaspersky Threat Intelligence Portal:

  1. Open the event details area from the events table, alert window, or correlation event window and click the link on a domain, web address, IP address, or file hash.

    The Threat Lookup enrichment area opens in the right part of the screen.

  2. Select check boxes next to the data types you want to request.

    If neither check box is selected, all information types are requested.

  3. In the Maximum number of records in each data group field enter the number of entries per selected information type you want to receive. The default value is 10.
  4. Click Request.

A ktl task has been created. When it is completed, events are enriched with data from Kaspersky Threat Intelligence Portal which can be viewed from the events table, Alert window, or correlation event window.

Page top

[Topic 218041]

Viewing information from Kaspersky Threat Intelligence Portal

To view information from Kaspersky Threat Intelligence Portal:

Open the event details area from the events table, alert window, or correlation event window and click the link on a domain, web address, IP address, or file hash for which you previously requested information from Kaspersky Threat Intelligence Portal.

The event details area opens in the right part of the screen with data from Kaspersky Threat Intelligence Portal; the time when it was received is indicated at the bottom of the screen.

Information received from Kaspersky Threat Intelligence Portal is cached. If you click a domain, web address, IP address, or file hash in the event details pane for which KUMA has information available, the data from Kaspersky Threat Intelligence Portal opens, with the time it was received indicated at the bottom, instead of the Threat Lookup enrichment window. You can update the data.

Page top

[Topic 218026]

Updating information from Kaspersky Threat Intelligence Portal

To update information, received from Kaspersky Threat Intelligence Portal:

  1. Open the event details area from the events table, alert window, or correlation event window and click the link on a domain, web address, IP address, or file hash for which you previously requested information from Kaspersky Threat Intelligence Portal.
  2. Click Update in the event details area containing the data received from the Kaspersky Threat Intelligence Portal.

    The Threat Lookup enrichment area opens in the right part of the screen.

  3. Select the check boxes next to the types of information you want to request.

    If neither check box is selected, all information types are requested.

  4. In the Maximum number of records in each data group field enter the number of entries per selected information type you want to receive. The default value is 10.
  5. Click Update.

    The KTL task is created and the new data received from Kaspersky Threat Intelligence Portal is requested.

  6. Close the Threat Lookup enrichment window and the details area with KTL information.
  7. Open the event details area from the events table, Alert window or correlation event window and click the link on a domain, URL, IP address, or file hash for which you updated Kaspersky Threat Intelligence Portal information and select Show info from Threat Lookup.

The event details area opens on the right with data from Kaspersky Threat Intelligence Portal, indicating the time when it was received on the bottom of the screen.

Page top

[Topic 217928]

Integration with R-Vision Security Orchestration, Automation and Response

R-Vision Security Orchestration, Automation and Response (hereinafter referred to as R-Vision SOAR) is a software platform used for automation of monitoring, processing, and responding to information security incidents. It aggregates cyberthreat data from various sources into a single database for further analysis and investigation to facilitate incident response capabilities.

R-Vision SOAR can be integrated with KUMA. When this integration is enabled, the creation of a KUMA alert triggers the creation of an incident in R-Vision SOAR. A KUMA alert and its R-Vision SOAR incident are interdependent. When the status of an incident in R-Vision SOAR is updated, the status of the corresponding KUMA alert is also changed.

Integration of R-Vision SOAR and KUMA is configured in both applications. In KUMA integration settings are available only for general administrators.

Mapping KUMA alert fields to R-Vision SOAR incident fields when transferring data via API

KUMA alert field

R-Vision SOAR incident field

FirstSeen

detection

priority

level

correlationRuleName

description

events

(as a JSON file)

files

In this section

Configuring integration in KUMA

Configuring integration in R-Vision SOAR

Managing alerts using R-Vision SOAR

Page top

[Topic 224436]

Configuring integration in KUMA

This section describes integration of KUMA with R-Vision SOAR from the KUMA side.

Integration in KUMA is configured in the web interface under SettingsIRP / SOAR.

To configure integration with R-Vision SOAR:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, open ResourcesSecrets.

    The list of available secrets will be displayed.

  2. Click the Add secret button to create a new secret. This resource is used to store token for R-Vision SOAR API requests.

    The secret window is displayed.

  3. Enter information about the secret:
    1. In the Name field, enter a name for the added secret. The name must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
    2. In the Tenant drop-down list, select the tenant that will own the created resource.
    3. In the Type drop-down list, select token.
    4. In the Token field, enter your R-Vision SOAR API token.

      You can obtain the token in the R-Vision SOAR web interface under SettingsGeneralAPI.

    5. If necessary, in the Description field, add up to 4,000 Unicode characters describing the secret.
  4. Click Save.

    The R-Vision SOAR API token is now saved and can be used in other KUMA resources.

  5. In the KUMA web interface, go to SettingsIRP / SOAR.

    The window containing R-Vision SOAR integration settings opens.

  6. Make the necessary changes to the following parameters:
    • Disabled—select this check box if you want to disable R-Vision SOAR integration with KUMA.
    • In the Secret drop-down list, select the previously created secret.

      You can create a new secret by clicking the button with the plus sign. The created secret will be saved in the ResourcesSecrets section.

    • URL (required)—URL of the R-Vision SOAR server host.
    • Field name where KUMA alert IDs must be placed (required)—name of the R-Vision SOAR field where the ID of the KUMA alert must be written.
    • Field name where KUMA alert URLs must be placed (required)—name of the R-Vision SOAR field where the link for accessing the KUMA alert should be written.
    • Category (required)—category of R-Vision SOAR incident that is created after KUMA alert is received.
    • KUMA event fields that must be sent to IRP / SOAR (required)—drop-down list for selecting the KUMA event fields that should be sent to R-Vision SOAR.
    • Severity group of settings (required)—used to map KUMA severity values to R-Vision SOAR severity values.
  7. Click Save.

In KUMA integration with R-Vision SOAR is now configured. If integration is also configured in R-Vision SOAR, when alerts appear in KUMA, information about those alerts will be sent to R-Vision SOAR to create an incident. The Details on alert section in the KUMA web interface displays a link to R-Vision SOAR.

If you are working with multiple tenants and want to integrate with R-Vision SOAR, the names of tenants must match the abbreviated names of companies in R-Vision SOAR.

Page top

[Topic 224437]

Configuring integration in R-Vision SOAR

This section describes KUMA integration with R-Vision SOAR from the R-Vision SOAR side.

Integration in R-Vision SOAR is configured in the Settings section of the R-Vision SOAR web interface. For details on configuring R-Vision SOAR, please refer to the documentation on this application.

Configuring integration with KUMA consists of the following steps:

Integration with KUMA is now configured in R-Vision SOAR. If integration is also configured in KUMA, when alerts appear in KUMA, information about those alerts is sent to R-Vision SOAR to create an incident. The Details on alert section in the KUMA web interface displays a link to R-Vision SOAR.

In this section

Adding the ALERT_ID and ALERT_URL incident fields

Creating a collector in R-Vision SOAR

Creating connector in R-Vision SOAR

Creating rule for closing KUMA alert when R-Vision SOAR incident is closed

Page top

[Topic 225573]

Adding the ALERT_ID and ALERT_URL incident fields

To add the ALERT_ID incident field in the R-Vision SOAR:

  1. In the R-Vision SOAR web interface, under SettingsIncident managementIncident fields, select the No group group of fields.
  2. Click the plus icon in the right part of the screen.

    The right part of the screen will display the settings area for the incident field you are creating.

  3. In the Title field, enter the name of the field (for example: Alert ID).
  4. In the Type drop-down list, select Text field.
  5. In the Parsing Tag field, enter ALERT_ID.

ALERT_ID field added to R-Vision SOAR incident.

ALERT_ID field in R-Vision SOAR version 4.0

rvision_3

ALERT_ID field in R-Vision SOAR version 5.0

rvision_3_v5

To add the ALERT_URL incident field in R-Vision SOAR:

  1. In the R-Vision SOAR web interface, under SettingsIncident managementIncident fields, select the No group group of fields.
  2. Click the plus icon in the right part of the screen.

    The right part of the screen will display the settings area for the incident field you are creating.

  3. In the Title field, enter the name of the field (for example: Alert URL).
  4. In the Type drop-down list, select Text field.
  5. In the Parsing Tag field, enter ALERT_URL.
  6. Select the Display links and Display URL as links check boxes.

ALERT_URL field added to R-Vision SOAR incident.

ALERT_URL field in R-Vision SOAR version 4.0

rvision_5

ALERT_URL field in R-Vision SOAR version 5.0

rvision_5_v5

If necessary, you can likewise configure the display of other data from a KUMA alert in an R-Vision SOAR incident.

Page top

[Topic 225575]

Creating a collector in R-Vision SOAR

To create a collector in R-Vision SOAR:

  1. In the R-Vision SOAR web interface, under SettingsCommonCollectors, click the plus icon.
  2. Specify the collector name in the Name field (for example, Main collector).
  3. In the Collector address field, enter the IP address or hostname where the R-Vision SOAR is installed (for example, 127.0.0.1).
  4. In the Port field type 3001.
  5. Click Add.
  6. On the Organizations tab, select the organization for which you want to add integration with KUMA and select the Default collector and Response collector check boxes.

The R-Vision SOAR collector is created.

Page top

[Topic 225576]

Creating connector in R-Vision SOAR

To create connector in R-Vision SOAR:

  1. In the R-Vision SOAR web interface, under SettingsIncident managementConnectors, click the plus icon.
  2. In the Type drop-down list, select REST.
  3. In the Name field, specify the connector name, such as KUMA.
  4. In the URL field type API request to close an alert in the format <KUMA Core server FQDN>:<Port used for API requests (7223 by default)>/api/v1/alerts/close.

    Example: https://kuma-example.com:7223/api/v1/alerts/close

  5. In the Authorization type drop-down list, select Token.
  6. In the Auth header field type Authorization.
  7. In the Auth value field enter the token of KUMA user with general administrator role in the following format:

    Bearer <KUMA General administrator token>

  8. In the Collector drop-down list select previously created collector.
  9. Click Save.

The connector has been created.

Connector in R-Vision SOAR version 4.0

rvision_7

Connector in R-Vision SOAR version 5.0

rvision_7_v5

When connector is created you must configure sending API queries for closing alerts in KUMA.

To configure API queries in R-Vision SOAR:

  1. In the R-Vision SOAR web interface, under SettingsIncident managementConnectors, open for editing the newly created connector.
  2. In the request type drop-down list, select POST.
  3. In the Params field type API request to close an alert in the format <KUMA Core server FQDN>:<Port used for API requests (7223 by default)>/api/v1/alerts/close.

    Example: https://kuma-example.com:7223/api/v1/alerts/close

  4. On the HEADERS tab add the following keys and values:
    • Key Content-Type; value: application/json.
    • Key Authorization; value: Bearer <KUMA general administrator token>.

      The token of the KUMA general administrator can be obtained in the KUMA web interface under SettingsUsers.

  5. On the BODYRaw tab type contents of the API request body:

    {

        "id":"{{tag.ALERT_ID}}",

        "reason":"<Reason for closing the alert. Available values: "Incorrect Correlation Rule", "Incorrect Data", "Responded".> "

    }

  6. Click Save.

The connector is configured.

Connector in R-Vision SOAR version 4.0

API request header

rvision_7.2

API request body

rvision_7.3

Connector in R-Vision SOAR version 5.0

rvision_7-2_v5

rvision_7.3_v5

Page top

[Topic 225579]

Creating rule for closing KUMA alert when R-Vision SOAR incident is closed

To create a rule for sending an alert closing request to KUMA when an R-Vision SOAR incident is closed:

  1. In the R-Vision SOAR web interface, under SettingsIncident managementResponse playbooks, click the plus icon.
  2. In the Name field, type the name of the rule, for example, Close alert.
  3. In the Group drop-down list select All playbooks.
  4. In the Autostart criteria settings block, click Add and enter the conditions for triggering the rule in the opened window:
    1. In the Type drop-down list, select Field value.
    2. In the Field drop-down list, select Incident status.
    3. Select the Closed status.
    4. Click Add.

    Rule trigger conditions are added. The rule will trigger when an incident is closed.

  5. In the Incident Response Actions settings block, click Add Run connector. In the opened window, select the connector that should be run when the rule is triggered:
    1. In the Connector drop-down list select previously created connector.
    2. Click Add.

    Connector added to the rule.

  6. Click Add.

A rule is created for sending a KUMA alert closing request when an R-Vision SOAR incident is closed.

R-Vision IRP version 4.0 playbook rule

rvision_9

R-Vision SOAR version 5.0 playbook rule

rvision_9_v5

Page top

[Topic 224487]

Managing alerts using R-Vision SOAR

After integration of KUMA and R-Vision SOAR is configured, data on KUMA alerts starts coming into R-Vision SOAR. Changes of alert parameters in KUMA are reflected in R-Vision SOAR. Any changes in the statuses of alerts in KUMA or R-Vision SOAR (except closing an alert) are also reflected in the other system.

Alert management scenarios when KUMA and R-Vision SOAR are integrated:

  • Send cyberthreat data from KUMA to R-Vision SOAR

    Data on detected alerts is automatically sent from KUMA to R-Vision SOAR. An incident is also created in R-Vision SOAR.

    The following information about the KUMA alert is sent to R-Vision SOAR:

    • ID.
    • Name.
    • Status.
    • Date of the first event related to the alert.
    • Date of the last detection related to the alert.
    • User account name or email address of the security officer assigned to process the alert.
    • Alert severity.
    • Category of the R-Vision SOAR incident corresponding to the KUMA alert.
    • Hierarchical list of events related to the alert.
    • List of alert-related assets (internal and external).
    • List of users related to the alert.
    • Alert change log.
    • Link to the alert in KUMA.
  • Investigate cyberthreats in KUMA

    Initial processing of an alert is performed in KUMA. The security officer can update and change any parameters of an alert except its ID and name. Any changes are reflected in the R-Vision SOAR incident card.

    If a cyberthreat turns out to be a false positive and its alert is closed in KUMA, its corresponding incident in R-Vision SOAR is also automatically closed.

  • Close incident in R-Vision SOAR

    After all necessary work is completed on an incident and the course of the investigation is recorded in R-Vision SOAR, the incident is closed. The corresponding KUMA alert is also automatically closed.

  • Open a previously closed incident

    If active monitoring detects that an incident was not completely resolved or if additional information comes up, this incident is re-opened in R-Vision SOAR. However, the alert remains closed in KUMA.

    The security officer can use a link to navigate from an R-Vision SOAR incident to the corresponding alert in KUMA and make the necessary changes to any of its parameters except the ID, name, and status of the alert. Any changes are reflected in the R-Vision SOAR incident card.

    Further analysis is performed in R-Vision SOAR. When the investigation is complete and the incident is closed again in R-Vision SOAR, the status of the corresponding alert in KUMA remains closed.

  • Request additional data from the source system as part of the response playbook or manually

    If additional information is required from KUMA when analyzing incidents in R-Vision SOAR, in R-Vision SOAR, you can create a search request to KUMA (for example, you can request telemetry data, reputation, host information). This request is sent via KUMA REST API and the response is recorded in the R-Vision SOAR incident card for further analysis and reporting.

    This same sequence of actions is performed during automatic processing if it is not possible to immediately save all information on an incident during an import.

Page top

[Topic 217926]

Integration with Active Directory, Active Directory Federation Services and FreeIPA

You can integrate KUMA with the Active Directory, Active Directory Federation Services, and FreeIPA services used in your organization.

You can configure a connection to the Active Directory catalog service over the LDAP protocol. This lets you use information from Active Directory in correlation rules for enrichment of events and alerts, and for analytics.

If you configure a connection to a domain controller server, you can use domain authorization. In this case, you can bind the domain groups of users to the KUMA role filters. The users belonging to these groups will be able to use their domain account credentials to log in to the KUMA web interface and will obtain access to application sections based on their assigned role.

It is recommended to create the groups of users in Actions Active Directory, Active Directory Federation Services, or FreeIPA in advance if you want to provide such groups with the capability for authorization using their domain account in the KUMA web interface. An email address must be indicated in the properties of a user account in Active Directory.

In this section

Connecting over LDAP

Authentication using domain accounts

Page top

[Topic 221426]

Connecting over LDAP

LDAP connections are created and managed under SettingsLDAP server in the KUMA web interface. The LDAP server integration by tenant section shows the tenants for which LDAP connections were created. Tenants can be created or deleted.

If you select a tenant, the LDAP server integration window opens to show a table containing existing LDAP connections. Connections can be created or edited. In this window, you can change the frequency of queries sent to LDAP servers and set the retention period for obsolete data.

After integration is enabled, information about Active Directory accounts becomes available in the alert window, the correlation events detailed view window, and the incidents window. If you click an account name in the Related users section of the window, the Account details window opens with the data imported from Active Directory.

Data from LDAP can also be used when enriching events in collectors and in analytics.

Imported Active Directory attributes

The following account attributes can be requested from Active Directory:

  • accountExpires
  • badPasswordTime
  • cn
  • co
  • company
  • department
  • description
  • displayName
  • distinguishedName
  • division
  • employeeID
  • givenName
  • l
  • lastLogon
  • lastLogonTimestamp
  • Mail
  • mailNickname
  • managedObjects
  • manager
  • memberOf (this attribute can be used for search during correlation)
  • mobile
  • name
  • objectCategory
  • objectGUID (this attribute always requested from Active Directory even if a user doesn't specify it)
  • objectSID
  • physicalDeliveryOfficeName
  • pwdLastSet
  • sAMAccountName
  • sAMAccountType
  • sn
  • streetAddress
  • telephoneNumber
  • title
  • userAccountControl
  • UserPrincipalName
  • whenChanged
  • whenCreated

In this section

Enabling and disabling LDAP integration

Adding a tenant to the LDAP server integration list

Creating an LDAP server connection

Creating a copy of an LDAP server connection

Changing an LDAP server connection

Changing the data update frequency

Changing the data storage period

Starting account data update tasks

Deleting an LDAP server connection

Page top

[Topic 221481]

Enabling and disabling LDAP integration

You can enable or disable all LDAP connections of the tenant at the same time, or enable and disable an LDAP connection individually.

To enable or disable all LDAP connections of a tenant:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, open SettingsLDAP server and select the tenant for which you want to enable or disable all LDAP connections.

    The LDAP server integration by tenant window opens.

  2. Select or clear the Disabled check box.
  3. Click Save.

To enable or disable a specific LDAP connection:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, open SettingsLDAP server and select the tenant for which you want to enable or disable an LDAP connection.

    The LDAP server integration window opens.

  2. Select the relevant connection and either select or clear the Disabled check box in the opened window.
  3. Click Save.
Page top

[Topic 233077]

Adding a tenant to the LDAP server integration list

To add a tenant to the list of tenants for integration with an LDAP server:

  1. Open the KUMA web interface and select SettingsLDAP server.

    The LDAP server integration by tenant window opens.

  2. Click the Add tenant button.

    The LDAP server integration window is displayed.

  3. In the Tenant drop-down list, select the tenant that you need to add.
  4. Click Save.

The selected tenant is added to the LDAP server integration list.

To delete a tenant from the list of tenants for integration with an LDAP server:

  1. Open the KUMA web interface and select SettingsLDAP server.

    The LDAP server integration by tenant window is displayed.

  2. Select the check box next to the tenant that you need to delete, and click Delete.
  3. Confirm deletion of the tenant.

The selected tenant is deleted from the LDAP server integration list.

Page top

[Topic 217795]

Creating an LDAP server connection

To create a new LDAP connection to Active Directory:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, open SettingsLDAP server.
  2. Select or create a tenant for which you want to create a LDAP connection.

    The LDAP server integration by tenant window opens.

  3. Click the Add connection button.

    The Connection parameters window opens.

  4. Add a secret containing the account credentials for connecting to the Active Directory server. To do so:
    1. If you previously added a secret, in the Secret drop-down list, select the existing secret (with the credentials type).

      The selected secret can be changed by clicking on the EditResource button.

    2. If you want to create a new secret, click the AddResource button.

      The Secret window opens.

    3. In the Name (required) field, enter the name of the secret containing 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
    4. In the User and Password (required) fields, enter the account credentials for connecting to the Active Directory server.

      You can enter the user name in one of the following formats: <user name>@<domain> or <domain><user name>.

    5. In the Description field, enter a description of up to 4,000 Unicode characters.
    6. Click the Save button.
  5. In the Name (required) field, enter the unique name of the LDAP connection.

    The length of the string must be 1 to 128 Unicode characters.

  6. In the URL (required) field, enter the address of the domain controller in the format <hostname or IP address of server>:<port>.

    In case of server availability issues, you can specify multiple servers with domain controllers by separating them with commas. All of the specified servers must reside in the same domain.

  7. If you want to use TLS encryption for the connection with the domain controller, select one of the following options from the Type drop-down list:
    • startTLS.

      When the

      method is used, first it establishes an unencrypted connection over port 389, then it sends an encryption request. If the STARTTLS command ends with an error, the connection is terminated.

      Make sure that port 389 is open. Otherwise, a connection with the domain controller will be impossible.

    • ssl.

      When using SSL, an encrypted connection is immediately established over port 636.

    • insecure.

    When using an encrypted connection, it is impossible to specify an IP address as a URL.

  8. If you enabled TLS encryption at the previous step, add a TLS certificate. To do so:
    1. If you previously uploaded a certificate, select it from the Certificate drop-down list.

      If no certificate was previously added, the drop-down list shows No data.

    2. If you want to upload a new certificate, click the AD_plus button on the right of the Certificate list.

      The Secret window opens.

    3. In the Name field, enter the name that will be displayed in the list of certificates after the certificate is added.
    4. Click the Upload certificate file button to add the file containing the Active Directory certificate. X.509 certificate public keys in Base64 are supported.
    5. If necessary, provide any relevant information about the certificate in the Description field.
    6. Click the Save button.

    The certificate will be uploaded and displayed in the Certificate list.

  9. In the Timeout in seconds field, indicate the amount of time to wait for a response from the domain controller server.

    If multiple addresses are indicated in the URL field, KUMA will wait the specified number of seconds for a response from the first server. If no response is received during that time, the program will contact the next server, and so on. If none of the indicated servers responds during the specified amount of time, the connection will be terminated with an error.

  10. In the Base DN field, enter the base distinguished name of the directory in which you need to run the search query.
  11. In the Custom AD Account Attributes field, specify the additional attributes that you want to use to enrich events.

    Before configuring event enrichment using custom attributes, make sure that custom attributes are configured in AD.

    To enrich events with accounts using custom attributes:

    1. Add Custom AD Account Attributes in the LDAP connection settings.

      Standard imported attributes from AD cannot be added as custom attributes. For example, if you add the standard accountExpires attribute as a custom attribute, KUMA returns an error when saving the connection settings.

      The following account attributes can be requested from Active Directory:

      • accountExpires
      • badPasswordTime
      • cn
      • co
      • company
      • department
      • description
      • displayName
      • distinguishedName
      • division
      • employeeID
      • givenName
      • l
      • lastLogon
      • lastLogonTimestamp
      • Mail
      • mailNickname
      • managedObjects
      • manager
      • memberOf (this attribute can be used for search during correlation)
      • mobile
      • name
      • objectCategory
      • objectGUID (this attribute always requested from Active Directory even if a user doesn't specify it)
      • objectSID
      • physicalDeliveryOfficeName
      • pwdLastSet
      • sAMAccountName
      • sAMAccountType
      • sn
      • streetAddress
      • telephoneNumber
      • title
      • userAccountControl
      • UserPrincipalName
      • whenChanged
      • whenCreated

      After you add custom attributes in the LDAP connection settings, the LDAP attribute to receive drop-down list in the collector automatically includes the new attributes. Custom attributes are identified by a question mark next to the attribute name. If you added the same attribute for multiple domains, the attribute is listed only once in the drop-down list. You can view the domains by moving your cursor over the question mark. Domain names are displayed as links. If you click a link, the domain is automatically added to LDAP accounts mapping if it was not previously added.

      If you deleted a custom attribute in the LDAP connection settings, manually delete the row containing the attribute from the mapping table in the collector. Account attribute information in KUMA is updated each time you import accounts.  

    2. Import accounts.
    3. In the collector, in the LDAP mapping table, define the rules for mapping KUMA fields to LDAP attributes.
    4. Restart the collector.

      After the collector is restarted, KUMA begins enriching events with accounts.

       

  12. Select the Disabled check box if you do not want to use this LDAP connection.

    This check box is cleared by default.

  13. Click the Save button.

The LDAP connection to Active Directory will be created and displayed in the LDAP server integration window.

Account information from Active Directory will be requested immediately after the connection is saved, and then it will be updated at the specified frequency.

If you want to use multiple LDAP connections simultaneously for one tenant, you need to make sure that the domain controller address indicated in each of these connections is unique. Otherwise KUMA lets you enable only one of these connections. When checking the domain controller address, the program does not check whether the port is unique.

Page top

[Topic 231112]

Creating a copy of an LDAP server connection

You can create an LDAP connection by copying an existing connection. In this case, all settings of the original connection are duplicated in the newly created connection.

To copy an LDAP connection:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, open SettingsLDAP server and select the tenant for which you want to copy an LDAP connection.

    The LDAP server integration window opens.

  2. Select the relevant connection.
  3. In the opened Connection parameters window, click the Duplicate connection button.

    The New Connection window opens. The word copy will be added to the connection name.

  4. If necessary, change the relevant settings.
  5. Click the Save button.

The new connection is created.

If you want to use multiple LDAP connections simultaneously for one tenant, you need to make sure that the domain controller address indicated in each of these connections is unique. Otherwise KUMA lets you enable only one of these connections. When checking the domain controller address, the program does not check whether the port is unique.

Page top

[Topic 233080]

Changing an LDAP server connection

To change an LDAP server connection:

  1. Open the KUMA web interface and select SettingsLDAP server.

    The LDAP server integration by tenant window opens.

  2. Select the tenant for which you want to change the LDAP server connection.

    The LDAP server integration window opens.

  3. Click the LDAP server connection that you want to change.

    The window with the settings of the selected LDAP server connection opens.

  4. Make the necessary changes to the settings.
  5. Click the Save button.

The LDAP server connection is changed. Restart the KUMA services that use LDAP server data enrichment for the changes to take effect.

Page top

[Topic 233081]

Changing the data update frequency

KUMA queries the LDAP server to update account data. This occurs:

  • Immediately after creating a new connection.
  • Immediately after changing the settings of an existing connection.
  • According to a regular schedule every several hours. Every 12 hours by default.
  • Whenever a user creates a task to update account data.

When querying LDAP servers, a task is created in the Task manager section of the KUMA web interface.

To change the schedule of KUMA queries to LDAP servers:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, open SettingsLDAP serverLDAP server integration by tenant.
  2. Select the relevant tenant.

    The LDAP server integration window opens.

  3. In the Data refresh interval field, specify the required frequency in hours. The default value is 12.

The query schedule has been changed.

Page top

[Topic 233213]

Changing the data storage period

Received user account data is stored in KUMA for 90 days by default if information about these accounts is no longer received from the Active Directory server. After this period, the data is deleted.

After KUMA account data is deleted, new and existing events are no longer enriched with this information. Account information will also be unavailable in alerts. If you want to view information about accounts throughout the entire period of alert storage, you must set the account data storage period to be longer than the alert storage period.

To change the storage period for the account data:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, open SettingsLDAP serverLDAP server integration by tenant.
  2. Select the relevant tenant.

    The LDAP server integration window opens.

  3. In the Data storage time field, specify the number of days you need to store data received from the LDAP server.

The account data storage period is changed.

Page top

[Topic 233094]

Starting account data update tasks

After a connection to an Active Directory server is created, tasks to obtain account data are created automatically. This occurs:

  • Immediately after creating a new connection.
  • Immediately after changing the settings of an existing connection.
  • According to a regular schedule every several hours. Every 12 hours by default. The schedule can be changed.

Account data update tasks can be created manually. You can download data for all connections or for one connection of the required tenant.

To start an account data update task for all LDAP connections of a tenant:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, open SettingsLDAP serverLDAP server integration by tenant.
  2. Select the relevant tenant.

    The LDAP server integration window opens.

  3. Click the Import accounts button.

A task to receive account data from the selected tenant is added to the Task manager section of the KUMA web interface.

To start an account data update task for one LDAP connection of a tenant:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, open SettingsLDAP serverLDAP server integration by tenant.
  2. Select the relevant tenant.

    The LDAP server integration window opens.

  3. Select the relevant LDAP server connection.

    The Connection parameters window opens.

  4. Click the Import accounts button.

A task to receive account data from the selected connection of the tenant is added to the Task manager section of the KUMA web interface.

Page top

[Topic 217830]

Deleting an LDAP server connection

To delete LDAP connection to Active Directory:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, open SettingsLDAP server and select the tenant that owns the relevant LDAP connection.

    The LDAP server integration window opens.

  2. Click the LDAP connection that you want to delete and click the Delete button.
  3. Confirm deletion of the connection.

The LDAP connection to Active Directory will be deleted.

Page top

[Topic 221427]

Authentication using domain accounts

To enable users to perform authentication in the KUMA web interface using their own domain account credentials, perform the following configuration steps.

  1. Enable domain authentication if it is disabled.

    Domain authorization is enabled by default, but a connection to the domain is not configured.

  2. Configure a connection to the domain controller.

    The following connections are available:

    The AD and ADFS connection settings can be configured at the same time.

    You can connect to one domain only.

  3. Add groups of user roles.

    You can specify a domain group for each KUMA role. After performing authentication using their domain accounts, the users from this group get access to the KUMA web interface in accordance with the specified role.

    The application checks whether the user group matches the specified filter according to the following order of roles in the KUMA web interface: operator → first line analyst → analyst → tenant administrator → general administrator. Upon the first match, the program assigns a role to the user and does not check any further. If a user matches two groups in the same tenant, the role with the least privileges will be used. If multiple groups are matched for different tenants, the user will be assigned the specified role in each tenant.

Special considerations for logging in after configuring domain authentication

For successful authentication, the following conditions must be met:

  • FreeIPA: when logging into the system, the user must capitalize the domain name in the login. Example: user@FREEIPA.COM.
  • AD/ADFS: when logging into the system, the user must specify UserPrincipalName in the login. Example: user@domain.ru.

If you complete all the configuration steps but the users are not able to use their domain accounts for authentication in the KUMA web interface, it is recommended to check the configuration for the following issues:

  • An email address is not indicated in the properties of the user account in Active Directory. If this is the case, an error message is displayed during the user's first authentication attempt and a KUMA account is not created.
  • There is already an existing local KUMA account with the email address indicated in the domain account properties. If this is the case, the error message is displayed when the user attempts to perform authentication with the domain account.
  • Domain authorization is disabled in the KUMA settings.
  • An error occurred when entering the group of roles.
  • The domain user name contains a space.

In this section

Enabling and disabling domain authentication

Configuring connection between KUMA and FreeIPA

Configuring connection between KUMA and Active Directory

Configuring connection between KUMA and Active Directory Federation Services

Page top

[Topic 221428]

Enabling and disabling domain authentication

Domain authorization is enabled by default, but a connection to the domain is not configured. If you want to temporarily suspend domain authentication after configuring a connection, you can disable it in the KUMA web interface without deleting the previously defined values of settings. If necessary, you can enable authentication again at any time.

To enable or disable domain authorization of users in the KUMA web interface:

  1. In the application web interface, select SettingsDomain authorization.
  2. In the Authorization type drop-down list, select one of the options:
    • FreeIPA
    • AD/ADFS
  3. Do one of the following:
    • To disable domain authentication, select the Disabled check box in the upper part of the workspace.
    • To enable domain authentication, clear the Disabled check box in the upper part of the workspace.
  4. Click the Save button.

The selected settings are saved and applied.

Page top

[Topic 244887]

Configuring connection between KUMA and FreeIPA

You can connect only to one FreeIPA domain. To do so, you must configure a connection to the domain controller.

To configure a connection to a FreeIPA domain controller:

  1. In the application web interface, select SettingsDomain authorization.
  2. In the Authorization type drop-down list, select FreeIPA.
  3. In the FreeIPA settings block, in the Base DN field, enter the DistinguishedName of the root record to search for access groups in the FreeIPA catalog service. Record format: dc=example,dc=com.
  4. In the URL field, indicate the address of the domain controller in the format <hostname or IP address of server>:<port>.

    In case of server availability issues, you can specify up to three servers with domain controllers by separating them with commas. All of the specified servers must reside in the same domain.

  5. If you want to use TLS encryption for the connection with the domain controller, select one of the following options from the TLS mode drop-down list:
    • startTLS.

      When the startTLS method is used, first it establishes an unencrypted connection over port 389, then it sends an encryption request. If the STARTTLS command ends with an error, the connection is terminated.

      Make sure that port 389 is open. Otherwise, a connection with the domain controller will be impossible.

    • ssl.

      When using SSL, an encrypted connection is immediately established over port 636.

    • insecure.

    When using an encrypted connection, it is impossible to specify an IP address as a URL.

  6. If TLS encryption is enabled, the Secret field becomes required and you must specify a secret of the 'certificate' type in that field. If you previously uploaded a secret, select it from the Secret drop-down list. If necessary, click the AD_plus button to create a new secret of the 'certificate' type and select the secret from the drop-down list.
  7. In the Timeout in seconds field, indicate the amount of time to wait for a response from the domain controller server. The default value is 0.

    If multiple addresses are indicated in the URL field, KUMA waits for the specified number of seconds for a response from the first server. If no response is received during that time, the application contacts the next server. If none of the indicated servers responds during the specified amount of time, the connection will be terminated with an error.

  8. In the Custom integration secret drop-down list, select a secret with the 'credentials' type.

    If you want to upload a new secret of the 'credentials' type, click the AD_plus button on the right of the Custom integration secret drop-down list. This opens the Secret window; in that window, in the Name field, enter the name of the secret that will be displayed in the list after it is saved. In the User field, specify the DistinguishedName in the following format: uid=admin,cn=users,cn=accounts,dc=ipa,dc=test. Enter the Password and click Save.

    The secret is uploaded and becomes available for selection in the Custom integration secret drop-down list.

  9. If you want to configure domain authentication for a user with the KUMA general administrator role, use the General administrators group field to specify the DistinguishedName of the FreeIPA group containing the user.

    If the user belongs to several groups within the same tenant, the role with the least privileges is used.

    Filter input example: CN=KUMA team,OU=Groups,OU=Clients,DC=test,DC=domain.

  10. Click the Save button.

A connection with the FreeIPA domain controller is now configured.

You can also check the connection for the previously entered domain controller connection settings.

To check the connection to the domain controller:

  1. In the application web interface, select SettingsDomain authorization.
  2. In the Authorization type drop-down list, select FreeIPA.
  3. In the FreeIPA settings block, select the relevant secret in the User credentials field.

    If necessary, you can create a new secret by clicking the AddSecret button or change the settings of an existing secret by clicking the ChangeSecret button. If integration with FreeIPA is enabled, the secret selection is always reset when the page is loaded.

  4. Click Test.

    After clicking the Test button, the system tests the connection with the domain and returns a notification with the test results. The system does not check if the users can log in or if the user group is configured correctly.

For domain authentication, add the groups for the KUMA user roles.

You can specify the groups only for the roles that require the configuration of domain authentication. You can leave the rest of the fields empty.

To add groups of user roles:

  1. In the application web interface, select SettingsDomain authorization.
  2. In the Role groups settings block, click the Add role groups button.
  3. In the Tenant drop-down list, select the tenant of the users for whom you want to configure domain authentication.
  4. In the fields for the following roles, specify the DistinguishedName of the domain group. The users of this domain group must have the capability to perform authentication with their domain accounts:
    • Operator.
    • First line analyst.
    • Analyst.
    • Administrator.

    Group input example: CN=KUMA team,OU=Groups,OU=Clients,DC=test,DC=domain.

    You can specify only one domain group for each role. If you need to specify multiple groups, you must repeat steps 2–4 for each group while indicating the same tenant.

  5. If necessary, repeat steps 2–4 for each tenant for which you want to configure domain authentication with the following roles: operator, first line analyst, analyst, and tenant administrator.
  6. Click the Save button.

The groups of user roles will be added. The defined settings will be applied the next time the user logs in to the KUMA web interface.

After the first authentication of the user, information about this user is displayed under SettingsUsers. The Login and Password fields received from the domain cannot be edited. The user role will also be unavailable for editing. To edit a role, you will have to change the user role groups. Changes to a role are applied after the next authentication of the user. The user continues working under the current role until the current session expires.

If the user name or email address is changed in the domain account properties, these changes must be manually made in the KUMA account.

Page top

[Topic 221429]

Configuring connection between KUMA and Active Directory

You can connect only to one Active Directory domain. To do so, you must configure a connection to the domain controller.

To configure a connection to an Active Directory domain controller:

  1. In the application web interface, select SettingsDomain authorization.
  2. In the Authorization type drop-down list, select AD/ADFS.
  3. In the Active Directory group of settings, in the Base DN field, enter the DistinguishedName of the root record to search for access groups in the Active Directory catalog service.
  4. In the URL field, indicate the address of the domain controller in the format <hostname or IP address of server>:<port>.

    In case of server availability issues, you can specify multiple servers with domain controllers by separating them with commas. All of the specified servers must reside in the same domain.

  5. If you want to use TLS encryption for the connection with the domain controller, select one of the following options from the TLS mode drop-down list:
    • startTLS.

      When the startTLS method is used, first it establishes an unencrypted connection over port 389, then it sends an encryption request. If the STARTTLS command ends with an error, the connection is terminated.

      Make sure that port 389 is open. Otherwise, a connection with the domain controller will be impossible.

    • ssl.

      When using SSL, an encrypted connection is immediately established over port 636.

    • insecure.

    When using an encrypted connection, it is impossible to specify an IP address as a URL.

  6. If you enabled TLS encryption at the previous step, add a TLS certificate:
    • If you previously uploaded a certificate, select it from the Secret drop-down list.

      If no certificate was previously added, the drop-down list shows No data.

    • If you want to upload a new certificate, click the AD_plus button on the right of the Secret list. In the opened window, in the Name field, enter the name that will be displayed in the list of certificates after the certificate is added. Add the file containing the Active Directory certificate (X.509 certificate public keys in Base64 are supported) by clicking the Upload certificate file button. Click the Save button.

      The certificate will be uploaded and displayed in the Secret list.

  7. In the Timeout in seconds field, indicate the amount of time to wait for a response from the domain controller server.

    If multiple addresses are indicated in the URL field, KUMA waits for the specified number of seconds for a response from the first server. If no response is received during that time, the application contacts the next server. If none of the indicated servers responds during the specified amount of time, the connection will be terminated with an error.

  8. To configure domain authentication for a user with the KUMA general administrator role, specify the DistinguishedName of the Active Directory group the user belongs to in the General administrators group field.

    If the user belongs to several groups within the same tenant, the role with the least privileges is used.

    Filter input example: CN=KUMA team,OU=Groups,OU=Clients,DC=test,DC=domain.

  9. Click the Save button.

A connection with the Active Directory domain controller is now configured.

You can also check the connection for the previously entered domain controller connection settings.

To check the connection to the domain controller:

  1. In the application web interface, select SettingsDomain authorization.
  2. In the Authorization type drop-down list, select AD/ADFS.
  3. In the Test connection settings block, select the relevant secret in the User credentials field.

    If necessary, you can create a new secret by clicking the AddSecret button or change the settings of an existing secret by clicking the ChangeSecret button.

    The following formats for specifying a user are available in the User field: UserPrincipalName and domain\user.

  4. Click Test.

    After clicking the Test button, the system tests the connection with the domain and returns a notification with the test results. The system does not check if the users can log in or if the user group is configured correctly.

For domain authentication, add the groups for the KUMA user roles.

You can specify the groups only for the roles that require the configuration of domain authentication. You can leave the rest of the fields empty.

To add groups of user roles:

  1. In the application web interface, select SettingsDomain authorization.
  2. In the Role groups settings block, click the Add role groups button.
  3. In the Tenant drop-down list, select the tenant of the users for whom you want to configure domain authentication.
  4. In the fields for the following roles, specify the DistinguishedName of the domain group. The users of this domain group must have the capability to perform authentication with their domain accounts:
    • Operator.
    • First line analyst.
    • Analyst.
    • Administrator.

    Group input example: CN=KUMA team,OU=Groups,OU=Clients,DC=test,DC=domain.

    You can specify only one domain group for each role. If you need to specify multiple groups, you must repeat steps 2–4 for each group while indicating the same tenant.

  5. If necessary, repeat steps 2–4 for each tenant for which you want to configure domain authentication with the following roles: operator, first line analyst, analyst, and tenant administrator.
  6. Click the Save button.

The groups of user roles will be added. The defined settings will be applied the next time the user logs in to the KUMA web interface.

After the first authentication of the user, information about this user is displayed under SettingsUsers. The Login and Password fields received from the domain cannot be edited. The user role will also be unavailable for editing. To edit a role, you will have to change the user role groups. Changes to a role are applied after the next authentication of the user. The user continues working under the current role until the current session expires.

If the user name or email address is changed in the domain account properties, these changes must be manually made in the KUMA account.

Page top

[Topic 244876]

Configuring connection between KUMA and Active Directory Federation Services

To configure domain authentication in KUMA and ensure that users can log in to KUMA using their accounts without specifying a user name and password, first create a connection group and configure the rules in ADFS or make sure that the necessary connection groups and rules already exist.

After configuration, the Sign in via ADFS button appears on the KUMA login page.

The Sign in via ADFS button is hidden on the KUMA login page in the following conditions:

  • The FreeIPA option is selected in the Authorization type drop-down list.
  • The AD/ADFS option is selected in the Authorization type drop-down list and the settings for ADFS are not specified or the Disabled check box is selected for ADFS settings.

You can connect only to one ADFS domain. To do so, you must configure a connection to the domain controller.

To configure a connection to an ADFS domain controller:

  1. In the application web interface, select SettingsDomain authorization.
  2. In the Authorization type drop-down list, select AD/ADFS.
  3. In the Active Directory Federation Services settings block, in the Client ID field, enter the KUMA ID from the Client ID field in the ADFS.
  4. In the Relying party identifier field, enter the KUMA ID from the Relying party identifiers field in the ADFS.
  5. Enter the Connect Metadata URI from the Connect Metadata URI field. This parameter consists of the host where the ADFS resides (https://adfs.example.com), and the endpoint setting (/adfs/.well-known/openid-configuration).

    For example, https://adfs.example.com/adfs/.well-known/openid-configuration).

  6. Enter the ADFS redirect URL from the Redirect URL field in the ADFS. The value of the Redirect URL field in the ADFS is defined when the Application group is configured. In the ADFS, you must indicate the KUMA FQDN and the </sso-callback> substring. In KUMA, the URL must be indicated without the substring, for example: https://kuma-example:7220/
  7. If you want to configure domain authentication for a user with the KUMA general administrator role, use the General administrators group field to specify the DistinguishedName of the Active Directory Federation Services group containing the user.

    If the user belongs to several groups within the same tenant, the role with the least privileges is used.

    Filter input example: CN=KUMA team,OU=Groups,OU=Clients,DC=test,DC=domain.

  8. Click the Save button.

A connection with the Active Directory Federation Services domain controller is now configured.

For domain authentication, add the groups for the KUMA user roles.

You can specify the groups only for the roles that require the configuration of domain authentication. You can leave the rest of the fields empty.

To add groups of user roles:

  1. In the application web interface, select SettingsDomain authorization.
  2. In the Role groups settings block, click the Add role groups button.
  3. In the Tenant drop-down list, select the tenant of the users for whom you want to configure domain authentication.
  4. In the fields for the following roles, specify the DistinguishedName of the domain group. The users of this domain group must have the capability to perform authentication with their domain accounts:
    • Operator.
    • First line analyst.
    • Analyst.
    • Administrator.

    Group input example: CN=KUMA team,OU=Groups,OU=Clients,DC=test,DC=domain.

    You can specify only one domain group for each role. If you need to specify multiple groups, you must repeat steps 2–4 for each group while indicating the same tenant.

  5. If necessary, repeat steps 2–4 for each tenant for which you want to configure domain authentication with the following roles: operator, first line analyst, analyst, and tenant administrator.
  6. Click the Save button.

The groups of user roles will be added. The defined settings will be applied the next time the user logs in to the KUMA web interface.

After the first authentication of the user, information about this user is displayed under SettingsUsers. The Login and Password fields received from the domain cannot be edited. The user role will also be unavailable for editing. To edit a role, you will have to change the user role groups. Changes to a role are applied after the next authentication of the user. The user continues working under the current role until the current session expires.

If the user name or email address is changed in the domain account properties, these changes must be manually made in the KUMA account.

Page top

[Topic 245272]

Configuring connection in Active Directory Federation Services

This section provides instructions on how to create a new connection group and configure rules for the created connection group in Active Directory Federation Services (ADFS).

The ADFS role must already be configured on the server.

Creating a new connection group

  1. In Server Manager, in the Tools menu, select ADFS Management.

    In ADFS, select the Application groups section and in the Actions section click Add Application Group.

  2. In the Add Application Group Wizard window that opens, in the Welcome section Name field, specify the name of the new connection group. Example: new-application-group.

    In the Template field, in the Client-Server applications group, select Native application accessing a web API.

    Click Next to proceed to the next step of creating and configuring a connection group.

  3. In the Native application section that opens, the Name and

     Client Identifier

    fields are filled in automatically.

    Specify the value of the Client Identifier field in KUMA, when configuring domain authentication.

    In the

     

    Redirect URI field, enter the URI for redirection from ADFS with the /sso-callback substring, and click Add. Example: https://adfs.example.com:7220/sso-callback

    Click Next to proceed to the next configuration step.

  4. In the Configure Web API section that opens, in the

    Identifiers

    field add the trusted party ID and click Add. It can be any arbitrary value. Example: test-demo

    Specify the value of the Identifier field in KUMA, in the Relying party identifiers field, when configuring domain authentication.

    Click Next to proceed to the next configuration step.

  5. In the Apply Access Control Policy section that opens, select the Permit everyone policy value.

    Click Next to proceed to the next configuration step.

  6. In the Configure Application Permissions section that opens, the Client application field is filled in automatically.

    In the Permitted scopes field, select the check box for the allatclaims and openid options.

    Click Next to proceed to the next configuration step.

  7. In the Summary section that opens, check the settings.

    If the settings are correct and you are ready to add a group, click Next.

A new group is added. You can proceed to configure the rules for the created group.

Adding rules for a connection group

  1. In Server Manager, in the Tools menu, select ADFS Management.

    In ADFS, select the Application groups section and select the required connection group from the list. Example: new-application-group.

  2. In the Application groups window, in the Actions section, click Properties.

    In the new-application-group Properties window that opens, in the Applications section, double-click new-application-group - Web API.

    In the new-application-group - Web API Properties window that opens, open the

    Issuance Transform Rules

    tab and click Add rule.

    In the Add Transform Claim Rule Wizard window that opens, in the Choose Rule Type section, select Send LDAP Attributes as Claims from the drop-down list.

    Click Next to proceed to the next configuration step.

  3. In the Configure Claim Rule section, specify the rule name in the Claim rule name field. Example: rule-name-01.

    In the Attribute store drop-down list, select Active directory.

    In the Mapping of LDAP attributes to outgoing claim types field, map the following fields:

    LDAP Attribute

    Outgoing Claim Type

    User-Principal-Name

    UserPrincipalName

    Display-Name

    displayName

    E-Mail-Addresses

    Mail

    Is-Member-Of-DL

    MemberOf

    Click Finish to complete the configuration.

  4. Go to the new-application-group - Web API Properties window, open the

    Issuance Transform Rules

    tab and click Add rule. In the Add Transform Claim Rule Wizard window that opens, in the Choose Rule Type section, select Send claims using a custom rule from the drop-down list.

    Click Finish to continue the configuration.

  5. In the Configure Claim Rule section, specify the rule name in the Claims rule name field. Example: rule-name-02.

    In the Custom rule field, specify the following settings: 

    c:[Type == "http://schemas.microsoft.com/ws/2008/06/identity/claims/windowsaccountname", Issuer == "AD AUTHORITY"]
    => issue(store = "Active Directory", types = ("ObjectGUID"), query = ";ObjectGUID;{0}", param = c.Value);

    Click Finish to complete the configuration.

  6. The system proceeds to the new-application-group - Web API Properties window and the Issuance Transform Rules tab.

    To apply the rules, on the Issuance Transform Rules tab that opens, click Apply or OK.

The configuration of groups and rules in ADFS is completed. You can proceed to configure domain authentication in KUMA.

Page top

[Topic 245317]

Troubleshooting the Access denied error

When you try to log in to KUMA using ADFS, the Access denied or Insufficient rights pop-up message may appear. The KUMA Core log shows the Data source certificate has been changed error.

This error indicates that the ADFS certificate is changed. To fix the error and resume domain authentication, update the certificate thumbprint saved in KUMA.

To update the certificate thumbprint on an Astra Linux or Oracle Linux host:

  1. Contact Technical support to obtain the adfs_fingerprint_changer_tool binary file.
  2. Place the received adfs_fingerprint_changer_tool binary file in any folder on the host with the KUMA Core. For example, /root/kuma-ansible-installer.
  3. On the host with the KUMA Core, start the command line interpreter and use the cd command to go to the folder containing the adfs_fingerprint_changer_tool file.

    For example, you can enter the following command and press Enter:

    cd /root/kuma-ansible-installer

  4. To grant the permissions to run a binary file and run the binary file, sequentially execute the following commands:

    chmod +x adfs_fingerprint_changer_tool

    ./adfs_fingerprint_changer_tool

To update the certificate thumbprint on a Kubernetes host:

  1. Contact Technical support to obtain the adfs_fingerprint_changer_tool binary file.
  2. Place the received adfs_fingerprint_changer_tool binary file in any folder on the computer of an administrator with access to the Kubernetes cluster and execute the following commands:

    k0s kubectl cp <path to adfs_fingerprint_changer_tool> $(k0s kubectl get pod -l app=core -n kuma -o name | cut -d/ -f2):/tmp/ -c mongodb -n kuma

    k0s kubectl exec $(k0s kubectl get pod -l app=core -n kuma -o name) -c mongodb -n kuma -- bash -c "chmod a+x /tmp/adfs_fingerprint_changer_tool && /tmp/adfs_fingerprint_changer_tool"

After you run the binary file, the certificate thumbprint is updated and the domain authentication by means of ADFS is again available.

Page top

[Topic 221777]

RuCERT integration

In the KUMA web interface, you can create a connection to the National Computer Incident Response & Coordination Center Incidents (hereinafter referred to as "RuCERT"). This will let you export incidents registered by KUMA to RuCERT. Integration is configured under SettingsRuCERT in the KUMA web interface.

Data in KUMA and RuCERT is synchronized every 5-10 minutes.

To create a connection to RuCERT:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, open SettingsRuCERT.
  2. In the URL field, enter the URL for accessing RuCERT.
  3. In the Token settings block, create or select an existing secret with the API token that was issued to your organization for a connection to RuCERT:
    • If you already have a secret, you can select it from the drop-down list.
    • If you want to create a new secret:
      1. Click the AddResource button and specify the following settings:
        • Name (required)—unique name of the service you are creating. The name must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
        • Token (required)—token that was issued to your organization for a connection to RuCERT.
        • Description—service description: up to 256 Unicode characters.
      2. Click Save.

      The secret containing the token for connecting to RuCERT will be created. It is saved under ResourcesSecrets and is owned by the main tenant.

    The selected secret can be changed by clicking on the EditResource button.

  4. In the Affected system function drop-down list, select the area of activity of your organization.

    Available company business sectors

    • Nuclear energy
    • Banking and other financial market sectors
    • Mining
    • Federal/municipal government
    • Healthcare
    • Metallurgy
    • Science
    • Defense industry
    • Education
    • Aerospace industry
    • Communication
    • Mass media
    • Fuel and power
    • Transportation
    • Chemical industry
    • Other
  5. In the Company field, indicate the name of your company. This data will be forwarded to RuCERT when incidents are exported.
  6. Use the Location drop-down list to specify where your company is located. This data will be forwarded to RuCERT when incidents are exported.
  7. If necessary, under Proxy, create or select an existing proxy server that must be used when connecting to RuCERT.
  8. Click Save.

KUMA is now integrated with RuCERT. Now you can export incidents to it. You can click the Test connection button to make sure that a connection with RuCERT is established.

You can use the Disabled check box to enable or disable integration.

Possible errors

If the "https://lk.cert.gov.ru/api/v2/incidents? x509: certificate signed by unknown authority" error is returned when you configure integration with RuCERT, use commands of your operating system to install and trust the following certificates of intermediate certification authorities to the KUMA Core server:

For details on installing certificates, refer to the vendor documentation for your operating system.

After installing the certificate, restart the Core server and continue configuring the integration with RuCERT.

See also:

Interaction with RuCERT

Page top

[Topic 232020]

Integration with Security Vision Incident Response Platform

Security Vision Incident Response Platform (hereinafter referred to as Security Vision IRP) is a software platform used for automation of monitoring, processing, and responding to information security incidents. It aggregates cyberthreat data from various sources into a single database for further analysis and investigation to facilitate incident response capabilities.

Security Vision IRP can be integrated with KUMA. After configuring integration in Security Vision IRP, you can perform the following tasks:

  • Request information about alerts from KUMA. In Security Vision IRP, incidents are created based on received data.
  • Send requests to KUMA to close alerts.

Integration is implemented by using the KUMA REST API. On the Security Vision IRP side, integration is carried out by using the preconfigured Kaspersky KUMA connector. Contact your Security Vision IRP vendor to learn more about the methods and conditions for obtaining a Kaspersky KUMA connector.

Working with Security Vision IRP incidents

Security Vision IRP incidents generated from KUMA alert data can be viewed in Security Vision IRP under IncidentsIncidents (2 lines)All incidents (2 lines). Events related to KUMA alerts are logged in each Security Vision IRP incident. Imported events can be viewed on the Response tab.

KUMA alert imported as Security Vision IRP incident

commandSV

Security Vision IRP incident that was created based on KUMA alert

incidentSV-2

Events from KUMA alert that were imported to Security Vision IRP

In this section

Configuring integration in KUMA

Configuring integration in Security Vision IRP

See also:

About alerts

About events

REST API

Page top

[Topic 232289]

Configuring integration in KUMA

To configure KUMA integration with Security Vision IRP, you must configure authorization of API requests in KUMA. To do so, you need to create a token for the KUMA user on whose behalf the API requests will be processed on KUMA side.

A token can be generated in your account profile. Users with the General Administrator role can generate tokens in the accounts of other users. You can always generate a new token.

To generate a token in your account profile:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, click the user account name in the lower-left corner of the window and click the Profile button in the opened menu.

    The User window with your user account parameters opens.

  2. Click the Generate token button.
  3. Copy the generated token displayed in the opened window. This will be required to configure Security Vision IRP.

    When the window is closed, the token is no longer displayed. If you did not copy the token before closing the window, you will have to generate a new token.

The generated token must be indicated in the Security Vision IRP connector settings.

See also:

Configuring integration in Security Vision IRP

Page top

[Topic 232073]

Configuring integration in Security Vision IRP

Configuration of integration in Security Vision IRP consists of importing and configuring a connector. If necessary, you can also change other Security Vision IRP settings related to KUMA data processing, such as the data processing schedule and worker.

For more detailed information about configuring Security Vision IRP, please refer to the product documentation.

In this section

Importing and configuring a connector

Configuring the handler, schedule, and worker process

See also:

Configuring integration in KUMA

Page top

[Topic 232293]

Importing and configuring a connector

Adding a connector in Security Vision IRP

Integration of Security Vision IRP and KUMA is carried out by using the Kaspersky KUMA connector. Contact your Security Vision IRP vendor to learn more about the methods and conditions for obtaining a Kaspersky KUMA connector.

To import a Kaspersky KUMA connector into Security Vision IRP:

  1. In Security Vision IRP, open SettingsConnectorsConnectors.

    You will see a list of connectors that have been added to Security Vision IRP.

  2. At the top of the screen, click the import button and select the ZIP archive containing the Kaspersky KUMA connector.

The connector has been imported into Security Vision IRP and is ready to be configured.

Configuring a connector for a connection to KUMA

To use a connector, you need to configure its connection to KUMA.

To configure a connection to KUMA in Security Vision IRP using the Kaspersky KUMA connector:

  1. In Security Vision IRP, open SettingsConnectorsConnectors.

    You will see a list of connectors that have been added to your Security Vision IRP.

  2. Select the Kaspersky KUMA connector.

    The general settings of the connector will be displayed.

  3. Under Connector settings, click the Edit button.

    The connector configuration will be displayed.

  4. In the URL field, specify the address and port of KUMA. For example, kuma.example.com:7223.
  5. In the Token field, specify KUMA user API token.

The connection to KUMA has been configured in the Security Vision IRP connector.

Security Vision IRP connector settings

connectorSV-config

Configuring commands for interaction with KUMA in the Security Vision IRP connector

You can use Security Vision IRP to receive information about KUMA alerts (referred to as incidents in Security Vision IRP terminology) and send requests to close these alerts. To perform these actions, you need to configure the appropriate commands in the Security Vision IRP connector.

The instructions below describe how to add commands to receive and close alerts. However, if you need to implement more complex logic of interaction between Security Vision IRP and KUMA, you can similarly create your own commands containing other API requests.

To configure a command to receive alert information from KUMA:

  1. In Security Vision IRP, open SettingsConnectorsConnectors.

    You will see a list of connectors that have been added to Security Vision IRP.

  2. Select the Kaspersky KUMA connector.

    The general settings of the connector will be displayed.

  3. Click the +Command button.

    The command creation window opens.

  4. Specify the command settings for receiving alerts:
    • In the Name field, enter the command name: Receive incidents.
    • In the Request type drop-down list, select GET.
    • In the Called method field, enter the API request to search for alerts:

      api/v1/alerts/?withEvents&status=new

    • Under Request headers, in the Name field, indicate authorization. In the Value field, indicate Bearer <token>.
    • In the Content type drop-down list, select application/json.
  5. Save the command and close the window.

The connector command is configured. When this command is executed, the Security Vision IRP connector will query KUMA for information about all alerts with the New status and all events related to those alerts. The received data will be relayed to the Security Vision IRP handler, which will create Security Vision IRP incidents based on this data. If an already imported alert is updated in KUMA with additional information, new data will be imported to Security Vision IRP incident.

To configure a command to close KUMA alerts:

  1. In Security Vision IRP, open SettingsConnectorsConnectors.

    You will see a list of connectors that have been added to Security Vision IRP.

  2. Select the Kaspersky KUMA connector.

    The general settings of the connector will be displayed.

  3. Click the +Command button.

    The command creation window will be displayed.

  4. Specify the command settings for receiving alerts:
    • In the Name field, enter the command name: Close incident.
    • In the Request type drop-down list, select POST.
    • In the Called method field, enter API request to close an alert:

      api/v1/alerts/close

    • In the Request field, enter the contents of the sent API request:

      {"id":"<Alert ID>","reason":"responded"}

      You can create multiple commands for different reasons to close alerts, such as responded, incorrect data, and incorrect correlation rule.

    • Under Request headers, in the Name field, indicate authorization. In the Value field, indicate Bearer <token>.
    • In the Content type drop-down list, select application/json.
  5. Save the command and close the window.

The connector command is configured. When this command is executed, the incident will be closed in Security Vision IRP and the corresponding alert will be closed in KUMA.

Creating commands in Security Vision IRP

commandSV

After configuring the connector, KUMA alerts will be sent to the platform as Security Vision IRP incidents. Then you need to configure incident handling in Security Vision IRP based on the security policies of your organization.

Page top

[Topic 232323]

Configuring the handler, schedule, and worker process

Security Vision IRP handler

The Security Vision IRP handler receives KUMA alert data from the Security Vision IRP connector and creates Security Vision IRP incidents based on this data. A predefined KUMA (Incidents) handler is used for processing data. The settings of the KUMA (Incidents) handler are available in Security Vision IRP under SettingsEvent processingEvent handlers:

  • The rules for processing KUMA alerts can be viewed in the handler settings on the Normalization tab.
  • The available actions when creating new objects can be viewed in the handler settings on the Actions tab for creating objects of the Incident (2 lines) type.

Handler run schedule

The connector and handler are started according to a predefined KUMA schedule. This schedule can be configured in Security Vision IRP under SettingsEvent processingSchedule:

  • In the Connector settings block, you can configure the settings for starting the connector.
  • In the Handler settings block, you can configure the settings for starting the handler.

Security Vision IRP worker process

The life cycle of Security Vision IRP incidents created based on KUMA alerts follows the preconfigured Incident processing (2 lines) worker. The worker can be configured in Security Vision IRP under SettingsWorkersWorker templates: select the Incident processing (2 lines) worker and click the transaction or state that you need to change.

Page top

[Topic 233668]

Kaspersky Industrial CyberSecurity for Networks integration

Kaspersky Industrial CyberSecurity for Networks (hereinafter referred to as "KICS for Networks") is an application designed to protect the industrial enterprise infrastructure from information security threats, and to ensure uninterrupted operation. The application analyzes industrial network traffic to identify deviations in the values of process parameters, detect signs of network attacks, and monitor the operation and current state of network devices.

KICS for Networks version 4.0 or later can be integrated with KUMA. After configuring integration, you can perform the following tasks in KUMA:

  • Import asset information from KICS for Networks to KUMA.
  • Send asset status change commands from KUMA to KICS for Networks.

Unlike KUMA, KICS for Networks refers to assets as devices.

The integration of KICS for Networks and KUMA must be configured in both applications:

  1. In KICS for Networks, you need to create a KUMA connector and save the communication data package of this connector.
  2. In KUMA, the communication data package of the connector is used to create a connection to KICS for Networks.

The integration described in this section applies to importing asset information. KICS for Networks can also be configured to send events to KUMA. To do so, you need to create a SIEM/Syslog connector in KICS for Networks, and configure a collector on the KUMA side.

In this section

Configuring integration in KICS for Networks

Configuring integration in KUMA

Enabling and disabling integration with KICS for Networks

Changing the data update frequency

Special considerations when importing asset information from KICS for Networks

Changing the status of a KICS for Networks asset

Page top

[Topic 233670]

Configuring integration in KICS for Networks

The program supports integration with KICS for Networks version 4.0 or later.

It is recommended to configure integration of KICS for Networks and KUMA after ending Process Control rules learning mode. For more details, please refer to the documentation on KICS for Networks.

On the KICS for Networks side, integration configuration consists of creating a KUMA-type connector. In KICS for Networks, connectors are specialized application modules that enable KICS for Networks to exchange data with recipient systems, including KUMA. For more details on creating connectors, please refer to the documentation on KICS for Networks.

When a connector is added to KICS for Networks, a communication data package is automatically created for this connector. This is an encrypted configuration file for connecting to KICS for Networks that is used when configuring integration on the KUMA side.

Page top

[Topic 233669]

Configuring integration in KUMA

It is recommended to configure integration of KICS for Networks and KUMA after ending Process Control rules learning mode. For more details, please refer to the documentation on KICS for Networks.

To configure integration with KICS for Networks in KUMA:

  1. Open the KUMA web interface and select SettingsKaspersky Industrial CyberSecurity for Networks.

    The Kaspersky Industrial CyberSecurity for Networks integration by tenant window opens.

  2. Select or create a tenant for which you want to create an integration with KICS for Networks.

    The Kaspersky Industrial CyberSecurity for Networks integration window opens.

  3. Click the Communication data package field and select the communication data package that was created in KICS for Networks.
  4. In the Communication data package password field, enter the password of the communication data package.
  5. Select the Enable response check box if you want to change the statuses of KICS for Networks assets by using KUMA response rules.
  6. Click Save.

Integration with KICS for Networks is configured in KUMA, and the window shows the IP address of the node where the KICS for Networks connector will be running and its ID.

Page top

[Topic 233717]

Enabling and disabling integration with KICS for Networks

To enable or disable KICS for Networks integration for a tenant:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, open SettingsKaspersky Industrial CyberSecurity for Networks and select the tenant for which you want to enable or disable KICS for Networks integration.

    The Kaspersky Industrial CyberSecurity for Networks integration window opens.

  2. Select or clear the Disabled check box.
  3. Click Save.
Page top

[Topic 233718]

Changing the data update frequency

KUMA queries KICS for Networks to update its asset information. This occurs:

  • Immediately after creating a new integration.
  • Immediately after changing the settings of an existing integration.
  • According to a regular schedule every several hours. This occurs every 3 hours by default.
  • Whenever a user creates a task for updating asset data.

When querying KICS for Networks, a task is created in the Task manager section of the KUMA web interface.

To edit the schedule for importing information about KICS for Networks assets:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, open SettingsKaspersky Industrial CyberSecurity for Networks.
  2. Select the relevant tenant.

    The Kaspersky Industrial CyberSecurity for Networks integration window opens.

  3. In the Data refresh interval field, specify the required frequency in hours. The default value is 3.

The import schedule has been changed.

See also:

Special considerations when importing asset information from KICS for Networks

Page top

[Topic 233699]

Special considerations when importing asset information from KICS for Networks

Importing assets

Assets are imported according to the asset import rules. Only assets with the Authorized and Unauthorized statuses are imported.

KICS for Networks assets are identified by a combination of the following parameters:

  • IP address of the KICS for Networks instance with which the integration is configured.
  • KICS for Networks connector ID is used to configure the integration.
  • ID assigned to the asset (or "device") in the KICS for Networks instance.

Importing vulnerability information

When importing assets, KUMA also receives information about active vulnerabilities in KICS for Networks. If a vulnerability has been flagged as Remediated or Negligible in KICS for Networks, the information about this vulnerability is deleted from KUMA during the next import.

Information about asset vulnerabilities is displayed in the localization language of KICS for Networks in the Asset details window in the Vulnerabilities settings block.

In KICS for Networks, vulnerabilities are referred to as risks and are divided into several types. All types of risks are imported into KUMA.

Imported data storage period

If information about a previously imported asset is no longer received from KICS for Networks, the asset is deleted after 30 days.

Page top

[Topic 233750]

Changing the status of a KICS for Networks asset

After configuring integration, you can change the statuses of KICS for Networks assets from KUMA. Statuses can be changed either automatically or manually.

Asset statuses can be changed only if you enabled a response in the settings for connecting to KICS for Networks.

Manually changing the status of a KICS for Networks asset

Users with the General Administrator, Administrator, and Analyst roles in the tenants available to them can manually change the statuses of assets imported from KICS for Networks.

To manually change a KICS for Networks asset status:

  1. In the Assets section of the KUMA web interface, click the asset that you want to edit.

    The Asset details area opens in the right part of the window.

  2. In the Status in KICS for Networks drop-down list, select the status that you need to assign to the KICS for Networks asset. The Authorized or Unauthorized statuses are available.

The asset status is changed. The new status is displayed in KICS for Networks and in KUMA.

Automatically changing the status of a KICS for Networks asset

Automatic changes to the statuses of KICS for Networks assets are implemented using response rules. The rules must be added to the correlator, which will determine the conditions for triggering these rules.

Page top

[Topic 242818]

Kaspersky Automated Security Awareness Platform

Kaspersky Automated Security Awareness Platform (hereinafter also referred to as "ASAP") is an online learning platform that allows users to learn the rules of information security and threats related to it in their daily work, as well as to practice using real examples.

ASAP can be integrated with KUMA. After configuring integration, you can perform the following tasks in KUMA:

  • Change user learning groups.
  • View information about the courses taken by the users and the certificates they received.

Integration between ASAP and KUMA includes configuring API connection to ASAP. The process takes place in both solutions:

  1. In ASAP, create an authorization token and obtain an address for API requests.
  2. In KUMA, specify the address for API requests in ASAP, add an authorization token for API requests, and specify the email address of the ASAP administrator to receive notifications.

In this section

Creating a token in ASAP and getting a link for API requests

Configuring integration in KUMA

Viewing information about the users from ASAP and changing learning groups

Page top

[Topic 242820]

Creating a token in ASAP and getting a link for API requests

In order to be authorized, the API requests from KUMA to ASAP must be signed by a token created in ASAP. Only the company administrators can create tokens.

Creating a token

To create a token:

  1. Sign in to the ASAP web interface.
  2. In the Control panel section, click the Import and synchronization button, and then open the Open API tab.
  3. Click the New token button and select the API methods used for integration in the window that opens:
    • GET /openapi/v1/groups
    • POST /openapi/v1/report
    • PATCH /openapi/v1/user/:userid
  4. Click the Generate token button.
  5. Copy the token and save it in any convenient way. This token is required to configure integration in KUMA.

The token is not stored in the ASAP system in the open form. After you close the Get token window, the token is unavailable for viewing. If you close the window without copying the token, you will need to click the New token button again for the system to generate a new token.

The issued token is valid for 12 months. After this period, the token is revoked. The issued token is also revoked if it is not used for 6 months.

Getting a link for API requests

To get the link used in ASAP for API requests:

  1. Sign in to the ASAP web interface.
  2. In the Control panel section, click the Import and synchronization button, and then open the Open API tab.
  3. A link for accessing ASAP using the Open API is located at the bottom part of the window. Copy the link and save it in any convenient way. This link is required to configure integration in KUMA.
Page top

[Topic 242823]

Configuring integration in KUMA

To configure KUMA integration with ASAP:

  1. Open the KUMA web interface and select SettingsKaspersky Automated Security Awareness Platform.

    The Kaspersky Automated Security Awareness Platform window opens.

  2. In the Secret field click the AddResource button to create a secret of the token by entering the token received from ASAP:
    1. In the Name field, enter the name of the secret. Must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
    2. In the Token field, enter the authorization token for API requests to ASAP.
    3. If necessary, add the secret description in the Description field.
    4. Click Save.
  3. In the ASAP Open API URL field, specify the address used by ASAP for API requests.
  4. In the ASAP administrator email field, specify the email address of the ASAP administrator who receives notifications when users are added to the learning groups using KUMA.
  5. If necessary, in the Proxy drop-down list select the proxy server resource to be used to connect to ASAP.
  6. To disable or enable integration with ASAP, select or clear the Disabled check box.
  7. Click Save.

Integration with ASAP is configured in KUMA. When viewing information about alerts and incidents, you can select associated users to view which learning courses they have taken and to change their learning group.

Page top

[Topic 242830]

Viewing information about the users from ASAP and changing learning groups

After configuring the integration between ASAP and KUMA, the following information from ASAP becomes available in alerts and incidents when you view data about associated users:

  • The learning group to which the user belongs.
  • The trainings passed by the user.
  • The planned trainings and the current progress.
  • The received certificates.

To view data about the user from ASAP:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, in the Alerts or Incidents section, select the required alert or incident.
  2. In the Related users section, click the desired account.

    The Account details window opens on the right side of the screen.

  3. Select the ASAP courses details tab.

The window displays information about the user from ASAP.

You can change the learning group of a user in ASAP.

To change a user learning group in ASAP:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, in the Alerts or Incidents section, select the required alert or incident.
  2. In the Related users section, click the desired account.

    The Account details window opens on the right side of the screen.

  3. In the Assign ASAP group drop-down list, select the ASAP learning group you want to assign the user to.
  4. Click Apply.

The user is moved to the selected ASAP group, the ASAP company administrator is notified of the change in the learning group, and the study plan is recalculated for the selected learning group.

For details on learning groups and how to get started, refer to the ASAP documentation.

Page top

[Topic 258846]

Sending notifications to Telegram

This integration is an example and may require additional configuration depending on the versions used and the specifics of the infrastructure.
Compatibility is confirmed only for KUMA 2.0 and later.
The terms and conditions of premium technical support do not apply to this integration; support requests are processed without a guaranteed response time.

You can configure sending notifications to Telegram when KUMA correlation rules are triggered. This can reduce the response time to threats and, if necessary, make more persons informed.

Configure Telegram notifications involves the following steps:

  1. Creating and configuring a Telegram bot

    A special bot sends notifications about triggered correlation rules. It can send notifications to a private or group Telegram chat.

  2. Creating a script for sending notifications

    You must create a script and save it on the server where the correlator is installed.

  3. Configuring notifications in KUMA

    Configure a KUMA response rule that starts a script to send notifications and add this rule to the correlator.

In this section

Creating and configuring a Telegram bot

Creating a script for sending notifications

Configuring notifications in KUMA

Page top

[Topic 258850]

Creating and configuring a Telegram bot

To create and configure a Telegram bot:

  1. In the Telegram application, find the BotFather bot and open a chat with it.
  2. In the chat, click Start.
  3. Create a new bot using the following command:

    /newbot

  4. Enter the name of the bot.
  5. Enter the login name of the bot.

    The bot is created. You receive a link to the chat that looks like t.me/<bot login> and a token for contacting the bot.

  6. If you want to use the bot in a group chat, and not in private messages, edit privacy settings:
    1. In the BotFather chat, enter the command:

      /mybots

    2. Select the relevant bot from the list.
    3. Click Bot SettingsGroup Privacy and select Turn off.

      The bot can now send messages to group chats.

  7. To open a chat with the bot you created, use the t.me/<botlogin> link that you obtained at step 5, and click Start.
  8. If you want the bot to send private messages to the user:
    1. In the chat with the bot, send any message.
    2. Follow the https://t.me/getmyid_bot link and click Start.
    3. The response contains the Current chat ID. You need this value to configure the sending of messages.
  9. If you want the bot to send messages to the group chat:
    1. Add https://t.me/getmyid_bot to the group chat for receiving notifications from KUMA.

      The bot sends a message to the group chat, the message contains the Current chat ID value. You need this value to configure the sending of messages.

    2. Remove the bot from the group.
  10. Send a test message through the bot. To do so, paste the following link into the address bar of your browser:

    https://api.telegram.org/bot<token>/sendMessage?chat_id=<chat_id>&text=test

    where <token> is the value obtained at step 5, and <chat_id> is the value obtained at step 8 or 9.

As a result, a test message should appear in the personal or group chat, and the JSON in the browser response should be free of errors.

Page top

[Topic 258851]

Creating a script for sending notifications

To create a script:

  1. In the console of the server on which the correlator is installed, create a script file and add the following lines to it:

    #!/bin/bash

    set -eu

    CHAT_ID=<Current chat ID value obtained at step 8 or 9 of the Telegram bot setup instructions>

    TG_TOKEN=<token value obtained at step 5 of the Telegram bot setup instructions>

    RULE=$1

    TEXT="<b>$RULE</b> rule triggered."

    curl --data-urlencode "chat_id=$CHAT_ID" --data-urlencode "text=$TEXT" --data-urlencode "parse_mode=HTML" https://api.telegram.org/bot$TG_TOKEN/sendMessage

    If the correlator server does not have Internet access, you can use a proxy server:

    #!/bin/bash

    set -eu

    CHAT_ID=<Current chat ID value obtained at step 8 or 9 of the Telegram bot setup instructions>

    TG_TOKEN=<token value obtained at step 5 of the Telegram bot setup instructions>

    RULE=$1

    TEXT="<b>$RULE</b> rule triggered."

    PROXY=<address and port of the proxy server>

    curl --proxy $PROXY --data-urlencode "chat_id=$CHAT_ID" --data-urlencode "text=$TEXT" --data-urlencode "parse_mode=HTML" https://api.telegram.org/bot$TG_TOKEN/sendMessage

  2. Save the script to the correlator directory at /opt/kaspersky/kuma/correlator/<ID of the correlator that must respond to events>/scripts/.

    For information about obtaining the correlator ID, see the Getting service identifier section.

  3. Make the 'kuma' user the owner of the file and grant execution rights:

    chown kuma:kuma /opt/kaspersky/kuma/correlator/<ID of the correlator that must respond>/scripts/<script name>.sh

    chmod +x /opt/kaspersky/kuma/correlator/<ID of the correlator that must respond>/scripts/<script name>.sh

Page top

[Topic 258852]

Configuring sending notifications in KUMA

To configure the sending of KUMA notifications to Telegram:

  1. Create a response rule:
    1. In the KUMA web interface, select the ResourcesResponse rules section and click Add response rule.
    2. This opens the Create response rule window; in that window, in the Name field, enter the name of the rule.
    3. In the Tenant drop-down list, select the tenant that owns the resource.
    4. In the Type drop-down list, select Run script.
    5. In the Script name field, enter the name of the script.
    6. In the Script arguments field, enter {{.Name}}.

      This passes the name of the correlation event as the argument of the script.

    7. Click Save.
  2. Add the response rule to the correlator:
    1. In the ResourcesCorrelators section, select the correlator in whose folder you placed the created script for sending notifications.
    2. In the steps tree, select Response rules.
    3. Click Add.
    4. In the Response rule drop-down list, select the rule added at step 1 of these instructions.
    5. In the steps tree, select Setup validation.
    6. Click the Save and restart services button.
    7. Click the Save button.

Sending notifications about triggered KUMA rules to Telegram is configured.

See also:

Response rules for a custom script

Page top

[Topic 259114]

UserGate integration

This integration is an example and may require additional configuration depending on the versions used and the specifics of the infrastructure.
Compatibility is confirmed only for KUMA 2.0 or later and UserGate 6.0 or later.
The terms and conditions of premium technical support do not apply to this integration; support requests are processed without a guaranteed response time.

UserGate is a network infrastructure security solution that protects personal information from the risks of external intrusions, unauthorized access, viruses, and malware.

Integration with UserGate allows automatically blocking threats by IP address, URL, or domain name whenever KUMA response rules are triggered.

Configuring the integration involves the following steps:

  1. Configuring integration in UserGate
  2. Preparing a script for the response rule
  3. Configuring the KUMA response rule

In this section

Configuring integration in UserGate

Preparing a script for integration with UserGate

Configuring a response rule for integration with UserGate

Page top

[Topic 259137]

Configuring integration in UserGate

To configure integration in UserGate:

  1. Connect to the UserGate web interface under an administrator account.
  2. Go to UserGateAdministratorsAdministrator profiles, and click Add.
  3. In the Profile settings window, specify the profile name, for example, API .
  4. On the API Permissions tab, add read and write permissions for the following objects:
    • content
    • core
    • firewall
    • nlists
  5. Click Save.
  6. In the UserGateAdministrators section, click AddAdd local administrator.
  7. In the Administrator properties window, specify the login and password of the administrator.

    In the Administrator profile field, select the profile created at step 3.

  8. Click Save.
  9. In the address bar of your browser, after the address and port of UserGate, add ?features=zone-xml-rpc and press ENTER.
  10. Go to the NetworkZones section and for the zone of the interface that you want to use for API interaction, go to the Access Control tab and select the check box next to the XML-RPC for management service.

    If necessary, you can add the IP address of the KUMA correlator whose correlation rules must trigger blocking in UserGate, to the list of allowed addresses.

  11. Click Save.
Page top

[Topic 259221]

Preparing a script for integration with UserGate

To prepare a script for use:

  1. Copy the ID of the correlator whose correlation rules you want to trigger blocking of URL, IP address, or domain name in UserGate:
    1. In the KUMA web interface, go to the ResourcesActive services.
    2. Select the check box next to the correlator whose ID you want to obtain, and click Copy ID.

      The correlator ID is copied to the clipboard.

  2. Download the script:

    https://box.kaspersky.com/d/2dfd1d677c7547a7ac1e/

  3. Open the script file and in the Enter UserGate Parameters section, in the login and password parameters, specify the credentials of the UserGate administrator account that was created at step 7 of configuring the integration in UserGate.
  4. Place the downloaded script on the KUMA correlator server at the following path: /opt/kaspersky/kuma/correlator/<correlator ID from step 1>/scripts/.
  5. Connect to the correlator server via SSH and go to the path from step 4:

    cd /opt/kaspersky/kuma/correlator/<correlator ID from step 1>/scripts/

  6. Run the following command:

    chmod +x ug.py && chown kuma:kuma ug.py

The script is ready to use.

Page top

[Topic 259222]

Configuring a response rule for integration with UserGate

To configure a response rule:

  1. Create a response rule:
    1. In the KUMA web interface, select the ResourcesResponse rules section and click Add response rule.
    2. This opens the Create response rule window; in that window, in the Name field, enter the name of the rule.
    3. In the Tenant drop-down list, select the tenant that owns the resource.
    4. In the Type drop-down list, select Run script.
    5. In the Script name field, enter the name of the script. ug.py.
    6. In the Script arguments field, specify:
      • one of the operations depending on the type of the object being blocked:
        • blockurl to block access by URL
        • blockip to block access by IP address
        • blockdomain to block access by domain name
      • -i {{<KUMA field from which the value of the blocked object must be taken, depending on the operation>}}

        Example:

        blockurl -i {{.RequetstUrl}}

    7. In the Conditions section, add conditions corresponding to correlation rules that require blocking in UserGate when triggered.
    8. Click Save.
  2. Add the response rule to the correlator:
    1. In the ResourcesCorrelators section, select the correlator that must respond and in whose directory you placed the script.
    2. In the steps tree, select Response rules.
    3. Click Add.
    4. In the Response rule drop-down list, select the rule added at step 1 of these instructions.
    5. In the steps tree, select Setup validation.
    6. Click Save and reload services.
    7. Click the Save button.

The response rule is linked to the correlator and ready to use.

Page top

[Topic 259321]

Integration with Kaspersky Web Traffic Security

This integration is an example and may require additional configuration depending on the versions used and the specifics of the infrastructure.
Compatibility is confirmed only for KUMA 2.0 or later and Kaspersky Web Traffic Security 6.0 or later.
The terms and conditions of premium technical support do not apply to this integration; support requests are processed without a guaranteed response time.

You can configure integration with the Kaspersky Web Traffic Security web traffic analysis and filtering system (hereinafter also referred to as "KWTS").

Configuring the integration involves creating KUMA response rules that allow running KWTS tasks. Tasks must be created in advance in the KWTS web interface.

Configuring the integration involves the following steps:

  1. Configuring integration in KWTS
  2. Preparing a script for the response rule
  3. Configuring the KUMA response rule

In this section

Configuring integration in KWTS

Preparing a script for integration with KWTS

Configuring a response rule for integration with KWTS

Page top

[Topic 259340]

Configuring integration in KWTS

To prepare the integration in KWTS:

  1. Connect to the KWTS web interface under an administrator account and create a role with permissions to view and create/edit a rule.

    For more details on creating a role, see the Kaspersky Web Traffic Security Help.

  2. Assign the created role to a user with NTML authentication.

    You can use a local administrator account instead.

  3. In the Rules section, go to the Access tab and click Add rule.
  4. In the Action drop-down list, select Block.
  5. In the Traffic filtering drop-down list, select the URL value, and in the field on the right, enter a nonexistent or known malicious address.
  6. In the Name field, enter the name of the rule.
  7. Enable the rule using the Status toggle switch.
  8. Click Add.
  9. In the KWTS web interface, open the rule you just created.
  10. Make a note of the ID value that is displayed at the end of the page address in the browser address bar.

    You must use this value when configuring the response rule in KUMA.

The integration is prepared on the KWTS side.

Page top

[Topic 259341]

Preparing a script for integration with KWTS

To prepare a script for use:

  1. Copy the ID of the correlator whose correlation rules you want to trigger blocking of URL, IP address, or domain name in KWTS:
    1. In the KUMA web interface, go to the ResourcesActive services.
    2. Select the check box next to the correlator whose ID you want to obtain, and click Copy ID.

      The correlator ID is copied to the clipboard.

  2. Download the script and library:

    https://box.kaspersky.com/d/2dfd1d677c7547a7ac1e/

  3. Place the downloaded script on the KUMA correlator server at the following path: /opt/kaspersky/kuma/correlator/<correlator ID from step 1>/scripts/.
  4. Connect to the correlator server via SSH and go to the path from step 3:

    cd /opt/kaspersky/kuma/correlator/<correlator ID from step 1>/scripts/

  5. Run the following command:

    chmod +x kwts.py kwtsWebApiV6.py && chown kuma:kuma kwts.py kwtsWebApiV6.py

The script is ready to use.

Page top

[Topic 259342]

Configuring a response rule for integration with KWTS

To configure a response rule:

  1. Create a response rule:
    1. In the KUMA web interface, select the ResourcesResponse rules section and click Add response rule.
    2. This opens the Create response rule window; in that window, in the Name field, enter the name of the rule.
    3. In the Tenant drop-down list, select the tenant that owns the resource.
    4. In the Type drop-down list, select Run script.
    5. In the Script name field, enter the name of the script, kwts.py.
    6. In the Script arguments field, specify:
      • --host — address of the KWTS server.
      • --username — name of the user account created in KWTS or local administrator.
      • --password — KWTS user account password.
      • --rule_id — ID of the rule created in KWTS.
      • Specify one of the options depending on the type of the object being blocked:
        • --url — specify the field of the KUMA event from which you want to obtain the URL, for example, {{.RequestUrl}}.
        • --ip — specify the field of the KUMA event from which you want to obtain the IP address, for example, {{.DestinationAddress}}.
        • --domain — specify the field of the KUMA event from which you want to obtain the domain name, for example, {{.DestinationHostName}}.
      • --ntlm — specify this option if the KWTS user was created with NTLM authentication.

        Example:

        --host <address> --username <user> --password <pass> --rule_id <id> --url {{.RequestUrl}}

    7. In the Conditions section, add conditions corresponding to correlation rules that require blocking in KWTS when triggered.
    8. Click Save.
  2. Add the response rule to the correlator:
    1. In the ResourcesCorrelators section, select the correlator that must respond and in whose directory you placed the script.
    2. In the steps tree, select Response rules.
    3. Click Add.
    4. In the Response rule drop-down list, select the rule added at step 1 of these instructions.
    5. In the steps tree, select Setup validation.
    6. Click Save and reload services.
    7. Click the Save button.

The response rule is linked to the correlator and ready to use.

Page top

[Topic 259353]

Integration with Kaspersky Secure Mail Gateway

This integration is an example and may require additional configuration depending on the versions used and the specifics of the infrastructure.
Compatibility is confirmed only for KUMA 2.0 or later and Kaspersky Secure Mail Gateway 2.0 or later.
The terms and conditions of premium technical support do not apply to this integration; support requests are processed without a guaranteed response time.

You can configure integration with the Kaspersky Secure Mail Gateway mail traffic analysis and filtering system (hereinafter also referred to as "KSMG").

Configuring the integration involves creating KUMA response rules that allow running KSMG tasks. Tasks must be created in advance in the KSMG web interface.

Configuring the integration involves the following steps:

  1. Configuring integration in KSMG
  2. Preparing a script for the response rule
  3. Configuring the KUMA response rule

In this section

Configuring integration in KSMG

Preparing a script for integration with KSMG

Configuring a response rule for integration with KSMG

Page top

[Topic 259354]

Configuring integration in KSMG

To prepare the integration in KSMG:

  1. Connect to the KSMG web interface under an administrator account and create a role with permissions to view and create/edit a rule.

    For more details on creating a role, see the Kaspersky Secure Mail Gateway Help.

  2. Assign the created role to a user with NTML authentication.

    You can use the 'Administrator' local administrator account.

  3. In the Rules section, click Create.
  4. In the left pane, select the General section.
  5. Enable the rule using the Status toggle switch.
  6. In the Rule name field, enter the name of the new rule.
  7. Under Mode, select one of the message processing options that meets the criteria of this rule.
  8. Under Sender on the Email addresses tab, enter a nonexistent or known malicious sender address.
  9. Under Recipient on the Email addresses tab, specify the relevant recipients or the "*" character to select all recipients.
  10. Click the Save button.
  11. In the KSMG web interface, open the rule you just created.
  12. Make a note of the ID value that is displayed at the end of the page address in the browser address bar.

    You must use this value when configuring the response rule in KUMA.

The integration is prepared on the KSMG side.

Page top

[Topic 259355]

Preparing a script for integration with KSMG

To prepare a script for use:

  1. Copy the ID of the correlator whose correlation rules must trigger the blocking of the IP address or email address of the message sender in KSMG:
    1. In the KUMA web interface, go to the ResourcesActive services.
    2. Select the check box next to the correlator whose ID you want to obtain, and click Copy ID.

      The correlator ID is copied to the clipboard.

  2. Download the script and library:

    https://box.kaspersky.com/d/2dfd1d677c7547a7ac1e/

  3. Place the downloaded script on the KUMA correlator server at the following path: /opt/kaspersky/kuma/correlator/<correlator ID from step 1>/scripts/.
  4. Connect to the correlator server via SSH and go to the path from step 3:

    cd /opt/kaspersky/kuma/correlator/<correlator ID from step 1>/scripts/

  5. Run the following command:

    chmod +x ksmg.py ksmgWebApiV2.py && chown kuma:kuma ksmg.py ksmgWebApiV2.py

The script is ready to use.

Page top

[Topic 259356]

Configuring a response rule for integration with KSMG

To configure a response rule:

  1. Create a response rule:
    1. In the KUMA web interface, select the ResourcesResponse rules section and click Add response rule.
    2. This opens the Create response rule window; in that window, in the Name field, enter the name of the rule.
    3. In the Tenant drop-down list, select the tenant that owns the resource.
    4. In the Type drop-down list, select Run script.
    5. In the Script name field, enter the name of the script, ksmg.py.
    6. In the Script arguments field, specify:
      • --host — address of the KSMG server.
      • --username — name of the user account created in KSMG.

        You can specify the Administrator account.

      • --password — KSMG user account password.
      • --rule_id — ID of the rule created in KSMG.
      • Specify one of the options depending on the type of the object being blocked:
        • --email — specify the field of the KUMA event from which you want to obtain the URL, for example, {{.SourceUserName}}.
        • --ip — specify the field of the KUMA event from which you want to obtain the IP address, for example, {{.SourceAddress}}.
      • --ntlm — specify this option if the KSMG user was created with NTLM authentication.

        Example:

        --host <address> --username <user> --password <pass> --ntlm --rule_id <id> --email {{.SourceUserName}}

    7. In the Conditions section, add conditions corresponding to the correlation rules that when triggered require blocking the IP address or email address of the message sender in KSMG.
    8. Click Save.
  2. Add the response rule to the correlator:
    1. In the ResourcesCorrelators section, select the correlator that must respond and in whose directory you placed the script.
    2. In the steps tree, select Response rules.
    3. Click Add.
    4. In the Response rule drop-down list, select the rule added at step 1 of these instructions.
    5. In the steps tree, select Setup validation.
    6. Click Save and reload services.
    7. Click the Save button.

The response rule is linked to the correlator and ready to use.

Page top

[Topic 259370]

Importing asset information from RedCheck

This integration is an example and may require additional configuration depending on the versions used and the specifics of the infrastructure.
Compatibility is confirmed only for KUMA 2.0 or later and RedCheck 2.6.8 or later.
The terms and conditions of premium technical support do not apply to this integration; support requests are processed without a guaranteed response time.

RedCheck is a system for monitoring and managing the information security of an organization.

You can import asset information from RedCheck network device scan reports into KUMA.

Import is available from simple "Vulnerabilities" and "Inventory" reports in CSV format, grouped by hosts.

Imported assets are displayed in the KUMA web interface in the Assets section. If necessary, you can edit the settings of assets.

Data is imported through the API using the redcheck-tool.py utility. The utility requires Python 3.6 or later and the following libraries:

  • csv
  • re
  • json
  • requests
  • argparse
  • sys

To import asset information from a RedCheck report:

  1. Generate a network asset scan report in RedCheck in CSV format and copy the report file to the server where the script is located.

    For more details about scan tasks and output file formats, refer to the RedCheck documentation.

  2. Create a file with the token for accessing the KUMA REST API.

    The account for which the token is created must satisfy the following requirements:

  3. Download the script:

    https://box.kaspersky.com/d/2dfd1d677c7547a7ac1e/

  4. Copy the redcheck-tool.py tool to the server hosting the KUMA Core and make the tool's file executable:

    chmod +x <path to the redcheck-tool.py file>

  5. Run the redcheck-tool.py utility:

    python3 redcheck-tool.py --kuma-rest <address and port of the KUMA REST API server> --token <API token> --tenant <name of the tenant in which the assets must be placed> --vuln-report <full path to the "Vulnerabilities" report file> --inventory-report <full path to the "Inventory" report file>

    Example:

    python3 --kuma-rest example.kuma.com:7223 --token 949fc03d97bad5d04b6e231c68be54fb --tenant Main --vuln-report /home/user/vuln.csv --inventory-report /home/user/inventory.csv

    You can use additional flags and commands for import operations. For example, the -v command displays an extended report on the received assets. A detailed description of the available flags and commands is provided in the "Flags and commands of redcheck-tool.py" table. You can also use the --help command to view information on the available flags and commands.

The asset information is imported from the RedCheck report to KUMA. The console displays information on the number of new and updated assets.

Example:

inventory has been imported for 2 host(s)

software has been imported for 5 host(s)

vulnerabilities has been imported for 4 host(s)

 

Example of extended import information:

[inventory import] Host: localhost Code: 200 Response: {'insertedIDs': {'0': '52ca11c6-a0e6-4dfd-8ef9-bf58189340f8'}, 'updatedCount': 0, 'errors': []}

[inventory import] Host: 10.0.0.2 Code: 200 Response: {'insertedIDs': {'0': '1583e552-5137-4164-92e0-01e60fb6edb0'}, 'updatedCount': 0, 'errors': []}

[software import][error] Host: localhost Skipped asset with FQDN localhost or IP 127.0.0.1

[software import] Host: 10.0.0.2 Code: 200 Response: {'insertedIDs': {}, 'updatedCount': 1, 'errors': []}

[vulnerabilities import] Host: 10.0.0.2 Code: 200 Response: {'insertedIDs': {}, 'updatedCount': 1, 'errors': []}

[vulnerabilities import] Host: 10.0.0.1 Code: 200 Response: {'insertedIDs': {'0': '0628f683-c20c-4107-abf3-d837b3dbbf01'}, 'updatedCount': 0, 'errors': []}

[vulnerabilities import] Host: localhost Code: 200 Response: {'insertedIDs': {}, 'updatedCount': 1, 'errors': []}

[vulnerabilities import] Host: 10.0.0.3 Code: 200 Response: {'insertedIDs': {'0': 'ed01e0a8-dcb0-4609-ab2b-91e50092555d'}, 'updatedCount': 0, 'errors': []}

inventory has been imported for 2 host(s)

software has been imported for 1 host(s)

vulnerabilities has been imported for 4 host(s)

The tool works as follows when importing assets:

  • KUMA overwrites the data of assets imported through the API, and deletes information about their resolved vulnerabilities.
  • KUMA skips assets with invalid data.

    Flags and commands of redcheck-tool.py

    Flags and commands

    Mandatory

    Description

    --kuma-rest <address and port of the KUMA server>

    Yes

    Port 7223 is used for API requests by default. You can change the port if necessary.

    --token <token>

    Yes

    The value of the option must contain only the token.

    The Administrator or Analyst role must be assigned to the user account for which the API token is being generated.

    --tenant <tenant name>

    Yes

    Name of the KUMA tenant in which the assets from the RedCheck report will be imported.

    --vuln-report <full path to the "Vulnerabilities" report>

    Yes

    "Vulnerabilities" report file in CSV format.

    --inventory-report <full path to the "Inventory" report file>

    No

    "Inventory" report file in CSV format.

    -v

    No

    Display extended information about the import of assets.

    Possible errors

    Error message

    Description

    Tenant %w not found

    The tenant name was not found.

    Tenant search error: Unexpected status Code: %d

    An unexpected HTTP response code was received while searching for the tenant.

    Asset search error: Unexpected status Code: %d

    An unexpected HTTP response code was received while searching for an asset.

    [%w import][error] Host: %w Skipped asset with FQDNlocalhost or IP 127.0.0.1

    When importing inventory/vulnerabilities information, host cfqdn=localhost or ip=127.0.0.1 was skipped.

Page top

[Topic 218007]

Logging in to the program web interface

To log in to the program web interface:

  1. Enter the following address in your browser:

    https://<IP address or FQDN of KUMA Core server>:7220

    The web interface authorization page will open and prompt you to enter your login and password.

  2. Enter the login of your account in the Login field.
  3. Enter the password for the specified account in the Password field.
  4. Click the Login button.

The main window of the program web interface opens.

In multitenancy mode, a user who is logging in to the program web interface for the first time will see the data only for those tenants that were selected for the user when their user account was created.

To log out of the program web interface,

open the KUMA web interface, click your user account name in the bottom-left corner of the window, and click the Logout button in the opened menu.

Page top

[Topic 218035]

Viewing KUMA metrics

Comprehensive information about the performance of the KUMA Core, storage, collectors, and correlators is available in the Metrics section of the KUMA web interface. Selecting this section opens the Grafana portal deployed as part of KUMA Core installation and is updated automatically. If the Metrics section shows core: <port number>, this means that KUMA is deployed in a fault-tolerant configuration and the metrics were received from the host on which the Core was installed. In other configurations, the name of the host from which KUMA receives metrics is displayed.

To determine on which host the Core is running, run the following command in the terminal of one of the controllers:

k0s kubectl get pod -n kuma -o wide

The default Grafana user name and password are admin and admin.

Available metrics

Collector indicators:

  • IO—metrics related to the service input and output.
    • Processing EPS—the number of processed events per second.
    • Processing Latency—the time required to process a single event (the median is displayed).
    • Output EPS—the number of events, sent to the destination per second.
    • Output Latency—the time required to send a batch of events to the destination and receive a response from it (the median is displayed).
    • Output Errors—the number or errors when sending event batches to the destination per second. Network errors and errors writing the disk buffer are displayed separately.
    • Output Event Loss—the number of lost events per second. Events can be lost due to network errors or errors writing the disk buffer. Events are also lost if the destination responded with an error code (for example, if the request was invalid).
  • Normalization—metrics related to the normalizers.
    • Raw & Normalized event size—the size of the raw event and size of the normalized event (the median is displayed).
    • Errors—the number of normalization errors per second.
  • Filtration—metrics related to the filters.
    • EPS—the number of events rejected by the Collector per second. The collector only rejects events if the user has added a filter into the collector service configuration.
  • Aggregation—metrics related to the aggregation rules.
    • EPS—the number of events received and created by the aggregation rule per second. This metric helps determine the effectiveness of aggregation rules.
    • Buckets—the number of buckets in the aggregation rule.
  • Enrichment—metrics related to the enrichment rules.
    • Cache RPS—the number requests to the local cache per second.
    • Source RPS—the number of requests to the enrichment source (for example, the Dictionary resource).
    • Source Latency—the time required to send a request to the enrichment source and receive a response from it (the median is displayed).
    • Queue—the enrichment requests queue size. This metric helps to find bottleneck enrichment rules.
    • Errors—the number of enrichment source request errors per second.

Correlator metrics

  • IO—metrics related to the service input and output.
    • Processing EPS—the number of processed events per second.
    • Processing Latency—the time required to process a single event (the median is displayed).
    • Output EPS—the number of events, sent to the destination per second.
    • Output Latency—the time required to send a batch of events to the destination and receive a response from it (the median is displayed).
    • Output Errors—the number or errors when sending event batches to the destination per second. Network errors and errors writing the disk buffer are displayed separately.
    • Output Event Loss—the number of lost events per second. Events can be lost due to network errors or errors writing the disk buffer. Events are also lost if the destination responded with an error code (for example, if the request was invalid).
  • Correlation—metrics related to the correlation rules.
    • EPS—the number of correlation events created per second.
    • Buckets—the number of buckets in the correlation rule (only for the standard kind of correlation rules).
  • Active Lists—metrics related to the active lists.
    • RPS—the number of requests (and their type) to the Active list per second.
    • Records—the number of entries in the Active list.
    • WAL Size—the size of the Write-Ahead-Log. This metric helps determine the size of the Active list.

Storage indicators

  • IO—metrics related to the service input and output.
    • RPS—the number of requests to the Storage service per second.
    • Latency—the time of proxying a single request to the ClickHouse node (the median is displayed).

Core service metrics

  • IO—metrics related to the service input and output.
    • RPS—the number of requests to the Core service per second.
    • Latency—the time of processing a single request (the median is displayed).
    • Errors—the number of request errors per second.
  • Notification Feed—metrics related to user activity.
    • Subscriptions—the number of clients, connected to the Core via SSE to receive server messages in real time. This number usually correlates with the number of clients using the KUMA web interface.
    • Errors—the number of message sending errors per second.
  • Schedulers—metrics related to Core tasks.
    • Active—the number of repeating active system tasks. The tasks created by the user are ignored.
    • Latency—the time of processing a single request (the median is displayed).
    • Position—the position (timestamp) of the alert creation task. The next ClickHouse scan for correlation events will start from this position.
    • Errors—the number of task errors per second.

General metrics common for all services

  • Process—general process metrics.
    • CPU—CPU usage.
    • Memory—RAM usage (RSS).
    • DISK IOPS—the number of disk read/write operations per second.
    • DISK BPS—the number of bytes read/written to the disk per second.
    • Network BPS—the number of bytes received/sent per second.
    • Network Packet Loss—the number of network packets lost per second.
    • GC Latency—the time of the GO Garbage Collector cycle (the median is displayed).
    • Goroutines—the number of active goroutines. This number differs from the thread count.
  • OS—metrics related to the operating system.
    • Load—the average load.
    • CPU—CPU usage.
    • Memory—RAM usage (RSS).
    • Disk—disk space usage.

Metrics storage period

KUMA operation data is saved for 3 months by default. This storage period can be changed.

To change the storage period for KUMA metrics:

  1. Log in to the OS of the server where the KUMA Core is installed.
  2. In the file /etc/systemd/system/multi-user.target.wants/kuma-victoria-metrics.service, in the ExecStart parameter, edit the --retentionPeriod=<metrics storage period, in months> flag by inserting the necessary period. For example, --retentionPeriod=4 means that the metrics will be stored for 4 months.
  3. Restart KUMA by running the following commands in sequence:
    1. systemctl daemon-reload
    2. systemctl restart kuma-victoria-metrics

The storage period for metrics has been changed.

Page top

[Topic 234574]

Managing KUMA tasks

When working in the program web interface, you can use tasks to perform various operations. For example, you can import assets or export KUMA event information to a TSV file.

In this Help topic

Viewing the tasks table

Configuring the display of the tasks table

Viewing task run results

Restarting a task

Page top

[Topic 218036]

Viewing the tasks table

The tasks table contains a list of created tasks and is located in the Task manager section of the program web interface window. You can view the tasks that were created by you (current user).

A user with the General Administrator role can view the tasks of all users.

The tasks table contains the following information:

  • State—the state of the task. One of the following statuses can be assigned to a task:
    • Green dot blinking—the task is active.
    • Completed—the task is complete.
    • Cancel—the task was canceled by the user.
    • Error—the task was not completed because of an error. The error message is displayed if you hover the mouse over the exclamation mark icon.
  • Task—the task type. The program provides the following types of tasks:
    • Events export—export KUMA events.
    • Threat Lookup—request data from the Kaspersky Threat Intelligence Portal.
    • Retroscan—task for replaying events.
    • KSC assets import—imports asset data from Kaspersky Security Center servers.
    • Accounts import—imports user data from Active Directory.
    • KICS for Networks assets import—imports asset data from KICS for Networks.
    • Repository update—updates the KUMA repository to receive the resource packages from the source specified in settings.
  • Created by—the user who created the task. If the task was created automatically, the column will show Scheduled task.

    This column is displayed only for users with the General Administrator and Administrator roles.

  • Created—task creation time.
  • Updated—time when the task was last updated.
  • Tenant—the name of the tenant in which the task was started.

The task date format depends on the localization language selected in the application settings. Possible date format options:

  • English localization: YYYY-MM-DD.
  • Russian localization: DD.MM.YYYY.
Page top

[Topic 234604]

Configuring the display of the tasks table

You can customize the display of columns and the order in which they appear in the tasks table.

To customize the display and order of columns in the tasks table:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, select the Task manager section.

    The tasks table is displayed.

  2. In the table header, click the gear button.
  3. In the opened window, do the following:
    • If you want to enable display of a column in the table, select the check box next to the name of the parameter that you want to display in the table.
    • If you do not want the parameter to be displayed in the table, clear the check box.

    At least one check box must be selected.

  4. If you want to reset the settings, click the Default link.
  5. If you want to change the order in which the columns are displayed in the table, move the mouse cursor over the name of the column, hold down the left mouse button and drag the column to the necessary position.

The display of columns in the tasks table will be configured.

Page top

[Topic 234598]

Viewing task run results

To view the results of a task:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, select the Task manager section.

    The tasks table is displayed.

  2. Click the link containing the task type in the Task column.

    A list of the operations available for this task type will be displayed.

  3. Select Show results.

The task results window opens.

Page top

[Topic 234601]

Restarting a task

To restart a task:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, select the Task manager section.

    The tasks table is displayed.

  2. Click the link containing the task type in the Task column.

    A list of the operations available for this task type will be displayed.

  3. Select Restart.

The task will be restarted.

Page top

[Topic 217960]

Proxies

Proxy servers are used to store proxy server configuration settings, for example, in destinations. The http type is supported.

Available settings:

  • Name (required)—unique name of the proxy server. Must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
  • Tenant (required)—name of the tenant that owns the resource.
  • Use URL from the secret (required)—drop-down list to select a secret resource that stores URLs of proxy servers. If required, a secret can be created in the proxy server creation window by using the AddResource button. The selected secret can be changed by clicking on the EditResource button.
  • Do not use for domains—one or more domains that require direct access.
  • Description—up to 4,000 Unicode characters.
Page top

[Topic 217936]

Connecting to an SMTP server

KUMA can be configured to send email notifications using an SMTP server. Users will receive notifications if the Receive email notifications check box is selected in their profile settings.

Only one SMTP server can be added to process KUMA notifications. An SMTP server connection is managed in the KUMA web interface under SettingsGeneralSMTP server settings.

To configure SMTP server connection:

  1. Open the KUMA web interface and select SettingsGeneral.
  2. In the SMTP server settings block, change the relevant settings:
    • Disabled—select this check box if you want to disable connection to the SMTP server.
    • Host (required)—SMTP host in one of the following formats: hostname, IPv4, IPv6.
    • Port (required)—SMTP port. The value must be an integer from 1 to 65,535.
    • From (required)—email address of the message sender. For example, kuma@company.com.
    • Alias for KUMA Core server—name of the KUMA Core server that is used in your network. Must be different from the FQDN.
    • If necessary, use the Secret drop-down list to select a secret of the credentials type that contains the account credentials for connecting to the SMTP server.

      Add secret

      1. If you previously created a secret, select it from the Secret drop-down list.

        If no secret was previously added, the drop-down list shows No data.

      2. If you want to add a new secret, click the AD_plus button on the right of the Secret list.

        The Secret window opens.

      3. In the Name field, enter the name that will be used to display the secret in the list of available secrets.
      4. In the User and Password fields, enter the credentials of the user account that the Agent will use to connect to the connector.
      5. If necessary, add any other information about the secret in the Description field.
      6. Click the Save button.

      The secret will be added and displayed in the Secret list.

    • Select the necessary frequency of notifications in the Monitoring notifications interval drop-down list.

      Notifications from the source about a monitoring policy triggering are repeated after the selected period until the status of the source becomes green again.

      If the Notify once setting is selected, you receive a notification about monitoring policy activation only once.

    • Turn on the Disable monitoring notifications toggle button if you do not want to receive notifications about the state of event sources. The toggle switch is turned off by default.
  3. Click Save.

The SMTP server connection is now configured, and users can receive email messages from KUMA.

Page top

[Topic 218045]

Working with Kaspersky Security Center tasks

You can connect Kaspersky Security Center assets to KUMA and download database and application module updates to these assets, or run an anti-virus scan on them by using Kaspersky Security Center tasks. Tasks are started in the KUMA web interface.

To run Kaspersky Security Center tasks on assets connected to KUMA, it is recommended to use the following script:

  1. Creating a user account in the Kaspersky Security Center Administration Console

    The credentials of this account are used when creating a secret to establish a connection with Kaspersky Security Center, and can be used to create a task.

    For more details about creating a user account and assigning permissions to a user, please refer to the Kaspersky Security Center Help Guide.

  2. Creating KUMA tasks in Kaspersky Security Center
  3. Configuring KUMA integration with Kaspersky Security Center
  4. Importing asset information from Kaspersky Security Center into KUMA
  5. Assigning a category to the imported assets

    After import, the assets are automatically placed in the Uncategorized devices group. You can assign one of the existing categories to the imported assets, or create a category and assign it to the assets.

  6. Running tasks on assets

    You can manually start tasks in the asset information or configure tasks to start automatically.

In this section

Creating KUMA tasks in Kaspersky Security Center

Starting Kaspersky Security Center tasks manually

Starting Kaspersky Security Center tasks automatically

Checking the status of Kaspersky Security Center tasks

Page top

[Topic 240903]

Creating KUMA tasks in Kaspersky Security Center

You can run the anti-virus database and application module update task, and the virus scan task on Kaspersky Security Center assets connected to KUMA. The assets must have Kaspersky Endpoint Security for Windows or Linux installed. The tasks are created in Kaspersky Security Center Web Console.

For more details about creating the Update and Virus scan tasks on the assets with Kaspersky Endpoint Security for Windows, refer to the Kaspersky Endpoint Security for Windows Help Guide.

For more details about creating the Update and Virus scan tasks on the assets with Kaspersky Endpoint Security for Linux, refer to the Kaspersky Endpoint Security for Linux Help Guide.

Task names must begin with "kuma" (not case-sensitive and without quotations). For example, KUMA antivirus check. Otherwise, the task is not displayed in the list of available tasks in the KUMA web interface.

Page top

[Topic 218009]

Starting Kaspersky Security Center tasks manually

You can manually run the anti-virus database, application module update task, and the anti-virus scan task on Kaspersky Security Center assets connected to KUMA. The assets must have Kaspersky Endpoint Security for Windows or Linux installed.

First, you need to configure the integration of Kaspersky Security Center with KUMA and create tasks in Kaspersky Security Center.

To manually start a Kaspersky Security Center task:

  1. In the Assets section of the KUMA web interface, select the asset that was imported from Kaspersky Security Center.

    The Asset details window opens.

  2. Click the KSC response button.

    This button is displayed if the connection to the Kaspersky Security Center that owns the selected asset is enabled.

  3. In the opened Select task window, select the check boxes next to the tasks that you want to start, and click the Start button.

Kaspersky Security Center starts the selected tasks.

Some types of tasks are available only for certain assets.

You can obtain vulnerability and software information only for assets running a Windows operating system.

Page top

[Topic 218008]

Starting Kaspersky Security Center tasks automatically

You can configure the automatic start of the anti-virus database and application module update task and the virus scan task for Kaspersky Security Center assets connected to KUMA. The assets must have Kaspersky Endpoint Security for Windows or Linux installed.

First, you need to configure the integration of Kaspersky Security Center with KUMA and create tasks in Kaspersky Security Center.

Configuring automatic start of Kaspersky Security Center tasks includes the following steps:

Step 1. Adding a correlation rule

To add a correlation rule:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, select the Resources section.
  2. Select Correlation rules and click the Add correlation rule button.
  3. On the General tab, define the following settings:
    1. In the Name field, define the rule name.
    2. In the Tenant drop-down list, select the tenant that owns the resource.
    3. In the Type drop-down list, select simple.
    4. In the Propagated fields field, add the following fields: DestinationAssetID.
    5. If required, define the values for the following fields:
      • In the Rate limit field, define the maximum number of times per second that the rule will be triggered.
      • In the Severity field, define the severity of alerts and correlation events that will be created as a result of the rule being triggered.
      • In the Description field, provide any additional information.
  4. On the SelectorsSettings tab, do the following:
    1. In the Filter drop-down list, select Create new.
    2. In the Conditions field, click the Add group button.
    3. In the operator field for the group you added, select AND.
    4. Add a condition for filtering by the DeviceProduct field value:
      1. In the Conditions field, click the Add condition button.
      2. In the condition field, select If.
      3. In the Left operand field, select event field.
      4. In the 'Event field' field, select DeviceProduct.
      5. In the Operator field, select =.
      6. In the Right operand field, select constant.
      7. In the value field, enter KSC.
    5. Add a condition for filtering by the Name field value:
      1. In the Conditions field, click the Add condition button.
      2. In the condition field, select If.
      3. In the Left operand field, select event field.
      4. In the event field, select Name.
      5. In the Operator field, select =.
      6. In the Right operand field, select constant.
      7. In the value field, enter the name of the event. When this event is detected, the task is started automatically.

        For example, if you want the Virus scan task to start when Kaspersky Security Center registers the Malicious object detected event, specify this name in the Value field.

        You can view the event name in the Name field of the event details.

  5. On the Actions tab, define the following settings:
    1. In the Actions section, open the On every event drop-down list.
    2. Select the Output check box.

      You do not need to fill in other fields.

  6. Click the Save button.

The correlation rule will be created.

Step 2. Creating a correlator

You need to launch the correlator installation wizard. At step 3 of the wizard, you are required to select the correlation rule that you added by following this guide.

The DeviceHostName field must display the domain name (FQDN) of the asset. If it is not displayed, create a DNS record for this asset and create a DNS enrichment rule at Step 4 of the wizard.

Step 3. Adding a filter

To add a filter:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, select the Resources section.
  2. Select Filters and click the Add filter button.
  3. In the Name field, specify the filter name.
  4. In the Tenant drop-down list, select the tenant that owns the resource.
  5. In the Conditions field, click the Add group button.
  6. In the operator field for the group you added, select AND.
  7. Add a condition for filtering by the DeviceProduct field value:
    1. In the Conditions field, click the Add condition button.
    2. In the condition field, select If.
    3. In the Left operand field, select event field.
    4. In the 'Event field' field, select Type.
    5. In the Operator field, select =.
    6. In the Right operand field, select constant.
    7. In the Value field, enter 3.
  8. Add a condition for filtering by the Name field value:
    1. In the Conditions field, click the Add condition button.
    2. In the condition field, select If.
    3. In the Left operand field, select event field.
    4. In the event field, select Name.
    5. In the Operator field, select =.
    6. In the Right operand field, select constant.
    7. In the Value field, enter the name of the correlation rule created at Step 1.

Step 4. Adding a response rule

To add a response rule:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, select the Resources section.
  2. Select Response rules and click the Add response rule button.
  3. In the Name field, define the rule name.
  4. In the Tenant drop-down list, select the tenant that owns the resource.
  5. In the Type drop-down list, select Response via KSC.
  6. In the Kaspersky Security Center task drop-down list, select the Kaspersky Security Center task you want to start.
  7. In the Event field drop-down list, select the DestinationAssetID.
  8. In the Workers field, specify the number of processes that the service can run simultaneously.

    By default, the number of work processes is the same as the number of virtual processors on the server where the correlator service is installed.

  • In the Description field, you can add up to 4,000 Unicode characters.
  • In the Filter drop-down list, select the filter added at Step 3 of this instruction.

To send requests to Kaspersky Security Center, you must ensure that Kaspersky Security Center is available over the UDP protocol.

If a response rule is owned by the shared tenant, the displayed Kaspersky Security Center tasks that are available for selection are from the Kaspersky Security Center server that the main tenant is connected to.

If a response rule has a selected task that is absent from the Kaspersky Security Center server that the tenant is connected to, the task is not performed for assets of this tenant. This situation could arise when two tenants are using a common correlator, for example.

Step 5. Adding a response rule to the correlator

To add a response rule to the correlator:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, select the Resources section.
  2. Select Correlators.
  3. In the list of correlators, select the correlator added at Step 2 of this instruction.
  4. In the steps tree, select Response rules.
  5. Click Add.
  6. In the Response rule drop-down list, select the rule added at step 4 of these instructions.
  7. In the steps tree, select Setup validation.
  8. Click the Save and restart services button.
  9. Click the Save button.

The response rule will be added to the correlator.

The automatic start will be configured for the anti-virus database and application module update task and the virus scan task on Kaspersky Security Center assets connected to KUMA. The tasks are started when a threat is detected on the assets and KUMA receives the corresponding events.

Page top

[Topic 217753]

Checking the status of Kaspersky Security Center tasks

In the KUMA web interface, you can check whether a Kaspersky Security Center task was started or whether a search for events owned by the collector listening for Kaspersky Security Center events was completed.

To check the status of Kaspersky Security Center tasks:

  1. In KUMA, select ResourcesActive services.
  2. Select the collector that is configured to receive events from the Kaspersky Security Center server and click the Go to Events button.

A new browser tab will open in the Events section of KUMA. The table displays events from the Kaspersky Security Center server. The status of the tasks can be seen in the Name column.

Kaspersky Security Center event fields:

  • Name—status or type of the task.
  • Message—message about the task or event.
  • FlexString<number>Label—name of the attribute received from Kaspersky Security Center. For example, FlexString1Label=TaskName.
  • FlexString<number>—value of the FlexString<number>Label attribute. For example, FlexString1=Download updates.
  • DeviceCustomNumber<number>Label—name of the attribute related to the task state. For example, DeviceCustomNumber1Label=TaskOldState.
  • DeviceCustomNumber<number>—value related to the task state. For example, DeviceCustomNumber1=1 means the task is executing.
  • DeviceCustomString<number>Label—name of the attribute related to the detected vulnerability: for example, a virus name, affected application.
  • DeviceCustomString<number>—value related to the detected vulnerability. For example, the attribute-value pairs DeviceCustomString1Label=VirusName and DeviceCustomString1=EICAR-Test-File mean that the EICAR test virus was detected.
Page top

[Topic 217686]

KUMA logs

By default, only errors are logged for all KUMA components. To receive detailed data in logs, configure Debug mode in the component settings.

The log is updated for 30 days or until its size reaches 1 GB. After 30 days, the log is archived and new events are written to a new log. Archives are stored in the logs folder. A maximum of three archived logs are stored on the server at a time. When a new log archive appears, if there are more than three archives, the oldest one is deleted. Archives containing logs older than 365 days are also deleted.

Debug mode is available for the following components:

Core

To enable it: in the KUMA web interface, select SettingsGeneralCore settingsDebug.

Logs are stored in the Core installation directory. For example: /opt/kaspersky/kuma/core/log/core.

If KUMA is installed in a fault-tolerant configuration, please refer to the Viewing Core logs in Kubernetes section.

 

Services:

  • Storage
  • Correlators
  • Collectors
  • Agents

To enable it: in the service settings, use the Debug drop-down list or check box.

Storage location: the service installation directory. For example, /opt/kaspersky/kuma/<service name>/log/<service name>. You can download the service logs from the KUMA web interface, in the ResourcesActive services section by selecting the desired service and clicking Log.

Logs residing on Linux machines can be viewed by running the journalctl and tail command. For example:

  • Storage. To return the latest logs from the storage installed on the server, run the following command:

    journalctl -f -u kuma-storage-<storage ID>

  • Correlators. To return the latest logs from correlators installed on the server, run the following command:

    journalctl -f -u kuma-correlator-<correlator ID>

  • Collectors. To return the latest logs from a specific collector installed on the server, run the following command:

    journalctl -f -u kuma-collector-<collector ID>

  • Agents. To return the latest logs from an agent installed on the server, run the following command:

    tail -f /opt/kaspersky/agent/<Agent ID>/log/agent

    The activity of Agents on Windows machines is always logged if they are assigned the logon as a service permission. Data is specified in more detail when the Debug check box is selected. Agent logs on Windows machines can be viewed in the file located at the path %PROGRAMDATA%\Kaspersky Lab\KUMA\<Agent ID>\agent.log. Logs of Agents on Linux machines are stored in the agent installation directory.

Resources:

  • Connectors
  • Destinations
  • Enrichment rules

To enable it: in the settings of the service linked to the resource, use the Debug drop-down list or check box.

The logs are stored on the machine hosting the installed service that uses the relevant resource. Detailed data for resources can be viewed in the log of the service linked to a resource.

Viewing Core logs in Kubernetes

When Core log files reach 100 MB, they are archived and a new log is written. No more than five files are stored at a time. If there are more than five files when a new log appears, the oldest file is deleted.

On worker nodes, you can view the logs of containers and pods residing on these nodes in the file system of the node.
For example:
/var/log/pods/kuma_core-deployment-<UID>/core/*.log
/var/log/pods/kuma_core-deployment-<UID>/mongodb/*.log

To view the logs of all containers in the Core pod:

k0s kubectl logs -l app=core --all-containers -n kuma

To view the log of a specific container:

k0s kubectl logs -l app = core -c <container_name> -n kuma

To enable real-time log viewing, add the -f switch:

k0s kubectl logs -f -l app=core --all-containers -n kuma

To view the logs of the previous pod that was overwritten by a new one (for example, when recovering from a critical error or after redeployment), add the --previous switch:

k0s kubectl logs -l app=core -c core -n kuma --previous

To access the logs from other hosts that are not included in the cluster, you need the k0s-kubeconfig.yml file containing the access credentials created during KUMA installation, and the locally installed kubectl cluster management utility.
The cluster controller or traffic balancer specified in the server parameter of the k0s-kubeconfig.yml file must be accessible over the network.

The file path must be exported to a variable: 
export KUBECONFIG=/<file path>/k0s-kubeconfig.yml

You can use kubeclt to view the logs. For example:

kubectl logs -l app=core -c mongodb -n kuma

Page top

[Topic 233516]

KUMA notifications

Standard notifications

KUMA can be configured to send email notifications using an SMTP server. To do so, configure a connection to an SMTP server and select the Receive email notifications check box for users who should receive notifications.

KUMA automatically notifies users about the following events:

  • A report was created (the users listed in the report template receive a notification).
  • An alert was created (all users receive a notification).
  • An alert was assigned to a user (the user to whom the alert was assigned receives a notification).
  • A task was performed (the users who created the task receive a notification).
  • New resource packages are available. They can be obtained by updating the KUMA repository (the users whose email address is specified in the task settings are notified).

Custom notifications

Instead of the standard KUMA notifications about the alert generation, you can send notifications based on custom templates. To configure custom notifications instead of standard notifications, take the following steps:

When an alert is created based on the selected correlation rules, notifications created based on custom email templates will be sent to the specified email addresses. Standard KUMA notifications about the same event will not be sent to the specified addresses.

Page top

[Topic 229568]

Working in hierarchy mode

When multiple KUMA instances are deployed in various organizations, they may be merged into a hierarchical structure. Interaction between parent and child instances of KUMA (or nodes) provides the following capabilities:

  • Child KUMA nodes relay data on other descendant nodes to parent KUMA nodes. This enables the parent node to see its entire branch of the hierarchical tree.
  • Parent KUMA nodes receive data on incidents from descendant nodes, and can also receive data on incident-related alerts and events if the corresponding settings are enabled in a child node.
  • Child KUMA nodes do not receive information about upstream nodes, except information about their parent KUMA node.

Parent and child nodes interact via API. Authentication relies on self-signed certificates, which the administrators of the parent and child organization must exchange over an encrypted channel when they connect to each other.

One parent node can have more than one child node. A child node can be connected to only one parent node. A parent node cannot be a child node of its descendants.

General administrator users can configure hierarchy mode in the KUMA web interface under SettingsHierarchy:

  • On the Node profile tab, you can configure the profile of your node, create a certificate, and enable or disable hierarchy mode.
  • On the Structure tab, you can view your available branch of the hierarchical tree, change the connected nodes, or disconnect them.
  • You can connect parent and child nodes on either of these tabs.

Incidents of child nodes can be viewed by users of all roles in the KUMA web interface under Incidents. In incidents, you can obtain information about their related alerts, events, assets, and users.

In this section

Enabling hierarchy mode for the first time

Creating a node certificate

Connecting nodes into a hierarchical structure

Viewing your own branch of the hierarchy and available nodes

Editing a node profile

Viewing incidents from child nodes

Enabling and disabling hierarchy mode

Page top

[Topic 230727]

Enabling hierarchy mode for the first time

When enabling hierarchy mode for the first time, you must complete the profile of your node.

To complete the profile of your node:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, open SettingsHierarchyNode profile.
  2. In the Organization name field, indicate the name of your company (1–128 characters). This name will be used for the name of your node in the hierarchy.

    To change the organization name, you will have to regenerate the certificate of your node and replace it on the nodes that you are connected to.

  3. In the FQDN field, specify the FQDN of your node.
  4. If necessary, in the Proxy drop-down list, select the proxy server that must be used to communicate with other nodes. You can create a proxy server by using the AddResource button. The selected proxy server can be changed by clicking the EditResource button.

    The user account credentials entered into the proxy server URL can contain only the following characters: letters of the English alphabet, numbers, and special characters ("-", ".", "_", ":", "~", "!", "$", "&", "\", "(", ")", "*", "+", ",", ";", "=", "%", "@"). The URL in the proxy server settings is set using a secret, which you can select from the Use URL from the secret drop-down list.

  5. Click Generate certificate.

The profile of your KUMA node is complete and hierarchy mode is enabled. When hierarchy mode is enabled, a certificate is automatically created for authentication of your node. You can use the SaveButton icon to download the certificate and then forward it to other nodes over an encrypted channel to create a connection between these nodes.

Page top

[Topic 229603]

Creating a node certificate

Nodes in the hierarchy are authenticated using self-signed certificates of the nodes. A certificate contains the name of the organization and its FQDN.

The certificate is created when hierarchy mode is enabled, but you can also recreate a certificate if necessary. The certificate must be recreated whenever you change the name of a node or its FQDN.

To create a node certificate:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, open SettingsHierarchyNode profile.

    You will see a window containing the settings of your node in the hierarchy.

  2. Click the Generate certificate button.

    The certificate creation window opens.

  3. In the FQDN field, specify the FQDN of your node.
  4. In the Organization name field, indicate the name of your company (1–128 characters). This name will be used for the name of your node in the hierarchy.
  5. Close the window by clicking Save.

The node certificate will be created and can be downloaded by clicking the SaveButton icon. Then it can be transferred to other nodes over an encrypted channel to create a connection between these nodes.

Page top

[Topic 229596]

Connecting nodes into a hierarchical structure

Prior to connecting nodes, you should make sure that they have hierarchy mode enabled, their node profiles have been configured, and certificates have been created for the nodes. Parent and child nodes must exchange their certificates over encrypted communication channels.

Nodes in the hierarchy must be connected in the following order:

  1. Connect the child node to the parent node. You must add the parent node certificate on the Add parent node tab.
  2. Connect the parent node to the child node. You must add the child node certificate on the Add child node tab.

Before you connect the nodes, make sure that the system time on the machines is synchronized with an NTP server. For more details, please refer to the appropriate documentation for Oracle Linux and for Astra Linux Special Edition.

When a connection is established, the parent node polls its child nodes for their available hierarchy data every 5 minutes, and thereby identify the structure of their available branch of the hierarchical tree. This data is displayed in the KUMA web interface under SettingsHierarchyStructure after the web page is refreshed.

Information about the hierarchical structure can be manually refreshed by using the Update structure button. To display the updated data, you must refresh the page of your web browser.

In this section

Connecting to a parent node

Connecting a child node

Disconnecting a node

Changing a node

Errors when connecting nodes

Page top

[Topic 229673]

Connecting to a parent node

To connect to a parent node:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, open SettingsHierarchy and click the Add parent node button.

    The Connect to parent node window opens.

  2. Use the Upload certificate button to upload the certificate to KUMA.

    The window will display a description of the certificate and indicate the organization that issued it and its FQDN.

  3. If necessary, use the Port field to specify the port used for accessing the parent node.
  4. Click Save.

You are now connected to the parent node. It can now add your node as a child node so that it will receive data on your child nodes and view your incidents.

Page top

[Topic 229674]

Connecting a child node

If you connected a parent node, you will be able to add child nodes only after your parent node adds you as a child node. Prior to connecting a child node, make sure that it has added your node as the parent node.

To connect a child node:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, open SettingsHierarchy and click the Add child node button.

    The Connect to child node window opens.

  2. Use the Upload certificate button to upload the certificate of the child node to KUMA.

    The window will display a description of the certificate and indicate the organization that issued it and its FQDN.

  3. If necessary, use the Port field to specify the port used for accessing the child node.
  4. Click Save.

The child node is added and displayed on the SettingsHierarchyStructure tab. This tab also displays the descendants of the child node. You can view the incidents of your child nodes and their descendants.

Page top

[Topic 229676]

Disconnecting a node

You can disconnect from a parent node or child node. However, it is impossible to disconnect from nodes that are descendants of your child nodes.

To disconnect from a node:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, open SettingsHierarchy and select the Structure tab.

    The hierarchical structure will be displayed.

  2. Select the node that you want to disconnect from.

    The right side of the window will display the details area containing information about this node.

  3. Click Disconnect.

You have disconnected from the node. If you have disconnected from a parent node, it will no longer receive information about your child nodes and incidents. If you have disconnected from a child node, you will no longer receive information about its child nodes and its incidents.

Page top

[Topic 229677]

Changing a node

If the name and/or FQDN of a node has changed, this node must reissue a certificate. Then the procedure for connecting the nodes must be repeated. Outdated nodes must be disconnected.

The port for connecting to nodes can be changed in the details area of the node without reissuing a certificate.

To change the settings for connecting to a node:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, open the Structure tab under SettingsHierarchy and select the relevant node.

    The right side of the window will display the details area of the node.

  2. In the Port field, enter the required port.
  3. Change the settings for email notifications regarding incidents on the child node:
    • If you need to disable notifications, clear the Monitoring incidents check box.
    • If you need to enable notifications, select the Monitoring incidents check box and use the input field to add the necessary email addresses.

      To send email notifications, you need to configure a connection to the SMTP server.

  4. Click Save.

The node connection settings have been changed.

Page top

[Topic 230313]

Errors when connecting nodes

Errors that occur when connecting nodes may be incompletely displayed in the KUMA web interface. You can use the developer's console of your browser to view the full server report.

The table below lists the errors that may arise when connecting KUMA nodes into a hierarchy, and includes recommendations on resolving those errors.

Errors that occur when establishing a connection to a node are displayed in pop-up windows in the lower part of the screen. Errors in already connected nodes can be viewed in the KUMA web interface under SettingsHierarchyStructure. The error text is displayed when you move your mouse cursor over the red triangle icon next to the node that encountered the error.

Error message

Possible cause of the error

Recommended remediation

failed to exchange settings with child: <Post request for child node address>: connect: connection refused

Connection refused. There was an attempt to add a child node that did not add the certificate of the parent node.

  • First connect the parent node on the child node, then add the child node on the parent node.
  • Verify that the hierarchy is enabled on the child node.

You cannot add your own KUMA node as a parent node or child node.

You cannot generate a cyclical structure out of KUMA nodes.

Make sure that the hierarchical structure you are creating is a tree structure.

corrupted certificate

Invalid certificate.

You must check the certificate file.

failed to exchange settings with child: <Post request for child node address>: context deadline exceeded

Connection could not be established due to exceeded response timeout.

Verify that the child node machine is running.

failed to exchange settings with child: <Post request for child node address>: x509: certificate has expired or is not yet valid

Connection refused due to invalid certificate.

  • Make sure that the child node certificate is valid.
  • Make sure that the system time of nodes is synchronized with the NTP server.

failed to exchange settings with child: <Post request for child node address>: certificate signed by unknown authority (possibly because of "x509: invalid signature: parent certificate cannot sign this kind of certificate" while trying to verify candidate authority certificate "<node name>"

Connection refused due to invalid certificate.

Make sure that the parent node certificate is valid.

failed to exchange settings with child: <Post request for child node address>: dial tcp: lookup <child node address> on <IP address of child node>: no such host

Child node certificate contains a non-existent FQDN.

Make sure that the child node certificate is valid.

Already exists

This node already exists within the structure.

Check the hierarchical structure that you are trying to build.

The parent node is already indicated as a child node.

 

Do not connect a parent node that is already a child node within this hierarchy.

Failed to query branch {"branchID":"<branch ID>","branchName":"<node name>","branchFQDN":"<node FQDN>","error":"Get \"<URL of child node>/children\": remote error: tls: bad certificate"}

Child node deleted the parent.

The child node must connect the parent node.

error: <Post request for child node address>: read tcp <IP addresses of nodes>: read: connection reset by peer

Invalid ports are indicated in node connection settings.

Make sure that the correct port is indicated in the node settings and that a valid certificate is being used.

"error":"Get \"<Child node URL>/children\": proxyconnect tcp: x509: certificate signed by unknown authority"

Connecting to a node using wrong proxy server settings.

Make sure correct proxy server settings are used.

Page top

[Topic 229678]

Viewing your own branch of the hierarchy and available nodes

In the KUMA web interface, under SettingsHierarchy, select the Structure tab to view your branch of the hierarchical tree extending from the parent node to all descendants of its child nodes. Your node in the hierarchy is highlighted in green.

When you click a node of the branch, the right side of the window shows the node details area in which you can do the following:

  • Change the port for connecting to the parent node or child node.
  • Disable a parent node or child node.
  • Change the settings of email notifications regarding incidents for child nodes and their descendants.
Page top

[Topic 229679]

Editing a node profile

You can modify the profile settings of your node.

To change the settings of your node:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, open SettingsHierarchyNode profile.
  2. If necessary, in the Proxy drop-down list, select the proxy server that must be used to communicate with other nodes. You can create a proxy server by using the AddResource button. The selected proxy server can be changed by clicking the EditResource button.

    The user account credentials entered into the proxy server URL can contain only the following characters: letters of the English alphabet, numbers, and special characters ("-", ".", "_", ":", "~", "!", "$", "&", "\", "(", ")", "*", "+", ",", ";", "=", "%", "@"). The URL in the proxy server settings is set using a secret, which you can select from the Use URL from the secret drop-down list.

  3. If necessary, use the Port field to enter the port used for accessing your node. Make sure that access to the port is open.
  4. If necessary, use the Timeout field to indicate how many seconds to wait for a response from nodes when attempting a connection. The default value is 60.
  5. If necessary, select or clear the following check boxes: Do not include events to the incidents relayed to parent nodes or Do not include alerts to the incidents relayed to parent nodes. These check boxes are cleared by default.
  6. Click Save.

The settings of your node are changed.

If you want to change the FQDN or name of your node, regenerate a certificate for the node.

Page top

[Topic 229682]

Viewing incidents from child nodes

If hierarchy mode is enabled, you can view the Incidents section to inspect the incidents that were created on child nodes and their descendants. The incidents table displays the Branch column, which can be used to filter incidents based on the nodes in which they were created. By default, the incidents table displays the incidents that were created on your node.

To select the nodes whose incidents you want to view:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, open the Incidents section.
  2. Click the header of the Branch column and click the parent-category icon in the opened window.

    The right side of the window will display the details area containing the hierarchical structure of the organization. You can use the more button to expand or collapse all branches of the structure, or select all KUMA nodes.

  3. Select the relevant nodes and click Save.

The incidents table displays the incidents that were created on the nodes that you selected.

When you click an incident, a window opens with detailed information about the incident. The data is read-only. An incident from another node cannot be edited or processed.

Special considerations when viewing data on an incident created on a different node:

  • The Related alerts section of the incident window contains information only if the child node is configured to forward data on incident-related alerts to the parent node.

    When you click on the name of an incident-related alert, a window opens with detailed information about this alert. This data is also read-only. An alert from another node cannot be edited or processed.

  • The Related events section in the window of an alert related to an incident of another node contains information only if the child node is configured to forward data on incident-related events to the parent node.

    In this case, you can use the Find in events button to open the events table and search for relevant events. However, you cannot select the storage, and there are limitations applied to SQL queries when searching events in alert investigation mode. This mode employs data enrichment (for example, using Kaspersky Threat Intelligence Portal, Kaspersky CyberTrace or Active Directory). The results of Kaspersky Threat Intelligence Portal data enrichment performed on child nodes are not available on parent nodes.

See also:

About incidents

About alerts

About events

Interaction with RuCERT

Page top

[Topic 229681]

Enabling and disabling hierarchy mode

To enable or disable hierarchy mode:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, open SettingsHierarchyNode profile.
  2. Enable or disable hierarchy mode:
    • If you want to enable hierarchy mode, clear the Disabled check box.
    • If you want to disable hierarchy mode, select the Disabled check box.
  3. Click Save.

Hierarchy mode will be enabled or disabled according to your selection.

Page top

[Topic 233257]

Working with geographic data

A list of mappings of IP addresses or ranges of IP addresses to geographic data can be uploaded to KUMA for use in event enrichment.

In this section

Geodata format

Converting geographic data from MaxMind to IP2Location

Importing and exporting geographic data

Default mapping of geographic data

Page top

[Topic 233258]

Geodata format

Geodata can be uploaded to KUMA as a CSV file in UTF-8 encoding. A comma is used as the delimiter. The first line of the file contains the field headers: Network,Country,Region,City,Latitude,Longitude.

CSV file description

Field header name in CSV

Field description

Example

Network

IP address in one of the following formats:

  • Single IP address
  • Range of IP addresses
  • IP address in CIDR format.

Mixing of IPv4 and IPv6 addresses is allowed.

Required field.

  • 192.168.2.24
  • 192.168.2.25-192.168.2.35
  • 131.10.55.70/8
  • 2001:DB8::0/120

Country

Country designation used by your organization. For example, this could be its name or code.

Required field.

  • Russia
  • RU

Region

Regional designation used by your organization. For example, this could be its name or code.

  • Sverdlovsk Oblast
  • RU-SVE

City

City designation used by your organization. For example, this could be its name or code.

  • Yekaterinburg
  • 65701000001

Latitude

Latitude of the described location in decimal format. This field can be empty, in which case the value 0 will be used when importing data into KUMA.

56.835556

Longitude

Longitude of the described location in decimal format. This field can be empty, in which case the value 0 will be used when importing data into KUMA.

60.612778

Page top

[Topic 233259]

Converting geographic data from MaxMind to IP2Location

Geographic data obtained from MaxMind and IP2Location can be used in KUMA if the data files are first converted to a format supported by KUMA. Conversion can be done using the script below. Make sure that the files do not contain duplicate records. For example, if a file has few columns, different records may contain data from the same network with the same geodata. Such files cannot be converted. To successfully perform the conversion, make sure that there are no duplicate rows and that every row has at least one unique field.

Download script

Python 2.7 or later is required to run the script.

Script start command:

python converter.py --type <type of geographic data being processed: "maxmind" or "ip2location"> --out <directory where a CSV file containing geographic data in KUMA format will be placed> --input <path to the ZIP archive containing geographic data from MaxMind or IP2location>

When the script is run with the --help flag, help is displayed for the available script parameters: python converter.py --help

Command for converting a file containing a Russian database of IP address ranges from a MaxMind ZIP archive:

python converter.py --type maxmind --lang ru --input MaxMind.zip --out geoip_maxmind_ru.csv

If the --lang parameter is not specified, the script receives information from the GeoLite2-City-Locations-en.csv file from the ZIP archive by default.

Absence of the --lang parameter for MaxMind is equivalent to the following command:

python converter.py --type maxmind --input MaxMind.zip --out geoip_maxmind.csv

Command for converting a file from an IP2Location ZIP archive:

python converter.py --type ip2location --input IP2LOCATION-LITE-DB11.CSV.ZIP --out geoip_ip2location.csv

Command for converting a file from several IP2Location ZIP archives:

python converter.py --type ip2location --input IP2LOCATION-LITE-DB11.CSV.ZIP IP2LOCATION-LITE-DB11.IPV6.CSV.ZIP --out geoip_ip2location_ipv4_ipv6.csv

The --lang parameter is not used for IP2Location.

Required sets of fields

The MaxMind source files GeoLite2-City-Blocks-IPv4.csv and GeoLite2-City-Blocks-IPv6.csv must contain the following set of fields:

network,geoname_id,registered_country_geoname_id,represented_country_geoname_id,
is_anonymous_proxy,is_satellite_provider,postal_code,latitude,longitude,accuracy_radius

Example set of source data:

network,geoname_id,registered_country_geoname_id,represented_country_geoname_id,
is_anonymous_proxy,is_satellite_provider,postal_code,latitude,longitude,accuracy_radius

1.0.0.0/24,2077456,2077456,,0,0,,-33.4940,143.2104,1000

1.0.1.0/24,1814991,1814991,,0,0,,34.7732,113.7220,1000

The remaining CSV files with the locale code must contain the following set of fields:

geoname_id,locale_code,continent_code,continent_name,country_iso_code,country_name,
subdivision_1_iso_code,subdivision_1_name,subdivision_2_iso_code,subdivision_2_name,
city_name,metro_code,time_zone,is_in_european_union

Example set of source data:

geoname_id,locale_code,continent_code,continent_name,country_iso_code,country_name,
subdivision_1_iso_code,subdivision_1_name,subdivision_2_iso_code,subdivision_2_name,
city_name,metro_code,time_zone,is_in_european_union

1392,de,AS,Asien,IR,Iran,02,Mazandaran,,,,,Asia/Tehran,0

7240,de,AS,Asien,IR,Iran,28,Nord-Chorasan,,,,,Asia/Tehran,0

The source IP2Location files must contain data on the network ranges, Country, Region, City, Latitude, and Longitude

Example set of source data:

"0","16777215","-","-","-","-","0.000000","0.000000","-","-"

"16777216","16777471","US","United States of America","California","Los Angeles","34.052230","-118.243680","90001","-07:00"

"16777472","16778239","CN","China","Fujian","Fuzhou","26.061390","119.306110","350004","+08:00"

If the source files contain a different set of fields than the one indicated in this section, or if some fields are missing, the missing fields in the target CSV file will be empty after conversion.

Page top

[Topic 233260]

Importing and exporting geographic data

If necessary, you can manually import and export geographic data into KUMA. Geographic data is imported and exported in a CSV file. If the geographic data import is successful, the previously added data is overwritten and an audit event is generated in KUMA.

To import geographic data into KUMA:

  1. Prepare a CSV file containing geographic data.

    Geographic data received from MaxMind and IP2Location must be converted to a format supported by KUMA.

  2. In the KUMA web interface, open SettingsGeneral.
  3. In the Geographic data settings block, click the Import from file button and select a CSV file containing geographic data.

    Wait for the geographic data import to finish. The data import is interrupted if the page is refreshed.

The geographic data is uploaded to KUMA.

To export geographic data from KUMA:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, open SettingsGeneral.
  2. In the Geographic data settings block, click the Export button.

Geographic data will be downloaded as a CSV file named geoip.csv (in UTF-8 encoding) based on the settings of your browser.

The data is exported in the same format as it was uploaded, with the exception of IP address ranges. If a range of addresses was indicated in the format 1.0.0.0/24 in a file imported into KUMA, the range will be displayed in the format 1.0.0.0-1.0.0.255 in the exported file.

Page top

[Topic 233399]

Default mapping of geographic data

If you select the SourceAddress, DestinationAddress and DeviceAddress event fields as the IP address source when configuring a geographic data enrichment rule, the Apply default mapping button becomes available. You can use this button to add preconfigured mapping pairs of geographic data attributes and event fields as described below.

Default mappings for the SourceAddress event field

Geodata attribute

Event field

Country

SourceCountry

Region

SourceRegion

City

SourceCity

Latitude

SourceLatitude

Longitude

SourceLongitude

Default mappings for the DestinationAddress event field

Geodata attribute

Event field

Country

DestinationCountry

Region

DestinationRegion

City

DestinationCity

Latitude

DestinationLatitude

Longitude

DestinationLongitude

Default mappings for the DeviceAddress event field

Geodata attribute

Event field

Country

DeviceCountry

Region

DeviceRegion

City

DeviceCity

Latitude

DeviceLatitude

Longitude

DeviceLongitude

Page top

[Topic 249556]

User guide

This chapter provides information about managing the KUMA SIEM system.

In this Help topic

KUMA resources

Example of incident investigation with KUMA

Analytics

Page top

[Topic 217687]

KUMA resources

Resources are KUMA components that contain parameters for implementing various functions: for example, establishing a connection with a given web address or converting data according to certain rules. Like parts of an erector set, these components are assembled into resource sets for services that are then used as the basis for creating KUMA services.

Resources are contained in the Resources section, Resources block of KUMA web interface. The following resource types are available:

  • Correlation rules—resources of this type contain rules for identifying event patterns that indicate threats. If the conditions specified in these resources are met, a correlation event is generated.
  • Normalizers—resources of this type contain rules for converting incoming events into the format used by KUMA. After processing in the normalizer, the "raw" event becomes normalized and can be processed by other KUMA resources and services.
  • Connectors—resources of this type contain settings for establishing network connections.
  • Aggregation rules—resources of this type contain rules for combining several basic events of the same type into one aggregation event.
  • Enrichment rules—resources of this type contain rules for supplementing events with information from third-party sources.
  • Destinations—resources of this type contain settings for forwarding events to a destination for further processing or storage.
  • Filters—resources of this type contain conditions for rejecting or selecting individual events from the stream of events.
  • Response rules—resources of this type are used in correlators to, for example, execute scripts or launch Kaspersky Security Center tasks when certain conditions are met.
  • Notification templates—resources of this type are used when sending notifications about new alerts.
  • Active lists—resources of this type are used by correlators for dynamic data processing when analyzing events according to correlation rules.
  • Dictionaries—resources of this type are used to store keys and their values, which may be required by other KUMA resources and services.
  • Proxies—resources of this type contain settings for using proxy servers.
  • Secrets—resources of this type are used to securely store confidential information (such as credentials) that KUMA needs to interact with external services.

When you click on a resource type, a window opens displaying a table with the available resources of this type. The resource table contains the following columns:

  • Name—the name of a resource. Can be used to search for resources and sort them.
  • Updated—the date and time of the last update of a resource. Can be used to sort resources.
  • Created by—the name of the user who created a resource.
  • Description—the description of a resource.

The maximum table size is not limited. If you want to select all resources, scroll to the end of the table and select the Select all check box, which selects all available resources in the table.

Resources can be organized into folders. The folder structure is displayed in the left part of the window: root folders correspond to tenants and contain a list of all resources of the tenant. All other folders nested within the root folder display the resources of an individual folder. When a folder is selected, the resources it contains are displayed as a table in the right pane of the window.

Resources can be created, edited, copied, moved from one folder to another, and deleted. Resources can also be exported and imported.

KUMA comes with a set of predefined resources, which can be identified by the "[OOTB]<resource_name>" name. OOTB resources are protected from editing.

If you want to adapt a predefined OOTB resource to your organization's infrastructure:

  1. In the Resources-<resource type> section, select the OOTB resource that you want to edit.
  2. In the upper part of the KUMA web interface, click Duplicate, then click Save.
  3. A new resource named "[OOTB]<resource_name> - copy" is displayed in the web interface.
  4. Edit the copy of the predefined resource as necessary and save your changes.

The adapted resource is available for use.

In this Help topic

Operations with resources

Destinations

Working with events

Normalizers

Aggregation rules

Enrichment rules

Correlation rules

Filters

Active lists

Dictionaries

Response rules

Notification templates

Connectors

Secrets

Segmentation rules

Page top

[Topic 217971]

Operations with resources

To manage KUMA resources, you can create, move, copy, edit, delete, import, and export them. These operations are available for all resources, regardless of the resource type.

KUMA resources reside in folders. You can add, rename, move, or delete resource folders.

In this section

Creating, renaming, moving, and deleting resource folders

Creating, duplicating, moving, editing, and deleting resources

Updating resources

Exporting resources

Importing resources

Page top

[Topic 218051]

Creating, renaming, moving, and deleting resource folders

Resources can be organized into folders. The folder structure is displayed in the left part of the window: root folders correspond to tenants and contain a list of all resources of the tenant. All other folders nested within the root folder display the resources of an individual folder. When a folder is selected, the resources it contains are displayed as a table in the right pane of the window.

You can create, rename, move and delete folders.

To create a folder:

  1. Select the folder in the tree where the new folder is required.
  2. Click the Add folder button.

The folder will be created.

To rename a folder:

  1. Locate required folder in the folder structure.
  2. Hover over the name of the folder.

    The More-DropDown icon will appear near the name of the folder.

  3. Open the More-DropDown drop-down list and select Rename.

    The folder name will become active for editing.

  4. Enter the new folder name and press ENTER.

    The folder name cannot be empty.

The folder will be renamed.

To move a folder,

Drag and drop the folder to a required place in folder structure by clicking its name.

Folders cannot be dragged from one tenant to another.

To delete a folder:

  1. Locate required folder in the folder structure.
  2. Hover over the name of the folder.

    The More-DropDown icon will appear near the name of the folder.

  3. Open the More-DropDown drop-down list and select Delete.

    The conformation window appears.

  4. Click OK.

The folder will be deleted.

The program does not delete folders that contain files or subfolders.

Page top

[Topic 218050]

Creating, duplicating, moving, editing, and deleting resources

You can create, move, copy, edit, and delete resources.

To create the resource:

  1. In the Resources<resource type> section, select or create a folder where you want to add the new resource.

    Root folders correspond to tenants. For a resource to be available to a specific tenant, it must be created in the folder of that tenant.

  2. Click the Add <resource type> button.

    The window for configuring the selected resource type opens. The available configuration parameters depend on the resource type.

  3. Enter a unique resource name in the Name field.
  4. Specify the required parameters (marked with a red asterisk).
  5. If necessary, specify the optional parameters (not required).
  6. Click Save.

The resource will be created and available for use in services and other resources.

To move the resource to a new folder:

  1. In the Resources<resource type> section, find the required resource in the folder structure.
  2. Select the check box near the resource you want to move. You can select multiple resources.

    The DragIcon icon appears near the selected resources.

  3. Use the DragIcon icon to drag and drop resources to the required folder.

The resources will be moved to the new folders.

You can only move resources to folders of the tenant in which the resources were created. Resources cannot be moved to another tenant's folders.

To copy the resource:

  1. In the Resources<resource type> section, find the required resource in the folder structure.
  2. Select the check box next to the resource that you want to copy and click Duplicate.

    A window opens with the settings of the resource that you have selected for copying. The available configuration parameters depend on the resource type.

    The <selected resource name> - copy value is displayed in the Name field.

  3. Make the necessary changes to the parameters.
  4. Enter a unique name in the Name field.
  5. Click Save.

The copy of the resource will be created.

To edit the resource:

  1. In the Resources<resource type> section, find the required resource in the folder structure.
  2. Select the resource.

    A window with the settings of the selected resource opens. The available configuration parameters depend on the resource type.

  3. Make the necessary changes to the parameters.
  4. Click Save.

The resource will be updated. If this resource is used in a service, restart the service to apply the new settings.

To delete the resource:

  1. In the Resources<resource type> section, find the required resource in the folder structure.
  2. Select the check box next to the resource that you want to delete and click Delete.

    A confirmation window opens.

  3. Click OK.

The resource will be deleted.

Page top

[Topic 242817]

Updating resources

Kaspersky regularly releases packages with resources that can be imported from the repository. You can specify an email address in the settings of the Repository update task. After the first execution of the task, KUMA starts sending notifications about the packages available for update to the specified address. You can update the repository, analyze the contents of each update, and decide if to import and deploy the new resources in the operating infrastructure. KUMA supports updates from Kaspersky servers and from custom sources, including offline update using the update mirror mechanism. If you have other Kaspersky products in the infrastructure, you can connect KUMA to existing update mirrors. The update subsystem expands KUMA capabilities to respond to the changes in the threat landscape and the infrastructure. The capability to use it without direct Internet access ensures the privacy of the data processed by the system.

To update resources, perform the following steps:

  1. Update the repository to deliver the resource packages to the repository. The repository update is available in two modes:
    • Automatic update
    • Manual update
  2. Import the resource packages from the updated repository into the tenant.

For the service to start using the resources, make sure that the updated resources are mapped after performing the import. If necessary, link the resources to collectors, correlators, or agents, and update the settings.

To enable automatic update:

  1. In the Settings → Repository update section, configure the Data refresh interval in hours. The default value is 24 hours.
  2. Specify the Update source. The following options are available:
    • .

      You can view the list of servers in the Knowledge Base, article 15998.

    • Custom source:
      • The URL to the shared folder on the HTTP server.
      • The full path to the local folder on the host where the KUMA Core is installed.

        If a local folder is used, the kuma system user must have read access to this folder and its contents.

  3. Specify the Emails for notification by clicking the Add button. The notifications that new packages or new versions of the packages imported into the tenant are available in the repository are sent to the specified email addresses.

    If you specify the email address of a KUMA user, the Receive email notifications check box must be selected in the user profile. For emails that do not belong to any KUMA user, the messages are received without additional settings. The settings for connecting to the SMTP server must be specified in all cases.

  4. Click Save. The update task starts shortly. Then the task restarts according to the schedule.

To manually start the repository update:

  1. To disable automatic updates, in the Settings → Repository update section, select the Disable automatic update check box. This check box is cleared by default. You can also start a manual repository update without disabling automatic update. Starting an update manually does not affect the automatic update schedule.
  2. Specify the Update source. The following options are available:
    • Kaspersky update servers.
    • Custom source:
      • The URL to the shared folder on the HTTP server.
      • The full path to the local folder on the host with the KUMA Core

        If a local folder is used, the kuma user must have access to this folder and its contents.

  3. Specify the Emails for notification by clicking the Add button. The notifications that new packages or new versions of the packages imported into the tenant are available in the repository are sent to the specified email addresses.

    If you specify the email address of a KUMA user, the Receive email notifications check box must be selected in the user profile. For emails that do not belong to any KUMA user, the messages are received without additional settings. The settings for connecting to the SMTP server must be specified in all cases.

  4. Click Run update. Thus, you simultaneously save the settings and manually start the Repository update task.
Page top

[Topic 245074]

Configuring a custom source using Kaspersky Update Utility

You can update resources without Internet access by using a custom update source via the Kaspersky Update Utility.

Configuration consists of the following steps:

  1. Configuring a custom source using Kaspersky Update Utility:
    1. Installing and configuring Kaspersky Update Utility on one of the computers in the corporate LAN.
    2. Configuring copying of updates to a shared folder in Kaspersky Update Utility settings.
  2. Configuring update of the KUMA repository from a custom source.

Configuring a custom source using Kaspersky Update Utility:

You can download the Kaspersky Update Utility distribution kit from the Kaspersky Technical Support website.

  1. In Kaspersky Update Utility, enable the download of updates for KUMA 2.1:
    • Under ApplicationsPerimeter control, select the check box next to KUMA 2.1 to enable the update capability.
    • If you work with Kaspersky Update Utility using the command line, add the following line to the [ComponentSettings] section of the updater.ini configuration file or specify the true value for an existing line:

      KasperskyUnifiedMonitoringAndAnalysisPlatform_2_1=true

  2. In the Downloads section, specify the update source. By default, Kaspersky update servers are used as the update source.
  3. In the Downloads section, in the Update folders group of settings, specify the shared folder for Kaspersky Update Utility to download updates to. The following options are available:
    • Specify the local folder on the host where Kaspersky Update Utility is installed. Deploy the HTTP server for distributing updates and publish the local folder on it. In KUMA, in the SettingsRepository updateCustom source section, specify the URL of the local folder published on the HTTP server.
    • Specify the local folder on the host where Kaspersky Update Utility is installed. Make this local folder available over the network. Mount the network-accessible local folder on the host where KUMA is installed. In KUMA, in the SettingsRepository updateCustom source section, specify the full path to the local folder.

For detailed information about working with Kaspersky Update Utility, refer to the Kaspersky Knowledge Base.

Page top

[Topic 217870]

Exporting resources

If shared resources are hidden for a user, the user cannot export shared resources or resources that use shared resources.

To export resources:

  1. In the Resources section, click Export resources.

    The Export resources window opens with the tree of all available resources.

  2. In the Password field enter the password that must be used to protect exported data.
  3. In the Tenant drop-down list, select the tenant whose resources you want to export.
  4. Check boxes near the resources you want to export.

    If selected resources are linked to other resources, linked resources will be exported, too.

  5. Click the Export button.

The resources in a password-protected file are saved on your computer using your browser settings. The Secret resources are exported blank.

Page top

[Topic 242787]

Importing resources

To import resources:

  1. In the Resources section, click Import resources.

    The Resource import window opens.

  2. In the Tenant drop-down list, select the tenant to assign the imported resources to.
  3. In the Import source drop-down list, select one of the following options:
    • File

      If you select this option, enter the password and click the Import button.

    • Repository

      If you select this option, a list of packages available for import is displayed. We recommend starting the import with the "OOTB resources for KUMA 2.1" package and then importing the packages one by one. If you receive a "Database error" error when importing packages, try importing the package mentioned in the error message again, selecting only the specified package for import. You can also configure automatic updates.

      You can select one or more packages to import and click the Import button.

      The imported resources can only be deleted. To rename, edit or move an imported resource, make a copy of the resource using the Duplicate button and perform the desired actions with the resource copy. When importing future versions of the package, the duplicate is not updated because it is a separate object.

  4. Resolve the conflicts between the resources imported from the file and the existing resources if they occur. Read more about resource conflicts below.
    1. If the name, type, and guid of an imported resource fully match the name, type, and guid of an existing resource, the Conflicts window opens with the table displaying the type and the name of the conflicting resources. Resolve displayed conflicts:
      • To replace the existing resource with a new one, click Replace.

        To replace all conflicting resources, click Replace all.

      • To leave the existing resource, click Skip.

        To keep all existing resources, click Skip all.

    2. Click the Resolve button.

    The resources are imported to KUMA. The Secret resources are imported blank.

About conflict resolving

When resources are imported into KUMA from a file, they are compared with existing resources; the following parameters are compared:

  • Name and kind. If an imported resource's name and kind parameters match those of the existing one, the imported resource's name is automatically changed.
  • ID. If identifiers of two resources match, a conflict appears that must be resolved by the user. This could happen when you import resources to the same KUMA server from which they were exported.

When resolving a conflict you can choose either to replace existing resource with the imported one or to keep exiting resource, skipping the imported one.

Some resources are linked: for example, in some types of connectors, the connector secret must be specified. The secrets are also imported if they are linked to a connector. Such linked resources are exported and imported together.

Special considerations of import:

  1. Resources are imported to the selected tenant.
  2. Starting with version 2.1.3, if a linked resource is in the Shared tenant, it ends up in the Shared tenant when imported.
  3. In version 2.1.3 and later, in the Conflicts window, the Parent column always displays the top-most parent resource among those that were selected during import.
  4. In version 2.1.3 and later, if a conflict occurs during import and you choose to replace existing resource with a new one, it would mean that all the other resources linked to the one being replaced are automatically replaced with the imported resources.

Known bugs in version 2.1.3:

  1. The linked resource ends up in the tenant specified during the import, and not in the Shared tenant, as indicated in the Conflicts window, under the following conditions:
    1. The associated resource is initially in the Shared tenant.
    2. In the Conflicts window, you select Skip for all parent objects of the linked resource from the Shared tenant.
    3. You leave the linked resource from the Shared tenant for replacement.
  2. After importing, the categories do not have a tenant specified in the filter under the following conditions:
    1. The filter contains linked asset categories from different tenants.
    2. Asset category names are the same.
    3. You are importing this filter with linked asset categories to a new server.
  3. In Tenant 1, the name of the asset category is duplicated under the following conditions:
    1. in Tenant 1, you have a filter with linked asset categories from Tenant 1 and the Shared tenant.
    2. The names of the linked asset categories are the same.
    3. You are importing such a filter from Tenant 1 to the Shared tenant.
  4. You cannot import conflicting resources into the same tenant.

    The error "Unable to import conflicting resources into the same tenant" means that the imported package contains conflicting resources from different tenants and cannot be imported into the Shared tenant.

    Solution: Select a tenant other than Shared to import the package. In this case, during the import, resources originally located in the Shared tenant are imported into the Shared tenant, and resources from the other tenant are imported into the tenant selected during import.

  5. Only the general administrator can import categories into the Shared tenant.

    The error "Only the general administrator can import categories into the Shared tenant" means that the imported package contains resources with linked shared asset categories. You can see the categories or resources with linked shared asset categories in the KUMA Core log. Path to the Core log:

    /opt/kaspersky/kuma/core/log/core

    Solution. Choose one of the following options:

    • Do not import resources to which shared categories are linked: clear the check boxes next to the relevant resources.
    • Perform the import under a General administrator account.
  6. Only the general administrator can import resources into the Shared tenant.

    The error "Only the general administrator can import resources into the Shared tenant" means that the imported package contains resources with linked shared resources. You can see the resources with linked shared resources in the KUMA Core log. Path to the Core log:

    /opt/kaspersky/kuma/core/log/core

    Solution. Choose one of the following options:

    • Do not import resources that have linked resources from the Shared tenant, and the shared resources themselves: clear the check boxes next to the relevant resources.
    • Perform the import under a General administrator account.
Page top

[Topic 217842]

Destinations

Destinations define network settings for sending normalized events. Collectors and correlators use destinations to describe where to send processed events. Typically, the destination points are the correlator and storage.

The settings of destinations are configured on two tabs: Basic settings and Advanced settings. The available settings depend on the selected type of destination:

In this section

Nats type

Tcp type

Http type

Diode type

Kafka type

File type

Storage type

Correlator type

Predefined destinations

Page top

[Topic 232952]

Nats type

The nats-jetstream type is used for NATS communications.

Basic settings tab

Setting

Description

Name

Required setting.

Unique name of the resource. Must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.

Tenant

Required setting.

The name of the tenant that owns the resource.

Disabled switch

Used when events must not be sent to the destination.

By default, sending events is enabled.

Type

Required setting.

Destination type, nats-jetstream.

URL

Required setting.

URL that you want to connect to.

Topic

Required setting.

The topic of NATS messages. Must contain Unicode characters.

Delimiter

Specify a character that defines where one event ends and the other begins. By default, \n is used.

Authorization

Type of authorization when connecting to the specified URL Possible values:

  • disabled is the default value.
  • plain — if this option is selected, you must indicate the secret containing user account credentials for authorization when connecting to the connector.

    Add secret

    1. If you previously created a secret, select it from the Secret drop-down list.

      If no secret was previously added, the drop-down list shows No data.

    2. If you want to add a new secret, click the AD_plus button on the right of the Secret list.

      The Secret window opens.

    3. In the Name field, enter the name that will be used to display the secret in the list of available secrets.
    4. In the User and Password fields, enter the credentials of the user account that the Agent will use to connect to the connector.
    5. If necessary, add any other information about the secret in the Description field.
    6. Click the Save button.

    The secret will be added and displayed in the Secret list.

Description

Resource description: up to 4,000 Unicode characters.

Advanced settings tab

Setting

Description

Compression

You can use Snappy compression. By default, compression is disabled.

Buffer size

Sets the size of the buffer.

The default value is 1 KB, and the maximum value is 64 MB.

Timeout

The time (in seconds) to wait for a response from another service or component.

The default value is 30.

Disk buffer size limit

Size of the disk buffer in bytes.

The default value is 10 GB.

Cluster ID

ID of the NATS cluster.

TLS mode

Use of TLS encryption. Available values:

  • Disabled (default) means TLS encryption is not used.
  • Enabled means encryption is used, but the certificate is not verified.
  • With verification means encryption is used with verification that the certificate was signed with the KUMA root certificate. The root certificate and key of KUMA are created automatically during program installation and are stored on the KUMA Core server in the folder /opt/kaspersky/kuma/core/certificates/.
  • Custom CA means encryption is used with verification that the certificate was signed by a Certificate Authority. The secret containing the certificate is selected from the Custom CA drop-down list, which is displayed when this option is selected.

    Creating a certificate signed by a Certificate Authority

    To use this TLS mode, you must do the following on the KUMA Core server (OpenSSL commands are used in the examples below):

    1. Create the key that will be used by the Certificate Authority.

      Example command:

      openssl genrsa -out ca.key 2048

    2. Generate a certificate for the key that was just created.

      Example command:

      openssl req -new -x509 -days 365 -key ca.key -subj "/CN=<common host name of Certificate Authority>" -out ca.crt

    3. Create a private key and a request to have it signed by the Certificate Authority.

      Example command:

      openssl req -newkey rsa:2048 -nodes -keyout server.key -subj "/CN=<common host name of KUMA server>" -out server.csr

    4. Create a certificate signed by the Certificate Authority. The subjectAltName must include the domain names or IP addresses of the server for which the certificate is being created.

      Example command:

      openssl x509 -req -extfile <(printf "subjectAltName=DNS:domain1.ru,DNS:domain2.com,IP:192.168.0.1") -days 365 -in server.csr -CA ca.crt -CAkey ca.key -CAcreateserial -out server.crt

    5. The obtained server.crt certificate should be uploaded in the KUMA web interface as a certificate-type secret, which should then be selected from the Custom CA drop-down list.

    When using TLS, it is impossible to specify an IP address as a URL.

Delimiter

In the drop-down list, you can select the character to mark the boundary between events. By default, \n is used.

Buffer flush interval

Time (in seconds) between sending batches of data to the destination. The default value is 1 second.

Workers

This field is used to set the number of services processing the queue. By default, this value is equal to the number of vCPUs of the KUMA Core server.

Debug

A drop-down list in which you can specify whether resource logging must be enabled. The default value is Disabled.

Disk buffer disabled

Drop-down list that lets you enable or disable the disk buffer. By default, the disk buffer is enabled.

The disk buffer is used if the collector cannot send normalized events to the destination. The amount of allocated disk space is limited by the value of the Disk buffer size limit setting.

If the disk space allocated for the disk buffer is exhausted, events are rotated as follows: new events replace the oldest events written to the buffer.

Filter

In the Filter section, you can specify the criteria for identifying events that must be processed by the resource. You can select an existing filter from the drop-down list or create a new filter.

Creating a filter in resources

  1. In the Filter drop-down list, select Create new.
  2. If you want to keep the filter as a separate resource, select the Save filter check box.

    In this case, you will be able to use the created filter in various services.

    This check box is cleared by default.

  3. If you selected the Save filter check box, enter a name for the created filter resource in the Name field. The name must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
  4. In the Conditions settings block, specify the conditions that the events must meet:
    1. Click the Add condition button.
    2. In the Left operand and Right operand drop-down lists, specify the search parameters.

      Depending on the data source selected in the Right operand field, you may see fields of additional parameters that you need to use to define the value that will be passed to the filter. For example, when choosing active list you will need to specify the name of the active list, the entry key, and the entry key field.

    3. In the operator drop-down list, select the relevant operator.

      Filter operators

      • =—the left operand equals the right operand.
      • <—the left operand is less than the right operand.
      • <=—the left operand is less than or equal to the right operand.
      • >—the left operand is greater than the right operand.
      • >=—the left operand is greater than or equal to the right operand.
      • inSubnet—the left operand (IP address) is in the subnet of the right operand (subnet).
      • contains—the left operand contains values of the right operand.
      • startsWith—the left operand starts with one of the values of the right operand.
      • endsWith—the left operand ends with one of the values of the right operand.
      • match—the left operand matches the regular expression of the right operand. The RE2 regular expressions are used.
      • hasBit—checks whether the left operand (string or number) contains bits whose positions are listed in the right operand (in a constant or in a list).

        The value to be checked is converted to binary and processed right to left. Chars are checked whose index is specified as a constant or a list.

        If the value being checked is a string, then an attempt is made to convert it to integer and process it in the way described above. If the string cannot be converted to a number, the filter returns False.

      • hasVulnerability—checks whether the left operand contains an asset with the vulnerability and vulnerability severity specified in the right operand.

        If you do not specify the ID and severity of the vulnerability, the filter is triggered if the asset in the event being checked has any vulnerability.

      • inActiveList—this operator has only one operand. Its values are selected in the Key fields field and are compared with the entries in the active list selected from the Active List drop-down list.
      • inContextTable checks whether or not an entry exists in the context table. This operator has only one operand. Its values are selected in the Key fields field and are compared with the values of entries in the context table selected from the drop-down list of context tables.
      • inDictionary—checks whether the specified dictionary contains an entry defined by the key composed with the concatenated values of the selected event fields.
      • inCategory—the asset in the left operand is assigned at least one of the asset categories of the right operand.
      • inActiveDirectoryGroup—the Active Directory account in the left operand belongs to one of the Active Directory groups in the right operand.
      • TIDetect—this operator is used to find events using CyberTrace Threat Intelligence (TI) data. This operator can be used only on events that have completed enrichment with data from CyberTrace Threat Intelligence. In other words, it can only be used in collectors at the destination selection stage and in correlators.
    4. If necessary, select the do not match case check box. When this check box is selected, the operator ignores the case of the values.

      The selection of this check box does not apply to the InSubnet, InActiveList, InCategory or InActiveDirectoryGroup operators.

      This check box is cleared by default.

    5. If you want to add a negative condition, select If not from the If drop-down list.
    6. You can add multiple conditions or a group of conditions.
  5. If you have added multiple conditions or groups of conditions, choose a search condition (and, or, not) by clicking the AND button.
  6. If you want to add existing filters that are selected from the Select filter drop-down list, click the Add filter button.

    You can view the nested filter settings by clicking the edit-grey button.

Page top

[Topic 232960]

Tcp type

The tcp type is used for TCP communications.

Basic settings tab

Setting

Description

Name

Required setting.

Unique name of the resource. Must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.

Tenant

Required setting.

The name of the tenant that owns the resource.

Disabled switch

Used when events must not be sent to the destination.

By default, sending events is enabled.

Type

Required setting.

Destination type, tcp.

URL

Required setting.

URL that you want to connect to. Available formats: <host>:<port>, <IPv4>:<port>, :<port>.

IPv6 addresses are also supported. When using IPv6 addresses, you must also specify the interface in the [address%interface]:port format.

For example, [fe80::5054:ff:fe4d:ba0c%eth0]:4222).

Description

Resource description: up to 4,000 Unicode characters.

Advanced settings tab

Setting

Description

Compression

You can use Snappy compression. By default, compression is disabled.

Buffer size

Sets the size of the buffer.

The default value is 1 KB, and the maximum value is 64 MB.

Timeout

The time (in seconds) to wait for a response from another service or component.

The default value is 30.

Disk buffer size limit

Size of the disk buffer in bytes.

The default value is 10 GB.

TLS mode

TLS encryption mode using certificates in pem x509 format. Available values:

  • Disabled means TLS encryption is not used. The default value.
  • Enabled means encryption is used, but certificates are not verified.
  • With verification means encryption is used with verification that the certificate was signed with the KUMA root certificate. The root certificate and key of KUMA are created automatically during program installation and are stored on the KUMA Core server in the folder /opt/kaspersky/kuma/core/certificates/.

When using TLS, it is impossible to specify an IP address as a URL.

Delimiter

In the drop-down list, you can select the character to mark the boundary between events. By default, \n is used.

Buffer flush interval

Time (in seconds) between sending batches of data to the destination. The default value is 1 second.

Workers

This field is used to set the number of services processing the queue. By default, this value is equal to the number of vCPUs of the KUMA Core server.

Debug

A drop-down list in which you can specify whether resource logging must be enabled. The default value is Disabled.

Disk buffer disabled

Drop-down list that lets you enable or disable the disk buffer. By default, the disk buffer is enabled.

The disk buffer is used if the collector cannot send normalized events to the destination. The amount of allocated disk space is limited by the value of the Disk buffer size limit setting.

If the disk space allocated for the disk buffer is exhausted, events are rotated as follows: new events replace the oldest events written to the buffer.

Filter

In this section, you can specify the criteria for identifying events that must be processed by the resource. You can select an existing filter from the drop-down list or create a new filter.

Creating a filter in resources

  1. In the Filter drop-down list, select Create new.
  2. If you want to keep the filter as a separate resource, select the Save filter check box.

    In this case, you will be able to use the created filter in various services.

    This check box is cleared by default.

  3. If you selected the Save filter check box, enter a name for the created filter resource in the Name field. The name must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
  4. In the Conditions settings block, specify the conditions that the events must meet:
    1. Click the Add condition button.
    2. In the Left operand and Right operand drop-down lists, specify the search parameters.

      Depending on the data source selected in the Right operand field, you may see fields of additional parameters that you need to use to define the value that will be passed to the filter. For example, when choosing active list you will need to specify the name of the active list, the entry key, and the entry key field.

    3. In the operator drop-down list, select the relevant operator.

      Filter operators

      • =—the left operand equals the right operand.
      • <—the left operand is less than the right operand.
      • <=—the left operand is less than or equal to the right operand.
      • >—the left operand is greater than the right operand.
      • >=—the left operand is greater than or equal to the right operand.
      • inSubnet—the left operand (IP address) is in the subnet of the right operand (subnet).
      • contains—the left operand contains values of the right operand.
      • startsWith—the left operand starts with one of the values of the right operand.
      • endsWith—the left operand ends with one of the values of the right operand.
      • match—the left operand matches the regular expression of the right operand. The RE2 regular expressions are used.
      • hasBit—checks whether the left operand (string or number) contains bits whose positions are listed in the right operand (in a constant or in a list).

        The value to be checked is converted to binary and processed right to left. Chars are checked whose index is specified as a constant or a list.

        If the value being checked is a string, then an attempt is made to convert it to integer and process it in the way described above. If the string cannot be converted to a number, the filter returns False.

      • hasVulnerability—checks whether the left operand contains an asset with the vulnerability and vulnerability severity specified in the right operand.

        If you do not specify the ID and severity of the vulnerability, the filter is triggered if the asset in the event being checked has any vulnerability.

      • inActiveList—this operator has only one operand. Its values are selected in the Key fields field and are compared with the entries in the active list selected from the Active List drop-down list.
      • inContextTable checks whether or not an entry exists in the context table. This operator has only one operand. Its values are selected in the Key fields field and are compared with the values of entries in the context table selected from the drop-down list of context tables.
      • inDictionary—checks whether the specified dictionary contains an entry defined by the key composed with the concatenated values of the selected event fields.
      • inCategory—the asset in the left operand is assigned at least one of the asset categories of the right operand.
      • inActiveDirectoryGroup—the Active Directory account in the left operand belongs to one of the Active Directory groups in the right operand.
      • TIDetect—this operator is used to find events using CyberTrace Threat Intelligence (TI) data. This operator can be used only on events that have completed enrichment with data from CyberTrace Threat Intelligence. In other words, it can only be used in collectors at the destination selection stage and in correlators.
    4. If necessary, select the do not match case check box. When this check box is selected, the operator ignores the case of the values.

      The selection of this check box does not apply to the InSubnet, InActiveList, InCategory or InActiveDirectoryGroup operators.

      This check box is cleared by default.

    5. If you want to add a negative condition, select If not from the If drop-down list.
    6. You can add multiple conditions or a group of conditions.
  5. If you have added multiple conditions or groups of conditions, choose a search condition (and, or, not) by clicking the AND button.
  6. If you want to add existing filters that are selected from the Select filter drop-down list, click the Add filter button.

    You can view the nested filter settings by clicking the edit-grey button.

Page top

[Topic 232961]

Http type

The http type is used for HTTP communications.

Basic settings tab

Setting

Description

Name

Required setting.

Unique name of the resource. Must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.

Tenant

Required setting.

The name of the tenant that owns the resource.

Disabled switch

Used when events must not be sent to the destination.

By default, sending events is enabled.

Type

Required setting.

Destination type, http.

URL

Required setting.

URL that you want to connect to.

Available formats: <host>:<port>, <IPv4>:<port>, :<port>.

IPv6 addresses are also supported, however, when you use them, you must specify the interface as well: [address%interface]:port.
Example: [fe80::5054:ff:fe4d:ba0c%eth0]:4222).

Authorization

Type of authorization when connecting to the specified URL Possible values:

  • disabled is the default value.
  • plain: if this option is selected, you must indicate the secret containing user account credentials for authorization when connecting to the connector.

    Add secret

    1. If you previously created a secret, select it from the Secret drop-down list.

      If no secret was previously added, the drop-down list shows No data.

    2. If you want to add a new secret, click the AD_plus button on the right of the Secret list.

      The Secret window opens.

    3. In the Name field, enter the name that will be used to display the secret in the list of available secrets.
    4. In the User and Password fields, enter the credentials of the user account that the Agent will use to connect to the connector.
    5. If necessary, add any other information about the secret in the Description field.
    6. Click the Save button.

    The secret will be added and displayed in the Secret list.

Description

Resource description: up to 4,000 Unicode characters.

Advanced settings tab

Setting

Description

Compression

You can use Snappy compression. By default, compression is disabled.

Buffer size

Sets the size of the buffer.

The default value is 1 KB, and the maximum value is 64 MB.

Timeout

The time (in seconds) to wait for a response from another service or component.

The default value is 30.

Disk buffer size limit

Size of the disk buffer in bytes.

The default value is 10 GB.

TLS mode

Use of TLS encryption. Available values:

  • Disabled (default) means TLS encryption is not used.
  • Enabled means encryption is used, but the certificate is not verified.
  • With verification means encryption is used with verification that the certificate was signed with the KUMA root certificate. The root certificate and key of KUMA are created automatically during program installation and are stored on the KUMA Core server in the folder /opt/kaspersky/kuma/core/certificates/.
  • Custom CA means encryption is used with verification that the certificate was signed by a Certificate Authority. The secret containing the certificate is selected from the Custom CA drop-down list, which is displayed when this option is selected.

    Creating a certificate signed by a Certificate Authority

    To use this TLS mode, you must do the following on the KUMA Core server (OpenSSL commands are used in the examples below):

    1. Create the key that will be used by the Certificate Authority.

      Example command:

      openssl genrsa -out ca.key 2048

    2. Generate a certificate for the key that was just created.

      Example command:

      openssl req -new -x509 -days 365 -key ca.key -subj "/CN=<common host name of Certificate Authority>" -out ca.crt

    3. Create a private key and a request to have it signed by the Certificate Authority.

      Example command:

      openssl req -newkey rsa:2048 -nodes -keyout server.key -subj "/CN=<common host name of KUMA server>" -out server.csr

    4. Create a certificate signed by the Certificate Authority. The subjectAltName must include the domain names or IP addresses of the server for which the certificate is being created.

      Example command:

      openssl x509 -req -extfile <(printf "subjectAltName=DNS:domain1.ru,DNS:domain2.com,IP:192.168.0.1") -days 365 -in server.csr -CA ca.crt -CAkey ca.key -CAcreateserial -out server.crt

    5. The obtained server.crt certificate should be uploaded in the KUMA web interface as a certificate-type secret, which should then be selected from the Custom CA drop-down list.

    When using TLS, it is impossible to specify an IP address as a URL.

URL selection policy

From the drop-down list, you can select the method of deciding which URL to send events to if multiple URLs are specified. Available values:

  • Any. Events are sent to one of the available URLs as long as this URL receives events. If the connection is broken (for example, the receiving node is disconnected) a different URL will be selected as the events destination.
  • Prefer first. Events are sent to the first URL in the list of added addresses. If it becomes unavailable, events are sent to the next available node in sequence. When the first URL becomes available again, events start to be sent to it again.
  • Round robin. Packets with events will be evenly distributed among available URLs from the list. Because packets are sent either on a destination buffer overflow or on the flush timer, this URL selection policy does not guarantee an equal distribution of events to destinations.

Delimiter

In the drop-down list, you can select the character to mark the boundary between events. By default, \n is used.

Path

The path that must be added for the URL request. For example, if you specify the path /input and enter 10.10.10.10 for the URL, requests for 10.10.10.10/input will be sent from the destination.

Buffer flush interval

Time (in seconds) between sending batches of data to the destination. The default value is 1 second.

Workers

The number of services that are processing the queue. By default, this value is equal to the number of vCPUs of the KUMA Core server.

Health check path

The URL for sending requests to obtain health information about the system that the destination resource is connecting to.

Health check timeout

Frequency of the health check in seconds.

Health Check Disabled

Check box that disables the health check.

Debug

A drop-down list in which you can specify whether resource logging must be enabled. The default value is Disabled.

Disk buffer disabled

Drop-down list that lets you enable or disable the disk buffer. By default, the disk buffer is enabled.

The disk buffer is used if the collector cannot send normalized events to the destination. The amount of allocated disk space is limited by the value of the Disk buffer size limit setting.

If the disk space allocated for the disk buffer is exhausted, events are rotated as follows: new events replace the oldest events written to the buffer.

Filter

In the Filter section, you can specify the criteria for identifying events that must be processed by the resource. You can select an existing filter from the drop-down list or create a new filter.

Creating a filter in resources

  1. In the Filter drop-down list, select Create new.
  2. If you want to keep the filter as a separate resource, select the Save filter check box.

    In this case, you will be able to use the created filter in various services.

    This check box is cleared by default.

  3. If you selected the Save filter check box, enter a name for the created filter resource in the Name field. The name must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
  4. In the Conditions settings block, specify the conditions that the events must meet:
    1. Click the Add condition button.
    2. In the Left operand and Right operand drop-down lists, specify the search parameters.

      Depending on the data source selected in the Right operand field, you may see fields of additional parameters that you need to use to define the value that will be passed to the filter. For example, when choosing active list you will need to specify the name of the active list, the entry key, and the entry key field.

    3. In the operator drop-down list, select the relevant operator.

      Filter operators

      • =—the left operand equals the right operand.
      • <—the left operand is less than the right operand.
      • <=—the left operand is less than or equal to the right operand.
      • >—the left operand is greater than the right operand.
      • >=—the left operand is greater than or equal to the right operand.
      • inSubnet—the left operand (IP address) is in the subnet of the right operand (subnet).
      • contains—the left operand contains values of the right operand.
      • startsWith—the left operand starts with one of the values of the right operand.
      • endsWith—the left operand ends with one of the values of the right operand.
      • match—the left operand matches the regular expression of the right operand. The RE2 regular expressions are used.
      • hasBit—checks whether the left operand (string or number) contains bits whose positions are listed in the right operand (in a constant or in a list).

        The value to be checked is converted to binary and processed right to left. Chars are checked whose index is specified as a constant or a list.

        If the value being checked is a string, then an attempt is made to convert it to integer and process it in the way described above. If the string cannot be converted to a number, the filter returns False.

      • hasVulnerability—checks whether the left operand contains an asset with the vulnerability and vulnerability severity specified in the right operand.

        If you do not specify the ID and severity of the vulnerability, the filter is triggered if the asset in the event being checked has any vulnerability.

      • inActiveList—this operator has only one operand. Its values are selected in the Key fields field and are compared with the entries in the active list selected from the Active List drop-down list.
      • inContextTable checks whether or not an entry exists in the context table. This operator has only one operand. Its values are selected in the Key fields field and are compared with the values of entries in the context table selected from the drop-down list of context tables.
      • inDictionary—checks whether the specified dictionary contains an entry defined by the key composed with the concatenated values of the selected event fields.
      • inCategory—the asset in the left operand is assigned at least one of the asset categories of the right operand.
      • inActiveDirectoryGroup—the Active Directory account in the left operand belongs to one of the Active Directory groups in the right operand.
      • TIDetect—this operator is used to find events using CyberTrace Threat Intelligence (TI) data. This operator can be used only on events that have completed enrichment with data from CyberTrace Threat Intelligence. In other words, it can only be used in collectors at the destination selection stage and in correlators.
    4. If necessary, select the do not match case check box. When this check box is selected, the operator ignores the case of the values.

      The selection of this check box does not apply to the InSubnet, InActiveList, InCategory or InActiveDirectoryGroup operators.

      This check box is cleared by default.

    5. If you want to add a negative condition, select If not from the If drop-down list.
    6. You can add multiple conditions or a group of conditions.
  5. If you have added multiple conditions or groups of conditions, choose a search condition (and, or, not) by clicking the AND button.
  6. If you want to add existing filters that are selected from the Select filter drop-down list, click the Add filter button.

    You can view the nested filter settings by clicking the edit-grey button.

Page top

[Topic 232967]

Diode type

The diode type is used to transmit events using a data diode.

Basic settings tab

Setting

Description

Name

Required setting.

Unique name of the resource. Must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.

Tenant

Required setting.

The name of the tenant that owns the resource.

Disabled switch

Used when events must not be sent to the destination.

By default, sending events is enabled.

Type

Required setting.

Destination type, diode.

Data diode source directory

Required setting.

The directory from which the data diode moves events. The path can contain up to 255 Unicode characters.

Limitations when using prefixes in paths on Windows servers

On Windows servers, absolute paths to directories must be specified. Directories with names matching the following regular expressions cannot be used:

  • ^[a-zA-Z]:\\Program Files
  • ^[a-zA-Z]:\\Program Files \(x86\)
  • ^[a-zA-Z]:\\Windows
  • ^[a-zA-Z]:\\Program Files\\Kaspersky Lab\\KUMA

Limitations when using prefixes in paths on Linux servers

Prefixes that cannot be used when specifying paths to files:

  • /*
  • /bin
  • /boot
  • /dev
  • /etc
  • /home
  • /lib
  • /lib64
  • /proc
  • /root
  • /run
  • /sys
  • /tmp
  • /usr/*
  • /usr/bin/
  • /usr/local/*
  • /usr/local/sbin/
  • /usr/local/bin/
  • /usr/sbin/
  • /usr/lib/
  • /usr/lib64/
  • /var/*
  • /var/lib/
  • /var/run/
  • /opt/kaspersky/kuma/

Files are available at the following paths:

  • /opt/kaspersky/kuma/clickhouse/logs/
  • /opt/kaspersky/kuma/mongodb/log/
  • /opt/kaspersky/kuma/victoria-metrics/log/

Temporary directory

Directory in which events are prepared for transmission to the data diode.

Events are collected in a file when a timeout (10 seconds by default) or a buffer overflow occurs. The prepared file is moved to the directory specified in the Data diode source directory field. The checksum (SHA-256) of the file contents is used as the name of the file containing events.

The temporary directory must be different from the data diode source directory.

Description

Resource description: up to 4,000 Unicode characters.

Advanced settings tab

Setting

Description

Compression

You can use Snappy compression. By default, compression is disabled.

This setting must match for the connector and destination resources used to relay events from an isolated network segment via the data diode.

Buffer size

Sets the size of the buffer.

The default value is 1 KB, and the maximum value is 64 MB.

Delimiter

In the drop-down list, you can select the character to mark the boundary between events. By default, \n is used.

This setting must match for the connector and destination resources used to relay events from an isolated network segment via the data diode.

Buffer flush interval

Time (in seconds) between sending batches of data to the destination. The default value is 1 second.

Workers

This field is used to set the number of services processing the queue. By default, this value is equal to the number of vCPUs of the KUMA Core server.

Debug

A drop-down list in which you can specify whether resource logging must be enabled. The default value is Disabled.

Filter

In the Filter section, you can specify the criteria for identifying events that must be processed by the resource. You can select an existing filter from the drop-down list or create a new filter.

Creating a filter in resources

  1. In the Filter drop-down list, select Create new.
  2. If you want to keep the filter as a separate resource, select the Save filter check box.

    In this case, you will be able to use the created filter in various services.

    This check box is cleared by default.

  3. If you selected the Save filter check box, enter a name for the created filter resource in the Name field. The name must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
  4. In the Conditions settings block, specify the conditions that the events must meet:
    1. Click the Add condition button.
    2. In the Left operand and Right operand drop-down lists, specify the search parameters.

      Depending on the data source selected in the Right operand field, you may see fields of additional parameters that you need to use to define the value that will be passed to the filter. For example, when choosing active list you will need to specify the name of the active list, the entry key, and the entry key field.

    3. In the operator drop-down list, select the relevant operator.

      Filter operators

      • =—the left operand equals the right operand.
      • <—the left operand is less than the right operand.
      • <=—the left operand is less than or equal to the right operand.
      • >—the left operand is greater than the right operand.
      • >=—the left operand is greater than or equal to the right operand.
      • inSubnet—the left operand (IP address) is in the subnet of the right operand (subnet).
      • contains—the left operand contains values of the right operand.
      • startsWith—the left operand starts with one of the values of the right operand.
      • endsWith—the left operand ends with one of the values of the right operand.
      • match—the left operand matches the regular expression of the right operand. The RE2 regular expressions are used.
      • hasBit—checks whether the left operand (string or number) contains bits whose positions are listed in the right operand (in a constant or in a list).

        The value to be checked is converted to binary and processed right to left. Chars are checked whose index is specified as a constant or a list.

        If the value being checked is a string, then an attempt is made to convert it to integer and process it in the way described above. If the string cannot be converted to a number, the filter returns False.

      • hasVulnerability—checks whether the left operand contains an asset with the vulnerability and vulnerability severity specified in the right operand.

        If you do not specify the ID and severity of the vulnerability, the filter is triggered if the asset in the event being checked has any vulnerability.

      • inActiveList—this operator has only one operand. Its values are selected in the Key fields field and are compared with the entries in the active list selected from the Active List drop-down list.
      • inContextTable checks whether or not an entry exists in the context table. This operator has only one operand. Its values are selected in the Key fields field and are compared with the values of entries in the context table selected from the drop-down list of context tables.
      • inDictionary—checks whether the specified dictionary contains an entry defined by the key composed with the concatenated values of the selected event fields.
      • inCategory—the asset in the left operand is assigned at least one of the asset categories of the right operand.
      • inActiveDirectoryGroup—the Active Directory account in the left operand belongs to one of the Active Directory groups in the right operand.
      • TIDetect—this operator is used to find events using CyberTrace Threat Intelligence (TI) data. This operator can be used only on events that have completed enrichment with data from CyberTrace Threat Intelligence. In other words, it can only be used in collectors at the destination selection stage and in correlators.
    4. If necessary, select the do not match case check box. When this check box is selected, the operator ignores the case of the values.

      The selection of this check box does not apply to the InSubnet, InActiveList, InCategory or InActiveDirectoryGroup operators.

      This check box is cleared by default.

    5. If you want to add a negative condition, select If not from the If drop-down list.
    6. You can add multiple conditions or a group of conditions.
  5. If you have added multiple conditions or groups of conditions, choose a search condition (and, or, not) by clicking the AND button.
  6. If you want to add existing filters that are selected from the Select filter drop-down list, click the Add filter button.

    You can view the nested filter settings by clicking the edit-grey button.

Page top

[Topic 232962]

Kafka type

The kafka type is used for Kafka communications.

Basic settings tab

Setting

Description

Name

Required setting.

Unique name of the resource. Must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.

Tenant

Required setting.

The name of the tenant that owns the resource.

Disabled switch

Used when events must not be sent to the destination.

By default, sending events is enabled.

Type

Required setting.

Destination type, kafka.

URL

Required setting.

URL that you want to connect to. Available formats: <host>:<port>, <IPv4>:<port>, :<port>. IPv6 addresses are also supported, however, when you use them, you must specify the interface as well: [address%interface]:port.
Example: [fe80::5054:ff:fe4d:ba0c%eth0]:4222).

You can add multiple addresses using the URL button.

Topic

Required setting.

Subject of Kafka messages. Must contain from 1 to 255 of the following characters: a–z, A–Z, 0–9, ".", "_", "-".

Delimiter

Specify a character that defines where one event ends and the other begins. By default, \n is used.

Authorization

Type of authorization when connecting to the specified URL Possible values:

  • disabled is the default value.
  • PFX — a certificate must be generated with a private key in PKCS#12 container format in an external Certificate Authority. Then the certificate must be exported from the key store and uploaded to the KUMA web interface as a PFX secret.
  • Add PFX secret
    1. If you previously uploaded a PFX certificate, select it from the Secret drop-down list.

      If no certificate was previously added, the drop-down list shows No data.

    2. If you want to add a new certificate, click the AD_plus button on the right of the Secret list.

      The Secret window opens.

    3. In the Name field, enter the name that will be used to display the secret in the list of available secrets.
    4. Click the Upload PFX button to select the file containing your previously exported certificate with a private key in PKCS#12 container format.
    5. In the Password field, enter the certificate security password that was set in the Certificate Export Wizard.
    6. Click the Save button.

    The certificate will be added and displayed in the Secret list.

  • plain — you must indicate the secret containing user account credentials for authorization when connecting to the connector.

    Add secret

    1. If you previously created a secret, select it from the Secret drop-down list.

      If no secret was previously added, the drop-down list shows No data.

    2. If you want to add a new secret, click the AD_plus button on the right of the Secret list.

      The Secret window opens.

    3. In the Name field, enter the name that will be used to display the secret in the list of available secrets.
    4. In the User and Password fields, enter the credentials of the user account that the Agent will use to connect to the connector.
    5. If necessary, add any other information about the secret in the Description field.
    6. Click the Save button.

    The secret will be added and displayed in the Secret list.

Description

Resource description: up to 4,000 Unicode characters.

Advanced settings tab

Setting

Description

Buffer size

Sets the size of the buffer.

The default value is 1 KB, and the maximum value is 64 MB.

Timeout

The time (in seconds) to wait for a response from another service or component.

The default value is 30.

Disk buffer size limit

Size of the disk buffer in bytes.

The default value is 10 GB.

TLS mode

Use of TLS encryption. Available values:

  • Disabled (default) means TLS encryption is not used.
  • Enabled means encryption is used, but the certificate is not verified.
  • With verification means encryption is used with verification that the certificate was signed with the KUMA root certificate. The root certificate and key of KUMA are created automatically during program installation and are stored on the KUMA Core server in the folder /opt/kaspersky/kuma/core/certificates/.
  • Custom CA means encryption is used with verification that the certificate was signed by a Certificate Authority. The secret containing the certificate is selected from the Custom CA drop-down list, which is displayed when this option is selected.

    Creating a certificate signed by a Certificate Authority

    To use this TLS mode, you must do the following on the KUMA Core server (OpenSSL commands are used in the examples below):

    1. Create the key that will be used by the Certificate Authority.

      Example command:

      openssl genrsa -out ca.key 2048

    2. Generate a certificate for the key that was just created.

      Example command:

      openssl req -new -x509 -days 365 -key ca.key -subj "/CN=<common host name of Certificate Authority>" -out ca.crt

    3. Create a private key and a request to have it signed by the Certificate Authority.

      Example command:

      openssl req -newkey rsa:2048 -nodes -keyout server.key -subj "/CN=<common host name of KUMA server>" -out server.csr

    4. Create a certificate signed by the Certificate Authority. The subjectAltName must include the domain names or IP addresses of the server for which the certificate is being created.

      Example command:

      openssl x509 -req -extfile <(printf "subjectAltName=DNS:domain1.ru,DNS:domain2.com,IP:192.168.0.1") -days 365 -in server.csr -CA ca.crt -CAkey ca.key -CAcreateserial -out server.crt

    5. The obtained server.crt certificate should be uploaded in the KUMA web interface as a certificate-type secret, which should then be selected from the Custom CA drop-down list.

    When using TLS, it is impossible to specify an IP address as a URL.

Delimiter

In the drop-down list, you can select the character to mark the boundary between events. By default, \n is used.

Buffer flush interval

Time (in seconds) between sending batches of data to the destination. The default value is 1 second.

Workers

This field is used to set the number of services processing the queue. By default, this value is equal to the number of vCPUs of the KUMA Core server.

Debug

A drop-down list in which you can specify whether resource logging must be enabled. The default value is Disabled.

Disk buffer disabled

Drop-down list that lets you enable or disable the disk buffer. By default, the disk buffer is enabled.

The disk buffer is used if the collector cannot send normalized events to the destination. The amount of allocated disk space is limited by the value of the Disk buffer size limit setting.

If the disk space allocated for the disk buffer is exhausted, events are rotated as follows: new events replace the oldest events written to the buffer.

Filter

In this section, you can specify the criteria for identifying events that must be processed by the resource. You can select an existing filter from the drop-down list or create a new filter.

Creating a filter in resources

  1. In the Filter drop-down list, select Create new.
  2. If you want to keep the filter as a separate resource, select the Save filter check box.

    In this case, you will be able to use the created filter in various services.

    This check box is cleared by default.

  3. If you selected the Save filter check box, enter a name for the created filter resource in the Name field. The name must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
  4. In the Conditions settings block, specify the conditions that the events must meet:
    1. Click the Add condition button.
    2. In the Left operand and Right operand drop-down lists, specify the search parameters.

      Depending on the data source selected in the Right operand field, you may see fields of additional parameters that you need to use to define the value that will be passed to the filter. For example, when choosing active list you will need to specify the name of the active list, the entry key, and the entry key field.

    3. In the operator drop-down list, select the relevant operator.

      Filter operators

      • =—the left operand equals the right operand.
      • <—the left operand is less than the right operand.
      • <=—the left operand is less than or equal to the right operand.
      • >—the left operand is greater than the right operand.
      • >=—the left operand is greater than or equal to the right operand.
      • inSubnet—the left operand (IP address) is in the subnet of the right operand (subnet).
      • contains—the left operand contains values of the right operand.
      • startsWith—the left operand starts with one of the values of the right operand.
      • endsWith—the left operand ends with one of the values of the right operand.
      • match—the left operand matches the regular expression of the right operand. The RE2 regular expressions are used.
      • hasBit—checks whether the left operand (string or number) contains bits whose positions are listed in the right operand (in a constant or in a list).

        The value to be checked is converted to binary and processed right to left. Chars are checked whose index is specified as a constant or a list.

        If the value being checked is a string, then an attempt is made to convert it to integer and process it in the way described above. If the string cannot be converted to a number, the filter returns False.

      • hasVulnerability—checks whether the left operand contains an asset with the vulnerability and vulnerability severity specified in the right operand.

        If you do not specify the ID and severity of the vulnerability, the filter is triggered if the asset in the event being checked has any vulnerability.

      • inActiveList—this operator has only one operand. Its values are selected in the Key fields field and are compared with the entries in the active list selected from the Active List drop-down list.
      • inContextTable checks whether or not an entry exists in the context table. This operator has only one operand. Its values are selected in the Key fields field and are compared with the values of entries in the context table selected from the drop-down list of context tables.
      • inDictionary—checks whether the specified dictionary contains an entry defined by the key composed with the concatenated values of the selected event fields.
      • inCategory—the asset in the left operand is assigned at least one of the asset categories of the right operand.
      • inActiveDirectoryGroup—the Active Directory account in the left operand belongs to one of the Active Directory groups in the right operand.
      • TIDetect—this operator is used to find events using CyberTrace Threat Intelligence (TI) data. This operator can be used only on events that have completed enrichment with data from CyberTrace Threat Intelligence. In other words, it can only be used in collectors at the destination selection stage and in correlators.
    4. If necessary, select the do not match case check box. When this check box is selected, the operator ignores the case of the values.

      The selection of this check box does not apply to the InSubnet, InActiveList, InCategory or InActiveDirectoryGroup operators.

      This check box is cleared by default.

    5. If you want to add a negative condition, select If not from the If drop-down list.
    6. You can add multiple conditions or a group of conditions.
  5. If you have added multiple conditions or groups of conditions, choose a search condition (and, or, not) by clicking the AND button.
  6. If you want to add existing filters that are selected from the Select filter drop-down list, click the Add filter button.

    You can view the nested filter settings by clicking the edit-grey button.

Page top

[Topic 232965]

File type

The file type is used for writing data to a file.

If you delete a destination of the 'file' type used in a service, that service must be restarted.

Basic settings tab

Setting

Description

Name

Required setting.

Unique name of the resource. Must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.

Tenant

Required setting.

The name of the tenant that owns the resource.

Disabled switch

Used when events must not be sent to the destination.

By default, sending events is enabled.

Type

Required setting.

Destination type, file.

URL

Required setting.

Path to the file to which the events must be written.

Limitations when using prefixes in file paths

Prefixes that cannot be used when specifying paths to files:

  • /*
  • /bin
  • /boot
  • /dev
  • /etc
  • /home
  • /lib
  • /lib64
  • /proc
  • /root
  • /run
  • /sys
  • /tmp
  • /usr/*
  • /usr/bin/
  • /usr/local/*
  • /usr/local/sbin/
  • /usr/local/bin/
  • /usr/sbin/
  • /usr/lib/
  • /usr/lib64/
  • /var/*
  • /var/lib/
  • /var/run/
  • /opt/kaspersky/kuma/

Files are available at the following paths:

  • /opt/kaspersky/kuma/clickhouse/logs/
  • /opt/kaspersky/kuma/mongodb/log/
  • /opt/kaspersky/kuma/victoria-metrics/log/

Description

Resource description: up to 4,000 Unicode characters.

Advanced settings tab

Setting

Description

Buffer size

Sets the size of the buffer.

The default value is 1 KB, and the maximum value is 64 MB.

Disk buffer size limit

Size of the disk buffer in bytes.

The default value is 10 GB.

Delimiter

In the drop-down list, you can select the character to mark the boundary between events. \n is used by default.

Buffer flush interval

Time (in seconds) between sending batches of data to the destination. The default value is 1 second.

Number of handlers

This field is used to set the number of services processing the queue. By default, this value is equal to the number of vCPUs of the KUMA Core server.

Debug

A drop-down list in which you can specify whether resource logging must be enabled. The default value is Disabled.

Disk buffer disabled

Drop-down list that lets you enable or disable the disk buffer. By default, the disk buffer is enabled.

The disk buffer is used if the collector cannot send normalized events to the destination. The amount of allocated disk space is limited by the value of the Disk buffer size limit setting.

If the disk space allocated for the disk buffer is exhausted, events are rotated as follows: new events replace the oldest events written to the buffer.

Filter

In the Filter section, you can specify the criteria for identifying events that must be processed by the resource. You can select an existing filter from the drop-down list or create a new filter.

Creating a filter in resources

  1. In the Filter drop-down list, select Create new.
  2. If you want to keep the filter as a separate resource, select the Save filter check box.

    In this case, you will be able to use the created filter in various services.

    This check box is cleared by default.

  3. If you selected the Save filter check box, enter a name for the created filter resource in the Name field. The name must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
  4. In the Conditions settings block, specify the conditions that the events must meet:
    1. Click the Add condition button.
    2. In the Left operand and Right operand drop-down lists, specify the search parameters.

      Depending on the data source selected in the Right operand field, you may see fields of additional parameters that you need to use to define the value that will be passed to the filter. For example, when choosing active list you will need to specify the name of the active list, the entry key, and the entry key field.

    3. In the operator drop-down list, select the relevant operator.

      Filter operators

      • =—the left operand equals the right operand.
      • <—the left operand is less than the right operand.
      • <=—the left operand is less than or equal to the right operand.
      • >—the left operand is greater than the right operand.
      • >=—the left operand is greater than or equal to the right operand.
      • inSubnet—the left operand (IP address) is in the subnet of the right operand (subnet).
      • contains—the left operand contains values of the right operand.
      • startsWith—the left operand starts with one of the values of the right operand.
      • endsWith—the left operand ends with one of the values of the right operand.
      • match—the left operand matches the regular expression of the right operand. The RE2 regular expressions are used.
      • hasBit—checks whether the left operand (string or number) contains bits whose positions are listed in the right operand (in a constant or in a list).

        The value to be checked is converted to binary and processed right to left. Chars are checked whose index is specified as a constant or a list.

        If the value being checked is a string, then an attempt is made to convert it to integer and process it in the way described above. If the string cannot be converted to a number, the filter returns False.

      • hasVulnerability—checks whether the left operand contains an asset with the vulnerability and vulnerability severity specified in the right operand.

        If you do not specify the ID and severity of the vulnerability, the filter is triggered if the asset in the event being checked has any vulnerability.

      • inActiveList—this operator has only one operand. Its values are selected in the Key fields field and are compared with the entries in the active list selected from the Active List drop-down list.
      • inContextTable checks whether or not an entry exists in the context table. This operator has only one operand. Its values are selected in the Key fields field and are compared with the values of entries in the context table selected from the drop-down list of context tables.
      • inDictionary—checks whether the specified dictionary contains an entry defined by the key composed with the concatenated values of the selected event fields.
      • inCategory—the asset in the left operand is assigned at least one of the asset categories of the right operand.
      • inActiveDirectoryGroup—the Active Directory account in the left operand belongs to one of the Active Directory groups in the right operand.
      • TIDetect—this operator is used to find events using CyberTrace Threat Intelligence (TI) data. This operator can be used only on events that have completed enrichment with data from CyberTrace Threat Intelligence. In other words, it can only be used in collectors at the destination selection stage and in correlators.
    4. If necessary, select the do not match case check box. When this check box is selected, the operator ignores the case of the values.

      The selection of this check box does not apply to the InSubnet, InActiveList, InCategory or InActiveDirectoryGroup operators.

      This check box is cleared by default.

    5. If you want to add a negative condition, select If not from the If drop-down list.
    6. You can add multiple conditions or a group of conditions.
  5. If you have added multiple conditions or groups of conditions, choose a search condition (and, or, not) by clicking the AND button.
  6. If you want to add existing filters that are selected from the Select filter drop-down list, click the Add filter button.

    You can view the nested filter settings by clicking the edit-grey button.

Page top

[Topic 232973]

Storage type

The storage type is used to transmit data to the storage.

Basic settings tab

Setting

Description

Name

Required setting.

Unique name of the resource. Must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.

Tenant

Required setting.

The name of the tenant that owns the resource.

Disabled switch

Used when events must not be sent to the destination.

By default, sending events is enabled.

Type

Required setting.

Destination type, storage.

URL

Required setting.

URL that you want to connect to. Available formats: <host>:<port>, <IPv4>:<port>, :<port>. IPv6 addresses are also supported, however, when you use them, you must specify the interface as well: [address%interface]:port.
Example: [fe80::5054:ff:fe4d:ba0c%eth0]:4222).

You can add multiple addresses using the URL button.

The URL field supports search for services by FQDN, IP address, and name. Search string formats:

  • <Search value>—search is performed by FQDN, IP addresses, and service names.
  • <First search value ending in one or more digits>:<second search value>—the first value is used to search by the service FQDN or IP address, and the second value is used to search by port.
  • :<value>—search is performed by port.

Description

Resource description: up to 4,000 Unicode characters.

Advanced settings tab

Setting

Description

Proxy server

Drop-down list for selecting a proxy server.

Buffer size

Sets the size of the buffer.

The default value is 1 KB, and the maximum value is 64 MB.

Timeout

The time (in seconds) to wait for a response from another service or component.

The default value is 30.

Disk buffer size limit

Size of the disk buffer in bytes.

The default value is 10 GB.

URL selection policy

Drop-down list in which you can select a method for determining which URL to send events to if several URLs have been specified:

  • Any. Events are sent to one of the available URLs as long as this URL receives events. If the connection is broken (for example, the receiving node is disconnected) a different URL will be selected as the events destination.
  • Prefer first. Events are sent to the first URL in the list of added addresses. If it becomes unavailable, events are sent to the next available node in sequence. When the first URL becomes available again, events start to be sent to it again.
  • Round robin. Packets with events will be evenly distributed among available URLs from the list. Because packets are sent either on a destination buffer overflow or on the flush timer, this URL selection policy does not guarantee an equal distribution of events to destinations.

Buffer flush interval

Time (in seconds) between sending batches of data to the destination. The default value is 1 second.

Workers

This field is used to set the number of services processing the queue. By default, this value is equal to the number of vCPUs of the KUMA Core server.

Health check timeout

Frequency of the health check in seconds.

Debug

A drop-down list in which you can specify whether resource logging must be enabled. The default value is Disabled.

Disk buffer disabled

Drop-down list that lets you enable or disable the disk buffer. By default, the disk buffer is enabled.

The disk buffer is used if the collector cannot send normalized events to the destination. The amount of allocated disk space is limited by the value of the Disk buffer size limit setting.

If the disk space allocated for the disk buffer is exhausted, events are rotated as follows: new events replace the oldest events written to the buffer.

Filter

In this section, you can specify the criteria for identifying events that must be processed by the resource. You can select an existing filter from the drop-down list or create a new filter.

Creating a filter in resources

  1. In the Filter drop-down list, select Create new.
  2. If you want to keep the filter as a separate resource, select the Save filter check box.

    In this case, you will be able to use the created filter in various services.

    This check box is cleared by default.

  3. If you selected the Save filter check box, enter a name for the created filter resource in the Name field. The name must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
  4. In the Conditions settings block, specify the conditions that the events must meet:
    1. Click the Add condition button.
    2. In the Left operand and Right operand drop-down lists, specify the search parameters.

      Depending on the data source selected in the Right operand field, you may see fields of additional parameters that you need to use to define the value that will be passed to the filter. For example, when choosing active list you will need to specify the name of the active list, the entry key, and the entry key field.

    3. In the operator drop-down list, select the relevant operator.

      Filter operators

      • =—the left operand equals the right operand.
      • <—the left operand is less than the right operand.
      • <=—the left operand is less than or equal to the right operand.
      • >—the left operand is greater than the right operand.
      • >=—the left operand is greater than or equal to the right operand.
      • inSubnet—the left operand (IP address) is in the subnet of the right operand (subnet).
      • contains—the left operand contains values of the right operand.
      • startsWith—the left operand starts with one of the values of the right operand.
      • endsWith—the left operand ends with one of the values of the right operand.
      • match—the left operand matches the regular expression of the right operand. The RE2 regular expressions are used.
      • hasBit—checks whether the left operand (string or number) contains bits whose positions are listed in the right operand (in a constant or in a list).

        The value to be checked is converted to binary and processed right to left. Chars are checked whose index is specified as a constant or a list.

        If the value being checked is a string, then an attempt is made to convert it to integer and process it in the way described above. If the string cannot be converted to a number, the filter returns False.

      • hasVulnerability—checks whether the left operand contains an asset with the vulnerability and vulnerability severity specified in the right operand.

        If you do not specify the ID and severity of the vulnerability, the filter is triggered if the asset in the event being checked has any vulnerability.

      • inActiveList—this operator has only one operand. Its values are selected in the Key fields field and are compared with the entries in the active list selected from the Active List drop-down list.
      • inContextTable checks whether or not an entry exists in the context table. This operator has only one operand. Its values are selected in the Key fields field and are compared with the values of entries in the context table selected from the drop-down list of context tables.
      • inDictionary—checks whether the specified dictionary contains an entry defined by the key composed with the concatenated values of the selected event fields.
      • inCategory—the asset in the left operand is assigned at least one of the asset categories of the right operand.
      • inActiveDirectoryGroup—the Active Directory account in the left operand belongs to one of the Active Directory groups in the right operand.
      • TIDetect—this operator is used to find events using CyberTrace Threat Intelligence (TI) data. This operator can be used only on events that have completed enrichment with data from CyberTrace Threat Intelligence. In other words, it can only be used in collectors at the destination selection stage and in correlators.
    4. If necessary, select the do not match case check box. When this check box is selected, the operator ignores the case of the values.

      The selection of this check box does not apply to the InSubnet, InActiveList, InCategory or InActiveDirectoryGroup operators.

      This check box is cleared by default.

    5. If you want to add a negative condition, select If not from the If drop-down list.
    6. You can add multiple conditions or a group of conditions.
  5. If you have added multiple conditions or groups of conditions, choose a search condition (and, or, not) by clicking the AND button.
  6. If you want to add existing filters that are selected from the Select filter drop-down list, click the Add filter button.

    You can view the nested filter settings by clicking the edit-grey button.

Page top

[Topic 232976]

Correlator type

The correlator type is used to transmit data to the correlator.

Basic settings tab

Setting

Description

Name

Required setting.

Unique name of the resource. Must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.

Tenant

Required setting.

The name of the tenant that owns the resource.

Disabled switch

Used when events must not be sent to the destination.

By default, sending events is enabled.

Type

Required setting.

Destination type, correlator.

URL

Required setting.

URL that you want to connect to. Available formats: <host>:<port>, <IPv4>:<port>, :<port>. IPv6 addresses are also supported, however, when you use them, you must specify the interface as well: [address%interface]:port.
Example: [fe80::5054:ff:fe4d:ba0c%eth0]:4222).

You can add multiple addresses using the URL button.

The URL field supports search for services by FQDN, IP address, and name. Search string formats:

  • <Search value>—search is performed by FQDN, IP addresses, and service names.
  • <First search value ending in one or more digits>:<second search value>—the first value is used to search by the service FQDN or IP address, and the second value is used to search by port.
  • :<value>—search is performed by port.

Description

Resource description: up to 4,000 Unicode characters.

Advanced settings tab

Setting

Description

Proxy server

Drop-down list for selecting a proxy server.

Buffer size

Sets the size of the buffer.

The default value is 1 KB, and the maximum value is 64 MB.

Timeout

The time (in seconds) to wait for a response from another service or component.

The default value is 30.

Disk buffer size limit

Size of the disk buffer in bytes.

The default value is 10 GB.

URL selection policy

Drop-down list in which you can select a method for determining which URL to send events to if several URLs have been specified:

  • Any. Events are sent to one of the available URLs as long as this URL receives events. If the connection is broken (for example, the receiving node is disconnected) a different URL will be selected as the events destination.
  • Prefer first. Events are sent to the first URL in the list of added addresses. If it becomes unavailable, events are sent to the next available node in sequence. When the first URL becomes available again, events start to be sent to it again.
  • Round robin. Packets with events will be evenly distributed among available URLs from the list. Because packets are sent either on a destination buffer overflow or on the flush timer, this URL selection policy does not guarantee an equal distribution of events to destinations.

Buffer flush interval

Time (in seconds) between sending batches of data to the destination. The default value is 1 second.

Workers

This field is used to set the number of services processing the queue. By default, this value is equal to the number of vCPUs of the KUMA Core server.

Health check timeout

Frequency of the health check in seconds.

Debug

A drop-down list in which you can specify whether resource logging must be enabled. The default value is Disabled.

Disk buffer disabled

Drop-down list that lets you enable or disable the disk buffer. By default, the disk buffer is enabled.

The disk buffer is used if the collector cannot send normalized events to the destination. The amount of allocated disk space is limited by the value of the Disk buffer size limit setting.

If the disk space allocated for the disk buffer is exhausted, events are rotated as follows: new events replace the oldest events written to the buffer.

Filter

In the Filter section, you can specify the criteria for identifying events that must be processed by the resource. You can select an existing filter from the drop-down list or create a new filter.

Creating a filter in resources

  1. In the Filter drop-down list, select Create new.
  2. If you want to keep the filter as a separate resource, select the Save filter check box.

    In this case, you will be able to use the created filter in various services.

    This check box is cleared by default.

  3. If you selected the Save filter check box, enter a name for the created filter resource in the Name field. The name must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
  4. In the Conditions settings block, specify the conditions that the events must meet:
    1. Click the Add condition button.
    2. In the Left operand and Right operand drop-down lists, specify the search parameters.

      Depending on the data source selected in the Right operand field, you may see fields of additional parameters that you need to use to define the value that will be passed to the filter. For example, when choosing active list you will need to specify the name of the active list, the entry key, and the entry key field.

    3. In the operator drop-down list, select the relevant operator.

      Filter operators

      • =—the left operand equals the right operand.
      • <—the left operand is less than the right operand.
      • <=—the left operand is less than or equal to the right operand.
      • >—the left operand is greater than the right operand.
      • >=—the left operand is greater than or equal to the right operand.
      • inSubnet—the left operand (IP address) is in the subnet of the right operand (subnet).
      • contains—the left operand contains values of the right operand.
      • startsWith—the left operand starts with one of the values of the right operand.
      • endsWith—the left operand ends with one of the values of the right operand.
      • match—the left operand matches the regular expression of the right operand. The RE2 regular expressions are used.
      • hasBit—checks whether the left operand (string or number) contains bits whose positions are listed in the right operand (in a constant or in a list).

        The value to be checked is converted to binary and processed right to left. Chars are checked whose index is specified as a constant or a list.

        If the value being checked is a string, then an attempt is made to convert it to integer and process it in the way described above. If the string cannot be converted to a number, the filter returns False.

      • hasVulnerability—checks whether the left operand contains an asset with the vulnerability and vulnerability severity specified in the right operand.

        If you do not specify the ID and severity of the vulnerability, the filter is triggered if the asset in the event being checked has any vulnerability.

      • inActiveList—this operator has only one operand. Its values are selected in the Key fields field and are compared with the entries in the active list selected from the Active List drop-down list.
      • inContextTable checks whether or not an entry exists in the context table. This operator has only one operand. Its values are selected in the Key fields field and are compared with the values of entries in the context table selected from the drop-down list of context tables.
      • inDictionary—checks whether the specified dictionary contains an entry defined by the key composed with the concatenated values of the selected event fields.
      • inCategory—the asset in the left operand is assigned at least one of the asset categories of the right operand.
      • inActiveDirectoryGroup—the Active Directory account in the left operand belongs to one of the Active Directory groups in the right operand.
      • TIDetect—this operator is used to find events using CyberTrace Threat Intelligence (TI) data. This operator can be used only on events that have completed enrichment with data from CyberTrace Threat Intelligence. In other words, it can only be used in collectors at the destination selection stage and in correlators.
    4. If necessary, select the do not match case check box. When this check box is selected, the operator ignores the case of the values.

      The selection of this check box does not apply to the InSubnet, InActiveList, InCategory or InActiveDirectoryGroup operators.

      This check box is cleared by default.

    5. If you want to add a negative condition, select If not from the If drop-down list.
    6. You can add multiple conditions or a group of conditions.
  5. If you have added multiple conditions or groups of conditions, choose a search condition (and, or, not) by clicking the AND button.
  6. If you want to add existing filters that are selected from the Select filter drop-down list, click the Add filter button.

    You can view the nested filter settings by clicking the edit-grey button.

Page top

[Topic 250830]

Predefined destinations

Destinations listed in the table below are included in the KUMA distribution kit.

Predefined destinations

Destination name

Description

[OOTB] Correlator

Sends events to a correlator.

[OOTB] Storage

Sends events to storage.

Page top

[Topic 228267]

Working with events

In the Events section of the KUMA web interface, you can inspect events received by the program to investigate security threats or create correlation rules. The events table displays the data received after the SQL query is executed.

Events can be sent to the correlator for a retroscan.

The event date format depends on the localization language selected in the application settings. Possible date format options:

  • English localization: YYYY-MM-DD.
  • Russian localization: DD.MM.YYYY.

In this Help topic

Filtering and searching events

See also:

About events

Program architecture

Normalized event data model

Page top

[Topic 228277]

Filtering and searching events

The Events section of the KUMA web interface does not show any data by default. To view events, you need to define an SQL query in the search field and click the SearchField button. The SQL query can be entered manually or it can be generated using a query builder.

Data aggregation and grouping is supported in SQL queries.

You can add filter conditions to an already generated SQL query in the window for viewing statistics, the events table, and the event details area:

  • Changing a query from the Statistics window

    To change the filtering settings in the Statistics window:

    1. Open Statistics details area by using one of the following methods:
      • In the MoreButton drop-down list in the top right corner of the events table select Statistics.
      • In the events table click any value and in the opened context menu select Statistics.

      The Statistics details area appears in the right part of the web interface window.

    2. Open the drop-down list of the relevant parameter and hover your mouse cursor over the necessary value.
    3. Use the plus and minus signs to change the filter settings by doing one of the following:
      • If you want the events selection to include only events with the selected value, click the filter-plus icon.
      • If you want the events selection to exclude all events with the selected value, click the filter-minus icon.

    As a result, the filter settings and the events table will be updated, and the new search query will be displayed in the upper part of the screen.

  • Changing a query from the events table

    To change the filtering settings in the events table:

    1. In the Events section of the KUMA web interface, click any event parameter value in the events table.
    2. In the opened menu, select one of the following options:
      • If you want the table to show only events with the selected value, select Filter by this value.
      • If you want to exclude all events with the selected value from the table, select Exclude from filter.

    As a result, the filter settings and the events table are updated, and the new search query is displayed in the upper part of the screen.

  • Changing a query from the Event details area

    To change the filter settings in the event details area:

    1. In the Events section of the KUMA web interface, click the relevant event.

      The Event details area appears in the right part of the window.

    2. Change the filter settings by using the plus or minus icons next to the relevant settings:
      • If you want the events selection to include only events with the selected value, click the filter-plus icon.
      • If you want the events selection to exclude all events with the selected value, click the filter-minus icon.

    As a result, the filter settings and the events table will be updated, and the new search query will be displayed in the upper part of the screen.

After modifying a query, all query parameters, including the added filter conditions, are transferred to the query builder and the search field.

When you switch to the query builder, the parameters of a query entered manually in the search field are not transferred to the builder, so you will need to create your query again. Also, the query created in the builder does not overwrite the query that was entered into the search string until you click the Apply button in the builder window.

In the SQL query input field, you can enable the display of control characters.

You can also filter events by time period. Search results can be automatically updated.

The filter configuration can be saved. Existing filter configurations can be deleted.

Filter functions are available for users regardless of their roles.

When accessing certain event fields with IDs, KUMA returns the corresponding names.

For more details on SQL, refer to the ClickHouse documentation. See also KUMA operator usage and supported functions.

In this section

Selecting Storage

Generating an SQL query using a builder

Manually creating an SQL query

Filtering events by period

Displaying names instead of IDs

Presets

Limiting the complexity of queries in alert investigation mode

Saving and selecting events filter configuration

Deleting event filter configurations

Supported ClickHouse functions

Viewing event detail areas

Exporting events

Configuring the table of events

Refreshing events table

Getting events table statistics

Viewing correlation event details

See also:

About events

Storage

Page top

[Topic 217994]

Selecting Storage

Events that are displayed in the Events section of the KUMA web interface are retrieved from storage (from the ClickHouse cluster). Depending on the demands of your company, you may have more than one Storage. However, you can only receive events from one Storage at a time, so you must specify which one you want to use.

To select the Storage you want to receive events from,

In the Events section of the KUMA web interface, open the cluster drop-down list and select the relevant storage cluster.

Now events from the selected storage are displayed in the events table. The name of the selected storage is displayed in the cluster drop-down list.

The cluster drop-down list displays only the clusters of tenants available to the user, and the cluster of the main tenant.

See also:

Storage

Page top

[Topic 228337]

Generating an SQL query using a builder

In KUMA, you can use a query builder to generate an SQL query for filtering events.

To generate an SQL query using a builder:

  1. In the Events section of the KUMA web interface, click the parent-category button.

    The filter constructor window opens.

  2. Generate a search query by providing data in the following parameter blocks:

    SELECT—event fields that should be returned. The * value is selected by default, which means that all available event fields must be returned. To make viewing the search results easier, select the necessary fields in the drop-down list. In this case, the data only for the selected fields is displayed in the table. Note that Select * increases the duration of the request execution, but eliminates the need to manually indicate the fields in the request.

    When selecting an event field, you can use the field on the right of the drop-down list to specify an alias for the column of displayed data, and you can use the right-most drop-down list to select the operation to perform on the data: count, max, min, avg, sum.

    If you are using aggregation functions in a query, you cannot customize the events table display, sort events in ascending or descending order, or receive statistics.

    When filtering by alert-related events in alert investigation mode, you cannot perform operations on the data of event fields or assign names to the columns of displayed data.

    • FROM—data source. Select the events value.
    • WHERE—conditions for filtering events.

      Conditions and groups of conditions can be added by using the Add condition and Add group buttons. The AND operator value is selected by default in a group of conditions, but the operator can be changed by clicking on this value. Available values: AND, OR, NOT. The structure of conditions and condition groups can be changed by using the DragIcon icon to drag and drop expressions.

      Adding filter conditions:

      1. In the drop-down list on the left, select the event field that you want to use for filtering.
      2. Select the necessary operator from the middle drop-down list. The available operators depend on the type of value of the selected event field.
      3. Enter the value of the condition. Depending on the selected type of field, you may have to manually enter the value, select it from the drop-down list, or select it on the calendar.

      Filter conditions can be deleted by using the cross button. Group conditions are deleted using the Delete group button.

    • GROUP BY—event fields or aliases to be used for grouping the returned data.

      If you are using data grouping in a query, you cannot customize the events table display, sort events in ascending or descending order, receive statistics, or perform a retroscan.

      When filtering by alert-related events in alert investigation mode, you cannot group the returned data.

    • ORDER BY—columns used as the basis for sorting the returned data. In the drop-down list on the right, you can select the necessary order: DESC—descending, ASC—ascending.
    • LIMIT—number of strings displayed in the table.

      The default value is 250.

      If you are filtering events by user-defined period and the number of strings in the search results exceeds the defined value, you can click the Show next records button to display additional strings in the table. This button is not displayed when filtering events by the standard period.

  3. Click Apply.

    The current SQL query will be overwritten. The generated SQL query is displayed in the search field.

    If you want to reset the builder settings, click the Default query button.

    If you want to close the builder without overwriting the existing query, click the parent-category button.

  4. Click the SearchField button to display the data in the table.

The table will display the search results based on the generated SQL query.

When switching to another section of the web interface, the query generated in the builder is not preserved. If you return to the Events section from another section, the builder will display the default query.

For more details on SQL, refer to the ClickHouse documentation. See also KUMA operator usage and supported functions.

See also:

Manually creating an SQL query

About events

Storage

Page top

[Topic 228356]

Manually creating an SQL query

You can use the search string to manually create SQL queries of any complexity for filtering events.

To manually generate an SQL query:

  1. Go to the Events section of the KUMA web interface.

    An input form opens.

  2. Enter your SQL query into the input field.
  3. Click the SearchField button.

You will see a table of events that satisfy the criteria of your query. If necessary, you can filter events by period.

Supported functions and operators

  • SELECT—event fields that should be returned.

    For SELECT fields, the program supports the following functions and operators:

    • Aggregation functions: count, avg, max, min, sum.
    • Arithmetic operators: +, -, *, /, <, >, =, !=, >=, <=.

      You can combine these functions and operators.

      If you are using aggregation functions in a query, you cannot customize the events table display, sort events in ascending or descending order, or receive statistics.

  • DISTINCT–removes duplicates from the result of a SELECT statement. You must use the following notation: SELECT DISTINCT SourceAddress as Addresses FROM <rest of the query>.
  • FROM—data source.

    When creating a query, you need to specify the events value as the data source.

  • WHERE—conditions for filtering events.
    • AND, OR, NOT, =, !=, >, >=, <, <=
    • IN
    • BETWEEN
    • LIKE
    • ILIKE
    • inSubnet
    • match (the re2 syntax of regular expressions is used in queries, special characters must be shielded with "\")
  • GROUP BY—event fields or aliases to be used for grouping the returned data.

    If you are using data grouping in a query, you cannot customize the events table display, sort events in ascending or descending order, receive statistics, or perform a retroscan.

  • ORDER BY—columns used as the basis for sorting the returned data.

    Possible values:

    • DESC—descending order.
    • ASC—ascending order.
  • OFFSET—skip the indicated number of lines before printing the query results output.
  • LIMIT—number of strings displayed in the table.

    The default value is 250.

    If you are filtering events by user-defined period and the number of strings in the search results exceeds the defined value, you can click the Show next records button to display additional strings in the table. This button is not displayed when filtering events by the standard period.

    Example queries:

    • SELECT * FROM `events` WHERE Type IN ('Base', 'Audit') ORDER BY Timestamp DESC LIMIT 250

      In the events table, all events with the Base and Audit type are sorted by the Timestamp column in descending order. The number of strings that can be displayed in the table is 250.

    • SELECT * FROM `events` WHERE BytesIn BETWEEN 1000 AND 2000 ORDER BY Timestamp ASC LIMIT 250

      All events of the events table for which the BytesIn field contains a value of received traffic in the range from 1,000 to 2,000 bytes are sorted by the Timestamp column in ascending order. The number of strings that can be displayed in the table is 250.

    • SELECT * FROM `events` WHERE Message LIKE '%ssh:%' ORDER BY Timestamp DESC LIMIT 250

      In the events table, all events whose Message field contains data corresponding to the defined %ssh:% template in lowercase are sorted by the Timestamp column in descending order. The number of strings that can be displayed in the table is 250.

    • SELECT * FROM `events` WHERE inSubnet(DeviceAddress, '00.0.0.0/00') ORDER BY Timestamp DESC LIMIT 250

      In the events table, all events for the hosts that are in the 00.0.0.0/00 subnet are sorted by the Timestamp column in descending order. The number of strings that can be displayed in the table is 250.

    • SELECT * FROM `events` WHERE match(Message, 'ssh.*') ORDER BY Timestamp DESC LIMIT 250

      In the events table, all events whose Message field contains text corresponding to the ssh.* template are sorted by the Timestamp column in descending order. The number of strings that can be displayed in the table is 250.

    • SELECT max(BytesOut) / 1024 FROM `events`

      Maximum amount of outbound traffic (KB) for the selected time period.

    • SELECT count(ID) AS "Count", SourcePort AS "Port" FROM `events` GROUP BY SourcePort ORDER BY Port ASC LIMIT 250

      Number of events and port number. Events are grouped by port number and sorted by the Port column in ascending order. The number of strings that can be displayed in the table is 250.

      The ID column in the events table is named Count, and the SourcePort column is named Port.

If you want to use a special character in a query, you need to escape this character by placing a backslash (\) character in front of it.

Example:

SELECT * FROM `events` WHERE match(Message, 'ssh:\'connection.*') ORDER BY Timestamp DESC LIMIT 250

In the events table, all events whose Message field contains text corresponding to the ssh: 'connection' template are sorted by the Timestamp column in descending order. The number of strings that can be displayed in the table is 250.

When creating a normalizer for events, you can choose whether to retain the field values of the raw event. The data is stored in the Extra event field. This field is searched for events by using the LIKE operator.

Example:

SELECT * FROM `events` WHERE DeviceAddress = '00.00.00.000' AND Extra LIKE '%"app":"example"%' ORDER BY Timestamp DESC LIMIT 250

In the events table, all events for hosts with the IP address 00.00.00.000 where the example process is running are sorted by the Timestamp column in descending order. The number of strings that can be displayed in the table is 250.

When switching to the query builder, the query parameters that were manually entered into the search string are not transferred to the builder so you will need to create your query again. Also, the query created in the builder does not overwrite the query that was entered into the search string until you click the Apply button in the builder window.

Aliases must not contain spaces.

For more details on SQL, refer to the ClickHouse documentation. See also the supported ClickHouse functions.

See also:

Generating an SQL query using a builder

Limiting the complexity of queries in alert investigation mode

About events

Storage

Page top

[Topic 217877]

Filtering events by period

In KUMA, you can specify the time period to display events from.

To filter events by period:

  1. In the Events section of the KUMA web interface, open the Period drop-down list in the upper part of the window.
  2. If you want to filter events based on a standard period, select one of the following:
    • 5 minutes
    • 15 minutes
    • 1 hour
    • 24 hours
    • In period

      If you select this option, use the opened calendar to select the start and end dates of the period and click Apply Filter. The date and time format depends on your operating system's settings. You can also manually change the date values if necessary.

  3. Click the SearchField button.

When the period filter is set, only events registered during the specified time interval will be displayed. The period will be displayed in the upper part of the window.

You can also configure the display of events by using the events histogram that is displayed when you click the Histogram icon button in the upper part of the Events section. Events are displayed if you click the relevant data series or select the relevant time period and click the Show events button.

Page top

[Topic 255487]

Displaying names instead of IDs

When accessing certain event fields with IDs, KUMA returns the corresponding names rather than IDs. This helps make the information more readable. For example, if you access the TenantID event field (which stores the tenant ID), you get the value of the TenantName event field (which stores the tenant name).

When exporting events, values of both fields are written to the file, the ID as well as the name.

The table below lists the fields that are substituted when accessed:

Requested field

Returned field

TenantID

TenantName

SeriviceID

ServiceName

DeviceAssetID

DeviceAssetName

SourceAssetID

SourceAssetName

DestinationAssetID

DestinationAssetName

SourceAccountID

SourceAccountName

DestinationAccountID

DestinationAccountName

Substitution does not occur if an alias is assigned to the field in the SQL query. Examples:

  • SELECT TenantID FROM `events` LIMIT 250 — in the search result, the name of the tenant is displayed in the TenantID field.
  • SELECT TenantID AS Tenant_name FROM `events` LIMIT 250 — in the search result, the tenant ID will be displayed in the Tenant_name field.
Page top

[Topic 242466]

Presets

You can use

to simplify work with queries if you regularly view data for a specific set of event fields. In the line with the SQL query, you can type Select * and select a saved preset; in that case, the output is limited only to the fields specified in the preset. This method slows down performance but eliminates the need to write a query manually every time.
Presets are saved on the KUMA Core server and are available to all KUMA users of the specified tenant.

To create a preset:

  1. In the Events section, click the icon.
  2. In the window that opens, on the Event field columns tab, select the required fields.

    To simplify your search, you can start typing the field name in the Search area. 

  3. To save the selected fields, click Save current preset.

    The New preset window opens.

  4. In the window that opens, specify the Name of the preset, and in the drop-down list, select the Tenant.
  5. Click Save.

    The preset is created and saved.

To apply a preset:

  1. In the query entry field, enter Select *.
  2. In the Events section of the KUMA web interface, click the icon.
  3. In the opened window, use the Presets tab to select the relevant preset and click the button.

    The fields from the selected preset are added to the SQL query field, and the columns are added to the table. No changes are made in Builder.

  4. Click SearchField to execute the query.

    After the query execution completes, the columns are filled in.

Page top

[Topic 230248]

Limiting the complexity of queries in alert investigation mode

When investigating an alert, the complexity of SQL queries for event filtering is limited if the Related to alert option is selected in the EventSelector drop-down list. If this is the case, only the functions and operators listed below are available for event filtering.

If the All events option is selected from the EventSelector drop-down list, these limitations are not applied.

  • SELECT
    • The * character is used as a wildcard to represent any number of characters.
  • WHERE
    • AND, OR, NOT, =, !=, >, >=, <, <=
    • IN
    • BETWEEN
    • LIKE
    • inSubnet

    Examples:

    • WHERE Type IN ('Base', 'Correlated')
    • WHERE BytesIn BETWEEN 1000 AND 2000
    • WHERE Message LIKE '%ssh:%'
    • WHERE inSubnet(DeviceAddress, '10.0.0.1/24')
  • ORDER BY

    Sorting can be done by column.

  • OFFSET

    Skip the indicated number of lines before printing the query results output.

  • LIMIT

    The default value is 250.

    If you are filtering events by user-defined period and the number of strings in the search results exceeds the defined value, you can click the Show next records button to display additional strings in the table. This button is not displayed when filtering events by the standard period.

When filtering by alert-related events in alert investigation mode, you cannot group the returned data. When filtering by alert-related events in alert investigation mode, you cannot perform operations on the data of event fields or assign names to the columns of displayed data.

Page top

[Topic 228358]

Saving and selecting events filter configuration

In KUMA, you can save a filter configuration and use it in the future. Other users can also use the saved filters if they have the appropriate access rights. When saving a filter, you are saving the configured settings of all the active filters at the same time, including the time-based filter, query builder, and the events table settings. Search queries are saved on the KUMA Core server and are available to all KUMA users of the selected tenant.

To save the current settings of the filter, query, and period:

  1. In the Events section of the KUMA web interface, click the SaveButton icon next to the filter expression and select Save current filter.
  2. In the window that opens, enter the name of the filter configuration in the Name field. The name can contain up to 128 Unicode characters.
  3. In the Tenant drop-down list, select the tenant that will own the created filter.
  4. Click Save.

The filter configuration is now saved.

To select a previously saved filter configuration:

In the Events section of the KUMA web interface, click the SaveButton icon next to the filter expression and select the relevant filter.

The selected configuration is active, which means that the search field is displaying the search query, and the upper part of the window is showing the configured settings for the period and frequency of updating the search results. Click the SearchField button to submit the search query.

You can click the StarOffIcon icon near the filter configuration name to make it a default filter.

Page top

[Topic 228359]

Deleting event filter configurations

To delete a previously saved filter configuration:

  1. In the Events section of the KUMA web interface, click the SaveButton icon next to the filter search query and click the delete-icon icon next to the configuration that you need to delete.
  2. Click OK.

The filter configuration is now deleted for all KUMA users.

Page top

[Topic 235093]

Supported ClickHouse functions

The following ClickHouse functions are supported in KUMA:

  • Arithmetic functions.
  • Arrays—all functions except:
    • has
    • range
    • functions in which higher-order functions must be used (lambda expressions (->))
  • Comparison functions: all operators except == and less.
  • Logical functions: "not" function only.
  • Type conversion functions.
  • Date/time functions: all except date_add and date_sub.
  • String functions.
  • String search functions—all functions except:
    • position
    • multiSearchAllPositions, multiSearchAllPositionsUTF8, multiSearchFirstPosition, multiSearchFirstIndex, multiSearchAny
    • like and ilike
  • Conditional functions: simple if operator only (ternary if and miltif operators are not supported).
  • Mathematical functions.
  • Rounding functions.
  • Functions for splitting and merging strings and arrays.
  • Bit functions.
  • Functions for working with UUIDs.
  • Functions for working with URLs.
  • Functions for working with IP addresses.
  • Functions for working with Nullable arguments.
  • Functions for working with geographic coordinates.

In KUMA 2.1.3, errors with the operation of the DISTINCT operator have been fixed. In this case, you must use the following notation: SELECT DISTINCT SourceAddress as Addresses FROM <rest of the query>.

In KUMA 2.1.1, the SELECT DISTINCT SourceAddress / SELECT DISTINCT(SourceAddress) / SELECT DISTINCT ON (SourceAddress) operators work incorrectly.

Search and replace functions in strings, and functions from other sections are not supported.

For more details on SQL, refer to the ClickHouse documentation.

Page top

[Topic 218039]

Viewing event detail areas

To view information about an event:

  1. In the program web interface window, select the Events section.
  2. Search for events by using the query builder or by entering a query in the search field.

    The event table is displayed.

  3. Select the event whose information you want to view.

    The event details window opens.

The Event details area appears in the right part of the web interface window and contains a list of the event's parameters with values. In this area you can:

  • Include the selected field in the search or exclude it from the search by clicking filter-plus or filter-minus next to the setting value.
  • Clicking a file hash in the FileHash field opens a list in which you can select one of the following actions:
  • Open a window containing information about the asset if it is mentioned in the event fields and registered in the program.
  • You can click the link containing the collector name in the Service field to view the settings of the service that registered the event.

    You can also link an event to an alert if the program is in alert investigation mode and open the Correlation event details window if the selected event is a correlation event.

In the Event details area, the name of the described object is shown instead of its ID in the values of the following settings. At the same time, if you change the filtering of events by this setting (for example, by clicking filter-minus) to exclude events with a certain setting-value combination from search results), the object's ID, and not its name, is added to the SQL query:

  • TenantID
  • SeriviceID
  • DeviceAssetID
  • SourceAssetID
  • DestinationAssetID
  • SourceAccountID
  • DestinationAccountID
Page top

[Topic 217871]

Exporting events

In KUMA, you can export information about events to a TSV file. The selection of events that will be exported to a TSV file depends on filter settings. The information is exported from the columns that are currently displayed in the events table. The columns in the exported file are populated with the available data even if they did not display in the events table in the KUMA web interface due to the special features of the SQL query.

To export information about events:

  1. In the Events section of the KUMA web interface, open the MoreButton drop-down list and choose Export TSV.

    The new export TSV file task is created in the Task manager section.

  2. Find the task you created in the Task manager section.

    When the file is ready to download, the DoneIcon icon will appear in the Status column of the task.

  3. Click the task type name and select Upload from the drop-down list.

    The TSV file will be downloaded using your browser's settings. By default, the file name is event-export-<date>_<time>.tsv.

The file is saved based on your web browser's settings.

Page top

[Topic 228361]

Configuring the table of events

Responses to user SQL queries are presented as a table in the Events section. The fields selected in the custom query appear at the end of the table, after the default columns. This table can be updated.

The following columns are displayed in the events table by default:

  • Tenant.
  • Timestamp.
  • Name.
  • DeviceProduct.
  • DeviceVendor.
  • DestinationAddress.
  • DestinationUserName.

In KUMA, you can customize the displayed set of event fields and their display order. The selected configuration can be saved.

When using SQL queries with data grouping and aggregation for filtering events, statistics are not available and the order of displayed columns depends on the specific SQL query.

In the events table, in the event details area, in the alert window, and in the widgets, the names of assets, accounts, and services are displayed instead of the IDs as the values of the SourceAssetID, DestinationAssetID, DeviceAssetID, SourceAccountID, DestinationAccountID, and ServiceID fields. When exporting events to a file, the IDs are saved, but columns with names are added to the file. The IDs are also displayed when you point the mouse over the names of assets, accounts, or services.

Searching for fields with IDs is only possible using IDs.

To configure the fields displayed in the events table:

  1. Click the gear icon in the top right corner of the events table.

    You will see a window for selecting the event fields that should be displayed in the events table.

  2. Select the check boxes opposite the fields that you want to view in the table. You can search for relevant fields by using the Search field.

    You can configure the table to display any event field from the KUMA event data model. The Timestamp and Name parameters are always displayed in the table. Click the Default button to display only default event parameters in the events table.

    When you select a check box, the events table is updated and a new column is added. When a check box is cleared, the column disappears.

    You can also remove columns from the events table by clicking the column title and selecting Hide column from the drop-down list.

  3. If necessary, change the display order of the columns by dragging the column headers in the event tables.
  4. If you want to sort the events by a specific column, click its title and in the drop-down list select one of the available options: Ascending or Descending.

The selected event fields will be displayed as columns in the table of the Events section in the order you specified.

Page top

[Topic 217961]

Refreshing events table

You can update the displayed event selection with the most recent entries by refreshing the web browser page. You can also refresh the events table automatically and set the frequency of updates. Automatic refresh is disabled by default.

To enable automatic refresh,

select the update frequency in the refresh drop-down list:

  • 5 seconds
  • 15 seconds
  • 30 seconds
  • 1 minute
  • 5 minutes
  • 15 minutes

The events table now refreshes automatically.

To disable automatic refresh:

Select No refresh in the refresh drop-down list:

Page top

[Topic 228360]

Getting events table statistics

You can get statistics for the current events selection displayed in the events table. The selected events depend on the filter settings.

To obtain statistics:

Select Statistics from the MoreButton drop-down list in the upper-right corner of the events table, or click on any value in the events table and select Statistics from the opened context menu.

The Statistics details area appears with the list of parameters from the current event selection. The numbers near each parameter indicate the number of events with that parameter in the selection. If a parameter is expanded, you can also see its five most frequently occurring values. Relevant parameters can be found by using the Search field.

In a fault-tolerant configuration, for all event fields that contain the FQDN of the Core, the Statistics section displays "core" instead of the FQDN.

The Statistics window allows you to modify the events filter.

When using SQL queries with data grouping and aggregation for filtering events, statistics are not available.

Page top

[Topic 217946]

Viewing correlation event details

You can view the details of a correlation event in the Correlation event details window.

To view information about a correlation event:

  1. In the Events section of the KUMA web interface, click a correlation event.

    You can use filters to find correlation events by assigning the correlated value to the Type parameter.

    The details area of the selected event will open. If the selected event is a correlation event, the Detailed view button will be displayed at the bottom of the details area.

  2. Click the Detailed view button.

The correlation event window will open. The event name is displayed in the upper left corner of the window.

The Correlation event details section of the correlation event window contains the following data:

  • Correlation event severity—the importance of the correlation event.
  • Correlation rule—the name of the correlation rule that triggered the creation of this correlation event. The rule name is represented as a link that can be used to open the settings of this correlation rule.
  • Correlation rule severity—the importance of the correlation rule that triggered the correlation event.
  • Correlation rule ID—the identifier of the correlation rule that triggered the creation of this correlation event.
  • Tenant—the name of the tenant that owns the correlation event.

The Related events section of the correlation event window contains the table of events related to the correlation event. These are base events that actually triggered the creation of the correlation event. When an event is selected, the details area opens in the right part of the web interface window.

The Find in events link to the right of the section header is used for alert investigation.

The Related endpoints section of the correlation event window contains the table of hosts related to the correlation event. This information comes from the base events related to the correlation event. Clicking the name of the asset opens the Asset details window.

The Related users section of the correlation event window contains the table of users related to the correlation event. This information comes from the base events related to the correlation event.

See also:

About alerts

Correlator

Alert investigation

Page top

[Topic 217942]

Normalizers

Normalizers are used for converting raw events that come from various sources in different formats to the KUMA event data model. Normalized events become available for processing by other KUMA resources and services.

A normalizer consists of the main event parsing rule and optional additional event parsing rules. By creating a main parsing rule and a set of additional parsing rules, you can implement complex event processing logic. Data is passed along the tree of parsing rules depending on the conditions specified in the

Extra normalization conditions setting. The sequence in which parsing rules are created is significant: the event is processed sequentially and the processing sequence is indicated by arrows.

A normalizer is created in several steps:

  1. Preparing to create a normalizer

    A normalizer can be created in the KUMA web interface:

    Then parsing rules must be created in the normalizer.

  2. Creating the main parsing rule for an event

    The main parsing rule is created using the Add event parsing button. This opens the Event parsing window, where you can specify the settings of the main parsing rule:

    The main parsing rule for an event is displayed in the normalizer as a dark circle. You can view or modify the settings of the main parsing rule by clicking this circle. When you hover the mouse over the circle, a plus sign is displayed. Click it to add the parsing rules.

    The name of the main parsing rule is used in KUMA as the normalizer name.

  3. Creating additional event parsing rules

    Clicking the plus icon that is displayed when you hover the mouse over the circle or the block corresponding to the normalizer opens the Additional event parsing window where you can specify the settings of the additional parsing rule:

    The additional event parsing rule is displayed in the normalizer as a dark block. The block displays the triggering conditions for the additional parsing rule, the name of the additional parsing rule, and the event field. When this event field is available, the data is passed to the normalizer. Click the block of the additional parsing rule to view or modify its settings.

    If you hover the mouse over the additional normalizer, a plus button appears. You can use this button to create a new additional event parsing rule. To delete a normalizer, use the button with the trash icon.

  4. Completing the creation of the normalizer

    To finish the creation of the normalizer, click Save.

In the upper right corner, in the search field, you can search for additional parsing rules by name.

For normalizer resources, you can enable the display of control characters in all input fields except the Description field.

If, when changing the settings of a collector resource set, you change or delete conversions in a normalizer connected to it, the edits will not be saved, and the normalizer itself may be corrupted. If you need to modify conversions in a normalizer that is already part of a service, the changes must be made directly to the normalizer under ResourcesNormalizers in the web interface.

See also:

Requirements for variables

Page top

[Topic 221932]

Event parsing settings

You can configure the rules for converting incoming events to the KUMA format when creating event parsing rules in the normalizer settings window, on the Normalization scheme tab.

Available settings:

  • Name (required)—name of the parsing rules. Must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters. The name of the main parsing rule is used as the name of the normalizer.
  • Tenant (required)—name of the tenant that owns the resource.

    This setting is not available for extra parsing rules.

  • Parsing method (required)—drop-down list for selecting the type of incoming events. Depending on your choice, you can use the preconfigured rules for matching event fields or set your own rules. When you select some parsing methods, additional parameter fields required for filling in may become available.

    Available parsing methods:

    • json

      This parsing method is used to process JSON data where each object, including its nested objects, occupies a single line in a file.

      When processing files with hierarchically arranged data, you can access the fields of nested objects by specifying the names of the parameters dividing them by a period. For example, the username parameter from the string "user": {"username": "system: node: example-01"} can be accessed by using the user.username query.

      Files are processed line by line. Multi-line objects with nested structures may be normalized incorrectly.

      In complex normalization schemes where additional normalizers are used, all nested objects are processed at the first normalization level, except for cases when the extra normalization conditions are not specified and, therefore, the event being processed is passed to the additional normalizer in its entirety.

      Newline characters can be \n and \r\n. Strings must be UTF-8 encoded.

    • cef

      This parsing method is used to process CEF data.

      When choosing this method, you can use the preconfigured rules for converting events to the KUMA format by clicking the Apply default mapping button.

    • regexp

      This parsing method is used to create custom rules for processing data in a format using regular expressions.

      In the Normalization parameter block field, add a regular expression (RE2 syntax) with named capture groups. The name of a group and its value will be interpreted as the field and the value of the raw event, which can be converted into an event field in KUMA format.

      To add event handling rules:

      1. Copy an example of the data you want to process to the Event examples field. This is an optional but recommended step.
      2. In the Normalization parameter block field add a regular expression with named capture groups in RE2 syntax, for example "(?P<name>regexp)". The regular expression added to the Normalization parameter must exactly match the event. Also, when developing the regular expression, it is recommended to use special characters that match the starting and ending positions of the text: ^, $.

        You can add multiple regular expressions by using the Add regular expression button. If you need to remove the regular expression, use the cross button.

      3. Click the Copy field names to the mapping table button.

        Capture group names are displayed in the KUMA field column of the Mapping table. Now you can select the corresponding KUMA field in the column next to each capture group. Otherwise, if you named the capture groups in accordance with the CEF format, you can use the automatic CEF mapping by selecting the Use CEF syntax for normalization check box.

      Event handling rules were added.

    • syslog

      This parsing method is used to process data in syslog format.

      When choosing this method, you can use the preconfigured rules for converting events to the KUMA format by clicking the Apply default mapping button.

    • csv

      This parsing method is used to create custom rules for processing CSV data.

      When choosing this method, you must specify the separator of values in the string in the Delimiter field. Any single-byte ASCII character can be used as a delimiter.

    • kv

      This parsing method is used to process data in key-value pair format.

      If you select this method, you must provide values in the following required fields:

      • Pair delimiter—specify a character that will serve as a delimiter for key-value pairs. You can specify any one-character (1 byte) value, provided that the character does not match the value delimiter.
      • Value delimiter—specify a character that will serve as a delimiter between the key and the value. You can specify any one-character (1 byte) value, provided that the character does not match the delimiter of key-value pairs.
    • xml

      This parsing method is used to process XML data in which each object, including its nested objects, occupies a single line in a file. Files are processed line by line.

      When this method is selected in the parameter block XML attributes you can specify the key attributes to be extracted from tags. If an XML structure has several attributes with different values in the same tag, you can indicate the necessary value by specifying its key in the Source column of the Mapping table.

      To add key XML attributes,

      Click the Add field button, and in the window that appears, specify the path to the required attribute.

      You can add more than one attribute. Attributes can be removed one at a time using the cross icon or all at once using the Reset button.

      If XML key attributes are not specified, then in the course of field mapping the unique path to the XML value will be represented by a sequence of tags.

      Tag numbering

      Tag numbering is available as of KUMA 2.1.3. This functionality allows automatically numbering tags in XML events, which lets you parse an event with identical tags or unnamed tags, such as <Data>.

      As an example, we will use the Tag numbering functionality to number the tags of the EventData attribute of Microsoft Windows PowerShell event ID 800.

      PowerShell Event ID 800

      To parse such events, you must:

      • Configure tag numbering.
      • Configure data mapping for numbered tags with KUMA event fields.

      Simultaneous use of XML attributes and Tag numbering leads to incorrect operation of the normalizer. If an attribute contains unnamed tags or the identical tags, we recommend using the Tag numbering functionality. If the attribute contains only named tags, use XML attributes.

      To configure parsing of events with identically named or unnamed tags:

      1. Create a new normalizer or open an existing normalizer for editing.
      2. In the Basic event parsing window of the normalizer, in the Parsing method drop-down list, select 'xml' and in the Tag numbering field, click Add field.

        In the displayed field, enter the full path to the tag to whose elements you want to assign a number. For example, Event.EventData.Data. The first number to be assigned to a tag is 0. If the tag is empty, for example, <Data />, it is also assigned a number.

      3. To configure data mapping, under Mapping, click Add row and do the following:
        1. In the new row, in the Source field, enter the full path to the tag and its index. For the Microsoft Windows event from the example above, the full path with indices look like this:
          • Event.EventData.Data.0
          • Event.EventData.Data.1
          • Event.EventData.Data.2 and so on
        2. In the KUMA field drop-down list, select the field in the KUMA event that will receive the value from the numbered tag after parsing.
      4. To save changes:
        • If you created a new normalizer, click Save.
        • If you edited an existing normalizer, click Update configuration in the collector to which the normalizer is linked.

      Parsing is configured.

    • netflow5

      This parsing method is used to process data in the NetFlow v5 format.

      When choosing this method, you can use the preconfigured rules for converting events to the KUMA format by clicking the Apply default mapping button.

      In mapping rules, the protocol type for netflow5 is not indicated in the fields of KUMA events by default. When parsing data in NetFlow format on the Enrichment normalizer tab, you should create a constant data enrichment rule that adds the netflow value to the DeviceProduct target field.

    • netflow9

      This parsing method is used to process data in the NetFlow v9 format.

      When choosing this method, you can use the preconfigured rules for converting events to the KUMA format by clicking the Apply default mapping button.

      In mapping rules, the protocol type for netflow9 is not indicated in the fields of KUMA events by default. When parsing data in NetFlow format on the Enrichment normalizer tab, you should create a constant data enrichment rule that adds the netflow value to the DeviceProduct target field.

    • sflow5

      This parsing method is used to process data in sFlow5 format.

      When choosing this method, you can use the preconfigured rules for converting events to the KUMA format by clicking the Apply default mapping button.

    • ipfix

      This parsing method is used to process IPFIX data.

      When choosing this method, you can use the preconfigured rules for converting events to the KUMA format by clicking the Apply default mapping button.

      In mapping rules, the protocol type for ipfix is not indicated in the fields of KUMA events by default. When parsing data in NetFlow format on the Enrichment normalizer tab, you should create a constant data enrichment rule that adds the netflow value to the DeviceProduct target field.

    • sql

      The normalizer uses this method to process data obtained by making a selection from the database.

  • Keep raw event (required)—in this drop-down list, indicate whether you need to store the raw event in the newly created normalized event. Available values:
    • Don't save—do not save the raw event. This is the default setting.
    • Only errors—save the raw event in the Raw field of the normalized event if errors occurred when parsing it. This value is convenient to use when debugging a service. In this case, every time an event has a non-empty Raw field, you know there was a problem.

      If fields containing the names *Address or *Date* do not comply with normalization rules, these fields are ignored. No normalization error occurs in this case, and the values of the fields are not displayed in the Raw field of the normalized event even if the Keep raw eventOnly errors option was selected.

    • Always—always save the raw event in the Raw field of the normalized event.

    This setting is not available for extra parsing rules.

  • Keep extra fields (required)—in this drop-down list, you can choose whether you want to save fields and their values if no mapping rules have been configured for them (see below). This data is saved as an array in the Extra event field. Normalized events can be searched and filtered based on the data stored in the Extra field.

    Filtering based on data from the Extra event field

    Conditions for filters based on data from the Extra event field:

    • Condition—If.
    • Left operand—event field.
    • In this event field, you can specify one of the following values:
      • Extra field.
      • Value from the Extra field in the following format:

        Extra.<field name>

        For example, Extra.app.

        A value of this type is specified manually.

      • Value from the array written to the Extra field in the following format:

        Extra.<field name>.<array element>

        For example, Extra.array.0.

        The values in the array are numbered starting from 0.

        A value of this type is specified manually.

        To work with a value from the Extra field at depth 3 and below, use backquotes ``. For example, `Extra.lev1.lev2.lev3`.

    • Operator – =.
    • Right operand—constant.
    • Value—the value by which you need to filter events.

    By default, no extra fields are saved.

  • Description—resource description: up to 4,000 Unicode characters.

    This setting is not available for extra parsing rules.

  • Event examples—in this field, you can provide an example of data that you want to process.

    This setting is not available for the following parsing methods: netflow5, netflow9, sflow5, ipfix, sql.

    The Event examples field is populated with data obtained from the raw event if the event was successfully parsed and the type of data obtained from the raw event matches the type of the KUMA field.

    For example, the value "192.168.0.1" enclosed in quotation marks is not displayed in the SourceAddress field, in this case the value 192.168.0.1 is displayed in the Event examples field.

  • Mapping settings block—here you can configure mapping of raw event fields to fields of the event in KUMA format:
    • Source—column for the names of the raw event fields that you want to convert into KUMA event fields.

      Clicking the wrench-new button next to the field names in the Source column opens the Conversion window, in which you can use the Add conversion button to create rules for modifying the original data before they are written to the KUMA event fields. In the Conversion window, you can swap the added rules by dragging them by the DragIcon icon; you can also delete them using the cross-black icon.

      Available conversions

      Conversions are changes that can be applied to a value before it gets written to the event field. The conversion type is selected from a drop-down list.

      Available conversions:

      • lower—is used to make all characters of the value lowercase
      • upper—is used to make all characters of the value uppercase
      • regexp – used to convert a value using the regular expression RE2. When this conversion type is selected, the field appears where regular expression should be added.
      • substring—is used to extract characters in the position range specified in the Start and End fields. These fields appear when this conversion type is selected.
      • replace—is used to replace specified character sequence with the other character sequence. When this type of conversion is selected, new fields appear:
        • Replace chars—in this field you can specify the character sequence that should be replaced.
        • With chars—in this field you can specify the characters sequence should be used instead of replaced characters.
      • trim—used to simultaneously remove the characters specified in the Chars field from the leading and end positions of the value. The field appears when this type of conversion is selected. For example, a trim conversion with the Micromon value applied to Microsoft-Windows-Sysmon results in soft-Windows-Sys.
      • append is used to add the characters specified in the Constant field to the end of the event field value. The field appears when this type of conversion is selected.
      • prepend—used to prepend the characters specified in the Constant field to the start of the event field value. The field appears when this type of conversion is selected.
      • replace with regexp—is used to replace RE2 regular expression results with the character sequence.
        • Expression—in this field you can specify the regular expression which results that should be replaced.
        • With chars—in this field you can specify the characters sequence should be used instead of replaced characters.
      • Converting encoded strings to text:
        • decodeHexString—used to convert a HEX string to text.
        • decodeBase64String—used to convert a Base64 string to text.
        • decodeBase64URLString—used to convert a Base64url string to text.

        When converting a corrupted string or if conversion error occur, corrupted data may be written to the event field.

        During event enrichment, if the length of the encoded string exceeds the size of the field of the normalized event, the string is truncated and is not decoded.

        If the length of the decoded string exceeds the size of the event field into which the decoded value is to be written, such a string is truncated to fit the size of the event field.

    • KUMA field—drop-down list for selecting the required fields of KUMA events. You can search for fields by entering their names in the field.
    • Label—in this column, you can add a unique custom label to event fields that begin with DeviceCustom* and Flex*.

    New table rows can be added by using the Add row button. Rows can be deleted individually using the cross button or all at once using the Clear all button.

    If you have loaded data into the Event examples field, the table will have an Examples column containing examples of values carried over from the raw event field to the KUMA event field.

    If the size of the KUMA event field is less than the length of the value placed in it, the value is truncated to the size of the event field.

Page top

[Topic 242993]

Enrichment in the normalizer

When creating event parsing rules in the normalizer settings window, on the Enrichment tab, you can configure the rules for adding extra data to the fields of the normalized event using enrichment rules. These enrichment rules are stored in the settings of the normalizer where they were created.

Enrichments are created by using the Add enrichment button. There can be more than one enrichment rule. You can delete enrichment rules by using the cross-black button.

Settings available in the enrichment rule settings block:

  • Source kind (required)—drop-down list for selecting the type of enrichment. Depending on the selected type, you may see advanced settings that will also need to be completed.

    Available Enrichment rule source types:

    • constant

      This type of enrichment is used when a constant needs to be added to an event field. Settings of this type of enrichment:

      • In the Constant field, specify the value that should be added to the event field. The value may not be longer than 255 Unicode characters. If you leave this field blank, the existing event field value will be cleared.
      • In the Target field drop-down list, select the KUMA event field to which you want to write the data.

    • dictionary

      This type of enrichment is used if you need to add a value from the dictionary of the Dictionary type.

      When this type is selected in the Dictionary name drop-down list, you must select the dictionary that will provide the values. In the Key fields settings block, you must use the Add field button to select the event fields whose values will be used for dictionary entry selection.

    • table

      This type of enrichment is used if you need to add a value from the dictionary of the Table type.

      When this enrichment type is selected in the Dictionary name drop-down list, select the dictionary for providing the values. In the Key fields group of settings, use the Add field button to select the event fields whose values are used for dictionary entry selection.

      In the Mapping table, configure the dictionary fields to provide data and the event fields to receive data:

      • In the Dictionary field column, select the dictionary field. The available fields depend on the selected dictionary resource.
      • In the KUMA field column, select the event field to which the value is written. For some of the selected fields (*custom* and *flex*), in the Label column, you can specify a name for the data written to them.

      New table rows can be added by using the Add new element button. Columns can be deleted using the cross button.

    • event

      This type of enrichment is used when you need to write a value from another event field to the current event field. Settings of this type of enrichment:

      • In the Target field drop-down list, select the KUMA event field to which you want to write the data.
      • In the Source field drop-down list, select the event field whose value will be written to the target field.
      • Clicking the wrench-new button opens the Conversion window in which you can, using the Add conversion button, create rules for modifying the original data before writing them to the KUMA event fields.

        Available conversions

        Conversions are changes that can be applied to a value before it gets written to the event field. The conversion type is selected from a drop-down list.

        Available conversions:

        • lower—is used to make all characters of the value lowercase
        • upper—is used to make all characters of the value uppercase
        • regexp – used to convert a value using the regular expression RE2. When this conversion type is selected, the field appears where regular expression should be added.
        • substring—is used to extract characters in the position range specified in the Start and End fields. These fields appear when this conversion type is selected.
        • replace—is used to replace specified character sequence with the other character sequence. When this type of conversion is selected, new fields appear:
          • Replace chars—in this field you can specify the character sequence that should be replaced.
          • With chars—in this field you can specify the characters sequence should be used instead of replaced characters.
        • trim—used to simultaneously remove the characters specified in the Chars field from the leading and end positions of the value. The field appears when this type of conversion is selected. For example, a trim conversion with the Micromon value applied to Microsoft-Windows-Sysmon results in soft-Windows-Sys.
        • append is used to add the characters specified in the Constant field to the end of the event field value. The field appears when this type of conversion is selected.
        • prepend—used to prepend the characters specified in the Constant field to the start of the event field value. The field appears when this type of conversion is selected.
        • replace with regexp—is used to replace RE2 regular expression results with the character sequence.
          • Expression—in this field you can specify the regular expression which results that should be replaced.
          • With chars—in this field you can specify the characters sequence should be used instead of replaced characters.
        • Converting encoded strings to text:
          • decodeHexString—used to convert a HEX string to text.
          • decodeBase64String—used to convert a Base64 string to text.
          • decodeBase64URLString—used to convert a Base64url string to text.

          When converting a corrupted string or if conversion error occur, corrupted data may be written to the event field.

          During event enrichment, if the length of the encoded string exceeds the size of the field of the normalized event, the string is truncated and is not decoded.

          If the length of the decoded string exceeds the size of the event field into which the decoded value is to be written, such a string is truncated to fit the size of the event field.

    • template

      This type of enrichment is used when you need to write a value obtained by processing Go templates into the event field. Settings of this type of enrichment:

      • Put the Go template into the Template field.

        Event field names are passed in the {{.EventField}} format, where EventField is the name of the event field from which the value must be passed to the script.

        Example: Attack on {{.DestinationAddress}} from {{.SourceAddress}}.

      • In the Target field drop-down list, select the KUMA event field to which you want to write the data.
  • Target field (required)—drop-down list for selecting the KUMA event field that should receive the data.

    This setting is not available for the enrichment source of the Table type.

Page top

[Topic 221934]

Conditions for forwarding data to an extra normalizer

When creating additional event parsing rules, you can specify the conditions. When these conditions are met, the events are sent to the created parsing rule for processing. Conditions can be specified in the Additional event parsing window, on the Extra normalization conditions tab. This tab is not available for the basic parsing rules.

Available settings:

  • Field to pass into normalizer—indicates the event field if you want only events with fields configured in normalizer settings to be sent for additional parsing.

    If this field is blank, the full event is sent to the extra normalizer for processing.

  • Set of filters—used to define complex conditions that must be met by the events received by the normalizer.

    You can use the Add condition button to add a string containing fields for identifying the condition (see below).

    You can use the Add group button to add a group of filters. Group operators can be switched between AND, OR, and NOT. You can add other condition groups and individual conditions to filter groups.

    You can swap conditions and condition groups by dragging them by the DragIcon icon; you can also delete them using the cross icon.

Filter condition settings:

  • Left operand and Right operand—used to specify the values to be processed by the operator.

    In the left operand, you must specify the original field of events coming into the normalizer. For example, if the eventType - DeviceEventClass mapping is configured in the Basic event parsing window, then in the Additional event parsing window on the Extra normalization conditions tab, you must specify eventType in the left operand field of the filter. Data is processed only as text strings.

  • Operators:
    • = – full match of the left and right operands.
    • startsWith – the left operand starts with the characters specified in the right operand.
    • endsWith – the left operand ends with the characters specified in the right operand.
    • match – the left operand matches the regular expression (RE2) specified in the right operand.
    • in – the left operand matches one of the values specified in the right operand.

The incoming data can be converted by clicking the wrench-new button. The Conversion window opens, where you can use the Add conversion button to create the rules for converting the source data before any actions are performed on them. In the Conversion window, you can swap the added rules by dragging them by the DragIcon icon; you can also delete them using the cross-black icon.

Available conversions

Conversions are changes that can be applied to a value before it gets written to the event field. The conversion type is selected from a drop-down list.

Available conversions:

  • lower—is used to make all characters of the value lowercase
  • upper—is used to make all characters of the value uppercase
  • regexp – used to convert a value using the regular expression RE2. When this conversion type is selected, the field appears where regular expression should be added.
  • substring—is used to extract characters in the position range specified in the Start and End fields. These fields appear when this conversion type is selected.
  • replace—is used to replace specified character sequence with the other character sequence. When this type of conversion is selected, new fields appear:
    • Replace chars—in this field you can specify the character sequence that should be replaced.
    • With chars—in this field you can specify the characters sequence should be used instead of replaced characters.
  • trim—used to simultaneously remove the characters specified in the Chars field from the leading and end positions of the value. The field appears when this type of conversion is selected. For example, a trim conversion with the Micromon value applied to Microsoft-Windows-Sysmon results in soft-Windows-Sys.
  • append is used to add the characters specified in the Constant field to the end of the event field value. The field appears when this type of conversion is selected.
  • prepend—used to prepend the characters specified in the Constant field to the start of the event field value. The field appears when this type of conversion is selected.
  • replace with regexp—is used to replace RE2 regular expression results with the character sequence.
    • Expression—in this field you can specify the regular expression which results that should be replaced.
    • With chars—in this field you can specify the characters sequence should be used instead of replaced characters.
  • Converting encoded strings to text:
    • decodeHexString—used to convert a HEX string to text.
    • decodeBase64String—used to convert a Base64 string to text.
    • decodeBase64URLString—used to convert a Base64url string to text.

    When converting a corrupted string or if conversion error occur, corrupted data may be written to the event field.

    During event enrichment, if the length of the encoded string exceeds the size of the field of the normalized event, the string is truncated and is not decoded.

    If the length of the decoded string exceeds the size of the event field into which the decoded value is to be written, such a string is truncated to fit the size of the event field.

Page top

[Topic 255782]

Supported event sources

KUMA supports the normalization of events coming from systems listed in the "Supported event sources" table. Normalizers for these systems are included in the distribution kit.

Supported event sources

System name

Normalizer name

Type

Normalizer description

1C EventJournal

[OOTB] 1C EventJournal Normalizer

xml

Designed for processing the event log of the 1C system. The event source is the 1C log.

1C TechJournal

[OOTB] 1C TechJournal Normalizer

regexp

Designed for processing the technology event log. The event source is the 1C technology log.

Absolute Data and Device Security (DDS)

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format.

AhnLab Malware Defense System (MDS)

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format.

Ahnlab UTM

[OOTB] Ahnlab UTM

regexp

Designed for processing events from the Ahnlab system. The event sources is system logs, operation logs, connections, the IPS module.

AhnLabs MDS

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format.

Apache Cassandra

[OOTB] Apache Cassandra file

regexp

Designed for processing events from the logs of the Apache Cassandra database version 4.0.

Aruba ClearPass

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format.

Avigilon Access Control Manager (ACM)

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format.

Ayehu eyeShare

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format.

Barracuda Networks NG Firewall

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format.

BeyondTrust Privilege Management Console

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format.

BeyondTrust’s BeyondInsight

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format.

Bifit Mitigator

[OOTB] Bifit Mitigator Syslog

Syslog

Designed for processing events from the DDOS Mitigator protection system received via Syslog.

Bloombase StoreSafe

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format.

BMC CorreLog

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format.

Bricata ProAccel

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format.

Brinqa Risk Analytics

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format.

Broadcom Symantec Advanced Threat Protection (ATP)

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format.

Broadcom Symantec Endpoint Protection

[OOTB] Broadcom Symantec Endpoint Protection

regexp

Designed for processing events from the Symantec Endpoint Protection system.

Broadcom Symantec Endpoint Protection Mobile

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format.

Broadcom Symantec Threat Hunting Center

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format.

Canonical LXD

[OOTB] Canonical LXD syslog

Syslog

Designed for processing events received via syslog from the Canonical LXD system version 5.18.

Checkpoint

[OOTB] Checkpoint Syslog CEF by CheckPoint

Syslog

Designed for processing events received from the Checkpoint event source via the Syslog protocol in the CEF format.

Cisco Access Control Server (ACS)

[OOTB] Cisco ACS syslog

regexp

Designed for processing events of the Cisco Access Control Server (ACS) system received via Syslog.

Cisco ASA

[OOTB] Cisco ASA Extended v 0.1

Syslog

Designed for processing events of Cisco ASA devices. Cisco ASA base extended set of events.

Cisco Email Security Appliance (WSA)

[OOTB] Cisco WSA AccessFile

regexp

Designed for processing the event log of the Cisco Email Security Appliance (WSA) proxy server, the access.log file.

Cisco Identity Services Engine (ISE)

[OOTB] Cisco ISE syslog

regexp

Designed for processing events of the Cisco Identity Services Engine (ISE) system received via Syslog.

Cisco Netflow v5

[OOTB] NetFlow v5

netflow5

Designed for processing events from Cisco Netflow version 5.

Cisco NetFlow v9

[OOTB] NetFlow v9

netflow9

Designed for processing events from Cisco Netflow version 9.

Cisco Prime

[OOTB] Cisco Prime syslog

Syslog

Designed for processing events of the Cisco Prime system version 3.10 received via syslog.

Cisco Secure Email Gateway (SEG)

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format.

Cisco Secure Firewall Management Center

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format.

Citrix NetScaler

[OOTB] Citrix NetScaler

regexp

Designed for processing events from the Citrix NetScaler 13.7 load balancer.

Claroty Continuous Threat Detection

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format.

CloudPassage Halo

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format.

Сodemaster Mirada

[OOTB] Сodemaster Mirada syslog

Syslog

Designed for processing events of the Codemaster Mirada system received via syslog.

Corvil Network Analytics

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format.

Cribl Stream

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format.

CrowdStrike Falcon Host

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format.

CyberArk Privileged Threat Analytics (PTA)

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format.

CyberPeak Spektr

[OOTB] CyberPeak Spektr syslog

Syslog

Designed for processing events of the CyberPeak Spektr system version 3 received via syslog.

DeepInstinct

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format.

Delinea Secret Server

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format.

Digital Guardian Endpoint Threat Detection

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format.

BIND DNS server

[OOTB] BIND Syslog

[OOTB] BIND file

Syslog

regexp

[OOTB] BIND Syslog is designed for processing events of the BIND DNS server received via Syslog. [OOTB] BIND file is designed for processing event logs of the BIND DNS server.

Dovecot

[OOTB] Dovecot Syslog

Syslog

Designed for processing events of the Dovecot mail server received via Syslog. The event source is POP3/IMAP logs.

Dragos Platform

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format.

EclecticIQ Intelligence Center

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format.

Edge Technologies AppBoard and enPortal

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format.

Eltex MES Switches

[OOTB] Eltex MES Switches

regexp

Designed for processing events from Eltex network devices.

Eset Protect

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format.

F5 Big­IP Advanced Firewall Manager (AFM)

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format.

FFRI FFR yarai

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format.

FireEye CM Series

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format.

FireEye Malware Protection System

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format.

Forcepoint NGFW

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format.

Forcepoint SMC

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format.

Fortinet FortiGate

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

regexp

Designed for processing events in the CEF format.

Fortinet FortiGate

[OOTB] FortiGate syslog KV

Syslog

Designed for processing events from FortiGate firewalls via syslog. The event source is FortiGate logs in key-value format.

Fortinet Fortimail

[OOTB] Fortimail

regexp

Designed for processing events of the FortiMail email protection system. The event source is Fortimail mail system logs.

Fortinet FortiSOAR

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format.

FreeIPA

[OOTB] FreeIPA

json

Designed for processing events from the FreeIPA system. The event source is Free IPA directory service logs.

FreeRADIUS

[OOTB] FreeRADIUS syslog

Syslog

Designed for processing events of the FreeRADIUS system received via Syslog. The normalizer supports events from FreeRADIUS version 3.0.

Gardatech GardaDB

[OOTB] Gardatech GardaDB syslog

Syslog

Designed for processing events of the Gardatech GardaDB system received via syslog in a CEF-like format.

Gardatech Perimeter

[OOTB] Gardatech Perimeter syslog

Syslog

Designed for processing events of the Gardatech Perimeter system version 5.3 received via syslog.

Gigamon GigaVUE

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format.

HAProxy

[OOTB] HAProxy syslog

Syslog

Designed for processing logs of the HAProxy system. The normalizer supports events of the HTTP log, TCP log, Error log type from HAProxy version 2.8.

Huawei Eudemon

[OOTB] Huawei Eudemon

regexp

Designed for processing events from Huawei Eudemon firewalls. The event source is logs of Huawei Eudemon firewalls.

Huawei USG

[OOTB] Huawei USG Basic

Syslog

Designed for processing events received from Huawei USG security gateways via Syslog.

IBM InfoSphere Guardium

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format.

Ideco UTM

[OOTB] Ideco UTM Syslog

Syslog

Designed for processing events received from Ideco UTM via Syslog. The normalizer supports events of Ideco UTM 14.7, 14.10.

Illumio Policy Compute Engine (PCE)

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format.

Imperva Incapsula

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format.

Imperva SecureSphere

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format.

Orion Soft

[OOTB] Orion Soft zVirt syslog

regexp

Designed for processing events of the Orion Soft 3.1 virtualization system.

Indeed PAM

[OOTB] Indeed PAM syslog

Syslog

Designed for processing events of Indeed PAM (Privileged Access Manager) version 2.6.

Indeed SSO

[OOTB] Indeed SSO

xml

Designed for processing events of the Indeed SSO (Single Sign-On) system.

InfoWatch Traffic Monitor

[OOTB] InfoWatch Traffic Monitor SQL

sql

Designed for processing events received by the connector from the database of the InfoWatch Traffic Monitor system.

Intralinks VIA

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format.

IPFIX

[OOTB] IPFIX

ipfix

Designed for processing events in the IP Flow Information Export (IPFIX) format.

Juniper JUNOS

[OOTB] Juniper - JUNOS

regexp

Designed for processing audit events received from Juniper network devices.

Kaspersky Anti Targeted Attack (KATA)

[OOTB] KATA

cef

Designed for processing alerts or events from the Kaspersky Anti Targeted Attack activity log.

Kaspersky CyberTrace

[OOTB] CyberTrace

regexp

Designed for processing Kaspersky CyberTrace events.

Kaspersky Endpoint Detection and Response (KEDR)

[OOTB] KEDR telemetry

json

Designed for processing Kaspersky EDR telemetry tagged by KATA. The event source is kafka, EnrichedEventTopic

Kaspersky Industrial CyberSecurity for Networks

[OOTB] KICS4Net v2.x

cef

Designed for processing events of Kaspersky Industrial CyberSecurity for Networks version 2.x.

Kaspersky Industrial CyberSecurity for Networks

[OOTB] KICS4Net v3.x

Syslog

Designed for processing events of Kaspersky Industrial CyberSecurity for Networks version 3.x

Kaspersky Security Center

[OOTB] KSC

cef

Designed for processing Kaspersky Security Center events received via Syslog.

Kaspersky Security Center

[OOTB] KSC from SQL

sql

Designed for processing events received by the connector from the database of the Kaspersky Security Center system.

Kaspersky Security for Linux Mail Server (KLMS)

[OOTB] KLMS Syslog CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events from Kaspersky Security for Linux Mail Server in CEF format via Syslog.

Kaspersky Security Mail Gateway (KSMG)

[OOTB] KSMG Syslog CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events of Kaspersky Secure Mail Gateway version 2.0 in CEF format via Syslog.

Kaspersky Web Traffic Security (KWTS)

[OOTB] KWTS Syslog CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events received from Kaspersky Web Traffic Security in CEF format via Syslog.

Kaspersky Web Traffic Security (KWTS)

[OOTB] KWTS (KV)

Syslog

Designed for processing events in Kaspersky Web Traffic Security for Key-Value format.

Kemptechnologies LoadMaster

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format.

Kerio Control

[OOTB] Kerio Control

Syslog

Designed for processing events of Kerio Control firewalls.

KUMA

[OOTB] KUMA forwarding

json

Designed for processing events forwarded from KUMA.

Libvirt

[OOTB] Libvirt syslog

Syslog

Designed for processing events of Libvirt version 8.0.0 received via syslog.

Lieberman Software ERPM

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format.

Linux

[OOTB] Linux audit and iptables Syslog

Syslog

Designed for processing events of the Linux operating system. This normalizer will be removed from the OOTB set after the next release. If you are using this normalizer, you must migrate to the [OOTB] Linux audit and iptables Syslog v1 normalizer.

Linux

[OOTB] Linux audit and iptables Syslog v1

Syslog

Designed for processing events of the Linux operating system.

Linux

[OOTB] Linux audit.log file

regexp

Designed for processing security logs of Linux operating systems received via Syslog.

MariaDB

[OOTB] MariaDB Audit Plugin Syslog

Syslog

Designed for processing events coming from the MariaDB audit plugin over Syslog.

Microsoft DHCP

[OOTB] MS DHCP file

regexp

Designed for processing Microsoft DHCP server events. The event source is Windows DHCP server logs.

Microsoft DNS

[OOTB] DNS Windows

regexp

Designed for processing Microsoft DNS server events. The event source is Windows DNS server logs.

Microsoft Exchange

[OOTB] Exchange CSV

csv

Designed for processing the event log of the Microsoft Exchange system. The event source is Exchange server MTA logs.

Microsoft IIS

[OOTB] IIS Log File Format

regexp

The normalizer processes events in the format described at https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/http/iis-logging. The event source is Microsoft IIS logs.

Microsoft Network Policy Server (NPS)

[OOTB] Microsoft Products

xml

The normalizer is designed for processing events of the Microsoft Windows operating system. The event source is Network Policy Server events.

Microsoft Sysmon

[OOTB] Microsoft Products

xml

This normalizer is designed for processing Microsoft Sysmon module events.

Microsoft Windows

[OOTB] Microsoft Products

xml

The normalizer is designed for processing events of the Microsoft Windows operating system.

Microsoft PowerShell

[OOTB] Microsoft Products

xml

The normalizer is designed for processing events of the Microsoft Windows operating system.

Microsoft SQL Server

[OOTB] Microsoft SQL Server xml

xml

Designed for processing events of MS SQL Server versions 2008, 2012, 2014, 2016.

Microsoft Windows Remote Desktop Services

[OOTB] Microsoft Products

xml

The normalizer is designed for processing events of the Microsoft Windows operating system. The event source is the log at Applications and Services Logs - Microsoft - Windows - TerminalServices-LocalSessionManager - Operational

Microsoft Windows XP/2003

[OOTB] SNMP. Windows {XP/2003}

json

Designed for processing events received from workstations and servers running Microsoft Windows XP, Microsoft Windows 2003 operating systems using the SNMP protocol.

MikroTik

[OOTB] MikroTik syslog

regexp

Designed for events received from MikroTik devices via Syslog.

Minerva Labs Minerva EDR

[OOTB] Minerva EDR

regexp

Designed for processing events from the Minerva EDR system.

MySQL 5.7

[OOTB] MariaDB Audit Plugin Syslog

Syslog

Designed for processing events coming from the MariaDB audit plugin over Syslog.

NetIQ Identity Manager

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format.

NetScout Systems nGenius Performance Manager

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format.

Netskope Cloud Access Security Broker

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format.

Netwrix Auditor

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format.

Nextcloud

[OOTB] Nextcloud syslog

Syslog

Designed for events of Nextcloud version 26.0.4 received via syslog. The normalizer does not save information from the Trace field.

Nexthink Engine

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format.

Nginx

[OOTB] Nginx regexp

regexp

Designed for processing Nginx web server log events.

NIKSUN NetDetector

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format.

One Identity Privileged Session Management

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format.

Open VPN

[OOTB] OpenVPN file

regexp

Designed for processing the event log of the OpenVPN system.

Oracle

[OOTB] Oracle Audit Trail

sql

Designed for processing database audit events received by the connector directly from an Oracle database.

PagerDuty

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format.

Palo Alto Cortex Data Lake

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format.

Palo Alto Networks NGFW

[OOTB] PA-NGFW (Syslog-CSV)

Syslog

Designed for processing events from Palo Alto Networks firewalls received via Syslog in CSV format.

Palo Alto Networks PAN­OS

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format.

Penta Security WAPPLES

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format.

Positive Technologies ISIM

[OOTB] PTsecurity ISIM

regexp

Designed for processing events from the PT Industrial Security Incident Manager system.

Positive Technologies Network Attack Discovery (NAD)

[OOTB] PTsecurity NAD

Syslog

Designed for processing events from PT Network Attack Discovery (NAD) received via Syslog.

Positive Technologies Sandbox

[OOTB] PTsecurity Sandbox

regexp

Designed for processing events of the PT Sandbox system.

Positive Technologies Web Application Firewall

[OOTB] PTsecurity WAF

Syslog

Designed for processing events from the PTsecurity (Web Application Firewall) system.

PostgreSQL pgAudit

[OOTB] PostgreSQL pgAudit Syslog

Syslog

Designed for processing events of the pgAudit audit plug-n for PostgreSQL database received via Syslog.

Proofpoint Insider Threat Management

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format.

Proxmox

[OOTB] Proxmox file

regexp

Designed for processing events of the Proxmox system version 7.2-3 stored in a file. The normalizer supports processing of events in access and pveam logs.

PT NAD

[OOTB] PT NAD json

json

Designed for processing events coming from PT NAD in json format. This normalizer supports events from PT NAD version 11.1, 11.0.

QEMU - hypervisor logs

[OOTB] QEMU - Hypervisor file

regexp

Designed for processing events of the QEMU hypervisor stored in a file. QEMU 6.2.0 and Libvirt 8.0.0 are supported.

QEMU - virtual machine logs

[OOTB] QEMU - Virtual Machine file

regexp

Designed for processing events from logs of virtual machines of the QEMU hypervisor version 6.2.0, stored in a file.

Radware DefensePro AntiDDoS

[OOTB] Radware DefensePro AntiDDoS

Syslog

Designed for processing events from the DDOS Mitigator protection system received via Syslog.

Reak Soft Blitz Identity Provider

[OOTB] Reak Soft Blitz Identity Provider file

regexp

Designed for processing events of the Reak Soft Blitz Identity Provider system version 5.16, stored in a file.

Recorded Future Threat Intelligence Platform

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format.

ReversingLabs N1000 Appliance

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format.

Rubicon Communications pfSense

[OOTB] pfSense Syslog

Syslog

Designed for processing events from the pfSense firewall received via Syslog.

Rubicon Communications pfSense

[OOTB] pfSense w/o hostname

Syslog

Designed for processing events from the pfSense firewall. The Syslog header of these events does not contain a hostname.

SailPoint IdentityIQ

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format.

Sendmail

[OOTB] Sendmail syslog

Syslog

Designed for processing events of Sendmail version 8.15.2 received via syslog.

SentinelOne

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format.

Snort

[OOTB] Snort 3 json file

json

Designed for processing events of Snort version 3 in JSON format.

Sonicwall TZ

[OOTB] Sonicwall TZ Firewall

Syslog

Designed for processing events received via Syslog from the SonicWall TZ firewall.

Sophos XG

[OOTB] Sophos XG

regexp

Designed for processing events from the Sophos XG firewall.

Squid

[OOTB] Squid access Syslog

Syslog

Designed for processing events of the Squid proxy server received via the Syslog protocol.

Squid

[OOTB] Squid access.log file

regexp

Designed for processing Squid log events from the Squid proxy server. The event source is access.log logs

S-Terra VPN Gate

[OOTB] S-Terra

Syslog

Designed for processing events from S-Terra VPN Gate devices.

Suricata

[OOTB] Suricata json file

json

This package contains a normalizer for Suricata 7.0.1 events stored in a JSON file.

The normalizer supports processing the following event types: flow, anomaly, alert, dns, http, ssl, tls, ftp, ftp_data, ftp, smb, rdp, pgsql, modbus, quic, dhcp, bittorrent_dht, rfb.

ThreatConnect Threat Intelligence Platform

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format.

ThreatQuotient

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format.

TrapX DeceptionGrid

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format.

Trend Micro Control Manager

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format.

Trend Micro Deep Security

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format.

Trend Micro NGFW

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format.

Trustwave Application Security DbProtect

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format.

Unbound

[OOTB] Unbound Syslog

Syslog

Designed for processing events from the Unbound DNS server received via Syslog.

UserGate

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format received from the UserGate system via Syslog.

Varonis DatAdvantage

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format.

Veriato 360

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format.

VipNet TIAS

[OOTB] Vipnet TIAS syslog

Syslog

Designed for processing events of ViPNet TIAS 3.8 received via Syslog.

VMware ESXi

[OOTB] VMware ESXi syslog

regexp

Designed for processing VMware ESXi events (support for a limited number of events from ESXi versions 5.5, 6.0, 6.5, 7.0) received via Syslog.

VMWare Horizon

[OOTB] VMware Horizon - Syslog

Syslog

Designed for processing events received from the VMware Horizon 2106 system via Syslog.

VMwareCarbon Black EDR

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format.

Vormetric Data Security Manager

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format.

Votiro Disarmer for Windows

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format.

Wallix AdminBastion

[OOTB] Wallix AdminBastion syslog

regexp

Designed for processing events received from the Wallix AdminBastion system via Syslog.

WatchGuard - Firebox

[OOTB] WatchGuard Firebox

Syslog

Designed for processing WatchGuard Firebox events received via Syslog.

Webroot BrightCloud

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format.

Winchill Fracas

[OOTB] PTC Winchill Fracas

regexp

Designed for processing events of the Windchill FRACAS failure registration system.

Zabbix

[OOTB] Zabbix SQL

sql

Designed for processing events of Zabbix 6.4.

ZEEK IDS

[OOTB] ZEEK IDS json file

json

Designed for processing logs of the ZEEK IDS system in JSON format. The normalizer supports events from ZEEK IDS version 1.8.

Zettaset BDEncrypt

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format.

Zscaler Nanolog Streaming Service (NSS)

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format.

IT-Bastion – SKDPU

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format received from the IT-Bastion SKDPU system via Syslog.

A-Real Internet Control Server (ICS)

[OOTB] A-real IKS syslog

regexp

Designed for processing events of the A-Real Internet Control Server (ICS) system received via Syslog. The normalizer supports events from A-Real ICS version 7.0 and later.

Apache web server

[OOTB] Apache HTTP Server file

regexp

Designed for processing Apache HTTP Server 2.4 events stored in a file. The normalizer supports processing of events from the Application log in the Common or Combined Log formats, as well as the Error log.

Expected format of the Error log events:

"[%t] [%-m:%l] [pid %P:tid %T] [server\ %v] [client\ %a] %E: %M;\ referer\ %-{Referer}i"

Apache web server

[OOTB] Apache HTTP Server syslog

Syslog

Designed for processing events of the Apache HTTP Server received via syslog. The normalizer supports processing of Apache HTTP Server 2.4 events from the Access log in the Common or Combined Log format, as well as the Error log.

Expected format of the Error log events:

"[%t] [%-m:%l] [pid %P:tid %T] [server\ %v] [client\ %a] %E: %M;\ referer\ %-{Referer}i"

Lighttpd web server

[OOTB] Lighttpd syslog

Syslog

Designed for processing Access events of the Lighttpd system received via syslog. The normalizer supports processing of Lighttpd version 1.4 events.

Expected format of Access log events:

$remote_addr $http_request_host_name $remote_user [$time_local] "$request" $status $body_bytes_sent "$http_referer" "$http_user_agent"

IVK Kolchuga-K

[OOTB] Kolchuga-K Syslog

Syslog

Designed for processing events from the IVK Kolchuga-K system, version LKNV.466217.002, via Syslog.

infotecs ViPNet IDS

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format received from the infotecs ViPNet IDS system via Syslog.

infotecs ViPNet Coordinator

[OOTB] VipNet Coordinator Syslog

Syslog

Designed for processing events from the ViPNet Coordinator system received via Syslog.

Kod Bezopasnosti — Continent

[OOTB][regexp] Continent IPS/IDS & TLS

regexp

Designed for processing events of Continent IPS/IDS device log.

Kod Bezopasnosti — Continent

[OOTB] Continent SQL

sql

Designed for getting events of the Continent system from the database.

Kod Bezopasnosti SecretNet 7

[OOTB] SecretNet SQL

sql

Designed for processing events received by the connector from the database of the SecretNet system.

Confident - Dallas Lock

[OOTB] Confident Dallas Lock

regexp

Designed for processing events from the Dallas Lock 8 information protection system.

CryptoPro NGate

[OOTB] Ngate Syslog

Syslog

Designed for processing events received from the CryptoPro NGate system via Syslog.

NT Monitoring and Analytics

[OOTB] Syslog-CEF

Syslog

Designed for processing events in the CEF format received from the NT Monitoring and Analytics system via Syslog.

BlueCoat proxy server

[OOTB] BlueCoat Proxy v0.2

regexp

Designed to process BlueCoat proxy server events. The event source is the BlueCoat proxy server event log.

SKDPU NT Access Gateway

[OOTB] Bastion SKDPU-GW

Syslog

Designed for processing events of the SKDPU NT Access gateway system received via Syslog.

Solar Dozor

[OOTB] Solar Dozor Syslog

Syslog

Designed for processing events received from the Solar Dozor system version 7.9 via Syslog. The normalizer supports custom format events and does not support CEF format events.

-

[OOTB] Syslog header

Syslog

Designed for processing events received via Syslog. The normalizer parses the header of the Syslog event, the message field of the event is not parsed. If necessary, you can parse the message field using other normalizers.

Page top

[Topic 217722]

Aggregation rules

Aggregation rules let you combine repetitive events of the same type and replace them with one common event. In this way, you can reduce the number of similar events sent to the storage and/or correlator, reduce the workload on services, conserve data storage space and licensing quota (EPS). An aggregation event is created when a time or number of events threshold is reached, whichever occurs first.

For aggregation rules, you can configure a filter and apply it only to events that match the specified conditions.

You can configure aggregation rules under Resources - Aggregation rules, and then select the created aggregation rule from the drop-down list in the collector settings. You can also configure aggregation rules directly in the collector settings.

Available aggregation rule settings

Setting

Description

Name

Required setting.

Unique name of the resource. Must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.

Tenant

Required setting.

The name of the tenant that owns the resource.

Threshold

Threshold on the number of events. After accumulating the specified number of events with identical fields, the collector creates an aggregation event and begins accumulating events for the next aggregated event. The default value is 100.

Triggered rule lifetime

Required setting.

Threshold on time in seconds. When the specified time expires, the accumulation of base events stops, the collector creates an aggregated event and starts collecting events for the next aggregated event. The default value is 60.

Description

Resource description: up to 4,000 Unicode characters.

Identical fields

Required setting.

This drop-down list lists the fields of normalized events that must have identical values. For example, for network events, you can use SourceAddress, DestinationAddress, DestinationPort fields. In the aggregation event, these fields are populated with the values of the base events.

Unique fields

This drop-down list lists the fields whose range of values must be saved in the aggregated event. For example, if the DestinationPort field is specified under Unique fields and not Identical fields, the aggregated event combines base connection events for a variety of ports, and the DestinationPort field of the aggregated event contains a list of all ports to which connections were made.

Sum fields

In this drop-down list, you can select the fields whose values will be summed up during aggregation and written to the same-name fields of the aggregated event.

Filter

Group of settings in which you can specify the conditions for identifying events that must be processed by this resource. You can select an existing filter from the drop-down list or create a new filter.

In aggregation rules, do not use filters with the TI operand or the TIDetect, inActiveDirectoryGroup, or hasVulnerability operators. The Active Directory fields for which you can use the inActiveDirectoryGroup operator will appear during the enrichment stage (after aggregation rules are executed).

Creating a filter in resources

  1. In the Filter drop-down list, select Create new.
  2. If you want to keep the filter as a separate resource, select the Save filter check box.

    In this case, you will be able to use the created filter in various services.

    This check box is cleared by default.

  3. If you selected the Save filter check box, enter a name for the created filter resource in the Name field. The name must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
  4. In the Conditions settings block, specify the conditions that the events must meet:
    1. Click the Add condition button.
    2. In the Left operand and Right operand drop-down lists, specify the search parameters.

      Depending on the data source selected in the Right operand field, you may see fields of additional parameters that you need to use to define the value that will be passed to the filter. For example, when choosing active list you will need to specify the name of the active list, the entry key, and the entry key field.

    3. In the operator drop-down list, select the relevant operator.

      Filter operators

      • =—the left operand equals the right operand.
      • <—the left operand is less than the right operand.
      • <=—the left operand is less than or equal to the right operand.
      • >—the left operand is greater than the right operand.
      • >=—the left operand is greater than or equal to the right operand.
      • inSubnet—the left operand (IP address) is in the subnet of the right operand (subnet).
      • contains—the left operand contains values of the right operand.
      • startsWith—the left operand starts with one of the values of the right operand.
      • endsWith—the left operand ends with one of the values of the right operand.
      • match—the left operand matches the regular expression of the right operand. The RE2 regular expressions are used.
      • hasBit—checks whether the left operand (string or number) contains bits whose positions are listed in the right operand (in a constant or in a list).

        The value to be checked is converted to binary and processed right to left. Chars are checked whose index is specified as a constant or a list.

        If the value being checked is a string, then an attempt is made to convert it to integer and process it in the way described above. If the string cannot be converted to a number, the filter returns False.

      • hasVulnerability—checks whether the left operand contains an asset with the vulnerability and vulnerability severity specified in the right operand.

        If you do not specify the ID and severity of the vulnerability, the filter is triggered if the asset in the event being checked has any vulnerability.

      • inActiveList—this operator has only one operand. Its values are selected in the Key fields field and are compared with the entries in the active list selected from the Active List drop-down list.
      • inContextTable checks whether or not an entry exists in the context table. This operator has only one operand. Its values are selected in the Key fields field and are compared with the values of entries in the context table selected from the drop-down list of context tables.
      • inDictionary—checks whether the specified dictionary contains an entry defined by the key composed with the concatenated values of the selected event fields.
      • inCategory—the asset in the left operand is assigned at least one of the asset categories of the right operand.
      • inActiveDirectoryGroup—the Active Directory account in the left operand belongs to one of the Active Directory groups in the right operand.
      • TIDetect—this operator is used to find events using CyberTrace Threat Intelligence (TI) data. This operator can be used only on events that have completed enrichment with data from CyberTrace Threat Intelligence. In other words, it can only be used in collectors at the destination selection stage and in correlators.
    4. If necessary, select the do not match case check box. When this check box is selected, the operator ignores the case of the values.

      The selection of this check box does not apply to the InSubnet, InActiveList, InCategory or InActiveDirectoryGroup operators.

      This check box is cleared by default.

    5. If you want to add a negative condition, select If not from the If drop-down list.
    6. You can add multiple conditions or a group of conditions.
  5. If you have added multiple conditions or groups of conditions, choose a search condition (and, or, not) by clicking the AND button.
  6. If you want to add existing filters that are selected from the Select filter drop-down list, click the Add filter button.

    You can view the nested filter settings by clicking the edit-grey button.

The KUMA distribution kit includes aggregation rules listed in the table below.

Predefined aggregation rules

Aggregation rule name

Description

[OOTB] Netflow 9

The rule is triggered after 100 events or 10 seconds.

Events are aggregated by fields:

  • DestinationAddress
  • DestinationPort
  • SourceAddress
  • TransportProtocol
  • DeviceVendor
  • DeviceProduct

The DeviceCustomString1 and BytesIn fields are summed up.

Page top

[Topic 217863]

Enrichment rules

Event enrichment involves adding information to events that can be used to identify and investigate an incident.

Enrichment rules let you add supplementary information to event fields by transforming data that is already present in the fields, or by querying data from external systems. For example, suppose that a user name is recorded in the event. You can use an enrichment rule to add information about the department, position, and manager of this user to the event fields.

Enrichment rules can be used in the following KUMA services and features:

Available enrichment rule settings are listed in the table below.

Basic settings tab

Setting

Description

Name

Required setting.

Unique name of the resource. Must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.

Tenant

Required setting.

The name of the tenant that owns the resource.

Source kind

Required setting.

Drop-down list for selecting the type of incoming events. Depending on the selected type, you may see the following additional settings:

  • constant

    This type of enrichment is used when a constant needs to be added to an event field. Settings of this type of enrichment:

    • In the Constant field, specify the value that should be added to the event field. The value may not be longer than 255 Unicode characters. If you leave this field blank, the existing event field value will be cleared.
    • In the Target field drop-down list, select the KUMA event field to which you want to write the data.

     

  • dictionary

    This type of enrichment is used if you need to add a value from the dictionary of the Dictionary type.

    When this type is selected in the Dictionary name drop-down list, you must select the dictionary that will provide the values. In the Key fields settings block, you must use the Add field button to select the event fields whose values will be used for dictionary entry selection.

  • table

    This type of enrichment is used if you need to add a value from the dictionary of the Table type.

    When this enrichment type is selected in the Dictionary name drop-down list, select the dictionary for providing the values. In the Key fields group of settings, use the Add field button to select the event fields whose values are used for dictionary entry selection.

    In the Mapping table, configure the dictionary fields to provide data and the event fields to receive data:

    • In the Dictionary field column, select the dictionary field. The available fields depend on the selected dictionary resource.
    • In the KUMA field column, select the event field to which the value is written. For some of the selected fields (*custom* and *flex*), in the Label column, you can specify a name for the data written to them.

    New table rows can be added by using the Add new element button. Columns can be deleted using the cross button.

  • event

    This type of enrichment is used when you need to write a value from another event field to the current event field. Settings of this type of enrichment:

    • In the Target field drop-down list, select the KUMA event field to which you want to write the data.
    • In the Source field drop-down list, select the event field whose value will be written to the target field.
    • In the Conversion settings block, you can create rules for modifying the original data before it is written to the KUMA event fields. The conversion type can be selected from the drop-down list. You can use the Add conversion and Delete buttons to add or delete a conversion, respectively. The order of conversions is important.

      Available conversions

      Conversions are changes that can be applied to a value before it gets written to the event field. The conversion type is selected from a drop-down list.

      Available conversions:

      • lower—is used to make all characters of the value lowercase
      • upper—is used to make all characters of the value uppercase
      • regexp – used to convert a value using the regular expression RE2. When this conversion type is selected, the field appears where regular expression should be added.
      • substring—is used to extract characters in the position range specified in the Start and End fields. These fields appear when this conversion type is selected.
      • replace—is used to replace specified character sequence with the other character sequence. When this type of conversion is selected, new fields appear:
        • Replace chars—in this field you can specify the character sequence that should be replaced.
        • With chars—in this field you can specify the characters sequence should be used instead of replaced characters.
      • trim—used to simultaneously remove the characters specified in the Chars field from the leading and end positions of the value. The field appears when this type of conversion is selected. For example, a trim conversion with the Micromon value applied to Microsoft-Windows-Sysmon results in soft-Windows-Sys.
      • append is used to add the characters specified in the Constant field to the end of the event field value. The field appears when this type of conversion is selected.
      • prepend—used to prepend the characters specified in the Constant field to the start of the event field value. The field appears when this type of conversion is selected.
      • replace with regexp—is used to replace RE2 regular expression results with the character sequence.
        • Expression—in this field you can specify the regular expression which results that should be replaced.
        • With chars—in this field you can specify the characters sequence should be used instead of replaced characters.
      • Converting encoded strings to text:
        • decodeHexString—used to convert a HEX string to text.
        • decodeBase64String—used to convert a Base64 string to text.
        • decodeBase64URLString—used to convert a Base64url string to text.

        When converting a corrupted string or if conversion error occur, corrupted data may be written to the event field.

        During event enrichment, if the length of the encoded string exceeds the size of the field of the normalized event, the string is truncated and is not decoded.

        If the length of the decoded string exceeds the size of the event field into which the decoded value is to be written, such a string is truncated to fit the size of the event field.

  • template

    This type of enrichment is used when you need to write a value obtained by processing Go templates into the event field. Settings of this type of enrichment:

    • Put the Go template into the Template field.

      Event field names are passed in the {{.EventField}} format, where EventField is the name of the event field from which the value must be passed to the script.

      Example: Attack on {{.DestinationAddress}} from {{.SourceAddress}}.

    • In the Target field drop-down list, select the KUMA event field to which you want to write the data.
  • dns

    This type of enrichment is used to send requests to a private network DNS server to convert IP addresses into domain names or vice versa. IP addresses are converted to DNS names only for private addresses: 10.0.0.0/8, 172.16.0.0/12, 192.168.0.0/16, 100.64.0.0/10.

    Available settings:

    • URL—in this field, you can specify the URL of a DNS server to which you want to send requests. You can use the Add URL button to specify multiple URLs.
    • RPS—maximum number of requests sent to the server per second. The default value is 1,000.
    • Workers—maximum number of requests per one point in time. The default value is 1.
    • Max tasks—maximum number of simultaneously fulfilled requests. By default, this value is equal to the number of vCPUs of the KUMA Core server.
    • Cache TTL—the lifetime of the values stored in the cache. The default value is 60.
    • Cache disabled—you can use this drop-down list to enable or disable caching. Caching is enabled by default.
  • cybertrace

    This type of enrichment is used to add information from CyberTrace data streams to event fields.

    Available settings:

    • URL (required)—in this field, you can specify the URL of a CyberTrace server to which you want to send requests.
    • Number of connections—maximum number of connections to the CyberTrace server that can be simultaneously established by KUMA. By default, this value is equal to the number of vCPUs of the KUMA Core server.
    • RPS—maximum number of requests sent to the server per second. The default value is 1,000.
    • Timeout—amount of time to wait for a response from the CyberTrace server, in seconds. The default value is 30.
    • Mapping (required)—this settings block contains the mapping table for mapping KUMA event fields to CyberTrace indicator types. The KUMA field column shows the names of KUMA event fields, and the CyberTrace indicator column shows the types of CyberTrace indicators.

      Available types of CyberTrace indicators:

      • ip
      • url
      • hash

      In the mapping table, you must provide at least one string. You can use the Add row button to add a string, and can use the cross button to remove a string.

  • timezone

    This type of enrichment is used in collectors and correlators to assign a specific timezone to an event. Timezone information may be useful when searching for events that occurred at unusual times, such as nighttime.

    When this type of enrichment is selected, the required timezone must be selected from the Timezone drop-down list.

    Make sure that the required time zone is set on the server hosting the enrichment-utilizing service. For example, you can do this by using the timedatectl list-timezones command, which shows all time zones that are set on the server. For more details on setting time zones, please refer to your operating system documentation.

    When an event is enriched, the time offset of the selected timezone relative to Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) is written to the DeviceTimeZone event field in the +-hh:mm format. For example, if you select the Asia/Yekaterinburg timezone, the value +05:00 will be written to the DeviceTimeZone field. If the enriched event already has a value in the DeviceTimeZone field, it will be overwritten.

    By default, if the timezone is not specified in the event being processed and enrichment rules by timezone are not configured, the event is assigned the timezone of the server hosting the service (collector or correlator) that processes the event. If the server time is changed, the service must be restarted.

    Permissible time formats when enriching the DeviceTimeZone field

    When processing incoming raw events in the collector, the following time formats can be automatically converted to the +-hh:mm format:

    Time format in a processed event

    Example

    +-hh:mm

    -07:00

    +-hhmm

    -0700

    +-hh

    -07

    If the date format in the DeviceTimeZone field differs from the formats listed above, the collector server timezone is written to the field when an event is enriched with timezone information. You can create custom normalization rules for non-standard time formats.

  • geographic data

    This type of enrichment is used to add IP address geographic data to event fields. Learn more about linking IP addresses to geographic data.

    When this type is selected, in the Mapping geographic data to event fields settings block, you must specify from which event field the IP address will be read, select the required attributes of geographic data, and define the event fields in which geographic data will be written:

    1. In the Event field with IP address drop-down list, select the event field from which the IP address is read. Geographic data uploaded to KUMA is matched against this IP address.

      You can use the Add event field with IP address button to specify multiple event fields with IP addresses that require geographic data enrichment. You can delete event fields added in this way by clicking the Delete event field with IP address button.

      When the SourceAddress, DestinationAddress, and DeviceAddress event fields are selected, the Apply default mapping button becomes available. You can use this button to add preconfigured mapping pairs of geographic data attributes and event fields.

    2. For each event field you need to read the IP address from, select the type of geographic data and the event field to which the geographic data should be written.

      You can use the Add geodata attribute button to add field pairs for Geodata attributeEvent field to write to. You can also configure different types of geographic data for one IP address to be written to different event fields. To delete a field pair, click cross-red.

      • In the Geodata attribute field, select which geographic data corresponding to the read IP address should be written to the event. Available geographic data attributes: Country, Region, City, Longitude, Latitude.
      • In the Event field to write to, select the event field which the selected geographic data attribute must be written to.

      You can write identical geographic data attributes to different event fields. If you configure multiple geographic data attributes to be written to the same event field, the event will be enriched with the last mapping in the sequence.

     

     

Debug

A drop-down list in which you can enable logging of service operations. Logging is disabled by default.

Description

Resource description: up to 4,000 Unicode characters.

Filter

Group of settings in which you can specify the conditions for identifying events that must be processed by this resource. You can select an existing filter from the drop-down list or create a new filter.

Creating a filter in resources

  1. In the Filter drop-down list, select Create new.
  2. If you want to keep the filter as a separate resource, select the Save filter check box.

    In this case, you will be able to use the created filter in various services.

    This check box is cleared by default.

  3. If you selected the Save filter check box, enter a name for the created filter resource in the Name field. The name must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
  4. In the Conditions settings block, specify the conditions that the events must meet:
    1. Click the Add condition button.
    2. In the Left operand and Right operand drop-down lists, specify the search parameters.

      Depending on the data source selected in the Right operand field, you may see fields of additional parameters that you need to use to define the value that will be passed to the filter. For example, when choosing active list you will need to specify the name of the active list, the entry key, and the entry key field.

    3. In the operator drop-down list, select the relevant operator.

      Filter operators

      • =—the left operand equals the right operand.
      • <—the left operand is less than the right operand.
      • <=—the left operand is less than or equal to the right operand.
      • >—the left operand is greater than the right operand.
      • >=—the left operand is greater than or equal to the right operand.
      • inSubnet—the left operand (IP address) is in the subnet of the right operand (subnet).
      • contains—the left operand contains values of the right operand.
      • startsWith—the left operand starts with one of the values of the right operand.
      • endsWith—the left operand ends with one of the values of the right operand.
      • match—the left operand matches the regular expression of the right operand. The RE2 regular expressions are used.
      • hasBit—checks whether the left operand (string or number) contains bits whose positions are listed in the right operand (in a constant or in a list).

        The value to be checked is converted to binary and processed right to left. Chars are checked whose index is specified as a constant or a list.

        If the value being checked is a string, then an attempt is made to convert it to integer and process it in the way described above. If the string cannot be converted to a number, the filter returns False.

      • hasVulnerability—checks whether the left operand contains an asset with the vulnerability and vulnerability severity specified in the right operand.

        If you do not specify the ID and severity of the vulnerability, the filter is triggered if the asset in the event being checked has any vulnerability.

      • inActiveList—this operator has only one operand. Its values are selected in the Key fields field and are compared with the entries in the active list selected from the Active List drop-down list.
      • inContextTable checks whether or not an entry exists in the context table. This operator has only one operand. Its values are selected in the Key fields field and are compared with the values of entries in the context table selected from the drop-down list of context tables.
      • inDictionary—checks whether the specified dictionary contains an entry defined by the key composed with the concatenated values of the selected event fields.
      • inCategory—the asset in the left operand is assigned at least one of the asset categories of the right operand.
      • inActiveDirectoryGroup—the Active Directory account in the left operand belongs to one of the Active Directory groups in the right operand.
      • TIDetect—this operator is used to find events using CyberTrace Threat Intelligence (TI) data. This operator can be used only on events that have completed enrichment with data from CyberTrace Threat Intelligence. In other words, it can only be used in collectors at the destination selection stage and in correlators.
    4. If necessary, select the do not match case check box. When this check box is selected, the operator ignores the case of the values.

      The selection of this check box does not apply to the InSubnet, InActiveList, InCategory or InActiveDirectoryGroup operators.

      This check box is cleared by default.

    5. If you want to add a negative condition, select If not from the If drop-down list.
    6. You can add multiple conditions or a group of conditions.
  5. If you have added multiple conditions or groups of conditions, choose a search condition (and, or, not) by clicking the AND button.
  6. If you want to add existing filters that are selected from the Select filter drop-down list, click the Add filter button.

    You can view the nested filter settings by clicking the edit-grey button.

Predefined enrichment rules

The KUMA distribution kit includes enrichment rules listed in the table below.

Predefined enrichment rules

Enrichment rule name

Description

[OOTB] KATA alert

Used to enrich events received from KATA in the form of a hyperlink to an alert.

The hyperlink is put in the DeviceExternalId field.

Page top

[Topic 217783]

Correlation rules

Correlation rules are used to recognize specific sequences of processed events and to take certain actions after recognition, such as creating correlation events/alerts or interacting with an active list.

Correlation rules can be used in the following KUMA services and features:

The available correlation rule settings depend on the selected type. Types of correlation rules:

  • standard—used to find correlations between several events. Resources of this kind can create correlation events.

    This rule kind is used to determine complex correlation patterns. For simpler patterns you should use other correlation rule kinds that require less resources to operate.

  • simple—used to create correlation events if a certain event is found.
  • operational—used for operations with Active lists. This rule kind cannot create correlation events.

For these resources, you can enable the display of control characters in all input fields except the Description field.

If a correlation rule is used in the correlator and an alert was created based on it, any change to the correlation rule will not result in a change to the existing alert even if the correlator service is restarted. For example, if the name of a correlation rule is changed, the name of the alert will remain the same. If you close the existing alert, a new alert will be created and it will take into account the changes made to the correlation rule.

In this section

Standard correlation rules

Simple correlation rules

Operational correlation rules

Variables in correlators

Predefined correlation rules

Page top

[Topic 221197]

Standard correlation rules

Standard correlation rules are used to identify complex patterns in processed events.

The search for patterns is conducted by using buckets

Bucket is a data container that is used by the Correlation rule resources to determine if the correlation event should be created. It has the following functions:

  • Group together events that were matched by the filters in the Selectors group of settings of the Correlation rule resource. Events are grouped by the fields that were selected by user in the Identical fields field.
  • Determine the instance when the Correlation rule should trigger, affecting the events that are grouped in the bucket.
  • Perform the actions that are selected in the Actions group of settings.
  • Create correlation events.

Available states of the Bucket:

  • Empty—the bucket has no events. This can happen only when it was created by the correlation rule triggering.
  • Partial Match—the bucket has some of the expected events (recovery events are not counted).
  • Full Match—the bucket has all of the expected events (recovery events are not counted). When this condition is achieved:
    • The Correlation rule triggers
    • Events are cleared from the bucket
    • The trigger counter of the bucket is updated
    • The state of the bucket becomes Empty
  • False Match—this state of the Bucket is possible:
    • when the Full Match state was achieved but the join-filter returned false.
    • when Recovery check box was selected and the recovery events were received.

    When this condition is achieved the Correlation rule does not trigger. Events are cleared from the bucket, the trigger counter is updated, and the state of the bucket becomes Empty.

The correlation rule window contains the following configuration tabs:

  • General—used to specify the main settings of the correlation rule. On this tab, you can select the type of correlation rule.
  • Selectors—used to define the conditions that the processed events must fulfill to trigger the correlation rule. Available settings vary based on the selected rule type.
  • Actions—used to set the triggers that will activate when the conditions configured in the Selectors settings block are fulfilled. The Correlation rule resource must have at least one trigger. Available settings vary based on the selected rule type.

General tab

  • Name (required)—a unique name for this type of resource. Must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
  • Tenant (required)—the tenant that owns the correlation rule.
  • Type (required)—a drop-down list for selecting the type of correlation rule. Select standard if you want to create a standard correlation rule.
  • Identical fields (required)—the event fields that should be grouped in a Bucket. The hash of the values of the selected fields is used as the Bucket key. If the selector (see below) triggers, the selected fields will be copied to the correlation event.

    If different selectors of the correlation rule use fields that have different values ​​in events, do not specify these fields in the Identical fields section.

  • Unique fields—event fields that should be sent to the Bucket. If this parameter is set, the Bucket will receive only unique events. The hash of the selected fields' values is used as the Bucket key.

    You can use local variables in the Identical fields and Unique fields sections. To access a variable, its name must be preceded with the "$" character.
    For an example of using local variables in these sections, refer to the rule provided with KUMA: R403_Access to malicious resources from a host with disabled protection or an out-of-date anti-virus database.

  • Rate limit—maximum number of times a correlation rule can be triggered per second. The default value is 100.

    If correlation rules employing complex logic for pattern detection are not triggered, this may be due to the specific method used to count rule triggers in KUMA. In this case, try to increase the value of Rate limit to 1000000, for example.

  • Window, sec (required)—bucket lifetime, in seconds. Default value: 86,400 seconds (24 hours). This timer starts when the Bucket is created (when it receives the first event). The lifetime is not updated, and when it runs out, the On timeout trigger from the Actions group of settings is activated and the bucket is deleted. The On every threshold and On subsequent thresholds triggers can be activated more than once during the lifetime of the bucket.
  • Base events keep policy—this drop-down list is used to specify which base events must be stored in the correlation event:
    • first (default value)—this option is used to store the first base event of the event collection that triggered creation of the correlation event.
    • last—this option is used to store the last base event of the event collection that triggered creation of the correlation event.
    • all—this option is used to store all base events of the event collection that triggered creation of the correlation event.
  • Priority—base coefficient used to determine the importance of a correlation rule. The default value is Low.
  • Order by—in this drop-down list, you can select the event field that will be used by the correlation rule selectors to track situational changes. This could be useful if you want to configure a correlation rule to be triggered when several types of events occur sequentially, for example.
  • Description—the description of a resource. Up to 4,000 Unicode characters.

Selectors tab

A rule of the standard kind can have multiple selectors. You can add selectors by clicking the Add selector button and can remove them by clicking the Delete selector button. Selectors can be moved by using the DragIcon button.

The order of conditions specified in the selector of the correlation rule is significant and affects system performance. We recommend putting the most unique condition in the first place in the selector.

Consider two examples of selectors that select successful authentication events in Microsoft Windows.

Selector 1:

Condition 1. DeviceProduct = Microsoft Windows

Condition 2. DeviceEventClassID = 4624

Селектор 2:

Condition 1. DeviceEventClassID = 4624

Condition 2.  DeviceProduct = Microsoft Windows

The order of conditions in Selector 2 is preferable because it causes less load on the system.

In the selector of the correlation rule, you can use regular expressions conforming to the RE2 standard.

Using regular expressions in correlation rules is computationally intensive compared to other operations. Therefore, when designing correlation rules, we recommend limiting the use of regular expressions to the necessary minimum and using other available operations.

To use a regular expression, you must use the match comparison operator. The regular expression must be placed in a constant. The use of capture groups in regular expressions is optional. For the correlation rule to trigger, the field text matched against the regexp must exactly match the regular expression.

For a primer on syntax and examples of correlation rules that use regular expressions in their selectors, see the following rules that are provided with KUMA:

  • R105_04_Suspicious PowerShell commands. Suspected obfuscation.
  • R333_Suspicious creation of files in the autorun folder.

For each selector, the following two tabs are available: Settings and Local variables.

The Settings tab contains the following settings:

  • Alias (required)—unique name of the event group that meets the conditions of the selector. Must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
  • Selector threshold (event count) (required)—the number of events that must be received by the selector to trigger.
  • Filter (required)—used to set the criteria for determining events that should trigger the selector. You can select an existing filter from the drop-down list or create a new filter.

    Creating a filter in resources

    1. In the Filter drop-down list, select Create new.
    2. If you want to keep the filter as a separate resource, select the Save filter check box.

      In this case, you will be able to use the created filter in various services.

      This check box is cleared by default.

    3. If you selected the Save filter check box, enter a name for the created filter resource in the Name field. The name must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
    4. In the Conditions settings block, specify the conditions that the events must meet:
      1. Click the Add condition button.
      2. In the Left operand and Right operand drop-down lists, specify the search parameters.

        Depending on the data source selected in the Right operand field, you may see fields of additional parameters that you need to use to define the value that will be passed to the filter. For example, when choosing active list you will need to specify the name of the active list, the entry key, and the entry key field.

      3. In the operator drop-down list, select the relevant operator.

        Filter operators

        • =—the left operand equals the right operand.
        • <—the left operand is less than the right operand.
        • <=—the left operand is less than or equal to the right operand.
        • >—the left operand is greater than the right operand.
        • >=—the left operand is greater than or equal to the right operand.
        • inSubnet—the left operand (IP address) is in the subnet of the right operand (subnet).
        • contains—the left operand contains values of the right operand.
        • startsWith—the left operand starts with one of the values of the right operand.
        • endsWith—the left operand ends with one of the values of the right operand.
        • match—the left operand matches the regular expression of the right operand. The RE2 regular expressions are used.
        • hasBit—checks whether the left operand (string or number) contains bits whose positions are listed in the right operand (in a constant or in a list).

          The value to be checked is converted to binary and processed right to left. Chars are checked whose index is specified as a constant or a list.

          If the value being checked is a string, then an attempt is made to convert it to integer and process it in the way described above. If the string cannot be converted to a number, the filter returns False.

        • hasVulnerability—checks whether the left operand contains an asset with the vulnerability and vulnerability severity specified in the right operand.

          If you do not specify the ID and severity of the vulnerability, the filter is triggered if the asset in the event being checked has any vulnerability.

        • inActiveList—this operator has only one operand. Its values are selected in the Key fields field and are compared with the entries in the active list selected from the Active List drop-down list.
        • inContextTable checks whether or not an entry exists in the context table. This operator has only one operand. Its values are selected in the Key fields field and are compared with the values of entries in the context table selected from the drop-down list of context tables.
        • inDictionary—checks whether the specified dictionary contains an entry defined by the key composed with the concatenated values of the selected event fields.
        • inCategory—the asset in the left operand is assigned at least one of the asset categories of the right operand.
        • inActiveDirectoryGroup—the Active Directory account in the left operand belongs to one of the Active Directory groups in the right operand.
        • TIDetect—this operator is used to find events using CyberTrace Threat Intelligence (TI) data. This operator can be used only on events that have completed enrichment with data from CyberTrace Threat Intelligence. In other words, it can only be used in collectors at the destination selection stage and in correlators.
      4. If necessary, select the do not match case check box. When this check box is selected, the operator ignores the case of the values.

        The selection of this check box does not apply to the InSubnet, InActiveList, InCategory or InActiveDirectoryGroup operators.

        This check box is cleared by default.

      5. If you want to add a negative condition, select If not from the If drop-down list.
      6. You can add multiple conditions or a group of conditions.
    5. If you have added multiple conditions or groups of conditions, choose a search condition (and, or, not) by clicking the AND button.
    6. If you want to add existing filters that are selected from the Select filter drop-down list, click the Add filter button.

      You can view the nested filter settings by clicking the edit-grey button.

    Filtering based on data from the Extra event field

    Conditions for filters based on data from the Extra event field:

    • Condition—If.
    • Left operand—event field.
    • In this event field, you can specify one of the following values:
      • Extra field.
      • Value from the Extra field in the following format:

        Extra.<field name>

        For example, Extra.app.

        A value of this type is specified manually.

      • Value from the array written to the Extra field in the following format:

        Extra.<field name>.<array element>

        For example, Extra.array.0.

        The values in the array are numbered starting from 0.

        A value of this type is specified manually.

        To work with a value from the Extra field at depth 3 and below, use backquotes ``. For example, `Extra.lev1.lev2.lev3`.

    • Operator – =.
    • Right operand—constant.
    • Value—the value by which you need to filter events.
  • Recovery—this check box must be selected when the Correlation rule must NOT trigger if a certain number of events are received from the selector. By default, this check box is cleared.

On the Local variables tab, use the Add variable button to declare variables that will be used within the limits of this correlation rule.

Actions tab

A rule of the standard kind can have multiple triggers.

  • On first threshold—this trigger activates when the Bucket registers the first triggering of the selector during the lifetime of the Bucket.
  • On subsequent thresholds—this trigger activates when the Bucket registers the second and all subsequent triggering of the selector during the lifetime of the Bucket.
  • On every threshold—this trigger activates every time the Bucket registers the triggering of the selector.
  • On timeout—this trigger activates when the lifetime of the Bucket ends, and is linked to the selector with the Recovery check box selected. In other words, this trigger activates if the situation detected by the correlation rule is not resolved within the defined amount of time.

Every trigger is represented as a group of settings with the following parameters available:

  • Output—if this check box is selected, the correlation event is sent for post-processing: for external enrichment outside the correlation rule, for a response, and to destinations.
  • Loop—if this check box is selected, the created correlation event is processed by the rule chain of the current correlator. This allows hierarchical correlation.

    If both check boxes are selected, the correlation rule will be sent for post-processing first and then to the current correlation rule selectors.

  • Do not create alert—if this check box is selected, an alert will not be created when this correlation rule is triggered.
  • Active lists update settings group—used to assign the trigger for one or more operations with active lists. You can use the Add active list action and Delete active list action buttons to add or delete operations with active lists, respectively.

    Available settings:

    • Name (required)—this drop-down list is used to select the Active list resources.
    • Operation (required)—this drop-down list is used to select the operation that must be performed:
      • Get—get the Active list entry and write the values of the selected fields into the correlation event.
      • Set—write the values of the selected fields of the correlation event into the Active list by creating a new or updating an existing Active list entry. When the Active list entry is updated, the data is merged and only the specified fields are overwritten.
      • Delete—delete the Active list entry.
    • Key fields (required)—this is the list of event fields used to create the Active list entry. It is also used as the Active list entry key.

      The active list entry key depends on the available fields and does not depend on the order in which they are displayed in the KUMA web interface.

    • Mapping (required for Get and Set operations)—used to map Active list fields with events fields. More than one mapping rule can be set.
      • The left field is used to specify the Active list field.

        The field must not contain special characters or numbers only.

      • The middle drop-down list is used to select event fields.
      • The right field can be used to assign a constant to the Active list field is the Set operation was selected.
  • Enrichment settings group—you can modify the fields of correlation events by using enrichment rules. These enrichment rules are stored in the correlation rule where they were created. You can create multiple enrichment rules. Enrichment rules can be added or deleted by using the Add enrichment or Remove enrichment buttons, respectively.
    • Source kind—you can select the type of enrichment in this drop-down list. Depending on the selected type, you may see advanced settings that will also need to be completed.

      Available types of enrichment:

      • constant

        This type of enrichment is used when a constant needs to be added to an event field. Settings of this type of enrichment:

        • In the Constant field, specify the value that should be added to the event field. The value may not be longer than 255 Unicode characters. If you leave this field blank, the existing event field value will be cleared.
        • In the Target field drop-down list, select the KUMA event field to which you want to write the data.

      • dictionary

        This type of enrichment is used if you need to add a value from the dictionary of the Dictionary type.

        When this type is selected in the Dictionary name drop-down list, you must select the dictionary that will provide the values. In the Key fields settings block, you must use the Add field button to select the event fields whose values will be used for dictionary entry selection.

      • table

        This type of enrichment is used if you need to add a value from the dictionary of the Table type.

        When this enrichment type is selected in the Dictionary name drop-down list, select the dictionary for providing the values. In the Key fields group of settings, use the Add field button to select the event fields whose values are used for dictionary entry selection.

        In the Mapping table, configure the dictionary fields to provide data and the event fields to receive data:

        • In the Dictionary field column, select the dictionary field. The available fields depend on the selected dictionary resource.
        • In the KUMA field column, select the event field to which the value is written. For some of the selected fields (*custom* and *flex*), in the Label column, you can specify a name for the data written to them.

        New table rows can be added by using the Add new element button. Columns can be deleted using the cross button.

      • event

        This type of enrichment is used when you need to write a value from another event field to the current event field. Settings of this type of enrichment:

        • In the Target field drop-down list, select the KUMA event field to which you want to write the data.
        • In the Source field drop-down list, select the event field whose value will be written to the target field.
        • Clicking the wrench-new button opens the Conversion window in which you can, using the Add conversion button, create rules for modifying the original data before writing them to the KUMA event fields.

          Available conversions

          Conversions are changes that can be applied to a value before it gets written to the event field. The conversion type is selected from a drop-down list.

          Available conversions:

          • lower—is used to make all characters of the value lowercase
          • upper—is used to make all characters of the value uppercase
          • regexp – used to convert a value using the regular expression RE2. When this conversion type is selected, the field appears where regular expression should be added.
          • substring—is used to extract characters in the position range specified in the Start and End fields. These fields appear when this conversion type is selected.
          • replace—is used to replace specified character sequence with the other character sequence. When this type of conversion is selected, new fields appear:
            • Replace chars—in this field you can specify the character sequence that should be replaced.
            • With chars—in this field you can specify the characters sequence should be used instead of replaced characters.
          • trim—used to simultaneously remove the characters specified in the Chars field from the leading and end positions of the value. The field appears when this type of conversion is selected. For example, a trim conversion with the Micromon value applied to Microsoft-Windows-Sysmon results in soft-Windows-Sys.
          • append is used to add the characters specified in the Constant field to the end of the event field value. The field appears when this type of conversion is selected.
          • prepend—used to prepend the characters specified in the Constant field to the start of the event field value. The field appears when this type of conversion is selected.
          • replace with regexp—is used to replace RE2 regular expression results with the character sequence.
            • Expression—in this field you can specify the regular expression which results that should be replaced.
            • With chars—in this field you can specify the characters sequence should be used instead of replaced characters.
          • Converting encoded strings to text:
            • decodeHexString—used to convert a HEX string to text.
            • decodeBase64String—used to convert a Base64 string to text.
            • decodeBase64URLString—used to convert a Base64url string to text.

            When converting a corrupted string or if conversion error occur, corrupted data may be written to the event field.

            During event enrichment, if the length of the encoded string exceeds the size of the field of the normalized event, the string is truncated and is not decoded.

            If the length of the decoded string exceeds the size of the event field into which the decoded value is to be written, such a string is truncated to fit the size of the event field.

      • template

        This type of enrichment is used when you need to write a value obtained by processing Go templates into the event field. Settings of this type of enrichment:

        • Put the Go template into the Template field.

          Event field names are passed in the {{.EventField}} format, where EventField is the name of the event field from which the value must be passed to the script.

          Example: Attack on {{.DestinationAddress}} from {{.SourceAddress}}.

        • In the Target field drop-down list, select the KUMA event field to which you want to write the data.
    • Debug—you can use this drop-down list to enable logging of service operations.
    • Description—the description of a resource. Up to 4,000 Unicode characters.
  • Categorization settings group—used to change the categories of assets indicated in events. There can be several categorization rules. You can add or delete them by using the Add categorization or Remove categorization buttons. Only reactive categories can be added to assets or removed from assets.
    • Operation—this drop-down list is used to select the operation to perform on the category:
      • Add—assign the category to the asset.
      • Delete—unbind the asset from the category.
    • Event field—event field that indicates the asset requiring the operation.
    • Category ID—you can click the parent-category button to select the category requiring the operation. Clicking this button opens the Select categories window showing the category tree. You can only select a category with Reactive content type.
Page top

[Topic 221199]

Simple correlation rules

Simple correlation rules are used to define simple sequences of events.

The correlation rule window contains the following configuration tabs:

  • General—used to specify the main settings of the correlation rule. On this tab, you can select the type of correlation rule.
  • Selectors—used to define the conditions that the processed events must fulfill to trigger the correlation rule. Available settings vary based on the selected rule kind.
  • Actions—used to set the triggers that will activate when the conditions configured in the Selectors settings block are fulfilled. A correlation rule must have at least one trigger. Available settings vary based on the selected rule type.

General tab

  • Name (required)—a unique name for this type of resource. Must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
  • Tenant (required)—the tenant that owns the correlation rule.
  • Type (required)—a drop-down list for selecting the type of correlation rule. Select simple if you want to create a simple correlation rule.
  • Propagated fields (required)—event fields used for event selection. If the selector (see below) is triggered, these fields will be written to the correlation event.
  • Rate limit—maximum number of times a correlation rule can be triggered per second. The default value is 100.

    If correlation rules employing complex logic for pattern detection are not triggered, this may be due to the specific method used to count rule triggers in KUMA. In this case, try to increase the value of Rate limit to 1000000, for example.

  • Priority—base coefficient used to determine the importance of a correlation rule. The default value is Low.
  • Description—the description of a resource. Up to 4,000 Unicode characters.

Selectors tab

A rule of the simple kind can have only one selector for which the Settings and Local variables tabs are available.

The Settings tab contains settings with the Filter settings block:

  • Filter (required)—used to set the criteria for determining events that should trigger the selector. You can select an existing filter from the drop-down list or create a new filter.

    Creating a filter in resources

    1. In the Filter drop-down list, select Create new.
    2. If you want to keep the filter as a separate resource, select the Save filter check box.

      In this case, you will be able to use the created filter in various services.

      This check box is cleared by default.

    3. If you selected the Save filter check box, enter a name for the created filter resource in the Name field. The name must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
    4. In the Conditions settings block, specify the conditions that the events must meet:
      1. Click the Add condition button.
      2. In the Left operand and Right operand drop-down lists, specify the search parameters.

        Depending on the data source selected in the Right operand field, you may see fields of additional parameters that you need to use to define the value that will be passed to the filter. For example, when choosing active list you will need to specify the name of the active list, the entry key, and the entry key field.

      3. In the operator drop-down list, select the relevant operator.

        Filter operators

        • =—the left operand equals the right operand.
        • <—the left operand is less than the right operand.
        • <=—the left operand is less than or equal to the right operand.
        • >—the left operand is greater than the right operand.
        • >=—the left operand is greater than or equal to the right operand.
        • inSubnet—the left operand (IP address) is in the subnet of the right operand (subnet).
        • contains—the left operand contains values of the right operand.
        • startsWith—the left operand starts with one of the values of the right operand.
        • endsWith—the left operand ends with one of the values of the right operand.
        • match—the left operand matches the regular expression of the right operand. The RE2 regular expressions are used.
        • hasBit—checks whether the left operand (string or number) contains bits whose positions are listed in the right operand (in a constant or in a list).

          The value to be checked is converted to binary and processed right to left. Chars are checked whose index is specified as a constant or a list.

          If the value being checked is a string, then an attempt is made to convert it to integer and process it in the way described above. If the string cannot be converted to a number, the filter returns False.

        • hasVulnerability—checks whether the left operand contains an asset with the vulnerability and vulnerability severity specified in the right operand.

          If you do not specify the ID and severity of the vulnerability, the filter is triggered if the asset in the event being checked has any vulnerability.

        • inActiveList—this operator has only one operand. Its values are selected in the Key fields field and are compared with the entries in the active list selected from the Active List drop-down list.
        • inContextTable checks whether or not an entry exists in the context table. This operator has only one operand. Its values are selected in the Key fields field and are compared with the values of entries in the context table selected from the drop-down list of context tables.
        • inDictionary—checks whether the specified dictionary contains an entry defined by the key composed with the concatenated values of the selected event fields.
        • inCategory—the asset in the left operand is assigned at least one of the asset categories of the right operand.
        • inActiveDirectoryGroup—the Active Directory account in the left operand belongs to one of the Active Directory groups in the right operand.
        • TIDetect—this operator is used to find events using CyberTrace Threat Intelligence (TI) data. This operator can be used only on events that have completed enrichment with data from CyberTrace Threat Intelligence. In other words, it can only be used in collectors at the destination selection stage and in correlators.
      4. If necessary, select the do not match case check box. When this check box is selected, the operator ignores the case of the values.

        The selection of this check box does not apply to the InSubnet, InActiveList, InCategory or InActiveDirectoryGroup operators.

        This check box is cleared by default.

      5. If you want to add a negative condition, select If not from the If drop-down list.
      6. You can add multiple conditions or a group of conditions.
    5. If you have added multiple conditions or groups of conditions, choose a search condition (and, or, not) by clicking the AND button.
    6. If you want to add existing filters that are selected from the Select filter drop-down list, click the Add filter button.

      You can view the nested filter settings by clicking the edit-grey button.

    Filtering based on data from the Extra event field

    Conditions for filters based on data from the Extra event field:

    • Condition—If.
    • Left operand—event field.
    • In this event field, you can specify one of the following values:
      • Extra field.
      • Value from the Extra field in the following format:

        Extra.<field name>

        For example, Extra.app.

        A value of this type is specified manually.

      • Value from the array written to the Extra field in the following format:

        Extra.<field name>.<array element>

        For example, Extra.array.0.

        The values in the array are numbered starting from 0.

        A value of this type is specified manually.

        To work with a value from the Extra field at depth 3 and below, use backquotes ``. For example, `Extra.lev1.lev2.lev3`.

    • Operator – =.
    • Right operand—constant.
    • Value—the value by which you need to filter events.

On the Local variables tab, use the Add variable button to declare variables that will be used within the limits of this correlation rule.

The order of conditions specified in the selector of the correlation rule is significant and affects system performance. We recommend putting the most unique condition in the first place in the selector.

Consider two examples of selectors that select successful authentication events in Microsoft Windows.

Selector 1:

Condition 1. DeviceProduct = Microsoft Windows

Condition 2. DeviceEventClassID = 4624

Селектор 2:

Condition 1. DeviceEventClassID = 4624

Condition 2.  DeviceProduct = Microsoft Windows

The order of conditions in Selector 2 is preferable because it causes less load on the system.

Actions tab

A rule of the simple kind can have only one trigger: On every event. It is activated every time the selector triggers.

Available parameters of the trigger:

  • Output—if this check box is selected, the correlation event will be sent for post-processing: for enrichment, for a response, and to destinations.
  • Loop—if this check box is selected, the correlation event will be processed by the current correlation rule. This allows hierarchical correlation.

    If both check boxes are selected, the correlation rule will be sent for post-processing first and then to the current correlation rule selectors.

  • Do not create alert—if this check box is selected, an alert will not be created when this correlation rule is triggered.
  • Active lists update settings group—used to assign the trigger for one or more operations with active lists. You can use the Add active list action and Delete active list action buttons to add or delete operations with active lists, respectively.

    Available settings:

    • Name (required)—this drop-down list is used to select the active list.
    • Operation (required)—this drop-down list is used to select the operation that must be performed:
      • Get—get the Active list entry and write the values of the selected fields into the correlation event.
      • Set—write the values of the selected fields of the correlation event into the Active list by creating a new or updating an existing Active list entry. When the Active list entry is updated, the data is merged and only the specified fields are overwritten.
      • Delete—delete the Active list entry.
    • Key fields (required)—this is the list of event fields used to create the Active list entry. It is also used as the Active list entry key.

      The active list entry key depends on the available fields and does not depend on the order in which they are displayed in the KUMA web interface.

    • Mapping (required for Get and Set operations)—used to map Active list fields with events fields. More than one mapping rule can be set.
      • The left field is used to specify the Active list field.

        The field must not contain special characters or numbers only.

      • The middle drop-down list is used to select event fields.
      • The right field can be used to assign a constant to the Active list field is the Set operation was selected.
  • Enrichment settings group—you can modify the fields of correlation events by using enrichment rules. These enrichment rules are stored in the correlation rule where they were created. You can create multiple enrichment rules. Enrichment rules can be added or deleted by using the Add enrichment or Remove enrichment buttons, respectively.
    • Source kind—you can select the type of enrichment in this drop-down list. Depending on the selected type, you may see advanced settings that will also need to be completed.

      Available types of enrichment:

      • constant

        This type of enrichment is used when a constant needs to be added to an event field. Settings of this type of enrichment:

        • In the Constant field, specify the value that should be added to the event field. The value may not be longer than 255 Unicode characters. If you leave this field blank, the existing event field value will be cleared.
        • In the Target field drop-down list, select the KUMA event field to which you want to write the data.

      • dictionary

        This type of enrichment is used if you need to add a value from the dictionary of the Dictionary type.

        When this type is selected in the Dictionary name drop-down list, you must select the dictionary that will provide the values. In the Key fields settings block, you must use the Add field button to select the event fields whose values will be used for dictionary entry selection.

      • table

        This type of enrichment is used if you need to add a value from the dictionary of the Table type.

        When this enrichment type is selected in the Dictionary name drop-down list, select the dictionary for providing the values. In the Key fields group of settings, use the Add field button to select the event fields whose values are used for dictionary entry selection.

        In the Mapping table, configure the dictionary fields to provide data and the event fields to receive data:

        • In the Dictionary field column, select the dictionary field. The available fields depend on the selected dictionary resource.
        • In the KUMA field column, select the event field to which the value is written. For some of the selected fields (*custom* and *flex*), in the Label column, you can specify a name for the data written to them.

        New table rows can be added by using the Add new element button. Columns can be deleted using the cross button.

      • event

        This type of enrichment is used when you need to write a value from another event field to the current event field. Settings of this type of enrichment:

        • In the Target field drop-down list, select the KUMA event field to which you want to write the data.
        • In the Source field drop-down list, select the event field whose value will be written to the target field.
        • Clicking the wrench-new button opens the Conversion window in which you can, using the Add conversion button, create rules for modifying the original data before writing them to the KUMA event fields.

          Available conversions

          Conversions are changes that can be applied to a value before it gets written to the event field. The conversion type is selected from a drop-down list.

          Available conversions:

          • lower—is used to make all characters of the value lowercase
          • upper—is used to make all characters of the value uppercase
          • regexp – used to convert a value using the regular expression RE2. When this conversion type is selected, the field appears where regular expression should be added.
          • substring—is used to extract characters in the position range specified in the Start and End fields. These fields appear when this conversion type is selected.
          • replace—is used to replace specified character sequence with the other character sequence. When this type of conversion is selected, new fields appear:
            • Replace chars—in this field you can specify the character sequence that should be replaced.
            • With chars—in this field you can specify the characters sequence should be used instead of replaced characters.
          • trim—used to simultaneously remove the characters specified in the Chars field from the leading and end positions of the value. The field appears when this type of conversion is selected. For example, a trim conversion with the Micromon value applied to Microsoft-Windows-Sysmon results in soft-Windows-Sys.
          • append is used to add the characters specified in the Constant field to the end of the event field value. The field appears when this type of conversion is selected.
          • prepend—used to prepend the characters specified in the Constant field to the start of the event field value. The field appears when this type of conversion is selected.
          • replace with regexp—is used to replace RE2 regular expression results with the character sequence.
            • Expression—in this field you can specify the regular expression which results that should be replaced.
            • With chars—in this field you can specify the characters sequence should be used instead of replaced characters.
          • Converting encoded strings to text:
            • decodeHexString—used to convert a HEX string to text.
            • decodeBase64String—used to convert a Base64 string to text.
            • decodeBase64URLString—used to convert a Base64url string to text.

            When converting a corrupted string or if conversion error occur, corrupted data may be written to the event field.

            During event enrichment, if the length of the encoded string exceeds the size of the field of the normalized event, the string is truncated and is not decoded.

            If the length of the decoded string exceeds the size of the event field into which the decoded value is to be written, such a string is truncated to fit the size of the event field.

      • template

        This type of enrichment is used when you need to write a value obtained by processing Go templates into the event field. Settings of this type of enrichment:

        • Put the Go template into the Template field.

          Event field names are passed in the {{.EventField}} format, where EventField is the name of the event field from which the value must be passed to the script.

          Example: Attack on {{.DestinationAddress}} from {{.SourceAddress}}.

        • In the Target field drop-down list, select the KUMA event field to which you want to write the data.
    • Debug—you can use this drop-down list to enable logging of service operations.
    • Description—the description of a resource. Up to 4,000 Unicode characters.
    • Filter settings block—lets you select which events will be forwarded for enrichment. Configuration is performed as described above.
  • Categorization settings group—used to change the categories of assets indicated in events. There can be several categorization rules. You can add or delete them by using the Add categorization or Remove categorization buttons. Only reactive categories can be added to assets or removed from assets.
    • Operation—this drop-down list is used to select the operation to perform on the category:
      • Add—assign the category to the asset.
      • Delete—unbind the asset from the category.
    • Event field—event field that indicates the asset requiring the operation.
    • Category ID—you can click the parent-category button to select the category requiring the operation. Clicking this button opens the Select categories window showing the category tree.

Page top

[Topic 221203]

Operational correlation rules

Operational correlation rules are used for working with active lists.

The correlation rule window contains the following tabs:

  • General—used to specify the main settings of the correlation rule. On this tab, you can select the type of correlation rule.
  • Selectors—used to define the conditions that the processed events must fulfill to trigger the correlation rule. Available settings vary based on the selected rule type.
  • Actions—used to set the triggers that will activate when the conditions configured in the Selectors settings block are fulfilled. A correlation rule must have at least one trigger. Available settings vary based on the selected rule type.

General tab

  • Name (required)—a unique name for this type of resource. Must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
  • Tenant (required)—the tenant that owns the correlation rule.
  • Type (required)—a drop-down list for selecting the type of correlation rule. Select operational if you want to create an operational correlation rule.
  • Rate limit—maximum number of times a correlation rule can be triggered per second. The default value is 100.

    If correlation rules employing complex logic for pattern detection are not triggered, this may be due to the specific method used to count rule triggers in KUMA. In this case, try to increase the value of Rate limit to 1000000, for example.

  • Description—the description of a resource. Up to 4,000 Unicode characters.

Selectors tab

A rule of the operational kind can have only one selector for which the Settings and Local variables tabs are available.

The Settings tab contains settings with the Filter settings block:

  • Filter (required)—used to set the criteria for determining events that should trigger the selector. You can select an existing filter from the drop-down list or create a new filter.

    Creating a filter in resources

    1. In the Filter drop-down list, select Create new.
    2. If you want to keep the filter as a separate resource, select the Save filter check box.

      In this case, you will be able to use the created filter in various services.

      This check box is cleared by default.

    3. If you selected the Save filter check box, enter a name for the created filter resource in the Name field. The name must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
    4. In the Conditions settings block, specify the conditions that the events must meet:
      1. Click the Add condition button.
      2. In the Left operand and Right operand drop-down lists, specify the search parameters.

        Depending on the data source selected in the Right operand field, you may see fields of additional parameters that you need to use to define the value that will be passed to the filter. For example, when choosing active list you will need to specify the name of the active list, the entry key, and the entry key field.

      3. In the operator drop-down list, select the relevant operator.

        Filter operators

        • =—the left operand equals the right operand.
        • <—the left operand is less than the right operand.
        • <=—the left operand is less than or equal to the right operand.
        • >—the left operand is greater than the right operand.
        • >=—the left operand is greater than or equal to the right operand.
        • inSubnet—the left operand (IP address) is in the subnet of the right operand (subnet).
        • contains—the left operand contains values of the right operand.
        • startsWith—the left operand starts with one of the values of the right operand.
        • endsWith—the left operand ends with one of the values of the right operand.
        • match—the left operand matches the regular expression of the right operand. The RE2 regular expressions are used.
        • hasBit—checks whether the left operand (string or number) contains bits whose positions are listed in the right operand (in a constant or in a list).

          The value to be checked is converted to binary and processed right to left. Chars are checked whose index is specified as a constant or a list.

          If the value being checked is a string, then an attempt is made to convert it to integer and process it in the way described above. If the string cannot be converted to a number, the filter returns False.

        • hasVulnerability—checks whether the left operand contains an asset with the vulnerability and vulnerability severity specified in the right operand.

          If you do not specify the ID and severity of the vulnerability, the filter is triggered if the asset in the event being checked has any vulnerability.

        • inActiveList—this operator has only one operand. Its values are selected in the Key fields field and are compared with the entries in the active list selected from the Active List drop-down list.
        • inContextTable checks whether or not an entry exists in the context table. This operator has only one operand. Its values are selected in the Key fields field and are compared with the values of entries in the context table selected from the drop-down list of context tables.
        • inDictionary—checks whether the specified dictionary contains an entry defined by the key composed with the concatenated values of the selected event fields.
        • inCategory—the asset in the left operand is assigned at least one of the asset categories of the right operand.
        • inActiveDirectoryGroup—the Active Directory account in the left operand belongs to one of the Active Directory groups in the right operand.
        • TIDetect—this operator is used to find events using CyberTrace Threat Intelligence (TI) data. This operator can be used only on events that have completed enrichment with data from CyberTrace Threat Intelligence. In other words, it can only be used in collectors at the destination selection stage and in correlators.
      4. If necessary, select the do not match case check box. When this check box is selected, the operator ignores the case of the values.

        The selection of this check box does not apply to the InSubnet, InActiveList, InCategory or InActiveDirectoryGroup operators.

        This check box is cleared by default.

      5. If you want to add a negative condition, select If not from the If drop-down list.
      6. You can add multiple conditions or a group of conditions.
    5. If you have added multiple conditions or groups of conditions, choose a search condition (and, or, not) by clicking the AND button.
    6. If you want to add existing filters that are selected from the Select filter drop-down list, click the Add filter button.

      You can view the nested filter settings by clicking the edit-grey button.

    Filtering based on data from the Extra event field

    Conditions for filters based on data from the Extra event field:

    • Condition—If.
    • Left operand—event field.
    • In this event field, you can specify one of the following values:
      • Extra field.
      • Value from the Extra field in the following format:

        Extra.<field name>

        For example, Extra.app.

        A value of this type is specified manually.

      • Value from the array written to the Extra field in the following format:

        Extra.<field name>.<array element>

        For example, Extra.array.0.

        The values in the array are numbered starting from 0.

        A value of this type is specified manually.

        To work with a value from the Extra field at depth 3 and below, use backquotes ``. For example, `Extra.lev1.lev2.lev3`.

    • Operator – =.
    • Right operand—constant.
    • Value—the value by which you need to filter events.

On the Local variables tab, use the Add variable button to declare variables that will be used within the limits of this correlation rule.

Actions tab

A rule of the operational kind can have only one trigger: On every event. It is activated every time the selector triggers.

Available parameters of the trigger:

  • Active lists update settings group—used to assign the trigger for one or more operations with active lists. You can use the Add active list action and Delete active list action buttons to add or delete operations with active lists, respectively.

    Available settings:

    • Name (required)—this drop-down list is used to select the active list.
    • Operation (required)—this drop-down list is used to select the operation that must be performed:
      • Get—get the Active list entry and write the values of the selected fields into the correlation event.
      • Set—write the values of the selected fields of the correlation event into the Active list by creating a new or updating an existing Active list entry. When the Active list entry is updated, the data is merged and only the specified fields are overwritten.
      • Delete—delete the Active list entry.
    • Key fields (required)—this is the list of event fields used to create the Active list entry. It is also used as the Active list entry key.

      The active list entry key depends on the available fields and does not depend on the order in which they are displayed in the KUMA web interface.

    • Mapping (required for Get and Set operations)—used to map Active list fields with events fields. More than one mapping rule can be set.
      • The left field is used to specify the Active list field.

        The field must not contain special characters or numbers only.

      • The middle drop-down list is used to select event fields.
      • The right field can be used to assign a constant to the Active list field is the Set operation was selected.
Page top

[Topic 234114]

Variables in correlators

If tracking values in event fields, active lists, or dictionaries is not enough to cover some specific security scenarios, you can use global and local variables. You can use them to take various actions on the values received by the correlators by implementing complex logic for threat detection. Variables can be declared in the correlator (global variables) or in the correlation rule (local variables) by assigning a function to them, then querying them from correlation rules as if they were ordinary event fields and receiving the triggered function result in response.

Usage scope of variables:

Variables can be queried the same way as event fields by preceding their names with the $ character.

In this section

Local variables in identical and unique fields

Local variables in selector

Local Variables in event enrichment

Local variables in active list enrichment

Properties of variables

Requirements for variables

Functions of variables

Declaring variables

Page top

[Topic 260640]

Local variables in identical and unique fields

You can use local variables in the Identical fields and Unique fields sections of 'standard' type correlation rules. To use a local variable, its name must be preceded with the "$" character.

For an example of using local variables in the Identical fields and Unique fields sections, refer to the rule provided with KUMA: R403_Access to malicious resources from a host with disabled protection or an out-of-date anti-virus database.

Page top

[Topic 260641]

Local variables in selector

To use a local variable in a selector:

  1. Add a local variable to the rule.
  2. In the Correlation rules window, go to the General tab and add the created local variable to the Identical fields section. Prefix the local variable name with a "$" character.
  3. In Correlation rules window, go to the Selectors tab, select an existing filter or create a new filter and click Add condition.
  4. Select the event field as the operand.
  5. Select the local variable as the event field value and prefix the variable name with a "$" character.
  6. Specify the remaining filter settings.
  7. Click Save.

For an example of using local variables, refer to the rule provided with KUMA: R403_Access to malicious resources from a host with disabled protection or an out-of-date anti-virus database.

Page top

[Topic 260642]

Local Variables in event enrichment

You can use 'standard' and 'simple' correlation rules to enrich events with local variables.

Enrichment with text and numbers

You can enrich events with text (strings). To do so, you can use functions that modify strings: to_lower, to_upper, str_join, append, prepend, substring, tr, replace, str_join.

You can enrich events with numbers. To do so, you can use the following functions: addition ("+"), subtraction ("-"), multiplication ("*"), division ("/"), round, ceil, floor, abs, pow.

You can also use regular expressions to manage data in local variables.

Using regular expressions in correlation rules is computationally intensive compared to other operations. Therefore, when designing correlation rules, we recommend limiting the use of regular expressions to the necessary minimum and using other available operations.

Timestamp enrichment

You can enrich events with timestamps (date and time). To do so, you can use functions that let you get or modify timestamps: now, extract_from_timestamp, parse_timestamp, format_timestamp, truncate_timestamp, time_diff.

Operations with active lists and tables

You can enrich events with local variables and data from active lists and tables.

To enrich events with data from an active list, use the active_list, active_list_dyn functions.

To enrich events with data from a table, use the table_dict, dict functions.

You can create conditional statements by using the 'conditional' function in local variables. In this way, the variable can return one of the values depending on what data was received for processing.

Enriching events with a local variable

To use a local variable to enrich events:

  1. Add a local variable to the rule.
  2. In the Correlation rules window, go to the General tab and add the created local variable to the Identical fields section. Prefix the local variable name with a "$" character.
  3. In the Correlation rules window, go to the Actions tab, and under Enrichment, in the Source kind drop-down list, select Event.
  4. From the Target field drop-down list, select the KUMA event field to which you want to pass the value of the local variable.
  5. From the Source field drop-down list, select a local variable. Prefix the local variable name with a "$" character.
  6. Specify the remaining rule settings.
  7. Click Save.
Page top

[Topic 260644]

Local variables in active list enrichment

You can use local variables to enrich active lists.

To enrich the active list with a local variable:

  1. Add a local variable to the rule.
  2. In the Correlation rules window, go to the General tab and add the created local variable to the Identical fields section. Prefix the local variable name with a "$" character.
  3. In the Correlation rules window, go to the Actions tab and under Active lists update, add the local variable to the Key fields field. Prefix the local variable name with a "$" character.
  4. Under Mapping, specify the correspondence between the event fields and the active list fields.
  5. Click the Save button.
Page top

[Topic 234737]

Properties of variables

Local and global variables

The properties of global variables differ from the properties of local variables.

Global variables:

  • Global variables are declared at the correlator level and are applied only within the scope of this correlator.
  • The global variables of the correlator can be queried from all correlation rules that are specified in it.
  • In standard correlation rules, the same global variable can take different values in each selector.
  • It is not possible to transfer global variables between different correlators.

Local variables:

  • Local variables are declared at the correlation rule level and are applied only within the limits of this rule.
  • In standard correlation rules, the scope of a local variable consists of only the selector in which the variable was declared.
  • Local variables can be declared in any type of correlation rule.
  • Local variables cannot be transferred between rules or selectors.
  • A local variable cannot be used as a global variable.

Variables used in various types of correlation rules

  • In operational correlation rules, on the Actions tab, you can specify all variables available or declared in this rule.
  • In standard correlation rules, on the Actions tab, you can provide only those variables specified in these rules on the General tab, in the Identical fields field.
  • In simple correlation rules, on the Actions tab, you can provide only those variables specified in these rules on the General tab, in the Inherited Fields field.

Page top

[Topic 234739]

Requirements for variables

When adding a variable function, you must first specify the name of the function, and then list its parameters in parentheses. Basic mathematical operations (addition, subtraction, multiplication, division) are an exception to this requirement. When these operations are used, parentheses are used to designate the severity of the operations.

Requirements for function names:

  • Must be unique within the correlator.
  • Must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
  • Must not begin with the character $.
  • Must be written in camelCase or CamelCase.

Special considerations when specifying functions of variables:

  • The sequence of parameters is important.
  • Parameters are separated by a comma: ,.
  • String parameters are passed in single quotes: '.
  • Event field names and variables are specified without quotation marks.
  • When querying a variable as a parameter, add the $ character before its name.
  • You do not need to add a space between parameters.
  • In all functions in which a variable can be used as parameters, nested functions can be created.
Page top

[Topic 234740]

Functions of variables

Operations with active lists and dictionaries

"active_list" and "active_list_dyn" functions

These functions allow you to receive information from an active list and dynamically generate a field name for an active list and key.

You must specify the parameters in the following sequence:

  1. Name of the active list
  2. Expression that returns the field name of the active list
  3. One or more expressions whose results are used to generate the key

    Usage example

    Result

    active_list('Test', to_lower('DeviceHostName'), to_lower(DeviceCustomString2), to_lower(DeviceCustomString1))

    Gets the field value of the active list.

Use these functions to query the active list of the shared tenant from a variable. To do so, add the @Shared suffix after the name of the active list (case sensitive). For example, active_list('exampleActiveList@Shared', 'score', SourceAddress, SourceUserName).

"table_dict" function

Gets information about the value in the specified column of a dictionary of the table type.

You must specify the parameters in the following sequence:

  1. Dictionary name
  2. Dictionary column name
  3. One or more expressions whose results are used to generate the dictionary row key.

    Usage example

    Result

    table_dict('exampleTableDict', 'office', SourceUserName)

    Gets data from the exampleTableDict dictionary from the row with the SourceUserName key in the office column.

    table_dict('exampleTableDict', 'office', SourceAddress, to_lower(SourceUserName))

    Gets data from the exampleTableDict dictionary from a composite key string from the SourceAddress field value and the lowercase value of the SourceUserName field from the office column.

Use this function to access the dictionary of the shared tenant from a variable. To do so, add the @Shared suffix after the name of the active list (case sensitive). For example, table_dict('exampleTableDict@Shared', 'office', SourceUserName).

"dict" function

Gets information about the value in the specified column of a dictionary of the dictionary type.

You must specify the parameters in the following sequence:

  1. Dictionary name
  2. One or more expressions whose results are used to generate the dictionary row key.

    Usage example

    Result

    dict('exampleDictionary', SourceAddress)

    Gets data from exampleDictionary from the row with the SourceAddress key.

    dict('exampleDictionary', SourceAddress, to_lower(SourceUserName))

    Gets data from the exampleDictionary from a composite key string from the SourceAddress field value and the lowercase value of the SourceUserName field.

Use this function to access the dictionary of the shared tenant from a variable. To do so, add the @Shared suffix after the name of the active list (case sensitive). For example, dict('exampleDictionary@Shared', SourceAddress).

Operation with rows

"len" function

Returns the number of characters in a string.

A string can be passed as a string, field name or variable.

Usage examples

len('SomeText')

len(Message)

len($otherVariable)

"to_lower" function

Converts characters in a string to lowercase.

A string can be passed as a string, field name or variable.

Usage examples

to_lower(SourceUserName)

to_lower('SomeText')

to_lower($otherVariable)

"to_upper" function

Converts characters in a string to uppercase. A string can be passed as a string, field name or variable.

Usage examples

to_upper(SourceUserName)

to_upper('SomeText')

to_upper($otherVariable)

"append" function

Adds characters to the end of a string.

You must specify the parameters in the following sequence:

  1. Original string.
  2. Added string.

Strings can be passed as a string, field name or variable.

Usage examples

Usage result

append(Message, '123')

The string 123 is added to the end of this string from the Message field.

append($otherVariable, 'text')

The string text is added to the end of this string from the variable otherVariable.

append(Message, $otherVariable)

A string from otherVariable is added to the end of this string from the Message field.

"prepend" function

Adds characters to the beginning of a string.

You must specify the parameters in the following sequence:

  1. Original string.
  2. Added string.

Strings can be passed as a string, field name or variable.

Usage examples

Usage result

prepend(Message, '123')

The string 123 is added to the beginning of this string from the Message field.

prepend($otherVariable, 'text')

The string text is added to the beginning of this string from otherVariable.

prepend(Message, $otherVariable)

A string from otherVariable is added to the beginning of this string from the Message field.

"substring" function

Returns a substring from a string. 

You must specify the parameters in the following sequence:

  1. Original string.
  2. Substring start position (natural number or 0).
  3. (Optional) substring end position.

Strings can be passed as a string, field name or variable. If the position number is greater than the original data string length, an empty string is returned.

Usage examples

Usage result

substring(Message, 2)

Returns a part of the string from the Message field: from 3 characters to the end.

substring($otherVariable, 2, 5)

Returns a part of the string from the otherVariable variable: from 3 to 6 characters.

substring(Message, 0, len(Message) - 1)

Returns the entire string from the Message field except the last character.

"tr" function

Deletes the specified characters from the beginning and end of a string.

You must specify the parameters in the following sequence:

  1. Original string.
  2. (Optional) string that should be removed from the beginning and end of the original string.

Strings can be passed as a string, field name or variable. If you do not specify a string to be deleted, spaces will be removed from the beginning and end of the original string.

Usage examples

Usage result

tr(Message)

Spaces have been removed from the beginning and end of the string from the Message field.

tr($otherVariable, '_')

If the otherVariable variable has the _test_ value, the string _test_ is returned.

tr(Message, '@example.com')

If the Message event field contains the string user@example.com, the string user is returned.

"replace" function

Replaces all occurrences of character sequence A in a string with character sequence B.

You must specify the parameters in the following sequence:

  1. Original string.
  2. Search string: sequence of characters to be replaced.
  3. Replacement string: sequence of characters to replace the search string.

Strings can be passed as an expression.

Usage examples

Usage result

replace(Name, 'UserA', 'UserB')

Returns a string from the Name event field in which all occurrences of UserA are replaced with UserB.

replace($otherVariable, ' text ', '_text_')

Returns a string from otherVariable in which all occurrences of ' text' are replaced with '_text_'.

"regexp_replace" function

Replaces a sequence of characters that match a regular expression with a sequence of characters and regular expression capturing groups.

You must specify the parameters in the following sequence:

  1. Original string.
  2. Search string: regular expression.
  3. Replacement string: sequence of characters to replace the search string, and IDs of the regular expression capturing groups. A string can be passed as an expression.

Strings can be passed as a string, field name or variable. Unnamed capturing groups can be used.

In regular expressions used in variable functions, each backslash character must be additionally escaped. For example, ^example\\\\ must be used instead of the regular expression ^example\\.

Usage examples

Usage result

regexp_replace(SourceAddress, '([0-9]{1,3}).([0-9]{1,3}).([0-9]{1,3}).([0-9]{1,3})', 'newIP: $1.$2.$3.10')

Returns a string from the SourceAddress event field in which the text newIP is inserted before the IP addresses. In addition, the last digits of the address are replaced with 10.

"regexp_capture" function

Gets the result matching the regular expression condition from the original string.

You must specify the parameters in the following sequence:

  1. Original string.
  2. Search string: regular expression.

Strings can be passed as a string, field name or variable. Unnamed capturing groups can be used.

In regular expressions used in variable functions, each backslash character must be additionally escaped. For example, ^example\\\\ must be used instead of the regular expression ^example\\.

Usage examples

Example values

Usage result

regexp_capture(Message, '(\\\\d{1,3}\\\\.\\\\d{1,3}\\\\.\\\\d{1,3}\\\\.\\\\d{1,3})')

Message = 'Access from 192.168.1.1 session 1'

Message = 'Access from 45.45.45.45 translated address 192.168.1.1 session 1'

'192.168.1.1'

'45.45.45.45'

Operations with timestamps

now function

Gets a timestamp in epoch format. Runs with no arguments.

Usage examples

now()

"extract_from_timestamp" function

Gets atomic time representations (year, month, day, hour, minute, second, day of the week) from fields and variables with time in the epoch format.

The parameters must be specified in the following sequence:

  1. Event field of the timestamp type, or variable.
  2. Notation of the atomic time representation. This parameter is case sensitive.

    Possible variants of atomic time notation:

    • y refers to the year in number format.
    • M refers to the month in number notation.
    • d refers to the number of the month.
    • wd refers to the day of the week: Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, Saturday, Sunday.
    • h refers to the hour in 24-hour format.
    • m refers to the minutes.
    • s refers to the seconds.
  3. (optional) Time zone notation. If this parameter is not specified, the time is calculated in UTC format.

    Usage examples

    extract_from_timestamp(Timestamp, 'wd')

    extract_from_timestamp(Timestamp, 'h')

    extract_from_timestamp($otherVariable, 'h')

    extract_from_timestamp(Timestamp, 'h', 'Europe/Moscow')

"parse_timestamp" function

Converts the time from RFC3339 format (for example, "2022-05-24 00:00:00", "2022-05-24 00:00:00+0300) to epoch format.

Usage examples

parse_timestamp(Message)

parse_timestamp($otherVariable)

"format_timestamp" function

Converts the time from epoch format to RFC3339 format.

The parameters must be specified in the following sequence:

  1. Event field of the timestamp type, or variable.
  2. Time format notation: RFC3339.
  3. (optional) Time zone notation. If this parameter is not specified, the time is calculated in UTC format.

    Usage examples

    format_timestamp(Timestamp, 'RFC3339')

    format_timestamp($otherVariable, 'RFC3339')

    format_timestamp(Timestamp, 'RFC3339', 'Europe/Moscow')

"truncate_timestamp" function

Rounds the time in epoch format. After rounding, the time is returned in epoch format. Time is rounded down.

The parameters must be specified in the following sequence:

  1. Event field of the timestamp type, or variable.
  2. Rounding parameter:
    • 1s rounds to the nearest second.
    • 1m rounds to the nearest minute.
    • 1h rounds to the nearest hour.
    • 24h rounds to the nearest day.
  3. (optional) Time zone notation. If this parameter is not specified, the time is calculated in UTC format.

    Usage examples

    Examples of rounded values

    Usage result

    truncate_timestamp(Timestamp, '1m')

    1654631774175 (7 June 2022, 19:56:14.175)

    1654631760000 (7 June 2022, 19:56:00)

    truncate_timestamp($otherVariable, '1h')

    1654631774175 (7 June 2022, 19:56:14.175)

    1654628400000 (7 June 2022, 19:00:00)

    truncate_timestamp(Timestamp, '24h', 'Europe/Moscow')

    1654631774175 (7 June 2022, 19:56:14.175)

    1654560000000 (7 June 2022, 0:00:00)

"time_diff" function

Gets the time interval between two timestamps in epoch format.

The parameters must be specified in the following sequence:

  1. Interval end time. Event field of the timestamp type, or variable.
  2. Interval start time. Event field of the timestamp type, or variable.
  3. Time interval notation:
    • ms refers to milliseconds.
    • s refers to seconds.
    • m refers to minutes.
    • h refers to hours.
    • d refers to days.

    Usage examples

    time_diff(EndTime, StartTime, 's')  

    time_diff($otherVariable, Timestamp, 'h')

    time_diff(Timestamp, DeviceReceiptTime, 'd')

Mathematical operations

These are comprised of basic mathematical operations and functions.

Basic mathematical operations

Operations:

  • Addition
  • Subtraction
  • Multiplication
  • Division
  • Modulo division

Parentheses determine the sequence of actions

Available arguments:

  • Numeric event fields
  • Numeric variables
  • Real numbers

    When modulo dividing, only natural numbers can be used as arguments.

Usage constraints:

  • Division by zero returns zero.
  • Mathematical operations between numbers and strings return zero.
  • Integers resulting from operations are returned without a dot.

    Usage examples

    (Type=3; otherVariable=2; Message=text)

    Usage result

    Type + 1

    4

    $otherVariable - Type

    -1

    2 * 2.5

    5

    2 / 0

    0

    Type * Message

    0

    (Type + 2) * 2

    10

    Type % $otherVariable

    1

"round" function

Rounds numbers. 

Available arguments:

  • Numeric event fields
  • Numeric variables
  • Numeric constants

    Usage examples

    (DeviceCustomFloatingPoint1=7.75; DeviceCustomFloatingPoint2=7.5 otherVariable=7.2)

    Usage result

    round(DeviceCustomFloatingPoint1)

    8

    round(DeviceCustomFloatingPoint2)

    8

    round($otherVariable)

    7

"ceil" function

Rounds up numbers.

Available arguments:

  • Numeric event fields
  • Numeric variables
  • Numeric constants

    Usage examples

    (DeviceCustomFloatingPoint1=7.15; otherVariable=8.2)

    Usage result

    ceil(DeviceCustomFloatingPoint1)

    8

    ceil($otherVariable)

    9

"floor" function

Rounds down numbers.

Available arguments:

  • Numeric event fields
  • Numeric variables
  • Numeric constants

    Usage examples

    (DeviceCustomFloatingPoint1=7.15; otherVariable=8.2)

    Usage result

    floor(DeviceCustomFloatingPoint1)

    7

    floor($otherVariable)

    8

"abs" function

Gets the modulus of a number.

Available arguments:

  • Numeric event fields
  • Numeric variables
  • Numeric constants

    Usage examples

    (DeviceCustomNumber1=-7; otherVariable=-2)

    Usage result

    abs(DeviceCustomFloatingPoint1)

    7

    abs($otherVariable)

    2

"pow" function

Exponentiates a number.

The parameters must be specified in the following sequence:

  1. Base — real numbers.
  2. Power — natural numbers.

Available arguments:

  • Numeric event fields
  • Numeric variables
  • Numeric constants

    Usage examples

    pow(DeviceCustomNumber1, DeviceCustomNumber2)

    pow($otherVariable, DeviceCustomNumber1)

"str_join" function

Join multiple strings into one using a separator.

The parameters must be specified in the following sequence:

  1. Separator. String.
  2. String1, string2, stringN. At least 2 expressions.

    Usage examples

    Usage result

    str_join('|', to_lower(Name), to_upper(Name), Name)

    String.

"conditional" function

Get one value if a condition is met and another value if the condition is not met.

The parameters must be specified in the following sequence:

  1. Condition. String. The syntax is similar to the conditions of the Where statement in SQL. You can use the functions of the KUMA variables and references to other variables in a condition.
  2. The value if the condition is met. Expression.
  3. The value if the condition is not met. Expression.

Supported operators:

  • AND
  • OR
  • NOT
  • =
  • !=
  • <
  • <=
  • >
  • >=
  • LIKE (RE2 regular expression is used, rather than an SQL expression)
  • ILIKE (RE2 regular expression is used, rather than an SQL expression)
  • BETWEEN
  • IN
  • IS NULL (check for an empty value, such as 0 or an empty string)

    Usage examples (the value depends on arguments 2 and 3)

    conditional('SourceUserName = \\'root\\' AND DestinationUserName = SourceUserName', 'match', 'no match')

    conditional(`DestinationUserName ILIKE 'svc_.*'`, 'match', 'no match')

    conditional(`DestinationUserName NOT LIKE 'svc_.*'`, 'match', 'no match')

Page top

[Topic 234738]

Declaring variables

To declare variables, they must be added to a correlator or correlation rule.

To add a global variable to an existing correlator:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, under ResourcesCorrelators, select the resource set of the relevant correlator.

    The Correlator Installation Wizard opens.

  2. Select the Global variables step of the Installation Wizard.
  3. click the Add variable button and specify the following parameters:
    • In the Variable window, enter the name of the variable.

      Variable naming requirements

      • Must be unique within the correlator.
      • Must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
      • Must not begin with the character $.
      • Must be written in camelCase or CamelCase.
    • In the Value window, enter the variable function.

      Description of variable functions.

    Multiple variables can be added. Added variables can be edited or deleted by using the cross icon.

  4. Select the Setup validation step of the Installation Wizard and click Save.

A global variable is added to the correlator. It can be queried like an event field by inserting the $ character in front of the variable name. The variable will be used for correlation after restarting the correlator service.

To add a local variable to an existing correlation rule:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, under ResourcesCorrelation rules, select the relevant correlation rule.

    The correlation rule settings window opens. The parameters of a correlation rule can also be opened from the correlator to which it was added by proceeding to the Correlation step of the Installation Wizard.

  2. Open the Selectors tab.
  3. In the selector, open the Local variables tab, click the Add variable button and specify the following parameters:
    • In the Variable window, enter the name of the variable.

      Variable naming requirements

      • Must be unique within the correlator.
      • Must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
      • Must not begin with the character $.
      • Must be written in camelCase or CamelCase.
    • In the Value window, enter the variable function.

      Description of variable functions.

    Multiple variables can be added. Added variables can be edited or deleted by using the cross icon.

    For standard correlation rules, repeat this step for each selector in which you want to declare variables.

  4. Click Save.

The local variable is added to the correlation rule. It can be queried like an event field by inserting the $ character in front of the variable name. The variable will be used for correlation after restarting the correlator service.

Added variables can be edited or deleted. If the correlation rule queries an undeclared variable (for example, if its name has been changed), an empty string is returned.

If you change the name of a variable, you will need to manually change the name of this variable in all correlation rules where you have used it.

Page top

[Topic 250832]

Predefined correlation rules

The KUMA distribution kit includes correlation rules listed in the table below.

Predefined correlation rules

Correlation rule name

Description

[OOTB] KATA alert

Used for enriching KATA events.

[OOTB] Successful Bruteforce

Triggers when a successful authentication attempt is detected after multiple unsuccessful authentication attempts. This rule works based on the events of the sshd daemon.

[OOTB][AD] Account created and deleted within a short period of time

Detects instances of creation and subsequent deletion of accounts on Microsoft Windows hosts.

[OOTB][AD] An account failed to log on from different hosts

Detects multiple unsuccessful attempts to authenticate on different hosts.

[OOTB][AD] Granted TGS without TGT (Golden Ticket)

Detects suspected "Golden Ticket" type attacks. This rule works based on Microsoft Windows events.

[OOTB][AD][Technical] 4768. TGT Requested

The technical rule used to populate the active list is [OOTB][AD] List of requested TGT. EventID 4768. This rule works based on Microsoft Windows events.

[OOTB][AD] Membership of sensitive group was modified

Works based on Microsoft Windows events.

[OOTB][AD] Multiple accounts failed to log on from the same host

Triggers after multiple failed authentication attempts are detected on the same host from different accounts.

[OOTB][AD] Possible Kerberoasting attack

Detects suspected "Kerberoasting" type attacks. This rule works based on Microsoft Windows events.

[OOTB][AD] Successful authentication with the same account on multiple hosts

Detects connections to different hosts under the same account. This rule works based on Microsoft Windows events.

[OOTB][AD] The account added and deleted from the group in a short period of time

Detects the addition of a user to a group and subsequent removal. This rule works based on Microsoft Windows events.

[OOTB][Net] Possible port scan

Detects suspected port scans. This rule works based on Netflow, Ipfix events.

Page top

[Topic 217880]

Filters

Filters are used to select events based on user-defined conditions.

This is not true only when filters are used in the collector service, in which the filters select all events that DO NOT satisfy filter conditions.

Filters can be used in the following KUMA services and features:

You can use standalone filters or built-in filters that are stored in the service or resource where they were created.

For these resources, you can enable the display of control characters in all input fields except the Description field.

Available settings for filters:

  • Name (required)—a unique name for this type of resource. Must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters. Inline filters are created in other resources or services and do not have names.
  • Tenant (required)—name of the tenant that owns the resource.
  • The Conditions group of settings lets you formulate filtering criteria by creating filter conditions and groups of filters, or by adding existing filters.

    You can use the Add group button to add a group of filters. Group operators can be switched between AND, OR, and NOT. You can add groups, conditions, and existing filters to groups of filters. Conditions placed in the NOT subgroup are combined with the AND operator.

    You can use the Add filter button to add an existing filter, which you can select in the Select filter drop-down list.

    You can use the Add condition button to add a string containing fields for identifying the condition (see below).

    Conditions, groups, and filters can be deleted by using the cross button.

Settings of conditions:

  • When (required)—in this drop-down list, you can specify whether or not to use the inverted function of the operator.
  • Left operand and Right operand (required)—used to specify the values that the operator will process. The available types depend on the selected operator.

    Operands of filters

    • Event field—used to assign an event field value to the operand. Advanced settings:
      • Event field (required)—this drop-down list is used to select the field from which the value for the operand should be extracted.
    • Active list—used to assign an active list record value to the operand. Advanced settings:
      • Active list (required)—this drop-down list is used to select the active list.
      • Key fields (required)—this is the list of event fields used to create the Active list entry and serve as the Active list entry key.
      • Field (required unless the inActiveList operator is selected)—used to enter the Active list field name from which the value for the operand should be extracted.
    • Dictionary—used to assign a dictionary resource value to the operand. Advanced settings:
      • Dictionary (required)—this drop-down list is used to select the dictionary.
      • Key fields (required)—this is the list of the event fields used to form the dictionary value key.
    • Constant—used to assign a custom value to the operand. Advanced settings:
      • Value (required)—here you enter the constant that you want to assign to the operand.
    • Table—used to assign multiple custom values to the operand. Advanced settings:
      • Dictionary (required)—this drop-down list is used to select a Table-type dictionary.
      • Key fields (required)—this is the list of the event fields used to form the dictionary value key.
    • List—used to assign multiple custom values to the operand. Advanced settings:
      • Value (required)—here you enter the list of constants that you want to assign to the operand. When you type the value in the field and press ENTER, the value is added to the list and you can enter a new value.
    • TI—used to read the CyberTrace threat intelligence (TI) data from the events. Advanced settings:
      • Feed (required)—this field is used to specify the CyberTrace threat category.
      • Key fields (required)—this drop-down list is used to select the event field containing the CyberTrace threat indicators.
      • Field (required)—this field is used to specify the CyberTrace feed field containing the threat indicators.
  • Operator (required)—used to select the condition operator.

    In this drop-down list, you can select the do not match case check box if the operator should ignore the case of values. This check box is ignored if the inSubnet, inActiveList, inCategory, InActiveDirectoryGroup, hasBit, inDictionary operators are selected. This check box is cleared by default.

    Filter operators

    • =—the left operand equals the right operand.
    • <—the left operand is less than the right operand.
    • <=—the left operand is less than or equal to the right operand.
    • >—the left operand is greater than the right operand.
    • >=—the left operand is greater than or equal to the right operand.
    • inSubnet—the left operand (IP address) is in the subnet of the right operand (subnet).
    • contains—the left operand contains values of the right operand.
    • startsWith—the left operand starts with one of the values of the right operand.
    • endsWith—the left operand ends with one of the values of the right operand.
    • match—the left operand matches the regular expression of the right operand. The RE2 regular expressions are used.
    • hasBit—checks whether the left operand (string or number) contains bits whose positions are listed in the right operand (in a constant or in a list).

      The value to be checked is converted to binary and processed right to left. Chars are checked whose index is specified as a constant or a list.

      If the value being checked is a string, then an attempt is made to convert it to integer and process it in the way described above. If the string cannot be converted to a number, the filter returns False.

    • hasVulnerability—checks whether the left operand contains an asset with the vulnerability and vulnerability severity specified in the right operand.

      If you do not specify the ID and severity of the vulnerability, the filter is triggered if the asset in the event being checked has any vulnerability.

    • inActiveList—this operator has only one operand. Its values are selected in the Key fields field and are compared with the entries in the active list selected from the Active List drop-down list.
    • inContextTable checks whether or not an entry exists in the context table. This operator has only one operand. Its values are selected in the Key fields field and are compared with the values of entries in the context table selected from the drop-down list of context tables.
    • inDictionary—checks whether the specified dictionary contains an entry defined by the key composed with the concatenated values of the selected event fields.
    • inCategory—the asset in the left operand is assigned at least one of the asset categories of the right operand.
    • inActiveDirectoryGroup—the Active Directory account in the left operand belongs to one of the Active Directory groups in the right operand.
    • TIDetect—this operator is used to find events using CyberTrace Threat Intelligence (TI) data. This operator can be used only on events that have completed enrichment with data from CyberTrace Threat Intelligence. In other words, it can only be used in collectors at the destination selection stage and in correlators.

The available operand kinds depends on whether the operand is left (L) or right (R).

Available operand kinds for left (L) and right (R) operands

Operator

Event field type

Active list type

Dictionary type

Table type

TI type

Constant type

List type

=

L,R

L,R

L,R

L,R

L,R

R

R

>

L,R

L,R

L,R

L,R

L

R

 

>=

L,R

L,R

L,R

L,R

L

R

 

<

L,R

L,R

L,R

L,R

L

R

 

<=

L,R

L,R

L,R

L,R

L

R

 

inSubnet

L,R

L,R

L,R

L,R

L,R

R

R

contains

L,R

L,R

L,R

L,R

L,R

R

R

startsWith

L,R

L,R

L,R

L,R

L,R

R

R

endsWith

L,R

L,R

L,R

L,R

L,R

R

R

match

L

L

L

L

L

R

R

hasVulnerability

L

L

L

L

 

 

 

hasBit

L

L

L

L

 

R

R

inActiveList

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

inDictionary

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

inCategory

L

L

L

L

 

R

R

inActiveDirectoryGroup

L

L

L

L

 

R

R

TIDetect

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

The filters listed in the table below are included in the KUMA kit.

Predefined filters

Filter name

Description

[OOTB][AD] A member was added to a security-enabled global group (4728)

Selects events of adding a user to an Active Directory security-enabled global group.

[OOTB][AD] A member was added to a security-enabled universal group (4756)

Selects events of adding a user to an Active Directory security-enabled universal group.

[OOTB][AD] A member was removed from a security-enabled global group (4729)

Selects events of removing a user from an Active Directory security-enabled global group.

[OOTB][AD] A member was removed from a security-enabled universal group (4757)

Selects events of removing a user from an Active Directory security-enabled universal group.

[OOTB][AD] Account Created

Selects Windows user account creation events.

[OOTB][AD] Account Deleted

Selects Windows user account deletion events.

[OOTB][AD] An account failed to log on (4625)

Selects Windows logon failure events.

[OOTB][AD] Successful Kerberos authentication (4624, 4768, 4769, 4770)

Selects successful Windows logon events and events with IDs 4769, 4770 that are logged on domain controllers.

[OOTB][AD][Technical] 4768. TGT Requested

Selects Microsoft Windows events with ID 4768.

[OOTB][Net] Possible port scan

Selects events that may indicate a port scan.

[OOTB][SSH] Accepted Password

Selects events of successful SSH connections with a password.

[OOTB][SSH] Failed Password

Selects attempts to connect over SSH with a password.

Page top

[Topic 217707]

Active lists

The active list is a bucket for data that is used by KUMA correlators for analyzing events according to the correlation rules.

For example, for a list of IP addresses with a bad reputation, you can:

  1. Create a correlation rule of the operational type and add these IP addresses to the active list.
  2. Create a correlation rule of the standard type and specify the active list as filtering criteria.
  3. Create a correlator with this rule.

    In this case, KUMA selects all events that contain the IP addresses in the active list and creates a correlation event.

You can fill active lists automatically using correlation rules of the simple type or import a file that contains data for the active list.

You can add, copy, or delete active lists.

Active lists can be used in the following KUMA services and features:

The same active list can be used by different correlators. However, a separate entity of the active list is created for each correlator. Therefore, the contents of the active lists used by different correlators differ even if the active lists have the same names and IDs.

Only data based on correlation rules of the correlator are added to the active list.

You can add, edit, duplicate, delete, and export records in the active correlator sheet.

During the correlation process, when entries are deleted from active lists, service events are generated in the correlators. These events only exist in the correlators, and they are not redirected to other destinations. Correlation rules can be configured to track these events so that they can be used to identify threats. Service event fields for deleting an entry from the active list are described below.

Event field

Value or comment

ID

Event identifier

Timestamp

Time when the expired entry was deleted

Name

"active list record expired"

DeviceVendor

"Kaspersky"

DeviceProduct

"KUMA"

ServiceID

Correlator ID

ServiceName

Correlator name

DeviceExternalID

Active list ID

DevicePayloadID

Key of the expired entry

BaseEventCount

Number of deleted entry updates increased by one

Page top

[Topic 239552]

Viewing the table of active lists

To view the table of correlator active lists:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, select the Resources section.
  2. In the Services section, click the Active services button.
  3. Select the check box next to the correlator for which you want to view the active list.
  4. Click the Go to active lists button.

The Correlator active lists table is displayed.

The table contains the following data:

  • Name—the name of the correlator list.
  • Records—the number of record the active list contains.
  • Size on disk—the size of the active list.
  • Directory—the path to the active list on the KUMA Core server.
Page top

[Topic 239532]

Adding active list

To add active list:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, select the Resources section.
  2. In the Resources section, click the Active lists button.
  3. Click the Add active list button.
  4. Do the following:
    1. In the Name field, enter a name for the active list.
    2. In the Tenant drop-down list, select the tenant that owns the resource.
    3. In the TTL field, specify time the record added to the active list is stored in it.

      When the specified time expires, the record is deleted. The time is specified in seconds.

      The default value is 0. If the value of the field is 0, the record is retained for 36,000 days (roughly 100 years).

    4. In the Description field, provide any additional information.

      You can use up to 4,000 Unicode characters.

      This field is optional.

  5. Click the Save button.

The active list is added.

Page top

[Topic 239553]

Viewing the settings of an active list

To view the settings of an active list:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, select the Resources section.
  2. In the Resources section, click the Active lists button.
  3. In the Name column, select the active list whose settings you want to view.

This opens the active list settings window. It displays the following information:

  • ID—identifier selected Active list.
  • Name—unique name of the resource.
  • Tenant—the name of the tenant that owns the resource.
  • TTL—the record added to the active list is stored in it for this time. This value is specified in seconds.
  • Description—any additional information about the resource.
Page top

[Topic 239557]

Changing the settings of an active list

To change the settings of an active list:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, select the Resources section.
  2. In the Resources section, click the Active lists button.
  3. In the Name column, select the active list whose settings you want to change.
  4. Specify the values of the following parameters:
    • Name—unique name of the resource.
    • TTL—the record added to the active list is stored in it for this time. This value is specified in seconds.

      If the field is set to 0, the record is stored indefinitely.

    • Description—any additional information about the resource.

    The ID and Tenant fields are not editable.

Page top

[Topic 239786]

Duplicating the settings of an active list

To copy an active list:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, select the Resources section.
  2. In the Resources section, click the Active lists button.
  3. Select the check box next to the active lists you want to copy.
  4. Click Duplicate.
  5. Specify the necessary settings.
  6. Click the Save button.

The active list is copied.

Page top

[Topic 239785]

Deleting an active list

To delete an active list:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, select the Resources section.
  2. In the Resources section, click the Active lists button.
  3. Select the check boxes next to the active lists you want to delete.

    To delete all lists, select the check box next to the Name column.

    At least one check box must be selected.

  4. Click the Delete button.
  5. Click OK.

The active lists are deleted.

Page top

[Topic 239534]

Viewing records in the active list

To view the records in the active list:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, select the Resources section.
  2. In the Services section, click the Active services button.
  3. Select the check box next to the correlator for which you want to view the active list.
  4. Click the Go to active lists button.

    The Correlator active lists table is displayed.

  5. In the Name column, select the desired active list.

A table of records for the selected list is opened.

The table contains the following data:

  • Key – the value of the record key.
  • Record repetitions – total number of times the record was mentioned in events and identical records were downloaded when importing active lists to KUMA.
  • Expiration date – date and time when the record must be deleted.

    If the TTL field had the value of 0 when the active list was created, the records of this active list are retained for 36,000 days (roughly 100 years).

  • Created – the time when the active list was created.
  • Updated – the time when the active list was last updated.
Page top

[Topic 239644]

Searching for records in the active list

To find a record in the active list:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, select the Resources section.
  2. In the Services section, click the Active services button.
  3. Select the check box next to the correlator for which you want to view the active list.
  4. Click the Go to active lists button.

    The Correlator active lists table is displayed.

  5. In the Name column, select the desired active list.

    A window with the records for the selected list is opened.

  6. In the Search field, enter the record key value or several characters from the key.

The table of records of the active list displays only the records with the key containing the entered characters.

Page top

[Topic 239780]

Adding a record to an active list

To add a record to the active list:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, select the Resources section.
  2. In the Services section, click the Active services button.
  3. Select the check box next to the required correlator.
  4. Click the Go to active lists button.

    The Correlator active lists table is displayed.

  5. In the Name column, select the desired active list.

    A window with the records for the selected list is opened.

  6. Click Add.

    The Create record window opens.

  7. Specify the values of the following parameters:
    1. In the Key field, enter the name of the record.

      You can specify several values separated by the "|" character.

      The Key field cannot be empty. If the field is not filled in, KUMA returns an error when trying to save the changes.

    2. In the Value field, specify the values for fields in the Field column.

      KUMA takes field names from the correlation rules with which the active list is associated. These names are not editable. You can delete these fields if necessary.

    3. Click the Add new element button to add more values.
    4. In the Field column, specify the field name.

      The name must meet the following requirements:

      • To be unique
      • Do not contain tab characters
      • Do not contain special characters except for the underscore character
      • The maximum number of characters is 128

        The name must not begin with an underscore and contain only numbers.

    5. In the Value column, specify the value for this field.

      It must meet the following requirements:

      • Do not contain tab characters
      • Do not contain special characters except for the underscore character
      • The maximum number of characters is 1024

      This field is optional.

  8. Click the Save button.

The record is added. After saving, the records in the active list are sorted in alphabet order.

Page top

[Topic 239900]

Duplicating records in the active list

To duplicate a record in the active list:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, select the Resources section.
  2. In the Services section, click the Active services button.
  3. Select the check box next to the correlator for which you want to view the active list.
  4. Click the Go to active lists button.

    The Correlator active lists table is displayed.

  5. In the Name column, select the desired active list.

    A window with the records for the selected list is opened.

  6. Select the check boxes next to the record you want to copy.
  7. Click Duplicate.
  8. Specify the necessary settings.

    The Key field cannot be empty. If the field is not filled in, KUMA returns an error when trying to save the changes.

    Editing the field names in the Field column is not available for the records that have been added to the active list before. You can change the names only for records added at the time of editing. The name must not begin with an underscore and contain only numbers.

  9. Click the Save button.

The record is copied. After saving, the records in the active list are sorted in alphabet order.

Page top

[Topic 239533]

Changing a record in the active list

To edit a record in the active list:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, select the Resources section.
  2. In the Services section, click the Active services button.
  3. Select the check box next to the correlator for which you want to view the active list.
  4. Click the Go to active lists button.

    The Correlator active lists table is displayed.

  5. In the Name column, select the desired active list.

    A window with the records for the selected list is opened.

  6. Click the record name in the Key column.
  7. Specify the required values.
  8. Click the Save button.

The record is overwritten. After saving, the records in the active list are sorted in alphabet order.

Restrictions when editing a record:

  • The record name is not editable. You can change it by importing the same data with a different name.
  • Editing the field names in the Field column is not available for the records that have been added to the active list before. You can change the names only for records added at the time of editing. The name must not begin with an underscore and contain only numbers.
  • The values in the Value column must meet the following requirements:
    • Do not contain Cyrillic characters
    • Do not contain spaces or tabs
    • Do not contain special characters except for the underscore character
    • The maximum number of characters is 128
Page top

[Topic 239645]

Deleting records from the active list

To delete records from the active list:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, select the Resources section.
  2. In the Services section, click the Active services button.
  3. Select the check box next to the correlator for which you want to view the active list.
  4. Click the Go to active lists button.

    The Correlator active lists table is displayed.

  5. In the Name column, select the desired active list.

    A window with the records for the selected list is opened.

  6. Select the check boxes next to the records you want to delete.

    To delete all records, select the check box next to the Key column.

    At least one check box must be selected.

  7. Click the Delete button.
  8. Click OK.

The records will be deleted.

Page top

[Topic 239642]

Import data to an active list

To import active list:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, select the Resources section.
  2. In the Services section, click the Active services button.
  3. Select the check box next to the correlator for which you want to view the active list.
  4. Click the Go to active lists button.

    The Correlator active lists table is displayed.

  5. Point the mouse over the row with the desired active list.
  6. Click More-DropDown to the left of the active list name.
  7. Select Import.

    The active list import window opens.

  8. In the File field select the file you wan to import.
  9. In the Format drop-down list select the format of the file:
    • csv
    • tsv
    • internal
  10. Under Key field, enter the name of the column containing the active list record keys.
  11. Click the Import button.

The data from the file is imported into the active list. The records included in the list before are saved.

Data imported from a file is not checked for invalid characters. If you use this data in widgets, widgets are displayed incorrectly if invalid characters are present in the data.

Page top

[Topic 239643]

Exporting data from the active list

To export active list:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, select the Resources section.
  2. In the Services section, click the Active services button.
  3. Select the check box next to the correlator for which you want to view the active list.
  4. Click the Go to active lists button.

    The Correlator active lists table is displayed.

  5. Point the mouse over the row with the desired active list.
  6. Click More-DropDown to the left of the desired active list.
  7. Click the Export button.

The active list is downloaded in the JSON format using your browsers settings. The name of the downloaded file reflects the name of active list.

Page top

[Topic 249358]

Predefined active lists

The active lists listed in the table below are included in the KUMA distribution kit.

Predefined active lists

Active list name

Description

[OOTB][AD] End-users tech support accounts

This active list is used as a filter for the "[OOTB][AD] Successful authentication with same user account on multiple hosts" correlation rule. Accounts of technical support staff may be added to the active list. Records are not deleted from the active list.

[OOTB][AD] List of requested TGT. EventID 4768

This active list is populated by the "[OOTB][AD][Technical] 4768 TGT Requested" rule, this active list is also used in the selector of the "[OOTB][AD] Granted TGS without TGT (Golden Ticket)" rule. Records are removed from the list 10 hours after they are recorded.

[OOTB][AD] List of sensitive groups

This active list is used as a filter for the "[OOTB][AD] Membership of sensitive group was modified" correlation rule. Critical domain groups, whose membership must be monitored, can be added to the active list. Records are not deleted from the active list.

[OOTB][Linux] CompromisedHosts

This active list is populated by the [OOTB] Successful Bruteforce by potentially compromised Linux hosts rule. Records are removed from the list 24 hours after they are recorded.

Page top

[Topic 217843]

Dictionaries

Description of parameters

Dictionaries are resources storing data that can be used by other KUMA resources and services.

Dictionaries can be used in the following KUMA services and features:

Available settings:

  • Name (required)—a unique name for this type of resource. Must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
  • Tenant (required)—name of the tenant that owns the resource.
  • Description—up to 256 Unicode characters describing the resource.
  • Type (required)—type of dictionary. The selected type determines the format of the data that the dictionary can contain:
    • You can add key-value pairs to the Dictionary type.

      It is not recommended to add more than 50,000 entries to dictionaries of this type.

      When adding lines with the same keys to the dictionary, each new line will overwrite the existing line with the same key. This means that only one line will be added to the dictionary.

    • Data in the form of complex tables can be added to the Table type. You can interact with this type of dictionary by using the REST API.
  • Values settings block—contains a table of dictionary data:
    • For the Dictionary type, this block displays a list of KeyValue pairs. You can use the add-button button to add rows to the table. You can delete rows by using the delete-button button that appears when you hover your mouse cursor over a row.
    • For the Table type, this block displays a table containing data. You can use the add-button button to add rows and columns to the table. You can delete rows and columns by using the delete-button buttons that are displayed when you hover your mouse cursor over a row or a column header. Column headers can be edited.

    If the dictionary contains more than 5,000 entries, they are not displayed in the KUMA web interface. To view the contents of such dictionaries, the contents must be exported in CSV format. If you edit the CSV file and import it back into KUMA, the dictionary is updated.

Importing and exporting dictionaries

You can import or export dictionary data in CSV format (in UTF-8 encoding) by using the Import CSV or Export CSV buttons.

The format of the CSV file depends on the dictionary type:

  • Dictionary type:

    {KEY},{VALUE}\n

  • Table type:

    {Column header 1}, {Column header N}, {Column header N+1}\n

    {Key1}, {ValueN}, {ValueN+1}\n

    {Key2}, {ValueN}, {ValueN+1}\n

    The keys must be unique for both the CSV file and the dictionary. In tables, the keys are specified in the first column. Keys must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.

    Values must contain 0 to 256 Unicode characters.

During an import, the contents of the dictionary are overwritten by the imported file. When imported into the dictionary, the resource name is also changed to reflect the name of the imported file.

If the key or value contains comma or quotation mark characters (, and "), they are enclosed in quotation marks (") when exported. Also, quotation mark character (") is shielded with additional quotation mark (").

If incorrect lines are detected in the imported file (for example, invalid separators), these lines will be ignored during import into the dictionary, and the import process will be interrupted during import into the table.

Interacting with dictionaries via API

You can use the REST API to read the contents of Table-type dictionaries. You can also modify them even if these resources are being used by active services. This lets you, for instance, configure enrichment of events with data from dynamically changing tables exported from third-party applications.

Predefined dictionaries

The dictionaries listed in the table below are included in the KUMA distribution kit.

Predefined dictionaries

Dictionary name

Type

Description

[OOTB] Ahnlab. Severity

dictionary

Contains a table of correspondence between a priority ID and its name.

[OOTB] Ahnlab. SeverityOperational

dictionary

Contains values of the SeverityOperational parameter and a corresponding description.

[OOTB] Ahnlab. VendorAction

dictionary

Contains a table of correspondence between the ID of the operation being performed and its name.

[OOTB] Cisco ISE Message Codes

dictionary

Contains Cisco ISE event codes and their corresponding names.

[OOTB] DNS. Opcodes

dictionary

Contains a table of correspondence between decimal opcodes of DNS operations and their IANA-registered descriptions.

[OOTB] IANAProtocolNumbers

dictionary

Contains the port numbers of transport protocols (TCP, UDP) and their corresponding service names, registered by IANA.

[OOTB] Juniper - JUNOS

dictionary

Contains JUNOS event IDs and their corresponding descriptions.

[OOTB] KEDR. AccountType

dictionary

Contains the ID of the user account type and its corresponding type name.

[OOTB] KEDR. FileAttributes

dictionary

Contains IDs of file attributes stored by the file system and their corresponding descriptions.

[OOTB] KEDR. FileOperationType

dictionary

Contains IDs of file operations from the KATA API and their corresponding operation names.

[OOTB] KEDR. FileType

dictionary

Contains modified file IDs from the KATA API and their corresponding file type descriptions.

[OOTB] KEDR. IntegrityLevel

dictionary

Contains the SIDs of the Microsoft Windows INTEGRITY LEVEL parameter and their corresponding descriptions.

[OOTB] KEDR. RegistryOperationType

dictionary

Contains IDs of registry operations from the KATA API and their corresponding values.

[OOTB] Linux. Sycall types

dictionary

Contains Linux call IDs and their corresponding names.

[OOTB] MariaDB Error Codes

dictionary

The dictionary contains MariaDB error codes and is used by the [OOTB] MariaDB Audit Plugin syslog normalizer to enrich events.

[OOTB] Microsoft SQL Server codes

dictionary

Contains MS SQL Server error IDs and their corresponding descriptions.

[OOTB] MS DHCP Event IDs Description

dictionary

Contains Microsoft Windows DHCP server event IDs and their corresponding descriptions.

[OOTB] S-Terra. Dictionary MSG ID to Name

dictionary

Contains IDs of S-Terra device events and their corresponding event names.

[OOTB] S-Terra. MSG_ID to Severity

dictionary

Contains IDs of S-Terra device events and their corresponding Severity values.

[OOTB] Syslog Priority To Facility and Severity

table

The table contains the Priority values and the corresponding Facility and Severity field values.

[OOTB] VipNet Coordinator Syslog Direction

dictionary

Contains direction IDs (sequences of special characters) used in ViPNet Coordinator to designate a direction, and their corresponding values.

[OOTB] Wallix EventClassId - DeviceAction

dictionary

Contains Wallix AdminBastion event IDs and their corresponding descriptions.

[OOTB] Windows.Codes (4738)

dictionary

Contains operation codes present in the MS Windows audit event with ID 4738 and their corresponding names.

[OOTB] Windows.Codes (4719)

dictionary

Contains operation codes present in the MS Windows audit event with ID 4719 and their corresponding names.

[OOTB] Windows.Codes (4663)

dictionary

Contains operation codes present in the MS Windows audit event with ID 4663 and their corresponding names.

[OOTB] Windows.Codes (4662)

dictionary

Contains operation codes present in the MS Windows audit event with ID 4662 and their corresponding names.

[OOTB] Windows. EventIDs and Event Names mapping

dictionary

Contains Windows event IDs and their corresponding event names.

[OOTB] Windows. FailureCodes (4625)

dictionary

Contains IDs from the Failure Information\Status and Failure Information\Sub Status fields of Microsoft Windows event 4625 and their corresponding descriptions.

[OOTB] Windows. ImpersonationLevels (4624)

dictionary

Contains IDs from the Impersonation level field of Microsoft Windows event 4624 and their corresponding descriptions.

[OOTB] Windows. KRB ResultCodes

dictionary

Contains Kerberos v5 error codes and their corresponding descriptions.

[OOTB] Windows. LogonTypes (Windows all events)

dictionary

Contains IDs of user logon types and their corresponding names.

[OOTB] Windows_Terminal Server. EventIDs and Event Names mapping

dictionary

Contains Microsoft Terminal Server event IDs and their corresponding names.

[OOTB] Windows. Validate Cred. Error Codes

dictionary

Contains IDs of user logon types and their corresponding names.

[OOTB] ViPNet Coordinator Syslog Direction

dictionary

Contains direction IDs (sequences of special characters) used in ViPNet Coordinator to designate a direction, and their corresponding values.

[OOTB] Syslog Priority To Facility and Severity

table

Contains the Priority values and the corresponding Facility and Severity field values.

Page top

[Topic 217972]

Response rules

Response rules let you initiate automatic running of Kaspersky Security Center tasks, Threat Response actions for Kaspersky Endpoint Detection and Response, KICS for Networks, Active Directory, and running a custom script for specific events.

Automatic execution of Kaspersky Security Center tasks, Kaspersky Endpoint Detection and Response tasks, and KICS for Networks and Active Directory tasks in accordance with response rules is available when integrated with the relevant programs.

You can configure response rules under Resources - Response, and then select the created response rule from the drop-down list in the correlator settings. You can also configure response rules directly in the correlator settings.

In this section

Response rules for Kaspersky Security Center

Response rules for a custom script

Response rules for KICS for Networks

Response rules for Kaspersky Endpoint Detection and Response

Active Directory response rules

Page top

[Topic 233363]

Response rules for Kaspersky Security Center

You can configure response rules to automatically start tasks of anti-virus scan and updates on Kaspersky Security Center assets.

When creating and editing response rules for Kaspersky Security Center, you need to define values for the following settings.

Response rule settings

Setting

Description

Name

Required setting.

Unique name of the resource. Must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.

Tenant

Required setting.

The name of the tenant that owns the resource.

Type

Required setting, available if KUMA is integrated with Kaspersky Security Center.

Response rule type, ksctasks.

Kaspersky Security Center task

Required setting.

Name of the Kaspersky Security Center task to run. Tasks must be created beforehand, and their names must begin with "KUMA". For example, KUMA antivirus check (not case-sensitive and without quotation marks).

You can use KUMA to run the following types of Kaspersky Security Center tasks:

  • Update
  • Virus scan

Event field

Required setting.

Defines the event field of the asset for which the Kaspersky Security Center task should be started. Possible values:

  • SourceAssetID
  • DestinationAssetID
  • DeviceAssetID

Workers

The number of processes that the service can run simultaneously. By default, the number of workers is the same as the number of virtual processors on the server where the service is installed.

Description

Description of the response rule. You can add up to 4,000 Unicode characters.

Filter

Used to define the conditions for the events to be processed using the response rule. You can select an existing filter from the drop-down list or create a new filter.

Creating a filter in resources

  1. In the Filter drop-down list, select Create new.
  2. If you want to keep the filter as a separate resource, select the Save filter check box.

    In this case, you will be able to use the created filter in various services.

    This check box is cleared by default.

  3. If you selected the Save filter check box, enter a name for the created filter resource in the Name field. The name must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
  4. In the Conditions settings block, specify the conditions that the events must meet:
    1. Click the Add condition button.
    2. In the Left operand and Right operand drop-down lists, specify the search parameters.

      Depending on the data source selected in the Right operand field, you may see fields of additional parameters that you need to use to define the value that will be passed to the filter. For example, when choosing active list you will need to specify the name of the active list, the entry key, and the entry key field.

    3. In the operator drop-down list, select the relevant operator.

      Filter operators

      • =—the left operand equals the right operand.
      • <—the left operand is less than the right operand.
      • <=—the left operand is less than or equal to the right operand.
      • >—the left operand is greater than the right operand.
      • >=—the left operand is greater than or equal to the right operand.
      • inSubnet—the left operand (IP address) is in the subnet of the right operand (subnet).
      • contains—the left operand contains values of the right operand.
      • startsWith—the left operand starts with one of the values of the right operand.
      • endsWith—the left operand ends with one of the values of the right operand.
      • match—the left operand matches the regular expression of the right operand. The RE2 regular expressions are used.
      • hasBit—checks whether the left operand (string or number) contains bits whose positions are listed in the right operand (in a constant or in a list).

        The value to be checked is converted to binary and processed right to left. Chars are checked whose index is specified as a constant or a list.

        If the value being checked is a string, then an attempt is made to convert it to integer and process it in the way described above. If the string cannot be converted to a number, the filter returns False.

      • hasVulnerability—checks whether the left operand contains an asset with the vulnerability and vulnerability severity specified in the right operand.

        If you do not specify the ID and severity of the vulnerability, the filter is triggered if the asset in the event being checked has any vulnerability.

      • inActiveList—this operator has only one operand. Its values are selected in the Key fields field and are compared with the entries in the active list selected from the Active List drop-down list.
      • inContextTable checks whether or not an entry exists in the context table. This operator has only one operand. Its values are selected in the Key fields field and are compared with the values of entries in the context table selected from the drop-down list of context tables.
      • inDictionary—checks whether the specified dictionary contains an entry defined by the key composed with the concatenated values of the selected event fields.
      • inCategory—the asset in the left operand is assigned at least one of the asset categories of the right operand.
      • inActiveDirectoryGroup—the Active Directory account in the left operand belongs to one of the Active Directory groups in the right operand.
      • TIDetect—this operator is used to find events using CyberTrace Threat Intelligence (TI) data. This operator can be used only on events that have completed enrichment with data from CyberTrace Threat Intelligence. In other words, it can only be used in collectors at the destination selection stage and in correlators.
    4. If necessary, select the do not match case check box. When this check box is selected, the operator ignores the case of the values.

      The selection of this check box does not apply to the InSubnet, InActiveList, InCategory or InActiveDirectoryGroup operators.

      This check box is cleared by default.

    5. If you want to add a negative condition, select If not from the If drop-down list.
    6. You can add multiple conditions or a group of conditions.
  5. If you have added multiple conditions or groups of conditions, choose a search condition (and, or, not) by clicking the AND button.
  6. If you want to add existing filters that are selected from the Select filter drop-down list, click the Add filter button.

    You can view the nested filter settings by clicking the edit-grey button.

To send requests to Kaspersky Security Center, you must ensure that Kaspersky Security Center is available over the UDP protocol.

If a response rule is owned by the shared tenant, the displayed Kaspersky Security Center tasks that are available for selection are from the Kaspersky Security Center server that the main tenant is connected to.

If a response rule has a selected task that is absent from the Kaspersky Security Center server that the tenant is connected to, the task is not performed for assets of this tenant. This situation could arise when two tenants are using a common correlator, for example.

Page top

[Topic 233366]

Response rules for a custom script

You can create a script containing commands to be executed on the KUMA server when selected events are detected and configure response rules to automatically run this script. In this case, the program will run the script when it receives events that match the response rules.

The script file is stored on the server where the correlator service using the response resource is installed: /opt/kaspersky/kuma/correlator/<Correlator ID>/scripts. The kuma user of this server requires the permissions to run the script.

When creating and editing response rules for a custom script, you need to define values for the following parameters.

Response rule settings

Setting

Description

Name

Required setting.

Unique name of the resource. Must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.

Tenant

Required setting.

The name of the tenant that owns the resource.

Type

Required setting.

Response rule type, script.

Timeout

The number of seconds allotted for the script to finish. If this amount of time is exceeded, the script is terminated.

Script name

Required setting.

Name of the script file.

If the response resource is attached to the correlator service but there is no script file in the /opt/kaspersky/kuma/correlator/<Correlator ID>/scripts folder, the correlator will not work.

Script arguments

Arguments or event field values that must be passed to the script.

If the script includes actions taken on files, you should specify the absolute path to these files.

Parameters can be written with quotation marks (").

Event field names are passed in the {{.EventField}} format, where EventField is the name of the event field which value must be passed to the script.

Example: -n "\"usr\": {{.SourceUserName}}"

Workers

The number of processes that the service can run simultaneously. By default, the number of workers is the same as the number of virtual processors on the server where the service is installed.

Description

Description of the resource. You can add up to 4,000 Unicode characters.

Filter

Used to define the conditions for the events to be processed using the response rule. You can select an existing filter from the drop-down list or create a new filter.

Creating a filter in resources

  1. In the Filter drop-down list, select Create new.
  2. If you want to keep the filter as a separate resource, select the Save filter check box.

    In this case, you will be able to use the created filter in various services.

    This check box is cleared by default.

  3. If you selected the Save filter check box, enter a name for the created filter resource in the Name field. The name must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
  4. In the Conditions settings block, specify the conditions that the events must meet:
    1. Click the Add condition button.
    2. In the Left operand and Right operand drop-down lists, specify the search parameters.

      Depending on the data source selected in the Right operand field, you may see fields of additional parameters that you need to use to define the value that will be passed to the filter. For example, when choosing active list you will need to specify the name of the active list, the entry key, and the entry key field.

    3. In the operator drop-down list, select the relevant operator.

      Filter operators

      • =—the left operand equals the right operand.
      • <—the left operand is less than the right operand.
      • <=—the left operand is less than or equal to the right operand.
      • >—the left operand is greater than the right operand.
      • >=—the left operand is greater than or equal to the right operand.
      • inSubnet—the left operand (IP address) is in the subnet of the right operand (subnet).
      • contains—the left operand contains values of the right operand.
      • startsWith—the left operand starts with one of the values of the right operand.
      • endsWith—the left operand ends with one of the values of the right operand.
      • match—the left operand matches the regular expression of the right operand. The RE2 regular expressions are used.
      • hasBit—checks whether the left operand (string or number) contains bits whose positions are listed in the right operand (in a constant or in a list).

        The value to be checked is converted to binary and processed right to left. Chars are checked whose index is specified as a constant or a list.

        If the value being checked is a string, then an attempt is made to convert it to integer and process it in the way described above. If the string cannot be converted to a number, the filter returns False.

      • hasVulnerability—checks whether the left operand contains an asset with the vulnerability and vulnerability severity specified in the right operand.

        If you do not specify the ID and severity of the vulnerability, the filter is triggered if the asset in the event being checked has any vulnerability.

      • inActiveList—this operator has only one operand. Its values are selected in the Key fields field and are compared with the entries in the active list selected from the Active List drop-down list.
      • inContextTable checks whether or not an entry exists in the context table. This operator has only one operand. Its values are selected in the Key fields field and are compared with the values of entries in the context table selected from the drop-down list of context tables.
      • inDictionary—checks whether the specified dictionary contains an entry defined by the key composed with the concatenated values of the selected event fields.
      • inCategory—the asset in the left operand is assigned at least one of the asset categories of the right operand.
      • inActiveDirectoryGroup—the Active Directory account in the left operand belongs to one of the Active Directory groups in the right operand.
      • TIDetect—this operator is used to find events using CyberTrace Threat Intelligence (TI) data. This operator can be used only on events that have completed enrichment with data from CyberTrace Threat Intelligence. In other words, it can only be used in collectors at the destination selection stage and in correlators.
    4. If necessary, select the do not match case check box. When this check box is selected, the operator ignores the case of the values.

      The selection of this check box does not apply to the InSubnet, InActiveList, InCategory or InActiveDirectoryGroup operators.

      This check box is cleared by default.

    5. If you want to add a negative condition, select If not from the If drop-down list.
    6. You can add multiple conditions or a group of conditions.
  5. If you have added multiple conditions or groups of conditions, choose a search condition (and, or, not) by clicking the AND button.
  6. If you want to add existing filters that are selected from the Select filter drop-down list, click the Add filter button.

    You can view the nested filter settings by clicking the edit-grey button.

Page top

[Topic 233722]

Response rules for KICS for Networks

You can configure response rules to automatically trigger response actions on KICS for Networks assets. For example, you can change the asset status in KICS for Networks.

When creating and editing response rules for KICS for Networks, you need to define values for the following settings.

Response rule settings

Setting

Description

Name

Required setting.

Unique name of the resource. Must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.

Tenant

Required setting.

The name of the tenant that owns the resource.

Type

Required setting.

Response rule type, kics.

Event field

Required setting.

Specifies the event field for the asset for which response actions must be performed. Possible values:

  • SourceAssetID
  • DestinationAssetID
  • DeviceAssetID

KICS for Networks task

Response action to be performed when data is received that matches the filter. The following types of response actions are available:

  • Change asset status to Authorized.
  • Change asset status to Unauthorized.

When a response rule is triggered, KUMA will send KICS for Networks an API request to change the status of the specified device to Authorized or Unauthorized.

Workers

The number of processes that the service can run simultaneously. By default, the number of workers is the same as the number of virtual processors on the server where the service is installed.

Description

Description of the resource. You can add up to 4,000 Unicode characters.

Filter

Used to define the conditions for the events to be processed using the response rule. You can select an existing filter from the drop-down list or create a new filter.

Creating a filter in resources

  1. In the Filter drop-down list, select Create new.
  2. If you want to keep the filter as a separate resource, select the Save filter check box.

    In this case, you will be able to use the created filter in various services.

    This check box is cleared by default.

  3. If you selected the Save filter check box, enter a name for the created filter resource in the Name field. The name must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
  4. In the Conditions settings block, specify the conditions that the events must meet:
    1. Click the Add condition button.
    2. In the Left operand and Right operand drop-down lists, specify the search parameters.

      Depending on the data source selected in the Right operand field, you may see fields of additional parameters that you need to use to define the value that will be passed to the filter. For example, when choosing active list you will need to specify the name of the active list, the entry key, and the entry key field.

    3. In the operator drop-down list, select the relevant operator.

      Filter operators

      • =—the left operand equals the right operand.
      • <—the left operand is less than the right operand.
      • <=—the left operand is less than or equal to the right operand.
      • >—the left operand is greater than the right operand.
      • >=—the left operand is greater than or equal to the right operand.
      • inSubnet—the left operand (IP address) is in the subnet of the right operand (subnet).
      • contains—the left operand contains values of the right operand.
      • startsWith—the left operand starts with one of the values of the right operand.
      • endsWith—the left operand ends with one of the values of the right operand.
      • match—the left operand matches the regular expression of the right operand. The RE2 regular expressions are used.
      • hasBit—checks whether the left operand (string or number) contains bits whose positions are listed in the right operand (in a constant or in a list).

        The value to be checked is converted to binary and processed right to left. Chars are checked whose index is specified as a constant or a list.

        If the value being checked is a string, then an attempt is made to convert it to integer and process it in the way described above. If the string cannot be converted to a number, the filter returns False.

      • hasVulnerability—checks whether the left operand contains an asset with the vulnerability and vulnerability severity specified in the right operand.

        If you do not specify the ID and severity of the vulnerability, the filter is triggered if the asset in the event being checked has any vulnerability.

      • inActiveList—this operator has only one operand. Its values are selected in the Key fields field and are compared with the entries in the active list selected from the Active List drop-down list.
      • inContextTable checks whether or not an entry exists in the context table. This operator has only one operand. Its values are selected in the Key fields field and are compared with the values of entries in the context table selected from the drop-down list of context tables.
      • inDictionary—checks whether the specified dictionary contains an entry defined by the key composed with the concatenated values of the selected event fields.
      • inCategory—the asset in the left operand is assigned at least one of the asset categories of the right operand.
      • inActiveDirectoryGroup—the Active Directory account in the left operand belongs to one of the Active Directory groups in the right operand.
      • TIDetect—this operator is used to find events using CyberTrace Threat Intelligence (TI) data. This operator can be used only on events that have completed enrichment with data from CyberTrace Threat Intelligence. In other words, it can only be used in collectors at the destination selection stage and in correlators.
    4. If necessary, select the do not match case check box. When this check box is selected, the operator ignores the case of the values.

      The selection of this check box does not apply to the InSubnet, InActiveList, InCategory or InActiveDirectoryGroup operators.

      This check box is cleared by default.

    5. If you want to add a negative condition, select If not from the If drop-down list.
    6. You can add multiple conditions or a group of conditions.
  5. If you have added multiple conditions or groups of conditions, choose a search condition (and, or, not) by clicking the AND button.
  6. If you want to add existing filters that are selected from the Select filter drop-down list, click the Add filter button.

    You can view the nested filter settings by clicking the edit-grey button.

Page top

[Topic 237454]

Response rules for Kaspersky Endpoint Detection and Response

You can configure response rules to automatically trigger response actions on Kaspersky Endpoint Detection and Response assets. For example, you can configure automatic asset network isolation.

When creating and editing response rules for Kaspersky Endpoint Detection and Response, you need to define values for the following settings.

Response rule settings

Setting

Description

Event field

Required setting.

Specifies the event field for the asset for which response actions must be performed. Possible values:

  • SourceAssetID
  • DestinationAssetID
  • DeviceAssetID

Task type

Response action to be performed when data is received that matches the filter. The following types of response actions are available:

  • Enable network isolation. When selecting this type of response, you need to define values for the following setting:
    • Isolation timeout—the number of hours during which the network isolation of an asset will be active. You can indicate from 1 to 9,999 hours. If necessary, you can add an exclusion for network isolation.

      To add an exclusion for network isolation:

      1. Click the Add exclusion button.
      2. Select the direction of network traffic that must not be blocked:
        • Inbound.
        • Outbound.
        • Inbound/Outbound.
      3. In the Asset IP field, enter the IP address of the asset whose network traffic must not be blocked.
      4. If you selected Inbound or Outbound, specify the connection ports in the Remote ports and Local ports fields. Starting from version KATA 5.1, in the "Enable isolation" response, you cannot enter ports in the exclusion when the traffic direction is "Inbound/Outbound". Starting the response results in an error.
      5. If you want to add more than one exclusion, click Add exclusion and repeat the steps to fill in the Traffic direction, Asset IP, Remote ports and Local ports fields.
      6. If you want to delete an exclusion, click the Delete button under the relevant exclusion.

    When adding exclusions to a network isolation rule, Kaspersky Endpoint Detection and Response may incorrectly display the port values in the rule details. This does not affect application performance. For more details on viewing a network isolation rule, please refer to the Kaspersky Anti Targeted Attack Platform Help Guide.

  • Disable network isolation.
  • Add prevention rule. When selecting this type of response, you need to define values for the following settings:
    • Event fields to extract hash from—event fields from which KUMA extracts SHA256 or MD5 hashes of files that must be prevented from running.
      The selected event fields, as well as the values ​​selected in Event field, must be added to the propagated fields of the correlation rule.
    • File hash #1—SHA256 or MD5 hash of the file to be blocked.

At least one of the above fields must be completed.

  • Delete prevention rule.
  • Run program. When selecting this type of response, you need to define values for the following settings:
    • File path—path to the file of the process that you want to start.
    • Command line parameters—parameters with which you want to start the file.
    • Working directory—directory in which the file is located at the time of startup.

    When a response rule is triggered for users with the General Administrator role, the Run program task will be displayed in the Task manager section of the program web interface. Scheduled task is displayed for this task in the Created column of the task table. You can view task completion results.

All of the listed operations can be performed on assets that have Kaspersky Endpoint Agent for Windows. On assets that have Kaspersky Endpoint Agent for Linux, the program can only be started.

At the software level, the capability to create prevention rules and network isolation rules for assets with Kaspersky Endpoint Agent for Linux is unlimited. KUMA and Kaspersky Endpoint Detection and Response do not provide any notifications about unsuccessful application of these rules.

Workers

The number of processes that the service can run simultaneously. By default, the number of workers is the same as the number of virtual processors on the server where the service is installed.

Description

Description of the response rule. You can add up to 4,000 Unicode characters.

Filter

Used to define the conditions for the events to be processed using the response rule. You can select an existing filter from the drop-down list or create a new filter.

Creating a filter in resources

  1. In the Filter drop-down list, select Create new.
  2. If you want to keep the filter as a separate resource, select the Save filter check box.

    In this case, you will be able to use the created filter in various services.

    This check box is cleared by default.

  3. If you selected the Save filter check box, enter a name for the created filter resource in the Name field. The name must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
  4. In the Conditions settings block, specify the conditions that the events must meet:
    1. Click the Add condition button.
    2. In the Left operand and Right operand drop-down lists, specify the search parameters.

      Depending on the data source selected in the Right operand field, you may see fields of additional parameters that you need to use to define the value that will be passed to the filter. For example, when choosing active list you will need to specify the name of the active list, the entry key, and the entry key field.

    3. In the operator drop-down list, select the relevant operator.

      Filter operators

      • =—the left operand equals the right operand.
      • <—the left operand is less than the right operand.
      • <=—the left operand is less than or equal to the right operand.
      • >—the left operand is greater than the right operand.
      • >=—the left operand is greater than or equal to the right operand.
      • inSubnet—the left operand (IP address) is in the subnet of the right operand (subnet).
      • contains—the left operand contains values of the right operand.
      • startsWith—the left operand starts with one of the values of the right operand.
      • endsWith—the left operand ends with one of the values of the right operand.
      • match—the left operand matches the regular expression of the right operand. The RE2 regular expressions are used.
      • hasBit—checks whether the left operand (string or number) contains bits whose positions are listed in the right operand (in a constant or in a list).

        The value to be checked is converted to binary and processed right to left. Chars are checked whose index is specified as a constant or a list.

        If the value being checked is a string, then an attempt is made to convert it to integer and process it in the way described above. If the string cannot be converted to a number, the filter returns False.

      • hasVulnerability—checks whether the left operand contains an asset with the vulnerability and vulnerability severity specified in the right operand.

        If you do not specify the ID and severity of the vulnerability, the filter is triggered if the asset in the event being checked has any vulnerability.

      • inActiveList—this operator has only one operand. Its values are selected in the Key fields field and are compared with the entries in the active list selected from the Active List drop-down list.
      • inContextTable checks whether or not an entry exists in the context table. This operator has only one operand. Its values are selected in the Key fields field and are compared with the values of entries in the context table selected from the drop-down list of context tables.
      • inDictionary—checks whether the specified dictionary contains an entry defined by the key composed with the concatenated values of the selected event fields.
      • inCategory—the asset in the left operand is assigned at least one of the asset categories of the right operand.
      • inActiveDirectoryGroup—the Active Directory account in the left operand belongs to one of the Active Directory groups in the right operand.
      • TIDetect—this operator is used to find events using CyberTrace Threat Intelligence (TI) data. This operator can be used only on events that have completed enrichment with data from CyberTrace Threat Intelligence. In other words, it can only be used in collectors at the destination selection stage and in correlators.
    4. If necessary, select the do not match case check box. When this check box is selected, the operator ignores the case of the values.

      The selection of this check box does not apply to the InSubnet, InActiveList, InCategory or InActiveDirectoryGroup operators.

      This check box is cleared by default.

    5. If you want to add a negative condition, select If not from the If drop-down list.
    6. You can add multiple conditions or a group of conditions.
  5. If you have added multiple conditions or groups of conditions, choose a search condition (and, or, not) by clicking the AND button.
  6. If you want to add existing filters that are selected from the Select filter drop-down list, click the Add filter button.

    You can view the nested filter settings by clicking the edit-grey button.

Page top

[Topic 243446]

Active Directory response rules

Active Directory response rules define the actions to be applied to an account if a rule is triggered.

When creating and editing response rules using Active Directory, specify the values for the following settings.

Response rule settings

Setting

Description

Name

Required setting.

Unique name of the resource. Must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.

Tenant

Required setting.

The name of the tenant that owns the resource.

Type

Required setting.

Response rule type, Response via Active Directory.

Account ID source

Event field from which the Active Directory account ID value is taken. Possible values:

  • SourceAccountID
  • DestinationAccountID

AD command

Command that is applied to the account when the response rule is triggered.

Available values:

  • Add account to group

    The Active Directory group to move the account from or to.
    In the mandatory field Distinguished name, you must specify the full path to the group.
    For example, CN = HQ Team, OU = Groups, OU = ExchangeObjects, DC = avp, DC = ru.
    Only one group can be specified within one operation.

  • Remove account from group

    The Active Directory group to move the account from or to.
    In the mandatory field Distinguished name, you must specify the full path to the group.
    For example, CN = HQ Team, OU = Groups, OU = ExchangeObjects, DC = avp, DC = ru.
    Only one group can be specified within one operation.

  • Reset account password

If your Active Directory domain allows selecting the User cannot change password check box, resetting the user account password as a response will result in a conflict of requirements for the user account: the user will not be able to authenticate. The domain administrator will need to clear one of the check boxes for the affected user account: User cannot change password or User must change password at next logon.

  • Block account

Filter

Used to define the conditions for the events to be processed using the response rule. You can select an existing filter from the drop-down list or create a new filter.

Creating a filter in resources

  1. In the Filter drop-down list, select Create new.
  2. If you want to keep the filter as a separate resource, select the Save filter check box.

    In this case, you will be able to use the created filter in various services.

    This check box is cleared by default.

  3. If you selected the Save filter check box, enter a name for the created filter resource in the Name field. The name must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
  4. In the Conditions settings block, specify the conditions that the events must meet:
    1. Click the Add condition button.
    2. In the Left operand and Right operand drop-down lists, specify the search parameters.

      Depending on the data source selected in the Right operand field, you may see fields of additional parameters that you need to use to define the value that will be passed to the filter. For example, when choosing active list you will need to specify the name of the active list, the entry key, and the entry key field.

    3. In the operator drop-down list, select the relevant operator.

      Filter operators

      • =—the left operand equals the right operand.
      • <—the left operand is less than the right operand.
      • <=—the left operand is less than or equal to the right operand.
      • >—the left operand is greater than the right operand.
      • >=—the left operand is greater than or equal to the right operand.
      • inSubnet—the left operand (IP address) is in the subnet of the right operand (subnet).
      • contains—the left operand contains values of the right operand.
      • startsWith—the left operand starts with one of the values of the right operand.
      • endsWith—the left operand ends with one of the values of the right operand.
      • match—the left operand matches the regular expression of the right operand. The RE2 regular expressions are used.
      • hasBit—checks whether the left operand (string or number) contains bits whose positions are listed in the right operand (in a constant or in a list).

        The value to be checked is converted to binary and processed right to left. Chars are checked whose index is specified as a constant or a list.

        If the value being checked is a string, then an attempt is made to convert it to integer and process it in the way described above. If the string cannot be converted to a number, the filter returns False.

      • hasVulnerability—checks whether the left operand contains an asset with the vulnerability and vulnerability severity specified in the right operand.

        If you do not specify the ID and severity of the vulnerability, the filter is triggered if the asset in the event being checked has any vulnerability.

      • inActiveList—this operator has only one operand. Its values are selected in the Key fields field and are compared with the entries in the active list selected from the Active List drop-down list.
      • inContextTable checks whether or not an entry exists in the context table. This operator has only one operand. Its values are selected in the Key fields field and are compared with the values of entries in the context table selected from the drop-down list of context tables.
      • inDictionary—checks whether the specified dictionary contains an entry defined by the key composed with the concatenated values of the selected event fields.
      • inCategory—the asset in the left operand is assigned at least one of the asset categories of the right operand.
      • inActiveDirectoryGroup—the Active Directory account in the left operand belongs to one of the Active Directory groups in the right operand.
      • TIDetect—this operator is used to find events using CyberTrace Threat Intelligence (TI) data. This operator can be used only on events that have completed enrichment with data from CyberTrace Threat Intelligence. In other words, it can only be used in collectors at the destination selection stage and in correlators.
    4. If necessary, select the do not match case check box. When this check box is selected, the operator ignores the case of the values.

      The selection of this check box does not apply to the InSubnet, InActiveList, InCategory or InActiveDirectoryGroup operators.

      This check box is cleared by default.

    5. If you want to add a negative condition, select If not from the If drop-down list.
    6. You can add multiple conditions or a group of conditions.
  5. If you have added multiple conditions or groups of conditions, choose a search condition (and, or, not) by clicking the AND button.
  6. If you want to add existing filters that are selected from the Select filter drop-down list, click the Add filter button.

    You can view the nested filter settings by clicking the edit-grey button.

Page top

[Topic 233508]

Notification templates

Notification templates are used in alert generation notifications.

Notification template settings

Setting

Description

Name

Required setting.

Unique name of the resource. Must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.

Tenant

Required setting.

The name of the tenant that owns the resource.

Subject

Subject of the email containing the notification about the alert generation. In the email subject, you can refer to the alert fields.

Example: New alert in KUMA: {{.CorrelationRuleName}}. In place of {{.CorrelationRuleName}}, the subject of the notification message will include the name of the correlation rule contained in the CorrelationRuleName alert field.

Template

Required setting.

The body of the email containing the notification about the alert generation. The template supports a syntax that can be used to populate the notification with data from the alert. You can read more about the syntax in the official Go language documentation.

For convenience, you can open the email in a separate window by clicking the full-screen icon. This opens the Template window in which you can edit the text of the notification message. Click Save to save the changes and close the window.

Predefined notification templates.

The notification templates listed in the table below are included in the KUMA distribution kit.

Predefined notification templates.

Template name

Description

[OOTB] New alert in KUMA

Basic notification template.

Functions in notification templates

Functions available in templates are listed in the table below.

Functions in templates

Setting

Description

date

Takes the time in milliseconds (unix time) as the first parameter; the second parameter can be used to pass the time in RFC standard format. The time zone cannot be changed.

Example call: {{ date .FirstSeen "02 Jan 06 15:04" }}

Call result: 18 Nov 2022 13:46

Examples of date formats supported by the function:

  • "02 Jan 06 15:04 MST"
  • "02 Jan 06 15:04 -0700"
  • "Monday, 02-Jan-06 15:04:05 MST"
  • "Mon, 02 Jan 2006 15:04:05 MST"
  • "Mon, 02 Jan 2006 15:04:05 -0700"
  • "2006-01-02T15:04:05Z07:00"

limit

The function is called inside the range function to limit the list of data. It processes lists that do not have keys, takes any list of data as the first parameter and truncates it based on the second value. For example, the .Events, .Assets, .Accounts, and .Actions alert fields can be passed to the function.

Example call:

{{ range (limit .Assets 5) }}

<strong>Device</strong>: {{ .DisplayName }},

<strong>Creation date</strong>: {{ .CreatedAt }}

{{ end }}

link_alert

Generates a link to the alert with the URL specified in the SMTP server connection settings as the KUMA Core server alias or with the real URL of the KUMA Core service if no alias is defined.

Example call:

{{ link_alert }}

link

Takes the form of a link that can be followed.

Example call:

{{ link "https://support.kaspersky.com/KUMA/2.1/en-US/233508.htm" }}

Notification template syntax

In a template, you can query the alert fields containing a string or number:

{{ .CorrelationRuleName }}

The message will display the alert name, which is the contents of the CorrelationRuleName field.

Some alert fields contain data arrays. For instance, these include alert fields containing related events, assets, and user accounts. Such nested objects can be queried by using the range function, which sequentially queries the fields of the first 50 nested objects. When using the range function to query a field that does not contain a data array, an error is returned. Example:

{{ range .Assets }}

Device: {{ .DisplayName }}, creation date: {{ .CreatedAt }}

{{ end }}

The message will display the values of the DeviceHostName and CreatedAt fields from 50 assets related to the alert:

Device: <DisplayName field value from asset 1>, creation date: <CreatedAt field value from asset 1>

Device: <DisplayName field value from asset 2>, creation date: <CreatedAt field value from asset 2>

...

// 50 strings total

You can use the limit parameter to limit the number of objects returned by the range function:

{{ range (limit .Assets 5) }}

<strong>Device</strong>: {{ .DisplayName }},

<strong>Creation date</strong>: {{ .CreatedAt }}

{{ end }}

The message will display the values of the DisplayName and CreatedAt fields from 5 assets related to the alert, with the words "Devices" and "Creation date" marked with HTML tag <strong>:

<strong>Device</strong>: <DeviceHostName field value from asset 1>,

<strong>Creation date</strong>: <value of the CreatedAt field from asset 1>

<strong>Device</strong>: <DeviceHostName field value from asset N>,

<strong>Creation date</strong>: <CreatedAt field value from asset N>

...

// 10 strings total

Nested objects can have their own nested objects. They can be queried by using nested range functions:

{{ range (limit .Events 5) }}

    {{ range (limit .Event.BaseEvents 10) }}

    Service ID: {{ .ServiceID }}

    {{ end }}

{{ end }}

The message will show ten service IDs (ServiceID field) from the base events related to five correlation events of the alert. 50 strings total. Please note that events are queried through the nested EventWrapper structure, which is located in the Events field in the alert. Events are available in the Event field of this structure, which is reflected in the example above. Therefore, if field A contains nested structure [B] and structure [B] contains field C, which is a string or a number, you must specify the path {{ A.C }} to query field C.

Some object fields contain nested dictionaries in key-value format (for example, the Extra event field). They can be queried by using the range function with the variables passed to it: range $placeholder1, $placeholder2 := .FieldName. The values of variables can then be called by specifying their names. Example:

{{ range (limit .Events 3) }}

    {{ range (limit .Event.BaseEvents 5) }}

    List of fields in the Extra event field: {{ range $name, $value := .Extra }} {{ $name }} - {{ $value }}<br> {{ end }}

    {{ end }}

{{ end }}

The message will use an HTML tag<br> to show key-value pairs from the Extra fields of the base events belonging to the correlation events. Data is called from five base events out of each of the three correlation events.

You can use HTML tags in notification templates to create more complex structures. Below is an example table for correlation event fields:

<style type="text/css">

  TD, TH {

    padding: 3px;

    border: 1px solid black;

  }

</style>

<table>

  <thead>

    <tr>

        <th>Service name</th>

        <th>Name of the correlation rule</th>

        <th>Device version</th>

    </tr>

  </thead>

  <tbody>

    {{ range .Events }}

    <tr>

        <td>{{ .Event.ServiceName }}</td>

        <td>{{ .Event.CorrelationRuleName }}</td>

        <td>{{ .Event.DeviceVersion }}</td>

    </tr>

    {{ end }}

  </tbody>

</table>

Use the link_alert function to insert an HTML alert link into the notification email:

{{link_alert}}

A link to the alert window will be displayed in the message.

Below is an example of how you can extract the data on max asset category from the alert data and place it in the notifications:

{{ $criticalCategoryName := "" }}{{ $maxCategoryWeight := 0 }}{{ range .Assets }}{{ range .CategoryModels }}{{ if gt .Weight $maxCategoryWeight }}{{ $maxCategoryWeight = .Weight }}{{ $criticalCategoryName = .Name }}{{ end }}{{ end }}{{ end }}{{ if gt $maxCategoryWeight 1 }}

Max asset category: {{ $criticalCategoryName }}{{ end }}

Page top

[Topic 217776]

Connectors

Connectors are used for establishing connections between KUMA services and receiving events actively and passively.

The program has the following connector types available:

  • internal—used for establishing connections between the KUMA services.
  • tcp—used to receive data over TCP passively. Available for Windows and Linux agents.
  • udp—used to receive data over UDP passively. Available for Windows and Linux agents.
  • netflow—used to passively receive events in the NetFlow format.
  • sflow—used to passively receive events in the SFlow format.
  • nats-jetstream—used for communication with the NATS message broker. Available for Windows and Linux agents.
  • kafka—used for communication with the Apache Kafka data bus. Available for Windows and Linux agents.
  • http—used for receiving events over HTTP. Available for Windows and Linux agents.
  • sql—used for selecting data from a database.

    The program supports the following types of SQL databases:

    • SQLite.
    • MSSQL.
    • MySQL.
    • PostgreSQL.
    • Cockroach.
    • Oracle.
    • Firebird.
  • file—used to retrieve data from a text file. Available for Linux agents.
  • 1c-log and 1c-xml are used to receive data from 1C logs. Available for Linux agents.
  • diode—used for unidirectional data transfer in industrial ICS networks using data diodes.
  • ftp—used to receive data over the File Transfer Protocol. Available for Windows and Linux agents.
  • nfs—used to receive data over the Network File System protocol. Available for Windows and Linux agents.
  • wmi—used to obtain data using Windows Management Instrumentation. Available for Windows agents.
  • wec—used to receive data using Windows Event Forwarding (WEF) and Windows Event Collector (WEC), or local operating system logs of a Windows host. Available for Windows agents.
  • snmp—used to receive data using the Simple Network Management Protocol. Available for Windows and Linux agents.
  • snmp-trap—used to receive data using Simple Network Management Protocol traps (SNMP traps). Available for Windows and Linux agents.

In this section

Viewing connector settings

Adding a connector

Connector settings

Predefined connectors

Page top

[Topic 233566]

Viewing connector settings

To view connector settings:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, select ResourcesConnectors.
  2. In the folder structure, select the folder containing the relevant connector.
  3. Select the connector whose settings you want to view.

The settings of connectors are displayed on two tabs: Basic settings and Advanced settings. For a detailed description of each connector settings, please refer to the Connector settings section.

Page top

[Topic 233570]

Adding a connector

You can enable the display of non-printing characters for all entry fields except the Description field.

To add a connector:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, select ResourcesConnectors.
  2. In the folder structure, select the folder in which you want the connector to be located.

    Root folders correspond to tenants. To make a connector available to a specific tenant, the resource must be created in the folder of that tenant.

    If the required folder is absent from the folder tree, you need to create it.

    By default, added connectors are created in the Shared folder.

  3. Click the Add connector button.
  4. Define the settings for the selected connector type.

    The settings that you must specify for each type of connector are provided in the Connector settings section.

  5. Click the Save button.
Page top

[Topic 220738]

Internal type

When creating this type of connector, you need to define values for the following settings:

Basic settings tab:

  • Name (required)—a unique name for this type of resource. Must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
  • Tenant (required)—name of the tenant that owns the resource.
  • Type (required)—connector type, internal.
  • URL (required)—URL that you need to connect to.
  • Available formats: hostname:port, IPv4:port, IPv6:port, :port.
  • Description—resource description: up to 4,000 Unicode characters.

Advanced settings tab:

  • Debug—a drop-down list where you can specify whether resource logging should be enabled.

    By default it is Disabled.

Page top

[Topic 220739]

Tcp type

When creating this type of connector, you need to define values for the following settings:

Basic settings tab:

  • Name (required)—a unique name for this type of resource. Must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
  • Tenant (required)—name of the tenant that owns the resource.
  • Type (required)—connector type, tcp.
  • URL (required)—URL that you need to connect to. Available formats: hostname:port, IPv4:port, IPv6:port, :port.
  • Delimiter is used to specify a character representing the delimiter between events. Available values: \n, \t, \0. If no separator is specified (an empty value is selected), the default value is \n.
  • Description—resource description: up to 4,000 Unicode characters.

Advanced settings tab:

  • Buffer size is used to set a buffer size for the connector. The default value is 1 MB, and the maximum value is 64 MB.
  • Character encoding setting specifies character encoding. The default value is UTF-8.
  • TLS mode—TLS encryption mode using certificates in PEM x509 format:
    • Disabled (default)—do not use TLS encryption.
    • Enabled—use encryption without certificate verification.
    • With verification—use encryption with verification that the certificate was signed with the KUMA root certificate. The root certificate and key of KUMA are created automatically during program installation and are stored on the KUMA Core server in the folder /opt/kaspersky/kuma/core/certificates/.
    • Custom PFX – use encryption. When this option is selected, a certificate must be generated with a private key in PKCS#12 container format in an external Certificate Authority. Then the certificate must be exported from the key store and uploaded to the KUMA web interface as a PFX secret. Add PFX secret.
      1. If you previously uploaded a PFX certificate, select it from the Secret drop-down list.

        If no certificate was previously added, the drop-down list shows No data.

      2. If you want to add a new certificate, click the AD_plus button on the right of the Secret list.

        The Secret window opens.

      3. In the Name field, enter the name that will be used to display the secret in the list of available secrets.
      4. Click the Upload PFX button to select the file containing your previously exported certificate with a private key in PKCS#12 container format.
      5. In the Password field, enter the certificate security password that was set in the Certificate Export Wizard.
      6. Click the Save button.

      The certificate will be added and displayed in the Secret list.

      When using TLS, it is impossible to specify an IP address as a URL.

  • Compression—you can use Snappy compression. By default, compression is disabled.
  • Debug—a drop-down list where you can specify whether resource logging should be enabled. By default it is Disabled.
Page top

[Topic 220740]

Udp type

When creating this type of connector, you need to define values for the following settings:

Basic settings tab:

  • Name (required)—a unique name for this type of resource. Must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
  • Tenant (required)—name of the tenant that owns the resource.
  • Type (required)—connector type, udp.
  • URL (required)—URL that you need to connect to. Available formats: hostname:port, IPv4:port, IPv6:port, :port.
  • Delimiter is used to specify a character representing the delimiter between events. Available values: \n, \t, \0. If no separator is specified (an empty value is selected), events are not separated.
  • Description—resource description: up to 4,000 Unicode characters.

Advanced settings tab:

  • Buffer size is used to set a buffer size for the connector. The default value is 16 KB, and the maximum value is 64 KB.
  • Workers—used to set worker count for the connector. The default value is 1.
  • Character encoding setting specifies character encoding. The default value is UTF-8.
  • Compression—you can use Snappy compression. By default, compression is disabled.
  • Debug—a drop-down list where you can specify whether resource logging should be enabled. By default it is Disabled.
Page top

[Topic 220741]

Netflow type

When creating this type of connector, you need to define values for the following settings:

  • Basic settings tab:
    • Name (required)—a unique name for this type of resource. Must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
    • Tenant (required)—name of the tenant that owns the resource.
    • Type (required)—connector type, netflow.
    • URL (required)—URL that you need to connect to.
    • Description—resource description: up to 4,000 Unicode characters.
  • Advanced settings tab:
    • Buffer size is used to set a buffer size for the connector. The default value is 16 KB, and the maximum value is 64 KB.
    • Workers—used to set worker count for the connector. The default value is 1.
    • Character encoding setting specifies character encoding. The default value is UTF-8.
    • Debug—a drop-down list where you can specify whether resource logging should be enabled. By default it is Disabled.
Page top

[Topic 233206]

Sflow type

When creating this type of connector, you need to define values for the following settings:

Basic settings tab:

  • Name (required)—a unique name for this type of resource. Must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
  • Tenant (required)—name of the tenant that owns the resource.
  • Type (required)—connector type, sflow.
  • URL (required)—a URL that you need to connect to. Available formats: hostname:port, IPv4:port, IPv6:port, :port.
  • Description—resource description: up to 4,000 Unicode characters.

Advanced settings tab:

  • Buffer size is used to set a buffer size for the connector. The default value is 1 MB, and the maximum value is 64 MB.
  • Workers—used to set the amount of workers for a connector. The default value is 1.
  • Character encoding setting specifies character encoding. The default value is UTF-8.
  • Debug—drop-down list that lets you enable resource logging. By default it is Disabled.
Page top

[Topic 220742]

nats-jetstream type

When creating this type of connector, you need to define values for the following settings:

Basic settings tab:

  • Name (required)—a unique name for this type of resource. Must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
  • Tenant (required)—name of the tenant that owns the resource.
  • Type (required)—connector type, nats-jetstream.
  • URL (required)—URL that you need to connect to.
  • Topic (required)—the topic for NATS messages. Must contain Unicode characters.
  • Delimiter is used to specify a character representing the delimiter between events. Available values: \n, \t, \0. If no separator is specified (an empty value is selected), events are not separated.
  • Description—resource description: up to 4,000 Unicode characters.

Advanced settings tab:

  • Buffer size is used to set a buffer size for the connector. The default value is 16 KB, and the maximum value is 64 KB.
  • GroupID—the GroupID parameter for NATS messages. Must contain 1 to 255 Unicode characters. The default value is default.
  • Workers—used to set worker count for the connector. The default value is 1.
  • Character encoding setting specifies character encoding. The default value is UTF-8.
  • Cluster ID is the ID of the NATS cluster.
  • TLS mode specifies whether TLS encryption is used:
    • Disabled (default)—do not use TLS encryption.
    • Enabled—use encryption without certificate verification.
    • With verification—use encryption with verification that the certificate was signed with the KUMA root certificate. The root certificate and key of KUMA are created automatically during program installation and are stored on the KUMA Core server in the folder /opt/kaspersky/kuma/core/certificates/.
    • Custom CA—use encryption with verification that the certificate was signed by a Certificate Authority. The secret containing the certificate is selected from the Custom CA drop-down list, which is displayed when this option is selected.

      Creating a certificate signed by a Certificate Authority

      To use this TLS mode, you must do the following on the KUMA Core server (OpenSSL commands are used in the examples below):

      1. Create the key that will be used by the Certificate Authority.

        Example command:

        openssl genrsa -out ca.key 2048

      2. Generate a certificate for the key that was just created.

        Example command:

        openssl req -new -x509 -days 365 -key ca.key -subj "/CN=<common host name of Certificate Authority>" -out ca.crt

      3. Create a private key and a request to have it signed by the Certificate Authority.

        Example command:

        openssl req -newkey rsa:2048 -nodes -keyout server.key -subj "/CN=<common host name of KUMA server>" -out server.csr

      4. Create a certificate signed by the Certificate Authority. The subjectAltName must include the domain names or IP addresses of the server for which the certificate is being created.

        Example command:

        openssl x509 -req -extfile <(printf "subjectAltName=DNS:domain1.ru,DNS:domain2.com,IP:192.168.0.1") -days 365 -in server.csr -CA ca.crt -CAkey ca.key -CAcreateserial -out server.crt

      5. The obtained server.crt certificate should be uploaded in the KUMA web interface as a certificate-type secret, which should then be selected from the Custom CA drop-down list.

      When using TLS, it is impossible to specify an IP address as a URL.

      To use KUMA certificates on third-party devices, you must change the certificate file extension from CERT to CRT. Otherwise, error x509: certificate signed by unknown authority may be returned.

  • Compression—you can use Snappy compression. By default, compression is disabled.
  • Debug—a drop-down list where you can specify whether resource logging should be enabled. By default it is Disabled.
Page top

[Topic 220744]

Kafka type

When creating this type of connector, you need to define values for the following settings:

Basic settings tab:

  • Name (required)—a unique name for this type of resource. Must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
  • Tenant (required)—name of the tenant that owns the resource.
  • Type (required)—connector type, kafka.
  • URL—URL that you need to connect to. Available formats: hostname:port, IPv4:port, IPv6:port.
  • Topic—subject of Kafka messages. Must contain from 1 to 255 of the following characters: a–z, A–Z, 0–9, ".", "_", "-".
  • Authorization—requirement for Agents to complete authorization when connecting to the connector:
    • disabled (by default).
    • PFX.

      When this option is selected, a certificate must be generated with a private key in PKCS#12 container format in an external Certificate Authority. Then the certificate must be exported from the key store and uploaded to the KUMA web interface as a PFX secret.

      Add PFX secret

      1. If you previously uploaded a PFX certificate, select it from the Secret drop-down list.

        If no certificate was previously added, the drop-down list shows No data.

      2. If you want to add a new certificate, click the AD_plus button on the right of the Secret list.

        The Secret window opens.

      3. In the Name field, enter the name that will be used to display the secret in the list of available secrets.
      4. Click the Upload PFX button to select the file containing your previously exported certificate with a private key in PKCS#12 container format.
      5. In the Password field, enter the certificate security password that was set in the Certificate Export Wizard.
      6. Click the Save button.

      The certificate will be added and displayed in the Secret list.

    • plain.

      If this option is selected, you must indicate the secret containing user account credentials for authorization when connecting to the connector.

      Add secret

      1. If you previously created a secret, select it from the Secret drop-down list.

        If no secret was previously added, the drop-down list shows No data.

      2. If you want to add a new secret, click the AD_plus button on the right of the Secret list.

        The Secret window opens.

      3. In the Name field, enter the name that will be used to display the secret in the list of available secrets.
      4. In the User and Password fields, enter the credentials of the user account that the Agent will use to connect to the connector.
      5. If necessary, add any other information about the secret in the Description field.
      6. Click the Save button.

      The secret will be added and displayed in the Secret list.

  • GroupID—the GroupID parameter for Kafka messages. Must contain from 1 to 255 of the following characters: a–z, A–Z, 0–9, ".", "_", "-".
  • Description—resource description: up to 4,000 Unicode characters.

Advanced settings tab:

  • Size of message to fetch—should be specified in bytes. The default value is 16 MB.
  • Maximum fetch wait time—timeout for a message of the defined size. The default value is 5 seconds.
  • Character encoding setting specifies character encoding. The default value is UTF-8.
  • TLS mode specifies whether TLS encryption is used:
    • Disabled (default)—do not use TLS encryption.
    • Enabled—use encryption without certificate verification.
    • With verification—use encryption with verification that the certificate was signed with the KUMA root certificate. The root certificate and key of KUMA are created automatically during program installation and are stored on the KUMA Core server in the folder /opt/kaspersky/kuma/core/certificates/.
    • Custom CA—use encryption with verification that the certificate was signed by a Certificate Authority. The secret containing the certificate is selected from the Custom CA drop-down list, which is displayed when this option is selected.

      Creating a certificate signed by a Certificate Authority

      To use this TLS mode, you must do the following on the KUMA Core server (OpenSSL commands are used in the examples below):

      1. Create the key that will be used by the Certificate Authority.

        Example command:

        openssl genrsa -out ca.key 2048

      2. Generate a certificate for the key that was just created.

        Example command:

        openssl req -new -x509 -days 365 -key ca.key -subj "/CN=<common host name of Certificate Authority>" -out ca.crt

      3. Create a private key and a request to have it signed by the Certificate Authority.

        Example command:

        openssl req -newkey rsa:2048 -nodes -keyout server.key -subj "/CN=<common host name of KUMA server>" -out server.csr

      4. Create a certificate signed by the Certificate Authority. The subjectAltName must include the domain names or IP addresses of the server for which the certificate is being created.

        Example command:

        openssl x509 -req -extfile <(printf "subjectAltName=DNS:domain1.ru,DNS:domain2.com,IP:192.168.0.1") -days 365 -in server.csr -CA ca.crt -CAkey ca.key -CAcreateserial -out server.crt

      5. The obtained server.crt certificate should be uploaded in the KUMA web interface as a certificate-type secret, which should then be selected from the Custom CA drop-down list.

      When using TLS, it is impossible to specify an IP address as a URL.

      To use KUMA certificates on third-party devices, you must change the certificate file extension from CERT to CRT. Otherwise, error x509: certificate signed by unknown authority may be returned.

  • Debug—a drop-down list where you can specify whether resource logging should be enabled. By default it is Disabled.
Page top

[Topic 220745]

Http type

When creating this type of connector, you need to define values for the following settings:

  • Basic settings tab:
    • Name (required)—a unique name for this type of resource. Must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
    • Tenant (required)—name of the tenant that owns the resource.
    • Type (required)—connector type, http.
    • URL (required)—URL that you need to connect to. Available formats: hostname:port, IPv4:port, IPv6:port, :port.
    • Delimiter is used to specify a character representing the delimiter between events. Available values: \n, \t, \0. If no separator is specified (an empty value is selected), events are not separated.
    • Description—resource description: up to 4,000 Unicode characters.
  • Advanced settings tab:
    • Character encoding setting specifies character encoding. The default value is UTF-8.
    • TLS mode specifies whether TLS encryption is used:
      • Disabled (default)—do not use TLS encryption.
      • Enabled—encryption is enabled, but without verification.
      • With verification—use encryption with verification that the certificate was signed with the KUMA root certificate. The root certificate and key of KUMA are created automatically during program installation and are stored on the KUMA Core server in the folder /opt/kaspersky/kuma/core/certificates/.

      When using TLS, it is impossible to specify an IP address as a URL.

    • Proxy—a drop-down list where you can select a proxy server resource.
    • Debug—a drop-down list where you can specify whether resource logging should be enabled. By default it is Disabled.
Page top

[Topic 220746]

Sql type

KUMA supports multiple types of databases.

The program supports the following types of SQL databases:

  • SQLite.
  • MSSQL.
  • MySQL.
  • PostgreSQL.
  • Cockroach.
  • Oracle.
  • Firebird.

When creating a connector, you must specify general connector settings and specific database connection settings.

On the Basic settings tab, you must specify the following values for the connector:

  • Name (required)—unique name of the resource. Must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
  • Type (required)—connector type, sql.
  • Tenant (required)—name of the tenant that owns the resource.
  • Default query (required)—SQL query that is executed when connecting to the database.
  • Reconnect to the database every time a query is sent — the check box is cleared by default.
  • Poll interval, sec —interval for executing SQL queries. This value is specified in seconds. The default value is 10 seconds.
  • Description—resource description: up to 4,000 Unicode characters.

To connect to the database, you need to define the values of the following settings on the Basic settings tab:

  • URL (required)—secret that stores a list of URLs for connecting to the database.

    If necessary, you can edit or create a secret.

    1. Click the AddResource button.

      The secret window is displayed.

    2. Define the values for the following settings:
      1. Name—the name of the added secret.
      2. Typeurls.

        This value is set by default and cannot be changed.

      3. URL—URL of the database.

        You must keep in mind that each type of database uses its own URL format for connections.

        Available URL formats are as follows:

        • For SQLite:
          • sqlite3://file:<file_path>

          A question mark (?) is used as a placeholder.

        • For MSSQL:
          • sqlserver://<user>:<password>@<server:port>/<instance_name>?database=<database> (recommended)
          • sqlserver://<user>:<password>@<server>?database=<database>&encrypt=disable

          The characters @p1 are used as a placeholder.

        • For MySQL:
          • mysql://<user>:<password>@tcp(<server>:<port>)/<database>

          The characters %s are used as a placeholder.

        • For PostgreSQL:
          • postgres://<user>:<password>@<server>/<database>?sslmode=disable

          The characters $1 are used as a placeholder.

        • For Cockroach:
          • postgres://<user>:<password>@<server>:<port>/<database>?sslmode=disable

          The characters $1 are used as a placeholder.

        • For Firebird:
          • firebirdsql://<user>:<password>@<server>:<port>/<database>

          A question mark (?) is used as a placeholder.

      4. Description—any additional information.
    3. If necessary, click Add and specify an additional URL.

      In this case, if one URL is not available, the program connects to the next URL specified in the list of addresses.

    4. Click the Save button.
    1. Click the EditResource button.

      The secret window is displayed.

    2. Specify the values for the settings that you want to change.

      You can change the following values:

      1. Name—the name of the added secret.
      2. URL—URL of the database.

        You must keep in mind that each type of database uses its own URL format for connections.

        Available URL formats are as follows:

        • For SQLite:
          • sqlite3://file:<file_path>

          A question mark (?) is used as a placeholder.

        • For MSSQL:
          • sqlserver://<user>:<password>@<server:port>/<instance_name>?database=<database> (recommended)
          • sqlserver://<user>:<password>@<server>?database=<database>&encrypt=disable

          The characters @p1 are used as a placeholder.

        • For MySQL:
          • mysql://<user>:<password>@tcp(<server>:<port>)/<database>

          The characters ? are used as placeholders.

        • For PostgreSQL:
          • postgres://<user>:<password>@<server>/<database>?sslmode=disable

          The characters $1 are used as a placeholder.

        • For Cockroach:
          • postgres://<user>:<password>@<server>:<port>/<database>?sslmode=disable

          The characters $1 are used as a placeholder.

        • For Firebird:
          • firebirdsql://<user>:<password>@<server>:<port>/<database>

          A question mark (?) is used as a placeholder.

      3. Description—any additional information.
    3. If necessary, click Add and specify an additional URL.

      In this case, if one URL is not available, the program connects to the next URL specified in the list of addresses.

    4. Click the Save button.

    When creating connections, strings containing account credentials with special characters may be incorrectly processed. If an error occurs when creating a connection but you are sure that the settings are correct, enter the special characters in percent encoding.

    Codes of special characters

    !

    #

    $

    %

    &

    '

    (

    )

    *

    +

    %21

    %23

    %24

    %25

    %26

    %27

    %28

    %29

    %2A

    %2B

    ,

    /

    :

    ;

    =

    ?

    @

    [

    ]

    \

    %2C

    %2F

    %3A

    %3B

    %3D

    %3F

    %40

    %5B

    %5D

    %5C

    The following special characters are not supported in passwords used to access SQL databases: space, [, ], :, /, #, %, \.

  • Identity column (required)—name of the column that contains the ID for each row of the table.
  • Identity seed (required)—identity column value that will be used to determine the specific line to start reading data from the SQL table.
  • Query—field for an additional SQL query. The query indicated in this field is performed instead of the default query.
  • Poll interval, sec —interval for executing SQL queries. The interval defined in this field replaces the default interval for the connector.

    This value is specified in seconds. The default value is 10 seconds.

On the Advanced settings tab, you need to specify the following settings for the connector:

  • Character encoding—the specific encoding of the characters. The default value is UTF-8.

    KUMA converts SQL responses to UTF-8 encoding. You can configure the SQL server to send responses in UTF-8 encoding or change the encoding of incoming messages on the KUMA side.

  • Debug—a drop-down list where you can specify whether resource logging should be enabled. By default it is Disabled.

Within a single connector, you can create a connection for multiple supported databases.

To create a connection for multiple SQL databases:

  1. Click the Add connection button.
  2. Specify the URL, Identity column, Identity seed, Query, and Poll interval, sec values.
  3. Repeat steps 1–2 for each required connection.

Supported SQL types and their specific usage features

The UNION operator is not supported by the SQL Connector resources.

The following SQL types are supported:

  • MSSQL

    Example URLs:

    • sqlserver://{user}:{password}@{server:port}/{instance_name}?database={database} – (recommended option)
    • sqlserver://{user}:{password}@{server}?database={database}

    The characters @p1 are used as a placeholder in the SQL query.

    If you need to connect using domain account credentials, specify the account name in <domain>%5C<user> format. For example: sqlserver://domain%5Cuser:password@ksc.example.com:1433/SQLEXPRESS?database=KAV.

  • MySQL

    Example URL: mysql://{user}:{password}@tcp({server}:{port})/{database}

    The characters ? are used as placeholders in the SQL query.

  • PostgreSQL

    Example URL: postgres://{user}:{password}@{server}/{database}?sslmode=disable

    The characters $1 are used as a placeholder in the SQL query.

  • CockroachDB

    Example URL: postgres://{user}:{password}@{server}:{port}/{database}?sslmode=disable

    The characters $1 are used as a placeholder in the SQL query.

  • SQLite3

    Example URL: sqlite3://file:{file_path}

    A question mark (?) is used as a placeholder in the SQL query.

    When querying SQLite3, if the initial value of the ID is in datetime format, you must add a date conversion with the sqlite datetime function to the SQL query. For example: select * from connections where datetime(login_time) > datetime(?, 'utc') order by login_time. In this example, connections is the SQLite table, and the value of the variable ? is taken from the Identity seed field, and it must be specified in the {date}T{time}Z format (for example, 2021-01-01T00:10:00Z).

  • Oracle DB

    In version 2.1.3 or later, KUMA uses a new driver for connecting to oracle. When upgrading, KUMA renames the connection secret to 'oracle-deprecated' and the connector continues to work. If no events are received after starting the collector with the 'oracle-deprecated' driver type, create a new secret with the 'oracle' driver and use it for connecting.

    We recommend using the new driver.

    Example URL of a secret with the new 'oracle' driver:

    oracle://{user}:{password}@{server}:{port}/{service_name}

    oracle://{user}:{password}@{server}:{port}/?SID={SID_VALUE}

    Example URL of a secret with the legacy 'oracle-deprecated' driver:

    oracle-deprecated://{user}/{password}@{server}:{port}/{service_name}

    The :val SQL variable is used as a placeholder in.

    When accessing Oracle DB, if the initial ID value is used in the datetime format, you must consider the type of the field in the database itself and, if necessary, add conversions of the time string in the query to ensure correct operation of the sql connector. For example, if the Connections table in the database has a login_time field, the following conversions are possible:

    • If the login_time field has the TIMESTAMP type, then depending on the database settings, the login_time field may contain a value in the YYYY-MM-DD HH24:MI:SS format (for example, 2021-01-01 00:00:00). Then, in the Identity seed field, specify 2021-01-01T00:00:00Z, and perform the conversion in the query using the to_timestamp function. For example:

      select * from connections where login_time > to_timestamp(:val, 'YYYY-MM-DD"T"HH24:MI:SS"Z"')

    • If the login_time field has the TIMESTAMP type, then depending on the database settings, the login_time field may contain a value in the YYYY-MM-DD"T"HH24:MI:SSTZH:TZM format (for example, 2021-01-01T00:00:00+03:00). Then, in the Identity seed field, specify 2021-01-01T00:00:00+03:00, and perform the conversion in the query using the to_timestamp_tz function. For example:

      select * from connections_tz where login_time > to_timestamp_tz(:val, 'YYYY-MM-DD"T"HH24:MI:SSTZH:TZM')

      For more details about the to_timestamp and to_timestamp_tz functions, refer to the official Oracle documentation.

    To interact with Oracle DB, you must install the libaio1 Astra Linux package.

  • Firebird SQL

    Example URL:

    firebirdsql://{user}:{password}@{server}:{port}/{database}

    A question mark (?) is used as a placeholder in the SQL query.

    If a problem occurs when connecting Firebird on Windows, use the full path to the database file. For example:

    firebirdsql://{user}:{password}@{server}:{port}/C:\Users\user\firebird\db.FDB

A sequential request for database information is supported in SQL queries. For example, if you type select * from <name of data table> where id > <placeholder> in the Query field, the Identity seed field value will be used as the placeholder value the first time you query the table. In addition, the service that utilizes the SQL connector saves the ID of the last read entry, and the ID of this entry will be used as the placeholder value in the next query to the database.

Examples of SQL requests

SQLite, Firebird—select * from table_name where id > ?

MSSQL—select * from table_name where id > @p1

MySQL—select * from table_name where id > ?

PostgreSQL, Cockroach—select * from table_name where id > $1

Oracle—select * from table_name where id > :val

Page top

[Topic 220748]

File type

The file type is used to retrieve data from any text file. One string in a file is considered to be one event. Strings delimiter: \n. This type of connector is available for Linux Agents.

To set up file transfers from a Windows server for processing by the KUMA collector:

  1. On the Windows server, grant read access over the network to the folder with the files that you want processed.
  2. On the Linux server, mount the shared folder on the Windows server (see the list of supported operating systems).
  3. On the Linux server, install the collector that you want to process files from the mounted shared folder.

When creating this type of connector, you need to define values for the following settings:

  • Basic settings tab:
    • Name (required)—a unique name for this type of resource. Must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
    • Tenant (required)—name of the tenant that owns the resource.
    • Type (required)—connector type, file.
    • URL (required)—full path to the file that you need to interact with. For example, /var/log/*som?[1-9].log.

      File and folder mask templates

      Masks:

      • '*'—matches any sequence of characters.
      • '[' [ '^' ] { range of characters } ']'—class of characters (should not be left blank).
      • '?'—matches any single character.

      Ranges of characters:

      • [0-9]—digits;
      • [a-zA-Z]—Latin alphabet characters.

      Examples:

      • /var/log/*som?[1-9].log
      • /mnt/dns_logs/*/dns.log
      • /mnt/proxy/access*.log

      Limitations when using prefixes in file paths

      Prefixes that cannot be used when specifying paths to files:

      • /*
      • /bin
      • /boot
      • /dev
      • /etc
      • /home
      • /lib
      • /lib64
      • /proc
      • /root
      • /run
      • /sys
      • /tmp
      • /usr/*
      • /usr/bin/
      • /usr/local/*
      • /usr/local/sbin/
      • /usr/local/bin/
      • /usr/sbin/
      • /usr/lib/
      • /usr/lib64/
      • /var/*
      • /var/lib/
      • /var/run/
      • /opt/kaspersky/kuma/

      Files are available at the following paths:

      • /opt/kaspersky/kuma/clickhouse/logs/
      • /opt/kaspersky/kuma/mongodb/log/
      • /opt/kaspersky/kuma/victoria-metrics/log/

      Limiting the number of files for watching by mask

      The number of files simultaneously watched by mask can be limited by the max_user_watches setting of the Core. To view the value of a setting, run the following command:

      cat /proc/sys/fs/inotify/max_user_watches

      If the number of files for watching exceeds the value of the max_user_watches setting, the collector cannot read any more events from the files and the following error is written to the collector log:

      Failed to add files for watching {"error": "no space left on device"}

      To make sure that the collector continues to work correctly, you can configure the appropriate rotation of files so that the number of files does not exceed the value of the max_user_watches setting, or increase the max_user_watches value.

      To increase the value of the setting:

      sysctl fs.inotify.max_user_watches=<number of files>

      sysctl -p

      You can also add the value of the max_user_watches setting to sysctl.conf so make sure it is kept indefinitely.

      After you increase the value of the max_user_watches setting, the collector resumes correct operation.

    • Description—resource description: up to 4,000 Unicode characters.
  • Advanced settings tab:
    • Character encoding setting specifies character encoding. The default value is UTF-8.
    • Debug—a drop-down list where you can specify whether resource logging should be enabled. By default it is Disabled.
Page top

[Topic 244776]

Type 1c-xml

The 1c-xml type is used to retrieve data from 1C application registration logs. When the connector handles multi-line events, it converts them into single-line events. This type of connector is available for Linux Agents.

When creating this type of connector, specify values for the following settings:

  • Basic settings tab:
    • Name (required)—a unique name for this type of resource. Must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
    • Tenant (required)—name of the tenant that owns the resource.
    • Type (required)—connector type, 1c-xml.
    • URL (required)—full path to the directory containing files that you need to interact with. For example, /var/log/1c/logs/.

      Limitations when using prefixes in file paths

      Prefixes that cannot be used when specifying paths to files:

      • /*
      • /bin
      • /boot
      • /dev
      • /etc
      • /home
      • /lib
      • /lib64
      • /proc
      • /root
      • /run
      • /sys
      • /tmp
      • /usr/*
      • /usr/bin/
      • /usr/local/*
      • /usr/local/sbin/
      • /usr/local/bin/
      • /usr/sbin/
      • /usr/lib/
      • /usr/lib64/
      • /var/*
      • /var/lib/
      • /var/run/
      • /opt/kaspersky/kuma/

      Files are available at the following paths:

      • /opt/kaspersky/kuma/clickhouse/logs/
      • /opt/kaspersky/kuma/mongodb/log/
      • /opt/kaspersky/kuma/victoria-metrics/log/
    • Description—resource description: up to 4,000 Unicode characters.
  • Advanced settings tab:
    • Character encoding setting specifies character encoding. The default value is UTF-8.
    • Debug—a drop-down list where you can specify whether resource logging should be enabled. By default it is Disabled.

Connector operation diagram:

  1. The files containing 1C logs with the XML extension are searched within the specified directory. Logs are placed in the directory either manually or using an application written in the 1C language, for example, using the ВыгрузитьЖурналРегистрации() function. The connector only supports logs received this way. For more information on how to obtain 1C logs, see the official 1C documentation.
  2. Files are sorted by the last modification time in ascending order. All the files modified before the last read are discarded.

    Information about processed files is stored in the file /<collector working directory>/1c_xml_connector/state.ini and has the following format: "offset=<number>\ndev=<number>\ninode=<number>".

  3. Events are defined in each unread file.
  4. Events from the file are processed one by one. Multi-line events are converted to single-line events.

Connector limitations:

  • Installation of a collector with a 1c-xml connector is not supported in a Windows operating system. To set up file transfers of 1C log files for processing by the KUMA collector:
    1. On the Windows server, grant read access over the network to the folder with the 1C log files.
    2. On the Linux server, mount the shared folder with the 1C log files on the Windows server (see the list of supported operating systems).
    3. On the Linux server, install the collector that you want to process 1C log files files from the mounted shared folder.
  • Files with an incorrect event format are not read. For example, if event tags in the file are in Russian, the collector does not read such events.

    Example of a correct XML file with an event.

    XML_sample

    Example of a processed event.

    XML_processed_event_example

  • If a file read by the connector is enriched with the new events and if this file is not the last file read in the directory, all events from the file are processed again.
Page top

[Topic 244775]

Type 1c-log

The 1c-log type is used to retrieve data from 1C application technology logs. Strings delimiter: \n. The connector accepts only the first line from a multi-line event record. This type of connector is available for Linux Agents.

When creating this type of connector, specify values for the following settings:

  • Basic settings tab:
    • Name (required)—a unique name for this type of resource. Must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
    • Tenant (required)—name of the tenant that owns the resource.
    • Type (required)—connector type, 1c-log.
    • URL (required)—full path to the directory containing files that you need to interact with. For example, /var/log/1c/logs/.

      Limitations when using prefixes in file paths

      Prefixes that cannot be used when specifying paths to files:

      • /*
      • /bin
      • /boot
      • /dev
      • /etc
      • /home
      • /lib
      • /lib64
      • /proc
      • /root
      • /run
      • /sys
      • /tmp
      • /usr/*
      • /usr/bin/
      • /usr/local/*
      • /usr/local/sbin/
      • /usr/local/bin/
      • /usr/sbin/
      • /usr/lib/
      • /usr/lib64/
      • /var/*
      • /var/lib/
      • /var/run/
      • /opt/kaspersky/kuma/

      Files are available at the following paths:

      • /opt/kaspersky/kuma/clickhouse/logs/
      • /opt/kaspersky/kuma/mongodb/log/
      • /opt/kaspersky/kuma/victoria-metrics/log/
    • Description—resource description: up to 4,000 Unicode characters.
  • Advanced settings tab:
    • Character encoding setting specifies character encoding. The default value is UTF-8.
    • Debug—a drop-down list where you can specify whether resource logging should be enabled. By default it is Disabled.

Connector operation diagram:

  1. All 1C technology log files are searched.

    Log file requirements:

    • Files with the LOG extension are created in the log directory (/var/log/1c/logs/ by default) within a subdirectory for each process.

      Example of a supported 1C technology log structure

      1c-log-fileStructure

    • Events are logged to a file for an hour; after that, the next log file is created.
    • The file names have the following format: <YY><MM><DD><HH>.log. For example, 22111418.log is a file created in 2022, in the 11th month, on the 14th at 18:00.
    • Each event starts with the event time in the following format: <mm>:<ss>.<microseconds>-<duration_in_microseconds>.
  2. The processed files are discarded.

    Information about processed files is stored in the file /<collector working directory>/1c_log_connector/state.json.

  3. Processing of the new events starts, and the event time is converted to the RFC3339 format.
  4. The next file in the queue is processed.

Connector limitations:

  • Installation of a collector with a 1c-log connector is not supported in a Windows operating system. To set up file transfers of 1C log files for processing by the KUMA collector:
    1. On the Windows server, grant read access over the network to the folder with the 1C log files.
    2. On the Linux server, mount the shared folder with the 1C log files on the Windows server (see the list of supported operating systems).
    3. On the Linux server, install the collector that you want to process 1C log files files from the mounted shared folder.
  • Only the first line from a multi-line event record is processed.
  • The normalizer processes only the following types of events:
    • ADMIN
    • ATTN
    • CALL
    • CLSTR
    • CONN
    • DBMSSQL
    • DBMSSQLCONN
    • DBV8DBENG
    • EXCP
    • EXCPCNTX
    • HASP
    • LEAKS
    • LIC
    • MEM
    • PROC
    • SCALL
    • SCOM
    • SDBL
    • SESN
    • SINTEG
    • SRVC
    • TLOCK
    • TTIMEOUT
    • VRSREQUEST
    • VRSRESPONSE
Page top

[Topic 232912]

Diode type

Used to transmit events using a data diode.

When creating this type of connector, you need to define values for the following settings:

  • Basic settings tab:
    • Name (required)—a unique name for this type of resource. Must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
    • Tenant (required)—name of the tenant that owns the resource.
    • Type (required)—connector type, diode.
    • Data diode destination directory (required)—full path to the KUMA collector server directory where the data diode moves files containing events from the isolated network segment. After the connector has read these files, the files are deleted from the directory. The path can contain up to 255 Unicode characters.

      Limitations when using prefixes in paths

      Prefixes that cannot be used when specifying paths to files:

      • /*
      • /bin
      • /boot
      • /dev
      • /etc
      • /home
      • /lib
      • /lib64
      • /proc
      • /root
      • /run
      • /sys
      • /tmp
      • /usr/*
      • /usr/bin/
      • /usr/local/*
      • /usr/local/sbin/
      • /usr/local/bin/
      • /usr/sbin/
      • /usr/lib/
      • /usr/lib64/
      • /var/*
      • /var/lib/
      • /var/run/
      • /opt/kaspersky/kuma/

      Files are available at the following paths:

      • /opt/kaspersky/kuma/clickhouse/logs/
      • /opt/kaspersky/kuma/mongodb/log/
      • /opt/kaspersky/kuma/victoria-metrics/log/
    • Delimiter is used to specify a character representing the delimiter between events. Available values: \n, \t, \0. If no separator is specified (an empty value is selected), the default value is \n.

      This setting must match for the connector and destination resources used to relay events from an isolated network segment via the data diode.

    • Description—resource description: up to 4,000 Unicode characters.
  • Advanced settings tab:
    • Workers—the number of services processing the request queue. By default, this value is equal to the number of vCPUs of the KUMA Core server.
    • Poll interval, sec —frequency at which the files are read from the directory containing events from the data diode. The default value is 2. The value is specified in seconds.
    • Character encoding setting specifies character encoding. The default value is UTF-8.
    • Compression—you can use Snappy compression. By default, compression is disabled.

      This setting must match for the connector and destination resources used to relay events from an isolated network segment via the data diode.

    • Debug—a drop-down list where you can specify whether resource logging should be enabled. By default it is Disabled.

Page top

[Topic 220749]

Ftp type

When creating this type of connector, you need to define values for the following settings:

  • Basic settings tab:
    • Name (required)—a unique name for this type of resource. Must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
    • Tenant (required)—name of the tenant that owns the resource.
    • Type (required)—connector type, ftp.
    • URL (required)—actual URL of the file or file mask beginning with 'ftp://'. For a file mask, you can use * ? [...].

      File mask templates

      Masks:

      • '*'—matches any sequence of characters.
      • '[' [ '^' ] { range of characters } ']'—class of characters (should not be left blank).
      • '?'—matches any single character.

      Ranges of characters:

      • [0-9]—digits;
      • [a-zA-Z]—Latin alphabet characters.

      Examples:

      • /var/log/*som?[1-9].log
      • /mnt/dns_logs/*/dns.log
      • /mnt/proxy/access*.log

      If the URL does not include the FTP server port, port 21 is inserted.

    • URL credentials—for specifying the user name and password for the FTP server. If there is no user name and password, the line remains empty.
    • Description—resource description: up to 4,000 Unicode characters.
  • Advanced settings tab:
    • Character encoding setting specifies character encoding. The default value is UTF-8.
    • Debug—a drop-down list where you can specify whether resource logging should be enabled. By default it is Disabled.
Page top

[Topic 220750]

Nfs type

When creating this type of connector, you need to define values for the following settings:

  • Basic settings tab:
    • Name (required)—a unique name for this type of resource. Must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
    • Tenant (required)—name of the tenant that owns the resource.
    • Type (required)—connector type, nfs.
    • URL (required)—path to the remote folder in the format nfs://host/path.
    • File name mask (required)—mask used to filter files containing events. Use of masks is acceptable "*", "?", "[...]".
    • Poll interval, sec—polling interval. The time interval after which files are re-read from the remote system. The value is specified in seconds. The default value is 0.
    • Description—resource description: up to 4,000 Unicode characters.
  • Advanced settings tab:
    • Character encoding setting specifies character encoding. The default value is UTF-8.
    • Debug—a drop-down list where you can specify whether resource logging should be enabled. By default it is Disabled.
Page top

[Topic 220751]

Wmi type

When creating this type of connector, you need to define values for the following settings:

  • Basic settings tab:
    • Name (required)—a unique name for this type of resource. Must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
    • Tenant (required)—name of the tenant that owns the resource.
    • Type (required)—connector type, wmi.
    • URL (required)—URL of the collector being created, for example: kuma-collector.example.com:7221.

      The creation of a collector for receiving data using Windows Management Instrumentation results in the automatic creation of an agent that receives the necessary data on the remote device and forwards that data to the collector service. In the URL, you must specify the address of this collector. The URL is known in advance if you already know on which server you plan to install the service. However, this field can also be filled after the Installation Wizard is finished by copying the URL data from the ResourcesActive services section.

    • Description—resource description: up to 4,000 Unicode characters.
    • Default credentials—drop-down list that does not require any value to be selected. The account credentials used to connect to hosts must be provided in the Remote hosts table (see below).
    • The Remote hosts table lists the remote Windows assets that you can connect to. Available columns:
      • Host (required) is the IP address or name of the device from which you want to receive data. For example, "machine-1".
      • Domain (required)—name of the domain in which the remote device resides. For example, "example.com".
      • Log type—drop-down list to select the name of the Windows logs that you need to retrieve. By default, only preconfigured logs are displayed in the list, but you can add custom logs to the list by typing their name in the Windows logs field and then pressing ENTER. KUMA service and resource configurations may require additional changes in order to process custom logs correctly.

        Logs that are available by default:

        • Application
        • ForwardedEvents
        • Security
        • System
        • HardwareEvents

      If a WMI connection uses at least one log with an incorrect name, the agent that uses the connector does not receive events from all the logs within this connection, even if the names of other logs are specified correctly. The WMI agent connections for which all log names are specified correctly will work properly.

      • Secret—account credentials for accessing a remote Windows asset with permissions to read the logs. If you leave this field blank, the credentials from the secret selected in the Default credentials drop-down list are used. The login in the secret must be specified without the domain. The domain value for access to the host is taken from the Domain column of the Remote hosts table.

        You can select the secret resource from the drop-down list or create one using the AddResource button. The selected secret can be changed by clicking on the EditResource button.

  • Advanced settings tab:
    • Character encoding setting specifies character encoding. The default value is UTF-8.
    • Debug—a drop-down list where you can specify whether resource logging should be enabled. By default it is Disabled.

Receiving events from a remote device

Conditions for receiving events from a remote Windows device hosting a KUMA agent:

  • To start the KUMA agent on the remote device, you must use an account with the “Log on as a service” permissions.
  • To receive events from the KUMA agent, you must use an account with Event Log Readers permissions. For domain servers, one such user account can be created so that a group policy can be used to distribute its rights to read logs to all servers and workstations in the domain.
  • TCP ports 135, 445, and 49152–65535 must be opened on the remote Windows devices.
  • You must run the following services on the remote machines:
    • Remote Procedure Call (RPC)
    • RPC Endpoint Mapper
Page top

[Topic 220752]

Wec type

When creating this type of connector, you need to define values for the following settings:

  • Basic settings tab:
    • Name (required)—a unique name for this type of resource. Must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
    • Tenant (required)—name of the tenant that owns the resource.
    • Type (required)—connector type, wec.
    • URL (required)—URL of the collector being created, for example: kuma-collector.example.com:7221.

      The creation of a collector for receiving data using Windows Event Collector results in the automatic creation of an agent that receives the necessary data on the remote device and forwards that data to the collector service. In the URL, you must specify the address of this collector. The URL is known in advance if you already know on which server you plan to install the service. However, this field can also be filled after the Installation Wizard is finished by copying the URL data from the ResourcesActive services section.

    • Description—resource description: up to 4,000 Unicode characters.
    • Windows logs (required)—Select the names of the Windows logs you want to retrieve from this drop-down list. By default, only preconfigured logs are displayed in the list, but you can add custom logs to the list by typing their name in the Windows logs field and then pressing ENTER. KUMA service and resource configurations may require additional changes in order to process custom logs correctly.

      Preconfigured logs:

      • Application
      • ForwardedEvents
      • Security
      • System
      • HardwareEvents

      If the name of at least one log is specified incorrectly, the agent using the connector does not receive events from any log, even if the names of other logs are correct.

  • Advanced settings tab:
    • Character encoding setting specifies character encoding. The default value is UTF-8.
    • Debug—a drop-down list where you can specify whether resource logging should be enabled. By default it is Disabled.

To start the KUMA agent on the remote device, you must use a service account with the “Log on as a service” permissions. To receive events from the operating system log, the service user account must also have Event Log Readers permissions.

You can create one user account with “Log on as a service” and “Event Log Readers” permissions, and then use a group policy to extend the rights of this account to read the logs to all servers and workstations in the domain.

We recommend that you disable interactive logon for the service account.

Page top

[Topic 220753]

Snmp type

To process events received via SNMP, you must use json normalizer.

It is available for Windows and Linux Agents. Supported protocol versions:

  • snmpV1
  • snmpV2
  • snmpV3

When creating this type of connector, you need to define values for the following settings:

  • Basic settings tab:
    • Name (required)—a unique name for this type of resource. Must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
    • Tenant (required)—name of the tenant that owns the resource.
    • Type (required)—connector type, snmp.
    • SNMP version (required)—This drop-down list allows you to select the version of the protocol to use.
    • Host (required)—hostname or its IP address. Available formats: hostname, IPv4, IPv6.
    • Port (required)—port for connecting to the host. Typically 161 or 162 are used.

    The SNMP version, Host and Port settings define one connection to a SNMP resource. You can create several such connections in one connector by adding new ones using the SNMP resource button. You can delete connections by using the delete-icon button.

    • Secret (required) is a drop-down list to select the secret which stores the credentials for connecting via the Simple Network Management Protocol. The secret type must match the SNMP version. If required, a secret can be created in the connector creation window using the AddResource button. The selected secret can be changed by clicking on the EditResource button.
    • In the Source data table you can specify the rules for naming the received data, according to which OIDs, object identifiers, will be converted into keys with which the normalizer can interact. Available table columns:
      • Parameter name (required)—an arbitrary name for the data type. For example, "Site name" or "Site uptime".
      • OID (required)—a unique identifier that determines where to look for the required data at the event source. For example, "1.3.6.1.2.1.1.5".
      • Key (required)—a unique identifier returned in response to a request to the asset with the value of the requested setting. For example, "sysName". This key can be accessed when normalizing data.
    • Description—resource description: up to 4,000 Unicode characters.
  • Advanced settings tab:
    • Character encoding setting specifies character encoding. The default value is UTF-8.
    • Debug—a drop-down list where you can specify whether resource logging should be enabled. By default it is Disabled.
Page top

[Topic 239700]

Snmp-trap type

The snmp-trap connector is used in agents and collectors to passively receive SNMP trap messages. The connector receives and prepares messages for normalization by mapping the SNMP object IDs to the temporary keys. Then the message is passed to the JSON normalizer, where the temporary keys are mapped to the KUMA fields and an event is generated.

To process events received via SNMP, you must use json normalizer.

It is available for Windows and Linux Agents. Supported protocol versions:

  • snmpV1
  • snmpV2

When creating this type of connector, you need to define values for the following settings:

  • Basic settings tab:
    • Name (required)—a unique name for this type of resource. Must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
    • Tenant (required)—name of the tenant that owns the resource.
    • Type (required)—connector type, snmp-trap.
    • SNMP version (required)—in this drop-down list, select the version of the protocol to be used: snmpV1 or snmpV2.

      For example, Windows uses the snmpV2 version by default.

    • URL (required) – URL where SNMP Trap messages will be expected. Available formats: hostname:port, IPv4:port, IPv6:port, :port.

    The SNMP version and URL parameters define one connection used to receive SNMP Traps. You can create several such connections in one connector by adding new ones using the SNMP resource button. You can delete connections by using the delete-icon button.

    • In the Source data table, specify the rules for naming the received data, according to which OIDs (object identifiers) are converted to the keys with which the normalizer can interact.

      When creating a connector, the table is pre-populated with examples of values of object identifiers and their keys. If more data needs to be determined and normalized in the incoming events, add to the table rows containing OID objects and their keys.

      You can click Apply OIDs for WinEventLog to populate the table with mappings for OID values ​​that arrive in WinEventLog logs.

      Available table columns:

      • Parameter name —an arbitrary name for the data type. For example, "Site name" or "Site uptime".
      • OID (required)—a unique identifier that determines where to look for the required data at the event source. For example, 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.1.
      • Key (required)—a unique identifier returned in response to a request to the asset with the value of the requested setting. For example, sysDescr. This key can be accessed when normalizing data.

      Data is processed according to the allow list principle: objects that are not specified in the table are not sent to the normalizer for further processing.

    • Description—resource description: up to 4,000 Unicode characters.
  • Advanced settings tab:
    • Character encoding setting specifies character encoding. The default value is UTF-8.
    • Compression—you can use Snappy compression. By default, compression is disabled.
    • Debug—a drop-down list where you can specify whether resource logging should be enabled. By default it is Disabled.

In this section

Configuring the source of SNMP trap messages for Windows

Page top

[Topic 239863]

Configuring the source of SNMP trap messages for Windows

Configuring a Windows device to send SNMP trap messages to the KUMA collector involves the following steps:

  1. Configuring and starting the SNMP and SNMP trap services
  2. Configuring the Event to Trap Translator service

Events from the source of SNMP trap messages must be received by the KUMA collector, which uses a connector of the snmp-trap type and a json normalizer.

In this section

Configuring and starting the SNMP and SNMP trap services

Configuring the Event to Trap Translator service

Page top

[Topic 239864]

Configuring and starting the SNMP and SNMP trap services

To configure and start the SNMP and SNMP trap services in Windows 10:

  1. Open SettingsAppsApps and featuresOptional featuresAdd featureSimple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) and click Install.
  2. Wait for the installation to complete and restart your computer.
  3. Make sure that the SNMP service is running. If any of the following services are not running, enable them:
    • ServicesSNMP Service.
    • ServicesSNMP Trap.
  4. Right-click ServicesSNMP Service, and in the context menu select Properties. Specify the following settings:
    • On the Log On tab, select the Local System account check box.
    • On the Agent tab, fill in the Contact (for example, specify User-win10) and Location (for example, specify detroit) fields.
    • On the Traps tab:
      • In the Community Name field, enter community public and click Add to list.
      • In the Trap destination field, click Add, specify the IP address or host of the KUMA server on which the collector that waits for SNMP events is deployed, and click Add.
    • On the Security tab:
      • Select the Send authentication trap check box.
      • In the Accepted community names table, click Add, enter Community Name public and specify READ WRITE as the Community rights.
      • Select the Accept SNMP packets from any hosts check box.
  5. Click Apply and confirm your selection.
  6. Right click ServicesSNMP Service and select Restart.

To configure and start the SNMP and SNMP trap services in Windows XP:

  1. Open StartControl PanelAdd or Remove ProgramsAdd / Remove Windows ComponentsManagement and Monitoring ToolsDetails.
  2. Select Simple Network Management Protocol and WMI SNMP Provider, and then click OKNext.
  3. Wait for the installation to complete and restart your computer.
  4. Make sure that the SNMP service is running. If any of the following services are not running, enable them by setting the Startup type to Automatic:
    • ServicesSNMP Service.
    • ServicesSNMP Trap.
  5. Right-click ServicesSNMP Service, and in the context menu select Properties. Specify the following settings:
    • On the Log On tab, select the Local System account check box.
    • On the Agent tab, fill in the Contact (for example, specify User-win10) and Location (for example, specify detroit) fields.
    • On the Traps tab:
      • In the Community Name field, enter community public and click Add to list.
      • In the Trap destination field, click Add, specify the IP address or host of the KUMA server on which the collector that waits for SNMP events is deployed, and click Add.
    • On the Security tab:
      • Select the Send authentication trap check box.
      • In the Accepted community names table, click Add, enter Community Name public and specify READ WRITE as the Community rights.
      • Select the Accept SNMP packets from any hosts check box.
  6. Click Apply and confirm your selection.
  7. Right click ServicesSNMP Service and select Restart.

Changing the port for the SNMP trap service

You can change the SNMP trap service port if necessary.

To change the port of the SNMP trap service:

  1. Open the C:\Windows\System32\drivers\etc folder.
  2. Open the services file in Notepad as an administrator.
  3. In the service name section of the file, specify the snmp-trap connector port added to the KUMA collector for the SNMP trap service.
  4. Save the file.
  5. Open the Control Panel and select Administrative ToolsServices.
  6. Right-click SNMP Service and select Restart.
Page top

[Topic 239865]

Configuring the Event to Trap Translator service

To configure the Event to Trap Translator service that translates Windows events to SNMP trap messages:

  1. In the command line, type evntwin and press Enter.
  2. Under Configuration type, select Custom, and click the Edit button.
  3. In the Event sources group of settings, use the Add button to find and add the events that you want to send to KUMA collector with the SNMP trap connector installed.
  4. Click the Settings button, in the opened window, select the Don't apply throttle check box, and click OK.
  5. Click Apply and confirm your selection.
Page top

[Topic 250627]

Predefined connectors

The connectors listed in the table below are included in the KUMA distribution kit.

Predefined connectors

Connector name

Comment

[OOTB] Continent SQL

Collects events from the database of the Continent hardware and software encryption system.

To use it, you must configure the settings of the corresponding secret type.

[OOTB] InfoWatch Trafic Monitor SQL

Collects events from the database of the InfoWatch Traffic Monitor system.

To use it, you must configure the settings of the corresponding secret type.

[OOTB] KSC MSSQL

Collects events from the MS SQL database of the Kaspersky Security Center system.

To use it, you must configure the settings of the corresponding secret type.

[OOTB] KSC MySQL

Collects events from the MySQL database of the Kaspersky Security Center system.

To use it, you must configure the settings of the corresponding secret type.

[OOTB] KSC PostgreSQL

Collects events from the PostgreSQL database of the Kaspersky Security Center 15.0 system.

To use it, you must configure the settings of the corresponding secret type.

[OOTB] Oracle Audit Trail SQL

Collects audit events from the Oracle database.

To use it, you must configure the settings of the corresponding secret type.

[OOTB] SecretNet SQL

Collects events from the SecretNet SQL database.

To use it, you must configure the settings of the corresponding secret type.

Page top

[Topic 217990]

Secrets

Secrets are used to securely store sensitive information such as user names and passwords that must be used by KUMA to interact with external services. If a secret stores account data such as user login and password, when the collector connects to the event source, the account specified in the secret may be blocked in accordance with the password policy configured in the event source system.

Secrets can be used in the following KUMA services and features:

Available settings:

  • Name (required)—a unique name for this type of resource. Must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
  • Tenant (required)—name of the tenant that owns the resource.
  • Type (required)—the type of secret.

    When you select the type in the drop-down list, the parameters for configuring this secret type also appear. These parameters are described below.

  • Description—up to 4,000 Unicode characters.

Depending on the secret type, different fields are available. You can select one of the following secret types:

  • credentials—this type of secret is used to store account credentials required to connect to external services, such as SMTP servers. If you select this type of secret, you must fill in the User and Password fields. If the Secret resource uses the 'credentials' type to connect the collector to an event source, for example, a database management system, the account specified in the secret may be blocked in accordance with the password policy configured in the event source system.
  • token—this secret type is used to store tokens for API requests. Tokens are used when connecting to IRP systems, for example. If you select this type of secret, you must fill in the Token field.
  • ktl—this secret type is used to store Kaspersky Threat Intelligence Portal account credentials. If you select this type of secret, you must fill in the following fields:
    • User and Password (required fields)—user name and password of your Kaspersky Threat Intelligence Portal account.
    • PFX file (required)—lets you upload a Kaspersky Threat Intelligence Portal certificate key.
    • PFX password (required)—the password for accessing the Kaspersky Threat Intelligence Portal certificate key.
  • urls—this secret type is used to store URLs for connecting to SQL databases and proxy servers. In the Description field, you must provide a description of the connection for which you are using the secret of urls type.

    You can specify URLs in the following formats: hostname:port, IPv4:port, IPv6:port, :port.

  • pfx—this type of secret is used for importing a PFX file containing certificates. If you select this type of secret, you must fill in the following fields:
    • PFX file (required)—this is used to upload a PFX file. The file must contain a certificate and key. PFX files may include CA-signed certificates for server certificate verification.
    • PFX password (required)—this is used to enter the password for accessing the certificate key.
  • kata/edr—this type of secret is used to store the certificate file and private key required when connecting to the Kaspersky Endpoint Detection and Response server. If you select this type of secret, you must upload the following files:
    • Certificate file—KUMA server certificate.

      The file must be in PEM format. You can upload only one certificate file.

    • Private key for encrypting the connection—KUMA server RSA key.

      The key must be without a password and with the PRIVATE KEY header. You can upload only one key file.

      You can generate certificate and key files by clicking the download button.

  • snmpV1—this type of secret is used to store the values of Community access (for example, public or private) that is required for interaction over the Simple Network Management Protocol.
  • snmpV3—this type of secret is used for storing data required for interaction over the Simple Network Management Protocol. If you select this type of secret, you must fill in the following fields:
    • User—user name indicated without a domain.
    • Security Level—security level of the user.
      • NoAuthNoPriv—messages are forwarded without authentication and without ensuring confidentiality.
      • AuthNoPriv—messages are forwarded with authentication but without ensuring confidentiality.
      • AuthPriv—messages are forwarded with authentication and ensured confidentiality.

      You may see additional settings depending on the selected level.

    • Password—SNMP user authentication password. This field becomes available when the AuthNoPriv or AuthPriv security level is selected.
    • Authentication Protocol—the following protocols are available: MD5, SHA, SHA224, SHA256, SHA384, SHA512. This field becomes available when the AuthNoPriv or AuthPriv security level is selected.
    • Privacy Protocol—protocol used for encrypting messages. Available protocols: DES, AES. This field becomes available when the AuthPriv security level is selected.
    • Privacy password—encryption password that was set when the SNMP user was created. This field becomes available when the AuthPriv security level is selected.
  • certificate—this secret type is used for storing certificate files. Files are uploaded to a resource by clicking the Upload certificate file button. X.509 certificate public keys in Base64 are supported.

Predefined secrets

The secrets listed in the table below are included in the KUMA distribution kit.

Predefined secrets

Secret name

Description

[OOTB] Continent SQL connection

Stores confidential data and settings for connecting to the APKSh Kontinent database. To use it, you must specify the login name and password of the database.

[OOTB] KSC MSSQL connection

Stores confidential data and settings for connecting to the MS SQL database of Kaspersky Security Center (KSC). To use it, you must specify the login name and password of the database.

[OOTB] KSC MySQL Connection

Stores confidential data and settings for connecting to the MySQL database of Kaspersky Security Center (KSC). To use it, you must specify the login name and password of the database.

[OOTB] Oracle Audit Trail SQL Connection

Stores confidential data and settings for connecting to the Oracle database. To use it, you must specify the login name and password of the database.

[OOTB] SecretNet SQL connection

Stores confidential data and settings for connecting to the MS SQL database of the SecretNet system. To use it, you must specify the login name and password of the database.

Page top

[Topic 222426]

Segmentation rules

In KUMA, you can configure alert segmentation rules, that is, the rules for dividing similar correlation events into different alerts.

By default, if a correlation rule is triggered several times in the correlator, all correlation events created as a result of the rule triggering are attached to the same alert. Alert segmentation rules allow you to define the conditions under which different alerts are created based on the correlation events of the same type. This can be useful, for example, to divide the stream of correlation events by the number of events or to combine several events having an important distinguishing feature into a separate alert.

Alert segmentation is configured in two stages:

  1. Segmentation rules are created. They define the conditions for dividing the stream of correlation events.
  2. Segmentation rules are linked to the correlation rules within which they must be triggered.

In this section

Segmentation rule settings

Linking segmentation rules to correlation rules

Page top

[Topic 243124]

Segmentation rule settings

Segmentation rules are created in the ResourcesSegmentation rules section of the KUMA web interface.

Available settings:

  • Name (required)—a unique name for this type of resource. Must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
  • Tenant (required)—name of the tenant that owns the resource.
  • Type (required)—type of the segmentation rule. Available values:
    • By filter—alerts are created if the correlation events match the filter conditions specified in the Filter group of settings.

      You can use the Add condition button to add a string containing fields for identifying the condition. You can use the Add group button to add a group of filters. Group operators can be switched between AND, OR, and NOT. You can add other condition groups and individual conditions to filter groups. You can swap conditions and condition groups by dragging them by the DragIcon icon; you can also delete them using the cross icon.

      • Left operand and Right operand—used to specify the values to be processed by the operator.

        The left operand contains the names of the event fields that are processed by the filter.

        For the right-hand operand, you can select the type of the value: constant or list and specify the value.

      • Available operators
        • =—the left operand equals the right operand.
        • <—the left operand is less than the right operand.
        • <=—the left operand is less than or equal to the right operand.
        • >—the left operand is greater than the right operand.
        • >=—the left operand is greater than or equal to the right operand.
        • inSubnet—the left operand (IP address) is in the subnet of the right operand (subnet).
        • contains—the left operand contains values of the right operand.
        • startsWith—the left operand starts with one of the values of the right operand.
        • endsWith—the left operand ends with one of the values of the right operand.
        • match—the left operand matches the regular expression of the right operand. The RE2 regular expressions are used.
        • TIDetect—this operator is used to find events using CyberTrace Threat Intelligence (TI) data. This operator can be used only on events that have completed enrichment with data from CyberTrace Threat Intelligence. In other words, it can only be used in collectors at the destination selection stage and in correlators.
    • By identical fields—an alert is created if the correlation event contains the event fields specified in the Correlation rule identical fields group of settings.

      The fields are added using the Add field button. You can delete the added fields by clicking the cross icon or the Reset button.

      Example of grouping fields usage

      A rule that detects a network scan generates only one alert, even if there are multiple devices that scan the network. If you create an alert segmentation rule based on the SourceAddress event grouping field and then bind this segmentation rule to a correlation rule, alerts are created for each address from which a scan is performed when the rule is triggered.

      In this example, if the correlation rule name is "Network. Possible port scan", and the "from {{.SourceAddress}}" value is specified as the alert naming template in the segmentation rule resource, alerts are created that look like this:

      • Network. Possible port scan (from 10.20.20.20 <Alert creation date>)
      • Network. Possible port scan (from 10.10.10.10 <Alert creation date>)
    • By event limit—an alert is created if the number of correlation events in the previous alert exceeds the value specified in the Correlation events limit field.
  • Alert naming template (required)—a template for naming the alerts created according to this segmentation rule. The default value is {{.Timestamp}}.

    In the template field, you can specify text, as well as event fields in the {{.<Event field name>}} format. When generating the alert name, the event field value is substituted instead of the event field name.

    The name of the alert created using the segmentation rules has the following format: "<Name of the correlation rule that created the alert> (<text from the alert naming template field> <Alert creation date>)".

  • Description—resource description: up to 4,000 Unicode characters.

Page top

[Topic 243127]

Linking segmentation rules to correlation rules

Links between a segmentation rule and correlation rules are created separately for each tenant. They are displayed in the SettingsAlertsSegmentation section of the KUMA web interface in the table with the following columns:

  • Tenant—the name of the tenant that owns the segmentation rules.
  • Updated—date and time of the last update of the segmentation rules.
  • Disabled—this column displays a label if the segmentation rules are turned off.

To link an alert segmentation rule to the correlation rules:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, open the SettingsAlertsSegmentation section.
  2. Select the tenant for which you would like to create a segmentation rule:
    • If the tenant already has segmentation rules, select it in the table.
    • If the tenant has no segmentation rules, click Add settings for a new tenant and select the relevant tenant from the Tenant drop-down list.

    A table with the created links between segmentation and correlation rule is displayed.

  3. In the Segmentation rule links group of settings, click Add and specify the segmentation rule settings:
    • Name (required)—specify the segmentation rule name in this field. Must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
    • Tenants and correlation rule (required)—in this drop-down list, select the tenant and its correlation rule to separate the events of this tenant into an individual alert. You can select several correlation rules.
    • Segmentation rule (required)—in this group of settings, select a previously created segmentation rule that defines the segmentation conditions.
    • Disabled—select this check box to disable the segmentation rule link.
  4. Click Save.

The segmentation rule is linked to the correlation rules. Correlation events created by the specified correlation rules are combined into a separate alert with the name defined in the segmentation rule.

To disable links between segmentation rules and correlation rules for a tenant:

  1. Open the SettingsAlerts section of the KUMA web interface and select the tenant whose segmentation rules you want to disable.
  2. Select the Disabled check box.
  3. Click Save.

Links between segmentation rules and correlation rules are disabled for the selected tenant.

Page top

[Topic 245892]

Example of incident investigation with KUMA

Detecting an attack in the organization IT infrastructure using KUMA includes the following steps:

  1. Preliminary steps
  2. Assigning an alert to a user
  3. Check if the triggered correlation rule matches the data of the alert events
  4. Analyzing alert information
  5. False positive check
  6. Determining alert severity
  7. Incident creation
  8. Investigation
  9. Searching for related assets
  10. Searching for related events
  11. Recording the causes of the incident
  12. Response
  13. Restoring assets operability
  14. Closing the incident

The description of the steps provides an example of response actions that an analyst might take when an incident is detected in the organization's IT infrastructure. You can view the description and example for each step by clicking the link in its title. The examples are directly relevant to the step being described.

For conditions of the incident for which examples are provided, see the Incident conditions section.

For more information about response methods and tools, see the Incident Response Guide. On the Securelist website by Kaspersky, you can also find additional recommendations for incident detection and response.

In this Help topic

Incident conditions

Step 1. Preliminary steps

Step 2. Assigning an alert to a user

Step 3. Check if the triggered correlation rule matches the data of the alert events

Step 4. Analyzing alert information

Step 5. False positive check

Step 6. Determining alert severity

Step 7. Incident creation

Step 8. Investigation

Step 9. Searching for related assets

Step 10. Searching for related events

Step 11. Recording the causes of the incident

Step 12. Incident response

Step 13. Restoring assets operability

Step 14. Closing the incident

Page top

[Topic 245800]

Incident conditions

Parameters of the computer (hereinafter also referred to as "asset") on which the incident occurred:

  • Asset operating system – Windows 10.
  • Asset software – Kaspersky Administration Kit, Kaspersky Endpoint Security.

KUMA settings:

  • Integration with Active Directory, Kaspersky Security Center, Kaspersky Endpoint Detection and Response is configured.
  • SOC_package correlation rules from the application distribution kit are installed.

A cybercriminal noticed that the administrator's computer was not locked, and performed the following actions on this computer:

  1. Uploaded a malicious file from his server.
  2. Executed the command for creating a registry key in the \HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\Run hive.
  3. Added the file downloaded at the first step to autorun using the registry.
  4. Cleared the Windows Security Event Log.
  5. Completed the session.
Page top

[Topic 245796]

Step 1. Preliminary steps

Preliminary steps are as follows:

  1. Event monitoring.

    When a collector is created and configured in KUMA, the program writes information security events registered on controlled elements of the organization's IT infrastructure to the event database. You can find and view these events.

  2. Creating a correlator and correlation rules.

    When a sequence of events that satisfy the conditions of a correlation rule is detected, the program generates alerts. If the same correlation rule is triggered for several events, all these events are associated with the same alert. You can use correlation rules from the distribution kit or create them manually.

  3. Configuring email notifications about an alert to one or more email addresses.

    If notification is configured, KUMA sends a notification to the specified email addresses when a new alert is received. The alert link is displayed in the notification.

  4. Adding assets.

    You can only perform response actions for an asset (for example, block a file from running) if the asset is added to KUMA.

    Performing response action requires integrating KUMA with Kaspersky Security Center and Kaspersky Endpoint Detection and Response.

    Example

    The analyst has carried out the following preliminary steps:

    • Installed the SOC_package correlation rules from the distribution kit and linked them to the correlator.
    • Configured the sending of alert notifications to the analyst's email.
    • Imported assets from Kaspersky Security Center to KUMA.

      According to the incident conditions, after the administrator logged into their account, a malicious file was run, which the attacker had added to Windows autorun. The asset sent Windows security event log events to KUMA. The correlation rules were triggered for these events.

      As a result, the following alerts were written to the KUMA alert database:

    • R223_Collection of information about processes.
    • R050_Windows Event Log was cleared. R295_System manipulations by a non-privileged process.
    • R097_Startup script manipulation.
    • R093_Modification of critical registry hives.

    The information about the alert contains the names of the correlation rules based on which the alerts were created, and the time of the first and last event created when the rules were triggered again.

    The analyst received alert notifications by email. The analyst followed the link to the R093_Changes to critical registry hives alert from the notification.

Page top

[Topic 245804]

Step 2. Assigning an alert to a user

You can assign an alert to yourself or to another user.

Example

As part of the incident, the analyst assigns the alert to themselves.

Page top

[Topic 245829]

Step 3. Check if the triggered correlation rule matches the data of the alert events

At this step, you must view the information about the alert and make sure that the alert event data matches the triggered correlation rule.

Example

The name of the alert indicates that a critical registry hive was modified. The Related events section of the alert details displays the table of events related to the alert. The analyst sees that the table contains one event showing the path to the modified registry key, as well as the original and the new value of the key. Therefore, the correlation rule matches the event.

Page top

[Topic 245830]

Step 4. Analyzing alert information

At this step, analyze the information about the alert to determine what data is required for further analysis of the alert.

Example

From the alert information, the analyst learns the following:

  • Which registry key has been modified
  • On which asset
  • The name of the account used to modify the key

This information can be viewed in the details of the event that caused the alert (AlertsR093_Modification of critical registry hivesRelated events → event 2022-08-23 17:27:05), in the FileName, DeviceHostName, and SourceUserName fields respectively.

Page top

[Topic 245873]

Step 5. False positive check

At this stage, make sure that the activity that triggered the correlation rule is abnormal for the organization IT infrastructure.

Example

At this step, the analyst checks whether the detected activity can be legitimate as part of normal system operation (for example, an update). The event information shows that a registry key was created under the user account using the reg.exe utility. A registry key was also created in the \HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\Run hive, responsible for autorun of applications at user logon. Based on this information, one can surmise that the activity is not legitimate and the alarm is not false.

Page top

[Topic 245874]

Step 6. Determining alert severity

You can change the alert severity level, if necessary.

Example

The analyst assigns a high severity to the alert.

Page top

[Topic 245877]

Step 7. Incident creation

If steps 3 to 6 reveal that the alert warrants investigation, you can create an incident.

Example

The analyst creates an incident in order to perform an investigation.

Page top

[Topic 245880]

Step 8. Investigation

This step includes viewing information about the assets, accounts, and alerts related to the incident in the incident information section.

Information about the impacted assets and accounts is displayed on the Related assets and Related users tabs in the incident information section.

Example

The analyst opens the information about the affected asset (Incidents → the relevant incident → Related alerts → the relevant alert → Related endpoints → the relevant asset). The asset information shows that the asset belongs to the Business impact/HIGH and Device type/Workstation categories, which are critical for the organization IT infrastructure.

The asset information also includes the following useful data:

  • FQDN, IP address, and MAC address of the asset.
  • The time when the asset was created and the information was last updated.
  • The number of alerts associated with this asset.
  • The categories to which the asset belongs.
  • Asset vulnerabilities.
  • Information about the installed software.
  • Information about the hardware characteristics of the asset.

    The analyst opens the information about the associated user account (Incidents → the relevant incident → Related alerts → link with the relevant alert → Related users → account).

    The following account information may be useful:

  • User name.
  • Account name.
  • Email address.
  • Groups the account belongs to.
  • Password expiration date.
  • Password creation date.
  • Time of the last invalid password entry.

Page top

[Topic 245881]

Step 9. Searching for related assets

You can view the alerts that occurred on the assets related to the incident.

Example

The analyst checks for other alerts that occurred on the assets related to the incident (Incidents → the relevant incident → Related alerts → the relevant alert → Related endpoints → the relevant asset → Related alerts). In the alert window, you can configure filtering by time or status to exclude outdated and processed alerts. The time when the asset alerts were registered helps the analyst to determine that these alerts are related, so they can be linked to the incident (select the relevant alerts → Link → the relevant incident → Link).

The analyst also finds the associated alerts for the account and links them to the incident. All related assets that were mentioned in the new alerts are also scanned.

Page top

[Topic 245884]

Step 10. Searching for related events

You can expand your investigation scope by searching for events of related alerts.

The events can be found in the KUMA event database manually or by selecting any of the related alerts and clicking Find in events in the alert details (Incidents → the relevant incident → Related alerts → the relevant alert → Related endpointsFind in events). The found events can be linked to the selected alert, however, the alert must be unlinked from the incident before that.

Example

As a result, the analyst found the A new process has been created event, where the command to create a new registry key was recorded. Based on the event data, the analyst detected that cmd.exe was the parent process for reg.exe. In other words, the cybercriminal started the command line and executed the command in it. The event details include information about the ChromeUpdate.bat file that was autorun. To find out the origin of this file, the analyst searched for events in the event database using the FileName = ‘C:\\Users\\UserName\\Downloads\\ChromeUpdate.bat’ field and the %%4417 access mask (access type WriteData (or AddFile)):

SELECT * FROM 'events' WHERE DeviceCustomString1 like '%4417%' and FileName like ‘C:\\Users\\UserName\\Downloads\\ChromeUpdate.bat’ AND Device Vendor 'Microsoft' ORDER BY Timestamp DESC LIMIT 250

As a result, the analyst discovered that the file was downloaded from an external source using the msedge.exe process. The analyst linked this event to the alert as well.

Search for the related events for each incident alert allows the analyst to identify the entire attack chain.

Page top

[Topic 245885]

Step 11. Recording the causes of the incident

You can record the information necessary for the investigation in the incident change log.

Example

Based on the results of the search for incident-related events, the analyst identified the causes of the incident and recorded the results of the analysis in the Change log field in incident details to pass the information to other analysts.

Page top

[Topic 245887]

Step 12. Incident response

You can perform the following response actions:

  1. Isolate the asset from the network.
  2. Perform a virus scan.
  3. Prevent the file from running on assets.

    The listed actions are available if KUMA is integrated with Kaspersky Security Center and Kaspersky Endpoint Detection and Response.

    Example

    The analyst has information about the incident-related assets and the indicators of compromise. This information helps select the response actions.

    As part of the incident being considered, it is recommended to perform the following actions:

    • Start an unscheduled virus scan of the asset where the file was added to autorun.

      The virus scan task is started by means of Kaspersky Security Center.

    • Isolate the asset from the network for the period of the virus scan.

      The asset isolation is performed by means of Kaspersky Endpoint Detection and Response.

    • Quarantine the ChromeUpdate.bat file and create the execution prevention rules for this file on other assets in the organization.

      An execution prevention rule for a file is created by means of Kaspersky Endpoint Detection and Response.

Page top

[Topic 245889]

Step 13. Restoring assets operability

After the IT infrastructure is cleaned from the malicious presence, you can disable the prevention rules and asset network isolation rules in Kaspersky Endpoint Detection and Response.

Example

After the investigation, response, and cleanup of the organization IT infrastructure from the traces of the attack, restoration of the asset operation can be started. For this purpose, the execution prevention rules and the network asset isolation rules can be disabled in Kaspersky Endpoint Detection and Response if they were not disabled automatically.

Page top

[Topic 245916]

Step 14. Closing the incident

After taking measures to clean up the traces of the attacker's presence from the organization's IT infrastructure, you can close the incident.

Page top

[Topic 217736]

Analytics

KUMA provides extensive analytics on the data available to the program from the following sources:

  • Events in storage
  • Alerts
  • Assets
  • Accounts imported from Active Directory
  • Data from collectors on the number of processed events
  • Metrics

You can configure and receive analytics in the Dashboard, Reports, and Source status sections of the KUMA web interface. Analytics are built by using only the data from tenants that the user can access.

The date format depends on the localization language selected in the application settings. Possible date format options:

  • English localization: YYYY-MM-DD.
  • Russian localization: DD.MM.YYYY.

In this Help topic

Dashboard

Reports

Widgets

Working with alerts

Working with incidents

Retroscan

Page top

[Topic 217827]

Dashboard

In the Dashboard section, you can monitor the security status of your organization's network.

The dashboard is a set of widgets that display network security data analytics. You can view data only for those tenants to which you have access.

A selection of widgets used in the dashboard is called a layout. You can create layouts manually or use predefined layouts. You can edit widget settings in predefined layouts as necessary. By default, the dashboard displays the Alerts Overview predefined layout.

Only users with the Administrator and Analyst roles can create, edit, or delete layouts. Users accounts with all roles can view layouts and set default layouts. If a layout is set as default, that layout is displayed for the account every time the user navigates to the Dashboard section. The selected default layout is saved for the current user account.

The information on the dashboard is updated in accordance with the schedule configured in layout settings. If necessary, you can force the update of the data.

For convenient presentation of information on the dashboard, you can enable TV mode. This mode lets you view the dashboard in full-screen mode in FullHD resolution. In TV mode, you can also configure a slide show display for the selected layouts.

In this section

Creating a dashboard layout

Selecting a dashboard layout

Selecting a dashboard layout as the default

Editing a dashboard layout

Deleting a dashboard layout

Enabling and disabling TV mode

Preconfigured dashboard layouts

Page top

[Topic 252198]

Creating a dashboard layout

To create a layout:

  1. Open the KUMA web interface and select the Dashboard section.
  2. Open the drop-down list in the top right corner of the Dashboard window and select Create layout.

    The New layout window opens.

  3. In the Tenants drop-down list, select the tenants that will own the created layout and whose data will be used to fill the widgets of the layout.

    The selection of tenants in this drop-down list does not matter if you want to create a universal layout (see below).

  4. In the Time period drop-down list, select the time period from which you require analytics:
    • 1 hour
    • 1 day (this value is selected by default)
    • 7 days
    • 30 days
    • In period—receive analytics for the custom time period. The time period is set using the calendar that is displayed when this option is selected.

      The upper boundary of the period is not included in the time slice defined by it. In other words, to receive analytics for a 24-hour period, you should configure the period as Day 1, 00:00:00 – Day 2, 00:00:00 instead of Day 1, 00:00:00 – Day 1, 23:59:59.

  5. In the Refresh every drop-down list, select how often data should be updated in layout widgets:
    • 1 minute
    • 5 minutes
    • 15 minutes
    • 1 hour (this value is selected by default)
    • 24 hours
  6. In the Add widget drop-down list, select the required widget and configure its settings.

    You can add multiple widgets to the layout.

    You can also drag widgets around the window and resize them using the DashboardResize button that appears when you hover the mouse over a widget.

    You can edit or delete widgets added to the layout by clicking the gear icon and selecting Edit to change their configuration or Delete to delete them from the layout.

    • Adding widgets

      To add widget:

      1. Click the Add widget drop-down list and select required widget.

        The window with widget parameters opens. You can see how the widget will look like by clicking the Preview button.

      2. Configure widget parameters and click the Add button.
    • Editing widget

      To edit widget:

      1. Hover the mouse over the required widget and clicking the gear icon that appears.
      2. In the drop-down list select Edit.

        The window with widget parameters opens. You can see how the widget will look like by clicking the Preview button.

      3. Update widget parameters and click the Save button.
  7. In the Layout name field, enter a unique name for this layout. Must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
  8. If necessary, click the gear icon on the right of the layout name field and select the check boxes next to the additional layout settings:
    • Universal—if you select this check box, layout widgets display data from tenants that you select in the Selected tenants section in the menu on the left. This means that the data in the layout widgets will change based on your selected tenants without having to edit the layout settings. For universal layouts, tenants selected in the Tenants drop-down list are not taken into account.

      If this check box is cleared, layout widgets display data from the tenants that are selected in the Tenants drop-down list in the layout settings. If any of the tenants selected in the layout are not available to you, their data will not be displayed in the layout widgets.

      You cannot use the Active Lists widget in universal layouts.

      Universal layouts can only be created and edited by General administrators. Such layouts can be viewed by all users.

    • Show CII-related data—if you select this check box, layout widgets will also show data on assets, alerts, and incidents related to critical information infrastructure (CII). In this case, these layouts will be available for viewing only by users whose settings have the Access to CII facilities check box selected.

      If this check box is cleared, layout widgets will not display data on CII-related assets, alerts, and incidents, even if the user has access to CII objects.

  9. Click Save.

The new layout is created and is displayed in the Dashboard section of the KUMA web interface.

Page top

[Topic 217992]

Selecting a dashboard layout

To select a dashboard layout:

  1. Expand the list in the upper right corner of the Dashboard window.
  2. Select the relevant layout.

The selected layout is displayed in the Dashboard section of the KUMA web interface.

Page top

[Topic 217993]

Selecting a dashboard layout as the default

To set a dashboard layout as the default:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, select the Dashboard section.
  2. Expand the list in the upper right corner of the Dashboard window.
  3. Hover the mouse cursor over the relevant layout.
  4. Click the StarOffIcon icon.

The selected layout is displayed on the dashboard by default.

Page top

[Topic 217855]

Editing a dashboard layout

To edit a dashboard layout:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, select the Dashboard section.
  2. Expand the list in the upper right corner of the window.
  3. Hover the mouse cursor over the relevant layout.
  4. Click the EditResource icon.

    The Customizing layout window opens.

  5. Make the necessary changes. The settings that are available for editing are the same as the settings available when creating a layout.
  6. Click the Save button.

The dashboard layout is edited and displayed in the Dashboard section of the KUMA web interface.

If the layout is deleted or assigned to a different tenant while are making changes to it, an error is displayed when you click Save. The layout is not saved. Refresh the KUMA web interface page to see the list of available layouts in the drop-down list.

Page top

[Topic 217835]

Deleting a dashboard layout

To delete layout:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, select the Dashboard section.
  2. Expand the list in the upper right corner of the window.
  3. Hover the mouse cursor over the relevant layout.
  4. Click the delete-icon icon and confirm this action.

The layout is deleted.

Page top

[Topic 230361]

Enabling and disabling TV mode

It is recommended to create a separate user with the minimum required set of right to display analytics in TV mode.

To enable TV mode:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, select the Dashboard section.
  2. Click the GearGrey button in the upper-right corner.

    The Settings window opens.

  3. Move the TV mode toggle switch to the Enabled position.
  4. To configure the slideshow display of the layouts, do the following:
    1. Move the Slideshow toggle switch to the Enabled position.
    2. In the Timeout field, indicate how many seconds to wait before switching layouts.
    3. In the Queue drop-down list, select the layouts to view. If no layout is selected, the slideshow mode displays all layouts available to the user one after another.
    4. If necessary, change the order in which the layouts are displayed using the DragIcon button to drag and drop them.
  5. Click the Save button.

TV mode will be enabled. To return to working with the KUMA web interface, disable TV mode.

To disable TV mode:

  1. Open the KUMA web interface and select the Dashboard section.
  2. Click the GearGrey button in the upper-right corner.

    The Settings window opens.

  3. Move the TV mode toggle switch to the Disabled position.
  4. Click the Save button.

TV mode will be disabled. The left part of the screen shows a pane containing sections of the KUMA web interface.

When you make changes to the layouts selected for the slideshow, those changes will automatically be applied to the active slideshow sessions.

Page top

[Topic 222445]

Preconfigured dashboard layouts

The KUMA distribution kit includes a set of predefined layouts that contain the following widgets:

  • Alerts Overview layout (Alert overview):
    • Active alerts—number of alerts that have not been closed.
    • Unassigned alerts—number of alerts that have the New status.
    • Latest alerts—table with information about the last 10 unclosed alerts belonging to the tenants selected in the layout.
    • Alerts distribution—number of alerts created during the period configured for the widget.
    • Alerts by priority—number of unclosed alerts grouped by their priority.
    • Alerts by assignee—number of alerts with the Assigned status. The grouping is by account name.
    • Alerts by status—number of alerts that have the New, Opened, Assigned, or Escalated status. The grouping is by status.
    • Affected users in alerts—number of users associated with alerts that have the New, Assigned, or Escalated status. The grouping is by account name.
    • Affected assets—table with information about the level of importance of assets and the number of unclosed alerts they are associated with.
    • Affected assets categories—categories of assets associated with unclosed alerts.
    • Top event source by alerts number—number of alerts with the New, Assigned, or Escalated status, grouped by alert source (DeviceProduct event field).

      The widget displays up to 10 event sources.

    • Alerts by rule—number of alerts with the New, Assigned, or Escalated status, grouped by correlation rules.
  • Incidents Overview layout (Incidents overview):
    • Active incidents—number of incidents that have not been closed.
    • Unassigned incidents—number of incidents that have the Opened status.
    • Latest incidents—table with information about the last 10 unclosed incidents belonging to the tenants selected in the layout.
    • Incidents distribution—number of incidents created during the period configured for the widget.
    • Incidents by priority—number of unclosed incidents grouped by their priority.
    • Incidents by assignee—number of incidents with the Assigned status. The grouping is by user account name.
    • Incidents by status—number of incidents grouped by their status.
    • Affected assets in incidents—number of assets associated with unclosed incidents.
    • Affected users in incidents—users associated with incidents.
    • Affected asset categories in incidents—categories of assets associated with unclosed incidents.
    • Active incidents by tenant—number of incidents of all statuses, grouped by tenant.
  • Network Overview layout (Network activity overview):
    • Netflow top internal IPs—total volume of netflow traffic received by the asset, in bytes. The data is grouped by internal IP addresses of assets.

      The widget displays up to 10 IP addresses.

    • Netflow top external IPs—total volume of netflow traffic received by the asset, in bytes. The data is grouped by external IP addresses of assets.
    • Netflow top hosts for remote control—number of events associated with access attempts to one of the following ports: 3389, 22, 135. The data is grouped by asset name.
    • Netflow total bytes by internal ports—number of bytes sent to internal ports of assets. The data is grouped by port number.
    • Top Log Sources by Events count—top 10 sources from which the greatest number of events was received.

The default refresh period for predefined layouts is Never. You can edit these layouts as needed.

Page top

[Topic 217966]

Reports

You can configure KUMA to regularly generate reports about KUMA processes.

Reports are generated using report templates that are created and stored on the Templates tab of the Reports section.

Generated reports are stored on the Generated reports tab of the Reports section.

To save the generated reports in HTML and PDF formats, install the required packages on the device with the KUMA Core.

When deploying KUMA in a fault-tolerant version, the time zone of the Application Core server and the time in the user's browser may differ. This difference is manifested by the discrepancy between the time in reports generated by schedule and the data that the user can export from widgets. To avoid this discrepancy, it is recommended to configure the report generation schedule to take into account the difference between the users' time zone and UTC.

In this section

Report template

Generated reports

Page top

[Topic 217965]

Report template

Report templates are used to specify the analytical data to include in the report, and to configure how often reports must be generated. Administrators and analysts can create, edit, and delete report templates. Reports that were generated using report templates are displayed in the Generated reports tab.

Report templates are available in the Templates tab of the Reports section, where the table of existing templates is displayed. The table has the following columns:

You can configure a set of table columns and their order, as well as change data sorting:

  • You can enable or disable the display of columns in the menu that can be opened by clicking the icon gear.
  • You can change the order of columns by dragging the column headers.
  • If a table column header is green, you can click it to sort the table based on that column's data.
  • Name—the name of the report template.

    You can sort the table by this column by clicking the title and selecting Ascending or Descending.

    You can also search report templates by using the Search field that opens when you click the Name column title.

    Regular expressions are used when searching for report templates.

  • Schedule—the rate at which reports must be generated using the template. If the report schedule was not configured, the disabled value is displayed.
  • Created by—the name of the user who created the report template.
  • Updated—the date when the report template was last updated.

    You can sort the table by this column by clicking the title and selecting Ascending or Descending.

  • Last report—the date and time when the last report was generated based on the report template.
  • Send by email—the check mark is displayed in this column for the report templates that notify users about generated reports via email notifications.
  • Tenant—the name of the tenant that owns the report template.

You can click the name of the report template to open the drop-down list with available commands:

  • Run report—use this option to generate report immediately. The generated reports are displayed in the Generated reports tab.
  • Edit schedule—use this command to configure the schedule for generating reports and to define users that must receive email notifications about generated reports.
  • Edit report template—use this command to configure widgets and the time period for extracting analytics.
  • Duplicate report template—use this command to create a copy of the existing report template.
  • Delete report template—use this command to delete the report template.

In this section

Creating report template

Configuring report schedule

Editing report template

Copying report template

Deleting report template

Page top

[Topic 217811]

Creating report template

To create report template:

  1. Open the KUMA web interface and select ReportsTemplates.
  2. Click the New template button.

    The New report template window opens.

  3. In the Tenants drop-down list, select one or more tenants that will own the layout being created.
  4. In the Time period drop-down list, select the time period from which you require analytics:
    • This day (this value is selected by default)
    • This week
    • This month
    • In period—receive analytics for the custom time period.

      The upper boundary of the period is not included in the time slice defined by it. In other words, to receive analytics for a 24-hour period, you should configure the period as Day 1, 00:00:00 – Day 2, 00:00:00 instead of Day 1, 00:00:00 – Day 1, 23:59:59.

    • Custom—receive analytics for the last N days/weeks/months/years.
  5. In the Retention field, specify how long you want to store reports that are generated according to this template.
  6. In the Template name field, enter a unique name for the report template. Must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
  7. In the Add widget drop-down list, select the required widget and configure its settings.

    You can add multiple widgets to the report template.

    You can also drag widgets around the window and resize them using the DashboardResize button that appears when you hover the mouse over a widget.

    You can edit or delete widgets added to the layout by hovering the mouse over them, clicking the gear icon that appears and selecting Edit to change their configuration or Delete to delete them from layout.

    • Adding widgets

      To add widget:

      1. Click the Add widget drop-down list and select required widget.

        The window with widget parameters opens. You can see how the widget will look like by clicking the Preview button.

      2. Configure widget parameters and click the Add button.
    • Editing widget

      To edit widget:

      1. Hover the mouse over the required widget and clicking the gear icon that appears.
      2. In the drop-down list select Edit.

        The window with widget parameters opens. You can see how the widget will look like by clicking the Preview button.

      3. Update widget parameters and click the Save button.
  8. You can change logo in the report template by clicking the Upload logo button.

    When you click the Upload logo button, the Upload window opens and lets you choose the image file for the logo. The image must be a .jpg, .png, or .gif file no larger than 3 MB.

    The added logo is displayed in the report instead of KUMA logo.

  9. If necessary, select the Show CII-related data check box to display data on assets, alerts, and incidents related to critical information infrastructure (CII) in the layout widgets. In this case, these layouts will be available for viewing only by users whose settings have the Access to CII facilities check box selected.

    If this check box is cleared, layout widgets will not display data on CII-related assets, alerts, and incidents, even if the user has access to CII objects.

  10. Click Save.

The new report template is created and is displayed in the ReportsTemplates tab of the KUMA web interface. You can run this report manually. If you want to have the reports generated automatically, you must configure the schedule for that.

Page top

[Topic 217771]

Configuring report schedule

To configure the report schedule:

  1. Open the KUMA web interface and select ReportsTemplates.
  2. In the report templates table, click the name of an existing report template and select Edit schedule in the drop-down list.

    The Report settings window opens.

  3. If you want the report to be generated regularly:
    1. Turn on the Schedule toggle switch.

      In the Recur every group of settings, define how often the report must be generated.

      You can specify the frequency of generating reports by days, weeks, months, or years. Depending on the selected period, you should specify the time, day of the week, day of the month or the date of the report generation.

    2. In the Time field, enter the time when the report must be generated. You can enter the value manually or using the clock icon.
  4. To select the report format and specify the report recipients, configure the following settings:
    1. In the Send to group of settings, click Add.
    2. In the Add emails window that opens, in the User group section, click Add group.
    3. In the field that appears, specify the email address and press Enter or click outside the entry field—the email address will be added. You can add more than one address. Reports are sent to the specified addresses every time you generate a report manually or KUMA generates a report automatically on schedule.

      You should configure an SMTP connection so that generated reports can be forwarded by email.

      If the recipients who received the report by email are KUMA users, they can download or view the report by clicking the links in the email. If the recipients are not KUMA users, they can follow the links but cannot log in to KUMA, so only attachments are available to them.

      We recommend viewing HTML reports by clicking links in the web interface, because at some screen resolutions, the HTML report from the attachment may not be displayed correctly.

      If you send an email without attachments, the recipients will have access to reports only by links and only with authorization in KUMA, without restrictions on roles or tenants.

    4. In the drop-down list, select the report format to send. Available formats: PDF, HTML, , Excel.
  5. Click Save.

Report schedule is configured.

Page top

[Topic 217856]

Editing report template

To edit report template:

  1. Open the KUMA web interface and select ReportsTemplates.
  2. In the report templates table click the name of the report template and select Edit report template in the drop-down list.

    The Edit report template window opens.

    You can also open this window in the ReportsGenerated reports tab by clicking the name of a generated report and selecting in the drop-down list Edit report template.

  3. Make the necessary changes:
    • Change the list of tenants that own the report template.
    • Update the time period from which you require analytics.
    • Add widgets

      To add widget:

      1. Click the Add widget drop-down list and select required widget.

        The window with widget parameters opens. You can see how the widget will look like by clicking the Preview button.

      2. Configure widget parameters and click the Add button.
    • Change widgets positions by dragging them.
    • Resize widgets using the DashboardResize button that appears when you hover the mouse over a widget.
    • Edit widgets

      To edit widget:

      1. Hover the mouse over the required widget and clicking the gear icon that appears.
      2. In the drop-down list select Edit.

        The window with widget parameters opens. You can see how the widget will look like by clicking the Preview button.

      3. Update widget parameters and click the Save button.
    • Delete widgets by hovering the mouse over them, clicking the gear icon that appears, and selecting Delete.
    • In the field to the right from the Add widget drop-down list enter a new name of the report template. Must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
    • Change the report logo by uploading it using the Upload logo button. If the template already contains a logo, you must first delete it.
    • Change how long reports generated using this template must be stored.
    • If necessary, select or clear the Show CII-related data check box.
  4. Click Save.

The report template is updated and is displayed in the ReportsTemplates tab of the KUMA web interface.

Page top

[Topic 217778]

Copying report template

To create a copy of a report template:

  1. Open the KUMA web interface and select ReportsTemplates.
  2. In the report templates table, click the name of an existing report template, and select Duplicate report template in the drop-down list.

    The New report template window opens. The name of the widget is changed to <Report template> - copy.

  3. Make the necessary changes:
    • Change the list of tenants that own the report template.
    • Update the time period from which you require analytics.
    • Add widgets

      To add widget:

      1. Click the Add widget drop-down list and select required widget.

        The window with widget parameters opens. You can see how the widget will look like by clicking the Preview button.

      2. Configure widget parameters and click the Add button.
    • Change widgets positions by dragging them.
    • Resize widgets using the DashboardResize button that appears when you hover the mouse over a widget.
    • Edit widgets

      To edit widget:

      1. Hover the mouse over the required widget and clicking the gear icon that appears.
      2. In the drop-down list select Edit.

        The window with widget parameters opens. You can see how the widget will look like by clicking the Preview button.

      3. Update widget parameters and click the Save button.
    • Delete widgets by hovering the mouse over them, clicking the gear icon that appears, and selecting Delete.
    • In the field to the right from the Add widget drop-down list enter a new name of the report template. Must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
    • Change the report logo by uploading it using the Upload logo button. If the template already contains a logo, you must first delete it.
  4. Click Save.

The report template is created and is displayed in the ReportsTemplates tab of the KUMA web interface.

Page top

[Topic 217838]

Deleting report template

To delete report template:

  1. Open the KUMA web interface and select ReportsTemplates.
  2. In the report templates table, click the name of the report template, and select Delete report template in the drop-down list.

    A confirmation window opens.

  3. If you want to delete only the report template, click the Delete button.
  4. If you want to delete a report template and all the reports that were generated using that template, click the Delete with reports button.

The report template is deleted.

Page top

[Topic 217882]

Generated reports

All reports are generated using report templates. Generated reports are available in the Generated reports tab of the Reports section and are displayed in the table with the following columns:

You can configure a set of table columns and their order, as well as change data sorting:

  • You can enable or disable the display of columns in the menu that can be opened by clicking the icon gear.
  • You can change the order of columns by dragging the column headers.
  • If a table column header is green, you can click it to sort the table based on that column's data.
  • Name—the name of the report template.

    You can sort the table by this column by clicking the title and selecting Ascending or Descending.

  • Time period—the time period for which the report analytics were extracted.
  • Last report—date and time when the report was generated.

    You can sort the table by this column by clicking the title and selecting Ascending or Descending.

  • Tenant—name of the tenant that owns the report.
  • User—name of the user who generated the report manually. If the report was generated by schedule, the value is blank. If the report was generated in KUMA lower than 2.1, the value is blank.

You can click the name of a report to open the drop-down list with available commands:

  • Open report—use this command to open the report data window.
  • Save as—use this command to save the generated report in the desired format. Available formats: HTML, PDF, CSV, split CSV, Excel.
  • Run report—use this option to generate report immediately. Refresh the browser window to see the newly generated report in the table.
  • Edit report template—use this command to configure widgets and the time period for extracting analytics.
  • Delete report—use this command to delete the report.

In this section

Viewing reports

Generating reports

Saving reports

Deleting reports

Page top

[Topic 217945]

Viewing reports

To open report:

  1. Open the KUMA web interface and select ReportsGenerated reports.
  2. In the report table, click the name of the generated report, and select Open report in the drop-down list.

    The new browser window opens with the widgets displaying report analytics. If a widget displays data on events, alerts, incidents, or active lists, you can click its header to open the corresponding section of the KUMA web interface with an active filter and/or search query that is used to display data from the widget. Widgets are subject to default restrictions.

    To download the data displayed on each widget in CSV format with UTF-8 encoding, press the CSV button. The downloaded file name has the format <widget name>_<download date (YYYYMMDD)>_<download time (HHMMSS)>.CSV.

    To view the full data, download the report in the CSV format with the specified settings from the request.

  3. You can save the report in the desired format by using the Save as button.
Page top

[Topic 217883]

Generating reports

You can generate report manually or configure a schedule to have it generated automatically.

To generate report manually:

  1. Open the KUMA web interface and select ReportsTemplates.
  2. In the report templates table, click a report template name and select Run report in the drop-down list.

    You can also generate report from the ReportsGenerated reports tab by clicking the name of an existing report and in the drop-down list selecting Run report.

The report is generated and is displayed in the ReportsGenerated reports tab.

To generate reports automatically, configure the report schedule.

Page top

[Topic 217985]

Saving reports

To save the report in the desired format:

  1. Open the KUMA web interface and select ReportsGenerated reports.
  2. In the report table, click the name of the generated report, and in the drop-down list select Save as. Then select the desired format: HTML, PDF, CSV, split CSV, Excel.

    The report is saved to the download folder configured in your browser.

You can also save the report in the desired format when you view it.

Page top

[Topic 217837]

Deleting reports

To delete report:

  1. Open the KUMA web interface and select ReportsGenerated reports.
  2. In the report table, click the name of the generated report, and in the drop-down list select Delete report.

    A confirmation window opens.

  3. Click OK.
Page top

[Topic 218042]

Widgets

Widgets let you monitor the operation of the application.

Widgets are organized into widget groups, each one related to the analytics type they provide. The following widget groups and widgets are available in KUMA:

  • Events—widget for creating analytics based on events.
  • Active lists—widget for creating analytics based on active lists of correlators.
  • Alerts—group for analytics related to alerts.

    The group includes the following widgets:

    • Active alerts—number of alerts that have not been closed.
    • Active alerts by tenant—number of unclosed alerts for each tenant.
    • Alerts by tenant—number of alerts of all statuses for each tenant.
    • Unassigned alerts—number of alerts that have the New status.
    • Alerts by assignee—number of alerts with the Assigned status. The grouping is by account name.
    • Alerts by status—number of alerts that have the New, Opened, Assigned, or Escalated status. The grouping is by status.
    • Alerts by severity—number of unclosed alerts grouped by their severity.
    • Alerts by rule—number of unclosed alerts grouped by correlation rule.
    • Latest alerts—table with information about the last 10 unclosed alerts belonging to the tenants selected in the layout.
    • Alerts distribution—number of alerts created during the period configured for the widget.
  • Assets—group for analytics related to assets from processed events. This group includes the following widgets:
    • Affected assets—table with information about the level of importance of assets and the number of unclosed alerts they are associated with.
    • Affected asset categories—categories of assets linked to unclosed alerts.
    • Number of assets—number of assets that were added to KUMA.
    • Assets in incidents by tenant—number of assets associated with unclosed incidents. The grouping is by tenant.
    • Assets in alerts by tenant—number of assets associated with unclosed alerts, grouped by tenant.
  • Incidents—group for analytics related to incidents.

    The group includes the following widgets:

    • Active incidents—number of incidents that have not been closed.
    • Unassigned incidents—number of incidents that have the Opened status.
    • Incidents distribution—number of incidents created during the period configured for the widget.
    • Incidents by assignee—number of incidents with the Assigned status. The grouping is by user account name.
    • Incidents by status—number of incidents grouped by status.
    • Incidents by severity—number of unclosed incidents grouped by their severity.
    • Active incidents by tenant—number of unclosed incidents grouped by tenant available to the user account.
    • All incidents—number of incidents of all statuses.
    • All incidents by tenant—number of incidents of all statuses, grouped by tenant.
    • Affected assets in incidents—number of assets associated with unclosed incidents.
    • Affected assets categories in incidents—asset categories associated with unclosed incidents.
    • Affected users in Incidents—users associated with incidents.
    • Latest incidents—table with information about the last 10 unclosed incidents belonging to the tenants selected in the layout.
  • Event sources—group for analytics related to sources of events. The group includes the following widgets:
    • Top event sources by alerts number—number of unclosed alerts grouped by event source.
    • Top event sources by convention rate—number of events associated with unclosed alerts. The grouping is by event source.

      In some cases, the number of alerts generated by sources may be inaccurate. To obtain accurate statistics, it is recommended to specify the Device Product event field as unique in the correlation rule, and enable storage of all base events in a correlation event. However, correlation rules with these settings consume more resources.

  • Users—group for analytics related to users from processed events. The group includes the following widgets:
    • Affected users in alerts—number of accounts related to unclosed alerts.
    • Number of AD users—number of Active Directory accounts received via LDAP during the period configured for the widget.

In the events table, in the event details area, in the alert window, and in the widgets, the names of assets, accounts, and services are displayed instead of the IDs as the values of the SourceAssetID, DestinationAssetID, DeviceAssetID, SourceAccountID, DestinationAccountID, and ServiceID fields. When exporting events to a file, the IDs are saved, but columns with names are added to the file. The IDs are also displayed when you point the mouse over the names of assets, accounts, or services.

Searching for fields with IDs is only possible using IDs.

In this section

Basics of managing widgets

Special considerations for displaying data in widgets

Creating a widget

Editing a widget

Deleting a widget

Widget settings

Displaying tenant names in "Active list" type widgets

Page top

[Topic 254475]

Basics of managing widgets

The principle of data display in the widget depends on the type of the graph. The following graph types are available in KUMA:

  • Pie chart (pie).
  • Counter (counter).
  • Table (table).
  • Bar chart (bar1).
  • Date Histogram (bar2).
  • Line chart

Basics of general widget management

The name of the widget is displayed in the upper left corner of the widgets. By clicking the link with the name of the widget about events, alerts, incidents, or active lists, you can go to the corresponding section of the KUMA web interface.

A list of tenants for which data is displayed is located under the widget name.

In the upper right corner of the widget, the period for which data is displayed on the widget is indicated (Data display period on the widget). You can view the start and end dates of the period and the time of the last update by hovering the mouse cursor over this icon.

The CSV button is located to the left of the period icon. You can download the data displayed on the widget in CSV format (UTF-8 encoding). The downloaded file name has the format <widget name>_<download date (YYYYMMDD)>_<download time (HHMMSS)>.CSV.

The widget displays data for the period selected in widget or layout settings only for the tenants that are selected in widget or layout settings.

Basics of managing "Pie chart" graphs

A pie chart is displayed under the list of tenants. You can left-click the selected segment of the diagram to go to the relevant section of the KUMA web interface. The data in that section is sorted in accordance with the filters and/or search query specified in the widget.

Under the period icon, you can see the number of events, active lists, assets, alerts, or incidents grouped by the selected criteria for the data display period.

Examples:

  • In the Alerts by status widget, under the period icon, the number of alerts grouped by the New, Open, Assigned, or Escalated status is displayed.

    If you want to see the legend only for alerts with the Opened and Assigned status, you can clear the check boxes to the left of the New and Escalated statuses.

  • In the Events widget, for which the SQL query SELECT count(ID) AS `metric`, Name AS `value` FROM `events` GROUP BY Name ORDER BY `metric` DESC LIMIT 10 is specified, 10 events are displayed below the period icon, grouped by name and sorted in descending order.

    If you want to view events with specific names in the legend, you can clear the check boxes to the left of the names of events that you do not want to see in the legend.

Basics of managing "Counter" graphs

Graphs of this type display the sum total of selected data.

Example:

The Number of assets widget displays the total number of assets added to KUMA.

Basics of managing "Table" graphs

Graphs of this type display data in a table format.

Example:

In the Events widget, for which the SQL query SELECT TenantID , Timestamp , Name , DeviceProduct , DeviceVendor FROM `events` LIMIT 10 is specified, displays an event table with TenantID, Timestamp, Name, DeviceProduct, and DeviceVendor columns. The table contains 10 rows.

Basics of managing "Bar chart" graphs

A bar chart is displayed below the list of tenants. You can left-click the selected diagram section to go to the Events section of the KUMA web interface. The data in that section is sorted in accordance with the filters and/or search query specified in the widget. To the right of the chart, the same data is represented as a table.

Example:

In the a Netflow top internal IPs widget for which the SQL query SELECT sum(BytesIn) AS metric, DestinationAddress AS value FROM `events` WHERE (DeviceProduct = 'netflow' OR DeviceProduct = 'sflow') AND (inSubnet(DestinationAddress, '10.0.0.0/8') OR inSubnet(DestinationAddress, '172.16.0.0/12') OR inSubnet(DestinationAddress, '192.168.0.0/16')) GROUP BY DestinationAddress ORDER BY metric DESC LIMIT 10 is specified, the x-axis of the chart corresponds to the total traffic in bytes, and the y-axis corresponds to destination port addresses. The data is grouped by destination address in descending order of total traffic.

Basics of managing "Date Histogram" graphs

A date histogram is displayed below the list of tenants. You can left-click the selected section of the chart to go to the Events section of the KUMA web interface with the relevant data. The data in that section is sorted in accordance with the filters and/or search query specified in the widget. To the right of the chart, the same data is represented as a table.

Example:

In the Events widget, for which the SQL query SELECT count(ID) AS `metric`, Timestamp AS `value` FROM `events` GROUP BY Timestamp ORDER BY `metric` DESC LIMIT 250 is specified, the x-axis of the diagram corresponds to event creation date, and the y-axis corresponds to the approximate number of events. Events are grouped by creation date in descending order.

Basics of managing "Line chart" graphs

A line chart is displayed below the list of tenants. You can left-click the selected section of the chart to go to the Events section of the KUMA web interface with the relevant data. The data in that section is sorted in accordance with the filters and/or search query specified in the widget. To the right of the chart, the same data is represented as a table.

Example:

In the Events widget, for which the SQL query SELECT count(ID) AS `metric`, SourcePort AS `value` FROM `events` GROUP BY SourcePort ORDER BY `value` ASC LIMIT 250 is specified, the x-axis corresponds to the approximate port number, and the y-axis corresponds to the number of events. The data is grouped by port number in ascending order.

Page top

[Topic 245690]

Special considerations for displaying data in widgets

Limitations for the displayed data

For improved readability, KUMA has limitations on the data displayed in widgets depending on its type:

  • Pie chart displays a maximum of 20 slices.
  • Bar chart displays a maximum of 40 bars.
  • Table displays a maximum of 500 entries.
  • Date histogram displays a maximum of 365 days.

Data that exceeds the specified limitations is displayed in the widget in the Other category.

You can download the full data used for building analytics in the widget in CSV format.

Summing up the data

The format of displaying the total sum of data on date histogram, bar chart and pie chart depends on the locale:

  • English locale: decades (every three digits) are separated by commas, the decimal part is separated by a period.
  • Russian locale: decades (every three digits) are separated by spaces, the decimal part is separated by a comma.
Page top

[Topic 254403]

Creating a widget

You can create a widget in a dashboard layout while creating or editing the layout.

To create a widget:

  1. Create a layout or switch to editing mode for the selected layout.
  2. Click Add widget.
  3. Select a widget type from the drop-down list.

    This opens the widget settings window.

  4. Edit the widget settings.
  5. If you want to see how the data will be displayed in the widget, click Preview.
  6. Click Add.

The widget appears in the dashboard layout.

Page top

[Topic 254407]

Editing a widget

To edit widget:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, select the Dashboard section.
  2. Expand the list in the upper right corner of the window.
  3. Hover the mouse cursor over the relevant layout.
  4. Click the EditResource button.

    The Customizing layout window opens.

  5. In the widget you want to edit, click GearGrey.
  6. Select Edit.

    This opens the widget settings window.

  7. Edit the widget settings.
  8. Click Save in the widget settings window.
  9. Click Save in the Customizing layout window.

The widget is edited.

Page top

[Topic 254408]

Deleting a widget

To delete a widget:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, select the Dashboard section.
  2. Expand the list in the upper right corner of the window.
  3. Hover the mouse cursor over the relevant layout.
  4. Click the EditResource button.

    The Customizing layout window opens.

  5. In the widget you want to delete, click GearGrey.
  6. Select Delete.
  7. This opens a confirmation window; in that window, click OK.
  8. Click the Save button.

The widget is deleted.

Page top

[Topic 254289]

Widget settings

This section describes the settings of all widgets available in KUMA.

Page top

[Topic 217867]

"Events" widget

You can use the Events widget to get analytics based on SQL queries.

When creating this type of widget, you must set values for the following settings:

The Selectors tab:

  • Graph is the type of the graph. The following graph types are available:
    • Pie chart.
    • Bar chart.
    • Counter.
    • Line chart.
    • Table.
    • Date Histogram.
  • Tenant is the tenant for which data is displayed in the widget.

    You can select multiple tenants.

    By default, data is displayed for tenants that have been selected in layout settings.

  • Period is the period for which data is displayed in the widget. The following periods are available:
    • As layout means data is displayed for the period selected for the layout.

      This is the default setting.

    • 1 hour—data is displayed for the previous hour.
    • 1 day—data is displayed for the previous day.
    • 7 days—data is displayed for the previous 7 days.
    • 30 days—data is displayed for the previous 30 days.
    • In period—data is displayed for a custom time period.

      If you select this option, use the opened calendar to select the start and end dates of the period and click Apply Filter. The date and time format depends on your operating system's settings. You can also manually change the date values if necessary.

      The upper boundary of the period is not included in the time slice defined by it. In other words, to receive analytics for a 24-hour period, you should configure the period as Day 1, 00:00:00 – Day 2, 00:00:00 instead of Day 1, 00:00:00 – Day 1, 23:59:59.

  • Show data for previous period—enable the display of data for two periods at the same time: for the current period and for the previous period.
  • Storage is the storage that is searched for events.
  • The SQL query field (icon_search_events) lets you manually enter a query for filtering and searching events.

    You can also create a query in Builder by clicking icon_search_events.

    How to create a query in Builder

    To create a query in Builder:

    1. Specify the values of the following parameters:
      1. SELECT—event fields that should be returned. The number of available fields depends on the selected graph type.
        • In the drop-down list on the left, select the event fields for which you want to display data in the widget.
        • The middle field displays what the selected field is used for in the widget: metric or value.

          If you selected the Table graph type, in the middle fields, you must specify column names using ANSII-ASCII characters.

        • In the drop-down list on the right, you can select an operation to be performed on the data:
          • count—event count. This operation is available only for the ID event field. Used by default for line charts, pie charts, bar charts, and counters. This is the only option for date histogram.
          • max is the maximum value of the event field from the event selection.
          • min is the minimum value of the event field from the event selection.
          • avg is the average value of the event field from the event selection.
          • sum is the sum of event field values ​​from the event selection.
      2. SOURCE is the type of the data source. Only the events value is available for selection.
      3. WHERE—conditions for filtering events.
        • In the drop-down list on the left, select the event field that you want to use for filtering.
        • Select the necessary operator from the middle drop-down list. The available operators depend on the type of value of the selected event field.
        • In the drop-down list on the right, enter the value of the condition. Depending on the selected type of field, you may have to manually enter the value, select it from the drop-down list, or select it on the calendar.

        You can add search conditions by clicking Add condition or remove search conditions by clicking cross.

        You can also add groups of conditions by clicking Add group. By default, groups of conditions are added with the AND operator, but you can change the it if necessary. Available values: AND, OR, NOT. Group conditions are deleted using the Delete group button.

      4. GROUP BY—event fields or aliases to be used for grouping the returned data. This parameter is not available for Counter graph type.
      5. ORDER BY—columns used as the basis for sorting the returned data. This parameter is not available for the Date Histogram and Counter graph types.
        • In the drop-down list to the left, select the value that will be used for sorting.
        • Select the sort order from the drop-down list on the right: ASC for ascending, DESC for descending.
        • For Table type graphs, you can add sorting conditions by clicking Add column.
      6. LIMIT is the maximum number of data points for the widget. This parameter is not available for the Date Histogram and Counter graph types.
    2. Click Apply.

    Example of search conditions in the query builder

    WidgetCustomExample

    Search condition parameters for the widget showing average bytes received per host

    The "metric" and "value" aliases in SQL queries cannot be edited for any type of event analytics widget, except tables.

    Aliases in widgets of the Table type can contain Latin and Cyrillic characters, as well as spaces. When using spaces or Cyrillic, the alias must be enclosed in quotation marks: "An alias with a space", `Another alias`.

    When displaying data for the previous period, sorting by the count(ID) parameter may not work correctly. It is recommended to sort by the metric parameter. For example, SELECT count(ID) AS "metric", Name AS "value" FROM `events` GROUP BY Name ORDER BY metric ASC LIMIT 250.

    In the Counter type widgets you must specify the method of data processing for the values of the SELECT function: count, max, min, avg, sum.

The Actions tab:

The tab is displayed if on the Selectors tab in the Graph field you have selected one of the following values: Bar chart, Line chart, Date Histogram.

  • The Y-min and Y-max values set the scale of the Y axis.
  • The X-min and X-max values set the scale of the X axis.

    Negative values can be displayed on chart axes. This is due to the scaling of charts on the widget and can be fixed by setting zero as the minimum chart values instead of Auto.

  • Line-width is the width of the line on the graph. This field is displayed for the "Line chart" graph type.
  • Point size is the size of the pointer on the graph. This field is displayed for the "Line chart" graph type.

The wrench tab:

  • Name is the name of the widget.
  • Description is the description of the widget.
  • Color is a drop-down list where you can select the color for displaying information:
    • default for your browser's default font color
    • green
    • red
    • blue
    • yellow
  • Horizontal makes the histogram horizontal instead of vertical.

    When this option is enabled, when a widget displays a large amount of data, horizontal scrolling is not available and all available information is fit into the fixed size of the widget. If there is a lot of data to display, it is recommended to increase the widget size.

  • Show total shows sums total of the values.
  • Legend displays a legend for analytics.

    The toggle switch is turned on by default.

  • Show nulls in legend displays parameters with a null value in the legend for analytics.

    The toggle switch is turned off by default.

  • Decimals—the field to enter the number of decimals to which the displayed value must be rounded off.
  • Period segments length (available for graphs of the Date Histogram type) sets the length of segments into which you want to divide the period.
Page top

[Topic 234198]

"Active lists" widget

You can use the Active lists widget to get analytics based on SQL queries.

When creating this type of widget, you must set values for the following settings:

The Selectors tab:

  • Graph is the type of the graph. The following graph types are available:
    • Bar chart.
    • Pie chart.
    • Counter.
    • Table.
  • Tenant is the tenant for which data is displayed in the widget.

    You can select multiple tenants.

    By default, data is displayed for tenants that have been selected in layout settings.

  • Correlator is the name of the correlator that contains the active list for which you want to receive data.
  • Active list is the name of the active list for which you want to receive data.

    The same active list can be used by different correlators. However, a separate entity of the active list is created for each correlator. Therefore, the contents of the active lists used by different correlators differ even if the active lists have the same names and IDs.

  • The SQL query field lets you manually enter a query for filtering and searching active list data.

    The query structure is similar to that used in event search.

    When creating a query based on active lists, you must consider the following:

    • For the FROM function, you must specify the `records` value.
    • If you want to receive data for fields whose names contain spaces and Cyrillic characters, you must also enclose such names in quotes in the query:
      • In the SELECT function, enclose aliases in double quotes or backticks: "alias", `another alias`.
      • In the ORDER BY function, enclose aliases in backticks: `another alias`.
      • Event field values ​​are enclosed in straight quotes: WHERE DeviceProduct = 'Microsoft'.

      Names of event fields do not need to be enclosed in quotes.

      If the name of an active list field begins or ends with spaces, these spaces are not displayed by the widget. The field name must not contain spaces only.

      If the values of the active list fields contain trailing or leading spaces, it is recommended to use the LIKE '%field value%' function to search by them.

    • In your query, you can use service fields: _key (the field with the keys of active list records) and _count (the number of times this record has been added to the active list), as well as custom fields.
    • The "metric" and "value" aliases in SQL queries cannot be edited for any type of active lists analytics widget, except tables.
    • If a date and time conversion function is used in an SQL query (for example, fromUnixTimestamp64Milli) and the field being processed does not contain a date and time, an error will be displayed in the widget. To avoid this, use functions that can handle a null value. Example: SELECT _key, fromUnixTimestamp64Milli(toInt64OrNull(DateTime)) as Date FROM `records` LIMIT 250.
    • Large values for the LIMIT function may lead to browser errors.
    • If you select Counter as the graph type, you must specify the method of data processing for the values of the SELECT function: count, max, min, avg, sum.
    • You can get the names of the tenants in the widget instead of their IDs.

      If you want the names of tenants to be displayed in active list widgets instead of tenant IDs, in correlation rules of the correlator, configure the function for populating the active list with information about the corresponding tenant. The configuration process involves the following steps:

      1. Export the list of tenants.
      2. Create a dictionary of the Table type and import the previously obtained list of tenants into the dictionary.
      3. Add a local variable with the dict function for mapping the tenant name to tenant ID to the correlation rule.

        Example:

        • Variable: TenantName
        • Value: dict ('<Name of the previously created dictionary with tenants>', TenantID)
      4. Add an action with active lists to the correlation rule. This action will write the value of the previously created variable in the key-value format to the active list using the Set function. As the key, specify the field of the active list (for example, Tenant), and in the value field, reference the previously created variable (for example, $TenantName).

      When this rule triggers, the name of the tenant mapped by the dict function to the ID from the tenant dictionary is placed in the active list. When creating widgets for active lists, you can get the name of the tenant by referring to the name of the field of the active list (in the example above, Tenant).

      The method described above can be applied to other event fields with IDs.

    Special considerations apply when using aliases in SQL functions and SELECT, you can use double quotes and backticks: ", `.

    If you selected Counter as the graph type, aliases can contain Latin and Cyrillic characters, as well as spaces. When using spaces or Cyrillic, the alias must be enclosed in quotation marks: "An alias with a space", `Another alias`.

    When displaying data for the previous period, sorting by the count(ID) parameter may not work correctly. It is recommended to sort by the metric parameter. For example, SELECT count(ID) AS "metric", Name AS "value" FROM `events` GROUP BY Name ORDER BY metric ASC LIMIT 250.

    Sample SQL queries for receiving analytics based on active lists:

    • SELECT * FROM `records` WHERE "Event source" = 'Johannesburg' LIMIT 250

      This query returns the key of the active list where the field name is "Event source" and the value of this field is "Johannesburg".

    • SELECT count(_key) AS metric, Status AS value FROM `records` GROUP BY value ORDER BY metric DESC LIMIT 250

      Query for a pie chart, which returns the number of keys in the active list ('count' aggregation over the '_key' field) and all variants of the Status custom field. The widget displays a pie chart with the total number of records in the active list, divided proportionally by the number of possible values for the Status field.

    • SELECT Name, Status, _count AS Number FROM `records` WHERE Description ILIKE '%ftp%' ORDER BY Name DESC LIMIT 250

      Query for a table, which returns the values ​​of the Name and Status custom fields, as well as the service field '_count' for those records of the active list in which the value of the Description custom field matches ILIKE '%ftp%'. The widget displays a table with the Status, Name, and Number columns.

The Actions tab:

This tab is displayed if on the Selectors tab, in the Graph field, you have selected Bar chart.

  • The Y-min and Y-max values set the scale of the Y axis.
  • The X-min and X-max values set the scale of the X axis.

    Negative values can be displayed on chart axes. This is due to the scaling of charts on the widget and can be fixed by setting zero as the minimum chart values instead of Auto.

The wrench tab:

  • Name is the name of the widget.
  • Description is the description of the widget.
  • Color is a drop-down list where you can select the color for displaying information:
    • default for your browser's default font color
    • green
    • red
    • blue
    • yellow
  • Horizontal makes the histogram horizontal instead of vertical.

    When this setting is enabled, all available information is fitted into the configured widget size. If the amount of data is great, you can increase the size of the widget to display it optimally.

  • Show total shows sums total of the values.
  • Legend displays a legend for analytics.

    The toggle switch is turned on by default.

  • Show nulls in legend displays parameters with a null value in the legend for analytics.

    The toggle switch is turned off by default.

Page top

[Topic 221919]

Other widgets

This section describes the settings of all widgets except the Events widgets and Active lists widget.

The set of parameters available for a widget depends on the type of graph that is displayed on the widget. The following graph types are available in KUMA:

  • Pie chart (pie).
  • Counter (counter).
  • Table (table).
  • Bar chart (bar1).
  • Date Histogram (bar2).
  • Line chart.

Settings for pie charts

  • Name is the name of the widget.
  • Description is the description of the widget.
  • Tenant is the tenant for which data is displayed in the widget.

    You can select multiple tenants.

    By default, data is displayed for tenants that have been selected in layout settings.

  • Period is the period for which data is displayed in the widget. The following periods are available:
    • As layout means data is displayed for the period selected for the layout.

      This is the default setting.

    • 1 hour—data is displayed for the previous hour.
    • 1 day—data is displayed for the previous day.
    • 7 days—data is displayed for the previous 7 days.
    • 30 days—data is displayed for the previous 30 days.
    • In period—data is displayed for a custom time period.

      If you select this option, use the opened calendar to select the start and end dates of the period and click Apply Filter. The date and time format depends on your operating system's settings. You can also manually change the date values if necessary.

      The upper boundary of the period is not included in the time slice defined by it. In other words, to receive analytics for a 24-hour period, you should configure the period as Day 1, 00:00:00 – Day 2, 00:00:00 instead of Day 1, 00:00:00 – Day 1, 23:59:59.

  • Show total shows sums total of the values.
  • Legend displays a legend for analytics.

    The toggle switch is turned on by default.

  • Show nulls in legend displays parameters with a null value in the legend for analytics.

    The toggle switch is turned off by default.

  • Decimals—the field to enter the number of decimals to which the displayed value must be rounded off.

Settings for counters

  • Name is the name of the widget.
  • Description is the description of the widget.
  • Tenant is the tenant for which data is displayed in the widget.

    You can select multiple tenants.

    By default, data is displayed for tenants that have been selected in layout settings.

  • Period is the period for which data is displayed in the widget. The following periods are available:
    • As layout means data is displayed for the period selected for the layout.

      This is the default setting.

    • 1 hour—data is displayed for the previous hour.
    • 1 day—data is displayed for the previous day.
    • 7 days—data is displayed for the previous 7 days.
    • 30 days—data is displayed for the previous 30 days.
    • In period—data is displayed for a custom time period.

      If you select this option, use the opened calendar to select the start and end dates of the period and click Apply Filter. The date and time format depends on your operating system's settings. You can also manually change the date values if necessary.

      The upper boundary of the period is not included in the time slice defined by it. In other words, to receive analytics for a 24-hour period, you should configure the period as Day 1, 00:00:00 – Day 2, 00:00:00 instead of Day 1, 00:00:00 – Day 1, 23:59:59.

Settings for tables

  • Name is the name of the widget.
  • Description is the description of the widget.
  • Tenant is the tenant for which data is displayed in the widget.

    You can select multiple tenants.

    By default, data is displayed for tenants that have been selected in layout settings.

  • Period is the period for which data is displayed in the widget. The following periods are available:
    • As layout means data is displayed for the period selected for the layout.

      This is the default setting.

    • 1 hour—data is displayed for the previous hour.
    • 1 day—data is displayed for the previous day.
    • 7 days—data is displayed for the previous 7 days.
    • 30 days—data is displayed for the previous 30 days.
    • In period—data is displayed for a custom time period.

      If you select this option, use the opened calendar to select the start and end dates of the period and click Apply Filter. The date and time format depends on your operating system's settings. You can also manually change the date values if necessary.

      The upper boundary of the period is not included in the time slice defined by it. In other words, to receive analytics for a 24-hour period, you should configure the period as Day 1, 00:00:00 – Day 2, 00:00:00 instead of Day 1, 00:00:00 – Day 1, 23:59:59.

  • Show data for previous period—enable the display of data for two periods at the same time: for the current period and for the previous period.
  • Color is a drop-down list where you can select the color for displaying information:
    • default for your browser's default font color
    • green
    • red
    • blue
    • yellow
  • Decimals—the field to enter the number of decimals to which the displayed value must be rounded off.

Settings for Bar charts and Date Histograms

The Actions tab:

  • The Y-min and Y-max values set the scale of the Y axis.
  • The X-min and X-max values set the scale of the X axis.

    Negative values can be displayed on chart axes. This is due to the scaling of charts on the widget and can be fixed by setting zero as the minimum chart values instead of Auto.

  • Decimals—the field to enter the number of decimals to which the displayed value must be rounded off.

The wrench tab:

  • Name is the name of the widget.
  • Description is the description of the widget.
  • Tenant is the tenant for which data is displayed in the widget.

    You can select multiple tenants.

    By default, data is displayed for tenants that have been selected in layout settings.

  • Period is the period for which data is displayed in the widget. The following periods are available:
    • As layout means data is displayed for the period selected for the layout.

      This is the default setting.

    • 1 hour—data is displayed for the previous hour.
    • 1 day—data is displayed for the previous day.
    • 7 days—data is displayed for the previous 7 days.
    • 30 days—data is displayed for the previous 30 days.
    • In period—data is displayed for a custom time period.

      If you select this option, use the opened calendar to select the start and end dates of the period and click Apply Filter. The date and time format depends on your operating system's settings. You can also manually change the date values if necessary.

      The upper boundary of the period is not included in the time slice defined by it. In other words, to receive analytics for a 24-hour period, you should configure the period as Day 1, 00:00:00 – Day 2, 00:00:00 instead of Day 1, 00:00:00 – Day 1, 23:59:59.

  • Show data for previous period—enable the display of data for two periods at the same time: for the current period and for the previous period.
  • Color is a drop-down list where you can select the color for displaying information:
    • default for your browser's default font color
    • green
    • red
    • blue
    • yellow
  • Horizontal makes the histogram horizontal instead of vertical.

    When this setting is enabled, all available information is fitted into the configured widget size. If the amount of data is great, you can increase the size of the widget to display it optimally.

  • Show total shows sums total of the values.
  • Legend displays a legend for analytics.

    The toggle switch is turned on by default.

  • Show nulls in legend displays parameters with a null value in the legend for analytics.

    The toggle switch is turned off by default.

  • Period segments length (available for graphs of the Date Histogram type) sets the length of segments into which you want to divide the period.
Page top

[Topic 254498]

Displaying tenant names in "Active list" type widgets

If you want the names of tenants to be displayed in 'Active list' type widgets instead of tenant IDs, in correlation rules of the correlator, configure the function for populating the active list with information about the corresponding tenant.

The configuration process involves the following steps:

  1. Export the list of tenants.
  2. Create a dictionary of the Table type.
  3. Import the list of tenants obtained at step 1 into the dictionary created at step 2 of these instructions.
  4. Add a local variable with the dict function for mapping the tenant name to tenant ID to the correlation rule.

    Example:

    • Variable: TenantName
    • Value: dict ('<Name of the previously created dictionary with tenants>', TenantID)
  5. Add a Set action to the correlation rule, which writes the value of the previously created variable to the active list in the key-value format. As the key, specify the field of the active list (for example, Tenant), and in the value field, specify the variable (for example, $TenantName).

When this rule triggers, the name of the tenant mapped by the dict function to the ID in the tenant dictionary is placed in the active list. When creating widgets based on active lists, the widget displays the name of the tenant instead of the tenant ID.

Page top

[Topic 218046]

Working with alerts

Alerts are created when a sequence of events is received that triggers a correlation rule. You can find more information about alerts in this section.

In the Alerts section of the KUMA web interface, you can view and process the alerts registered by the program. Alerts can be filtered. When you click the alert name, a window with its details opens.

The alert date format depends on the localization language selected in the application settings. Possible date format options:

  • English localization: YYYY-MM-DD.
  • Russian localization: DD.MM.YYYY.

Alert life cycle

Below is the life cycle of an alert:

  1. KUMA creates an alert when a correlation rule is triggered. The alert is named after the correlation rule that generated it. Alert is assigned the New status.

    Alerts with the New status continue to be updated with data when correlation rules are triggered. If the alert status changes, the alert is no longer updated with new events, and if the correlation rule is triggered again, a new alert is created.

  2. A security officer assigns the alert to an operator for investigation. The alert status changes to assigned.
  3. The operator performs one of the following actions:
    • Close the alert as false a positive (alert status changes to closed).
    • Respond to the threat and close the alert (alert status changes to closed).
    • Creates an incident based on the alert (the alert status changes to In incident).

Alert overflow

Each alert and its related events cannot exceed the size of 16 MB. When this limit is reached:

  • New events can no longer be linked to the alert.
  • The alert has an Overflowed tag displayed in the Detected column. The same tag is displayed in the Details on alert section of the alert details window.

Overflowed alerts should be handled as soon as possible because new events are not added to overflowed alerts. You can filter out all events that could be linked to an alert after the overflow by clicking the All possible related events link.

Alert segmentation

Using the segmentation rules, the stream of correlation events of the same type can be divided to create more than one alert.

In this Help topic

Configuring alerts table

Viewing details on an alert

Changing alert names

Processing alerts

Alert investigation

Retention period for alerts and incidents

Alert notifications

Page top

[Topic 217769]

Configuring alerts table

The main part of the Alerts section shows a table containing information about registered alerts.

The following columns are displayed in the alerts table:

  • Priority (priority)—shows the importance of a possible security threat: Critical priority-critical, High priority-high, Medium priority-medium, or Low priority-low.
  • Name—alert name.

    If Overflowed tag is displayed next to the alert name, it means the alert size has reached or is about to reach the limit and should be processed as soon as possible.

  • Status—current status of an alert:
    • New—a new alert that hasn't been processed yet.
    • Assigned—the alert has been processed and assigned to a security officer for investigation or response.
    • Closed—the alert was closed. Either it was a false alert, or the security threat was eliminated.
    • Escalated—an incident was generated based on this alert.
  • Assigned to—the name of the security officer the alert was assigned to for investigation or response.
  • Incident—name of the incident to which this alert is linked.
  • First seen—the date and time when the first correlation event of the event sequence was created, triggering creation of the alert.
  • Last seen—the date and time when the last correlation event of the event sequence was created, triggering creation of the alert.
  • Categories—categories of alert-related assets with the highest severity. No more than three categories are displayed.
  • Tenant—the name of the tenant that owns the alert.
  • CII—an indication whether the related to the alert assets are the CII objects. The column is hidden from the users who do not have access to CII objects.

You can view the alert filtering tools by clicking the column headers. When filtering alerts based on a specific parameter, the corresponding header of the alerts table is highlighted in yellow.

Click the gear.png button to configure the displayed columns of the alerts table.

In the Search field, you can enter a regular expression for searching alerts based on their related assets, users, tenants, and correlation rules. Parameters that can be used for a search:

  • Assets: name, FQDN, IP address.
  • Active Directory accounts: attributes displayName, SAMAccountName, and UserPrincipalName.
  • Correlation rules: name.
  • KUMA users who were assigned alerts: name, login, email address.
  • Tenants: name.
Page top

[Topic 217874]

Filtering alerts

In KUMA, you can perform alert selection by using the filtering and sorting tools in the Alerts section.

The filter settings can be saved. Existing filters can be deleted.

Page top

[Topic 217983]

Saving and selecting an alert filter

In KUMA, you can save changes to the alert table settings as filters. Filters are saved on the KUMA Core server and are available to all KUMA users of the tenant for which they were created.

To save the current filter settings:

  1. In the Alerts section of KUMA open the Filters drop-down list.
  2. Select Save current filter.

    A field will appear for entering the name of the new filter and selecting the tenant that will own it.

  3. Enter a name for the filter. The name must be unique for alert filters, incident filters, and event filters.
  4. In the Tenant drop-down list, select the tenant that will own the filter and click Save.

The filter is saved.

To select a previously saved filter:

  1. In the Alerts section of KUMA open the Filters drop-down list.
  2. Select the relevant filter.

    To select the default filter, put an asterisk to the left of the relevant filter name in the Filters drop-down list.

The filter is selected.

To reset the current filter settings,

Open the Filters drop-down list and select Clear filters.

Page top

[Topic 217831]

Deleting an alert filter

To delete a previously saved filter:

  1. In the Alerts section of KUMA open the Filters drop-down list.
  2. Click delete-icon next to the configuration that you want to delete.
  3. Click OK.

The filter is deleted for all KUMA users.

Page top

[Topic 217723]

Viewing details on an alert

To view details on an alert:

  1. In the program web interface window, select the Alerts section.

    The alerts table is displayed.

  2. Click the name of the alert whose details you want to view.

    This opens a window containing information about the alert.

The upper part of the alert details window contains a toolbar and shows the alert severity and the user name to which the alert is assigned. In this window, you can process the alert: change its severity, assign it to a user, and close and create an incident based on the alert.

Details on alert section

This section lets you view basic information about an alert. It contains the following data:

  • Correlation rule severity is the severity of the correlation rule that triggered the creation of the alert.
  • Max asset category priority—the highest priority of an asset category assigned to assets related to this alert. If multiple assets are related to the alert, the largest value is displayed.
  • Linked to incident—if the alert is linked to an incident, the name and status of the alert are displayed. If the alert is not linked to an incident, the field is blank.
  • First seen—the date and time when the first correlation event of the event sequence was created, triggering creation of the alert.
  • Last seen—the date and time when the last correlation event of the event sequence was created, triggering creation of the alert.
  • Alert ID—the unique identifier of an alert in KUMA.
  • Tenant—the name of the tenant that owns the alert.
  • Correlation rule—the name of the correlation rule that triggered the creation of the alert. The rule name is represented as a link that can be used to open the settings of this correlation rule.
  • Overflowed is a tag meaning that the alert size has reached or will soon reach the limit of 16 MB and the alert must be handled. New events are not added to the overflowed alerts, but you can click the All possible related events link to filter all events that could be related to the alert if there were no overflow.

    A quick alert overflow may mean that the corresponding correlation rule is configured incorrectly, and this leads to frequent triggers. Overflowed alerts should be handled as soon as possible to correct the correlation rule if necessary.

Related events section

This section contains a table of events related to the alert. If you click the Arrow icon near a correlation rule, the base events from this correlation rule will be displayed. Events can be sorted by severity and time.

Selecting an event in the table opens the details area containing information about the selected event. The details area also displays the Detailed view button, which opens a window containing information about the correlation event.

The Find in events links below correlation events and the Find in events button to the right of the section heading are used to go to alert investigation.

You can use the Download events button to download information about related events into a CSV file (in UTF-8 encoding). The file contains columns that are populated in at least one related event.

Some CSV file editors interpret the separator value (for example, \n) in the CSV file exported from KUMA as a line break, not as a separator. This may disrupt the line division of the file. If you encounter a similar issue, you may need to additionally edit the CSV file received from KUMA.

In the events table, in the event details area, in the alert window, and in the widgets, the names of assets, accounts, and services are displayed instead of the IDs as the values of the SourceAssetID, DestinationAssetID, DeviceAssetID, SourceAccountID, DestinationAccountID, and ServiceID fields. When exporting events to a file, the IDs are saved, but columns with names are added to the file. The IDs are also displayed when you point the mouse over the names of assets, accounts, or services.

Searching for fields with IDs is only possible using IDs.

Related endpoints section

This section contains a table of assets related to the alert. Asset information comes from events that are related to the alert. You can search for assets by using the Search for IP addresses or FQDN field. Assets can be sorted using the Count and Endpoint columns.

This section also displays the assets related to the alert. Clicking the name of the asset opens the Asset details window.

You can use the Download assets button to download information about related assets into a CSV file (in UTF-8 encoding). The following columns are available in the file: Count, Name, IP address, FQDN, Categories.

Related users section

This section contains a table of users related to the alert. User information comes from events that are related to the alert. You can search for users using the Search for users field. Users can be sorted by the Count, User, User principal name and Email columns.

You can use the Download users button to download information about related users into a CSV file (in UTF-8 encoding). The following columns are available in the file: Count, User, User principal name, Email, Domain, Tenant.

Change log section

This section contains entries about changes made to the alert by users. Changes are automatically logged, but it is also possible to add comments manually. Comments can be sorted by using the Time column.

If necessary, you can enter a comment for the alert in the Comment field and click Add to save it.

See also:

Processing alerts

Changing alert names

Page top

[Topic 243251]

Changing alert names

To change the alert name:

  1. In the KUMA web interface window, select the Alerts section.

    The alerts table is displayed.

  2. Click the name of the alert whose details you want to view.

    This opens a window containing information about the alert.

  3. In the upper part of the window, click edit-pencil and in the field that opens, enter the new name of the alert. To confirm the name, press ENTER or click outside the entry field.

Alert name is changed.

See also:

Segmentation rules

Page top

[Topic 217956]

Processing alerts

You can change the alert severity, assign an alert to a user, close the alert, or create an incident based on the alert.

To process an alert:

  1. Select required alerts using one of the methods below:
    • In the Alerts section of the KUMA web interface, click the alert whose information you want to view.

      The Alert window opens and provides an alert processing toolbar at the top.

    • In the Alerts section of the KUMA web interface, select the check box next to the required alert. It is possible to select more than one alert.

      Alerts with the closed status cannot be selected for processing.

      A toolbar will appear at the bottom of the window.

  2. If you want to change the severity of an alert, select the required value in the Priority drop-down list:
    • Low
    • Medium
    • High
    • Critical

    The severity of the alert changes to the selected value.

  3. If you want to assign an alert to a user, select the relevant user from the Assign to drop-down list.

    You can assign the alert to yourself by selecting Me.

    The status of the alert will change to Assigned and the name of the selected user will be displayed in the Assign to drop-down list.

  4. In the Related users section, select a user and configure Active Directory response settings.
    1. After the related user is selected, in the Account details window that opens, click Response via Active Directory.
    2. In the AD command drop-down list, select one of the following values:
      • Add account to group

        The Active Directory group to move the account from or to.
        In the mandatory field Distinguished name, you must specify the full path to the group.
        For example, CN = HQ Team, OU = Groups, OU = ExchangeObjects, DC = avp, DC = ru.
        Only one group can be specified within one operation.

      • Remove account from group

        The Active Directory group to move the account from or to.
        In the mandatory field Distinguished name, you must specify the full path to the group.
        For example, CN = HQ Team, OU = Groups, OU = ExchangeObjects, DC = avp, DC = ru.
        Only one group can be specified within one operation.

      • Reset account password
      • Block account
    3. Click Apply.
  5. If required, create an incident based on the alert:
    1. Click Create incident.

      The window for creating an incident will open. The alert name is used as the incident name.

    2. Update the desired incident parameters and click the Save button.

    The incident is created, and the alert status is changed to Escalated. An alert can be unlinked from an incident by selecting it and clicking Unlink.

  6. If you want to close the alert:
    1. Click Close alert.

      A confirmation window opens.

    2. Select the reason for closing the alert:
      • Responded. This means the appropriate measures were taken to eliminate the security threat.
      • Incorrect data. This means the alert was a false positive and the received events do not indicate a security threat.
      • Incorrect correlation rule. This means the alert was a false positive and the received events do not indicate a security threat. The correlation rule may need to be updated.
    3. Click OK.

    The status of the alert is changed to Closed. Alerts with this status are no longer updated with new correlation events and aren't displayed in the alerts table unless the Closed check box is selected in the Status drop-down list in the alerts table. You cannot change the status of a closed alert or assign it to another user.

Page top

[Topic 217847]

Alert investigation

Alert investigation is used when you need to find more information about the threat that triggered the alert — is the threat real, what is its origin, what elements of the network environment are affected by it, how should the threat be dealt with. Studying the events related to the correlation events that triggered an alert can help you determine the course of action.

The alert investigation mode is enabled in KUMA when you click the Find in events link in the alert window or the correlation event window. When the alert investigation mode is enabled, the events table is shown with filters automatically set to match the events from the alert or correlation event. The filters also match the time period of the alert duration or the time when the correlation event was registered. You can change these filters to find other events and learn more about the processes related to the threat.

An additional EventSelector drop-down list becomes available in alert investigation mode:

  • All events—view all events.
  • Related to alert (selected by default)—view only events related to the alert.

    When filtering events related to an alert, there are limitations on the complexity of SQL search queries.

You can manually assign an event of any type except the correlation event to an alert. Only events that are not related to the alert can be linked to it.

You can create and save event filters in alert investigation mode. When using this filter in normal mode, all events that match the filter criteria are selected regardless of whether or not they are related to the alert that was selected for alert investigation.

To link an event to an alert:

  1. In the Alerts section of the KUMA web interface, click the alert that you want to link to the event.

    The Alert window opens.

  2. In the Related events section, click the Find in events button.

    The events table is opened and displayed with active date and time filters matching the date and time of events linked to the alert. The columns show the settings used by the correlation rule to generate the alert. The Link to alert column is also added to the events table showing the events linked to the alert.

  3. In the EventSelector drop-down list select All events.
  4. If necessary, modify the filters to find the event that you need to link to the alert.
  5. Select the relevant event and click the Link to alert button in the lower part of the event details area.

The event will be linked to the alert. You can unlink this event from the alert by clicking in the Unlink from alert detailed view.

When an event is linked to or unlinked from an alert, a corresponding entry is added to the Change log section in the Alert window. You can click the link in this entry to open the details area and unlink or link the event to the alert by clicking the corresponding button.

Page top

[Topic 222206]

Retention period for alerts and incidents

Alerts and incidents are stored in KUMA for a year by default. This period can be changed by editing the application startup parameters in the file /usr/lib/systemd/system/kuma-core.service on the KUMA Core server.

To change the retention period for alerts and incidents:

  1. Log in to the OS of the server where the KUMA Core is installed.
  2. In the /usr/lib/systemd/system/kuma-core.service file, edit the following string by inserting the necessary number of days:

    ExecStart=/opt/kaspersky/kuma/kuma core --alerts.retention <number of days to store alerts and incidents> --external :7220 --internal :7210 --mongo mongodb://localhost:27017

  3. Restart KUMA by running the following commands in sequence:
    1. systemctl daemon-reload
    2. systemctl restart kuma-core

The retention period for alerts and incidents will be changed.

Page top

[Topic 233518]

Alert notifications

Standard KUMA notifications are sent by email when alerts are generated and assigned. You can configure delivery of alert generation notifications based on a custom email template.

To configure delivery of alert generation notifications based on a custom template:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, open SettingsAlertsNotification rules.
  2. Select the tenant for which you want to create a notification rule:
    • If the tenant already has notification rules, select it in the table.
    • If the tenant has no notification rules, click Add tenant and select the relevant tenant from the Tenant drop-down list.
  3. In the Notification rules settings block, click Add and specify the notification rule settings:
    • Name (required)—specify the notification rule name in this field.
    • Recipient emails (required)—in this settings block, you can use the Email button to add the email addresses to which you need to send notifications about alert generation. Addresses are added one at a time.

      Cyrillic domains are not supported. For example, a notification cannot be sent to login@domain.us.

    • Correlation rules (required)—in this settings block, you must select one or more correlation rules that, when triggered, will cause notification sending.

      The window displays a tree structure representing the correlation rules from the shared tenant and the user-selected tenant. To select a rule, select the check box next to it. You can select the check box next to a folder to select all correlation rules in that folder and its subfolders.

    • Template (required)—in this settings block, you must select an email template that will be used to create the notifications. To select a template, click the parent-category icon, select the required template in the opened window, and click Save.

      You can create a template by clicking the plus icon or edit the selected template by clicking the pencil icon.

    • Disabled—by selecting this check box, you can disable the notification rule.
  4. Click Save.

The notification rule is created. When an alert is created based on the selected correlation rules, notifications created based on custom email templates will be sent to the specified email addresses. Standard KUMA notifications about the same event will not be sent to the specified addresses.

To disable notification rules for a tenant:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, open SettingsAlertsNotification rules and select the tenant whose notification rules you want to disable.
  2. Select the Disabled check box.
  3. Click Save.

The notification rules of the selected tenant are disabled.

For disabled notification rules, the correctness of the specified parameters is not checked; at the same time, notifications cannot be enabled for a tenant if incorrect rules exist. If you create or edit individual notification rules with tenant notification rules disabled, before enabling tenant notification rules, it is recommended to: 1) disable all individual notification rules, 2) enable tenant notification rules, 3) enable individual notification rules one by one.

Page top

[Topic 220213]

Working with incidents

In the Incidents section of the KUMA web interface, you can create, view and process incidents. You can also filter incidents if needed. Clicking the name of an incident opens a window containing information about the incident.

Incidents can be exported to RuCERT.

The retention period for incidents is one year, but this setting can be changed.

The date format of the incident depends on the localization language selected in the application settings. Possible date format options:

  • English localization: YYYY-MM-DD.
  • Russian localization: DD.MM.YYYY.

In this Help topic

About the incidents table

Saving and selecting incident filter configuration

Deleting incident filter configurations

Viewing information about an incident

Incident creation

Incident processing

Changing incidents

Automatic linking of alerts to incidents

Categories and types of incidents

Interaction with RuCERT

See also:

About incidents

Page top

[Topic 220214]

About the incidents table

The main part of the Incidents section shows a table containing information about registered incidents. If required, you can change the set of columns and the order in which they are displayed in the table.

How to customize the incidents table

  1. Click the gear icon in the top right corner of the incidents table.

    The table customization window opens.

  2. Select the check boxes opposite the settings that you want to view in the table.

    When you select a check box, the events table is updated and a new column is added. When a check box is cleared, the column disappears.

    You can search for table parameters using the Search field.

    By pressing the Default button, the following columns are selected for display:

    • Name.
    • Threat duration.
    • Assigned.
    • Created.
    • Tenant.
    • Status.
    • Hits count.
    • Priority.
    • Affected asset categories.
  3. Change the display order of the columns as needed by dragging the column headings.
  4. If you want to sort the incidents by a specific column, click its title and select one of the available options in the drop-down list: Ascending or Descending.
  5. To filter incidents by a specific parameter, click on the column header and select the required filters from the drop-down list. The set of filters available in the drop-down list depends on the selected column.
  6. To remove filters, click the relevant column heading and select Clear filter.

Available columns of the incidents table:

  • Name—the name of the incident.
  • Threat duration—the time span during which the incident occurred (the time between the first and the last event related to the incident).
  • Assigned to—the name of the security officer to whom the incident was assigned for investigation or response.
  • Created—the date and time when the incident was created. This column allows you to filter incidents by the time they were created.
    • The following preset periods are available: Today, Yesterday, This week, Previous week.
    • If required, you can set an arbitrary period by using the calendar that opens when you select Before date, After date, or In period.
  • Tenant—the name of the tenant that owns the incident.
  • Status—current status of the incident:
    • Opened—new incident that has not been processed yet.
    • Assigned—the incident has been processed and assigned to a security officer for investigation or response.
    • Closed—the incident is closed; the security threat has been resolved.
  • Alerts number—the number of alerts included in the incident. Only the alerts of those tenants to which you have access are taken into account.
  • Priority shows how important a possible security threat is: Critical priority-critical, High priority-high, Medium priority-medium, Low priority-low.
  • Affected asset categories—categories of alert-related assets with the highest severity. No more than three categories are displayed.
  • Updated—the date and time of the last change made in the incident.
  • First event and Last event—dates and times of the first and last events in the incident.
  • Incident category and Incident typecategory and type of threat assigned to the incident.
  • Export to RuCERT—the status of incident data export to RuCERT:
    • Not exported—the data was not forwarded to RuCERT.
    • Export failed—an attempt to forward data to RuCERT ended with an error, and the data was not transmitted.
    • Exported—data on the incident has been successfully transmitted to RuCERT.
  • Branch—data on the specific node where the incident was created. Incidents of your node are displayed by default. This column is displayed only when hierarchy mode is enabled.
  • CII—an indication of whether the incident involves assets that are CII objects. The column is hidden from the users who do not have access to CII objects.

In the Search field, you can enter a regular expression for searching incidents based on their related assets, users, tenants, and correlation rules. Parameters that can be used for a search:

  • Assets: name, FQDN, IP address.
  • Active Directory accounts: attributes displayName, SAMAccountName, and UserPrincipalName.
  • Correlation rules: name.
  • KUMA users who were assigned alerts: name, login, email address.
  • Tenants: name.

When filtering incidents based on a specific parameter, the corresponding column in the incidents table is highlighted in yellow.

Page top

[Topic 220215]

Saving and selecting incident filter configuration

In KUMA, you can save changes to incident table settings as filters. Filter configurations are saved on the KUMA Core server and are available to all KUMA users of the tenant for which they were created.

To save the current filter configuration settings:

  1. In the Incidents section of KUMA, open the Select filter drop-down list.
  2. Select Save current filter.

    A window will open for entering the name of the new filter and selecting the tenant that will own the filter.

  3. Enter a name for the filter configuration. The name must be unique for alert filters, incident filters, and event filters.
  4. In the Tenant drop-down list, select the tenant that will own the filter and click Save.

The filter configuration is now saved.

To select a previously saved filter configuration:

  1. In the Incidents section of KUMA, open the Select filter drop-down list.
  2. Select the configuration you want.

The filter configuration is now active.

You can select the default filter by putting an asterisk to the left of the required filter configuration name in the Filters drop-down list.

To reset the current filter settings,

open the Filters drop-down and select Clear filter.

Page top

[Topic 220216]

Deleting incident filter configurations

To delete a previously saved filter configuration:

  1. In the Incidents section of KUMA, open the Filters drop-down list.
  2. Click the delete-icon button next to the configuration you want to delete.
  3. Click OK.

The filter configuration is now deleted for all KUMA users.

Page top

[Topic 220362]

Viewing information about an incident

To view information about an incident:

  1. In the program web interface window, select the Incidents section.
  2. Select the incident whose information you want to view.

This opens a window containing information about the incident.

Some incident parameters are editable.

In the upper part of the Incident details window, there is a toolbar and the name of the user to whom the incident is assigned. The window sections are displayed as tabs. You can click a tab to move to the relevant section. In this window, you can process the incident: assign it to a user, combine it with another incident, or close it.

The Description section contains the following data:

  • Created—the date and time when the incident was created.
  • Name—the name of the incident.

    You can change the name of an incident by entering a new name in the field and clicking Save The name must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.

  • Tenant—the name of the tenant that owns the incident.

    The tenant can be changed by selecting the required tenant from the drop-down list and clicking Save

  • Status—current status of the incident:
    • Opened—new incident that has not been processed yet.
    • Assigned—the incident has been processed and assigned to a security officer for investigation or response.
    • Closed—the incident is closed; the security threat has been resolved.
  • Priority—the severity of the threat posed by the incident. Possible values:
    • Critical
    • High
    • Medium
    • Low

    Priority can be changed by selecting the required value from the drop-down list and clicking Save.

  • Affected asset categories—the assigned categories of assets associated with the incident.
  • First event time and Last event time—dates and times of the first and last events in the incident.
  • Type and Category—type and category of the threat assigned to the incident. You can change these values by selecting the relevant value from the drop-down list and clicking Save.
  • Export to RuCERT—information on whether or not this incident was exported to RuCERT.
  • Description—description of the incident.

    To change the description, edit the text in the field and click Save. The description can contain no more than 256 Unicode characters.

  • Related tenants—tenants associated with incident-related alerts, assets, and users.
  • Available tenants—tenants whose alerts can be linked to the incident automatically.

    The list of available tenants can be changed by checking the boxes next to the required tenants in the drop-down list and clicking Save.

The Related alerts section contains a table of alerts related to the incident. When you click on the alert name, a window opens with detailed information about this alert.

The Related endpoints and Related users sections contain tables with data on assets and users related to the incident. This information comes from alerts that are related to the incident.

You can add data to the tables in the Related alerts, Related endpoints and Related users sections by clicking the Link button in the appropriate section and selecting the object to be linked to the incident in the opened window. If required, you can unlink objects from the incident. To do this, select the objects as required, click Unlink in the section to which they belong, and save the changes. If objects were automatically added to the incident, they cannot be unlinked until the alert mentioning those objects is unlinked. The composition of the fields in the tables can be changed by clicking the gear button in the relevant section. You can search the data in the tables of these sections using the Search fields.

The Change log section contains a record of the changes you and your users made to the incident. Changes are automatically logged, but it is also possible to add comments manually.

In the RuCERT integration section, you can monitor the incident status in RuCERT. In this section, you can also export incident data to RuCERT, send files to RuCERT, and exchange messages with RuCERT experts.

If incident settings have been modified on the RuCERT side, a corresponding notification is displayed in the incident window in KUMA. In this case, for the settings whose values were modified, the window displays the values from KUMA and the values from RuCERT.

Page top

[Topic 220361]

Incident creation

To create an incident:

  1. Open the KUMA web interface and select the Incidents section.
  2. Click Create incident.

    The window for creating an incident will open.

  3. Fill in the mandatory parameters of the incident:
    • In the Name field enter the name of the incident. The name must contain 1 to 128 Unicode characters.
    • In the Tenant drop-down list, select the tenant that owns the created incident.
  4. If necessary, provide other parameters for the incident:
    • In the Priority drop-down list, select the severity of the incident. Available options: Low, Medium, High, Critical.
    • In the First event time and Last event time fields, specify the time range in which events related to the incident were received.
    • In the Category and Type drop-down lists, select the category and type of the incident. The available incident types depend on the selected category.
    • Add the incident Description. The description can contain no more than 256 Unicode characters.
    • In the Available tenants drop-down list, select the tenants whose alerts can be linked to the incident automatically.
    • In the Related alerts section, add alerts related to the incident.

      Linking alerts to incidents

      To link an alert to an incident:

      1. In the Related alerts section of the incident window click Link.

        A window with a list of alerts not linked to incidents will open.

      2. Select the required alerts.

        PCRE regular expressions can be used to search alerts by user, asset, tenant, and correlation rule.

      3. Click Link.

      Alerts are now related to the incident and displayed in the Related alerts section.

      To unlink alerts from an incident:

      1. Select the relevant alerts in the Related alerts section and click Unlink.
      2. Click Save.

      Alerts have been unlinked from the incident. Also, the alert can be unlinked from the incident in the alert window using the Unlink button.

    • In the Related endpoints section, add assets related to the incident.

      Linking assets to incidents

      To link an asset to an incident:

      1. In the Related endpoints section of the incident window, click Link.

        A window containing a list of assets will open.

      2. Select the relevant assets.

        You can use the Search field to look for assets.

      3. Click Link.

      Assets are now linked to the incident and are displayed in the Related endpoints section.

      To unlink assets from an incident:

      1. Select the relevant assets in the Related endpoints section and click Unlink.
      2. Click Save.

      The assets are now unlinked from the incident.

    • In the Related users section, add users related to the incident.

      Linking users to incidents

      To link a user to an incident:

      1. In the Related users section of the incident window, click Link.

        The user list window opens.

      2. Select the required users.

        You can use the Search field to look for users.

      3. Click Link.

      Users are now linked to the incident and appear in the Related users section.

      To unlink users from the incident:

      1. Select the required users in the Related users section and click the Unlink button.
      2. Click Save.

      Users are unlinked from the incident.

    • Add a Comment to the incident.
  5. Click Save.

The incident has been created.

Page top

[Topic 220419]

Incident processing

You can assign an incident to a user, aggregate it with other incidents, or close it.

To process an incident:

  1. Select required incidents using one of the methods below:
    • In the Incidents section of the KUMA web interface, click on the incident to be processed.

      The incident window will open, displaying a toolbar on the top.

    • In the Incidents section of the KUMA web console, select the check box next to the required incidents.

      A toolbar will appear at the bottom of the window.

  2. In the Assign to drop-down list, select the user to whom you want to assign the incident.

    You can assign the incident to yourself by selecting Me.

    The status of the incident changes to assigned and the name of the selected user is displayed in the Assign to drop-down list.

  3. In the Related users section, select a user and configure Active Directory response settings.
    1. After the related user is selected, in the Account details window that opens, click Response via Active Directory.
    2. In the AD command drop-down list, select one of the following values:
      • Add account to group

        The Active Directory group to move the account from or to.
        In the mandatory field Distinguished name, you must specify the full path to the group.
        For example, CN = HQ Team, OU = Groups, OU = ExchangeObjects, DC = avp, DC = ru.
        Only one group can be specified within one operation.

      • Remove account from group

        The Active Directory group to move the account from or to.
        In the mandatory field Distinguished name, you must specify the full path to the group.
        For example, CN = HQ Team, OU = Groups, OU = ExchangeObjects, DC = avp, DC = ru.
        Only one group can be specified within one operation.

      • Reset account password
      • Block account
    3. Click Apply.
  4. If required, edit the incident parameters.
  5. After investigating, close the incident:
    1. Click Close.

      A confirmation window opens.

    2. Select the reason for closing the incident:
      • Approved. This means the appropriate measures were taken to eliminate the security threat.
      • Not approved. This means the incident was a false positive and the received events do not indicate a security threat.
    3. Click Close.

    The Closed status will be assigned to the incident. Incidents with this status cannot be edited, and they are displayed in the incidents table only if you selected the Closed check box in the Status drop-down list when filtering the table. You cannot change the status of a closed incident or assign it to another user, but you can aggregate it with another incident.

  6. If requited, aggregate the selected incidents with another incident:
    1. Click Merge. In the opened window, select the incident in which all data from the selected incidents should be placed.
    2. Confirm your selection by clicking Merge.

    The incidents will be aggregated.

The incident has been processed.

Page top

[Topic 220444]

Changing incidents

To change the parameters of an incident:

  1. In the Incidents section of the KUMA web interface, click on the incident you want to modify.

    The Incident window opens.

  2. Make the necessary changes to the parameters. All incident parameters that can be set when creating it are available for editing.
  3. Click Save.

The incident will be modified.

Page top

[Topic 220446]

Automatic linking of alerts to incidents

In KUMA, you can configure automatic linking of generated alerts to existing incidents if alerts and incidents have related assets or users in common. If this setting is enabled, when creating an alert the program searches for incidents falling into a specified time interval that includes assets or users from the alert. In addition, the program checks whether the generated alert pertains to the tenants specified in the incidents' Available tenants parameter. If a matching incident is found, the program links the generated alert to the incident it found.

To set up automatic linking of alerts to incidents:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, open SettingsIncidentsAutomatic linking of alerts to incidents.
  2. Select the Enable check box in the Link by assets and/or Link by accounts parameter blocks depending on the types of connections between incidents and alerts that you are looking for.
  3. Define the Incidents must not be older than value for the parameters that you want to use when searching links. The generated alerts will be compared with incidents no older than the specified interval.

Automatic linking of alerts to incidents is configured.

To disable automatic linking of alerts to incidents,

In the KUMA web interface, under SettingsIncidentsAutomatic linking of alerts to incidents, select the Disabled check box.

Page top

[Topic 220450]

Categories and types of incidents

For your convenience, you can assign categories and types. If an incident has been assigned a RuCERT category, it can be exported to RuCERT.

Categories and types of incidents that can be exported to RuCERT

The table below lists the categories and types of incidents that can be exported to RuCERT:

Incident category

Incident type

Computer incident notification

Involvement of a controlled resource in malicious software infrastructure

Slowed operation of the resource due to a DDoS attack

Malware infection

Network traffic interception

Use of a controlled resource for phishing

Compromised user account

Unauthorized data modification

Unauthorized disclosure of information

Publication of illegal information on the resource

Distribution of spam messages from the controlled resource

Successful exploitation of a vulnerability

Notification about a computer attack

DDoS attack

Unsuccessful authorization attempts

Malware injection attempts

Attempts to exploit a vulnerability

Publication of fraudulent information

Network scanning

Social engineering

Notification about a detected vulnerability

Vulnerable resource

The categories of incidents can be viewed or changed under SettingsIncidentsIncident types, in which they are displayed as a table. By clicking on the column headers, you can change the table sorting options. The resource table contains the following columns:

  • Category—a common characteristic of an incident or cyberattack. The table can be filtered by the values in this column.
  • Type—the class of the incident or cyberattack.
  • RuCERT category—incident type according to RuCERT nomenclature. Incidents that have been assigned custom types and categories cannot be exported to RuCERT. The table can be filtered by the values in this column.
  • Vulnerability—specifies whether the incident type indicates a vulnerability.
  • Created—the date the incident type was created.
  • Updated—the date the incident type was modified.

To add an incident type:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, under SettingsIncidentsIncident types, click Add.

    The incident type creation window will open.

  2. Fill in the Type and Category fields.
  3. If the created incident type matches the RuCERT nomenclature, select the RuCERT category check box.
  4. If the incident type indicates a vulnerability, check Vulnerability.
  5. Click Save.

The incident type has been created.

Page top

[Topic 221855]

Interaction with RuCERT

In KUMA, you can interact with the National Computer Incident Response & Coordination Center (hereinafter RuCERT) in the following ways:

Data in KUMA and RuCERT is synchronized every 5-10 minutes.

Conditions for RuCERT interaction

To interact with RuCERT, the following conditions must be met:

RuCERT interaction workflow

In KUMA, the process of sending incidents to RuCERT to be processed consists of the following stages:

  1. Creating an incident and checking it for compliance with RuCERT requirements

    You can create an incident or get it from a child KUMA node. Before sending data to the RuCERT, make sure that the incident category meets RuCERT requirements.

  2. Exporting the incident to RuCERT

    If the incident is successfully exported to RuCERT, its Export to RuCERT setting is set to Exported. In the lower part of the incident window, a chat with RuCERT experts becomes available.

    At RuCERT, the incident received from you is assigned a registration number and status. This information is displayed in the incident window in the RuCERT integration section and in automatic chat messages.

    If all the necessary data is provided to RuCERT, the incident is assigned the Under examination status. The settings of the incident having this status can be edited, but the updated information cannot be sent from KUMA to RuCERT. You can view the difference between the incident data in KUMA and in RuCERT.

  3. Supplementing incident data

    If RuCERT experts do not have enough information to process an incident, they can assign it the More information required status. In KUMA, this status is displayed in the incident window in the RuCERT integration section. Users are notified about the status change.

    You can attach a file to the incidents with this status.

    When the data is supplemented, the incident is re-exported to RuCERT with earlier information updated. The incidents in the child nodes cannot be modified from the parent KUMA node. It must be done by employees of the child KUMA nodes.

    If the incident is successfully supplemented with data, it is assigned the Under examination status.

  4. Completing incident processing

    After the RuCERT experts process the incident, the RuCERT status is changed to Decision made. In KUMA, this status is displayed in the incident window in the RuCERT integration section.

    Upon receiving this status, the incident is automatically closed in KUMA. Interaction with RuCERT on this incident by means of KUMA becomes impossible.

In this section

Special consideration for successful export from the KUMA hierarchical structure to RuCERT

Exporting data to RuCERT

Supplementing incident data on request

Sending files to RuCERT

Sending incidents involving personal information leaks to RuCERT

Communication with RuCERT experts

Supported categories and types of RuCERT incidents

Notifications about the incident status change in RuCERT

Page top

[Topic 243256]

Special consideration for successful export from the KUMA hierarchical structure to RuCERT

If multiple KUMA nodes combined into a hierarchical structure are deployed in your organization, you can forward incidents, which are received from the child KUMA nodes, from the KUMA parent nodes to RuCERT. For this purpose, the following conditions must be met:

  • Integration with RuCERT is configured in the parent and child KUMA nodes. The URL and Token settings in the SettingsRuCERT section are required for the parent node but are not required for the child node.
  • RuCERT integration is enabled in both nodes.

In this case, interaction with RuCERT is performed only at the level of the node exporting the incident to RuCERT.

Settings of the incident received from a child KUMA node cannot be changed from a parent KUMA node. If there is not enough data for performing RuCERT export, the incident must be changed at the child KUMA node, and then exported to RuCERT from the parent KUMA node.

Page top

[Topic 243253]

Exporting data to RuCERT

It is impossible to export incidents that are closed in KUMA to RuCERT if the Description field was not filled in at the time of closing.

To export an incident to RuCERT:

  1. In the Incidents section of the KUMA web interface, open the incident you want to export.
  2. Click the Export to RuCERT button in the lower part of the window.
  3. If you have not specified the category and type of incident, specify this information in the window that opens and click the Export to RuCERT button.

    This opens the export settings window.

  4. Specify the settings on the Basic tab of the Export to RuCERT window:
    • Category and Type—specify the type and category of the incident. Only incidents of specific categories and types can be exported to RuCERT.
    • TLP (required)—assign a Traffic Light Protocol marker to an incident to define the nature of information about the incident. The default value is RED. Available values:
      • WHITE—disclosure is not restricted.
      • GREEN—disclosure is only for the community.
      • AMBER—disclosure is only for organizations.
      • RED—disclosure is only for a specific group of people.
    • Affected system name (required)—specify the name of the information resource where the incident occurred. You can enter up to 500,000 characters in the field.
    • Affected system category (required)—specify the critical information infrastructure (CII) category of your organization. If your organization does not have a CII category, select Information resource is not a CII object.
    • Affected system function (required)—specify the scope of activity of your organization. The value specified in RuCERT integration settings is used by default.
    • Location (required)—select the location of your organization from the drop-down list.
    • Affected system has Internet connection—select this check box if the assets related to this incident have an Internet connection. By default, this check box is cleared.

      If this check box is selected, the Technical details tab is available. This tab displays information about the assets related to the incident. See below for more details.

    • Product info (required)—this table becomes available if you selected Notification about a detected vulnerability as the incident category.

      You can use the Add new element button to add a string to the table. In the Name column, you must indicate the name of the application (for example, MS Office). Specify the application version in the Version column (for example, 2.4).

    • Vulnerability ID—if necessary, specify the identifier of the detected vulnerability. For example, CVE-2020-1231.

      This field becomes available if you selected Notification about a detected vulnerability as the incident category.

    • Product category—if necessary, specify the name and version of the vulnerable product. For example, Microsoft operating systems and their components.

      This field becomes available if you selected Notification about a detected vulnerability as the incident category.

  5. If required, define the settings on the Advanced tab of the Export to RuCERT window.

    The available settings on the tab depend on the selected category and type of incident:

    • Detection tool—specify the name of the product that was used to register the incident. For example, KUMA 1.5.
    • Assistance required—select this check box if you need help from GosSOPKA employees.
    • Incident end time—specify the date and time when the critical information infrastructure (CII object) was restored to normal operation after a computer incident, computer attack was ended, or a vulnerability was fixed.
    • Availability impact—assess the degree of impact that the incident had on system availability:
      • High
      • Low
      • None
    • Integrity impact—assess the degree of impact that the incident had on system integrity:
      • High
      • Low
      • None
    • Confidentiality impact—assess the degree of impact that the incident had on data confidentiality:
      • High
      • Low
      • None
    • Custom impact—specify other significant impacts from the incident.
    • City—indicate the city where your organization is located.
  6. If assets are attached to the incident, you can specify their settings on the Technical details tab.

    This tab is active only if you select the Affected system has Internet connection check box.

    You should change or supplement the information previously specified on the Technical details tab in your personal GosSOPKA dashboard, even if the RuCERT experts request from you additional information, and you can change the exported incident.

    The categories of the listed assets must match the category of the affected CII in your system.

  7. Click Export.
  8. Confirm the export.

Information about the incident is submitted to RuCERT, and the Export to RuCERT incident setting is changed to Exported. At RuCERT, the incident received from you is assigned a registration number and status. This information is displayed in the incident window in the RuCERT integration section.

It is possible to change the data in the exported incident only if the RuCERT experts requested additional information from you. If no additional information was requested, but you need to update the exported incident, you should do it in your GosSOPKA dashboard.

After the incident is successfully exported, the Compare KUMA incident to RuCERT data button is displayed at the bottom of the screen. When you click this button, a window opens, where the differences in the incident data between KUMA and RuCERT are highlighted.

Page top

[Topic 243327]

Supplementing incident data on request

If RuCERT experts need additional information about the incident, they may request it from you. In this case, the incident status changes to More information required in the RuCERT integration section of the incident window. The following KUMA users receive email notifications about the status change: the user to whom the incident is assigned and the user who exported the incident to RuCERT.

If an incident is assigned the "More information required" status in RuCERT, the following actions are available for this incident in KUMA:

Page top

[Topic 243368]

Sending files to RuCERT

If an incident is assigned the More information required status in RuCERT, you can attach a file to it. The file will be available both in RuCERT and in the KUMA web interface.

For a hierarchical deployment of KUMA, files can only be uploaded to RuCERT from the parent KUMA node. At the same time, log entries about the file download are visible in the child nodes of KUMA.

In the incident change log, messages about the files uploaded to RuCERT by KUMA users are added. Messages about adding files by RuCERT are not added to the log.

To attach a file to an incident:

  1. In the Incidents section of the KUMA web interface, open the incident you want to attach a file to. The incident must have the More information required status in RuCERT.
  2. In the RuCERT integration section of the incident window, select the File tab and click the Send file to RuCERT button.

    The file selection window opens.

  3. Select the required file no larger than 50 MB and confirm your selection.

The file is attached to the incident and available for both RuCERT experts and KUMA users.

Data in KUMA and RuCERT is synchronized every 5-10 minutes.

Page top

[Topic 260687]

Sending incidents involving personal information leaks to RuCERT

KUMA 2.1.x does not have a separate section with incident parameters for submitting information about personal information leaks to RuCERT. Since such incidents do occur and a need exists to submit information to RuCERT, use the following solution.

To submit incidents involving personal information leaks:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, in the Incidents section, when creating an incident involving a personal information leak, in the Category field, select Notification about a computer incident.
  2. In the Type field, select one of the options that involves submission of information about personal information leak:
    • Malware infection
    • Compromised user account
    • Unauthorized disclosure of information
    • Successful exploitation of a vulnerability
    • Event is not related to a computer attack
  3. In the Description field, enter "The incident involves a leak of personal information. Please set the status to "More information required"".
  4. Click Save.
  5. Export the incident to RuCERT.

After RuCERT employees set the status to "More information required" and return the incident for further editing, in your RuCERT account, you can provide additional information about the incident in the "Details of the personal information leak" section.

Page top

[Topic 243399]

Communication with RuCERT experts

After the incident is successfully exported to RuCERT, a chat with RuCERT experts becomes available at the bottom of the screen. You can exchange messages since successful incident export to RuCERT until it is closed in RuCERT.

The chat window with the message history and the field for entering new messages is available on the Chat tab in the RuCERT integration section of the incident window.

Data in KUMA and RuCERT is synchronized every 5-10 minutes.

See also:

Notifications about the incident status change in RuCERT

Page top

[Topic 220462]

Supported categories and types of RuCERT incidents

The table below lists the categories and types of incidents that can be exported to RuCERT:

Incident category

Incident type

Computer incident notification

Involvement of a controlled resource in malicious software infrastructure

Slowed operation of the resource due to a DDoS attack

Malware infection

Network traffic interception

Use of a controlled resource for phishing

Compromised user account

Unauthorized data modification

Unauthorized disclosure of information

Publication of illegal information on the resource

Distribution of spam messages from the controlled resource

Successful exploitation of a vulnerability

Notification about a computer attack

DDoS attack

Unsuccessful authorization attempts

Malware injection attempts

Attempts to exploit a vulnerability

Publication of fraudulent information

Network scanning

Social engineering

Notification about a detected vulnerability

Vulnerable resource

Page top

[Topic 245705]

Notifications about the incident status change in RuCERT

In the event of certain changes in the status or data of an incident at RuCERT, KUMA users receive the following notifications by email:

The following users receive notifications:

  • The user to whom the incident was assigned.
  • The user who exported the incident to RuCERT.
Page top

[Topic 217979]

Retroscan

In normal mode, the correlator handles only events coming from collectors in real time. Retroscan lets you apply correlation rules to historical events if you want to debug correlation rules or analyze historical data.

To test a rule, you do not need to replay the incident in real time, instead you can run the rule in Retroscan mode to process historical events which include the incident of interest.

You can use a search query to define a list of historical events to retrospectively scan, you can also specify a search period and the storage that you want to search for events. You can configure a task to have alerts generated and response rules applied during the retroscan of events.

Retroscanned events are not enriched with data from CyberTrace or the Kaspersky Threat Intelligence Portal.

Active lists are updated during retroscanning.

A retroscan cannot be performed on selections of events obtained using SQL queries that group data and contain arithmetic expressions.

To use Retroscan:

  1. In the Events section of the KUMA web interface, create the required event selection:
    • Select the storage.
    • Configure search expression using the constructor or search query.
    • Select the required period.
  2. Open the MoreButton drop-down list and choose Retroscan.

    The Retroscan window opens.

  3. In the Correlator drop-down list, select the Correlator to feed selected events to.
  4. In the Correlation rules drop-down list, select the Correlation rules that must be used when processing events.
  5. If you want responses to be executed when processing events, turn on the Execute responses toggle switch.
  6. If you want alerts to be generated during event processing, turn on the Create alerts toggle switch.
  7. Click the Create task button.

The retroscan task is created in the Task manager section.

To view scan results, in the Task manager section of the KUMA web interface, click the task you created and select Go to Events from the drop-down list.

This opens a new browser tab containing a table of events that were processed during the retroscan and the aggregation and correlation events that were created during event processing. Correlation events generated by the retroscan have an additional ReplayID field that stores the unique ID of the retrospective scan run. An analyst can restart the retroscan from the context menu of the task. New correlation events will have a different ReplayID.

Depending on your browser settings, you may be prompted for confirmation before your browser can open the new tab containing the retroscan results. For more details, please refer to the documentation for your specific browser.

Page top

[Topic 217777]

Contacting Technical Support

If you are unable to find a solution to your issue in the program documentation, please contact Kaspersky Technical Support.

Kaspersky provides technical support for this program throughout its lifecycle (please refer to the product support lifecycle page).

Page top

[Topic 217973]

REST API

You can access KUMA from third-party solutions using the API. The KUMA REST API operates over HTTP and consists of a set of request/response methods.

REST API requests must be sent to the following address:

https://<KUMA Core FQDN>/api/<API version>/<request>

Example:

https://kuma.example.com:7223/api/v1

By default the 7223 port is used for API requests. You can change the port.

To change port used for REST API requests:

  1. Log in to the OS of the server where the KUMA Core is installed.
  2. In the file /etc/systemd/system/multi-user.target.wants/kuma-core.service change the following string, adding required port:

    ExecStart=/opt/kaspersky/kuma/kuma core --external :7220 --internal :7210 --mongo mongodb://localhost:27017 --rest <required port number for REST API requests>

  3. Restart KUMA by running the following commands in sequence:
    1. systemctl daemon-reload
    2. systemctl restart kuma-core

New port is used for REST API.

Make sure that the port is available and is not closed by the firewall.

Authentication header: Authorization: Bearer <token>

Default data format: JSON

Date and time format: RFC 3339

Intensity of requests: unlimited

In this Help topic

Creating a token

Configuring permissions to access the API

Authorizing API requests

Standard error

Operations

Page top

[Topic 235379]

Creating a token

To generate a token for a user:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, open SettingsUsers.

    In the right part of the Settings section the Users table will be displayed.

  2. Select the relevant user and click the Generate token button in the details area that opens on the right.

    The New token window opens.

  3. If necessary, set the token expiration date:
    • Select the No expiration date check box.
    • In the Expiration date field, use the calendar to specify the date and time when the created token will expire.
  4. Click the Generate token button.

    When you click this button, the user details area displays a field containing the automatically created token. When the window is closed, the token is no longer displayed. If you did not copy the token before closing the window, you will have to generate a new token.

  5. Click Save.

The token is generated and can be used for API requests. These same steps can be taken to generate a token in your account profile.

Page top

[Topic 235388]

Configuring permissions to access the API

In KUMA, you can configure the specific operations that can be performed on behalf of each user. Permissions can be configured only for users created in KUMA.

To configure available operations for a user:

  1. In the KUMA web interface, open SettingsUsers.

    In the right part of the Settings section the Users table will be displayed.

  2. Select the relevant user and click the API access rights button in the details area that opens on the right.

    This opens a window containing a list of available operations. By default, all API requests are available to a user.

  3. Select or clear the check box next to the relevant operation.
  4. Click Save.

Available operations for the user are configured.

The available operations can be configured in the same way in your account profile.

Page top

[Topic 217974]

Authorizing API requests

Each REST API request must include token-based authorization. The user whose token is used to make the API request must have the permissions to perform this type of request.

Each request must be accompanied by the following header:

Authorization: Bearer <token>

Possible errors:

HTTP code

Description

message field value

details field value

400

Invalid header

invalid authorization header

Example: <example>

403

The token does not exist or the owner user is disabled

access denied

 

Page top

[Topic 222250]

Standard error

Errors returned by KUMA have the following format:

type Error struct {

    Message    string      `json:"message"`

    Details    interface{} `json:"details"`

}

Page top

[Topic 222252]

Viewing a list of active lists on the correlator

GET /api/v1/activeLists

The target correlator must be running.

Access: administrator and analyst.

Query parameters

Name

Data type

Mandatory

Description

Value example

correlatorID

string

Yes

Correlator service ID

00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000

Response

HTTP code: 200

Format: JSON

type Response []ActiveListInfo

 

type ActiveListInfo struct {

    ID      string `json:"id"`

    Name    string `json:"name"`

    Dir     string `json:"dir"`

    Records uint64 `json:"records"`

    WALSize uint64 `json:"walSize"`

}

Possible errors

HTTP code

Description

message field value

details field value

400

Correlator service ID is not specified

query parameter required

correlatorID

403

The user does not have the required role in the correlator tenant

access denied

 

404

The service with the specified identifier (correlatorID) was not found

service not found

 

406

The service with the specified ID (correlatorID) is not a correlator

service is not correlator

 

406

The correlator did not execute the first start

service not paired

 

406

The correlator tenant is disabled

tenant disabled

 

50x

Failed to access the correlator API

correlator API request failed

variable

500

Failed to decode the response body received from the correlator

correlator response decode failed

variable

500

Any other internal errors

variable

variable

Page top

[Topic 222253]

Import entries to an active list

POST /api/v1/activeLists/import

The target correlator must be running.

Access: administrator and analyst.

Query parameters

Name

Data type

Mandatory

Description

Value example

correlatorID

string

Yes

Correlator service ID

00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000

activeListID

string

If activeListName is not specified

Active list ID

00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000

activeListName

string

If activeListID is not specified

Active list name

Attackers

format

string

Yes

Format of imported entries

csv, tsv, internal

keyField

string

For the CSV and TSV formats only

The name of the field in the header of the CSV or TSV file that will be used as the key field of the active list record. The values of this field must be unique

ip

clear

bool

No

Clear the active list before importing. If the parameter is present in the URL query, then its value is assumed to be true. The values specified by the user are ignored. Example: /api/v1/activeLists/import?clear

 

Request body

Format

Contents

csv

The first line is the header, which lists the comma-separated fields. The rest of the lines are the values corresponding to the comma-separated fields in the header. The number of fields in each line must be the same.

tsv

The first line is the header, which lists the TAB-separated fields. The remaining lines are the values corresponding to the TAB-separated fields in the header. The number of fields in each line must be the same.

internal

Each line contains one individual JSON object. Data in the internal format can be received by exporting the contents of the active list from the correlator in the KUMA web console.

Response

HTTP code: 204

Possible errors

HTTP code

Description

message field value

details field value

400

Correlator service ID is not specified

query parameter required

correlatorID

400

Neither the activeListID parameter nor the activeListName parameter is specified

one of query parameters required

activeListID, activeListName

400

The format parameter is not specified

query parameter required

format

400

The format parameter is invalid

invalid query parameter value

format

400

The keyField parameter is not specified

query parameter required

keyField

400

The request body has a zero-length

request body required

 

400

The CSV or TSV file does not contain the field specified in the keyField parameter

correlator API request failed

line 1: header does not contain column <name>

400

Request body parsing error

correlator API request failed

line <number>: <message>

403

The user does not have the required role in the correlator tenant

access denied

 

404

The service with the specified identifier (correlatorID) was not found

service not found

 

404

No active list was found

active list not found

 

406

The service with the specified ID (correlatorID) is not a correlator

service is not correlator

 

406

The correlator did not execute the first start

service not paired

 

406

The correlator tenant is disabled

tenant disabled

 

406

A name search was conducted for the active list (activeListName), and more than one active list was found

more than one matching active lists found

 

50x

Failed to access the correlator API

correlator API request failed

variable

500

Failed to decode the response body received from the correlator

correlator response decode failed

variable

500

Any other internal errors

variable

variable

Page top

[Topic 222254]

Searching alerts

GET /api/v1/alerts

Access: administrator, analyst, and operator.

Query parameters

Name

Data type

Mandatory

Description

Value example

page

number

No

Page number. Starts with 1. The page size is 250 entries. If the parameter is not specified, the default value is 1.

1

id

string

No

Alert ID. If the parameter is specified several times, then a list is generated and the logical OR operator is applied.

00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000

TenantID

string

No

Alert tenant ID. If the parameter is specified several times, then a list is generated and the logical OR operator is applied. If the user does not have the required role in the specified tenant, then this tenant is ignored.

00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000

name

string

No

Alert name. Case-insensitive regular expression (PCRE).

alert
^My alert$

timestampField

string

No

The name of the alert field that is used to perform sorting (DESC) and search by period (from – to). lastSeen by default.

lastSeen, firstSeen

from

string

No

Lower bound of the period in RFC3339 format. <timestampField> >= <from>

2021-09-06T00:00:00Z (UTC)

2021-09-06T00:00:00.000Z (UTC, including milliseconds)

2021-09-06T00:00:00Z+00:00 (MSK)

to

string

No

Upper bound of the period in RFC3339 format. <timestampField> <= <to>

2021-09-06T00:00:00Z (UTC)

2021-09-06T00:00:00.000Z (UTC, including milliseconds)

2021-09-06T00:00:00Z+00:00 (MSK)

status

string

No

Alert status. If the parameter is specified several times, then a list is generated and the logical OR operator is applied.

new, assigned, escalated, closed

withEvents

bool

No

Include normalized KUMA events associated with found alerts in the response. If the parameter is present in the URL query, then its value is assumed to be true. The values specified by the user are ignored. Example: /api/v1/alerts?withEvents

 

withAffected

bool

No

Include information about the assets and accounts associated with the found alerts in the report.  If the parameter is present in the URL query, then its value is assumed to be true. The values specified by the user are ignored. Example: /api/v1/alerts?withAffected

 

Response

HTTP code: 200

Format: JSON

type Response []Alert

 

type Alert struct {

    ID                string            `json:"id"`

    TenantID          string            `json:"tenantID"`

    TenantName        string            `json:"tenantName"`

    Name              string            `json:"name"`

    CorrelationRuleID string            `json:"correlationRuleID"`

    Priority          string            `json:"priority"`

    Status            string            `json:"status"`

    FirstSeen         string            `json:"firstSeen"`

    LastSeen          string            `json:"lastSeen"`

    Assignee          string            `json:"assignee"`

    ClosingReason     string            `json:"closingReason"`

    Overflow          bool              `json:"overflow"`

    Events            []NormalizedEvent `json:"events"`

    AffectedAssets    []AffectedAsset   `json:"affectedAssets"`

    AffectedAccounts  []AffectedAccount `json:"affectedAccounts"`

}

 

type NormalizedEvent map[string]interface{}

 

type AffectedAsset struct {

    ID               string          `json:"id"`

    TenantID         string          `json:"tenantID"`

    TenantName       string          `json:"tenantName"`

    Name             string          `json:"name"`

    FQDN             string          `json:"fqdn"`

    IPAddresses      []string        `json:"ipAddresses"`

    MACAddresses     []string        `json:"macAddresses"`

    Owner            string          `json:"owner"`

    OS               *OS             `json:"os"`

    Software         []Software      `json:"software"`

    Vulnerabilities  []Vulnerability `json:"vulnerabilities"`

    KSC              *KSCFields      `json:"ksc"`

    Created          string          `json:"created"`

    Updated          string          `json:"updated"`

}

 

type OS struct {

    Name    string `json:"name"`

    Version uint64 `json:"version"`

}

 

type Software struct {

    Name    string `json:"name"`

    Version string `json:"version"`

    Vendor  string `json:"vendor"`

}

 

type Vulnerability struct {

    KasperskyID           string   `json:"kasperskyID"`

    ProductName           string   `json:"productName"`

    DescriptionURL        string   `json:"descriptionURL"`

    RecommendedMajorPatch string   `json:"recommendedMajorPatch"`

    RecommendedMinorPatch string   `json:"recommendedMinorPatch"`

    SeverityStr           string   `json:"severityStr"`

    Severity              uint64   `json:"severity"`

    CVE                   []string `json:"cve"`

    ExploitExists         bool     `json:"exploitExists"`

    MalwareExists         bool     `json:"malwareExists"`

}

 

type AffectedAccount struct {

    Name             string `json:"displayName"`

    CN               string `json:"cn"`

    DN               string `json:"dn"`

    UPN              string `json:"upn"`

    SAMAccountName   string `json:"sAMAccountName"`

    Company          string `json:"company"`

    Department       string `json:"department"`

    Created          string `json:"created"`

    Updated          string `json:"updated"`

}

Possible errors

HTTP code

Description

message field value

details field value

400

Invalid value of the "page" parameter

invalid query parameter value

page

400

Invalid value of the "status" parameter

invalid status

<status>

400

Invalid value of the "timestampField" parameter

invalid timestamp field

 

400

Invalid value of the "from" parameter

cannot parse from

variable

400

Invalid value of the "to" parameter

cannot parse to

variable

400

The value of the "from" parameter is greater than the value of the "to" parameter

from cannot be greater than to

 

500

Any other internal errors

variable

variable

Page top

[Topic 222255]

Closing alerts

POST /api/v1/alerts/close

The target correlator must be running.

Access: administrator, analyst, and operator.

Request body

Format: JSON

Name

Data type

Mandatory

Description

Value example

id

string

Yes

Alert ID

00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000

reason

string

Yes

Reason for closing the alert

responded, incorrect data, incorrect correlation rule

Response

HTTP code: 204

Possible errors

HTTP code

Description

message field value

details field value

400

Alert ID is not specified

id required

 

400

The reason for closing the alert is not specified

reason required

 

400

Invalid value of the "reason" parameter

invalid reason

 

403

The user does not have the required role in the alert tenant

access denied

 

404

Alert not found

alert not found

 

406

Alert tenant disabled

tenant disabled

 

406

Alert already closed

alert already closed

 

500

Any other internal errors

variable

variable

Page top

[Topic 222256]

Searching assets

GET /api/v1/assets

Access: administrator, analyst, and operator.

Query parameters

Name

Data type

Mandatory

Description

Value example

page

number

No

Page number. Starts with 1. The page size is 250 entries. If the parameter is not specified, the default value is 1.

1

id

string

No

Asset ID. If the parameter is specified several times, then a list is generated and the logical OR operator is applied.

00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000

TenantID

string

No

Asset tenant ID. If the parameter is specified several times, then a list is generated and the logical OR operator is applied. If the user does not have the required role in the specified tenant, then this tenant is ignored.

00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000

name

string

No

Asset name. Case-insensitive regular expression (PCRE).

asset

^My asset$

fqdn

string

No

Asset FQDN. Case-insensitive regular expression (PCRE).

^com$

example.com

ip

string

No

Asset IP address. Case-insensitive regular expression (PCRE).

10.10

^192.168.1.2$

mac

string

No

Asset MAC address. Case-insensitive regular expression (PCRE).

^00:0a:95:9d:68:16$

Response

HTTP code: 200

Format: JSON

type Response []Asset

 

type Asset struct {

ID string `json:"id"`

TenantID string `json:"tenantID"`

TenantName string `json:"tenantName"`

Name string `json:"name"`

FQDN string `json:"fqdn"`

IPAddresses []string `json:"ipAddresses"`

MACAddresses []string `json:"macAddresses"`

Owner string `json:"owner"`

OS *OS `json:"os"`

Software []Software `json:"software"`

Vulnerabilities []Vulnerability `json:"vulnerabilities"`

KICSRisks []*assets.KICSRisk `json:"kicsVulns"`

KSC *KSCFields `json:"ksc"`

Created string `json:"created"`

Updated string `json:"updated"`

}

 

type KSCFields struct {

NAgentID string `json:"nAgentID"`

KSCInstanceID string `json:"kscInstanceID"`

KSCMasterHostname string `json:"kscMasterHostname"`

LastVisible string `json:"lastVisible"`

}

 

type OS struct {

Name string `json:"name"`

Version uint64 `json:"version"`

}

 

type Software struct {

Name string `json:"name"`

Version string `json:"version"`

Vendor string `json:"vendor"`

}

 

type Vulnerability struct {

KasperskyID string `json:"kasperskyID"`

ProductName string `json:"productName"`

DescriptionUrl string `json:"descriptionUrl"`

RecommendedMajorPatch string `json:"recommendedMajorPatch"`

RecommendedMinorPatch string `json:"recommendedMinorPatch"`

SeverityStr string `json:"severityStr"`

Severity uint64 `json:"severity"`

CVE []string `json:"cve"`

ExploitExists bool `json:"exploitExists"`

MalwareExists bool `json:"malwareExists"`

}

 

type assets.KICSRisk struct {

ID int64 `json:"id"`

Name string `json:"name"`

Category string `json:"category"`

Description string `json:"description"`

DescriptionUrl string `json:"descriptionUrl"`

Severity int `json:"severity"`

Cvss float64 `json:"cvss"`

}

 

type CustomFields struct {

ID string `json:"id"`

Name string `json:"name"`

Value string `json:"value"`

}

Possible errors

HTTP code

Description

message field value

details field value

400

Invalid value of the "page" parameter

invalid query parameter value

page

500

Any other internal errors

variable

variable

Page top

[Topic 222258]

Importing assets

Details on identifying, creating, and updating assets

Assets are imported according to the asset data merging rules.

POST /api/v1/assets/import

Bulk creation or update of assets.

Access: administrator and analyst.

Request body

Format: JSON

type Request struct {

TenantID string `json:"tenantID"`

    Assets []Asset `json:"assets"`

}

 

type Asset struct {

Name string `json:"name"`

FQDN string `json:"fqdn"`

IPAddresses []string `json:"ipAddresses"`

MACAddresses []string `json:"macAddresses"`

Owner string `json:"owner"`

OS *OS `json:"os"`

Software []Software `json:"software"`

Vulnerabilities []Vulnerability `json:"vulnerabilities"`

CustomFields []Software `json:"customFields"`

}

 

type OS struct {

Name string `json:"name"`

Version uint64 `json:"version"`

}

 

type Software struct {

Name string `json:"name"`

Version string `json:"version"`

Vendor string `json:"vendor"`

}

 

type Vulnerability struct {

KasperskyID string `json:"kasperskyID"`

ProductName string `json:"productName"`

DescriptionUrl string `json:"descriptionUrl"`

RecommendedMajorPatch string `json:"recommendedMajorPatch"`

RecommendedMinorPatch string `json:"recommendedMinorPatch"`

SeverityStr string `json:"severityStr"`

Severity uint64 `json:"severity"`

CVE []string `json:"cve"`

ExploitExists bool `json:"exploitExists"`

MalwareExists bool `json:"malwareExists"`

}

 

type CustomFields struct {

ID string `json:"id"`

Name string `json:"name"`

Value string `json:"value"`

}

Request mandatory fields

Name

Data type

Mandatory

Description

Value example

TenantID

string

Yes

Tenant ID

00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000

assets

[]Asset

Yes

Array of imported assets

 

Asset mandatory fields

Name

Data type

Mandatory

Description

Value example

fqdn

string

If the ipAddresses array is not specified

Asset FQDN. It is recommended that you specify the FQDN and not just the host name. Priority indicator for asset identification.

my-asset-1.example.com

my-asset-1

ipAddresses

[]string

If FQDN is not specified

Array of IP addresses for the asset. IPv4 or IPv6. The first element of the array is used as a secondary indicator for asset identification.

["192.168.1.1", "192.168.2.2"]

["2001:0db8:85a3:0000:0000:8a2e:0370:7334"]

Response

HTTP code: 200

Format: JSON

type Response struct {

InsertedIDs map[int64]interface{} `json:"insertedIDs"`

UpdatedCount uint64 `json:"updatedCount"`

Errors []ImportError `json:"errors"`

}

 

type ImportError struct {

Index uint64 `json:"index"`

Message string `json:"message"`

}

Possible errors

HTTP code

Description

message field value

details field value

400

Tenant ID is not specified

tenantID required

 

400

Attempt to import assets into the shared tenant

import into shared tenant not allowed

 

400

Not a single asset was specified in the request body

at least one asset required

 

400

None of the mandatory fields is specified

one of fields required

asset[<index>]: fqdn, ipAddresses

400

Invalid FQDN

invalid value

asset[<index>].fqdn

400

Invalid IP address

invalid value

asset[<index>].ipAddresses[<index>]

400

IP address is repeated

duplicated value

asset[<index>].ipAddresses

400

Invalid MAC address

invalid value

asset[<index>].macAddresses[<index>]

400

MAC address is repeated

duplicated value

asset[<index>].macAddresses

403

The user does not have the required role in the specified tenant

access denied

 

404

The specified tenant was not found

tenant not found

 

406

The specified tenant was disabled

tenant disabled

 

500

Any other internal errors

variable

variable

Page top

[Topic 222296]

Deleting assets

POST /api/v1/assets/delete

Access: administrator and analyst.

Request body

Format: JSON

Name

Data type

Mandatory

Description

Value example

TenantID

string

Yes

Tenant ID

00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000

ids

[]string

If neither the ipAddresses array nor the FQDNs are specified

List of asset IDs

["00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000"]

fqdns

[]string

If neither the ipAddresses array nor the IDs are specified

Array of asset FQDNs

["my-asset-1.example.com", "my-asset-1"]

ipAddresses

[]string

If neither the IDs nor FQDNs are specified

Array of main IP addresses of the asset.

["192.168.1.1", "2001:0db8:85a3:0000:0000:8a2e:0370:7334"]

Response

HTTP code: 200

Format: JSON

type Response struct {

DeletedCount uint64 `json:"deletedCount"`

}

Possible errors

HTTP code

Description

message field value

details field value

400

Tenant ID is not specified

tenantID required

 

400

Attempt to delete an asset from the shared tenant

delete from shared tenant not allowed

 

400

None of the mandatory fields is specified

one of fields required

ids, fqdns, ipAddresses

400

Invalid FQDN specified

invalid value

fqdns[<index>]

400

Invalid IP address specified

invalid value

ipAddresses[<index>]

403

The user does not have the required role in the specified tenant

access denied

 

404

The specified tenant was not found

tenant not found

 

406

The specified tenant was disabled

tenant disabled

 

500

Any other internal errors

variable

variable

Page top

[Topic 222297]

Searching events

POST /api/v1/events

Access: administrator, analyst, and operator.

Request body

Format: JSON

Request

Name

Data type

Mandatory

Description

Value example

period

Period

Yes

Search period

 

sql

string

Yes

SQL query

SELECT * FROM events WHERE Type = 3 ORDER BY Timestamp DESC LIMIT 1000

SELECT sum(BytesOut) as TotalBytesSent, SourceAddress FROM events WHERE DeviceVendor = 'netflow' GROUP BY SourceAddress LIMIT 1000

SELECT count(Timestamp) as TotalEvents FROM events LIMIT 1

ClusterID

string

No, if the cluster is the only one

Storage cluster ID. You can find it by requesting a list of services with kind = storage. The cluster ID will be in the resourceID field.

00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000

rawTimestamps

bool

No

Display timestamps in their current format—Milliseconds since EPOCH. False by default.

true or false

emptyFields

bool

No

Display empty fields for normalized events. False by default.

true or false

Period

Name

Data type

Mandatory

Description

Value example

from

string

Yes

Lower bound of the period in RFC3339 format. Timestamp >= <from>

2021-09-06T00:00:00Z (UTC)

2021-09-06T00:00:00.000Z (UTC, including milliseconds)

2021-09-06T00:00:00Z+00:00 (MSK)

to

string

Yes

Upper bound of the period in RFC3339 format.

Timestamp <= <to>

2021-09-06T00:00:00Z (UTC)

2021-09-06T00:00:00.000Z (UTC, including milliseconds)

2021-09-06T00:00:00Z+00:00 (MSK)

Response

HTTP code: 200

Format: JSON

Result of executing the SQL query

Possible errors

HTTP code

Description

message field value

details field value

400

The lower bounds of the range is not specified

period.from required

 

400

The lower bounds of the range is in an unsupported format

cannot parse period.from

variable

400

The lower bounds of the range is equal to zero

period.from cannot be 0

 

400

The upper bounds of the range is not specified

period.to required

 

400

The upper bounds of the range is in an unsupported format

cannot parse period.to

variable

400

The upper bounds of the range is equal to zero

period.to cannot be 0

 

400

The lower bounds of the range is greater than the upper bounds

period.from cannot be greater than period.to

 

400

Invalid SQL query

invalid sql

variable

400

An invalid table appears in the SQL query

the only valid table is `events`

 

400

The SQL query lacks a LIMIT

sql: LIMIT required

 

400

The LIMIT in the SQL query exceeds the maximum (1000)

sql: maximum LIMIT is 1000

 

404

Storage cluster not found

cluster not found

 

406

The clusterID parameter was not specified, and many clusters were registered in KUMA

multiple clusters found, please provide clusterID

 

500

No available cluster nodes

no nodes available

 

50x

Any other internal errors

event search failed

variable

Page top

[Topic 222298]

Viewing information about the cluster

GET /api/v1/events/clusters

Access: administrator, analyst, and operator.

The main tenant clusters are accessible to all users.

Query parameters (URL Query)

Name

Data type

Mandatory

Description

Value example

page

number

No

Page number. Starts with 1. The page size is 250 entries. If the parameter is not specified, the default value is 1.

1

id

string

No

Cluster ID. If the parameter is specified several times, then a list is generated and the logical OR operator is applied

00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000

TenantID

string

No

Tenant ID. If the parameter is specified several times, then a list is generated and the logical OR operator is applied. If the user does not have the required role in the specified tenant, then this tenant is ignored.

00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000

name

string

No

Cluster name. Case-insensitive regular expression (PCRE).

cluster
^My cluster$

Response

HTTP code: 200

Format: JSON

type Response []Cluster

 

type Cluster struct {

ID string `json:"id"`

Name string `json:"name"`

TenantID string `json:"tenantID"`

TenantName string `json:"tenantName"`

}

Possible errors

HTTP code

Description

message field value

details field value

400

Invalid value of the "page" parameter

invalid query parameter value

page

500

Any other internal errors

variable

variable

Page top

[Topic 222299]

Resource search

GET /api/v1/resources

Access: administrator, analyst, and operator.

Query parameters (URL Query)

Name

Data type

Mandatory

Description

Value example

page

number

No

Page number. Starts with 1. The page size is 250 entries. If the parameter is not specified, the default value is 1.

1

id

string

No

Resource ID. If the parameter is specified several times, then a list is generated and the logical OR operator is applied.

00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000

TenantID

string

No

Resource tenant ID. If the parameter is specified several times, then a list is generated and the logical OR operator is applied. If the user does not have the required role in the specified tenant, then this tenant is ignored.

00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000

name

string

No

Resource name. Case-insensitive regular expression (PCRE).

resource
^My resource$

kind

string

No

Resource type. If the parameter is specified several times, then a list is generated and the logical OR operator is applied

collector, correlator, storage, activeList, aggregationRule, connector, correlationRule, dictionary, 

enrichmentRule, destination, filter, normalizer, responseRule, search, agent, proxy, secret

Response

HTTP code: 200

Format: JSON

type Response []Resource

 

type Resource struct {

ID string `json:"id"`

Kind string `json:"kind"`

Name string `json:"name"`

Description string `json:"description"`

TenantID string `json:"tenantID"`

TenantName string `json:"tenantName"`

UserID string `json:"userID"`

UserName string `json:"userName"`

Created string `json:"created"`

Updated string `json:"updated"`

}

Possible errors

HTTP code

Description

message field value

details field value

400

Invalid value of the "page" parameter

invalid query parameter value

page

400

Invalid value of the "kind" parameter

invalid kind

<kind>

500

Any other internal errors

variable

variable

Page top

[Topic 222300]

Loading resource file

POST /api/v1/resources/upload

Access: administrator and analyst.

Users with the first line analyst role cannot use this method.

Request body

Encrypted contents of the resource file in binary format.

Response

HTTP code: 200

Format: JSON

File ID. It should be specified in the body of requests for viewing the contents of the file and for importing resources.

type Response struct {

ID string `json:"id"`

}

Possible errors

HTTP code

Description

message field value

details field value

400

The file size exceeds the maximum allowable (64 MB)

maximum file size is 64 MB

 

403

The user does not have the required roles in any of the tenants

access denied

 

500

Any other internal errors

variable

variable

Page top

[Topic 222301]

Viewing the contents of a resource file

POST /api/v1/resources/toc

Access: administrator, analyst, and operator.

Users with the first line analyst role cannot use this method.

Request body

Format: JSON

Name

Data type

Mandatory

Description

Value example

fileID

string

Yes

The file ID obtained as a result of loading the resource file.

00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000

password

string

Yes

Resource file password.

SomePassword!88

Response

HTTP code: 200

Format: JSON

File version, list of resources, categories, and folders.

The ID of the retrieved resources must be used when importing.

type Package struct {

Version string `json:"version"`

AssetCategories []*categories.Category `json:"assetCategories"`

Folders []*folders.Folder `json:"folders"`

Resources []*resources.ExportedResource `json:"resources"`

}

Page top

[Topic 222302]

Importing resources

POST /api/v1/resources/import

Access: administrator and analyst.

Request body

Name

Data type

Mandatory

Description

Value example

fileID

string

Yes

The file ID obtained as a result of loading the resource file.

00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000

password

string

Yes

Resource file password.

SomePassword!88

TenantID

string

Yes

ID of the target tenant

00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000

actions

map[string]uint8

Yes

Mapping of the resource ID to the action that must be taken in relation to it.

0—do not import (used when resolving conflicts)

1—import (should initially be assigned to each resource)

2—replace (used when resolving conflicts)

{

"00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000": 0,

"00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000001": 1,

"00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000002": 2,

}

 

Response

HTTP code

Body

204

 

409

The imported resources conflict with the existing ones by ID. In this case, you need to repeat the import operation while specifying the following actions for these resources:

0—do not import

2—replace

type ImportConflictsError struct {

HardConflicts []string `json:"conflicts"`

}

 

Page top

[Topic 222303]

Exporting resources

POST /api/v1/resources/export

Access: administrator and analyst.

Users with the first line analyst role cannot use this method.

If shared resources are hidden for a user, the user cannot export shared resources or resources that use shared resources.

Request body

Format: JSON

Name

Data type

Mandatory

Description

Value example

ids

[]string

Yes

Resource IDs to be exported

["00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000"]

password

string

Yes

Exported resource file password

SomePassword!88

TenantID

string

Yes

ID of the tenant that owns the exported resources

00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000

Response

HTTP code: 200

Format: JSON

ID of the file with the exported resources. It should be used in a request to download the resource file.

type ExportResponse struct {

FileID string `json:"fileID"`

}

Page top

[Topic 222304]

Downloading the resource file

GET /api/v1/resources/download/<id>

Here "id" is the file ID obtained as a result of executing a resource export request.

Access: administrator and analyst.

Users with the first line analyst role cannot use this method.

Response

HTTP code: 200

Encrypted contents of the resource file in binary format.

Possible errors

HTTP code

Description

message field value

details field value

400

File ID not specified

route parameter required

id

400

The file ID is not a valid UUID

id is not a valid UUID

 

403

The user does not have the required roles in any of the tenants

access denied

 

404

File not found

file not found

 

406

The file is a directory

not regular file

 

500

Any other internal errors

variable

variable

Page top

[Topic 222305]

Search for services

GET /api/v1/services

Access: administrator and analyst.

Query parameters (URL Query)

Name

Data type

Mandatory

Description

Value example

page

number

No

Page number. Starts with 1. The page size is 250 entries. If the parameter is not specified, the default value is 1.

1

id

string

No

Service ID. If the parameter is specified several times, then a list is generated and the logical OR operator is applied.

00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000

TenantID

string

No

Service tenant ID. If the parameter is specified several times, then a list is generated and the logical OR operator is applied. If the user does not have the required role in the specified tenant, then this tenant is ignored.

00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000

name

string

No

Service name. Case-insensitive regular expression (PCRE).

service
^My service$

kind

string

No

Service type. If the parameter is specified several times, then a list is generated and the logical OR operator is applied.

collector, correlator, storage, agent

fqdn

string

No

Service FQDN. Case-insensitive regular expression (PCRE).

hostname

^hostname.example.com$

paired

bool

No

Display only those services that executed the first start. If the parameter is present in the URL query, then its value is assumed to be true. The values specified by the user are ignored. Example: /api/v1/services?paired

 

Response

HTTP code: 200

Format: JSON

type Response []Service

 

type Service struct {

ID string `json:"id"`

TenantID string `json:"tenantID"`

TenantName string `json:"tenantName"`

ResourceID string `json:"resourceID"`

Kind string `json:"kind"`

Name string `json:"name"`

Address string `json:"address"`

FQDN string `json:"fqdn"`

Status string `json:"status"`

Warning string `json:"warning"`

APIPort string `json:"apiPort"`

Uptime string `json:"uptime"`

Version string `json:"version"`

Created string `json:"created"`

Updated string `json:"updated"`

}

Possible errors

HTTP code

Description

message field value

details field value

400

Invalid value of the "page" parameter

invalid query parameter value

page

400

Invalid value of the "kind" parameter

invalid kind

<kind>

500

Any other internal errors

variable

variable

Page top

[Topic 222306]

Tenant search

GET /api/v1/tenants

Only tenants available to the user are displayed.

Access: administrator and analyst.

Query parameters (URL Query)

Name

Data type

Mandatory

Description

Value example

page

number

No

Page number. Starts with 1. The page size is 250 entries. If the parameter is not specified, the default value is 1.

1

id

string

No

Tenant ID. If the parameter is specified several times, then a list is generated and the logical OR operator is applied.

00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000

name

string

No

Tenant name. Case-insensitive regular expression (PCRE).

tenant
^My tenant$

main

bool

No

Only display the main tenant. If the parameter is present in the URL query, then its value is assumed to be true. The values specified by the user are ignored. Example: /api/v1/tenants?main

 

Response

HTTP code: 200

Format: JSON

type Response []Tenant

 

type Tenant struct {

ID string `json:"id"`

Name string `json:"name"`

Main bool `json:"main"`

Description string `json:"description"`

EPS uint64 `json:"eps"`

EPSLimit uint64 `json:"epsLimit"`

Created string `json:"created"`

Updated string `json:"updated"`

}

Possible errors

HTTP code

Description

message field value

details field value

400

Invalid value of the "page" parameter

invalid query parameter value

page

500

Any other internal errors

variable

variable

Page top

[Topic 222307]

View token bearer information

GET /api/v1/users/whoami

Response

HTTP code: 200

Format: JSON

type Response struct {

ID string `json:"id"`

Name string `json:"name"`

Login string `json:"login"`

Email string `json:"email"`

Tenants []TenantAccess `json:"tenants"`

}

 

type TenantAccess struct {

ID string `json:"id"`

Name string `json:"name"`

Role string `json:"role"`

}

Page top

[Topic 234105]

Dictionary updating in services

POST /api/v1/dictionaries/update

You can update only dictionaries in dictionary resources of the table type.

Access: administrator and analyst.

Query parameters (URL Query)

Name

Data type

Mandatory

Description

Value example

dictionaryID

string

Yes

ID of the dictionary that will be updated.

00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000

The update affects all services where the specified dictionary is used. If an update in one of the services ends with an error, this does not interrupt updates in the other services.

Request body

Multipart field name

Data type

Mandatory

Description

Value example

file

CSV file

Yes

The request contains a CSV file. Data of the existing dictionary is being replaced with data from this file. The first line of the CSV file containing the column names must not be changed.

key columns,column1,column2

key1,k1col1,k1col2

key2,k2col1,k2col2

Response

HTTP code: 200

Format: JSON

type Response struct {

ServicesFailedToUpdate []UpdateError `json:"servicesFailedToUpdate"`

}

type UpdateError struct {

ID string `json:"id"`

Err error `json:"err"`

}

Returns only errors for services in which the dictionaries have not been updated.

Possible errors

HTTP code

Description

message field value

details field value

400

Invalid request body

request body decode failed

Error

400

Null count of dictionary lines

request body required

 

400

Dictionary ID not specified

invalid value

dictionaryID

400

Incorrect value of dictionary line

invalid value

rows or rows[i]

400

Dictionary with the specified ID has an invalid type (not table)

can only update table dictionary

 

400

Attempt to change dictionary columns

columns must not change with update

 

403

No access to requested resource

access denied

 

404

Service not found

service not found

 

404

Dictionary not found

dictionary not found

Service ID

500

Any other internal errors

variable

variable

Page top

[Topic 234106]

Dictionary retrieval

GET /api/v1/dictionaries

You can get only dictionaries in dictionary resources of the table type.

Access: administrator and analyst.

Query parameters (URL Query)

Name

Data type

Mandatory

Description

Value example

dictionaryID

string

Yes

ID of the dictionary that will be received

00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000

Response

HTTP code: 200

Format: text/plain; charset=utf-8

A CSV file is returned with the dictionary data in the response body.

Page top

[Topic 244979]

Viewing custom fields of the assets

GET /api/v1/settings/id/:id

The user can view a list of custom fields made by the KUMA user in the application web interface.

A custom field is a bucket for entering text. If necessary, the default value and the mask can be used to validate the entered text in the following format: https://pkg.go.dev/regexp/syntax. All forward slash characters in the mask must be shielded.

Access: administrator, analyst, and operator.

Query parameters

Name

Data type

Mandatory

Description

Value example

id

string

Yes

Configuration ID of the custom fields

00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000

Response

HTTP code: 200

Format: JSON

type Settings struct {

ID string `json:"id"`

TenantID string `json:"tenantID"`

TenantName string `json:"tenantName"`

Kind string `json:"kind"`

UpdatedAt int64 `json:"updatedAt"`

CreatedAt int64 `json:"createdAt"`

Disabled bool `json:"disabled"`

CustomFields []*CustomField `json:"customFields"`

}

 

type CustomField struct {

ID string `json:"id"`

Name string `json:"name"`

Default string `json:"default"`

Mask string `json:"mask"`

}

Possible errors

HTTP code

Description

message field value

details field value

404

Parameters not found: invalid ID or parameters are missing

Not found in database

null

500

Any other internal errors

variable

variable

Page top

[Topic 244980]

Creating a backup of the KUMA Core

GET /api/v1/system/backup

Access: general administrator.

The request has no parameters.

The tar.gz archive containing the backup copy of the KUMA Core is returned in response to the request. The backup copy is not saved on the host where the Core is installed. The certificates are included in the backup copy.

If the operation is successful, an audit event is generated with the following parameters:

  • DeviceAction = "Core backup created"
  • SourceUserID = "<user-login>"

You can restore the KUMA Cores from a backup using the following API request: POST /api/v1/system/restore.

Page top

[Topic 244981]

Restoring the KUMA Core from the backup

POST /api/v1/system/restore

Access: general administrator.

The request has no parameters.

The request body must contain an archive with the backup copy of the KUMA Core, obtained as a result of the following API request execution: GET /api/v1/system/backup.

After receiving the archive with the backup copy, KUMA performs the following actions:

  1. Unpacks the archive with the backup copy of the KUMA Core to a temporary directory.
  2. Compares the current KUMA version with the backup KUMA version. Data may only be restored from a backup if it is restored to the KUMA of the same version as the backup one.

    If the versions match, an audit event is generated with the following parameters:

    • DeviceAction = "Core restore scheduled"
    • SourceUserID = "<name of the user who initiated KUMA restore from a backup copy>"
  3. If the versions match, data is restored from the backup copy of the KUMA Core.
  4. The temporary directory is deleted, and KUMA starts normally.

    The "WARN: restored from backup" entry is added to the KUMA Core log.

Page top

[Topic 217766]

Commands for components manual starting and installing

This section contains the parameters of KUMA's executable file /opt/kaspersky/kuma/kuma that can be used to manually start or install KUMA services. This may be useful for when you need to see output in the server operating system console.

Commands parameters

Commands

Description

tools

Start KUMA administration tools.

collector

Install, start, or remove a collector service.

core

Install, start, or uninstall a Core service.

correlator

Install, start, or remove a correlator service.

agent

Install, start, or remove an agent service.

help

Get information about available commands and parameters.

license

Get information about license.

storage

Start or install a Storage.

version

Get information about version of the program.

Flags:

-h, --h are used to get help about any kuma command. For example, kuma <component> --help.

Examples:

  • kuma version is used to get version of the KUMA installer.
  • kuma core -h is used to get help about core command of KUMA installer.
  • kuma collector --core <address of the server where the collector should obtain its settings> --id <ID of the installed service> --api.port <port> is used to start collector service installation.
Page top

[Topic 238733]

Integrity check of KUMA files

The integrity of KUMA components is checked using a set of scripts based on the integrity_checker tool and located in the/opt/kaspersky/kuma/integrity/bin directory. An integrity check uses manifest xml files in the/opt/kaspersky/kuma/integrity/manifest/* directory, signed with a Kaspersky cryptographic signature.

Running the integrity check tool requires a user account with permissions at least matching those of the KUMA account.

The integrity check tool processes each KUMA component individually, and it must be run on servers that has the appropriate components installed. An integrity check also screens the xml file that was used.

To check the integrity of component files:

  1. Run the following command to navigate to the directory that contains the set of scripts:

    cd /opt/kaspersky/kuma/integrity/bin

  2. Then pick the command that matches the KUMA component you want to check:
    • ./check_all.sh for KUMA Core and Storage components.
    • ./check_core.sh for KUMA Core components.
    • ./check_collector.sh for KUMA collector components.
    • ./check_collector.sh for KUMA correlator components.
    • ./check_storage.sh for storage components.
    • ./check_kuma_exe.sh <full path to kuma.exe omitting file name> for KUMA Agent for Windows. The standard location of the agent executable file on the Windows device is: C:\Program Files\Kaspersky Lab\KUMA\.

The integrity of the component files is checked.

The result of checking each component is displayed in the following format:

  • The Summary section describes the number of scanned objects along with the scan status: integrity not confirmed / object skipped / integrity confirmed:
    • Manifests – the number of manifest files processed.
    • Files – the number of KUMA files processed.
    • Directories – integrity checking does not use KUMA.
    • Registries – integrity checking does not use KUMA.
    • Registry values – integrity checking does not use KUMA.
  • Component integrity check result:
    • SUCCEEDED – integrity confirmed.
    • FAILED – integrity violated.
Page top

[Topic 217941]

Normalized event data model

This section presents the KUMA normalized event data model. All events that are processed by KUMA Correlator to detect alerts must be compliant to this model.

Events that are not compliant to this data model must be imported into this format (or normalized) using Collectors.

Normalized event data model

Field name

Data type

Field size

Description

The name of a field reflects its purpose. The fields can be modified.

 

ApplicationProtocol

String

31 characters

Name of the application layer protocol. For example, HTTPS, SSH, Telnet.

BytesIn

Number

From -9223372036854775808 to 9223372036854775807

Number of bytes received.

BytesOut

Number

From -9223372036854775808 to 9223372036854775807

Number of bytes sent.

DestinationAddress

String

45 characters

IPv4 or IPv6 address of the asset that the action will be performed on. For example, 0.0.0.0 or xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx

DestinationCity

String

1,023 characters

City corresponding to the IP address from the DestinationAddress field.

DestinationCountry

String

1023 characters

Country corresponding to the IP address from the DestinationAddress field.

DestinationDnsDomain

String

255 characters

The DNS portion of the fully qualified domain name of the destination.

DestinationHostName

String

1023 characters

Host name of the destination. FQDN of the destination, if available.

DestinationLatitude

Floating point number

+/- 1.7E-308 to 1.7E+308

Longitude corresponding to the IP address from the DestinationAddress field.

DestinationLongitude

Floating point number

+/- 1.7E-308 to 1.7E+308

Latitude corresponding to the IP address from the DestinationAddress field.

DestinationMacAddress

String

17 characters

MAC address of the destination. For example, aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:00

DestinationNtDomain

String

255 characters

Windows Domain Name of the destination.

DestinationPort

Number

From -9223372036854775808 to 9223372036854775807

Port number of the destination.

DestinationProcessID

Number

From -9223372036854775808 to 9223372036854775807

System process ID registered on the destination.

DestinationProcessName

String

1023 characters

Name of the system process registered on the destination. For example, sshd, telnet.

DestinationRegion

String

1023 characters

Region corresponding to the IP address from the DestinationAddress field.

DestinationServiceName

String

1023 characters

Name of the service on the destination side. For example, sshd.

DestinationTranslatedAddress

String

45 characters

Translated IPv4 or IPv6 address of the destination. For example, 0.0.0.0 or xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx

DestinationTranslatedPort

Number

From -9223372036854775808 to 9223372036854775807

Port number at the destination after translation.

DestinationUserID

String

1023 characters

User ID of the destination.

DestinationUserName

String

1023 characters

User name of the destination.

DestinationUserPrivileges

String

1023 characters

Names of roles that identify user privileges at the destination. For example, User, Guest, Administrator, etc.

DeviceAction

String

63 characters

Action that was taken by the event source. For example, blocked, detected.

DeviceAddress

String

45 characters

IPv4 or IPv6 address of the device from which the event was received. For example, 0.0.0.0 or xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx

DeviceCity

String

1023 characters

City corresponding to the IP address from the DeviceAddress field.

DeviceCountry

String

1023 characters

Country corresponding to the IP address from the DeviceAddress field.

DeviceDnsDomain

String

255 characters

DNS part of the fully qualified domain name of the device from which the event was received.

DeviceEventClassID

String

1023 characters

Event type ID assigned by the event source.

DeviceExternalID

String

255 characters

ID of the device or product assigned by the event source.

DeviceFacility

String

1023 characters

Value of the facility parameter set by the event source.

DeviceHostName

String

100 characters

Name of the device from which the event was received. FQDN of the device, if available.

DeviceInboundinterface

String

128 characters

Name of the incoming connection interface.

DeviceLatitude

Floating point number

+/- 1.7E-308 to 1.7E+308

Longitude corresponding to the IP address from the DeviceAddress field.

DeviceLongitude

Floating point number

+/- 1.7E-308 to 1.7E+308

Latitude corresponding to the IP address from the DeviceAddress field

DeviceMacAddress

String

17 characters

MAC address of the asset from which the event was received. For example, aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:00

DeviceNtDomain

String

255 characters

Windows Domain Name of the device.

DeviceOutboundinterface

String

128 characters

Name of the outgoing connection interface.

DevicePayloadID

String

128 characters

The payload's unique ID that is associated with the raw event.

DeviceProcessID

Number

From -9223372036854775808 to 9223372036854775807

ID of the system process on the device that generated the event.

DeviceProcessName

String

1023 characters

Name of the process.

DeviceProduct

String

63 characters

Name of the product that generated the event. The DeviceVendor, DeviceProduct, and DeviceVersion all uniquely identify the log source.

DeviceReceiptTime

Number

From -9223372036854775808 to 9223372036854775807

Time when the device received the event.

DeviceRegion

String

1023 characters

Region corresponding to the IP address from the DeviceAddress field.

DeviceTimeZone

String

255 characters

Time zone of the device on which the event was generated.

DeviceTranslatedAddress

String

45 characters

Re-translated IPv4 or IPv6 address of the device from which the event was received. For example, 0.0.0.0 or xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx

DeviceVendor

String

63 characters

Vendor name of the event source. The DeviceVendor, DeviceProduct, and DeviceVersion all uniquely identify the log source.

DeviceVersion

String

31 characters

Product version of the event source. The DeviceVendor, DeviceProduct, and DeviceVersion all uniquely identify the log source.

EndTime

Number

From -9223372036854775808 to 9223372036854775807

Date and time (timestamp) when the event ended.

EventOutcome

String

63 characters

Result of the operation. For example, success, failure.

ExternalID

String

40 characters

Field in which the ID can be saved.

FileCreateTime

Number

From -9223372036854775808 to 9223372036854775807

File creation time.

FileHash

String

255 characters

Hash of the file. Example: CA737F1014A48F4C0B6DD43CB177B0AFD9E5169367544C494011E3317DBF9A509CB1E5DC1E85A941BBEE3D7F2AFBC9B1

FileID

String

1023 characters

ID of the file.

FileModificationTime

Number

From -9223372036854775808 to 9223372036854775807

Time when the file was last modified.

FileName

String

1023 characters

Filename without specifying the file path.

FilePath

String

1023 characters

File path, including the file name.

FilePermission

String

1023 characters

List of file permissions.

FileSize

Number

From -9223372036854775808 to 9223372036854775807

File size.

FileType

String

1023 characters

File type.

Message

String

1023 characters

Brief description of the event.

Name

String

512 characters

Name of the event.

OldFileCreateTime

Number

From -9223372036854775808 to 9223372036854775807

Time when the OLD file was created from the event. The time is specified in UTC0. In the KUMA web interface, the value is displayed based in the timezone of the user's browser.

OldFileHash

String

255 characters

Hash of the OLD file. Example: CA737F1014A48F4C0B6DD43CB177B0AFD9E5169367544C494011E3317DBF9A509CB1E5DC1E85A941BBEE3D7F2AFBC9B1

OldFileID

String

1023 characters

ID of the OLD file.

OldFileModificationTime

Number

From -9223372036854775808 to 9223372036854775807

Time when the OLD file was last modified.

OldFileName

String

1023 characters

Name of the OLD file (without the file path).

OldFilePath

String

1023 characters

Path to the OLD file, including the file name.

OldFilePermission

String

1023 characters

List of permissions of the OLD file.

OldFileSize

Number

From -9223372036854775808 to 9223372036854775807

Size of the OLD file.

OldFileType

String

1023 characters

Type of the OLD file.

Reason

String

1023 characters

Information about the reason for the event.

RequestClientApplication

String

1023 characters

Value of the "user-agent" parameter of the http request.

RequestContext

String

2,048 characters

Description of the http request context.

RequestCookies

String

1023 characters

Cookies associated with the http request.

RequestMethod

String

1023 characters

Method used when making the http request.

RequestUrl

String

1023 characters

Requested URL.

Severity

String

1023 characters

Priority. This can be the Severity field or the Level field of the raw event.

SourceAddress

String

45 characters

IPv4 or IPv6 address of the source. Example format: 0.0.0.0 or xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx

SourceCity

String

1023 characters

City corresponding to the IP address from the SourceAddress field.

SourceCountry

String

1023 characters

Country corresponding to the IP address from the SourceAddress field.

SourceDnsDomain

String

255 characters

The DNS portion of the fully qualified domain name of the source.

SourceHostName

String

1023 characters

Windows Domain Name of the event source device.

SourceLatitude

Floating point number

+/- 1.7E-308 to 1.7E+308

Longitude corresponding to the IP address from the SourceAddress field.

SourceLongitude

Floating point number

+/- 1.7E-308 to 1.7E+308

Latitude corresponding to the IP address from the SourceAddress field.

SourceMacAddress

String

17 characters

MAC address of the source. Format example: aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:00

SourceNtDomain

String

255 characters

Windows Domain Name of the source.

SourcePort

Number

From -9223372036854775808 to 9223372036854775807

Source port number.

SourceProcessID

Number

From -9223372036854775808 to 9223372036854775807

System process ID.

SourceProcessName

String

1023 characters

Name of the system process at the source. For example, sshd, telnet, etc.

SourceRegion

String

1023 characters

Region corresponding to the IP address from the SourceAddress field.

SourceServiceName

String

1023 characters

Name of the service on the source side. For example, sshd.

SourceTranslatedAddress

String

45 characters

Translated IPv4 or IPv6 address of the source. Example format: 0.0.0.0 or xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx

SourceTranslatedPort

Number

From -9223372036854775808 to 9223372036854775807

Port number of the source after translation.

SourceUserID

String

1023 characters

User ID of the source.

SourceUserName

String

1023 characters

User name of the source.

SourceUserPrivileges

String

1,023 characters

Names of roles that identify user privileges of the source. For example, User, Guest, Administrator, etc.

StartTime

Number

From -9223372036854775808 to 9223372036854775807

Date and time (timestamp) when the activity associated with the event began.

Tactic

String

128 characters

Name of the tactic from the MITRE ATT&CK matrix.

Technique

String

128 characters

Name of the technique from the MITRE ATT&CK matrix.

TransportProtocol

String

31 characters

Name of the Transport layer protocol of the OSI model (TCP, UDP, etc).

Type

Number

From -9223372036854775808 to 9223372036854775807

Event type: 1 - basic, 2 - aggregated, 3 - correlation, 4 - audit, 5 - monitoring.

Fields the purpose of which can be defined by the user. The fields can be modified.

DeviceCustomDate1

Number, timestamp

From -9223372036854775808 to 9223372036854775807

Field for mapping a date and time value (timestamp). The time is specified in UTC0. In the KUMA web interface, the value is displayed based in the timezone of the user's browser.

DeviceCustomDate1Label

String

1023 characters

Field for describing the purpose of the DeviceCustomDate1 field.

DeviceCustomDate2

Number, timestamp

From -9223372036854775808 to 9223372036854775807

Field for mapping a date and time value (timestamp). The time is specified in UTC0. In the KUMA web interface, the value is displayed based in the timezone of the user's browser.

DeviceCustomDate2Label

String

1023 characters

Field for describing the purpose of the DeviceCustomDate2 field.

DeviceCustomFloatingPoint1

Floating point number

+/- 1.7E-308 to 1.7E+308

Field for mapping floating point numbers.

DeviceCustomFloatingPoint1Label

String

1023 characters

Field for describing the purpose of the DeviceCustomFloatingPoint1 field.

DeviceCustomFloatingPoint2

Floating point number

+/- 1.7E-308 to 1.7E+308

Field for mapping floating point numbers.

DeviceCustomFloatingPoint2Label

String

1023 characters

Field for describing the purpose of the DeviceCustomFloatingPoint2 field.

DeviceCustomFloatingPoint3

Floating point number

+/- 1.7E-308 to 1.7E+308

Field for mapping floating point numbers.

DeviceCustomFloatingPoint3Label

String

1023 characters

Field for describing the purpose of the DeviceCustomFloatingPoint3 field.

DeviceCustomFloatingPoint4

Floating point number

+/- 1.7E-308 to 1.7E+308

Field for mapping floating point numbers.

DeviceCustomFloatingPoint4Label

String

1023 characters

Field for describing the purpose of the DeviceCustomFloatingPoint4 field.

DeviceCustomIPv6Address1

String

45 characters

Field for mapping an IPv6 address value. Format example: y:y:y:y:y:y:y:y

DeviceCustomIPv6Address1Label

String

1023 characters

Field for describing the purpose of the DeviceCustomIPv6Address1 field.

DeviceCustomIPv6Address2

String

45 characters

Field for mapping an IPv6 address value. Format example: y:y:y:y:y:y:y:y

DeviceCustomIPv6Address2Label

String

1023 characters

Field for describing the purpose of the DeviceCustomIPv6Address2 field.

DeviceCustomIPv6Address3

String

45 characters

Field for mapping an IPv6 address value. Format example: y:y:y:y:y:y:y:y

DeviceCustomIPv6Address3Label

String

1023 characters

Field for describing the purpose of the DeviceCustomIPv6Address3 field.

DeviceCustomIPv6Address4

String

45 characters

Field for mapping an IPv6 address value. For example, y:y:y:y:y:y:y:y

DeviceCustomIPv6Address4Label

String

1023 characters

Field for describing the purpose of the DeviceCustomIPv6Address4 field.

DeviceCustomNumber1

Number

From -9223372036854775808 to 9223372036854775807

Field for mapping an integer value.

DeviceCustomNumber1Label

String

1023 characters

Field for describing the purpose of the DeviceCustomNumber1 field.

DeviceCustomNumber2

Number

From -9223372036854775808 to 9223372036854775807

Field for mapping an integer value.

DeviceCustomNumber2Label

String

1023 characters

Field for describing the purpose of the DeviceCustomNumber2 field.

DeviceCustomNumber3

Number

From -9223372036854775808 to 9223372036854775807

Field for mapping an integer value.

DeviceCustomNumber3Label

String

1023 characters

Field for describing the purpose of the DeviceCustomNumber3 field.

DeviceCustomString1

String

4,000 characters

Field for mapping a string value.

DeviceCustomString1Label

String

1,023 characters

Field for describing the purpose of the DeviceCustomString1 field.

DeviceCustomString2

String

4,000 characters

Field for mapping a string value.

DeviceCustomString2Label

String

1023 characters

Field for describing the purpose of the DeviceCustomString2 field.

DeviceCustomString3

String

4,000 characters

Field for mapping a string value.

DeviceCustomString3Label

String

1023 characters

Field for describing the purpose of the DeviceCustomString3 field.

DeviceCustomString4

String

4,000 characters

Field for mapping a string value.

DeviceCustomString4Label

String

1023 characters

Field for describing the purpose of the DeviceCustomString4 field.

DeviceCustomString5

String

4,000 characters

Field for mapping a string value.

DeviceCustomString5Label

String

1023 characters

Field for describing the purpose of the DeviceCustomString5 field.

DeviceCustomString6

String

4,000 characters

Field for mapping a string value.

DeviceCustomString6Label

String

1023 characters

Field for describing the purpose of the DeviceCustomString6 field.

DeviceDirection

Number

From -9223372036854775808 to 9223372036854775807

Field for describing the direction of connection for an event. "0" - incoming connection, "1" - outgoing connection.

DeviceEventCategory

String

1023 characters

Event category assigned by the device that sent the event to SIEM.

FlexDate1

Number, timestamp

From -9223372036854775808 to 9223372036854775807

Field for mapping a date and time value (timestamp). The time is specified in UTC0. In the KUMA web interface, the value is displayed based in the timezone of the user's browser.

FlexDate1Label

String

128 characters

Field for describing the purpose of the FlexDate1Label field.

FlexNumber1

Number

From -9223372036854775808 to 9223372036854775807

Field for mapping an integer value.

FlexNumber1Label

String

128 characters

Field for describing the purpose of the FlexNumber1Label field.

FlexNumber2

Number

From -9223372036854775808 to 9223372036854775807

Field for mapping an integer value.

FlexNumber2Label

String

128 characters

Field for describing the purpose of the FlexNumber2Label field.

FlexString1

String

1023 characters

Field for mapping a string value.

FlexString1Label

String

128 characters

Field for describing the purpose of the FlexString1Label field.

FlexString2

String

1023 characters

Field for mapping a string value.

FlexString2Label

String

128 characters

Field for describing the purpose of the FlexString2Label field.

Service fields. Cannot be edited.

AffectedAssets

Nested [Affected] structure

-

Nested structure from which you can query alert-related assets and user accounts, and find out the number of times they appear in alert events.

AggregationRuleID

String

-

ID of the aggregation rule.

AggregationRuleName

String

-

Name of the aggregation rule that processed the event.

BaseEventCount

Number

-

For an aggregated base event, this is the number of base events that were processed by the aggregation rule. For a correlation event, this is the number of base events that were processed by the correlation rule that generated the correlation event.

BaseEvents

Nested [Event] list

-

Nested structure containing a list of base events. This field can be filled in for correlation events.

Code

String

-

In a base event, this is the code of a process, function or operation return from the source.

CorrelationRuleID

String

-

ID of the correlation rule.

CorrelationRuleName

String

-

Name of the correlation rule that triggered the creation of the correlation event. Filled only for correlation events.

DestinationAccountID

String

-

This field stores the user ID.

DestinationAssetID

String

-

This field stores the asset ID of the destination.

DeviceAssetID

String

-

This field stores the ID of the asset that sent the event to SIEM.

Extra

Nested [string:string] dictionary

-

During normalization of a raw event, this field can be used to place those fields that have not been mapped to KUMA event fields. This field can be filled in only for base events. The maximum size of the field is 4 MB.

GroupedBy

String

-

List of names of the fields that were used for grouping in the correlation rule. It is filled in only for the correlation event.

ID

String

-

Unique event ID of UUID type. The collector generates the ID for a base event that is generated by the collector. The correlator generates the ID of a correlation event. The ID never changes its value.

Raw

String

-

Non-normalized text of the original 'raw' event. Maximum field size is 16,384 bytes.

ReplayID

String

-

ID of the retroscan that generated the event.

ServiceID

String

-

ID of the service instance: correlator, collector, storage.

ServiceName

String

-

Name of the microservice instance that the KUMA administrator assigns when creating the microservice.

SourceAccountID

String

-

This field stores the user ID.

SourceAssetID

String

-

This field stores the asset ID of the event source.

SpaceID

String

-

ID of the space.

TenantID

String

-

This field stores the ID of the tenant.

TI

Nested [string:string] dictionary

-

Field that contains categories in a dictionary format received from an external Threat Intelligence source based on indicators from an event.

TICategories

map[string]

-

This field contains categories received from an external TI provider based on the indicators contained in the event.

Timestamp

Number

-

Timestamp of the base event created in the collector. Creation time of the correlation event created by the collector. The time is specified in UTC0. In the KUMA web interface, the value is displayed based in the timezone of the user's browser.

Nested Affected structure

Field

Data type

Description

Assets

Nested [AffectedRecord] list

List and number of assets associated with the alert.

Accounts

Nested [AffectedRecord] list

List and number of user accounts associated with the alert.

Nested AffectedRecord structure

Field

Data type

Description

Value

String

ID of the asset or user account.

Count

Number

The number of times an asset or user account appears in alert-related events.

Fields generated by KUMA

KUMA generates the following fields that cannot be modified: BranchID, BranchName, DestinationAccountName, DestinationAssetName, DeviceAssetName, SourceAccountName, SourceAssetName, TenantName.

Page top

[Topic 233888]

Alert data model

This section describes the KUMA alert data model. Alerts are created by correlators whenever information security threats are detected using correlation rules. Alerts must be investigated to eliminate these threats.

Alert field

Data type

Description

ID

String

Unique ID of the alert.

TenantID

String

ID of the tenant that owns the alert. The value is inherited from the correlator that generated the alert.

TenantName

String

Tenant name.

CorrelationRuleID

String

ID of the rule used as the basis for generating the alert.

CorrelationRuleName

String

Name of the correlation rule used as the basis for generating the alert.

Status

String

Alert status. Possible values:

  • New—new alert.
  • Assigned—the alert is assigned to a user.
  • Closed—the alert was closed.
  • Exported to IRP—the alert was exported to the IRP system for further investigation.
  • Escalated—an incident was generated based on this alert.

Priority

Number

Alert severity. Possible values:

  • 1–4 — Low.
  • 5–8 — Medium.
  • 9–12 — High.
  • 13–16 — Critical.

ManualPriority

TRUE/FALSE string

Parameter showing how the alert severity level was determined. Possible values:

  • true—defined by the user.
  • false (default value)—calculated automatically.

FirstSeen

Number

Time when the first correlation event was created from the alert.

LastSeen

Number

Time when the last correlation event was created from the alert.

UpdatedAt           

Number

Date of the last modification to the alert parameters.

UserID               

String

ID of the KUMA user assigned to examine the alert.

UserName 

String

Name of the KUMA user assigned to examine the alert.
 

GroupedBy

Nested list of strings

List of event fields used to group events in the correlation rule.

ClosingReason

String

Reason for closing the alert. Possible values:

  • Incorrect Correlation Rule—the alert was a false positive and the received events do not indicate a real security threat. The correlation rule may need to be updated.
  • Incorrect Data—the alert was a false positive and the received events do not indicate a real security threat.
  • Responded—the appropriate measures were taken to eliminate the security threat.

Overflow             

TRUE/FALSE string

Indicator that the alert is overflowed, which means that the size of the alert and the events associated with it exceeds 16 MB. Possible values:

  • true
  • false

MaxAssetsWeightStr   

String

Maximum severity of the asset categories associated with the alert.

IntegrationID

String

ID of the alert in the IRP / SOAR application, if integration with such an application is configured in KUMA.

ExternalReference

String

Link to a section in the IRP / SOAR application that displays information about an alert imported from KUMA.

IncidentID 

String

ID of the incident to which the alert is linked.

IncidentName

String

Name of the incident to which the alert is linked.

SegmentationRuleName

String

Name of the segmentation rule used to group correlation events in the alert.

BranchID      

String

ID of the hierarchy branch in which the alert was generated. Indicated for a hierarchical deployment of KUMA.

BranchName  

String

Name of the hierarchy branch in which the alert was generated. Indicated for a hierarchical deployment of KUMA.

Actions

Nested [Action] structure

Nested structure with lines indicating changes to alert statuses and assignments, and user comments.

Events

Nested [EventWrapper] structure

Nested structure from which you can query the correlation events associated with the alert.

Assets

Nested [Asset] structure

Nested structure from which you can query assets associated with the alert.

Accounts

Nested [Account] structure

Nested structure from which you can query the user accounts associated with the alert.

AffectedAssets

Nested [Affected] structure

Nested structure from which you can query alert-related assets and user accounts, and find out the number of times they appear in alert events.

Nested Affected structure

Field

Data type

Description

Assets

Nested [AffectedRecord] list

List and number of assets associated with the alert.

Accounts

Nested [AffectedRecord] list

List and number of user accounts associated with the alert.

Nested AffectedRecord structure

Field

Data type

Description

Value

String

ID of the asset or user account.

Count

Number

The number of times an asset or user account appears in alert-related events.

Nested EventWrapper structure

Field

Data type

Description

Event

Nested [Event] structure

Event fields.

Comment

String

Comment added when events were added to the alert.

LinkedAt

Number

Date when events were added to the alert.

Nested Action structure

Field

Data type

Description

CreatedAt

Number

Date when the action was taken on the alert.

UserID

String

User ID.

Kind

String

Type of action.

Value

String

Value.

Event

Nested [Event] structure

Event fields.

ClusterID

String

Cluster ID.

Page top

[Topic 234818]

Asset data model

The structure of an asset is represented by fields that contain values. Fields can also contain nested structures.

Asset field

Value type

Description

ID

String

Asset ID.

TenantName

String

Tenant name.

DeletedAt

Number

Asset deletion date.

CreatedAt

Number

Asset creation date.

TenantID

String

Tenant ID.

DirectCategories

Nested list of strings

Asset categories.

CategoryModels

Nested [Category] structure

Changes asset categories.

AffectedByIncidents

Nested dictionary:

[string:string TRUE/FALSE]

IDs of incidents.

IPAddress

Nested list of strings

Asset IP addresses.

FQDN

String

Asset FQDN.

Weight

Number

Asset importance.

Deleted

String with TRUE/FALSE values

Indicator of whether the asset has been marked for deletion from KUMA.

UpdatedAt

Number

Date of last update of the asset.

MACAddress

Nested list of strings

Asset MAC addresses.

IPAddressInt

Nested list of numbers

IP address in number format.

Owner

Nested [OwnerInfo] structure

Asset owner information.

OS

Nested [OS] structure

Asset operating system information.

displayName

String

Asset name.

APISoft

Nested [Software] structure

Software installed on the asset.

APIVulns

Nested [Vulnerability] structure

Asset vulnerabilities.

KICSServerIp

String

KICS for Networks server IP address.

KICSConnectorID

Number

KICS for Networks connector ID.

KICSDeviceID

Number

KICS for Networks asset ID.

KICSStatus

String

KICS for Networks asset status.

KICSHardware

Nested [KICSSystemInfo] structure

Asset hardware information received from KICS for Networks.

KICSSoft

Nested [KICSSystemInfo] structure

Asset software information received from KICS for Networks.

KICSRisks

Nested [KICSRisk] structure

Asset vulnerability information received from KICS for Networks.

Sources

Nested [Sources] structure

Basic information about the asset from various sources.

FromKSC

String with TRUE/FALSE values

Indicator that asset details have been imported from KSC.

NAgentID

String

ID of the KSC Agent from which the asset information was received.

KSCServerFQDN

String

FQDN of the KSC Server.

KSCInstanceID

String

KSC instance ID.

KSCMasterHostname

String

KSC Server host name.

KSCGroupID

Number

KSC group ID.

KSCGroupName

String

KSC group name.

LastVisible

Number

Date when information about the asset was last received from KSC.

Products

Nested dictionary:

[string:nested [ProductInfo] structure]

Information about Kaspersky applications installed on the asset received from KSC.

Hardware

Nested [Hardware] structure

Asset hardware information received from KSC.

KSCSoft

Nested [Software] structure

Asset software information received from KSC.

KSCVulns

Nested [Vulnerability] structure

Asset vulnerability information received from KSC.

Nested Category structure

Field

Value type

Description

ID

String

Category ID.

TenantID

String

Tenant ID.

TenantName

String

Tenant name.

Parent

String

Parent category.

Path

Nested list of strings

Structure of categories.

Name

String

Category name.

UpdatedAt

Number

Last update of the category.

CreatedAt

Number

Category creation date.

Description

String

Category description.

Weight

Number

Category importance.

CategorizationKind

String

Asset category assignment type.

CategorizationAt

Number

Categorization date.

CategorizationInterval

String

Category assignment interval.

Nested OwnerInfo structure

Field

Value type

Description

displayName

String

Name of the asset owner.

Nested OS structure

Field

Value type

Description

Name

String

Name of the operating system.

BuildNumber

Number

Operating system version.

Nested Software structure

Field

Value type

Description

displayName

String

Software name.

DisplayVersion

String

Software version.

Publisher

String

Software publisher.

InstallDate

String

Installation date.

HasMSIInstaller

TRUE/FALSE string

Indicates whether the software has an MSI installer.

Nested Vulnerability structure

Field

Value type

Description

KasperskyID

String

Vulnerability ID assigned by Kaspersky.

ProductName

String

Software name.

DescriptionURL

String

URL containing the vulnerability description.

RecommendedMajorPatch

String

Recommended update.

RecommendedMinorPatch

String

Recommended update.

SeverityStr

String

Vulnerability severity.

Severity

Number

Vulnerability severity.

CVE

Nested list of strings

CVE vulnerability ID.

ExploitExists

TRUE/FALSE string

Indicates whether an exploit exists.

MalwareExists

TRUE/FALSE string

Indicates whether malware exists.

Nested KICSSystemInfo structure

Field

Value type

Description

Model

String

Device model.

Version

String

Device version.

Vendor

String

Vendor.

Nested KICSRisk structure

Field

Value type

Description

ID

Number

KICS for Networks risk ID.

Name

String

Risk name.

Category

String

Risk type.

Description

String

Risk description.

DescriptionURL

String

Link to risk description.

Severity

Number

Risk severity.

Cvss

Number

CVSS score.

Nested Sources structure

Field

Value type

Description

KSC

Nested [SourceInfo] structure

Asset information received from KSC.

API

Nested [SourceInfo] structure

Asset information received through the REST API.

Manual

Nested [SourceInfo] structure

Manually entered information about the asset.

KICS

Nested [SourceInfo] structure

Asset information received from KICS for Networks.

Nested Sources structure

Field

Value type

Description

MACAddress

Nested list of strings

Asset MAC addresses.

IPAddressInt

Nested list of numbers

IP address in number format.

Owner

Nested [OwnerInfo] structure

Asset owner information.

OS

Nested [OS] structure

Asset operating system information.

displayName

String

Asset name.

IPAddress

Nested list of strings

Asset IP addresses.

FQDN

String

Asset FQDN.

Weight

Number

Asset importance.

Deleted

String with TRUE/FALSE values

Indicator of whether the asset has been marked for deletion from KUMA.

UpdatedAt

Number

Date of last update of the asset.

Nested structure ProductInfo

Field

Value type

Description

ProductVersion

String

Software version.

ProductName

String

Software name.

Nested Hardware structure

Field

Value type

Description

NetCards

Nested [NetCard] structure

List of network cards of the asset.

CPU

Nested [CPU] structure

List of asset processors.

RAM

Nested [RAM] structure

Asset RAM list.

Disk

Nested [Disk] structure

List of asset drives.

Nested NetCard structure

Field

Value type

Description

ID

String

Network card ID.

MACAddresses

Nested list of strings

MAC addresses of the network card.

Name

String

Network card name.

Manufacture

String

Network card manufacture.

DriverVersion

String

Driver version.

Nested RAM structure

Field

Value type

Description

Frequency

String

RAM frequency.

TotalBytes

Number

Amount of RAM, in bytes.

Nested CPU structure

Field

Value type

Description

ID

String

CPU ID.

Name

String

CPU name.

CoreCount

String

Number of cores.

CoreSpeed

String

Frequency.

Nested Disk structure

Field

Value type

Description

FreeBytes

Number

Available disk space.

TotalBytes

Number

Total disk space.

Page top

[Topic 234819]

User account data model

User account fields can be queried from email templates and during event correlation.

Field

Value type

Description

ID

String

User account ID.

ObjectGUID

String

Active Directory attribute. User account ID in Active Directory.

TenantID

String

Tenant ID.

TenantName

String

Tenant name.

UpdatedAt

Number

Last update of user account.

Domain

String

Domain.

CN

String

Active Directory attribute. User name.

displayName

String

Active Directory attribute. Displayed user name.

DistinguishedName

String

Active Directory attribute. LDAP object name.

employeeID

String

Active Directory attribute. Employee ID.

Mail

String

Active Directory attribute. User email address.

mailNickname

String

Active Directory attribute. Alternate email address.

Mobile

String

Active Directory attribute. Mobile phone number.

ObjectSID

String

Active Directory attribute. Security ID.

SAMAccountName

String

Active Directory attribute. Login.

TelephoneNumber

String

Active Directory attribute. Phone number.

UserPrincipalName

String

Active Directory attribute. User principal name (UPN).

Archived

TRUE/FALSE string

Indicator that determines whether a user account is obsolete.

MemberOf

List of strings

Active Directory attribute. AD groups joined by the user.

This attribute can be used for an event search during correlation.

PreliminarilyArchived

TRUE/FALSE string

Indicator that determines whether a user account should be designated as obsolete.

CreatedAt

Number

User account creation date.

SN

String

Active Directory attribute. Last name of the user.

SAMAccountType

String

Active Directory attribute. User account type.

Title

String

Active Directory attribute. Job title of the user.

Division

String

Active Directory attribute. User's department.

Department

String

Active Directory attribute. User's division.

Manager

String

Active Directory attribute. User's supervisor.

Location

String

Active Directory attribute. User's location.

Company

String

Active Directory attribute. User's company.

StreetAddress

String

Active Directory attribute. Company address.

PhysicalDeliveryOfficeName

String

Active Directory attribute. Delivery address.

managedObjects

List of strings

Active Directory attribute. Objects under control of the user.

UserAccountControl

Number

Active Directory attribute. AD account type.

WhenCreated

Number

Active Directory attribute. User account creation date.

WhenChanged

Number

Active Directory attribute. User account modification date.

AccountExpires

Number

Active Directory attribute. User account expiration date.

BadPasswordTime

Number

Active Directory attribute. Date of last unsuccessful login attempt.

Page top

[Topic 217744]

KUMA audit events

Audit events are created when certain security-related actions are completed in KUMA. These events are used to ensure system integrity. This section covers the KUMA audit events.

In this section

Event fields with general information

User was successfully signed in or failed to sign in

User login successfully changed

User role was successfully changed

Other data of the user was successfully changed

User successfully logged out

User password was successfully changed

User was successfully created

User role was successfully assigned

User role was successfully revoked

User access token was successfully changed

Service was successfully created

Service was successfully deleted

Service was successfully reloaded

Service was successfully restarted

Service was successfully started

Service was successfully paired

Service status was changed

Storage partition was deleted by user

Storage partition was deleted automatically due to expiration

Active list was successfully cleared or operation failed

Active list item was successfully changed, or operation was unsuccessful

Active list item was successfully deleted or operation was unsuccessful

Active list was successfully imported or operation failed

Active list was exported successfully

Resource was successfully added

Resource was successfully deleted

Resource was successfully updated

Asset was successfully created

Asset was successfully deleted

Asset category was successfully added

Asset category was deleted successfully

Settings were updated successfully

Tenant was successfully created

Tenant was successfully enabled

Tenant was successfully disabled

Other tenant data was successfully changed

Updated data retention policy after changing drives

The dictionary was successfully updated on the service or operation was unsuccessful

Response in Active Directory

Response via KICS for Networks

Kaspersky Automated Security Awareness Platform response

KEDR response

Page top

[Topic 217865]

Event fields with general information

Every audit event has the event fields described below.

Event field name

Field value

ID

Unique event ID in the form of an UUID.

Timestamp

Event time.

DeviceHostName

The event source host. For audit events, it is the hostname where kuma-core is installed, because it is the source of events.

DeviceTimeZone

Timezone of the system time of the server hosting the KUMA Core in the format +-hh:mm.

Type

Type of the audit event. For audit event the value is 4.

TenantID

ID of the main tenant.

DeviceVendor

Kaspersky

DeviceProduct

KUMA

EndTime

Event creation time.

Page top

[Topic 218034]

User was successfully signed in or failed to sign in

Event field name

Field value

DeviceAction

user login

EventOutcome

succeeded or failed—the status depends on the success or failure of the operation.

SourceTranslatedAddress

This field contains the value of the HTTP header x-real-ip or x-forwarded-for. If these headers are absent, the field will be empty.

SourceAddress

The address from which the user logged in. If the user logged in using a proxy, there will be a proxy address.

SourcePort

Port from which the user logged in. If the user logged in using a proxy, there will be a port on the proxy side.

SourceUserName

User login.

SourceUserID

User ID.

Message

Description of the error; appears only if an error occurred during login. Otherwise, the field will be empty.

Page top

[Topic 218028]

User login successfully changed

Event field name

Field value

DeviceAction

user login changed

EventOutcome

succeeded

SourceTranslatedAddress

This field contains the value of the HTTP header x-real-ip or x-forwarded-for. If these headers are absent, the field will be empty.

SourceAddress

The address from which the user logged in. If the user logged in using a proxy, there will be a proxy address.

SourcePort

Port from which the user logged in. If the user logged in using a proxy, there will be a port on the proxy side.

SourceUserName

User login that was used to change data.

SourceUserID

User ID that was used to change data.

DestinationUserName

User login whose data was changed.

DestinationUserID

User ID whose data was changed.

DeviceCustomString1

Current value of the login.

DeviceCustomString1Label

new login

DeviceCustomString2

Value of the login before it was changed.

DeviceCustomString2Label

old login

Page top

[Topic 218030]

User role was successfully changed

Event field name

Field value

DeviceAction

user role changed

EventOutcome

succeeded

SourceTranslatedAddress

This field contains the value of the HTTP header x-real-ip or x-forwarded-for. If these headers are absent, the field will be empty.

SourceAddress

The address from which the user logged in. If the user logged in using a proxy, there will be a proxy address.

SourcePort

Port from which the user logged in. If the user logged in using a proxy, there will be a port on the proxy side.

SourceUserName

User login that was used to change data.

SourceUserID

User ID that was used to change data.

DestinationUserName

User login whose data was changed.

DestinationUserID

User ID whose data was changed.

DeviceCustomString1

Current value of the role.

DeviceCustomString1Label

new role

DeviceCustomString2

Value of the role before it was changed.

DeviceCustomString2Label

old role

Page top

[Topic 217947]

Other data of the user was successfully changed

Event field name

Field value

DeviceAction

user other info changed

EventOutcome

succeeded

SourceTranslatedAddress

This field contains the value of the HTTP header x-real-ip or x-forwarded-for. If these headers are absent, the field will be empty.

SourceAddress

The address from which the user logged in. If the user logged in using a proxy, there will be a proxy address.

SourcePort

Port from which the user logged in. If the user logged in using a proxy, there will be a port on the proxy side.

SourceUserName

User login that was used to change data.

SourceUserID

User ID that was used to change data.

DestinationUserName

User login whose data was changed.

DestinationUserID

User ID whose data was changed.

Page top

[Topic 218032]

User successfully logged out

This event appears only when the user pressed the logout button.

This event will not appear if the user is logged out due to the end of the session or if the user logs in again from another browser.

Event field name

Field value

DeviceAction

user logout

EventOutcome

succeeded

SourceTranslatedAddress

This field contains the value of the HTTP header x-real-ip or x-forwarded-for. If these headers are absent, the field will be empty.

SourceAddress

The address from which the user logged in. If the user logged in using a proxy, there will be a proxy address.

SourcePort

Port from which the user logged in. If the user logged in using a proxy, there will be a port on the proxy side.

SourceUserName

User login.

SourceUserID

User ID.

Page top

[Topic 218029]

User password was successfully changed

Event field name

Field value

DeviceAction

user password changed

EventOutcome

succeeded

SourceTranslatedAddress

This field contains the value of the HTTP header x-real-ip or x-forwarded-for. If these headers are absent, the field will be empty.

SourceAddress

The address from which the user logged in. If the user logged in using a proxy, there will be a proxy address.

SourcePort

Port from which the user logged in. If the user logged in using a proxy, there will be a port on the proxy side.

SourceUserName

User login that was used to change data.

SourceUserID

User ID that was used to change data.

DestinationUserName

User login whose data was changed.

DestinationUserID

User ID whose data was changed.

Page top

[Topic 218033]

User was successfully created

Event field name

Field value

DeviceAction

user created

EventOutcome

succeeded

SourceTranslatedAddress

This field contains the value of the HTTP header x-real-ip or x-forwarded-for. If these headers are absent, the field will be empty.

SourceAddress

The address from which the user logged in. If the user logged in using a proxy, there will be a proxy address.

SourcePort

Port from which the user logged in. If the user logged in using a proxy, there will be a port on the proxy side.

SourceUserName

User login that was used to create the user account.

SourceUserID

User ID that was used to create the user account.

DestinationUserName

User login for which the user account was created.

DestinationUserID

User ID for which the user account was created.

DeviceCustomString1

Role of the created user.

DeviceCustomString1Label

role

Page top

[Topic 241703]

User role was successfully assigned

Event field name

Field value

DeviceAction

granted access

EventOutcome

succeeded

SourceTranslatedAddress

This field contains the value of the HTTP header x-real-ip or x-forwarded-for. If these headers are absent, the field will be empty.

SourceAddress

The address from which the user logged in. If the user logged in using a proxy, there will be a proxy address.

SourcePort

Port from which the user logged in. If the user logged in using a proxy, there will be a port on the proxy side.

SourceUserName

Login of the user for whom the data changes were made.

SourceUserID

ID of the user for whom the data changes were made.

DestinationUserPrivileges

Role name. Available values: general admin, admin, analyst, operator.

DeviceCustomString5

ID of the tenant used to assign the role.

DeviceCustomString5Label

tenant ID

DeviceCustomString6

Tenant name.

DeviceCustomString6Label

tenant name

Page top

[Topic 241712]

User role was successfully revoked

Event field name

Field value

DeviceAction

revoked access

EventOutcome

succeeded

SourceTranslatedAddress

This field contains the value of the HTTP header x-real-ip or x-forwarded-for. If these headers are absent, the field will be empty.

SourceAddress

The address from which the user logged in. If the user logged in using a proxy, there will be a proxy address.

SourcePort

Port from which the user logged in. If the user logged in using a proxy, there will be a port on the proxy side.

SourceUserName

Login of the user who makes the changes.

SourceUserID

ID of the user who makes the changes.

DestinationUserName

Login of the user for whom the changes are made.

DestinationUserID

ID of the user for whom the changes are made.

DestinationUserPrivileges

Role name. Available values: general admin, admin, analyst, operator.

DeviceCustomString5

ID of the tenant used to assign the role.

DeviceCustomString5Label

tenant ID

DeviceCustomString6

Tenant name.

DeviceCustomString6Label

tenant name

Page top

[Topic 218027]

User access token was successfully changed

Event field name

Field value

DeviceAction

user access token changed

EventOutcome

succeeded

SourceTranslatedAddress

This field contains the value of the HTTP header x-real-ip or x-forwarded-for. If these headers are absent, the field will be empty.

SourceAddress

The address from which the user logged in. If the user logged in using a proxy, there will be a proxy address.

SourcePort

Port from which the user logged in. If the user logged in using a proxy, there will be a port on the proxy side.

SourceUserName

User login that was used to change data.

SourceUserID

User ID that was used to change the data.

DestinationUserName

User login whose data was changed.

DestinationUserID

ID of the user whose data was changed.

Page top

[Topic 217997]

Service was successfully created

Event field name

Field value

DeviceAction

service created

EventOutcome

succeeded

SourceTranslatedAddress

This field contains the value of the HTTP header x-real-ip or x-forwarded-for. If these headers are absent, the field will be empty.

SourceAddress

The address from which the user logged in. If the user logged in using a proxy, there will be a proxy address.

SourcePort

Port from which the user logged in. If the user logged in using a proxy, there will be a port on the proxy side.

SourceUserName

User login that was used to create the service.

SourceUserID

User ID that was used to create the service.

DeviceExternalID

Service ID.

DeviceProcessName

Service name.

DeviceFacility

Service type.

DeviceCustomString5

Tenant ID.

DeviceCustomString5Label

tenant ID

DeviceCustomString6

Tenant name.

DeviceCustomString6Label

tenant name

Page top

[Topic 217998]

Service was successfully deleted

Event field name

Field value

DeviceAction

service deleted

EventOutcome

succeeded

SourceTranslatedAddress

This field contains the value of the HTTP header x-real-ip or x-forwarded-for. If these headers are absent, the field will be empty.

SourceAddress

The address from which the user logged in. If the user logged in using a proxy, there will be a proxy address.

SourcePort

Port from which the user logged in. If the user logged in using a proxy, there will be a port on the proxy side.

SourceUserName

User login that was used to delete the service.

SourceUserID

User ID that was used to delete the service.

DeviceExternalID

Service ID.

DeviceProcessName

Service name.

DeviceFacility

Service type.

DestinationAddress

Address of the device that was used to start the service. If the service has never been started before, the field will be empty.

DestinationHostName

The FQDN of the machine that was used to start the service. If the service has never been started before, the field will be empty.

DeviceCustomString5

Tenant ID.

DeviceCustomString5Label

tenant ID

DeviceCustomString6

Tenant name.

DeviceCustomString6Label

tenant name

Page top

[Topic 218000]

Service was successfully reloaded

Event field name

Field value

DeviceAction

service reloaded

EventOutcome

succeeded

SourceTranslatedAddress

This field contains the value of the HTTP header x-real-ip or x-forwarded-for. If these headers are absent, the field will be empty.

SourceAddress

The address from which the user logged in. If the user logged in using a proxy, there will be a proxy address.

SourcePort

Port from which the user logged in. If the user logged in using a proxy, there will be a port on the proxy side.

SourceUserName

User login that was used to reset the service.

SourceUserID

User ID that was used to restart the service.

DeviceExternalID

Service ID.

DeviceProcessName

Service name.

DeviceFacility

Service type.

DeviceCustomString5

Tenant ID.

DeviceCustomString5Label

tenant ID

DeviceCustomString6

Tenant name.

DeviceCustomString6Label

tenant name

Page top

[Topic 218001]

Service was successfully restarted

Event field name

Field value

DeviceAction

service restarted

EventOutcome

succeeded

SourceTranslatedAddress

This field contains the value of the HTTP header x-real-ip or x-forwarded-for. If these headers are absent, the field will be empty.

SourceAddress

The address from which the user logged in. If the user logged in using a proxy, there will be a proxy address.

SourcePort

Port from which the user logged in. If the user logged in using a proxy, there will be a port on the proxy side.

SourceUserName

User login that was used to restart the service.

SourceUserID

User ID that was used to restart the service.

DeviceExternalID

Service ID.

DeviceProcessName

Service name.

DeviceFacility

Service type.

DeviceCustomString5

Tenant ID.

DeviceCustomString5Label

tenant ID

DeviceCustomString6

Tenant name.

DeviceCustomString6Label

tenant name

Page top

[Topic 218002]

Service was successfully started

Event field name

Field value

DeviceAction

service started

EventOutcome

succeeded

SourceTranslatedAddress

This field contains the value of the HTTP header x-real-ip or x-forwarded-for. If these headers are absent, the field will be empty.

SourceAddress

Address that reported information about service start. It may be a proxy address if the information passed through a proxy.

SourcePort

Port that reported information about service start. It may be a proxy port if the information passed through a proxy.

DeviceExternalID

Service ID.

DeviceProcessName

Service name.

DeviceFacility

Service type.

DestinationAddress

Address of the device where the service was started.

DestinationHostName

FQDN of the device where the service was started.

DeviceCustomString5

Tenant ID.

DeviceCustomString5Label

tenant ID

DeviceCustomString6

Tenant name.

DeviceCustomString6Label

tenant name

Page top

[Topic 217999]

Service was successfully paired

Event field name

Field value

DeviceAction

service paired

EventOutcome

succeeded

SourceTranslatedAddress

This field contains the value of the HTTP header x-real-ip or x-forwarded-for. If these headers are absent, the field will be empty.

SourceAddress

Address that sent a service pairing request. It may be a proxy address if the request passed through a proxy.

SourcePort

Port that sent a service pairing request. It may be a proxy port if the request passed through a proxy.

DeviceExternalID

Service ID.

DeviceProcessName

Service name.

DeviceFacility

Service type.

DeviceCustomString5

Tenant ID.

DeviceCustomString5Label

tenant ID

DeviceCustomString6

Tenant name.

DeviceCustomString6Label

tenant name

Page top

[Topic 217996]

Service status was changed

Event field name

Field value

DeviceAction

service status changed

DeviceExternalID

Service ID.

DeviceProcessName

Service name.

DeviceFacility

Service type.

DestinationAddress

Address of the device where the service was started.

DestinationHostName

FQDN of the device where the service was started.

DeviceCustomString1

green, yellow, or red

DeviceCustomString1Label

new status

DeviceCustomString2

green, yellow, or red

DeviceCustomString2Label

old status

DeviceCustomString5

Tenant ID.

DeviceCustomString5Label

tenant ID

DeviceCustomString6

Tenant name.

DeviceCustomString6Label

tenant name

Page top

[Topic 218012]

Storage partition was deleted by user

Event field name

Field value

DeviceAction

partition deleted

EventOutcome

succeeded

SourceTranslatedAddress

This field contains the value of the HTTP header x-real-ip or x-forwarded-for. If these headers are absent, the field will be empty.

SourceAddress

The address from which the user logged in. If the user logged in using a proxy, there will be a proxy address.

SourcePort

Port from which the user logged in. If the user logged in using a proxy, there will be a port on the proxy side.

SourceUserName

User login that was used to delete partition.

SourceUserID

User ID that was used to delete partition.

Name

Index name.

Message

deleted by user

Page top

[Topic 218014]

Storage partition was deleted automatically due to expiration

Event field name

Field value

DeviceAction

partition deleted

EventOutcome

succeeded

Name

Index name

SourceServiceName

scheduler

Message

deleted by retention period settings

Page top

[Topic 217705]

Active list was successfully cleared or operation failed

Audit events for active lists are created only for actions performed by users. Audit events are not generated when the active lists are modified using correlation rules. If you need to track such changes, you can do so using alerts.

If an active list is modified using a correlation rule of the simple type, in which the Output and Loop actions are defined, an active list modification alert will be created each time the rule is triggered.

The event can be assigned the succeeded or failed status.

Since the request to clear an active list is made over a remote connection, a data transfer error may occur at any moment: both before and after deletion.

This means that the active list may be cleared successfully, but the event is assigned the failed status, because EventOutcome returns the TCP/IP connection status of the request, but not the succeeded or failed status of the active list clearing.

Event field name

Field value

DeviceAction

active list cleared

EventOutcome

succeeded or failed

SourceTranslatedAddress

This field contains the value of the HTTP header x-real-ip or x-forwarded-for. If these headers are absent, the field will be empty.

SourceAddress

The address from which the user logged in. If the user logged in using a proxy, there will be a proxy address.

SourcePort

Port from which the user logged in. If the user logged in using a proxy, there will be a port on the proxy side.

SourceUserName

User login that was used to clear the active list.

SourceUserID

User ID that was used to clear the active list.

DeviceExternalID

Service ID whose active list was cleared.

ExternalID

Active list ID.

Name

Active list name.

Message

If EventOutcome = failed, an error message can be found here.

DeviceCustomString5

Service tenant ID. Some errors prevent adding tenant information to the event.

DeviceCustomString5Label

tenant ID

DeviceCustomString6

Tenant name.

DeviceCustomString6Label

tenant name

Page top

[Topic 241746]

Active list item was successfully changed, or operation was unsuccessful

Audit events for active lists are created only for actions performed by users. Audit events are not generated when the active lists are modified using correlation rules. If you need to track such changes, you can do so using alerts.

If an active list is modified using a correlation rule of the simple type, in which the Output and Loop actions are defined, an active list modification alert will be created each time the rule is triggered.

The event can be assigned the succeeded or failed status.

Since the request to change an active list item is made over a remote connection, a data transfer error may occur at any moment: both before and after the change.

This means that the active list item may be changed successfully, but the event is assigned the failed status, because EventOutcome returns the TCP/IP connection status of the request, but not the succeeded or failed status of the active list item change.

Event field name

Field value

DeviceAction

active list item changed

EventOutcome

succeeded or failed

SourceTranslatedAddress

This field contains the value of the HTTP header x-real-ip or x-forwarded-for. If these headers are absent, the field will be empty.

SourceAddress

The address from which the user logged in. If the user logged in using a proxy, there will be a proxy address.

SourcePort

Port from which the user logged in. If the user logged in using a proxy, there will be a port on the proxy side.

SourceUserName

User login used to change the active list item.

SourceUserID

User ID used to change the active list item.

DeviceExternalID

Service ID for which the active list is changed.

ExternalID

Active list ID.

Name

Active list name.

DeviceCustomString1

Key name.

DeviceCustomString1Label

key

Message

If EventOutcome = failed, an error message can be found here.

DeviceCustomString5

Service tenant ID. Some errors prevent adding tenant information to the event.

DeviceCustomString5Label

tenant ID

DeviceCustomString6

Tenant name

DeviceCustomString6Label

tenant name

Page top

[Topic 217703]

Active list item was successfully deleted or operation was unsuccessful

Audit events for active lists are created only for actions performed by users. Audit events are not generated when the active lists are modified using correlation rules. If you need to track such changes, you can do so using alerts.

If an active list is modified using a correlation rule of the simple type, in which the Output and Loop actions are defined, an active list modification alert will be created each time the rule is triggered.

The event can be assigned the succeeded or failed status.

Since the request to delete an active list item is made over a remote connection, a data transfer error may occur at any moment: both before and after deletion.

This means that the active list item may be deleted successfully, but the event is assigned the failed status, because EventOutcome returns the TCP/IP connection status of the request, but not the succeeded or failed status of the active list item deletion.

Event field name

Field value

DeviceAction

active list item deleted

EventOutcome

succeeded or failed

SourceTranslatedAddress

This field contains the value of the HTTP header x-real-ip or x-forwarded-for. If these headers are absent, the field will be empty.

SourceAddress

The address from which the user logged in. If the user logged in using a proxy, there will be a proxy address.

SourcePort

Port from which the user logged in. If the user logged in using a proxy, there will be a port on the proxy side.

SourceUserName

User login that was used to delete the item from the active list.

SourceUserID

User ID that was used to delete the item from the active list.

DeviceExternalID

Service ID whose active list was cleared.

ExternalID

Active list ID.

Name

Active list name.

DeviceCustomString1

Key name.

DeviceCustomString1Label

key

Message

If EventOutcome = failed, an error message can be found here.

DeviceCustomString5

Service tenant ID. Some errors prevent adding tenant information to the event.

DeviceCustomString5Label

tenant ID

DeviceCustomString6

Tenant name.

DeviceCustomString6Label

tenant name

Page top

[Topic 217706]

Active list was successfully imported or operation failed

Audit events for active lists are created only for actions performed by users. Audit events are not generated when the active lists are modified using correlation rules. If you need to track such changes, you can do so using alerts.

If an active list is modified using a correlation rule of the simple type, in which the Output and Loop actions are defined, an active list modification alert will be created each time the rule is triggered.

Active list items are imported in parts via a remote connection.

Since the import is performed via a remote connection, a data transfer error can occur at any time: when the data is imported partially or completely. EventOutcome returns the connection status, not the import status.

Event field name

Field value

DeviceAction

active list imported

EventOutcome

succeeded or failed

SourceTranslatedAddress

This field contains the value of the HTTP header x-real-ip or x-forwarded-for. If these headers are absent, the field will be empty.

SourceAddress

The address from which the user logged in. If the user logged in using a proxy, there will be a proxy address.

SourcePort

Port from which the user logged in. If the user logged in using a proxy, there will be a port on the proxy side.

SourceUserName

User login that was used to perform the import.

SourceUserID

User ID that was used to perform the import.

DeviceExternalID

Service ID for which an import was performed.

ExternalID

Active list ID.

Name

Active list name.

Message

If EventOutcome = failed, an error message can be found here.

DeviceCustomString5

Service tenant ID. Some errors prevent adding tenant information to the event.

DeviceCustomString5Label

tenant ID

DeviceCustomString6

Tenant name

DeviceCustomString6Label

tenant name

Page top

[Topic 217704]

Active list was exported successfully

Audit events for active lists are created only for actions performed by users. Audit events are not generated when the active lists are modified using correlation rules. If you need to track such changes, you can do so using alerts.

If an active list is modified using a correlation rule of the simple type, in which the Output and Loop actions are defined, an active list modification alert will be created each time the rule is triggered.

Event field name

Field value

DeviceAction

active list exported

EventOutcome

succeeded

SourceTranslatedAddress

This field contains the value of the HTTP header x-real-ip or x-forwarded-for. If these headers are absent, the field will be empty.

SourceAddress

The address from which the user logged in. If the user logged in using a proxy, there will be a proxy address.

SourcePort

Port from which the user logged in. If the user logged in using a proxy, there will be a port on the proxy side.

SourceUserName

User login that was used to perform the export.

SourceUserID

User ID that was used to perform the export.

DeviceExternalID

Service ID for which an export was performed.

ExternalID

Active list ID.

Name

Active list name.

DeviceCustomString5

Service tenant ID. Some errors prevent adding tenant information to the event.

DeviceCustomString5Label

tenant ID

DeviceCustomString6

Tenant name

DeviceCustomString6Label

tenant name

Page top

[Topic 217968]

Resource was successfully added

Event field name

Field value

DeviceAction

resource added

EventOutcome

succeeded

SourceTranslatedAddress

This field contains the value of the HTTP header x-real-ip or x-forwarded-for. If these headers are absent, the field will be empty.

SourceAddress

The address from which the user logged in. If the user logged in using a proxy, there will be a proxy address.

SourcePort

Port from which the user logged in. If the user logged in using a proxy, there will be a port on the proxy side.

SourceUserName

User login that was used to add the resource.

SourceUserID

User ID that was used to add the resource.

DeviceExternalID

Resource ID.

DeviceProcessName

Resource name.

DeviceFacility

Resource type:

  • activeList
  • agent
  • aggregationRule
  • collector
  • connection
  • connector
  • correlationRule
  • correlator
  • destination
  • dictionary
  • enrichmentRule
  • filter
  • normalizer
  • proxy
  • responseRule
  • storage

DeviceCustomString5

Tenant ID.

DeviceCustomString5Label

tenant ID

DeviceCustomString6

Tenant name.

DeviceCustomString6Label

tenant name

Page top

[Topic 217969]

Resource was successfully deleted

Event field name

Field value

DeviceAction

resource deleted

EventOutcome

succeeded

SourceTranslatedAddress

This field contains the value of the HTTP header x-real-ip or x-forwarded-for. If these headers are absent, the field will be empty.

SourceAddress

The address from which the user logged in. If the user logged in using a proxy, there will be a proxy address.

SourcePort

Port from which the user logged in. If the user logged in using a proxy, there will be a port on the proxy side.

SourceUserName

User login that was used to delete the resource.

SourceUserID

User ID that was used to delete the resource.

DeviceExternalID

Resource ID.

DeviceProcessName

Resource name.

DeviceFacility

Resource type:

  • activeList
  • agent
  • aggregationRule
  • collector
  • connection
  • connector
  • correlationRule
  • correlator
  • destination
  • dictionary
  • enrichmentRule
  • filter
  • normalizer
  • proxy
  • responseRule
  • storage

DeviceCustomString5

Tenant ID.

DeviceCustomString5Label

tenant ID

DeviceCustomString6

Tenant name.

DeviceCustomString6Label

tenant name

Page top

[Topic 217970]

Resource was successfully updated

Event field name

Field value

DeviceAction

resource updated

EventOutcome

succeeded

SourceTranslatedAddress

This field contains the value of the HTTP header x-real-ip or x-forwarded-for. If these headers are absent, the field will be empty.

SourceAddress

The address from which the user logged in. If the user logged in using a proxy, there will be a proxy address.

SourcePort

Port from which the user logged in. If the user logged in using a proxy, there will be a port on the proxy side.

SourceUserName

User login that was used to update the resource.

SourceUserID

User ID that was used to update the resource.

DeviceExternalID

Resource ID.

DeviceProcessName

Resource name.

DeviceFacility

Resource type:

  • activeList
  • agent
  • aggregationRule
  • collector
  • connection
  • connector
  • correlationRule
  • correlator
  • destination
  • dictionary
  • enrichmentRule
  • filter
  • normalizer
  • proxy
  • responseRule
  • storage

DeviceCustomString5

Tenant ID.

DeviceCustomString5Label

tenant ID

DeviceCustomString6

Tenant name.

DeviceCustomString6Label

tenant name

Page top

[Topic 217742]

Asset was successfully created

Event field name

Field value

DeviceAction

asset created

EventOutcome

succeeded

SourceTranslatedAddress

This field contains the value of the HTTP header x-real-ip or x-forwarded-for. If these headers are absent, the field will be empty.

SourceAddress

The address from which the user logged in. If the user logged in using a proxy, there will be a proxy address.

SourcePort

Port from which the user logged in. If the user logged in using a proxy, there will be a port on the proxy side.

SourceUserName

User login that was used to add the asset.

SourceUserID

User ID that was used to add the asset.

DeviceExternalID

Asset ID.

SourceHostName

Asset ID.

Name

Asset name.

DeviceCustomString1

Comma-separated IP addresses of the asset.

DeviceCustomString1Label

addresses

DeviceCustomString5

Tenant ID.

DeviceCustomString5Label

tenant ID

DeviceCustomString6

Tenant name.

DeviceCustomString6Label

tenant name

Page top

[Topic 217741]

Asset was successfully deleted

Event field name

Field value

DeviceAction

asset deleted

EventOutcome

succeeded

SourceTranslatedAddress

This field contains the value of the HTTP header x-real-ip or x-forwarded-for. If these headers are absent, the field will be empty.

SourceAddress

The address from which the user logged in. If the user logged in using a proxy, there will be a proxy address.

SourcePort

Port from which the user logged in. If the user logged in using a proxy, there will be a port on the proxy side.

SourceUserName

User login that was used to add the asset.

SourceUserID

User ID that was used to add the asset.

DeviceExternalID

Asset ID.

SourceHostName

Asset ID.

Name

Asset name.

DeviceCustomString1

Comma-separated IP addresses of the asset.

DeviceCustomString1Label

addresses

DeviceCustomString5

Tenant ID.

DeviceCustomString5Label

tenant ID

DeviceCustomString6

Tenant name.

DeviceCustomString6Label

tenant name

Page top

[Topic 217740]

Asset category was successfully added

Event field name

Field value

DeviceAction

category created

EventOutcome

succeeded

SourceTranslatedAddress

This field contains the value of the HTTP header x-real-ip or x-forwarded-for. If these headers are absent, the field will be empty.

SourceAddress

The address from which the user logged in. If the user logged in using a proxy, there will be a proxy address.

SourcePort

Port from which the user logged in. If the user logged in using a proxy, there will be a port on the proxy side.

SourceUserName

User login that was used to add the category.

SourceUserID

User ID that was used to add the category.

DeviceExternalID

Category ID.

Name

Category name.

DeviceCustomString5

Tenant ID.

DeviceCustomString5Label

tenant ID

DeviceCustomString6

Tenant name.

DeviceCustomString6Label

tenant name

Page top

[Topic 217739]

Asset category was deleted successfully

Event field name

Field value

DeviceAction

category deleted

EventOutcome

succeeded

SourceTranslatedAddress

This field contains the value of the HTTP header x-real-ip or x-forwarded-for. If these headers are absent, the field will be empty.

SourceAddress

The address from which the user logged in. If the user logged in using a proxy, there will be a proxy address.

SourcePort

Port from which the user logged in. If the user logged in using a proxy, there will be a port on the proxy side.

SourceUserName

User login that was used to delete the category.

SourceUserID

User ID that was used to delete the category.

DeviceExternalID

Category ID.

Name

Category name.

DeviceCustomString5

Tenant ID.

DeviceCustomString5Label

tenant ID

DeviceCustomString6

Tenant name.

DeviceCustomString6Label

tenant name

Page top

[Topic 218005]

Settings were updated successfully

Event field name

Field value

DeviceAction

settings updated

EventOutcome

succeeded

SourceTranslatedAddress

This field contains the value of the HTTP header x-real-ip or x-forwarded-for. If these headers are absent, the field will be empty.

SourceAddress

The address from which the user logged in. If the user logged in using a proxy, there will be a proxy address.

SourcePort

Port from which the user logged in. If the user logged in using a proxy, there will be a port on the proxy side.

SourceUserName

User login that was used to update the settings.

SourceUserID

User ID that was used to update the settings.

DeviceFacility

Type of settings.

DeviceCustomString5

Tenant ID.

DeviceCustomString5Label

tenant ID

DeviceCustomString6

Tenant name.

DeviceCustomString6Label

tenant name

Page top

[Topic 241753]

Tenant was successfully created

Event field name

Field value

DeviceAction

tenant created

EventOutcome

succeeded

SourceTranslatedAddress

This field contains the value of the HTTP header x-real-ip or x-forwarded-for. If these headers are absent, the field will be empty.

SourceAddress

The address from which the user logged in. If the user logged in using a proxy, there will be a proxy address.

SourcePort

Port from which the user logged in. If the user logged in using a proxy, there will be a port on the proxy side.

SourceUserName

User login used to create the tenant.

SourceUserID

User ID used to create the tenant.

DeviceCustomString5

Tenant ID.

DeviceCustomString5Label

tenant ID

DeviceCustomString6

Tenant name.

DeviceCustomString6Label

tenant name

Page top

[Topic 241764]

Tenant was successfully enabled

Event field name

Field value

DeviceAction

tenant enabled

EventOutcome

succeeded

SourceTranslatedAddress

This field contains the value of the HTTP header x-real-ip or x-forwarded-for. If these headers are absent, the field will be empty.

SourceAddress

The address from which the user logged in. If the user logged in using a proxy, there will be a proxy address.

SourcePort

Port from which the user logged in. If the user logged in using a proxy, there will be a port on the proxy side.

SourceUserName

User login used to enable the tenant.

SourceUserID

User ID used to enable the tenant.

DeviceCustomString5

Tenant ID.

DeviceCustomString5Label

tenant ID

DeviceCustomString6

Tenant name.

DeviceCustomString6Label

tenant name

Page top

[Topic 241766]

Tenant was successfully disabled

Event field name

Field value

DeviceAction

tenant disabled

EventOutcome

succeeded

SourceTranslatedAddress

This field contains the value of the HTTP header x-real-ip or x-forwarded-for. If these headers are absent, the field will be empty.

SourceAddress

The address from which the user logged in. If the user logged in using a proxy, there will be a proxy address.

SourcePort

Port from which the user logged in. If the user logged in using a proxy, there will be a port on the proxy side.

SourceUserName

User login used to disable the tenant.

SourceUserID

User ID used to disable the tenant.

DeviceCustomString5

Tenant ID.

DeviceCustomString5Label

tenant ID

DeviceCustomString6

Tenant name.

DeviceCustomString6Label

tenant name

Page top

[Topic 241767]

Other tenant data was successfully changed

Event field name

Field value

DeviceAction

tenant other info changed

EventOutcome

succeeded

SourceTranslatedAddress

This field contains the value of the HTTP header x-real-ip or x-forwarded-for. If these headers are absent, the field will be empty.

SourceAddress

The address from which the user logged in. If the user logged in using a proxy, there will be a proxy address.

SourcePort

Port from which the user logged in. If the user logged in using a proxy, there will be a port on the proxy side.

SourceUserName

User login that was used to change the tenant data.

SourceUserID

User ID that was used to change the tenant data.

DeviceCustomString5

Tenant ID.

DeviceCustomString5Label

tenant ID

DeviceCustomString6

Tenant name.

DeviceCustomString6Label

tenant name

Page top

[Topic 241770]

Updated data retention policy after changing drives

Event field name

Field value

DeviceAction

storage policy modified

EventOutcome

succeeded or failed

SourceTranslatedAddress

This field contains the value of the HTTP header x-real-ip or x-forwarded-for. If these headers are absent, the field will be empty.

SourceAddress

The address from which the user logged in. If the user logged in using a proxy, there will be a proxy address.

SourcePort

Port from which the user logged in. If the user logged in using a proxy, there will be a port on the proxy side.

SourceUserName

User login that was used to change the tenant data.

SourceUserID

User ID that was used to change the tenant data.

Page top

[Topic 241769]

The dictionary was successfully updated on the service or operation was unsuccessful

Event field name

Field value

DeviceAction

service created

EventOutcome

succeeded

SourceTranslatedAddress

This field contains the value of the HTTP header x-real-ip or x-forwarded-for. If these headers are absent, the field will be empty.

SourceAddress

The address from which the user logged in. If the user logged in using a proxy, there will be a proxy address.

SourcePort

Port from which the user logged in. If the user logged in using a proxy, there will be a port on the proxy side.

SourceUserName

User login that was used to create the service.

SourceUserID

User ID that was used to create the service.

DeviceExternalID

Service ID.

ExternalID

Dictionary ID.

DeviceProcessName

Service name.

DeviceFacility

Service type.

DeviceCustomString5

Tenant ID.

DeviceCustomString5Label

tenant ID

DeviceCustomString6

Tenant name.

DeviceCustomString6Label

tenant name

Message

If EventOutcome = failed, an error message can be found here.

Page top

[Topic 241775]

Response in Active Directory

Event field name

Field value

DeviceAction

ad response

DeviceFacility

manual response or automatic response

EventOutcome

succeeded or failed

SourceTranslatedAddress

This field contains the value of the HTTP header x-real-ip or x-forwarded-for. If these headers are absent, the field will be empty.

SourceAddress

The address from which the user logged in. If the user logged in using a proxy, there will be a proxy address.

SourcePort

Port from which the user logged in. If the user logged in using a proxy, there will be a port on the proxy side.

SourceUserName

User login that was used to change the tenant data.

SourceUserID

User ID that was used to change the tenant data.

DeviceCustomString3

Response rule name: CHANGE_PASSWORD, ADD_TO_GROUP, REMOVE_FROM_GROUP, BLOCK_USER.

DeviceCustomString3Label

response rule name

DeviceCustomString5

Tenant ID.

DeviceCustomString5Label

tenant ID

DeviceCustomString6

Tenant name.

DeviceCustomString6Label

tenant name

DestinationUserName

The Active Directory user account to which the response is invoked (sAMAccountName).

DestinationNtDomain

Domain of the Active Directory user account to which the response is invoked.

DestinationUserID

Account UUID in KUMA.

FlexString1

Information about the group where the user was added or deleted.

FlexString1Label

group DN

Page top

[Topic 245019]

Response via KICS for Networks

Event field name

Field value

DeviceAction

KICS response

DeviceFacility

manual response or automatic response

EventOutcome

succeeded or failed

SourceTranslatedAddress

This field contains the value of the HTTP header x-real-ip or x-forwarded-for. If these headers are absent, the field will be empty.

SourceAddress

The address from which the user logged in. If the user logged in using a proxy, there will be a proxy address.

SourcePort

Port from which the user logged in. If the user logged in using a proxy, there will be a port on the proxy side.

SourceUserName

Login of the user who sent the request.

SourceUserID

ID of the user who sent the request.

DeviceCustomString3

Response rule name: Authorized, Not Authorized.

DeviceCustomString3Label

response rule name

DeviceCustomString5

Tenant ID.

DeviceCustomString5Label

tenant ID

DeviceCustomString6

Tenant name.

DeviceCustomString6Label

tenant name

DeviceExternalID

Asset ID.

SourceHostName

Asset FQDN.

Name

Asset name.

DeviceCustomString1

List of IP addresses for the asset.

DeviceCustomString1Label

addresses

Page top

[Topic 245020]

Kaspersky Automated Security Awareness Platform response

Event field name

Field value

DeviceAction

KASAP response

DeviceFacility

manual response

EventOutcome

succeeded or failed

Message

Description of the error, if an error occurred, otherwise the field is empty.

SourceTranslatedAddress

This field contains the value of the HTTP header x-real-ip or x-forwarded-for. If these headers are absent, the field will be empty.

SourceAddress

The address from which the user logged in. If the user logged in using a proxy, there will be a proxy address.

SourcePort

Port from which the user logged in. If the user logged in using a proxy, there will be a port on the proxy side.

SourceUserName

Login of the user who sent the request.

SourceUserID

ID of the user who sent the request.

DeviceCustomString1

The manager of the user to whom the course is assigned.

DeviceCustomString1Label

manager

DeviceCustomString3

Information about the group where the user belonged. Not available for failed.

DeviceCustomString3Label

manager

DeviceCustomString4

Information about the group where the user was added.

DeviceCustomString4Label

new kasap group

DeviceCustomString5

Tenant ID.

DeviceCustomString5Label

tenant ID

DeviceCustomString6

Tenant name.

DeviceCustomString6Label

tenant name

DestinationUserID

ID of the Active Directory user account which causes the response.

DestinationUserName

Account name (sAMAccountName).

DestinationNtDomain

Domain of the Active Directory user account which causes the response.

Page top

[Topic 245021]

KEDR response

Event field name

Field value

DeviceAction

KEDR response

DeviceFacility

manual response or automatic response

EventOutcome

succeeded or failed

Message

Description of the error, if an error occurred, otherwise the field is empty.

SourceTranslatedAddress

This field contains the value of the HTTP header x-real-ip or x-forwarded-for. If these headers are absent, the field will be empty.

SourceAddress

The address from which the user logged in. If the user logged in using a proxy, there will be a proxy address.

SourcePort

Port from which the user logged in. If the user logged in using a proxy, there will be a port on the proxy side.

SourceUserName

Login of the user who sent the request.

SourceUserID

ID of the user who sent the request.

SourceAssetID

KUMA asset ID which causes the response. The value is not specified if the response is based on a hash or for all assets.

DeviceExternalID

The external ID assigned to KUMA in KEDR. If there is only one external ID, it is not filled in when started on user hosts.

DeviceCustomString1

List of IP/FQDN addresses of the asset for the host prevention rule based on the selected hash from the event card.

DeviceCustomString1Label

user defined list of ips or hostnames

DeviceCustomString2

Sensor ID parameter in KEDR (UUIDv4 | 'all' | 'custom').

DeviceCustomString2Label

sensor id of asset in KATA/EDR

ServiceID

ID of the service that caused the response. Filled in only in case of automatic response.

DeviceCustomString3

Task type name: enable_network_isolation, disable_network_isolation, enable_prevention, disable_prevention, run_process.

DeviceCustomString3Label

kedr response kind

DeviceCustomString5

Tenant ID.

DeviceCustomString5Label

tenant ID

DeviceCustomString6

Tenant name.

DeviceCustomString6Label

tenant name

Page top

[Topic 250594]

Correlation rules

The file that can be downloaded by clicking the link describes the correlation rules that are included in the distribution kit of Kaspersky Unified Monitoring and Analysis Platform version 2.1. It provides the scenarios covered by rules, the conditions of their use, and the necessary sources of events.

The correlation rules described in this document are contained in the SOC_package file in the KUMA distribution kit; the password for the file is SOC_package1. Only one version of the SOC rule set can be used at a time: either Russian or English.

You can import correlation rules into KUMA. See the "Importing resources" section of the online help: https://support.kaspersky.com/KUMA/2.1/en-US/242787.htm.

You can add imported correlation rules to correlators that your organization uses. See the online help section "Step 3. Correlation": https://support.kaspersky.com/KUMA/2.1/en-US/221168.htm.

Download the description of correlation rules contained in the SOC_package.xlsx file.

Automatic rule suppression

The SOC_package correlation rules package allows automatically suppressing the triggering of rules if the triggering frequency exceeds thresholds.

The automatic suppression option works as follows: if a rule is triggered more than 100 times in 1 minute and this behavior occurs at least 5 times in the span of 10 minutes, the rule is added to the stop list.

  • When placed in the stop list for the first time, the rule is disabled for 1 hour.
  • If this happens again, it is placed in the list for 24 hours.
  • All subsequent occurrences place it in the list for 7 days.

The logic is described in the resources: rules, active lists, and dictionaries, which are located in the "SOC_package/System/Rule disabling by condition" directory.

You can customize settings and thresholds in accordance with your requirements.

To enable the automatic suppression option, set the enable setting to "1" in the "SOC_package/Integration/Rule disabling configuration" dictionary.

To disable the automatic suppression option, set the enable setting to "0" in the "SOC_package/Integration/Rule disabling configuration" dictionary.

By default, automatic suppression is enabled and the enable setting is set to "1".

Page top

[Topic 260684]

Sending test events to KUMA

KUMA allows sending test events to the system. Use the option of sending test events to KUMA to test rules, reports, dashboards, and also to check the resource consumption of the collector with different event streams. Events can only be sent to a collector that receives events over TCP.

To send test events, you need:

  • The 'kuma' file running with certain parameters.

    In the following instructions, the file with raw events is named send_test_events.txt as an example. You can use your own file name.

  • A configuration file in which you define the parameters for running the executable file.

    In the following instructions, the configuration file is named config_for_test_events as an example. You can use your own file name.

To send test events:

  1. Get sample events to send to KUMA:
    1. In the KUMA web interface, in the Events section, in the upper right corner, click the gear icon and in the displayed window, on the Event fields columns tab, select the check box for the Raw field. The 'Raw' column is displayed in the Events window.
    2. Search for events.
    3. Export your search results: in the Events window, in the upper right corner, click more and select Export TSV.
    4. Go to the KUMA Task manager section and click the Export events task; in the context menu, select Download.

      The <name of file with exported events>.tsv file is displayed in the Downloads section.

      If you are not collecting raw events, enable collection for a short time by setting the Keep raw event setting of the normalizer to Always. After the collection is completed, restore the previous value of the Keep raw event setting.

    5. Create a text file named send_test_events.txt and copy the contents of the "Raw" field from <name of file with exported events>.tsv to send_test_events.txt.
    6. Save send_test_events.txt.
  2. Create a config_for_test_events configuration file and add the following lines to the file:

    {

    "kind": "tcp",

    "name": "-",

    "connection": {

    "name": "-",

    "kind": "tcp",

    "urls": ["<IP address of the KUMA collector for receiving events over TCP>:<port of the KUMA collector for receiving event over TCP>"]

    }

    }

    Save the config_for_test_events configuration file.

  3. Ensure that network connectivity exists between the server sending events and the server on which the collector is installed.
  4. To send the contents of the test event file to the KUMA collector, run the following command:

    /opt/kaspersky/kuma/kuma tools load --raw --events /home/events/send_test_events.txt --cfg home/events/config_for_test_events --limit 1500 --replay 100000

    Available settings

    Setting

    Description

    --events

    Full path to the file containing "raw" events.

    Required setting. If the full path is not specified, the command does not run.

    --cfg

    Path to the configuration file.

    Required setting. If the full path is not specified, the command does not run.

    --limit

    Stream to be sent to the collector, in events per second (EPS).

    Required setting. If no value is specified, the command does not run.

    --replay

    Number of events to send.

    Required setting. If no value is specified, the command does not run.

As a result of running the command, test events are successfully sent to the KUMA collector. You can verify the arrival of test events by searching for related events in the KUMA web interface.

Page top

[Topic 217894]

Information about third-party code

Information about third-party code is in the LEGAL_NOTICES file located in the /opt/kaspersky/kuma/LEGAL_NOTICES folder.

Page top

[Topic 221480]

Trademark notices

Registered trademarks and service marks are the property of their respective owners.

AMD is a trademark or registered trademark of Advanced Micro Devices, Inc.

Apache and the Apache feather logo are trademarks of The Apache Software Foundation.

Ubuntu, LTS are registered trademarks of Canonical Ltd.

Cisco, IOS are registered trademarks or trademarks of Cisco Systems, Inc. and/or its affiliates in the United States and certain other countries.

Citrix is a trademark of Citrix Systems, Inc. and/or one or more of its subsidiaries, and may be registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Office and in other countries.

The Grafana word mark and the Grafana logo are registered trademarks/service marks or trademarks/service marks of Coding Instinct AB, in the United States and other countries and are used with Coding Instinct's permission. We are not affiliated with, endorsed or sponsored by Coding Instinct, or the Grafana community. We are not affiliated with, endorsed, or sponsored by Coding Instinct, or the Grafana community.

Firebird is a registered trademark of the Firebird Foundation.

FortiGate is a trademark or registered trademark of Fortinet Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

The FreeBSD mark is a registered trademark of The FreeBSD Foundation.

Google and Chrome are trademarks of Google LLC.

Huawei is a trademark of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Intel, Core are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries.

Juniper Networks and JUNOS are trademarks or registered trademarks of Juniper Networks, Inc. in the United States and other countries.

Linux is a trademark of Linus Torvalds in the U.S. and other countries.

OpenAPI is a trademark of The Linux Foundation.

Kubernetes is a registered trademark of the Linux Foundation in the USA and other countries.

Microsoft, Active Directory, Excel, Hyper-V, Windows, and Windows Server are trademarks of the Microsoft group of companies.

CVE is a registered trademark of The MITRE Corporation.

Mozilla and Firefox are trademarks of the Mozilla Foundation in the U.S. and other countries.

OpenVPN is a registered trademark of OpenVPN, Inc.

Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle and/or its affiliates.

Python is a trademark or registered trademark of the Python Software Foundation.

Ansible, CentOS are trademarks or registered trademark of Red Hat, Inc. in the United States and other countries.

Symantec is a trademark or registered trademark of Symantec Corporation or its affiliates in the U.S. and other countries.

ClickHouse is a trademark of YANDEX LLC.

ViPNet is a registered trademark of Infotecs.

Page top

[Topic 90]

Glossary

Aggregation

Combining several messages of the same type from the event source into a single event.

Cluster

A group of servers on which the KUMA program has been installed and that have been clustered together for centralized management using the program's web interface.

Collector

KUMA component that receives messages from event sources, processes them, and transmits them to a storage, correlator, and/or third-party services to identify suspected information security incidents (alerts).

Connector

A KUMA component that ensures transport for receiving data from external systems.

Correlation rule

KUMA resource used to recognize defined sequences of processed events and perform specific actions after recognition.

Dashboard

Component of the KUMA system that performs data visualization.

Enrichment

The conversion of the textual representation of an event using dictionaries, constants, calls to the DNS service, and other tools.

Event

An instance of activity of network devices, application software, information security tools, operating systems, and other devices that can be detected and recorded. For example, events include: successful user logon events, log clear events, anti-virus software disable event.

Filter

The set of conditions the program uses to select events for further processing.

KUMA web interface

A KUMA service that provides a user interface to configure and track KUMA operations.

Network port

A TCP and UDP protocol setting that defines the destination of IP-format data packets that are transmitted to a host over a network and allows various programs running on the same host to receive the data independently of each other. Each program processes the data sent to a specific port (sometimes it is said that the program listens to this port number).

It's standard practice to assign standard port numbers to certain common network protocols (for example, web servers usually receive data over HTTP on TCP port 80), although in general a program can use any protocol on any port. Possible values: from 1 to 65,535.

Normalization

A process that formats data received from an event in accordance with the fields of the KUMA event data model. During normalization, the data may be modified in accordance with certain rules (for example, changing upper case characters to lower case, replacing certain sequences of characters with others, etc.).

Normalizer

System component responsible for processing "raw" events from event sources. One normalizer processes events from one device or software of one specific version.

Parsing

The process of organizing data and converting incoming events into KUMA format.

Raw event

An event that has not passed the normalization stage in KUMA.

Report

KUMA resource that is used to generate a dataset based on user-defined filter criteria.

Role

A set of access privileges established to grant the KUMA web interface user the authority to perform tasks.

SELinux (Security-Enhanced Linux)

A system for controlling process access to operating system resources based on the use of security policies.

SIEM

Security Information and Event Management system. A solution for managing information and events in a company's security system.

STARTTLS

Text exchange protocol enhancement that lets you create an encrypted connection (TLS or SSL) directly over an ordinary TCP connection instead of opening a separate port for the encrypted connection.

Tenant

A single organization or a branch of an organization to which the KUMA solution is provided.

UserPrincipalName

UserPrincipalName (UPN)—user name in email address format, such as username@domain.com.

The UPN must match the actual email address of the user. In this example, username is the user name in the Active Directory domain (user logon name), and domain.com is the UPN suffix. They are separated by the @ character. The DNS name of the Active Directory domain is used as the default UPN suffix in Active Directory.

Page top